CS1G/H CPU__H Programmable Controllers Operation Manual CS1GHMnaul

User Manual: CS1GHMnaul

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 818

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Cat. No. W339-E1-17

SYSMAC CS Series
CS1G/H-CPU@@H

Programmable Controllers

OPERATION MANUAL

SYSMAC CS Series
CS1G/H-CPU@@H
Programmable Controllers
Operation Manual
Revised March 2012

Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures
by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this
manual. Always heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.

!DANGER

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.

!WARNING

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.

!Caution

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.

OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also
capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not
it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON
products, often means “word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in
this sense.
The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Controller. “PC” is used, however, in some Programming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller.

Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you
locate different types of information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
1,2,3...

1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.

 OMRON, 1999
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.

Unit Versions of CS/CJ-series CPU Units
Unit Versions

A “unit version” has been introduced to manage CPU Units in the CS/CJ
Series according to differences in functionality accompanying Unit upgrades.
This applies to the CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units.

Notation of Unit Versions
on Products

The unit version is given to the right of the lot number on the nameplate of the
products for which unit versions are being managed, as shown below.
Product nameplate

CS/CJ-series CPU Unit

CS1H-CPU67H
CPU UNIT

Lot No.

Unit version
Example for Unit version 3.0
Lot No. 040715 0000 Ver.3.0
OMRON Corporation

MADE IN JAPAN

• CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units manufactured on or before November 4, 2003 do not have a unit version given on the CPU Unit (i.e., the
location for the unit version shown above is blank).
• The unit version of the CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units, as well as
the CS1D CPU Units for Single-CPU Systems, begins at version 2.0.
• The unit version of the CS1D CPU Units for Duplex-CPU Systems, begins
at version 1.1.
• CPU Units for which a unit version is not given are called Pre-Ver. @.@
CPU Units, such as Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units and Pre-Ver. 1.1 CPU Units.
Confirming Unit Versions
with Support Software

CX-Programmer version 4.0 can be used to confirm the unit version using one
of the following two methods.
• Using the PLC Information
• Using the Unit Manufacturing Information (This method can be used for
Special I/O Units and CPU Bus Units as well.)

Note CX-Programmer version 3.3 or lower cannot be used to confirm unit versions.
PLC Information
• If you know the device type and CPU type, select them in the Change
PLC Dialog Box, go online, and select PLC - Edit - Information from the
menus.
• If you don't know the device type and CPU type, but are connected
directly to the CPU Unit on a serial line, select PLC - Auto Online to go
online, and then select PLC - Edit - Information from the menus.
In either case, the following PLC Information Dialog Box will be displayed.

Unit version

Use the above display to confirm the unit version of the CPU Unit.
Unit Manufacturing Information
In the IO Table Window, right-click and select Unit Manufacturing information - CPU Unit.

The following Unit Manufacturing information Dialog Box will be displayed.

vii

Unit version

Use the above display to confirm the unit version of the CPU Unit connected
online.
Using the Unit Version
Labels

The following unit version labels are provided with the CPU Unit.

These labels can be attached to the front of previous CPU Units to differentiate between CPU Units of different unit versions.

viii

Unit Version Notation
Product nameplate

In this manual, the unit version of a CPU Unit is given as shown in the following table.

CPU Units on which no unit version is
given

Lot No. XXXXXX XXXX
OMRON Corporation

Units on which a version is given
(Ver. @.@)

Lot No. XXXXXX XXXX

Ver. @ .@

MADE IN JAPAN

Meaning
Designating individual
Pre-Ver. 2.0 CS1-H CPU Units
CPU Units (e.g., the
CS1H-CPU67H)
Pre-Ver. 2.0 CS1-H CPU Units
Designating groups of
CPU Units (e.g., the
CS1-H CPU Units)
Designating an entire
Pre-Ver. 2.0 CS-series CPU Units
series of CPU Units
(e.g., the CS-series CPU
Units)

CS1H-CPU67H CPU Unit Ver. @.@

CS1-H CPU Units Ver. @.@

CS-series CPU Units Ver. @.@

Unit Versions
CS Series
Units
CS1-H CPU Units

Models
CS1@-CPU@@H

CS1D CPU Units

Duplex-CPU Systems
CS1D-CPU@@H

Unit version
Unit version 4.0
Unit version 3.0
Unit version 2.0
Pre-Ver. 2.0
Unit version 1.2
Unit version 1.1
Pre-Ver. 1.1
Unit version 2.0

Single-CPU Systems
CS1D-CPU@@S
CS1@-CPU@@
CS1@-CPU@@-V1

CS1 CPU Units
CS1 Version-1 CPU Units

No unit version.
No unit version.

Function Support by Unit Version
• Functions Supported for Unit Version 4.0 or Later
CX-Programmer 7.0 or higher must be used to enable using the functions
added for unit version 4.0.
CX-Programmer version 7.2 can be used to enable using additional functions.
CS1-H CPU Units
Function

Online editing of function blocks

CS1@-CPU@@H
Unit version 4.0 or
Other unit versions
later
OK

---

OK
OK
OK

-------

Note This function cannot be used for simulations on the CXSimulator.
Input-output variables in function blocks
Text strings in function blocks
New application

Number-Text String Conversion Instructions:

instructions

NUM4, NUM8, NUM16, STR4, STR8, and STR16
TEXT FILE WRITE (TWRIT)
OK
The ST language can be used in task programs.
OK with CX-Programmer
version 7.2 or higher
The SFC language can be used in task programs.
OK with CX-Programmer
version 7.2 or higher

-------

User programs that contain functions supported only by CPU Units with unit
version 4.0 or later cannot be used on CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or earlier. An error message will be displayed if an attempt is made to
download programs containing unit version 4.0 functions to a CPU Unit with a
unit version of 3.0 or earlier, and the download will not be possible.
If an object program file (.OBJ) using these functions is transferred to a CPU
Unit with a unit version of 3.0 or earlier, a program error will occur when operation is started or when the unit version 4.0 function is executed, and CPU
Unit operation will stop.

• Functions Supported for Unit Version 3.0 or Later
CX-Programmer 5.0 or higher must be used to enable using the functions
added for unit version 3.0.
CS1-H CPU Units
Function

Function blocks
Serial Gateway (converting FINS commands to CompoWay/F
commands at the built-in serial port)
Comment memory (in internal flash memory)
Expanded simple backup data
New application TXDU(256), RXDU(255) (support no-protocol
instructions
communications with Serial Communications
Units with unit version 1.2 or later)
Model conversion instructions: XFERC(565),
DISTC(566), COLLC(567), MOVBC(568),
BCNTC(621)
Special function block instructions: GETID(286)
Additional
TXD(235) and RXD(236) instructions (support noinstruction func- protocol communications with Serial Communications
tions Boards with unit version 1.2 or later)

CS1@-CPU@@H
Unit version 3.0 or
Other unit versions
later
OK
--OK
--OK
OK
OK

-------

---

OK
OK

-----

User programs that contain functions supported only by CPU Units with unit
version 3.0 or later cannot be used on CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 2.0 or earlier. An error message will be displayed if an attempt is made to
download programs containing unit version 3.0 functions to a CPU Unit with a
unit version of 2.0 or earlier, and the download will not be possible.
If an object program file (.OBJ) using these functions is transferred to a CPU
Unit with a unit version of 2.0 or earlier, a program error will occur when operation is started or when the unit version 3.0 function is executed, and CPU
Unit operation will stop.

• Functions Supported for Unit Version 2.0 or Later
CX-Programmer 4.0 or higher must be used to enable using the functions
added for unit version 2.0.
CS1-H CPU Units
Function

Downloading and Uploading Individual Tasks
Improved Read Protection Using Passwords
Write Protection from FINS Commands Sent to CPU Units
via Networks
Online Network Connections without I/O Tables
Communications through a Maximum of 8 Network Levels
Connecting Online to PLCs via NS-series PTs
Setting First Slot Words
Automatic Transfers at Power ON without a Parameter File
Automatic Detection of I/O Allocation Method for Automatic
Transfer at Power ON
Operation Start/End Times
New Application
MILH, MILR, MILC
Instructions
=DT, <>DT, DT, >=DT
BCMP2
GRY
TPO
DSW, TKY, HKY, MTR, 7SEG
EXPLT, EGATR, ESATR, ECHRD,
ECHWR
Reading/Writing CPU Bus Units with
IORD/IOWR
PRV2

CS1-H CPU Units
(CS1@-CPU@@H)
Unit version 2.0 or
Other unit versions
later
OK
--OK
--OK

---

OK
OK
OK
OK for up to 64 groups
OK
---

----OK from lot number 030201
OK for up to 8 groups
-----

OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK

--------OK from lot number 030201
-------

OK from lot number 030418

---

User programs that contain functions supported only by CPU Units with unit
version 2.0 or later cannot be used on CS/CJ-series Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units.
An error message will be displayed if an attempt is made to download programs containing unit version s.0 functions to a Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Unit, and
the download will not be possible.
If an object program file (.OBJ) using these functions is transferred to a PreVer. 2.0 CPU Unit, a program error will occur when operation is started or
when the unit version 2.0 function is executed, and CPU Unit operation will
stop.

xii

Unit Versions and Programming Devices
The following tables show the relationship between unit versions and CX-Programmer versions.
Unit Versions and Programming Devices
CPU Unit

Functions

CS/CJ-series unit
Ver. 4.0

Functions
Using new functions
added for unit
version 4.0
Not using new functions
CS/CJ-series unit Functions
Using new functions
Ver. 3.0
added for unit Not using new funcversion 3.0
tions
CS/CJ-series unit Functions
Using new functions
Ver. 2.0
added for unit Not using new funcversion 2.0
tions
Using new functions
CS1D CPU Units Functions
for Single-CPU
added for unit Not using new funcSystems, unit Ver. version 2.0
tions
2.0
Using function blocks
CS1D CPU Units Functions
for Duplex-CPU
added for unit Not using function
Systems, unit
version 1.1
blocks
Ver.1.

Note

CX-Programmer
Ver. 3.3 Ver. 4.0 Ver. 5.0 Ver. 7.0
or lower
Ver. 6.0 or higher
------OK (See
note 2.)
OK
OK
OK
OK

Programming
Ver. 7.2
or higher Console
OK (See
note 2.)
OK

--OK

OK
OK

--OK

OK
OK

---

--OK

OK
OK

No
restrictions

1. As shown above, there is no need to upgrade to CX-Programmer version
as long as the functions added for unit versions are not used.
2. CX-Programmer version 7.0 or higher is required to use the upgraded
functions for CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 4.0. CX-Programmer version 7.2 can be used to enable using additional functions.

Device Type Setting

Series
CS Series

The unit version does not affect the setting made for the device type on the
CX-Programmer. Select the device type as shown in the following table
regardless of the unit version of the CPU Unit.
CPU Unit group

CS1-H CPU Units
CS1D CPU Units for Duplex-CPU Systems
CS1D CPU Units for Single-CPU Systems

CPU Unit model
CS1G-CPU@@H
CS1H-CPU@@H
CS1D-CPU@@H
CS1D-CPU@@S

Device type setting on
CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 or higher
CS1G-H
CS1H-H
CS1D-H (or CS1H-H)
CS1D-S

xiii

Troubleshooting Problems with Unit Versions on the CX-Programmer
Problem

Cause
An attempt was made to download a program containing
instructions supported only by
later unit versions or a CPU Unit
to a previous unit version.

Solution
Check the program or change
to a CPU Unit with a later unit
version.

After the above message is displayed, a compiling
error will be displayed on the Compile Tab Page in the
Output Window.
An attempt was to download a
Check the settings in the PLC
PLC Setup containing settings
Setup or change to a CPU Unit
with a later unit version.
supported only by later unit versions or a CPU Unit to a previous
unit version.
“????” is displayed in a program transferred from the
PLC to the CX-Programmer.

xiv

An attempt was made to upload a
program containing instructions
supported only by higher versions
of CX-Programmer to a lower version.

New instructions cannot be
uploaded to lower versions of
CX-Programmer. Use a higher
version of CX-Programmer.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
1
2
3
4
5
6

Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxviii
xxviii
xxviii
xxx
xxxi
xxxvi

SECTION 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS-series Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS1-H CPU Unit Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 4.0 Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS-series Function Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS1-H Functions Arranged by Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparison of CS-series PLCs and C200HX/HG/HE Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2
3
13
22
23
30
52
60
62
68

SECTION 2
Specifications and System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Unit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expanded System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit Current Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Table Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

70
81
87
105
119
137
148
149

SECTION 3
Nomenclature, Functions, and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9

CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B7A Interface Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Timer Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

156
163
172
183
197
207
225
231
256

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 4
Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
4-1
4-2

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

262
264

SECTION 5
Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
5-1
5-2
5-3

Fail-safe Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

278
280
299

SECTION 6
DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
6-1

DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

326

SECTION 7
PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
7-1
7-2

PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

330
357

SECTION 8
I/O Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6

I/O Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Allocation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allocating First Words to Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allocating First Words to Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detailed Information on I/O Table Creation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

370
375
382
385
388
388

SECTION 9
Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-9
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-14

xvi

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions in Using C200H Special I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CIO Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C200H DeviceNet Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS-series DeviceNet Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Link Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Link Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Bus Unit Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inner Board Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special I/O Unit Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSMAC BUS Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Terminal Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

394
395
404
405
411
412
414
416
417
418
419
421
422
423

TABLE OF CONTENTS
9-15
9-16
9-17
9-18
9-19
9-20
9-21
9-22
9-23
9-24
9-25
9-26
9-27

Holding Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TR (Temporary Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counter Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Memory (DM) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended Data Memory (EM) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Condition Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

424
425
448
449
450
451
453
455
461
463
463
466
467

SECTION 10
CPU Unit Operation and the Cycle Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
10-1
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-5

CPU Unit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Unit Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computing the Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

473
478
480
485
503

SECTION 11
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
11-1 Error Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2 Error Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3 Troubleshooting Racks and Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

530
531
553

SECTION 12
Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
12-1 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-2 Replacing User-serviceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

558
560

Appendices
A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

569

Auxiliary Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

691

Memory Map of PLC Memory Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

727

PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

729

Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

741

Restrictions in Using C200H Special I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

749

CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

755

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
xvii

xviii

About this Manual:
This manual describes the installation and operation of the CS-series Programmable Controllers
(PLCs) and includes the sections described on the following page. The CS Series and CJ Series are
subdivided as shown in the following figure.
CS Series

CJ Series

NSJ Series

CS1-H CPU Units

CJ2 CPU Units

NSJ Controllers

CJ2H-CPU@@-@@@

CS1H-CPU@@H
CS1G-CPU@@H

CS1D CPU Units
CS1D CPU Units for
Duplex Systems
CS1D-CPU@@H

CJ1-H CPU Units
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R
CJ1H-CPU@@H
CJ1G-CPU@@H
CJ1G -CPU@@P
(Loop-control CPU Units)

CS1D CPU Units for
Simplex Systems

NSJ5-TQ@@(B)-G5D
NSJ5-SQ@@(B)-G5D
NSJ8-TV@@(B)-G5D
NSJ10-TV@@(B)-G5D
NSJ12-TS@@(B)-G5D

NSJ Controllers
NSJ5-TQ@@(B)-M3D
NSJ5-SQ@@(B)-M3D
NSJ8-TV@@(B)-M3D

CS1D-CPU@@S
CJ1M CPU Units
CS1D Process-control CPU Units

CJ1M-CPU@@

CS1D-CPU@@P
CJ1 CPU Units
CS-series Basic I/O Units
CJ1G-CPU@@
CS-series Special I/O Units
CS-series CPU Bus Units
CS-series Power Supply Units
Note: A special Power Supply Unit
must be used for CS1D CPU
Units.

CJ-series Basic I/O Units

NSJ-series Expansion Units

CJ-series Special I/O Units
CJ-series CPU Bus Units
CJ-series Power Supply Units

Please read this manual and all related manuals listed in the following table and be sure you understand information provided before attempting to install or use CS1G/H-CPU@@H CPU Units in a PLC
System.
Name
SYSMAC CS Series
CS1G/H-CPU@@H, CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1
Programmable Controllers Operation Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series
CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1, CS1G/H-CPU@@H, CS1D-CPU@@H,
CS1D-CPU@@S, CJ1H-CPU@@H-R, CJ1G-CPU@@, CJ1MCPU@@, CJ1G-CPU@@P, CJ1G/H-CPU@@H
Programmable Controllers Programming Manual

Cat. No.
Contents
W339
Provides an outlines of and describes the
design, installation, maintenance, and other
basic operations for the CS-series PLCs. (This
manual)
W394
This manual describes programming and
other methods to use the functions of the CS/
CJ-series PLCs.

xix

Name
SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series
CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP, CJ2H-CPU6@, CJ2M-CPU@@,
CS1G/H-CPU@@H, CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1, CS1D-CPU@@H,
CS1D-CPU@@S, CJ1H-CPU@@H-R, CJ1G/H-CPU@@H,
CJ1G-CPU@@P, CJ1M-CPU@@, CJ1G-CPU@@,
NSJ@-@@@@(B)-G5D, NSJ@-@@@@(B)-M3D
Programmable Controllers Instructions Reference Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series
CQM1H-PRO01-E, C200H-PRO27-E, CQM1-PRO01-E
Programming Consoles Operation Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series
CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1, CS1G/H-CPU@@H,
CS1D-CPU@@H, CS1D-CPU@@S, CJ1H-CPU@@H-R,
CJ1G-CPU@@, CJ1M-CPU@@, CJ1G-CPU@@P,
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H, CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP, CJ2H-CPU6@,
CJ2M-CPU@@, CS1W-SCU@@-V1, CS1W-SCB@@-V1,
CJ1W-SCU@@-V1, CP1H-X@@@@-@, CP1H-XA@@@@-@,
CP1H-Y@@@@-@, CP1L-M/L@@@-@, CP1E-E@@D@-@,
CP1E-N@@D@-@, NSJ@-@@@@(B)-G5D,
NSJ@-@@@@(B)-M3D
Communications Commands Reference Manual
SYSMAC CS Series
CS1D-CPU@@H CPU Units
CS1D-CPU@@S CPU Units
CS1D-DPL01/02D Duplex Unit
CS1D-PA/PD@@@ Power Supply Unit
Duplex System Operation Manual
CXONE-AL@@C-V4/AL@@D-V4
CX-Programmer Operation Manual

Cat. No.

Provides detailed descriptions of the instructions. When programming, use this manual
together with the manuals for your CPU Unit.

W341

Provides information on how to program and
operate CS/CJ-series PLCs using a Programming Console.
Describes the C-series (Host Link) and FINS
communications commands used with CS/CJseries PLCs.

W342

W405

Provides an outline of and describes the
design, installation, maintenance, and other
basic operations for a Duplex System based
on CS1D CPU Units.

W446

Provides information on how to use the CXProgrammer for all functionality except for
function blocks.
Explains how to use the CX-Programmer software’s function block and structured text functions. For explanations of other shared CXProgrammer functions, refer to the CX-Programmer Operation Manual (W446).
Describes the use of Serial Communications
Unit and Boards to perform serial communications with external devices, including the
usage of
standard system protocols for OMRON products.
Describes the use of the CX-Protocol to create protocol macros as communications
sequences to communicate with external
devices.
Describes operating procedures for the CXIntegrator Network Configuration Tool for CS-,
CJ-, CP-, and NSJ-series Controllers.
Installation and overview of CX-One FA
Integrated Tool Package.

CXONE-AL@@C-V4/CXONE-AL@@D-V4
CX-Programmer Operation Manual
Function Blocks/Structured Text

W447

SYSMAC CS/CJ Series
CS1W-SCB@@-V1, CS1W-SCU@@-V1, CJ1W-SCU@@-V1,
CJ1W-SCU@2
Serial Communications Boards/Units Operation Manual

W336

CXONE-AL@@C-V4/AL@@D-V4
CX-Protocol Operation Manual

W344

CXONE-AL@@C-V4/AL@@D-V4
CX-Integrator Operation Manual

W464

CXONE-AL@@C-V4/AL@@D-V4, CXONE-LT@@C-V4
CX-One Setup Manual

W463

Contents

W474

This manual contains the following sections.
Section 1 introduces the special features and functions of the CS-series PLCs and describes the differences between these PLCs and other PLCs.
Section 2 provides tables of standard models, Unit specifications, system configurations, and a comparison between different Units.
Section 3 provides the names of components and their functions for various Units. The Unit dimensions are also provided.
Section 4 outlines the steps required to assemble and operate a CS-series PLC system.
Section 5 describes how to install a PLC System, including mounting the various Units and wiring the
System. Be sure to follow the instructions carefully. Improper installation can cause the PLC to malfunction, resulting in very dangerous situations.
Section 6 describes the settings of the DIP switch and how they affect operation.
Section 7 describes the settings in the PLC Setup and how they are used to control CPU Unit operation.
Section 8 describes I/O allocations to Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units, and data
exchange with Units.
Section 9 describes the structure and functions of the I/O Memory Areas and Parameter Areas.
Section 10 describes the internal operation of the CPU Unit and the cycle used to perform internal
processing.
Section 11 provides information on hardware and software errors that occur during PLC operation.
Section 12 provides inspection and maintenance information.
The Appendices provide Unit specifications, current/power consumptions, Auxiliary Area words and
bits, a comparison of CS-series and previous PLCs, internal I/O addresses, and PLC Setup settings.

!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section
in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and
related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.

xxi

xxii

Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.

Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.

LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.

xxiii

Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED
FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.

PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.

xxiv

Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.

PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.

ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.

xxv

xxvi

PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the CS-series Programmable Controllers (PLCs) and related devices.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of Programmable
Controllers. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or
operate a PLC system.
1
2
3
4
5
6

Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
Applicable Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxviii
xxviii
xxviii
xxx
xxxi
xxxvi
xxxvi
xxxvi
xxxvi
xxxvi

xxvii

Intended Audience

Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.

General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the
manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems,
aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used
improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide
the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation.

!WARNING It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that
can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PLC System to the above-mentioned applications.

Safety Precautions
!WARNING The CPU Unit refreshes I/O even when the program is stopped (i.e., even in
PROGRAM mode). Confirm safety thoroughly in advance before changing the
status of any part of memory allocated to I/O Units, Special I/O Units, or CPU
Bus Units. Any changes to the data allocated to any Unit may result in unexpected operation of the loads connected to the Unit. Any of the following operation may result in changes to memory status.
• Transferring I/O memory data to the CPU Unit from a Programming
Device.
• Changing present values in memory from a Programming Device.
• Force-setting/-resetting bits from a Programming Device.
• Transferring I/O memory files from a Memory Card or EM file memory to
the CPU Unit.
• Transferring I/O memory from a host computer or from another PLC on a
network.

!WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing
so may result in electric shock.

xxviii

Safety Precautions

!WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.

!WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do
so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.

!WARNING Do not touch the Power Supply Unit while power is being supplied or immediately after power has been turned OFF. Doing so may result in electric shock.

!WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable
Controller), including the following items, to ensure safety in the system if an
abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PLC or another external factor
affecting the PLC operation. Not doing so may result in serious accidents.
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
• The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects
any error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed.
Unexpected operation, however, may still occur for errors in the I/O control section, errors in I/O memory, and other errors that cannot be
detected by the self-diagnosis function. As a countermeasure for all such
errors, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the
system.
• The PLC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of
the output relays or destruction of the output transistors. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided
to ensure safety in the system.
• When the 24-V DC output (service power supply to the PLC) is overloaded or short-circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs
being turned OFF. As a countermeasure for such problems, external
safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
!Caution Confirm safety before transferring data files stored in the file memory (Memory Card or EM file memory) to the I/O area (CIO) of the CPU Unit using a
peripheral tool. Otherwise, the devices connected to the output unit may malfunction regardless of the operation mode of the CPU Unit.
!Caution Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines,
momentary power interruptions, or other causes. Serious accidents may
result from abnormal operation if proper measures are not provided.
!Caution Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be
caused by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be
readable.

xxix

Operating Environment Precautions

!Caution A CS1-H/CJ1-H/CJ1M/CS1D CPU Unit automatically back up the user program and parameter data to flash memory when these are written to the CPU
Unit. I/O memory (including the DM, EM, and HR Areas), however, is not written to flash memory. The DM, EM, and HR Areas can be held during power
interruptions with a battery. If there is a battery error, the contents of these
areas may not be accurate after a power interruption. If the contents of the
DM, EM, and HR Areas are used to control external outputs, prevent inappropriate outputs from being made whenever the Battery Error Flag (A40204) is
ON. Areas such as the DM, EM, and HR Areas, the contents of which can be
held during power interrupts, is backed up by a battery. If a battery error
occurs, the contents of the areas that are set to be held may not be accurate
even though a memory error will not occur to stop operation. If necessary for
the safety of the system, take appropriate measures in the ladder program
whenever the Battery Error Flag (A40204) turns ON, such as resetting the
data in these areas.
!Caution Confirm safety at the destination node before transferring a program to
another node or changing contents of the I/O memory area. Doing either of
these without confirming safety may result in injury.
!Caution Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the
torque specified in the operation manual. The loose screws may result in
burning or malfunction.
!Caution Be careful when connecting personal computers or other peripheral devices
to a PLC to which is mounted a non-insulated Unit (CS1W-CLK1@(-V1),
CS1W-CLK5@(-V1), or CS1W-ETN01) connected to an external power supply. A short-circuit will be created if the 24 V side of the external power supply
is grounded and the 0 V side of the peripheral device is grounded. When connecting a peripheral device to this type of PLC, either ground the 0 V side of
the external power supply or do not ground the external power supply at all.

Operating Environment Precautions
!Caution Do not operate the control system in the following locations:
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified
in the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
!Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in
the following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.

xxx

Application Precautions
• Locations close to power supplies.

!Caution The operating environment of the PLC System can have a large effect on the
longevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can
lead to malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PLC
System. Be sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installation and remains within the specified conditions during the life
of the system.

Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the PLC System.
• You must use the CX-Programmer (programming software that runs on
Windows) if you need to program more than one task. A Programming
Console can be used to program only one cyclic task plus interrupt tasks.
A Programming Console can, however, be used to edit multitask programs originally created with the CX-Programmer.
• There are restrictions in the areas and addresses that can be accessed in
I/O memory of the CS-series CPU Units when using the C200H Special
I/O Units in combination with the following functions. (Refer to Appendix F
Restrictions in Using C200H Special I/O Units for details.)
• There are restrictions in data transfer with the CPU Unit when programming transfers inside an ASCII Unit using the PLC READ, PLC
WRITE, and similar commands.
• There are restrictions in data transfer with the CPU Unit for allocated
bits and DM area specifications (areas and addresses for source and
destination specifications).
• The DeviceNet output area for a C200HW-DRM21-V1 DeviceNet Master Unit (CIO 0050 to CIO 0099) overlaps with the I/O bit area (CIO
0000 to CIO 0319). Do not use automatic allocations for I/O in any system where allocations to the DeviceNet system will overlap with allocations to I/O Units. Instead, use a Programming Device or the CXProgrammer to manually allocate I/O for the DeviceNet devices, being
sure that the same words and bits are not allocated more than once,
and transfer the resulting I/O table to the CPU Unit. If DeviceNet communications are attempted when the same bits are allocated to both
DeviceNet devices and I/O Units (which can occur even if automatic allocation is used), the DeviceNet devices and I/O Units may both exhibit
faulty operation.
• Special bits and flags for PLC Link Units (CIO 0247 to CIO 0250) overlap with the I/O bit area (CIO 0000 to CIO 0319). Do not use automatic
allocations for I/O in any system where allocations to the I/O Units will
overlap with allocations to I/O Units. Instead, use a Programming Device or the CX-Programmer to manually allocate I/O to I/O Units, being
sure that the special bits and flags for PLC Link Units are not used, and
transfer the resulting I/O table to the CPU Unit. If operation is attempted when the special bits and flags for PLC Link Units are also allocated
to I/O Units (which can occur even if automatic allocation is used), the
PLC Link Units and I/O Units may both exhibit faulty operation.

!WARNING Always heed these precautions. Failure to abide by the following precautions
could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury.

xxxi

Application Precautions

• Always connect to a ground of 100 Ω or less when installing the Units. Not
connecting to a ground of 100 Ω or less may result in electric shock.
• A ground of 100 Ω or less must be installed when shorting the GR and LG
terminals on the Power Supply Unit.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before attempting any of
the following. Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction
or electric shock.
• Mounting or dismounting Power Supply Units, I/O Units, CPU Units, Inner Boards, or any other Units.
• Assembling the Units.
• Setting DIP switches or rotary switches.
• Connecting cables or wiring the system.
• Connecting or disconnecting the connectors.
!Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of
the PLC or the system, or could damage the PLC or PLC Units. Always heed
these precautions.
• The user program and parameter area data in CS1-H CPU Units is
backed up in the built-in flash memory. The BKUP indicator will light on
the front of the CPU Unit when the backup operation is in progress. Do
not turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit when the BKUP indicator
is lit. The data will not be backed up if power is turned OFF.
• If, when using a CS1-H CPU Unit, the PLC Setup is set to specify using
the mode set on the Programming Console and a Programming Console
is not connected, the CPU Unit will start in RUN mode. This is the default
setting in the PLC Setup.
• When creating an AUTOEXEC.IOM file from a Programming Device (a
Programming Console or the CX-Programmer) to automatically transfer
data at startup, set the first write address to D20000 and be sure that the
size of data written does not exceed the size of the DM Area. When the
data file is read from the Memory Card at startup, data will be written in
the CPU Unit starting at D20000 even if another address was set when
the AUTOEXEC.IOM file was created. Also, if the DM Area is exceeded
(which is possible when the CX-Programmer is used), the remaining data
will be written to the EM Area. Refer to information on file operations in
the CS/CJ Series Programming Manual for details.
• Always turn ON power to the PLC before turning ON power to the control
system. If the PLC power supply is turned ON after the control power supply, temporary errors may result in control system signals because the
output terminals on DC Output Units and other Units will momentarily turn
ON when power is turned ON to the PLC.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event that outputs from Output Units remain ON as a result of internal circuit failures, which can occur in relays, transistors, and other elements.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal
lines, momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
• Interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable Controller) must be provided by the
customer.

xxxii

Application Precautions

5
• Do not turn OFF the power supply to the PLC when data is being transferred. In particular, do not turn OFF the power supply when reading or
writing a Memory Card. Also, do not remove the Memory Card when the
BUSY indicator is lit. To remove a Memory Card, first press the memory
card power supply switch and then wait for the BUSY indicator to go out
before removing the Memory Card.
• If the I/O Hold Bit is turned ON, the outputs from the PLC will not be
turned OFF and will maintain their previous status when the PLC is
switched from RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode. Make sure
that the external loads will not produce dangerous conditions when this
occurs. (When operation stops for a fatal error, including those produced
with the FALS(007) instruction, all outputs from Output Unit will be turned
OFF and only the internal output status will be maintained.)
• The contents of the DM, EM, and HR Areas in the CPU Unit are backed
up by a Battery. If the Battery voltage drops, this data may be lost. Provide
countermeasures in the program using the Battery Error Flag (A40204) to
re-initialize data or take other actions if the Battery voltage drops.
• When supplying power at 200 to 240 V AC, always remove the metal
jumper from the voltage selector terminals on the Power Supply Unit
(except for Power Supply Units with wide-range specifications). The product will be destroyed and must be replaced if 200 to 240 V AC is supplied
while the metal jumper is attached. Refer to 5-3 Wiring for details.
• Always use the power supply voltages specified in the operation manuals.
An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning.
• Do not apply a force greater than 100 N on the terminal block when tightening the terminals.
• Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the
rated voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places
where the power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result
in malfunction.
• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-circuiting may result in burning.
• Install Units as far as possible away from devices that generate strong,
high-frequency noise.
• Do not apply voltages to the Input Units in excess of the rated input voltage. Excess voltages may result in burning.
• Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the Output Units in excess of
the maximum switching capacity. Excess voltage or loads may result in
burning.
• Separate the line ground terminal (LG) from the functional ground terminal (GR) on the Power Supply Unit before performing withstand voltage
tests or insulation resistance tests. Not doing so may result in burning.
• Change the applied voltage gradually using the adjuster on the Tester. If
full dielectric strength voltage is applied or turned OFF using the switch on
the Tester, the generated impulse voltage may damage the Power Supply
Unit.
• Install the Units properly as specified in the operation manuals. Improper
installation of the Units may result in malfunction.
• Be sure that all the Backplane mounting screws, terminal block screws,
and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque specified in the
relevant manuals. Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction.

xxxiii

Application Precautions

• Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring. Removing the label may
result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit.
• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
• Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Connection of bare stranded wires may result in
burning.
• Wire all connections correctly.
• Do not drop the product or subject it to excessive vibration or shock.
• Double-check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power
supply. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
• Mount Units only after checking terminal blocks and connectors completely.
• Be sure that the terminal blocks, Memory Units, expansion cables, and
other items with locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper
locking may result in malfunction.
• Check switch settings, the contents of the DM Area, and other preparations before starting operation. Starting operation without the proper settings or data may result in an unexpected operation.
• Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on
the Unit. Not checking the program may result in an unexpected operation.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting
any of the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PLC (including the setting of the
startup operating mode).
• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
• Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit the contents of the DM Area, HR Area, and other data required for resuming
operation. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit.
Doing either of these may break the cables.
• Do not place objects on top of the cables or other wiring lines. Doing so
may break the cables.
• Do not use commercially available RS-232C personal computer cables.
Always use the special cables listed in this manual or make cables
according to manual specifications. Using commercially available cables
may damage the external devices or CPU Unit.
• Never connect pin 6 (5-V power supply) on the RS-232C port on the CPU
Unit to any device other than an NT-AL001, CJ1W-CIF11 Link Adapter, or
NV3W-M@20L Programmable Terminal. The external device or the CPU
Unit may be damaged.
• When replacing parts, be sure to confirm that the rating of a new part is
correct. Not doing so may result in malfunction or burning.
• Before touching a Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in
order to discharge any static build-up. Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage.
• When transporting or storing circuit boards, cover them in antistatic material to protect them from static electricity and maintain the proper storage
temperature.

xxxiv

Application Precautions

5
• Do not touch circuit boards or the components mounted to them with your
bare hands. There are sharp leads and other parts on the boards that
may cause injury if handled improperly.
• Do not short the battery terminals or charge, disassemble, heat, or incinerate the battery. Do not subject the battery to strong shocks. Doing any
of these may result in leakage, rupture, heat generation, or ignition of the
battery. Dispose of any battery that has been dropped on the floor or otherwise subjected to excessive shock. Batteries that have been subjected
to shock may leak if they are used.
• UL standards required that batteries be replaced only by experienced
technicians. Do not allow unqualified persons to replace batteries.
• Dispose of the product and batteries according to local ordinances as
they apply.
Have qualified specialists properly dispose of used batteries as industrial
waste.

• Unexpected operation may result if inappropriate data link tables or
parameters are set. Even if appropriate data link tables and parameters
have been set, confirm that the controlled system will not be adversely
affected before starting or stopping data links.
• CPU Bus Units will be restarted when routing tables are transferred from
a Programming Device to the CPU Unit. Restarting these Units is required
to read and enable the new routing tables. Confirm that the system will
not be adversely affected before allowing the CPU Bus Units to be reset.
• When wiring crossovers between terminals, the total current for both terminals will flow in the line. Check the current capacities of all wires before
wiring crossovers.
• The following precautions apply to Power Supply Units with Replacement
Notification.
• When the LED display on the front of the Power Supply Unit starts to
alternately display “0.0” and “A02” or the alarm output automatically
turns OFF, replace the Power Supply Unit within 6 months.
• Separate the alarm output cables from power lines and high-voltage
lines.
• Do not apply a voltage or connect a load to the alarm output that exceeds the rated voltage or load.
• Maintain an ambient storage temperature of −20 to 30°C and humidity
of 25% to 70% when storing the product for longer than 3 months to
keep the replacement notification function in optimum working condition.
• Always use the standard installation method. A nonstandard installation will decrease heat dissipation, delay the replacement notification
signal, and may degrade or damage the internal elements.
• Design the system so that the power supply capacity of the Power Supply
Unit is not exceeded.
• Do not touch the terminals on the Power Supply Unit immediately after
turning OFF the power supply. Electric shock may occur due to the residual voltage.

xxxv

Conformance to EC Directives

6-1

Applicable Directives
• EMC Directives
• Low Voltage Directive

6-2

Concepts
EMC Directives
OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related
EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the
overall machine. The actual products have been checked for conformity to
EMC standards (see the following note). Whether the products conform to the
standards in the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by
the customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of
the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed.
The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices
and the overall machine conform to EMC standards.
Note Applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows:
EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility): EN61131-2 or EN61000-6-2
EMI (Electromagnetic Interference):
EN61000-6-4
(Radiated emission: 10-m regulations)
Low Voltage Directive
Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 V AC and 75
to 1,500 V DC meet the required safety standards for the PLC (EN61131-2).

6-3

Conformance to EC Directives
The CS-series PLCs comply with EC Directives. To ensure that the machine
or device in which the CS-series PLC is used complies with EC Directives, the
PLC must be installed as follows:
1,2,3...

1. The CS-series PLC must be installed within a control panel.
2. You must use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power
supplies used for the communications power supply and I/O power supplies.
3. CS-series PLCs complying with EC Directives also conform to the Common Emission Standard (EN61000-6-4). Radiated emission characteristics (10-m regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the
control panel used, other devices connected to the control panel, wiring,
and other conditions. You must therefore confirm that the overall machine
or equipment complies with EC Directives.

6-4

Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods
The CS-series PLCs conforms to the Common Emission Standards
(EN61000-6-4) of the EMC Directives. However, noise generated by relay output switching may not satisfy these Standards. In such a case, a noise filter
must be connected to the load side or other appropriate countermeasures
must be provided external to the PLC.
Countermeasures taken to satisfy the standards vary depending on the
devices on the load side, wiring, configuration of machines, etc. Following are
examples of countermeasures for reducing the generated noise.

xxxvi

Conformance to EC Directives
Countermeasures

(Refer to EN61000-6-4 for more details.)
Countermeasures are not required if the frequency of load switching for the
whole system with the PLC included is less than 5 times per minute.
Countermeasures are required if the frequency of load switching for the whole
system with the PLC included is more than 5 times per minute.

Countermeasure Examples
When switching an inductive load, connect an surge protector, diodes, etc., in
parallel with the load or contact as shown below.
Circuit

Power
supply

Inductive
load

CR method

Power
supply

Inductive
load

Varistor method

Power
supply

Yes

Inductive
load

Diode method

Current
Characteristic
AC DC
Yes Yes If the load is a relay or solenoid, there is a
time lag between the moment the circuit is
opened and the moment the load is reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V, insert
the surge protector in parallel with the
load. If the supply voltage is 100 to 200 V,
insert the surge protector between the
contacts.

Required element

The capacitance of the capacitor must
be 1 to 0.5 µF per contact current of
1 A and resistance of the resistor must
be 0.5 to 1 Ω per contact voltage of
1 V. These values, however, vary with
the load and the characteristics of the
relay. Decide these values from experiments, and take into consideration
that the capacitance suppresses
spark discharge when the contacts
are separated and the resistance limits the current that flows into the load
when the circuit is closed again.
The dielectric strength of the capacitor
must be 200 to 300 V. If the circuit is
an AC circuit, use a capacitor with no
polarity.
The diode connected in parallel with the
The reversed dielectric strength value
load changes energy accumulated by the of the diode must be at least 10 times
as large as the circuit voltage value.
coil into a current, which then flows into
the coil so that the current will be conThe forward current of the diode must
verted into Joule heat by the resistance of be the same as or larger than the load
the inductive load.
current.
This time lag, between the moment the cir- The reversed dielectric strength value
cuit is opened and the moment the load is of the diode may be two to three times
larger than the supply voltage if the
reset, caused by this method is longer
than that caused by the CR method.
surge protector is applied to electronic
circuits with low circuit voltages.
The varistor method prevents the imposi- --tion of high voltage between the contacts
by using the constant voltage characteristic of the varistor. There is time lag
between the moment the circuit is opened
and the moment the load is reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V, insert
the varistor in parallel with the load. If the
supply voltage is 100 to 200 V, insert the
varistor between the contacts.

xxxvii

Conformance to EC Directives

When switching a load with a high inrush current such as an incandescent
lamp, suppress the inrush current as shown below.
Countermeasure 1
OUT

Countermeasure 2
R
OUT

R
COM
Providing a dark current of approx.
one-third of the rated value through
an incandescent lamp

xxxviii

COM
Providing a limiting resistor

SECTION 1
Introduction
This section introduces the special features and functions of the CS-series PLCs and describes the differences between these
PLCs and other PLCs.
1-1
1-2

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS-series Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-2 Versatile Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 CS1-H CPU Unit Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-1 High-speed Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-2 High-speed Structured Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-3 Function Block (FB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-4 More Instructions for Specific Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-5 Battery-free Operation with Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-6 Better Compatibility with Other SYSMAC PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-7 Refreshing Timer/Counter PVs in Binary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-8 Features of CS1-H CPU Units Ver. 3.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-9 Changes to CS-series Operating Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-10 Features of CS1-H CPU Units Ver. 2.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4 CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 4.0 Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-1 Online Editing of Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-2 Input-Output Variables in Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-3 Text String Support in Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5 CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-1 Function Blocks (FB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-2 Serial Gateway (Converting FINS to CompoWay/F Via Serial Port). . . . .
1-5-3 Comment Memory (in Internal Flash Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-4 Simple Backup Data Expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-5 Free Running Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-6 New Special Instructions and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-7 Increased Points for SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Communications . . . . .
1-6 CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-1 Downloading and Uploading Individual Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-2 Improved Read Protection Using Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-3 Write Protection from FINS Commands Sent to CPU Units via Networks
1-6-4 Online Network Connections without I/O Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-5 Communications through a Maximum of 8 Network Levels . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-6 Connecting Online to PLCs via NS-series PTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-7 Setting First Slot Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-8 Automatic Transfers at Power ON without a Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-9 Operation Start/End Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-10 New Application Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7 CS-series Function Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7-1 Functions Arranged by Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7-2 Communications Functions (Serial/Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8 CS1-H Functions Arranged by Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-9 Comparison of CS-series PLCs and C200HX/HG/HE Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-10 Checking the Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2
3
3
8
13
13
14
14
15
16
16
16
16
17
18
22
22
22
22
23
24
25
26
26
27
28
28
30
30
31
36
41
43
46
47
49
51
51
52
52
58
60
62
68

Section 1-1

Overview

1-1

Overview
The CS-series PLCs are medium-sized Programmable Controllers that provide improved programming efficiency by dividing the program into tasks. The
CS-series PLCs also feature faster processing, higher capacities, multiple
ports supporting protocol macros, improved seamless communications
across three network levels, and much more, enabling them to flexibly handle
advanced information capabilities as core FA controllers.

Improvements in Basic
Performance
Faster instruction execution
and peripheral servicing
Larger memory capacity
Faster data exchange
between Units and I/O
memory access
Instruction operands can
be specified binary or BCD
Programs from earlier PLCs
are compatible

CS-series PLC

Serial
Communications
Unit

CPU Unit

Memory
Serial
Communications Card
Board

Protocol Macro Function Serves
Multiple Ports
Up to 34 ports can be connected (Serial
Communications Boards + Serial
Communications Units).
Different Protocol Macros can be
allocated to each port.

Programming
Console

Programmable
Terminal or
other device

Generalpurpose
I/O device

Structured Programming
The program is divided into tasks.
Symbols can be used in programming.
The overall performance of the system is
improved by executing only the required
tasks.
Modification and debugging are simplified.
The program arrangement can be changed.
Step control and block programming
instructions can be used.
Comments can be added to make the
program easier to understand.

Remote Programming, Monitoring
and Seamless Links between
Networks
FINS commands allow communications
between nodes in different networks.
Remote programming and monitoring
can be performed.

Personal
computer

Full Complement of Versatile Functions
Memory Card and file processing functions
Simplify programs with specialized instructions such as the table data and text
string processing instructions
Troubleshooting functions
Data tracing function
Minimum (fixed) cycle time function
I/O refreshing method selection
PLC Setup functions
Use Windows tools to create multiple environments in a single personal computer.

Section 1-2

CS-series Features

1-2
1-2-1

CS-series Features
Features

Improvements in Basic Performance
The CS-series PLCs provide higher speed, greater capacity, and more functions in a package as compact as the C200H PLCs.
Faster Cycle Times

For the CS1-H CPU Units, instruction processing times have been reduced to
0.02 µs min. for basic instructions, to 0.06 µs min. for special instructions, and
to 0.8 µs min. for floating-point calculations. The time required for overseeing
(overhead), I/O refreshing, and peripheral servicing has also been reduced
dramatically.

Extra Capacity for High
Value-added Programs

With capacity for 250,000 program steps, up to 448,000 words of Data Memory, and up to 5,120 I/O points, there is plenty of memory for complex programs, intricate interfaces, communications, and data processing.

Binary Operand Settings
Increase Setting Ranges

In earlier PLCs, most instruction operands had to be specified in BCD (0 to
9,999), but in the CS-series PLCs they can be specified in binary (0 to FFFF
hexadecimal or 0 to 65,535 decimal). As an example, the BLOCK TRANSFER
instruction can now transfer data from up to 65,535 words rather than 9,999
words. Also the maximum DM address that can be indirectly addressed is
now D32767 rather than the maximum DM address of D09999 in
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs.

Program Compatibility

Programs from earlier OMRON PLCs (such as the C200H, C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE, and CV Series) can be imported into the CS-series PLCs.

CS-series and C200H
Units Supported

High-density CS-series Units, such as the 96-point I/O Units and 8-point Analog I/O Units (4 inputs and 4 outputs) can be used together with the wide variety of C200H Units (about 90 models) can be used in a CS-series PLC.

CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Racks

I/O Control Units and I/O Interface Units can be used to create systems containing CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks. Up to two series of Longdistance Expansion Racks can be connected, each measuring up to 50 m, for
a total coverage of 100 m. CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks can be
used to create high-speed, low-cost distribution systems without using Communications Units.

Structured Programming
Division of the Program
into Tasks

When the program is divided into tasks that handle separate functions, control
systems, or processes, several programmers can develop these separate
tasks simultaneously.
There can be up to 32 normal (cyclic) tasks and 256 interrupt tasks. There are
four types of interrupts: the Power OFF Interrupt, Scheduled Interrupts, I/O
Interrupts, and External Interrupts (interrupts from Special I/O Units or CPU
Bus Units).

Section 1-2

CS-series Features

Task
Earlier program

Task
Task
Task

When a new program is being created, standard programs can be combined
as tasks to create an entire program.
Standard programs

Program ABD

Program ABC

Using Symbols

Task 1 (A)

Task 2 (B)

Task 3 (C)

Task 3 (D)

Arbitrary symbols (names up to 32 characters) that are independent of I/O terminal allocations can be used in programming. Standard programs created
with symbols are more general and easier to reuse as tasks in different programs.
Symbols specified for bit address:
SW1

Global and Local Symbols
Supported

VALVE

I/O names are handled as symbols which can be defined as global symbols,
which apply to all of the programs in all tasks, or as local symbols, which apply
to just the local task.
When the symbols are defined, you can choose to have the local symbols
allocated to addresses automatically.

Improve Overall System
Response Performance

The response performance of the system can be improved by dividing the
program into a system-management task and tasks used for control and executing only those control tasks that need to be executed.

Simplify Program Modification
• Debugging is more efficient when the job of modifying and debugging the
tasks can be divided among several individuals.
• Program maintenance is easier because only the tasks affected by
changes have to be modified when there are changes (such as changes
in specifications).
• Several consecutive program lines can be modified with online editing.
• The amount the cycle time is extended during online editing has been
reduced.

CS-series Features

Section 1-2

Change Program
Arrangement Easily

When separate tasks have been programmed for different production models,
the task control instructions can be used to switch the program quickly from
production of one model to another.

Step Control and Block
Programming

The step control and block programming instructions can be used to control
repetitive processes that are difficult to program with ladder programming
alone.

Comments

Several types of comments can be added to the program to make it easier to
understand, including Rung comments, and I/O comments.

Section Function

The section function can be used to make the program easier to visualize
(CX-Programmer version 2.0 or higher).

Port-specific Protocol Macro Function
Create Protocol Functions
for All Ports

The protocol macro function can be used to create versatile communications
functions for any of the PLC’s communications ports. The communications
functions can have host link, NT Link, or protocol macro configurations and
can be directed to RS-232C and RS-422/485 ports on any of the Units.

1,2,3...

1. One Serial Communications Board can be mounted in the CPU Unit. (A
Serial Communications Board has two serial communications ports.)
2. Up to 16 Serial Communications Units can be connected to a CPU Unit.
(Each Serial Communications Unit has two serial communications ports.)
In total, up to 36 ports can be used.
Programming Device
PT
Host Computer

Serial Communications Unit
CPU Unit
Serial Communications Board

Up to 36 ports
are possible

Standard Serial
Communications with
External Devices

External device
with serial port

Messages can be transferred to and from standard serial devices with the protocol macro function (according to preset parameter settings). The protocol
macro function supports processing options such as retries, timeout monitoring, and error checks.
Symbols that read and write data to the CPU Unit can be included in the communications frames, so data can be exchanged with the CPU Unit very easily.
OMRON components (such as Temperature Controllers, ID System Devices,
Bar Code Readers, and Modems) can be connected to a Serial Communications Board or Serial Communications Unit with the standard system protocol.
It is also possible to change the settings if necessary.
Note The Serial Communications Board or Serial Communications Unit must be
purchased separately to take advantage of this function.

Section 1-2

CS-series Features

Transmit or receive data
with just one instruction.

External device

Multilevel Network Configurations
Different network levels can be connected as shown in the following diagram.
The multilevel configuration provides more flexibility in networking from the
manufacturing site to production management. In particular, the DeviceNet
network makes it very easy to connect devices from other manufacturers.
OA Network:
FA Network:
DeviceNet*:
High-speed ON/OFF bus:

Ethernet
Controller Link
DeviceNet
CompoBus/S

Note *Units that conform to JEMANET standards are also available.

Ethernet

Controller Link

DeviceNet

CompoBus/S

Section 1-2

CS-series Features
Remote Monitoring and Programming
1,2,3...

1. The host link function can operate through a modem, which allows monitoring of a distant PLC’s operation, data transfers, or even online editing of
a distant PLC’s program by phone.
2. PLCs in a network can be programmed and monitored through the Host
Link.
3. It is possible to communicate through 3 network levels even with different
types of networks.

Remote programming/monitoring
of a distant PLC

Modem

Remote programming/monitoring of a
PLC on the network through Host Link

Modem

Controller Link Network

Communications Across 3
Network Levels

Remote programming/monitoring of a PLC on a network up to 3 levels away
(including the local network) for the same or different types of networks is possible through Host Link.

Network 3
Network 1

Network 2

Note With CS/CJ-series CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later, remote programming/monitoring is possible up to 8 levels away. Refer to 1-6-2 Improved Read Protection
Using Passwords for details.
Message transfer between PLCs on a network 3 levels away (including the
local network) for the same or different types of networks.
Network 3

Network 1

Network 2

High-speed
Communications with PTs

NT Link communications between an NS-series or NT31/NT631-V2 PT and a
CS-series PLC are possible at high speed.

Section 1-2

CS-series Features

1-2-2

Versatile Functions

Memory Card and File Management Functions
Transfer Data to and from
Memory Cards

Data area data, program data, and PLC Setup data can be saved as files on a
Memory Card (compact flash memory). Data can be read and written from
Programming Devices, instructions in the user program, or host computers.
(From the program, only I/O memory can be read and written and it must be
read or written as a file.)
I/O Memory, program,
and parameter areas
stored as files.

Convert EM Area Banks to
File Memory

Part of the EM Area can be converted to file memory to provide file management capabilities without a Memory Card and with much faster access time
than a Memory Card. (I/O comments can also be stored.)

Automatic File Transfer at
Start-up

The PLC can be set up to transfer the program and/or PLC Setup files from
the Memory Card when the PLC is turned ON. With this function, the Memory
Card provides a flash-ROM transfer. This function can also be used to store
and change PLC configurations quickly and easily.

I/O Memory Files in CSV
and Text Format

It is now possible to save production results and other data (hexadecimal)
from the CPU Unit I/O memory in a Memory Card in CSV or text format. The
data can then be read and edited using personal computer spreadsheet software by means of a Memory Card Adapter.
I/O memory data stored
in CSV or text format
Spreadsheet software
Via Memory Card Adapter

Memory Card

File Operations (Deleting,
Creating Directories, etc.)
from Ladder Programs

It is possible to format files, delete, copy, change file names, create new directories, and perform similar operations on a Memory Card from the ladder program during PLC operation.

Program Replacement
During Operation

It is now possible to replace the entire user program in the CPU Unit from the
Memory Card during operation. In this way, it is possible to switch PLC operation without stopping the PLC.
PLC operation

.OBJ
Replacement

Easy Backups

It is now possible to back up all data (user programs, parameters, and I/O
memory) to the Memory Card by pressing the Memory Card power supply
switch. In this way, if a malfunction arises, it is possible to back up all data in
the CPU Unit at the time without using a Programming Device.

Section 1-2

CS-series Features
Specialized Instructions Simplify Programming
Text String Instructions

The text string instructions allow text processing to be performed easily from
the ladder program. These instructions simplify the processing required when
creating messages for transmission or processing messages received from
external devices with the protocol macro function.
Processing of text string
data

External device with
standard serial port

Loop Instructions

The FOR(512), NEXT(513), and BREAK(514) instructions provide a very
powerful programming tool that takes up little program capacity.

Index Registers

Sixteen Index Registers are provided for use as pointers in instructions. An
Index Register can be used to indirectly address any word in I/O memory. The
CS-series PLCs also support the auto-increment, auto-decrement, and offset
functions.
The Index Registers can be a powerful tool for repetitive processing (loops)
when combined with the auto-increment, auto-decrement, and offset functions. Index Registers can also be useful for table processing operations such
as changing the order of characters in text strings.

Table Data Processing Instructions
Stack Instructions
A region of I/O memory can be defined as a stack region. Words in the stack
are specified by a stack pointer for easy FIFO (first-in first-out) or LIFO (last-in
first-out) data processing.
Stack region

Pointer

Table Processing
Range Instructions
These instructions operate on a specified range of words to find the maximum
value or minimum value, search for a particular value, calculate the sum or
FCS, or swap the contents of the leftmost and rightmost bytes in the words.
Range specified
in the instruction
Data

Search, find maximum,
find minimum, etc.

Record-table Instructions
Record-table instructions operate on specially defined data tables. The record
table must be defined in advance with DIM(631), which declares the number
of words in a record and the number of records in the table. Up to 16 record
tables can be defined.

Section 1-2

CS-series Features

Record tables are useful when data is organized in records. As an example, if
temperatures, pressures, or other set values for various models have been
combined into a table, the record-table format makes it easy to store and read
the set values for each model.
The SETR(635) can be used to store the first address of the desired record in
an Index Register. Index Registers can then be used to simplify complicated
processes such as changing the order of records in the record table, searching for data, or comparing data.
Table
Record 2
Record 3

Record 2
Set values for model A
Temperature setting
Pressure setting
Time setting

Troubleshooting Functions
Failure Diagnosis:
FAL(006) and FALS(007)

The FAL(006) and FALS(007) can be used to generate a non-fatal or fatal
error when the user-defined conditions are met. Records of these errors are
stored in the error log just like system-generated errors.
User-defined
error condition

Failure Point Detection:
FPD(269)

FAL(006) or FALS(007) error

Diagnoses a failure in an instruction block by monitoring the time between
execution of FPD(269) and execution of a diagnostic output and finding which
input is preventing an output from being turned ON.
FPD

Input preventing
diagnostic output
from going ON

Error Log Functions

The error log contains the error code and time of occurrence for the most
recent 20 errors (user-defined or system-generated errors).

Maintenance Functions

The CS-series PLCs record information useful for maintenance, such as the
number of power interruptions and the total PLC ON time.

Data Trace Function
The content of the specified word or bit in I/O memory can be stored in trace
memory by one of the following methods: scheduled sampling, cyclic sampling, or sampling at execution of TRSM(045).
Trace memory
Specified address
in I/O memory

Section 1-2

CS-series Features
Fixed Cycle Time Function

A fixed (minimum) cycle time can be set to minimize variations in I/O response
times.

I/O Refreshing Methods
I/O refreshing can be performed cyclically and immediately by programming
the immediate-refreshing variation of the instruction.

PLC Setup Functions
PLC operation can be customized with PLC Setup settings, such as the maximum cycle time setting (watch cycle time) and the instruction error operation
setting, which determines whether instruction processing errors and access
errors are treated as non-fatal or fatal errors.
The PLC's initial settings can be
customized with the PLC Setup.

Binary Refreshing of Timer/Counter Instruction PVs
Present values of timer/counter instructions can now be refreshed in binary, in
addition to the existing BCD capability. (Binary refreshing, however, can be
specified with only CX-Programmer Ver. 3.0 and higher.) This allows the
timer/counter setting time to be expanded to a range of 0 to 65535 (from the
existing 0 to 9,999). Also, results calculated by other instructions can be used
as is for timer/counter set values.

Section 1-2

CS-series Features
Windows Tools

The single-port multiple-access (SPMA) function can be used to program and
monitor other CPU Bus Units on the same bus (CPU Rack or Expansion
racks) or other CPU Units on the same network from a serial port on the CPU
Unit or a Serial Communications Board.
CX-Programmer

Several CPU Bus Units on the same
bus or other CPU Units on the same
network can be accessed from a
single port.

Controller Link

Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification
The C200HW-PA204C Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification provide six display levels using a 7-segment display on the front panel of the Unit
to indicate the remaining service life of the Power Supply Unit. An alarm output also notifies when the estimated remaining service life drops to 6 months
or shorter. This function enables Power Supply Unit replacement before the
power supply reaches the end of its service life resulting in a system failure.
POWER

PA204C

C200HW-PA204C Power Supply
Unit with Replacement Notification

C200HW-PA204C
POWER

Years

TEST

Alarm output turns OFF
when remaining service
life is 6 months.

Section 1-3

CS1-H CPU Unit Features

1-3
1-3-1

CS1-H CPU Unit Features
High-speed Performance

Ultra High-speed Cycle
Time

The CS1-H CPU Units provide a cycle time that is three to four times faster
than that of the previous CPU Units.
For example, a program consisting of 38 Ksteps of only basic instructions with
128 inputs and 128 outputs executes in 1 ms; a program consisting of 20
Ksteps of basic and special instructions in a 1:1 ratio with 128 inputs and 128
outputs executes in 1 ms; and a program consisting of 8 Ksteps of basic and
special instructions in a 1:2 ratio with 64 inputs and 64 outputs executes in 0.5
ms.
The following factors give the CS1-H CPU Units their high speed.

1,2,3...

1. Instruction execution times: Only about 1/2 the time required for basic instructions, and only about 1/3 the time required for special instructions.
2. Better bus performance: Data transfers between the CPU Unit and Special
I/O or Communications Units is about twice as fast, providing greater overall system performance.
3. Instruction execution is performed in parallel with peripheral servicing.
4. Other factors, including background execution of text string processing and
table data processing instructions.

Faster Execution of
Common Instructions

Extensive research on PLC applications was used to identify the 20 most
commonly used instructions of the more than 400 supported instructions (see
below), and execution speed for these instructions was increased by 10 to 20
times previous performance.
CPS (SIGNED BINARY COMPARE)
JMP (JUMP)
CPSL (DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY COMPARE)
CJP (CONDITIONAL JUMP)
XFER (BLOCK TRANSFER)
BCNT (BIT COUNTER)
MOVB (MOVE BIT)
MLPX (DATA DECODER)
MOVD (MOVE DIGITS)
BCD (BINARY-TO-BCD)
BSET (BLOCK SET)
SBS/RET (SUBROUTINE CALL/RETURN)

Transfer Speed between
CPU Unit and CPU Bus
Units Doubled

The speed of transferring data between the CPU Unit and CPU Bus Units has
been doubled to increase overall system performance.

Parallel Processing of
Instructions and
Peripheral Servicing

A special mode is supported that enables parallel processing of instruction
execution and peripheral device servicing to support the following types of
application.
• Extensive data exchange with a host not restricted by the program capacity in the CS1-H CPU Unit
• Consistently timed data exchange with SCADA software
• Eliminating the effects on cycle time of future system expansion or
increases in communications

Section 1-3

CS1-H CPU Unit Features
Less Cycle Time
Fluctuation for Data
Processing

Table data processing and text string processing, which often require time,
can be separated over several cycles to minimize fluctuations in the cycle time
and achieve stable I/O response.

Better Data Link and
Remote I/O Refreshing

CPU Bus Unit refresh response has been increased both by reductions in the
cycle time itself and by the addition of an immediate I/O refresh instruction for
CPU Bus Units (DLNK(226)). This instruction will refresh data links,
DeviceNet remote I/O, protocol macros, and other special data for CPU Bus
Units.
The response of a CS1-H CPU Unit is approximately 2.4 times that of a CS1
CPU Unit. And, for a cycle time of approximately 100 ms or higher, the
increase in the data link response is comparable to that for the cycle time.

Immediate Refreshing for
CPU Bus Units

1-3-2

Although previously, I/O refreshing for CPU Bus Units was possible only after
program executions, a CPU BUS I/O REFRESH instruction (DLNK(226)) has
been added to enable immediate I/O refreshing for CPU Bus Units. Data links,
DeviceNet remote I/O, an other unique CPU Bus Unit refreshing can be
refreshed along with words allocated to the CPU Bus Unit in the CIO and DM
Areas whenever DLNK(226) is executed. This is particularly effective for
longer cycle times (e.g., 100 ms or longer). (Data exchange for data links,
DeviceNet remote I/O, and other network communications are also affected
by the communications cycle time, i.e., DLNK(226) refreshes data only
between the CPU Bus Units and the CPU Unit, not the data on the individual
networks.)

High-speed Structured Programming
To further aid standardized programming, program structuring functions have
been improved, as has program execution speed.

More Cyclic Tasks

Tasks provide better efficiency by enabling programs to be separated by function or for development by different engineers. The CS1-H CPU Units support
up to 288 cyclic tasks, an incredible increase over the previous maximum of
32 tasks.

Common Processing from
Multiple Tasks

Global subroutines that can be called by any task are now supported. These
can be used for common processing from more than one task, for greater
standardization.

Faster Subroutine
Instructions

Subroutine instruction are executed approximately 70 times faster to enable
greater program modularization without having to be concerned about
increasing the cycle time.

Shared Index and Data
Registers between Tasks

Although separate index and data registers can still be used in each task, they
have been joined by shared index and data registers that can be used
between tasks to reduce the time required to switch between tasks.

1-3-3

Function Block (FB)
When using a CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 or later, standard processes can
be encapsulated as easily reusable function blocks as long as those processes only exchange I/O data externally. The function blocks can be written
in ladder language or ST (structured text) language. Mathematical processing
that is difficult to write in ladder language can be written easily in the ST language.
OMRON function blocks can be written in ladder language or ST (structured
text) language, and conform to IEC 61131-3 standards (JIS B3503). The function blocks provide functions for more efficient design and debugging of the
user equipment, as well as easier maintenance.

Section 1-3

CS1-H CPU Unit Features
Smart FB Library

The Smart FB Library is a set of function blocks that improve interoperability
between OMRON PLC Units and FA components. Since it isn't necessary to
create a ladder program to use basic Unit and FA component functions, the
user can concentrate on more important work, such as determining how to
make the most of device functions.

Online Editing of FB
Definitions

FB definitions can be changed during operation, so FB definitions can be
edited quickly during debugging. In addition, FBs can be used with confidence
even in equipment that must operate 24 hours/day. (Requires CPU Unit unit
version 4.0 or later and CX-Programmer version 7.0 or higher.)

Nesting

Not only can programs be created with nested OMRON FBs, it is possible to
make easy-to-understand, stress-free operations by switching displays under
preset conditions and displaying structures in a directory-tree format.
(Requires CX-Programmer version 6.0 or higher.)

Protecting FB Definitions

It is possible to prevent unauthorized manipulation, editing, or misappropriation of the program by setting passwords for the function block definitions allocated in the project file and protecting the definitions based on their purpose.
(Requires CX-Programmer version 6.1 or higher.)

Offline Debugging with
the Simulator

The Simulator enables checking the PLC program's operation on the desktop,
so program quality can be improved and verified early on. Both the ladder and
ST programming can be executed in the computer application.

Variable Support for
String Operations (CPU
Units with Unit Version 4.0
or Later)

The functions that perform string data operations in ST language not only
support string variables, they also strengthen the functions used to communicate with string data I/O. This feature simplifies the creation of programs that
send and receive communications commands. (Requires CPU Unit unit version 4.0 or later and CX-Programmer version 7.0 or higher.)

FB Generation Function

Existing PLC programming can be reused by easily converting it to FBs.
(Requires CX-Programmer version 7.0 or higher.)

1-3-4

More Instructions for Specific Applications
Very specific control can be easily programmed for a much wider range of
applications with the many new special instructions added to the CS1-H CPU
Units.

High-speed Positioning
for XY Tables

Double-precision floating-point calculations are supported for the CS1-H CPU
Units to provide even better precision for position control operations.

Convert between Floating
Point and Text String Data

To display floating-point data on PTs, the CS1-H CPU Units provide conversion instructions from floating-point data to text strings (ASCII). Conversion
between ASCII and floating-point data is also possible so that ASCII data from
serial communications with measurement devices can be used in calculations.

Accurate Line
Approximations

Unsigned 16-bit binary/BCD data, signed 16/32-bit binary data, or single-precision floating-point data can be used for line data, enabling precise (high data
resolution) conversions, such as from a level meter (mm) to tank capacity (l)
based on the shape of the tank.

Realtime Workpiece Data
Management

When loading and unloading workpieces from conveyor lines, stack instructions can be used to manage workpiece information in realtime in table format.

Section 1-3

CS1-H CPU Unit Features
PID Autotuning

Autotuning is now supported for PID constants with the PID CONTROL
instruction. The limit cycle method is used to ensure rapid autotuning. Very
effective for multiloop PID control.

System Debugging
through Error Simulation

A specified error status can be created with the FAL/FALS instructions. This
can be used effectively when depending systems. For example, errors can be
simulated to produce corresponding displays on a PT to confirm that the correct messages are being displayed.

Program Simplification
with More Specific Basic
Instructions

Programs that use a high quantity of basic instructions can be simplified
though the use of differentiated forms of the LD NOT, AND NOT and OR NOT
instructions, and through the use of OUT, SET, and RSET instructions that
can manipulate individual bits in the DM or EM Area.

Delayed Power OFF
Processing for Specified
Program Areas

The DI and EI instructions can be used to disable interrupts during specific
portions of the program, for example, to prevent the power OFF interrupt from
being executed until a specific instruction has been executed.

1-3-5

Battery-free Operation with Flash Memory
Any user program or parameter area data transferred to the CPU Unit is automatically backed up in flash memory in the CPU Unit to enable battery-free
operation without using a Memory Card.
Note Refer to information on flash memory in the CS/CJ Series Programming Manual (W394) for precautions on this function.

1-3-6

Better Compatibility with Other SYSMAC PLCs

C200HE/HG/HX PLCs

The AREA RANGE COMPARE (ZCP) and DOUBLE AREA RANGE COMPARE (ZCPl) instructions from the C200HE/HG/HX PLCs are supported. This
makes it easier to use C200HE/HG/HX programs in CS-series CPU Units.

CVM1/CV-series PLCs

The CONVERT ADDRESS FROM CV instruction allows real I/O memory
addresses for the CVM1/CV-series PLCs to be converted to addresses for the
CS-series PLCs, enabling programs with CVM1/CV-series addresses to be
quickly converted for use with a CS-series CPU Unit.

1-3-7

Refreshing Timer/Counter PVs in Binary
In addition to BCD, binary can also be set as the PV refresh method for
timer/counter instructions. (This setting is possible, however, only with version
3.0 or higher versions of the CX-Programmer.) This means that the settable
time range for timer/counter instructions is increased from 0 to 9999 to 0 to
65,535. It also means that the results of calculations made with other instructions can be used without conversion.

1-3-8

Features of CS1-H CPU Units Ver. 3.0

Encapsulate Programming into Function Blocks Using Ladder Programming or Structured Text
When using CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or higher, function blocks can be used
to encapsulate standard processing that is often reused and for which only I/O
data is output externally as the user interface. Function blocks can be written
using ladder programming or structured text. Structured text is particularly
effective for easily including arithmetic processing that is difficult to write in
ladder programming.

Section 1-3

CS1-H CPU Unit Features

Incorporate CompoWay/F-compatible OMRON Components into FINS Network Via Serial Gateway
Using the Serial Gateway mode for the CPU Unit’s serial port enables flexible
access to CompoWay/F-compatible OMRON components from devices on
the network (e.g., PTs, PLC CPU Units, personal computers)
Store Comment/Section Data in CPU Unit’s Flash Memory
The CX-Programmer can be used to save I/O comments and other comment/section data in the comment memory contained in the CPU Unit’s flash
memory.
Back Up Comment and Section Data
Comment/section data in comment memory can be backed up using the simple backup function.
Use No-protocol Communications at Multiple Ports
No-protocol communications can be performed via the serial ports of Serial
Communications Boards/Units with unit version 1.2 or later. This enables noprotocol communications at multiple ports.
Free Running Timer Calculates Intervals without Requiring Timer Instructions
The system timers used after the power is turned ON are contained in Auxiliary Area words A000 and A001.
A000 is set to 0000 hex when the power is turned ON and this value is automatically incremented by 1 every 10 ms. The value returns to 0000 hex after
reaching FFFF hex (655,350 ms), and then continues to be incremented in a
ring operation.
A001 is set to 0000 hex when the power is turned ON and automatically incremented by 1 every 100 ms. The value returns to 0000 hex after reaching
FFFF hex (655,350 ms), and then continues to be incremented in a ring operation.
Example:The interval can be counted between processing A and processing
B without requiring timer instructions. This is achieved by calculating
the difference between the value in A000 for processing A and the
value in A000 for processing B. The interval is counted in 10 ms
units. With unit version 4.0 or later, the free running time is stored in
A002 in 1-s increments.
Reuse Ladder Programs Created Using C-series CPU Units
C-series ladder programs can be easily reused through the newly supported
model conversion instructions (XFERC(565), DISTC(566), COLLC(567),
MOVBC(568), and BCNTC(621)).

1-3-9

Changes to CS-series Operating Specifications

Increased Points for SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Communications
The maximum number of points for SYSMAC BUS remote I/O communications in the operating specifications has been expanded from 800 points (50
words) to 1,280 points (80 words). This change applies to all CS-series CPU
Units and Units using SYSMAC BUS remote I/O communications, including
previously manufactured Units. For details, refer to 1-5-7 Increased Points for
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Communications.

Section 1-3

CS1-H CPU Unit Features

1-3-10 Features of CS1-H CPU Units Ver. 2.0
Easier System Development by Teams
Download/Upload Tasks Individually with CX-Programmer Version 4.0 or Higher
The CX-Programmer (version 4.0 or higher) can be used to upload or download only the required tasks. This enables the member of a development team
to work separately and then upload/download tasks after debugging them,
helping to eliminate the need for unification work by a manager as well as mistakes that can easily occur in such work.

Many Protection Functions
Improved Read Protection Using Passwords with CX-Programmer Version 4.0 or Higher
■

Read Protection for Specific Tasks
Passwords can be set to read-protect individual groups of tasks. This enables
creating black boxes in the program.

■

Enabling/Disabling Creating File Memory Program Files
When read protection is set, an optional setting allows you to enable or disable creating program backup files (.OBJ). This setting can be used to prevent
programs from being disclosed.

■

Program Write Protection
The user program can be protected without using the DIP switch setting. This
helps prohibit unauthorized or accidental program changes.

Protection for CPU Units from FINS Write Commands Sent via Networks
Write operations to a CPU Unit using FINS commands across networks can
be enabled for specific nodes and disabled for all other nodes. This can be
used to enable monitoring data via networks while eliminating the possibility
of accidental mistakes caused by careless writing operations.

Easier Network Connections and More-advanced Seamless Network Communications
Online Connections via Networks without I/O Tables
By using the CS1W-ETN21 Ethernet Unit, online connection is possible to any
PLC in the local network from a Programming Device, such as the CX-Programmer, as soon as the network is connected by using automatic I/O allocation at startup. It’s not necessary to create the I/O tables to enable connection.
This eliminates the need to use a serial connection to create I/O tables before
the CX-Programmer can be connected via Ethernet. Only an Ethernet connection is required to go online and create I/O tables.
Work Across Up to Eight Networks with CX-Net in CX-Programmer Version 4.0 or Higher
FINS commands can be sent across up to 8 network levels (including the local
network). This enables a wider range of communications between devices on
Ethernet and Controller Link Networks.
FINS commands can only be sent across up to 8 network levels when the
destination is a CPU Unit. FINS commands can be sent to other destinations
up to 3 network levels away.
Online Connections to PLCs via NS-series PTs
Downloading, uploading, and monitoring of ladder programs or other data is
possible to a PLC connected serially to an NS-series PT from the CX-Programmer connected to the NS-series PT by Ethernet.

Section 1-3

CS1-H CPU Unit Features

Easier Implementation of Explicit Messages with Explicit Message Instructions
Special Explicit Message Instructions are now supported to simplify using
explicit messages. (Previously, CMND(490) had to be used to send a FINS
command of 2801 hex to enable sending explicit messages.) The new instructions include the following: EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND (EXPLT(720)),
EXPLICIT GET ATTRIBUTE (EGATR(721)), EXPLICIT SET ATTRIBUTE
(ESATR(722)), EXPLICIT WORD READ (ECHRD(723)), and EXPLICIT
WORD WRITE (ECHWR(724)). Of these, EXPLICIT WORD READ
(ECHRD(723)) and EXPLICIT WORD WRITE (ECHWR(724)) enable easily
reading and writing data in CPU Units on networks with the same type of
notation as used for SEND(290) and RECV(298). (Not supported by the
C200HX(-Z)/HG(-Z)/HE(-Z) and CV-series PLCs.)

Greater Flexibility in I/O Allocations
First Word Address Settings for Slots (Using CX-Programmer Version 3.1 or Higher)
When editing I/O tables for CS1-H CPU Units, the first word address can be
set for up to 64 slots. This can be used, for example, to create fixed starting
addresses for Input Units and Output Unit to separate I/O allocations from the
program and increase the efficiency of program maintenance.

Automatic Power-ON Transfers without a Parameter File (.STD)
The user program can be automatically transferred to the CPU Unit at power
ON without a parameter file (.STD) if the name of the program file (.OBJ) is
changed to REPLACE on the CX-Programmer and the file is stored on a
Memory Card. This can be used, for example, to enable transferring a program to a CPU Unit by creating the program offline and sending it as an email
attachment, without a local Programming Device.

More Application Instruction with CX-Programmer Version 4.0 or Higher
Multiple Interlock Instructions (MILH(517), MILR(518), and MILC(519)) for Nested Interlocks
These instruction enable easy creation of nested interlocks. For example, create one interlock to control the entire program (e.g., for an emergency stop)
and then nest other interlocks for separate portions of the program (e.g., conveyor operation, alarms, etc.).
TIME-PROPORTIONAL OUTPUT (TPO(685)) Instruction for Time-proportional Operation with
Temperature Controllers or Variable-duty Lighting/Power Control
This instruction is used in combination with PID instructions to create a timeproportional output based on the manipulated variable output by the PID
instruction. This enables easily connecting an SSR to a Transistor Output Unit
to achieve time-proportional operation of a Temperature Controller. Variableduty pulse outputs can also be created for lighting or power control.
Symbol Time Comparison Instructions for Easy Calendar Timers
Two times/dates can be compared to continue operation to the next instruction
in the ladder program rung when the results of comparison is true. Opposed
to normal comparison instructions, comparisons are by byte and the bytes
that are compared in the time/date data can be controlled. This enables comparing built-in clock data with set times/dates to easily create a calendar timer,
for example, on the hour (when the minutes is 0) or on a specific date each
year).

Section 1-3

CS1-H CPU Unit Features

GRAY CODE CONVERSION (GRY(474)) for Easy Conversion of Parallel Inputs from Absolute Encoders
to Binary, BCD, or Angle Data
This instruction converts Gray binary codes to binary, BCD, or angle data.
This enables easily handling position or angle data input as parallel signals
(2n) from an Absolute Encoder with a Gray code output using a DC Input Unit.
EXPANDED BLOCK COMPARE (BCMP2(502)) for Comparison Judgements for Up to 256 Ranges
(Upper/Lower Limits) with One Instruction
This instruction determines if a value is within any of up to 256 ranges defined
by upper and lower limits. When used with the GRAY CODE CONVERSION
(GRY(474)) instruction, the same operation as a cam switch can be achieved
by determining if an angle input from an Absolute Encoder is in a comparison
table.
Easier Processing of I/O Devices with Special I/O Instructions
Previously many instructions were required to read or write data for external
input devices such as digital switches and 7-segment displays connected to
Basic I/O Units. Now, I/O processing for these devices can be achieved with a
single instruction. These are sometimes call Combination Instructions.
These instructions are the same as those supported by the C200HX/HG/HE
and CQM1H PLCs, with the exception that more than one of each of these
instructions can be executed in a single user program.
TEN KEY INPUT (TKY(211))
Sequentially reads numbers input from a ten-key connected to an Input Unit.
HEXADECIMAL KEY INPUT (HKY(212))
Sequentially reads numbers input from a hexadecimal keypad connected to
an Input Unit and an Output Unit for a maximum of 8 digits.
DIGITAL SWITCH INPUT (DSW(213))
Reads numbers input from a digital switch or thumbwheel switch connected to
an Input Unit and an Output Unit. Either 4 or 8 digits are read.
MATRIX INPUT (MTR(210))
Sequentially reads 64 input points input from a 8 × 8 matrix connected to an
Input Unit and an Output Unit.
7-SEGMENT DISPLAY OUTPUT (7SEG(214))
Converts 4-digit or 8-digit values to data for a 7-segment display and outputs
the result.
Read/Write CPU Bus Unit Memory Areas with IORD(222)/IOWR(223)
Although INTELLIGENT I/O READ (IORD(222)) and INTELLIGENT I/O
WRITE (IOWR(223)) could previously be used only for Special I/O Units,
these instructions can now be used to read and write data for CPU Bus Units.
Operation Start/End Times
The times that operation is started and ended are automatically stored in
memory in the Auxiliary Area (A515 to A517). This enables easier management of the operating times of the PLC System.

Section 1-3

CS1-H CPU Unit Features
Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification

The C200HW-PA204C Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification provide six display levels using a 7-segment display on the front panel of the Unit
to indicate the remaining service life of the Power Supply Unit. An alarm output also notifies when the estimated remaining service life drops to 6 months
or shorter. This function enables Power Supply Unit replacement before the
power supply reaches the end of its service life resulting in a system failure.
POWER

PA204C

C200HW-PA204C Power Supply
Unit with Replacement Notification

C200HW-PA204C
POWER

Years

TEST

Alarm output turns OFF
when remaining service
life is 6 months.

Section 1-4

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 4.0 Upgrades

1-4

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 4.0 Upgrades
This section summarizes the upgrades made for CS1-H CPU Units with unit
version 4.0. CX-Programmer version 7.0 or higher must be used to enable
using the following functions.
Functional Upgrades for Unit Version 4.0
Function
Online Editing of Function Blocks

Section
1-4-1 Online Editing of Function
Blocks
1-4-2 Input-Output Variables in
Function Blocks
1-4-3 Text String Support in
Function Blocks

Input-Output Variables in Function Blocks
Text String Support in Function Blocks

1-4-1

Online Editing of Function Blocks

Unit Version 3.0 or Earlier

Function block definitions could not be changed during operation.

Unit Version 4.0 or Later

Function block definitions can be changed during operation. This allows function block definitions to be quickly corrected during debugging. It also allows
function blocks to be used more easily in systems that operate 24 hours a day.

1-4-2

Input-Output Variables in Function Blocks

Unit Version 3.0 or Earlier

The data size of parameters that could be passed to and from function blocks
was limited to four words maximum. It was thus necessary to separate elements with large data sizes, such as data tables.
FB
(INT)
D100

Unit Version 4.0 or Later

1-4-3

Pattern A

D101

Pattern B

D102

Pattern C

D103

Pattern D

D104

Pattern E

D101
D102
D103
D104

Para1o
(INT)
Para2o
(INT)
Para3o
(INT)
Para4o
(INT)
Para5o

D100
D101
D102
D103
D104

Input-output variables can be used to passed large quantities of data, such as
table data.
D100

Pattern A

D101

Pattern B

D102

Pattern C

D103

Pattern D

D104

Pattern E

FB
(INT)[]
D100

Para1 ---

Para1

D100

Text String Support in Function Blocks

Unit Version 3.0 or Earlier

D100

(INT)

Para1i
(INT)
Para2i
(INT)
Para3i
(INT)
Para4i
(INT)
Para5i

To program text string processing for communications commands and display
data in ladder diagrams, it was necessary to know the ladder string instructions and ASCII codes. Also, several instructions had to be combined to converted from numbers to text strings or text strings to numbers.

Section 1-5

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades

Unit Version 4.0 or Later

MOV
#426C
stBlack[0]

" Bl" is #426C in ASCII.

MOV
#6163
stBlack[1]

" ac" is #6163 in ASCII.

Text strings can be used in ST programming to easily create text string processing programs.
Black

White

Blue

Pink

Production
log file
created.

06/05/28
Black: 9
White:18
Blue: 7
Pink: 30

File name
LineA.txt

FB to Create Production Log File
(* Convert black quantity to string *)
(* Convert white quantity to string *)
(* Convert blue quantity to string *)
(* Convert pink quantity to string *)
(* Get date text *)

GetDate(stDay)

(* Create production log LineA.txt *)

FB to Create Date Text
Name: Generate Date Text
Function: To create text data for yy/mm/dd

(* Create yymm text *)
(* Create ddhh text *)

(* Insert / between yy and mm; extract only dd and combine *)

1-5

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades
The following table shows the functional upgrades for CS1-H CPU Unit
Ver. 3.0.
Functional Upgrades for CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0
Function
Function blocks (when using CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or higher)
Serial Gateway (converting FINS commands to CompoWay/F commands at the built-in serial port)
Comment memory (in internal flash memory)
Expanded simple backup data
Free running timer (system timer after power is turned ON)

Section
1-5-1
1-5-2
1-5-3
1-5-4
1-5-5

Section 1-5

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades
Function
New instructions
added

Additional instruction functions

TXDU(256) and RXDU(255) instructions (support no-protocol communications with Serial
Communications Units with unit version 1.2 or
later)
Model conversion instructions: XFERC(565),
DISTC(566), COLLC(567), MOVBC(568), and
BCNTC(621)
Special function block instruction: GETID(286)
TXD(236) and RXD(235) instructions (support
no-protocol communications with Serial Communications Boards with unit version 1.2 or
later)

Section
1-5-6

Changes to Operating Specifications
Function
Maximum number of points expanded for SYSMAC BUS remote I/O
communications

1-5-1

Section
1-5-7

Function Blocks (FB)

Pre-Ver. 2.0

Earlier Units did not support function blocks (FB).

Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later

Function blocks (FB) conforming to IEC 61131-3 are supported. Use of function blocks is determined by the user.
Note IEC 61131-3 is an international standard for programmable logic
controllers (PLC) established by the International Electro-technical
Commission (IEC). This standard is divided into seven parts, of
which Part 3 Programming Languages (IEC 61131-3) provides regulations for programming PLCs.
Function blocks can be created with CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or higher by the
user and pasted into normal programs. The standard function blocks provided
by OMRON in the OMRON FB Library can also be pasted into normal programs. Function blocks enable standard processing to be simply inserted into
a program as a single unit. Function blocks provide the following features.
• Function block algorithms can be written using ladder programming or
structured text (see note).
Note Structured text is a high level textual language designed for industrial
control (primarily PLCs) stipulated in IEC 61131-3. The structured
text supported by CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 conforms to IEC 61131-1.
• A single function block that has been created can be stored in a library for
easy reuse of standard processing.
• Programs that contain function blocks (ladder programming or structured
text), can also be uploaded or downloaded in the same way as normal
programs that do not contain function blocks. Tasks that include function
blocks, however, cannot be downloaded in task units (although they can
be uploaded).
• Array (one-dimensional) variables are supported, making it easier to handle data specific to an application.

Section 1-5

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades

1-5-2

Serial Gateway (Converting FINS to CompoWay/F Via Serial Port)

Pre-Ver. 2.0

Temperature Controllers, Digital Panel Meters, and other CompoWay/F-compatible OMRON Components previously could be accessed by sending userspecified CompoWay/F commands from the PLC. This required, however, the
use of a Serial Communications Board/Unit protocol macro, execution of the
PMCR(260) instruction in the ladder program of the CPU Unit on the same
PLC, and implementation of the standard system protocol (CompoWay/F
Master). The use of protocol macros prevented access across networks.
Note Specific data could be shared without communications instructions if
user-specified CompoWay/F commands were not required, however,
by using the CJ1W-CIF21 Basic Communications Unit.

Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later

FINS commands (CompoWay/F commands encapsulated in FINS frames)
received by the CPU Unit at the built-in serial port (RS-232C port or peripheral
port) are converted automatically into CompoWay/F command frames and
transmitted on the serial line. This enables access to CompoWay/F-compatible OMRON components that are connected to the CPU Unit’s built-in serial
port via either an NS-series Programmable Terminal (PT) or by using the
CMND(490) instruction.
FINS System

Network
CMND(490)

Serial

CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with
unit version 3.0 or later

Network

Protocol
conversion

FINS

Network
CompoWay/F

CompoWay/F-compatible
components can be accessed via the network from
personal computers, PTs,
or PLCs.

Serial

CompoWay/F-compatible
components

Section 1-5

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades

1-5-3

Comment Memory (in Internal Flash Memory)

Pre-Ver. 2.0

Comment data and section data could not be stored in the actual PLC when a
project was downloaded from the CX-Programmer to the CPU Unit unless
both a Memory Card and EM file memory were available.

Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later

A comment memory is provided within the CPU Unit’s internal flash memory.
Therefore, the following comment/section data can be stored in and read from
comment memory even if neither Memory Card nor EM file memory are available.
• Symbol table files (including CX-Programmer symbol names and I/O
comments)
• Comment files (CX-Programmer rung comments and other comments)
• Program index files (CX-Programmer section names, section comments,
and program comments)
CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or later
Comment/section data can be stored in the actual PLC
when downloading projects.

Project

Transfer

Symbol table file

CPU Unit

Comment file
Program index file

EM file memory
Memory Card
Comment
memory

Comment/section data can be stored in this area.

When downloading projects using the CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0, either of the
following storage locations can be selected as the transfer destination for
comment data and section data.
• Memory Card
• EM file memory
• Comment memory (in CPU Unit’s internal flash memory)
Note When using CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 or earlier, this data is stored in either the
Memory Card or EM file memory, whichever is available. If neither the Memory Card nor EM file memory is available, the comment/section data cannot
be stored in comment memory.

1-5-4

Simple Backup Data Expanded

Pre-Ver. 2.0

The simple backup function could not be used to back up comment data or
section data.

Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later

The following files stored in comment memory can be backed up to a Memory
Card when a simple backup operation is executed, or the files can be restored
to comment memory from the Memory Card.
• Symbol table files (including CX-Programmer symbol names and I/O
comments)

Section 1-5

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades

• Comment files (CX-Programmer rung comments and other comments)
• Program index files (CX-Programmer section names, section comments,
and program comments)
Simple backup executing
CPU Unit
• User program
• Parameters
• I/O memory
Memory Card
CS/CJ Series

(In comment memory)
Symbol table file
Comment file
Program index file

These files can also be backed up using simple backup.

This enables backup/restoration of all data in the CPU Unit including I/O comments if an error occurs or when adding a CPU Unit with the same specifications without requiring a Programming Device.

1-5-5

Free Running Timer
he system timers used after the power is turned ON are contained in the following Auxiliary Area words.
Name
10-ms Incrementing
Free Running Timer

Address
Function
Access
A000
This word contains the system timer Read-only
used after the power is turned ON.
0000 hex is set when the power is
turned ON and this value is automatically incremented by 1 every 10 ms.
The value returns to 0000 hex after
reaching FFFF hex (655,350 ms),
and then continues to be automatically incremented by 1 every 10 ms.
(Unit version 3.0 or later)
100-ms Incrementing A001
This word contains the system timer Read-only
Free Running Timer
used after the power is turned ON.
0000 hex is set when the power is
turned ON and this value is automatically incremented by 1 every 100
ms. The value returns to 0000 hex
after reaching FFFF hex (6,553,500
ms), and then continues to be automatically incremented by 1 every
100 ms.(Unit version 3.0 or later)
1-s Incrementing Free A002
This word contains the system timer Read-only
Running Timer
used after the power is turned ON.
0000 hex is set when the power is
turned ON and this value is automatically incremented by 1 every second. The value returns to 0000 hex
after reaching FFFF hex (65,535 s),
and then continues to be automatically incremented by 1 every second.
(Unit version 4.0 or later)

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades

Section 1-5

Note The timer will continue to be incremented when the operating mode is
switched to RUN mode.
Example: The interval can be counted between processing A and processing
B without requiring timer instructions. This is achieved by calculating the difference between the value in A000 for processing A and
the value in A000 for processing B. The interval is counted in 10 ms
units.
CPU Units with unit version 4.0 and later also have a 1-s timer in
A002, which is incremented by 1 every 1 s.

1-5-6

New Special Instructions and Functions
The following new instructions and instruction functions have been added. For
details, refer to the CS/CJ Series Instructions Reference Manual (W474).
These new instructions are supported by the CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or
higher only.
• Serial Communications Instructions:
Supporting no-protocol communications with Serial Communications
Units with unit version 1.2 or later:
TXDU(256): TRANSMIT VIA SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS UNIT
RXDU(255): RECEIVE VIA SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS UNIT
Supporting no-protocol communications with Serial Communications
Boards with unit version 1.2 or later:
TXD(236): TRANSMIT
RXD(235): RECEIVE
• Model Conversion Instructions:
When using CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or higher to convert a C-series ladder program for use in a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit, the C-series
XFER(070), DIST(080), COLL(081), MOVB(082), and BCNT(067)
instructions will be automatically converted to the following instructions.
The operands do not require editing.
XFERC(565) BLOCK TRANSFER
DISTC(566) SINGLE WORD DISTRIBUTE
COLLC(567) DATA COLLECT
MOVBC(568) MOVE BIT
BCNTC(621) BIT COUNTER

1-5-7

Increased Points for SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Communications

Earlier Specifications

The maximum number of SYSMAC BUS remote I/O points per CPU Unit was
800 points (50 words), which were allocated in the SYSMAC BUS Area
(CIO 3000 to CIO 3049).

Updated Specifications

The maximum number of SYSMAC BUS remote I/O points per CPU Unit has
been increased to 1,280 points (80 words), which are allocated in the SYSMAC BUS Area (CIO 3000 to CIO 3079).
This expansion in the number of points is not related to any upgrade of the
Units (CPU Units or SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Communications Units).
Therefore, the increase in maximum number of points applies to all CS-series
CPU Units, including those that have already been shipped.

Section 1-5

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades
Refer to the following table for details.
Maximum number of points per
CPU Unit (total
optical/wired
points)

Maximum
points per
Remote I/O
Master Unit
(RM) (Total optical/wired points)

Item
SYSMAC Bus
remote I/O relay
area
Number of Remote
I/O Master Units
(RM)
Number of C500
Remote I/O Slave
Units (RT) (i.e.,
Slave Racks))

SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Relay
Points
Maximum number
of C500 Remote I/O
Slave Units (i.e.,
Slave Racks)

Before
800 points
(50 words)

Now
1,280 points
(80 words)

2 Units

2 Units
4 Units
C500 Remote I/O Slave Unit (RT) allocated
words for 2 unit numbers
Up to 20 words in total per Slave Rack.
5 Units
8 Units
Slave Rack: Any location, fixed word allocations
C200H Special I/O Unit can be connected.
Up to 10 words in total per Slave Rack.
512 points (32 words)

2 Units
4 Units
C500 Remote I/O Slave Unit (RT) allocated
words for 2 unit numbers
Up to 20 words in total per Slave Rack.
Remote I/O Slave Unit’s (RT) unit number
cannot be used more than once.
5 Units
8 Units

Maximum number
of C200H Remote
Slave Rack: Any location, fixed word allocaI/O Slave Units (RT) tions
(i.e., Slave Racks) C200H Special I/O Unit can be connected.
Up to 10 words in total per Slave Rack.
Maximum number
Optical: 64 Units (Repeater required if numof Remote I/O
ber exceeds 32).
Slaves (Slave Units, Wired: Remote Interfaces, Remote TermiI/O Link Units,
nals: 32 Units total
Remote I/O Units)
Remote Units: 16 Units.

Section 1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades

1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
The following table shows the functional upgrades for CS1-H CPU Unit
Ver. 2.0.

Functional Upgrades for CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0
Function
Downloading and Uploading Individual Tasks
Improved Read Protection Using Passwords
Write Protection from FINS Commands Sent to CPU Units via Networks
Online Network Connections without I/O Tables
Communications through a Maximum of 8 Network Levels
Connecting Online to PLCs via NS-series PTs
Setting First Slot Words
Automatic Transfers at Power ON without a Parameter File
Operation Start/End Times
New Application Instructions

1-6-1

Reference
1-6-1
1-6-2
1-6-3
1-6-4
1-6-5
1-6-6
1-6-7
1-6-8
1-6-9
1-6-10

Downloading and Uploading Individual Tasks

Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
With the pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units, individual program tasks could not be downloaded from the CX-Programmer. It was only possible to download the entire
user program.
For example, if several programmers were developing the program, the
project manager had to unify each program after debugging and then download the entire user program. Furthermore, the entire user program had to be
downloaded even if just a few changes were made.
Note It was possible to upload individual program tasks with CS/CJ-series PLCs.
Developer A

CX-Programmer

Manager
Developer B

Entire user program

CX-Programmer
CS/CJ Series
Unification

Developer C

Download

CX-Programmer

Individual tasks can be uploaded.

Section 1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0
Overview

With CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later CPU Units, individual program tasks can be
uploaded and downloaded from the CX-Programmer.
CX-Programmer

Individual tasks (programs)

END
END
END

Download individual tasks (programs).
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit Ver.2.0 or later

Usage

When several programmers are developing a program, it isn't necessary for a
project manager to unify the data because just the debugged tasks can be
downloaded/uploaded. Also, transferring individual tasks can help avoid mistakes.
Developer A CX-Programmer
Edited
Just the edited tasks can be downloaded.

Developer B

CX-Programmer
Unchanged

CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit Ver.2.0 or later

Developer C CX-Programmer
Unchanged

Download individual tasks.

Restrictions to Function
Block Use

1-6-2

Individual tasks cannot be downloaded for programs containing function
blocks (unit version 3.0 or later only) (uploading is possible).

Improved Read Protection Using Passwords

Read Protection for Individual Tasks Using Passwords
Previous CPU Units (PreVer. 2.0 CPU Units)

With the pre-Ver. 2.0 CS/CJ-series CPU Units, it was possible to read-protect
the entire PLC with a password (referred to as “UM read protection” below),
but it was not possible to protect individual tasks.
UM read protection prevented anyone from displaying, editing, or uploading
the entire user program from CX-Programmer without inputting the correct
password.

CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
and CX-Programmer
Ver. 4.0 or Higher

Overview
With the CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later CPU Units, it is possible to read-protect
individual program tasks (referred to as “task read protection” below) or the
entire PLC. same password controls access to all of the read-protected tasks.

Section 1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades

Task read protection prevents anyone from displaying, editing, or uploading
the read-protected set of tasks from CX-Programmer without inputting the correct password. In this case, the entire program can be uploaded, but the readprotected tasks cannot be displayed or edited without inputting the correct
password. Tasks that are not read-protected can be displayed, edited, or modified with online editing.
Note Task read protection cannot be set if UM read protection is already set. However, it is possible to set UM read protection after task read protection has
been set.

CX-Programmer

Set a password for particular tasks in the project directory.
Password?

Those tasks cannot be displayed without inputting the password.

CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver.2.0 or later

END

The entire user program can be uploaded, but passwordprotected tasks will not be displayed until the password is input.
END

The other tasks can be displayed/edited and are also accessible
through online editing.
END

Operating Procedure
1,2,3...

1. Display the Protection Tab of the PLC Properties Window and register a
password in the Task read protection Box.
Right-click.
Properties

2. Select the tasks that will be password-protected and select the Task read
protect Option in the Program Properties Tab.

Right-click.
Properties

3. Connect online and execute either step a or b below.
a) Transferring the Program and Setting Password Protection:
Select PLC - Transfer - To PLC to transfer the program. The tasks registered in step 2 will be password-protected.

Section 1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades

b) Setting Password Protection without Transferring the Program:
Select PLC - Protection - Set Password and click the OK button. The
tasks registered in step 2 will be password-protected.
Usage
Apply read protection to tasks when you want to convert those tasks (programs) to “black box” programs.
Task 0
Accessable
END

Task 1
Not accessable
END

Password applied.
Task converted to "black box."

Task 2
Accessable
END

Note

1. If CX-Programmer Ver. 3.2 or an earlier version is used to read a task with
task read protection applied, an error will occur and the task will not be
read. Likewise, if a Programming Console or the PT Ladder Monitor function is used to read a password protected task, an error will occur and the
task will not be read.
2. The entire program can be transferred to another CPU Unit even if individual tasks in the program are read-protected. It is also possible to connect
online and create a program file (.OBJ file) with file memory operations. In
both cases, the task read protection remains effective for the passwordprotected tasks.
3. When the CX-Programmer is used to compare a user program in the computer's memory with a user program in the CPU Unit, password-protected
tasks will be compared too.

Restrictions on Function
Block Use

For programs containing function blocks (unit version 3.0 or later only), function block definitions can be read even if the entire program or tasks are readprotected.

Enabling/Disabling Creating File Memory Program Files
Previous CPU Units (PreVer. 2.0 CPU Units)

With the pre-Ver. 2.0 CS/CJ-series CPU Units, it was possible use file memory operations to transfer a program file (.OBJ file) to a Memory Card even if
the program was protected with UM read protection. (Consequently, illegal
copies could be made.)

CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
and CX-Programmer
Ver. 4.0 or Higher

Overview
When the entire program or individual tasks in a CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later are
read-protected from the CX-Programmer, an option can be set to enable or
disable the creation/backup of.OBJ program files. It will not be possible to create program files (.OBJ files) with file memory operations if the creation/backup of program files is prohibited with this setting. (This setting
prohibits both online transfers to a Memory Card/EM file memory as well as
offline storage of PLC data that was uploaded to the CX-Programmer.)
Disabling the creation of file memory program files can help prevent illegal
copying of the user program.

Section 1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades

CX-Programmer
When a password is being registered for the entire user program or
selected tasks, the creation of backup program files (.OBJ files) can be
enabled/disabled with an option setting.

Password?

Online creation of backup program files
(.OBJ files) prohibited by option setting.

CX-Programmer
Uploading of all PLC
data is prohibited.

CPU Unit

Backup program files (.OBJ files) cannot be
created with file memory operations.

Operating Procedure
1,2,3...

1. When registering a password in the UM read protection password Box or
Task read protection Box, select the Prohibit from saving into a protected
memory card Option.
Right-click.
Properties

2. Either select PLC - Transfer - To PLC to transfer the program or select
PLC - Protection - Set Password and click the OK button.
Usage
This option can be used to prevent the program from being transferred out of
the PLC using the password.
Note

1. The simple backup operation can still be performed when the creation of
program files is prohibited, but the backup program file (BACKUP.OBJ) will
not be created.
2. The program can be copied when program read protection is not enabled.
3. The setting to enable/disable creating file memory program files will not
take effect unless the program is transferred to the CPU Unit. Always transfer the program after changing this setting.

Enabling/Disabling Write Protection for Individual Tasks Using Passwords
Previous CPU Units
(Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)

With the pre-Ver. 2.0 CS/CJ-series CPU Units, the CPU Unit's user program
memory (UM) can be write-protected by turning ON pin 1 of the CPU Unit's
DIP switch. In this case, it is possible to overwrite the user program memory
by turning OFF pin 1.

Section 1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
and CX-Programmer
Ver. 4.0 or Higher

With the CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 and later CPU Units, the CPU Unit's UM area can
be write protected by turning ON pin 1 of the CPU Unit's DIP switch. The program (or selected tasks) can also be write-protected if the write protection
option is selected from the CX-Programmer when a password is being registered for the entire program or those selected tasks. The write protection setting can prevent unauthorized or accidental overwriting of the program.
CX-Programmer
When a password is being registered for the entire user
program or selected tasks, program write-protection can be
enabled/disabled with an option setting.

Password?

The user program cannot be overwritten.
CPU Unit
Overwriting can be prohibited with password protection,
regardless of the DIP switch setting.

Memory Card
The user program cannot be overwritten.

Note

1. If the selected tasks or program are write-protected by selecting this option
when registering a password, only the tasks (program) that are passwordprotected will be protected from overwriting. It will still be possible to overwrite other tasks or programs with operations such as online editing and
task downloading.
2. All tasks (programs) can be overwritten when program read protection is
not enabled.
3. The setting to enable/disable creating file memory program files will not
take effect unless the program is transferred to the CPU Unit. Always transfer the program after changing this setting.
Operating Procedure

1,2,3...

1. When registering a password in the UM read protection password Box or
Task read protection Box, select the Prohibit from overwriting to a protected program Option.
Right-click.
Properties

2. Either select PLC - Transfer - To PLC to transfer the program or select
PLC - Protection - Set Password and click the OK button.

Section 1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
Auxiliary Area Flags and Bits related to Password Protection
Name
UM Read Protection
Flag

1-6-3

Bit
address
A09900

Task Read Protection Flag

A09901

Program Write
Protection for Read
Protection

A09902

Enable/Disable Bit
for Program Backup

A09903

Description
Indicates whether or not the PLC (the entire user
program) is read-protected.
0: UM read protection is not set.
1: UM read protection is set.
Indicates whether or not selected program tasks
are read-protected.
0: Task read protection is not set.
1: Task read protection is set.
Indicates whether or not the write protection
option has been selected to prevent overwriting
of password-protected tasks or programs.
0: Overwriting allowed
1: Overwriting prohibited (write-protected)
Indicates whether or not a backup program file
(.OBJ file) can be created when UM read protection or task read protection is set.
0: Creation of backup program file allowed
1: Creation of backup program file prohibited

Write Protection from FINS Commands Sent to CPU Units via
Networks

Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
With the pre-Ver. 2.0 CS/CJ-series CPU Units, there was no way to prohibit
write operations and other editing operations sent to the PLC's CPU Unit as
FINS commands through a network such as Ethernet, i.e., connections other
than direct serial connections.

CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
Summary

With the CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 and later CS/CJ-series CPU Units, it is possible to
prohibit write operations and other editing operations sent to the PLC's CPU
Unit as FINS commands through a network (including write operations from
CX-Programmer, CX-Protocol, CX-Process, and other applications using FinsGateway). Read processes are not prohibited.
FINS write protection can disable write processes such as downloading the
user program, PLC Setup, or I/O memory, changing the operating mode, and
performing online editing.
It is possible to exclude selected nodes from write protection so that data can
be written from those nodes.
An event log in the CPU Unit automatically records all write processes sent
through the network and that log can be read with a FINS command.

Section 1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
Example:
Write operations by FINS commands are prohibited from some
nodes in the network (in this example, computer #1, PLC #1, and
PLC #2).

Computer #1

Computer #2

Network
PLC #2

PLC #1

Network

PLC #3

Network
Write access to this PLC
is enabled/disabled.

Write operations by FINS commands are not prohibited from
selected nodes in the network
(in this example, computer #2
and PLC #3).

Note This function prohibits writing by FINS commands only, so it has no effect on
write operations by functions other than FINS commands, such as data links.
Example Write Protection Patterns
Connection pattern
From a
computer
through a
direct serial
connection

Direct
connection to
PLC

Diagram (example)

Write
protection
Cannot be
applied.

Computer

Write-protection not effective
Peripheral port
PLC

Serial connection
(Peripheral bus or
host link)

Gateway
connection
(Serial-to-network) to PLC

RS-232C port
RS-232C port or 422A/485 port
on a Communications Board/Unit

Can be
applied.

Computer

The CPU Unit in PLC #2
can be write-protected.

PLC #1

PLC #2

Serial connection
(Peripheral bus
or host link)
Network

Section 1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
Connection pattern
From a computer through a
direct network connection

Diagram (example)
The CPU Unit in PLC #2
can be write-protected.

Computer
PLC #1

Write
protection
Can be
applied.

PLC #2

Network

From another PLC in the
network

CMND

If the CMND instruction is used to send
a FINS command (requesting a write
operation) to the CPU Unit of PLC #2,
the operation is not performed.

Can be
applied.

The CPU Unit in PLC #2
can be write-protected.
PLC #1

PLC #2

Network

Operation

With the CX-Programmer, open the PLC Setup's FINS Protection Tab and
select the Use FINS Write Protection Option. When this option is selected, it
will not be possible to execute write operations for that CPU Unit with FINS
commands sent through a network. To permit write operations from particular
nodes, enter network addresses and node addresses for the node under Protection Releasing Addresses. (Up to 32 nodes can be excluded from FINS
Write Protection).

Section 1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
PLC Setup
Item

Use FINS Write
Protection

Nodes Excluded
from Write Protection (Protection
Releasing
Addresses)

Number of Nodes
Excluded from FINS
Write Protection
(Do not set this
value. It is automatically calculated by
the CX-Programmer.)

Usage

Address in
Description
Programming
Console
Word 448, bit 15 Sets whether the CPU Unit is
write-protected from FINS commands sent through the network.
(Does not prohibit FINS commands sent through a direct serial
connection).
Words 449 to
This area lists the nodes in the
480
network that are not restricted by
FINS write protection. Up to 32
nodes can be specified.
Note These settings are effective
only when FINS write
protection is enabled.
Bits 08 to
Network address:
15
Network address of the FINS
command source
Bits 00 to
Node address:
07
Node address of the FINS
command source
Word 448, bits
00 to 07

Settings

0: Write protection
disabled
1: Write protection
enabled

Default setting

0: Write protection
disabled

00 to 7F hex

01 to FE hex, or FF
hex
(FF hex: node
address unspecified)
0
Contains the number of nodes that 0 to 32
(All nodes subject to
are not subject to the FINS write
(00 to 20 hex)
write protection.)
protection.
(A value of 0 indicates that all nodes
If 0 is specified (no nodes
are subject to write
excluded from write protection),
FINS write commands are prohib- protection.)
ited from all nodes other than the
local node.
Note This setting is effective only
when FINS write protection
is enabled.

The system can be configured so that a PLC can be written only from authorized nodes in the network. (For example, use this function when the system's
control/monitoring computer is the only node allowed to write to a Controller
within a piece of equipment.)
By limiting the number of nodes that can write to the PLC, it is possible to prevent system problems caused by unintentional overwrites during data monitoring.

Section 1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades

System control/monitoring computer
Allowed to
write/control
Equipment

Network
Monitoring computer
Controller
Not allowed to
write/control

Allowed to
write/control PLC
Network
Network

CS/CJ-series PLC

Operations Restricted by
Network FINS Write
Protection
Code
0102 hex
0103 hex
0105 hex
0202 hex
0203 hex
0307 hex
0308 hex
0401 hex
0402 hex
0702 hex
0C01 hex

FINS Write Commands
The following FINS commands are restricted by FINS write protection when
sent to the CPU Unit through the network.

Command name
MEMORY AREA WRITE
MEMORY AREA FILL
MEMORY AREA TRANSFER
PARAMETER AREA WRITE
PARAMETER AREA FILL (CLEAR)
PROGRAM AREA WRITE
PROGRAM AREA CLEAR
RUN
STOP
CLOCK WRITE
ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE

Code
2101 hex
2103 hex
2203 hex
2204 hex
2205 hex
2207 hex
2208 hex
220A hex
220B hex
220C hex
2215 hex
2301 hex
2302 hex

Command name
ERROR CLEAR
ERROR LOG POINTER CLEAR
SINGLE FILE WRITE
FILE MEMORY FORMAT
FILE DELETE
FILE COPY
FILE NAME CHANGE
MEMORY AREA-FILE TRANSFER
PARAMETER AREA-FILE TRANSFER
PROGRAM AREA-FILE TRANSFER
CREATE/DELETE DIRECTORY
FORCED SET/RESET
FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL

Section 1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades

Operations from CX-Programmer (including CX-Net) through the Network
The following CX-Programmer (including CX-Net) operations are restricted by
FINS write protection when performed on the CPU Unit through the network.
Operations not
allowed through the
network when FINS
write protection is
enabled.

Note

• Changing the Operating Mode
• Transferring the ladder program to the CPU Unit
• Transferring parameter area data (PLC Setup, I/O table, and
CPU Bus Unit Setup) to the CPU Unit
• Transferring memory area data (I/O memory data) to the
CPU Unit
• Transferring the variable table, comments, or program index
to the CPU Unit
• Forced Set/Reset
• Changing timer/counter set values
• Online editing
• Writing file memory
• Clearing the error log
• Setting the clock
• Releasing the access right
• Transferring the routing table
• Transferring the data link table

1. FINS write protection does not prevent CX-Programmer operations from a
computer connected through a direct serial connection.
2. FINS write protection does not prevent the following file memory write
operations.
• Automatic transfer from the Memory Card at startup
• Simple backup function (including backup operations to selected
Units/Boards)
• Writing files with the FWRIT (WRITE DATA FILE) instruction
Operations from Other Support Software
FINS write protection also prevents the following operations performed
through the network by the CX-Protocol and CX-Process.
• Changing the CPU Unit's operating mode, writing memory areas,
transferring PLC Setup settings, transferring the I/O table, forced
set/reset, and clearing the CPU Unit's error log
Operations from Applications That Use FinsGateway
FINS write protection prevents all write operations addressed to the CPU Unit
from applications that use FinsGateway, such as PLC Reporter and Compolet.

1-6-4

Online Network Connections without I/O Tables

Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
With the pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units, it was not possible to make an online connection to other PLCs in the network from CX-Programmer unless the I/O
tables had been created (even if the network connections were completed)
because the Network Communications Unit itself was not recognized from the
CPU Unit. Consequently, it was necessary to connect a Programming Device
(CX-Programmer or a Programming Console) to each PLC through a serial
connection and create and I/O tables in each PLC in order to make online
connections through the network.

Section 1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
Summary

With the CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 and later CS/CJ-series CPU Units, the CPU Unit
can recognize a CPU Bus Unit (such as a Network Communications Unit, see
note) even if the I/O tables have not been created and there is no registered
I/O tables.
CPU Bus Unit
(including Network Communications Units)

CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver.2.0 or later

Network
CPU Bus Units (including Network Communications Units)
can be recognized before an I/O table is created.

Online connection
can be made.

Note Network Communications Units include Ethernet Units, Controller Link Units,
SYSMAC Link Units, and DeviceNet Units.
Usage

If the nodes are connected to the network, this function allows a computerbased Programming Device (such as the CX-Programmer) to connect online
to PLCs in the network even if the I/O tables have not been created. Since a
network connection is established with the PLCs, setup operations can be
performed such as creating the I/O tables (or editing and transferring I/O
tables), transferring the user program, transferring the PLC Setup, and transferring the CPU Bus Unit Setup.
This function is particularly useful when connecting the CX-Programmer via
Ethernet (using a CS1W-ETN21), because the I/O tables can be created
through Ethernet so a serial cable isn't required and it isn't necessary to
spend extra time establishing a serial connection.

Details

1:1 Computer-to-PLC connection

1:N Computer-to-PLC connection

CX-Programmer
CX-Programmer
CS/CJseries
CPU Unit
Ver.2.0

Ethernet

CS/CJseries
CPU Unit
Ver.2.0

I/O table not
registered

Even without an I/O table, it is
possible to make an online connection, create the I/O table,
transfer the program, and perform other operations.

I/O table not registered

CS/CJseries
CPU Unit
Ver.2.0

I/O table not registered I/O table not registered

Ethernet
Even without an I/O table, it is possible to make an online
connection, create the I/O table, transfer the program, and
perform other operations.

• Applicable Units: All CS/CJ-series CPU Bus Units
• Applicable computer-based Programming Devices: CX-Programmer and
CX-Protocol only
• Applicable functions: Online connections from CX-Programmer and CXProtocol, and online functions of the applicable CPU Units and CPU Bus
Units

Section 1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
Note

1. A non-fatal I/O verification error will occur if a CPU Bus Unit (including a
Network Communications Unit) is used without creating I/O tables.
2. With a CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later CS1-H CPU Unit, CPU Bus Units can be
used even if the I/O tables have not been created, but the purpose of this
function is making an online connection through the network with a computer-based Programming Device (such as the CX-Programmer).
The I/O tables are used to identify the mounted Units and allocate I/O, so
always create the I/O tables before operating the PLC.
3. Data can be exchanged between the CPU Unit and CPU Bus Units even if
the I/O tables have not been created, but do not perform any online functions other than establishing an online connection with a computer-based
Programming Device (such as the CX-Programmer).
4. When a CS1W-ETN21 or CJ1W-ETN21 Ethernet Unit is being used, the
Ethernet Unit's IP address is automatically set to the default value of
192.168.250.xx, where xx is the FINS node address. After connecting the
ethernet cable between the CX-Programmer and PLC (without making a
direct serial connection and creating the I/O tables), manually set the computer's IP address (Example: 192.168.250.55) in the Windows Local Area
Connection Properties. An online connection can be established just by
setting the Ethernet Unit's IP address (192.168.250.xx) and node in the
CX-Programmer.
Note When connecting the computer directly to the Ethernet Unit, use an
Ethernet crossover cable.

1-6-5

Communications through a Maximum of 8 Network Levels

Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
With the pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units, it was possible to communicate through 3
network levels max. (see note), including the local network. It was not possible
to communicate through 4 or more levels.
Note

1. This functionality is enabled only after setting routing tables with the CXNet in CX-Programmer version 4.0 or higher.
2. A Gateway to the network via serial communications was not counted as a
level.

FINS command
source
OR

Level count = 1

Level count = 2

Network 2

FINS command
destination

Serial
connection
Network 1

Network 3

This connection is not counted as a network level.

Section 1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
Summary

With the CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later CS/CJ-series CPU Units, it is possible to
communicate through 8 network levels max. (see note), including the local
network.
Note

1. FINS commands can only be sent across up to 8 network levels, however,
when the destination is a CPU Unit. FINS commands can be sent to other
destinations up to 3 network levels away.
2. CX-Net in CX-Programmer version 4.0 or higher must be used to set routing tables to enable communicating through 8 network levels.
3. A Gateway to the network via serial communications was not counted as a
level.
Compatible Networks
Only the following 2 kinds of networks can be used when communicating
through a maximum of 8 networks. The network levels can be combined in
any order.
• Controller Link
• Ethernet

Note Communications are restricted to a maximum of 8 networks through
DeviceNet and SYSMAC Link networks.
Configuration of Compatible Models
All of the CPU Units must be CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later CS/CJ-series CPU
Units. Also, the Gateway Counter Setting must be made with the CX-Net.
FINS command
source

Level
count = 1

Level
count = 2

Network 2

Level
count = 3

Level
count = 4

Level
count = 7

Network 4

Network 7

FINS command
destination

Serial
connection
Network 1
This connection is not counted as a network level.

Internal Structure

Network 3
Network 8

The Gateway Counter (GCT) is in the FINS header of the FINS command/response frame. This counter value is decremented (−1) each time a
network level is crossed.
FINS Command Frame

FINS header
ICF

RSV

Command code

GCT

GCT (Gateway counter: Number of allowed bridge passages)
The standard setting is 02 hex when sending, but this value can be
user-set up to 07 hex.
The count is decremented by one each time a network level is passed.

Text

Section 1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
Example:
At this point, the gateway counter = 6 hex
FINS command
source

Network 2

At this point, the gateway counter = 4 hex

FINS command

Network 1

Network 3

At this point, the gateway counter = 7 hex

Operating Procedure

FINS command
destination

Network 4

At this point, the gateway counter = 5 hex

FINS command

Network 8
At this point, the gateway counter = 0 hex

Set the maximum number of network levels that can be crossed by setting the
Gateway Counter Setting to 2 or 7. The gateway counter setting can be
changed in the routing table settings of the CX-Net in the CX-Programmer
Ver.4.0 or higher.
Note

1. The gateway counter is the maximum number of levels that can be
crossed, i.e., the maximum number of junctions.
With earlier CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units), up to 3 network levels
were allowed, so the gateway counter was set to 2.
With the CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 and later CS/CJ-series CPU Units, up to 8
network levels are allowed, so the maximum gateway counter setting is 7.
2. With CS/CJ-series CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later, communications are possible for up to 8 network levels simply by setting the normal routing tables.
No other operations are required.
3. When using communications only for up to 3 network levels, the CS/CJ-series CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later can be used together with other CPU Units.
When using communications only for up to 4 to 8 network levels, use only
CS/CJ-series CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later. Other CPU Units cannot be used.
(Routing error (error codes 0501 to 0504 hex) may occurs in one of the
relaying PLCs, preventing a FINS response from being returned.
4. With CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 2.0 or later, the Gateway
Counter (GCT: Number of allowed bridges passed) for FINS command/
response frames is the value decremented from 07 hex (variable). (In earlier versions, the value was decremented from 02 hex.)
With unit version 3.0 or later, the default GCT for FINS command/response
frames is the value decremented from 02 hex. CX-Net can be select to
used 07 hex as the value from which to decrement.
5. Do not use the Gateway Counter (GCT: Number of allowed bridge passages) enclosed in the FINS header of the FINS command/response frame in
verification checks performed by user applications in host computers. The
GCT in the FINS header is used by the system, and a verification error may
occur if it is used to perform verification checks in user applications, particularly when using CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 2.0 or later.

Section 1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades

1-6-6

Connecting Online to PLCs via NS-series PTs

Summary

The CX-Programmer can be connected online to a PLC connected via a serial
line to an NS-series PT that is connected to the CX-Programmer via Ethernet
(see note 2). This enables uploading, downloading, and monitoring the ladder
program and other data.
CX-Programmer
(Example IP address: 192.168.0.1)

Connect online to PLC #1 to enable
programming, monitoring, and other operations.
NS-series PT
(Example IP address:
192.168.0.22)

PLC #1
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0

Ethernet (See note 1.)
(Example network address: 1)

Note

1:N NT Link
(Example network address: 111)

1. The NS-series PT must be version 3.0 or higher and the CX-Programmer
must be version 3.1 or higher.
2. Connection is not possible through an NS-series PT connected serially to
the CX-Programmer.

Connection Method

In CX-Programmer, open the Change PLC Window and set the Network Type
to Ethernet. Click the Settings Button and set the IP address of the NS-series
PT on the Driver Tab Page. Also make the following settings on the Network
Tab Page.
• FINS Source Address
Set the local network address of the NS-series PT for the Network (example network address: 1).
• FINS Destination Address
Network: Set the address to 111 if the PLC is connected to serial port A
on the NS-series PT and to 112 if it is connected to serial port B.
Node: Always set to 1
• Frame Length: 1,000 (See note.)
• Response Timeout: 2
Note Do not set the frame length higher than 1,000. If any higher value is used, the
program transfer will fail and a memory error will occur.

Section 1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades

1-6-7

Setting First Slot Words

Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
With CX-Programmer Ver. 3.0 or earlier, only the first addresses on Racks
could be set. The first address for a slot could not be set.
First addresses on Racks
Example:
Rack No.
CPU Rack
Rack 1
Rack 2
Rack 3
Rack 4
Rack 5
Rack 6
Rack 7

CX-Programmer
Ver. 3.0 or earlier

First address
100
0
200

CIO 0100

CPU Rack slot

0 1

Rack 1 slot

0 1

2 3 4

CIO 0000

0 1

CIO 0200

Rack 2 slot

CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1 or Higher
Summary

Starting with CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1, the first addresses for slots can be set
when editing the I/O tables for CS/CJ-series CPU Units (CS1-H, CJ1-H, and
CJ1M). The first address can be set for up to eight slots. (See note.)
Note This function is supported only for CS1-H/CJ1-H CPU Units manufactured on
June 1, 2002 or later (lot number 020601@@@@ or later). It is supported for all
CJ1M CPU Units regardless of lot number. It is not supported for CS1D CPU
Units.

Section 1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
Operating Procedure

Select Option - Rack/Slot Start Addresses in the PLC IO Table - Traffic Controller Window. This command will enable setting both the first Rack
addresses and the first slot addresses.

Select Option - Rack/Slot Start. Addresses.

Double-click

This function can be used, for example to allocate fixed addresses to Input
Units and Output Units. (With CQM1H PLCs, input bits are from IR 000 to
IR 015 and output bits are from IR 100 to IR 115. First slot addresses can be
set when replacing CQM1H PLCs with CS/CJ-series PLCs to reduce conversion work.)
First slot addresses
Example:
Rack No.
CPU Rack
CPU Rack
Rack 1
Rack 1
Rack 2
Rack 2

CX-Programmer
Ver. 3.2 or higher

CPU Rack slot

Slot No.
Slot No. 00
Slot No. 02
Slot No. 00
Slot No. 02
Slot No. 00
Slot No. 01

0 1

CIO 0100
CIO 0000

Rack 1 slot

0 1

2 3 4

CIO 0102
CIO 0001

Rack 2 slot

0 1

CIO 0105
CIO 0005

100
0
102
1
105
5

Up to 8 settings
can be made.

Note The first address settings for Racks and slots can be uploaded/downloaded
from/to the CPU Unit.

Section 1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later and CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 or Higher
Summary

When using CX-Programmer Ver.4.0 or higher with CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later,
the first address can be set for up to 64 slots.
Note This function is supported only for CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units
Ver. 2.0 or later. It is not supported for CS1D CPU Units.
First slot addresses
Example:
CX-Programmer
Ver. 4.0 or higher

CPU Unit Ver. 2.0
or later
0 1
CPU Rack slot

1-6-8

Rack No.
CPU Rack
CPU Rack
Rack 1
Rack 1
Rack 2
Rack 2

Slot No.
Slot No. 00
Slot No. 02
Slot No. 00
Slot No. 02
Slot No. 00
Slot No. 01

100
0
102
1
105
5

Rack 7

Slot No. 01

Up to 64 settings
can be made.

CIO 0100
CIO 0000

Rack 1 slot

0 1

2 3 4

CIO 0102
CIO 0001

Rack 2 slot

0 1

CIO 0105
CIO 0005

Rack 7 slot

0 1

CIO 0155
CIO 0050

Automatic Transfers at Power ON without a Parameter File

Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
Previously with the CS/CJ-series CPU Units, both the program file for automatic transfer at power ON (AUTOEXEC.OBJ) and the parameter file for automatic transfer at power ON (AUTOEXEC.STD) had to be stored on the
Memory Card to enable automatic transfers to the CPU Unit at power ON.
Also, the parameter file for automatic transfer at power ON (AUTOEXEC.STD)
could not be created without the actual PLC (regardless of whether it was
made in online operations from the CX-Programmer or a Programming Console or by using the easy backup operation).

Section 1-6

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades

Even if a program file (.OBJ) was created offline without the actual PLC and
then sent to a remote PLC as an email attachment, the program file could not
be transferred to the CPU Unit without a Programming Device.
Personal
computer

Local site (no Programming Device)
CPU Unit

Mail

Program cannot be transferred
(see note).
Program file
(AUTOEXEC.OBJ)
Note: Transfer is not possible because
there is no parameter file
(AUTOEXEC.STD).

Internet

Mail

Program file (.OBJ) sent
as mail attachment.

CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
Summary

With CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0, the user program can be automatically
transferred to the CPU Unit at power ON without a parameter file (.STD) if the
name of the program file (.OBJ) is changed to REPLACE.OBJ on the CX-Programmer and the file is stored on a Memory Card. If data files are included
with the program file using this function, the following data file names are
used: REPLACE.IOM, REPLCDM.IOM, REPLCE@.IOM.
Note

1. If the Memory Card contains a REPLACE.OBJ file, any parameter file on
the Memory Card will not be transferred.
2. If the Memory Card contains both a REPLACE.OBJ file and a AUTOEXEC.OBJ file, neither will be transferred.

Personal
computer

Remote site (no Programming Device)
CPU Unit

Mail

Program can be transferred
(see note).
REPLACE.OBJ

Mail

Internet

Note: Transfer is possible even
without a parameter file
(AUTOEXEC.STD).

Program file created on CXProgrammer (see note), file name
changed to REPLACE.OJB, and
file sent as mail attachment.

Note With CX-Programmer Ver. 3.0 or higher, a program file (.OBJ) can be created
offline and saved on a computer storage media. Select Transfer - To File
from the PLC Menu. This enable creating a program file offline without a PLC
so that the name can be changed to enable sending the program file.

CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades

1-6-9

Section 1-6

Operation Start/End Times

Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
The time that operation started and the time operation ended were not stored
in the CPU Unit.

CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
The times that operation started and ended are automatically stored in the
Auxiliary Area.
• The time that operation started as a result of changing the operating
mode to RUN or MONITOR mode is stored in A515 to A517 of the Auxiliary Area. The year, month, day, hour, minutes, and seconds are stored.
• The time that operation stopped as a result of changing the operating
mode to PROGRAM mode or due to a fatal error is stored in A518 to
A520 of the Auxiliary Area. The year, month, day, hour, minutes, and seconds are stored.
This information simplifies managing PLC System operating times.

1-6-10 New Application Instructions
The following instructions have been added. Refer to the Instructions Reference Manual (W474) for details.
• Multiple Interlock Instructions:
MULTI-INTERLOCK DIFFERENTIATION HOLD (MILH(517)), MULTIINTERLOCK DIFFERENTIATION RELEASE (MILR(518)), and MULTIINTERLOCK CLEAR (MILC(519))
• TIME-PROPORTIONAL OUTPUT (TPO(685))
• GRAY CODE CONVERSION (GRY(474))
• Combination Instructions:
TEN KEY INPUT (TKY(211)), HEXADECIMAL KEY INPUT (HKY(212)),
DIGITAL SWITCH INPUT (DSW(213)), MATRIX INPUT (MTR(210)), and
7-SEGMENT DISPLAY OUTPUT (7SEG(214))
• Time Comparison Instructions: =DT, <>DT, DT, >=DT
• Explicit Message Instructions:
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND (EXPLT(720)), EXPLICIT GET ATTRIBUTE
(EGATR(721)), EXPLICIT SET ATTRIBUTE (ESATR(722)), EXPLICIT
WORD READ (ECHRD(723)), and EXPLICIT WORD WRITE
(ECHWR(724))
• EXPANDED BLOCK COMPARE (BCMP2(502)) (This instruction, previously supported by only the CJ1M PLCs, is now supported by the CS1-H
and CJ1-H.)
• INTELLIGENT I/O READ (IORD(222)) and INTELLIGENT I/O WRITE
(IOWR(223)) (These instructions could previously be used only for Special I/O Units, but they can now be used to read and write data for CPU
Bus Units.)

Section 1-7

CS-series Function Tables

1-7

CS-series Function Tables
The following tables list functions for the CS-series CPU Units.

1-7-1

Functions Arranged by Purpose

Studying Basic
Operations and
the System

Purpose
Studying the system configuration

Function

Studying I/O allocations
Finding the installation dimensions
Finding the installation method

3-1-2 Components
7-1 PLC Setup

Setting the DIP switch
Setting the PLC Setup
Using special flags in the Auxiliary
Area
Studying the cycle time
Troubleshooting
Improving
Program
Structure

Standardizing programs as modules.
Developing a program with several
programmers working in parallel.
Making the program easier to understand.
Creating step programs.

Simplifying the
Program

Appendix B Auxiliary Area
10-4-2 Cycle Time
Overview
11-2-4 Error Processing Flowchart
Program with tasks to divide the pro- Programming
Manual (W394)
gram, use function blocks (FBs),
specify symbols, and define local
and global symbols.
Use ST (Structured Text) language.
Use the step instructions.

Instructions Reference Manual
(W474)

Using BASIC-like mnemonic instructions to program processes that are
difficult to enter in the ladder diagram format (such as conditional
branches and loops).

Use the block programming instructions.
Use ST (Structured Text) language.

Creating looped program sections.

Use FOR(512) and NEXT(513) or
JMP(004) and JME(005).

Indirectly addressing DM words.

All words in the DM and EM Areas
can be indirectly addressed.
Use Index Registers as pointers to
indirectly address data area
addresses.
The Index Registers are very useful
in combination with loops, increment
instructions, and table data processing instructions. The auto-increment,
auto-decrement, and offset functions are also supported.
Use function blocks (FBs).
CX-Programmer
Operation Manual Function
Blocks (W438)
Use MCRO(099).
Instructions Reference Manual
(W474)

Simplifying the program by switching
to PLC memory address specification.

Consolidating instruction blocks with
the same pattern but different
addresses into a single instruction
block.

Reference
SECTION 2 Specifications and System Configuration
SECTION 8 I/O
Allocations
5-2-4 Mounting
Dimensions
5-2 Installation

Instructions Reference Manual
(W474)
Programming
Manual (W394)

Section 1-7

CS-series Function Tables
Purpose
Managing the
Cycle Time

Reducing the cycle time.

Setting a fixed (minimum) cycle time.
• Variations in I/O response times
can be eliminated by suppressing
processing variations.
Setting a maximum cycle time.
(Generating an error for a cycle time
exceeding the maximum.)

Reducing the I/O response time for
particular I/O points.
Receiving input pulses shorter than
the cycle time.

Finding the I/O refresh times for
Units
Studying the I/O response times
Finding the increase in cycle time
caused by online editing

Function

Reference

• Use tasks to put parts of the pro- Programming
Manual (W394)
gram that don’t need to be executed into “standby” status.
• Use JMP(004) and JME(005) to
jump parts of the task that don’t
need to be executed.
• Convert parts of the task to subroutines if they are executed only
under particular conditions.
• Disable a Unit’s Special I/O Unit
refreshing in the PLC Setup if it
isn’t necessary to exchange data
with that Special I/O Unit every
cycle.
• Set sharing index and data registers by all tasks if index and data
registers are not being used.
Set a minimum cycle time in the PLC
Setup.

Set a maximum cycle time (watch
cycle time) in the PLC Setup. If the
cycle time exceeds this value, the
Cycle Time Too Long Flag (A40108)
will be turned ON and PLC operation
will be stopped.
Use an I/O interrupt task, immediate
refreshing, or IORF(097).
Use a quick-response input on a
Unit with High-speed Inputs or a
High-density I/O Unit (a Special I/O
Unit).

7-1 PLC Setup

Programming
Manual (W394)
3-6-3 Units with
High-speed Inputs
and 3-7 C200H
High-density I/O
Units (Special I/O
Units)
10-4-2 Cycle Time
Overview
10-4-6 I/O
Response Time
10-4-5 Online
Editing Cycle
Time Extension

Section 1-7

CS-series Function Tables
Purpose
Using Interrupt
Tasks

Monitoring operating status at regular intervals
• Monitoring operating status at regular intervals.
Performing interrupt processing
when an input goes ON.
• Executing processing immediately
with an input.
Issuing an interrupt to the CPU
when data is received through serial
communications.
Executing an emergency interrupt
program when the power supply
fails.

Function
Use a scheduled interrupt task.

Use an I/O interrupt task.

Use a Serial Communications Board
and external interrupt task or an
ASCII Unit.
Use a power OFF interrupt task.
Enable the power OFF interrupt task
in the PLC Setup.
10-4-7 Interrupt
Response Times
Programming
Manual (W394)
Instructions Reference Manual
(W474)

Studying the interrupt response time
Finding the priority of interrupt tasks
Data Processing

Operating a FIFO or LIFO stack.
Performing basic operations on
tables made up of 1-word records.

System
Configuration

Performing complex operations on
tables made up of 1-word records.
Performing operations on tables
made up of records longer than 1
word.
(For example, the temperature, pressure, and other manufacturing settings for different models of a
product could be stored in separate
records.)
Monitoring several different kinds of
devices through the RS-232C port.
Changing protocol during operation
(from a modem connection to host
link, for example).

Reference
Programming
Manual (W394)

Use the stack instructions
(FIFO(633) and LIFO(634)).
Use range instructions such as
MAX(182), MIN(183), and
SRCH(181).
Use Index Registers as pointers in
special instructions.
Use Index Registers and the record- Programming
table instructions (DIM, GETR, etc.) Manual (W394)

Multiple serial ports can be installed
with Serial Communications Units
(protocol macro) and ASCII Units.
Use STUP(237), the CHANGE
SERIAL PORT SETUP instruction.

2-3 Basic System
Configuration
Instructions Reference Manual
(W474)

Section 1-7

CS-series Function Tables
Purpose
Connecting
Programming
Devices

Connecting a Programming Console.
Connecting a Programming Device
(e.g., the CX-Programmer).

Connecting a host computer.

Connecting a PT.

Connecting a standard serial device
to the CPU Unit (no-protocol mode).
Controlling Out- Turning OFF all outputs on basic
puts
Output Units and High-density Output Units (a type of Special I/O Unit).
Maintaining the status of all outputs
on Output Units when PLC operation
stops (hot start).
Controlling
Maintaining the previous contents of
I/O Memory
all I/O Memory at the start of PLC
operation (hot start).
Maintaining the previous contents of
all I/O Memory when the PLC is
turned on.

Function
Connect to the peripheral port with
pin 4 of the CPU Unit’s DIP switch
OFF.
Connect to the peripheral port with
pin 4 of the CPU Unit’s DIP switch
OFF or with pin 4 ON and the network type of the CX-Programmer set
to the peripheral bus.
Connect to the RS-232C port with
pin 5 of the CPU Unit’s DIP switch
ON or with pin 5 OFF and the network type of the CX-Programmer set
to the peripheral bus.
Connect to the RS-232C port or
peripheral port. (Set the communications mode to “host link” in the
PLC Setup.)
Connect to the RS-232C port or
peripheral port. (Set the communications mode to “NT Link” in the
PLC Setup.)
Set the PT communications settings
for a 1:N NT Link.
Connect to the RS-232C port.
(Set the communications mode to
“no-protocol” in the PLC Setup.)
Turn ON the Output OFF Bit
(A50015).

Reference
3-3-2 Programming Consoles
3-3-3 CX-Programmer

2-5 Expanded
System Configuration

Programming
Manual (W394)

Turn ON the IOM Hold BIt (A50012).

Turn ON the IOM Hold BIt (A50012). Programming
Manual (W394)
Turn ON the IOM Hold BIt (A50012)
and set the PLC Setup to maintain
the status of the IOM Hold Bit at
start-up.
(IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup)

Section 1-7

CS-series Function Tables
Purpose
File Memory

Text string
processing

Automatically transferring the program, I/O Memory, and PLC Setup
from the Memory Card when the
PLC is turned on.
• Easily replacing the program
onsite.
• Operating without a battery.
Creating a library of programs for different program arrangements.
Creating a library of parameter settings for various PLC Racks and
models.
Creating a library of data files with
settings for various PLC Racks, and
CPU Bus Units.
Storing I/O Comment data within the
Memory Card.
Storing operating data (trend and
quality data) within the CPU Unit
during program execution.
Replacing the program without
stopping operation.
Reading and writing I/O memory
data with a spreadsheet.
Creating data that can be read with
a text editor.
Performing string processing at the
PLC which was performed at the
host computer previously and reducing the program load at the host
computer (operations such as read,
insert, search, replace, and
exchange).
Performing string processing operations such as rearranging text
strings.
Receiving data from external
devices (such as bar code readers)
through serial communications, storing the data in DM, and reading just
the required string when it is
needed.

Function
Enable the “automatic transfer at
start-up” function by turning ON pin
2 of the CPU Unit’s DIP switch and
create an AUTOEXEC file.

Reference
Programming
Manual (W394)

Memory Card functions (Program
Files)
Memory Card functions (Parameter
Files)
Memory Card functions (Data Files)

Memory Card functions
(Symbol Table Files)
EM File Memory Functions and the
FREAD(700)/FWRIT(701) instructions
Memory Card functions (Program
Replacement during PLC Operation)
Read/write data files using instructions in CSV or text format.
Use the WRITE TEXT FILE instruction (TWRIT(704)).
• Easily replacing the program
Instructions Referonsite
ence Manual
(W474)
• Operating without a battery
Combine the Host Link function with
the text string processing instructions.
Replacing the program without stopping operation.
Use the string comparison instructions and index registers.
Use the WRITE TEXT FILE instruction (TWRIT(704)).
Combine the protocol macro function with the text string processing
instructions.

Section 1-7

CS-series Function Tables
Purpose
Maintenance
Changing the program while it is
and Debugging being executed.

Sampling I/O Memory data.
• Periodic sampling
• Sampling once each cycle
• Sampling at specified times
Confirming there are no errors in
instruction execution.
Recording the time that power was
turned on, the last time that power
was interrupted, the number of
power interruptions, and the total
PLC on time.

Replacing the program without stopping operation.
Reading the time/date when the
user program was changed.
Reading the time/date when the
parameter area was changed.
Programming/monitoring the PLC
remotely.
• Programming or monitoring a PLC
on the network through Host Link.
• Programming or monitoring a PLC
through modems.
Programming/monitoring PLCs in
other networks
Error Processing and Troubleshooting

Other
Functions

Generating a non-fatal or fatal error
for user-defined conditions.
• Non-fatal errors (Operation continues.)
• Fatal errors (PLC operation stops.)
• Not recording user-defined alarms
and errors in the error log.
Analyzing time and logic in execution of an instruction block.
Recording the time/date of errors
and error details.
Reading recorded error details.
Allocating words in the I/O Area by
specifying the first word allocated to
Rack.

Function
Use the online editing function from
a Programming Device.
(Several instruction blocks can be
changed with CX-Programmer.)

Reference
Programming
Manual (W394)

Data trace at regular intervals
Data trace at the end of each cycle
Data trace each time that
TRSM(045) is executed
Set the PLC Setup to specify the
desired operating mode at start-up.
(Startup Mode)
Read the Auxiliary Area words
containing power supply information.
Startup Time: A510 and A511
Power Interruption Time: A512 and
A513
Number of Power Interruptions:
A514
Set the PLC Setup so that instruction errors are treated as fatal errors.
(Instruction Error Operation)

Host Link → Network Gateway
function

2-5 Expanded
System Configuration

Host Link through modems
Communicate with PLCs up to 2
network levels away through
Controller Link or Ethernet.
Programming
Manual (W394)
FAILURE ALARM: FAL(006)
SEVERE FAILURE ALARM:
FALS(007)
Set the PLC Setup so that userdefined FAL errors are not recorded
in the error log.
FAILURE POINT DETECTION:
FPD(269)
Use the error log function. Up to 20
error records can be stored.
Set the first word allocated to Rack
by registering the I/O table from the
CX-Programmer. (Words must be
allocated to Racks in the order that
the Racks are connected.)

Programming
Manual (W394)

Section 1-7

CS-series Function Tables
Purpose

Function

Reducing input chattering and the
effects of noise.

Allocating words in the I/O Area
freely by specifying the word allocated to a slot.

1-7-2

Reference

Specify the input response times for
Basic I/O Units in the PLC Setup.
(Basic I/O Unit Input Response
Time)
Set the first word allocated to a slot 8-4 Allocating
by registering the I/O tables from the First Words to
CX-Programmer.
Slots

Communications Functions (Serial/Network)

Monitoring from
the Host Computer

Purpose
RS-232C or RS-422/485

Host Link communications from the
PLC

Network communications through
RS-232C or RS-422/485

Network

Control system

Information system
Creating a custom, user-defined protocol
Creating a simple protocol

Protocol: Required Equipment
Host Link:
Port in the CPU Unit, Serial Communications Board, or Serial Communications Unit
Enclose a FINS command with a
Host Link header and terminator and
issue it from the PLC as a network
communications instruction.
Controller Link and Ethernet communications are possible through the
Host Link. (Enclose a FINS command
with a Host Link header and terminator and issue it from the PLC as a network communications instruction.)
Controller Link:
Controller Link Unit or Controller Link
Board
Ethernet: Ethernet Unit

Reference
2-5-2 Systems

2-5-3 Communications
Network System

Communicating
with a PT

Direct access

Data Link
between PLCs

High capacity or free word allocation

Message
communications
between PLCs

Normal or high capacity

Protocol written in BASIC: ASCII Unit 2-5-2 Systems
Protocol Macro:
Serial Communications Board or
Serial Communications Unit
No protocol:
CPU Unit’s RS-232C port, ASCII Unit,
or Protocol Macro
NT Link:
Port in the CPU Unit, Serial Communications Board, or Serial Communications Unit
Controller Link: Controller Link Unit
2-5-3 Communications
PLC Link: PLC Link Unit
Network System
Controller Link:
Controller Link Unit or Controller Link
Board
Controller Link: Controller Link Unit

Information system

Ethernet: Ethernet Unit

Connecting to a
Standard Serial
Device

High-speed data exchange
No protocol

Low capacity and fixed word allocation
Data Link between PLC and computer

Section 1-7

CS-series Function Tables
Purpose
Message
communications
between PLC
and computer

Control system

Remote I/O
between PLC
and Slaves

High-density I/O

Information system

Free word allocation

Protocol: Required Equipment
Controller Link:
Controller Link Unit or Controller Link
Board
Ethernet: Ethernet Unit

Reference
2-5-3 Communications
Network System

DeviceNet:
DeviceNet Master Unit and required
Slave Units

Multi-vendor capability
Analog I/O capability
Multi-level architecture
High-speed Remote I/O

Remote I/O Slave Rack connection

CompoBus/S:
CompoBus/S Master Unit and
required Slave Units
SYSMAC BUS Wired Remote I/O:
SYSMAC BUS Master Unit and
required Slave Units

2-3 Basic
System Configuration

Section 1-8

CS1-H Functions Arranged by Purpose

1-8
Increasing
speed

CS1-H Functions Arranged by Purpose
Purpose
Reducing the cycle time and improving
communications responsiveness.
• Fast large-scale data exchange with the
host is needed even though the PLC
program is very large.
• Consistently timed data exchange with
SCADA software is needed.
• Fast message communications and control
are required between distributed PLCs.
• It is necessary to minimize the effects on
the cycle time of future system expansion
or increases in communications.
When using parallel processing mode, it is
necessary to maintain concurrency
between I/O memory data accessed for
instruction execution and from communications (for data larger than one word).
When using parallel processing mode, it is
not necessary to maintain concurrency
between I/O memory data accessed for
instruction execution and from communications (for data larger than one word).
Giving higher priority to communications
response than the cycle time. (For example,
to give priority to the read/write response of
CPU Unit data from SCADA software for
process control).

Function
Use the Parallel Processing Mode with Synchronous Memory
Access or Parallel Processing Mode with Asynchronous Memory Access.
Using parallel processing enables the following savings.
For example, if the program consists of basic instructions with a
cycle time of approximately 10 ms and one Ethernet Unit is
being used, the cycle time will be reduced to approximately
90% of the time for the normal mode. and the peripheral servicing time will be reduced to approximately 40% of the time for
the normal mode.

Use the Parallel Processing Mode with Synchronous Memory
Access.

Use the Parallel Processing Mode with Asynchronous Memory
Access.

The response of peripheral servicing can be adjusted by using
the following modes (listed in order from highest response):
Parallel Processing Mode with Asynchronous Memory Access,
Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode (with a long instruction execution cycle), Parallel Processing Mode with Synchronous
Memory Access, Normal Mode
Minimizing cycle time fluctuations and main- Table data processing and text string processing, which often
taining consistent I/O response even when
require time, can be set in the PLC Setup so that they are proextensive table data and text string data is
cessed in the background. The default is for no background
being processed
execution. (For background execution, time slicing is used to
separate processing over several cycles.)
If background execution is used, the effect on the cycle time
can be limited to 4% or less (PLC Setup default setting).
Improving data link response with a long
The CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH instruction (DLNK(226))
cycle time (Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK) can be used at one or more locations in the ladder program.
This enables refreshing data links for specified Controller Link
or SYSMAC LINK Units, whenever necessary, as well as during
the I/O refresh period. (The actual data that is refreshed
depends on the communications cycle time.)
Improving DeviceNet remote I/O response
The CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH instruction (DLNK(226))
can be used in the ladder program. This enables refreshing
remote I/O for DeviceNet Units, whenever necessary, as well
as during the I/O refresh period. (The actual data that is
refreshed depends on the communications cycle time.)
Improving the response of protocol macro
data transfers for Serial Communications
Units

The CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH instruction (DLNK(226))
can be used at one or more locations in the ladder program.
This enables refreshing data transferred for protocol macros
executed by Serial Communications Units, whenever necessary, as well as during the I/O refresh period. (The actual data
that is refreshed depends on the communications cycle time.)
Immediately refreshing status data and other The CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH instruction (DLNK(226))
words allocated to CPU Bus Units in the CIO can be used at one or more locations in the ladder program.
This enables refreshing words allocated to CPU Bus Units in
Area whenever necessary (including Etherthe CIO Area (25 words) whenever necessary, in the same way
net Units, Serial Communications Units,
that the IORF instruction is used for other Units.
Controller Link Units, etc.)

Section 1-8

CS1-H Functions Arranged by Purpose
Purpose
Increas- Using more tasks
ing
structure Reducing the cycle time even with structured
programs using many tasks
Using the same index or data registers in different tasks without saving and loading register contents
Initializing processing when a task is started
Using standard processing shared by more
than one task

Special
applications

Function
Define interrupt tasks as cyclic tasks (called “extra cyclic
tasks”).
Use shared index and data registers.

Use the Task Start Flags.
Use a global subroutine (GSBN to GRET) in interrupt task
number 0.
User function blocks (FBs).
Standardization and program structure based Increase speed using subroutine instructions (SBS, SBN, and
on subroutines
RET) and global subroutine instructions (GSBS, GSBN, and
GRET)
Protecting programs so that other people
Read protection for entire program
cannot read them
Task read protection
Function block protection
Displaying floating-point decimal data on a
Use the FLOATING- POINT TO ASCII instruction (FSTR(448)).
PT
Use function blocks (FBs).
Using text string data from measurement
Use the ASCII TO FLOATING-POINT instruction (FVAL(449)).
devices in calculations
Use function blocks (FBs).
Performing high-precision positioning, e.g.,
Use the Double-precision Floating-point instructions.
for XY tables
Managing information on workpieces flowing Use the stack instructions.
on a conveyer in realtime in table form, e.g., STACK DATA READ, STACK DATA OVERWRITE, STACK DATA
when workpieces are added or removed from INSERT, and STACK DATA DELETE (Operate on a specified
the conveyor during processing
element in the stack.)
STACK SIZE READ (Counts the number of elements in the
stack.)
Performing high-precision linear approxima- Use the ARITHMETIC PROCESS instruction (unsigned 16-bit
tions, e.g., converting a level meter reading in binary/BCD data, signed 16/32-bit binary data, or single-precimm to a capacity value in liters according to sion floating-point data can be used for line data).
the shape of a tank
Use the PID CONTROL WITH AUTO TUNING instruction.
Autotuning PID constants (particularly to
automatically tune PID constants and start
the system faster when using multiloop PID)
Saving and loading execution results (e.g.,
Use the SAVE CONDITION FLAGS (CCS) and LOAD CONDIfrom comparison instructions) at different
TION FLAGS (CCL) instructions to save the current status of
locations in a task or in different tasks
the Condition Flags or load the previous status.
Using a CVM1/CV-series program containing Use the CONVERT ADDRESS FROM CV (FRMCV) instrucreal I/O memory addresses in a CS-series
tion.
CPU Unit
Use the CONVERT ADDRESS TO CV (TOCV) instruction.
Using I/O memory tables containing
CVM1/CV-series real I/O memory addresses
(e.g., to return the data to a CVM1/CV-series
CPU Unit after processing by the CS-series
CPU Unit).
Disabling power interruptions during specific Create program sections for which power interrupts have been
regions of the program
disabled with the DI and EI instructions (set A530 to A5A5 hex).

Section 1-9

Comparison of CS-series PLCs and C200HX/HG/HE Operation
Purpose
Debugging and
maintenance

1-9

Function

Simulating errors in the CPU Unit when
debugging the system, e.g., to check error
messages displayed on a PT
Backing up CPU Unit data and internal from
other Units, such as DeviceNet Units and
Serial Communications Units/Boards.
Finding errors occurring when creating I/O
tables
Using battery-free operation (ROM operation)
without a Memory Card
Starting CPU Unit operation without waiting
for Units/Boards with comparatively long
power-ON startup times to complete startup
processing.

Use FAL/FALS to simulate fatal and nonfatal system errors.

Use the simple backup operation, which includes data from
specific Units/Boards.
Reference the I/O Table Error Flags in A261.
Use the automatic program/parameter area backup function to
flash memory in the CPU Unit.
Use the startup condition settings (allowing the CPU Unit to
startup immediately in RUN or MONITOR mode even when
startup processing has not been completed for other
Units/Boards).

Comparison of CS-series PLCs and C200HX/HG/HE
Operation
Operation of the CS-series PLCs differs from that of the C200HX/HG/HE
PLCs in several basic points, which are outlined in the following table. Refer to
Appendix A PLC Comparison in the CS/CJ Series Programming Manual
(W394) for differences between the CJ-series, CS-series, C200HX/HG/HE,
CQM1H, and CV-series PLCs.

Program
Structure

I/O allocation

Item
Single program vs.
multiple tasks

C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
The program is executed as a single
unit each cycle.
Interrupt programs are executed as
subroutines with subroutine numbers 00 to 15 (I/O interrupts) and 99
(scheduled interrupt).
Both I/O interrupt (up to 16) and
scheduled interrupt (just 1) programs are supported.

I/O Table Registra- I/O allocation is determined solely
tion is supported in by the slot location of Basic I/O
CS-series PLCs.
Units and the unit number settings
on Special I/O Units. IR Area words
are automatically allocated to I/O
Units and Special I/O Units without
performing the I/O Table Registration operation.
(The I/O Table Registration operation is used to prevent Units from
being installed in the wrong slots.)

CS-series PLCs
In CS-series PLCs, the program is divided into
tasks (cyclic tasks) that are executed in order
when they are enabled. Interrupt programs are
also entered as tasks (interrupt tasks).
The operation of a CS-series PLC is the same
as a C200HX/HG/HE PLC when just one cyclic
task (or extra cyclic task) is enabled.
CS-series PLCs support up to 32 cyclic tasks,
32 I/O interrupt tasks, 2 scheduled interrupt
tasks, 1 power OFF interrupt task, and 256
external interrupt tasks.
With the CS1-H CPU Units, up to 255 interrupt
tasks can be defined as cyclic tasks (called
“extra cyclic tasks’). Thus, up to 288 extra cyclic
tasks can be created (including normal cyclic
tasks and extra cyclic tasks).
In CS-series PLCs, word allocation doesn’t
depend only on slot position, and it isn’t necessary to allocate words to an empty slot. If a Unit
requires several words, those words can be allocated.
When a CS-series PLC is being used, the I/O
Table Registration operation must be executed.
If it isn’t executed, the CPU Unit won’t recognize
each Basic I/O Unit, Special I/O Unit, and CSseries CPU Bus Unit that has been installed.

Section 1-9

Comparison of CS-series PLCs and C200HX/HG/HE Operation
Item
Data Areas

CIO
Area

C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
I/O Area

CS-series PLCs

IR 000 to IR 029,
IR 300 to IR 309
(Unlike the CS Series, word allocation is fixed.)
IR 030 to IR 049,
C200H
IR 330 to IR 341
Group-2
High-den(These words are allocated to
sity I/O Unit C200H Group-2 High-density I/O
and B7A
Units.)
Interface
Unit Area

CIO 0000 to CIO 0319 (CIO 0000 to CIO 0999
can be set if the first word on the Rack is set.)
(Unlike the C200HX/HG/HE PLCs, word allocation is flexible.)
None
(These words are allocated in the I/O Area.)

Special I/O
Unit Area
DeviceNet
Area and
SYSMAC
BUS Area

CIO 2000 to CIO 2959

IR 100 to IR 199,
IR 400 to IR 459
IR 050 to IR 099
IR 350 to IR 399
(Can be used as the DeviceNet
Area or SYSMAC BUS Area, but not
both.)
SR 247 to SR 250 (in SR Area)

PLC Link
Words
Optical I/O Optical I/O Unit and I/O Terminal
Unit and I/O Area: IR 200 to IR 231
Terminal
Area

Work/Inter- Work Areas:
nal I/O Area IR 310 to IR 329, IR 342 to IR 349,
and IR 460 to IR 511
Work Area (WR)
None

Temporary Relay
Area (TR)
Holding Relay Area
(HR)
Special Relay Area
(SR)
Auxiliary Relay
Area (AR)
Link Relay Area
(LR)
DM Area

DeviceNet Area:
CIO 0050 to CIO 0099,
CIO 0350 to CIO 0399
SYSMAC BUS Area:
CIO 3000 to CIO 3079
CIO 0247 to CIO 0250 and A442
I/O Terminal Area:
CIO 3100 to CIO 3131

TR 00 to TR 07

Internal I/O Area:
CIO 1200 to CIO 1499
CIO 3800 to CIO 6143
Work Area: W000 to W511
(No new functions will be assigned to this area
in future CPU versions; this area has been set
aside for use as work words and bits.)
TR 00 to TR 15

HR 00 to HR 99

H 000 to H 511

Special Relay Area:
SR 236 to SR 255,
SR 256 to SR 299
Auxiliary Relay Area:
AR 00 to AR 27
Link Relay Area: LR 00 to LR 63

Auxiliary Area:
A 000 to A 959

DM 0000 to DM 6143 (Normal DM):
Words in this range can be read and
written by instructions and Programming Devices, although DM 6000 to
DM 6030 are used for the Error Log
and DM 1000 to DM 2599 are used
by Special I/O Units.
DM 6144 to DM 6655 (Fixed DM):
Words in this range are read-only for
instructions and can be read or written by Programming Devices.
DM 6550 to DM 6559 and DM 6600
to DM 6655 are used for the PLC
Setup. The Programming Console
can be used to convert up to 3,000
words from the user program area
(UM) to Fixed DM words (DM 7000
to DM 9999).

D00000 to D32767
D20000 to D29599 are used by Special I/O
Units, D30000 to D31599 are used by CS-series
CPU Bus Units, and D32000 to D32099 are
used by Inner Boards.
The Error Log is stored in A100 to A199 and the
PLC Setup is stored in the Parameter Area (not
a part of I/O Memory).

Link Area: CIO 1000 to CIO 1199

Section 1-9

Comparison of CS-series PLCs and C200HX/HG/HE Operation
Item
Data
Areas,
continued

Flags and
Clock
Pulses

C200HX/HG/HE PLCs

CS-series PLCs

EM Area

EM 0000 to EM 6143
(3 banks max., 16 banks max. for
ZE-version PLCs)
Basically, those EM Area instructions access the current bank, which
can be changed.

Timer Area
Counter Area

Timer/Counter Area:
T/C 000 to T/C 511
(Timers and counters share the
same numbers.)
None
None
None
Part of the SR Area

E00000 to E32767
(13 banks max.)
Regular instructions can access data in the current bank or any other bank.
Part of the EM Area can be converted for use as
file memory.
T0000 to T4095
C0000 to C4095
(Timer and counter numbers are independent.)

Task Flag Area
Index Registers
Data Registers
Arithmetic Flags
(such as ER, EQ,
and CY)

Clock pulses

Part of the SR Area

PLC Setup

C200HX/HG/HE:
DM Area
CS: Special Area

The PLC Setup is stored in the DM
Area (DM 6550 to DM 6559 and
DM 6600 to DM 6655), so PLC
Setup settings are made directly by
specifying DM addresses.

Instruction
variations

Up-differentiation

Supported

Down-differentiation

Supported

Immediate refresh- Not supported
ing
Not supported
Up-differentiation
and immediate
refreshing
Down-differentiaNot supported
tion and immediate
refreshing
Instruction operand data format Basically operands are specified in
BCD. In XFER(070), for example,
the number of words is specified in
BCD (0001 to 9999).
Specifying operands requiring
If an operand requiring multiple
multiple words
words is specified at the end of an
area so that there are not enough
words left in the area for the operand, the instruction will not be executed and the Error Flag will turn
ON.

TK00 to TK31
IR0 to IR15
DR0 to DR15
Condition Flags:
In the CS Series, these Flags are in a separate
area and are specified by labels rather than
addresses. With the CX-Programmer, these are
specified using global symbols, such as “P_ER”
and “P_EQ.” With a Programming Console, they
are specified using “ER,” “=,” etc.
Clock Pulses:
In the CS-series PLCs these pulses are in a
separate area and are specified by labels such
as “P_1s” and “P_0_1s” rather than addresses.
In the CS Series, the PLC Setup isn’t stored in
the DM Area, but a separate area (the Parameter Area) which isn’t a part of I/O memory. The
PLC Setup is edited with CX-Programmer in a
table format and user-friendly dialogue. Individual PLC Setup addresses can also be edited
with a Programming Console.
Supported
Including LD NOT, AND NOT, and OR NOT for
CS1-H CPU Units.
Supported for LD, AND, OR, RSET, and SET
Including LD NOT, AND NOT, and OR NOT for
CS1-H CPU Units.
Supported for LD, LD NOT, AND, AND NOT, OR,
OR NOT, OUT, OUT NOT, RSET, SET, KEEP,
DIFU, DIFD, CMP, CPS, and MOV
Supported for LD, LD NOT, AND, AND NOT, OR,
OR NOT, RSET, SET, and MOV
Supported for LD, LD NOT, AND, AND NOT, OR,
OR NOT, RSET, and SET
Basically operands are specified in binary. In
XFER(070), for example, the number of words is
specified in binary (0001 to FFFF or 1 to 65,535
decimal).
If an operand requiring multiple words is specified at the end of an area so that there are not
enough words left in the area for the operand,
the instruction can be executed and the Error
Flag will not turn ON. The program, however, is
checked when transferred from the CX-Programmer to the CPU Unit and cannot be transferred with incorrect operand specifications.
Such programs also cannot be read from the
CPU Unit.

Section 1-9

Comparison of CS-series PLCs and C200HX/HG/HE Operation
Item
Instructions Sequence Input

Sequence Output

Sequence Control
Timer/Counter
Comparison
Data Movement
Data Shift

Increment/Decrement
Symbol Math
Conversion

C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
Up and down-differentiated versions of LD, AND, and OR are not
supported.
TST and TSTN not supported.
SETA and RSTA not supported.

CJP and CJPN not supported.
TIML, MTIM, TMHH, and CNR not
supported.
Input Comparison Instructions not
supported.
MOVL, MVNL, and XCGL not supported.
NSFL/NSFR, NASL/NASR,
NSLL/NSRL, ASLL/ASRL,
ROLL/RORL, RLNC/RRNC, and
RLNL/RRNL not supported.

CS-series PLCs
Up and down-differentiated versions of LD, AND,
and OR are supported.
TST and TSTN supported.
SETA and RSTA supported.
With the CS1-H CPU Units, bit addresses can
be specified in the DM and EM areas using
OUT, SET, and RSET.
CJP and CJPN supported.
TIML, MTIM, TMHH, and CNTR supported.
Supported (AREA RANGE COMPARE (ZCP)
and DOUBLE RANGE COMPARE (ZCPL)).
MOVL, MVNL, and XCGL supported.

NSFL/NSFR, NASL/NASR, NSLL/NSRL,
ASLL/ASRL, ROLL/RORL, RLNC/RRNC, and
RLNL/RRNL supported.
ASFT can be executed in the background for
CS1-H CPU Units.
++, ++L, – –, – –L, ++BL, and – –BL ++, ++L, – –, – –L, ++BL, and – –BL supported.
not supported.
The same in both series.
SIGN, BINS, BCDS, BISL, and
SIGN, BINS, BCDS, BISL, and BDSL supBDSL not supported.
ported.

Logic

ANDL, ORWL, XORL, XNRL, and
COML not supported.

ANDL, ORWL, XORL, XNRL, and COML supported.

Special Math

ROTB not supported.

ROTB supported.
SAVE CONDITION FLAGS (CCS) and LOAD
CONDITION FLAGS (CCL) supported by CS1H CPU Units.
Supported.
Floating-point math, floating-point to/from ASCII
conversions, and double-precision floating-point
math supported by CS1-H CPU Units.
SSET, PUSH, LIFO, and FIFO supported.
Stack insertions/deletions/replacements and
stack counts supported by CS1-H CPU Units.
Background execution of SRCH, SWAP, MAX,
MIN, SUM, and FCS supported by CS1-H CPU
Units.
SCL2 and SCL3 supported.
PID with autotuning supported by CS1-H CPU
Units.

Floating-point Math Not supported.

Table Data Processing

SSET, PUSH, LIFO, and FIFO not
supported.

Data Control

SCL2 and SCL3 not supported.

Subroutines

The same in both series.

Interrupt Control

Interrupts controlled using one
instruction (INT).

Global subroutines (GSBS, GSBN, and GRET)
supported by CS1-H CPU Units.
Interrupts controlled using CLI, MSKS, and
MSKR.

Section 1-9

Comparison of CS-series PLCs and C200HX/HG/HE Operation
Item
Instructions, continued

C200HX/HG/HE PLCs

CS-series PLCs

The same in both series, although the specified control bit must be in the WR Area in
CS-series PLCs.
I/O Units
TKY, HKY, DSW, and CMCR
TKY, HKY, DSW, and CMCR not supported.
supported.
CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH (DLNK(226))
supported by CS1-H CPU Units.
Network
CMND not supported.
CMND supported.
File Memory
Not supported.
Supported.
Display
LMSG (32-character message
MSG (32-character message display) available,
display) supported.
but only 16 characters displayed on a Programming Console.
Clock
CADD, CSUB, and DATE not
CADD, CSUB, and DATE supported.
supported.
Debugging
The same in both series.
Failure Diagnosis
The same in both series.
Not storing user-defined FAL errors in the error
log supported by CS1-H CPU Units.
FAL/FALS error simulation supported by CS1-H
CPU Units.
Special
XDMR and IEMS supported.
SCAN not available
Block Programming Not supported.
Supported.
Text String ProNot supported.
Supported.
cessing
Background execution supported by CS1-H
CPU Units.
Task Control
Not supported.
Supported.
I/O Comment storage
A Programming Device can be used In the CS-series PLCs, I/O comments can be
to divide the UM Area (user program stored in Memory Cards or EM file memory as
memory area) into a program area, variable files.
I/O comment area, and Expansion
DM area. I/O comments can be
stored in that I/O comment area.
Battery installation
A battery is installed in the CPU Unit A battery is installed in a CS1-H CPU Unit when
when it is shipped from the factory. it is shipped from the factory, the same as it is
for a C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit.
Clock function
The internal clock is set when the
The internal clock is set when a CS1-H CPU
PLC is shipped from the factory.
Unit is shipped from the factory, the same as it is
for a C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit.
Any range of I/O Memory can be saved as a file
Memory
I/O Memory
All of I/O Memory can be saved to
in a Memory Card (flash ROM) or EM file memCards and
an EEPROM Memory Cassette by
ory with a Programming Device (including ProMemory
turning ON a control bit in the SR
Cassettes
Area. A Programming Device (other gramming Consoles) or the instruction provided
for this operation. (With all CS1-H CPU Units,
than a Programming Console) can
be used to read the data back from these files can also be saved in CSV or text format.) A Programming Device or instruction can
the Memory Cassette.
be used to read the data from file memory.
These operations can also be performed with
FINS commands.

Step

Section 1-9

Comparison of CS-series PLCs and C200HX/HG/HE Operation
Item
Memory
Cards and
Memory
Cassettes

User program

Serial com- Mode Peripheral
municaport
tions
(peripheral
port or RSRS-232C
232C ports)
port
Baud Peripheral
rate
port
RS-232C
port

Interrupt control modes

C200HX/HG/HE PLCs

CS-series PLCs

The entire program can be saved to
an EEPROM Memory Cassette by
turning ON a control bit in the SR
Area. A Programming Device (other
than a Programming Console) can
be used to read the data back from
the Memory Cassette.
A standard EPROM Writer can be
used to save the entire program to
an EPROM Memory Cassette. A
Programming Device can be used to
read the data back from the Memory
Cassette.
The PLC can be set to automatically
read the entire program from the
Memory Cassette (EEPROM or
EPROM) when the PLC is turned
on.
Host link, customer (Programming
Console and peripheral bus are
automatically recognized.)

The entire program can be saved as a file in a
Memory Card (flash ROM) or EM file memory
with a Programming Device (including Programming Consoles) or the instruction provided for
this operation. A Programming Device or
instruction can be used to read the program
back from file memory.
These operations can also be performed with
FINS commands.
The PLC can be set to automatically read the
entire program from the Memory Card when the
PLC is turned on.
With the -EV1 or higher, it is also possible to
read (i.e., replace) the entire user program from
the Memory Card during PLC operation.

Host Link, peripheral bus, NT Link (1:N), (Programming Console is automatically recognized.)
Custom protocols are not possible for the
peripheral port.
Host Link, NT Link (1:1), NT Link
Host Link, peripheral bus, NT Link (1:N), custom
(1:N), custom, 1:1 link master, 1:1
1:1 links and Programming Console are not suplink slave
ported for the RS-232C port.
2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200 bps
300/600/1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/
19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 bps
Baud rates of 38,400/57,600/ 115,200 bps are
not standard for RS-232C. Your computer may
not support these speeds. Use slower baud
rates if necessary.
CS-series PLCs operate in high-speed interrupt
There are two interrupt modes in
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs: normal inter- mode only. If an interrupt occurs during periphrupt mode and high-speed interrupt eral servicing, I/O refreshing, or execution of an
instruction, that process will be stopped immedimode.
ately and the task will be executed instead.
Normal Interrupt Mode:
In this mode, the interrupt is not exe- With CS1-H CPU Units, interrupt processing will
cuted until the current process (Host also wait for completion of the BLOCK TRANSFER (XFER), BLOCK SET (BSET), and BIT
Link servicing, Remote I/O servicCOUNTER (BCNT) instructions.
ing, Special I/O Unit servicing, or
execution of an instruction) is completed.
High-speed Interrupt Mode:
In this mode, the interrupt stops the
current process (Host Link servicing, Remote I/O servicing, Special
I/O Unit servicing, or execution of an
instruction) and executes the interrupt immediately.

Section 1-10

Checking the Package
Item
CPU processing mode

Startup mode

C200HX/HG/HE PLCs

CS-series PLCs

Normal Mode only (including
instruction execution followed by I/O
refreshing and peripheral servicing)
Peripheral servicing include servicing the RS-232C port, Host Link,
peripheral bus, and Communications Units (e.g., Controller Link
Units).
RUN mode was entered if the Startup Mode was set in the PLC Setup
to 00: Switch Setting on Programming Console and the CPU Unit was
started without a Programming Console connected.

CS1-H CPU Units: Normal Mode, Parallel Processing Mode with Asynchronous Memory
Access, Parallel Processing Mode with Synchronous Memory Access, or Peripheral Servicing
Priority Mode (Parallel processing executes
peripheral servicing in parallel with instruction
execution and I/O refreshing.)
A CS1-H CPU Unit will start in RUN mode if the
Startup Mode is set in the PLC Setup to PRCH:
Switch Setting on Programming Console
(default setting) and the CPU Unit is started
without a Programming Console connected.

1-10 Checking the Package
Check to be sure that the CPU Unit and Battery Unit are in good shape without any damage.
CS1-H CPU Units

CPU Unit

Note The CS1W-BAT01 will already be installed in the CPU Unit.

SECTION 2
Specifications and System Configuration
This section provides tables of standard models, Unit specifications, system configurations, and a comparison between
different Units.
2-1

2-2

2-3

2-4

2-5

2-6

2-7
2-8

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1-1

CPU Unit Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1-2

General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CPU Unit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2-1

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2-2

CS-series CPU Unit Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2-3

Unit Classifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2-4

Data Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-3-1

Basic System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-3-2

CPU Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-3-3

Expansion Racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-3-4

SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

102

Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

105

2-4-1

Basic I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

105

2-4-2

Special I/O Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

111

2-4-3

CS-series CPU Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

118

Expanded System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

119

2-5-1

Serial Communications System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

119

2-5-2

Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

120

2-5-3

Communications Network System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

132

Unit Current Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

137

2-6-1

CPU Racks and Expansion Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

137

2-6-2

SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Slave Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

138

2-6-3

Example Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

138

2-6-4

Current Consumption Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

140

CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

148

2-7-1

System Setting Allocations to CPU Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

148

I/O Table Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

149

2-8-1

CS-series Basic I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

149

2-8-2

CS-series Special I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

151

2-8-3

C200H Special I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

152

2-8-4

CS-series CPU Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

153

Section 2-1

Specifications

2-1

Specifications

2-1-1

CPU Unit Specifications

CPU Unit Comparison
CS1-H CPU Units
CPU

CS1HCPU67H

I/O bits

5120

User program
memory (steps)

250K

Data memory

32K words

Extended data
memory

32K words
x 13 banks
E0_00000
to
EC_32767

CS1HCPU66H

CS1HCPU65H

CS1HCPU64H

CS1GCPU45H

CS1GCPU44H

CS1GCPU43H

CS1GCPU42H

1280

960

60K

30K

20K

32K words x 1 bank
E0_00000 to E0_32767

32K words
x 3 banks
E0_00000
to
E2_32767

32K words x 1 bank
E0_00000 to E0_32767

1024

128

1024

128

2048

256

2048

256

2048

1280

704

120K

60K

30K

32K words
x 7 banks
E0_00000
to
E6_32767

32K words
x 3 banks
E0_00000
to
E2_32767

Func- Maxi1024
tion
mum No.
blocks of definitions

1024

Maxi2048
mum No.
of
instances
Total
2048
(Kbytes)
for FB
program
memory,
comment
files,
program
index
files, and
symbol
tables

Flash
memory
(Unit
version
4.0 or
later
(See
note.))

CS1HCPU63H
20K

10K

Current
consumption

0.82 A at 5 V DC

0.78 A at 5 V DC

Connector
(provided)

One RS-232C Connector (Plug: XM2A-0901, Hood: XM2S-0911-E) provided with CPU Unit as standard

Note The values displayed in the table are valid when a CPU Unit with unit version
4 or later is combined with CX-Programmer 7.0 or higher.
The following table shows the flash memory capacities for CPU Units with unit version 3.
CPU

CS1HCS1HCS1HCS1HCS1HCS1GCS1GCS1GCS1GCPU67H CPU66H CPU65H CPU64H CPU63H CPU45H CPU44H CPU43H CPU42H

Flash memory FB program
1664
(unit version 3) memory (Kbytes)

1664

1024

512

1024

512

Comment files
(Kbytes)

128

Program index
files (Kbytes)

128

Symbol tables
(Kbytes)

128

Earlier CPU Units (unit version 2 or earlier) are not equipped with the function
that stores data such as comment files in flash memory.

Section 2-1

Specifications
Common Specifications
Item
Control method
I/O control method
Programming

CPU processing mode

Instruction length

Specification
Stored program
Cyclic scan and immediate processing are both possible.
• Ladder diagrams
• SFC (sequential function charts)
• ST (structured text)
• Mnemonics
CS1-H CPU Units: Normal Mode, Parallel Processing Mode
with Asynchronous Memory Access, Parallel Processing
Mode with Synchronous Memory Access, or Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode
1 to 7 steps per instruction

Reference
-------

---

Steps and number of
steps per instruction:
10-5 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
---

Ladder instructions
Execution time

Approx. 400 (3-digit function codes)
CS1-H CPU Units:
Basic instructions: 0.02 µs min.
Special instructions: 0.06 µs min.

Overhead processing time

CS1-H CPU Units:
Normal mode:
0.3 ms min.
Parallel processing: 0.2 ms min.

---

Number of Expansion Racks

7 max. (C200H Expansion I/O Racks: 3 max.)

Number of tasks

288 (cyclic tasks: 32, interrupt tasks: 256)

Expansion Racks:
2-3-3 Expansion Racks
Tasks:
Programming Manual
(W394): 1-4 Programs
and Tasks
Programming Manual
(W394): Section 4:
Tasks

Note Cyclic tasks are executed each cycle and are controlled with TKON(820) and TKOF(821) instructions.
Note The following 4 types of interrupt tasks are supported.
Power OFF interrupt tasks: 1 max.
Scheduled interrupt tasks:
2 max.
I/O interrupt tasks:
32 max.
External interrupt tasks:
256 max.

Instruction execution
times: 10-5 Instruction
Execution Times and
Number of Steps

Interrupt types

Scheduled Interrupts:
Interrupts generated at a time scheduled by the CPU Unit’s
built-in timer.
I/O Interrupts:
Interrupts from Interrupt Input Units.
Power OFF Interrupts:
Interrupts executed when the CPU Unit’s power is turned
OFF.
External I/O Interrupts:
Interrupts from the Special I/O Units, CS-series CPU Bus
Units, or the Inner Board.
Calling subroutines from more CS1-H CPU Units: Supported.
than one task
Languages in function block definitions: ladder programming, CX-Programmer Ver.
Function blocks (CPU Units
structured text
7.@ CS/CJ Series
with unit version 3.0 or later
Operation Manual
only)
Function Blocks (W447)

Section 2-1

Specifications
Item
CIO
(Core
I/O)
Area

I/O Area

C200H DeviceNet
Area

PLC Link Area

Link Area

CPU Bus Unit Area

Special I/O Unit Area

Inner Board Area

SYSMAC BUS Area

I/O Terminal Area

Specification
5,120: CIO 000000 to CIO 031915 (320 words from CIO
0000 to CIO 0319)
The setting of the first word can be changed from the default
(CIO 0000) so that CIO 0000 to CIO 0999 can be used.
I/O bits are allocated to Basic I/O Units, such as CS-series
Basic I/O Units, C200H Basic I/O Units, and C200H Group-2
High-density I/O Units.
1,600 (100 words):
Outputs: CIO 005000 to CIO 009915 (words CIO 0050 to
CIO 0099)
Inputs: CIO 035000 to CIO 039915 (words CIO 0350 to
CIO 0399)
C200H DeviceNet Area bits are allocated to Slaves according
to C200HW-CRW21-V1 DeviceNet Unit remote I/O communications.
80 bits (5 words): CIO 024700 to CIO 025015 (words
CIO 0247 to CIO 0250 and CIO A442)
When a PLC Link Unit is used in a PLC Link, use these bits to
monitor PLC Link errors and the operating status of other
CPU Units in the PLC Link.
3,200 (200 words): CIO 10000 to CIO 119915 (words CIO
1000 to CIO 1199)
Link bits are used for data links and are allocated to Units in
Controller Link Systems and PLC Link Systems.
6,400 (400 words): CIO 150000 to CIO 189915 (words CIO
1500 to CIO 1899)
CS-series CPU Bus Unit bits store the operating status of
CS-series CPU Bus Units.
(25 words per Unit, 16 Units max.)
15,360 (960 words): CIO 200000 to CIO 295915 (words CIO
2000 to CIO 2959)
Special I/O Unit bits are allocated to CS-series Special I/O
Units and C200H Special I/O Units. (See Note.)
(10 words per Unit, 96 Units max.)
Note Special I/O Units are I/O Units that belong to a special
group called “Special I/O Units.” Examples: C200HID215/0D215/MD215
1,600 (100 words): CIO 190000 to CIO 199915 (words CIO
1900 to CIO 1999)
Inner Board bits are allocated to Inner Boards. (100 I/O
words max.)
1,280 (80 words): CIO 300000 to CIO 307915 (words CIO
3000 to CIO 3079)
SYSMAC BUS bits are allocated to Slave Racks connected
to SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Units. (10 words per
Rack, 8 Racks max.)
512 (32 words): CIO 310000 to CIO 313115 (words CIO 3100
to CIO 3131)
I/O Terminal bits are allocated to I/O Terminal Units (but not
to Slave Racks) connected to SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O
Master Units. (1 word per Terminal, 32 Terminals max.)

Reference
Input and
output
bits:9-4
CIO Area

9-5 C200H
DeviceNet
Area

9-7 PLC
Link Area

9-8 Data
Link Area

9-9 CPU
Bus Unit
Area

9-11 Special I/O
Unit Area

9-10 Inner
Board
Area
9-12 SYSMAC BUS
Area

9-13 I/O
Terminal
Area

The CIO
Area can
be used as
work bits if
the bits are
not used
as shown
here.

Section 2-1

Specifications
Item
CIO
CS-series DeviceNet
(Core Area
I/O)
Area,
continued

Specification
Reference
9,600 (600 words): CIO 320000 to CIO 379915 (words
9-6 CS-series
CIO 3200 to CIO 3799)
DeviceNet Area
CS-series DeviceNet Area bits are allocated to Slaves
according to C200HW-CRW21-V1 DeviceNet Unit remote I/O
communications.
Fixed allocation 1 Outputs: CIO 3200 to CIO 3263
Inputs: CIO 3300 to CIO 3363
Fixed allocation 2 Outputs: CIO 3400 to CIO 3463
Inputs: CIO 3500 to CIO 3563
Fixed allocation 3 Outputs: CIO 3600 to CIO 3663
Inputs: CIO 3700 to CIO 3763
The following words are allocated to the CS-Series
DeviceNet Unit functioning as a master when fixed allocations are used for the CS1W-DRM21 DeviceNet Unit.
Setting
Master to slave
Slave to master
Fixed allocation 1 Outputs: CIO 3370 Inputs: CIO 3270
Fixed allocation 2 Outputs: CIO 3570 Inputs: CIO 3470
Fixed allocation 3 Outputs: CIO 3770 Inputs: CIO 3670

Internal I/O Area

Work Area

Holding Area

Auxiliary Area

Temporary Area

Timer Area
Counter Area

4,800 (300 words): CIO 120000 to CIO 149915 (words CIO
--1200 to CIO 1499)
37,504 (2,344 words): CIO 380000 to CIO 614315 (words
CIO 3800 to CIO 6143)
These bits in the CIO Area are used as work bits in programming to control program execution. They cannot be used for
external I/O.
8,192 bits (512 words): W00000 to W51115 (W000 to W511) 9-14 Work Area
Controls the programs only. (I/O from external I/O terminals is
not possible.)
Note When using work bits in programming, use the bits in
the Work Area first before using bits from other areas.
8,192 bits (512 words): H00000 to H51115 (H000 to H511)
9-15 Holding Area
Holding bits are used to control the execution of the program,
and maintain their ON/OFF status when the PLC is turned
OFF or the operating mode is changed.
Note The Function Block Holding Area words are allocated
from H512 to H1535. These words can be used only
for the function block instance area (internally allocated
variable area).
Read only: 7,168 bits (448 words): A00000 to A44715 (words
A000 to A447)
Read/write: 8,192 bits (512 words): A44800 to A95915
(words A448 to A959)
Auxiliary bits are allocated specific functions.
16 bits (TR0 to TR15)
Temporary bits are used to temporarily store the ON/OFF
execution conditions at program branches.
4,096: T0000 to T4095 (used for timers only)
4,096: C0000 to C4095 (used for counters only)

9-16 Auxiliary Area

9-17 TR (Temporary
Relay) Area
9-18 Timer Area
9-19 Counter Area

Section 2-1

Specifications
Item

Specification

Reference

DM Area

32K words: D00000 to D32767
9-20 Data Memory
Used as a general-purpose data area for reading and writing (DM) Area
data in word units (16 bits). Words in the DM Area maintain
their status when the PLC is turned OFF or the operating
mode is changed.
Internal Special I/O Unit DM Area: D20000 to D29599 (100
words × 96 Units)
Used to set parameters for Special I/O Units.
CPU Bus Unit DM Area: D30000 to D31599 (100 words × 16
Units)
Used to set parameters for CPU Bus Units.
Inner Board DM Area: D32000 to D32099
Used to set parameters for Inner Boards.

EM Area

32K words per bank, 13 banks max.: E0_00000 to EC_32767
max. (Not available on some CPU Units.)
Used as a general-purpose data area for reading and writing
data in word units (16 bits). Words in the EM Area maintain
their status when the PLC is turned OFF or the operating
mode is changed.
The EM Area is divided into banks, and the addresses can be
set by either of the following methods.
Changing the current bank using the EMBC(281) instruction
and setting addresses for the current bank.
Setting bank numbers and addresses directly.
EM data can be stored in files by specifying the number of
the first bank.
DR0 to DR15
Store offset values for indirect addressing. One register is 16
bits (1 word).
CS1-H CPU Units: Setting to use data registers either independently in each task or to share them between tasks.
IR0 to IR15
Store PLC memory addresses for indirect addressing. One
register is 32 bits (2 words).
CS1-H CPU Units: Setting to use index registers either independently in each task or to share them between tasks.
32 (TK0000 to TK0031)
Task Flags are read-only flags that are ON when the corresponding cyclic task is executable and OFF when the corresponding task is not executable or in standby status.
40,000 words (trace data: 31 bits, 6 words)

Data Registers

Index Registers

Task Flag Area

Trace Memory
File Memory

Memory Cards: Compact flash memory cards can be used
(MS-DOS format).
EM file memory: Part of the EM Area can be converted to file
memory (MS-DOS format).

9-21 Extended Data
Memory (EM) Area

9-23 Data Registers

9-22 Index Registers

9-24 Task Flags

Programming Manual
(W394)
Programming Manual
(W394)

Specifications

Section 2-1

Function Specifications
Item
Constant cycle time

Specification
Reference
1 to 32,000 ms (Unit: 1 ms)
Cycle time:10-4 Computing the
When a parallel processing mode is used for a CS1-H CPU Cycle Time
Unit, the cycle time for executing instructions is constant.
Constant cycle time: Programming Manual (W394)
Cycle time monitoring Possible (Unit stops operating if the cycle is too long): 1 to Cycle time:10-4 Computing the
40,000 ms (Unit: 10 ms)
Cycle Time
When a parallel processing mode is used for a CS1-H CPU Cycle time monitoring: ProgramUnit, the instruction execution cycle is monitored. CPU Unit ming Manual (W394)
operation will stop if the peripheral servicing cycle time
exceeds 2 s (fixed).
I/O refreshing
Cyclic refreshing, immediate refreshing, refreshing by
I/O refreshing:10-4 Computing
the Cycle Time
IORF(097).
IORF(097) refreshes I/O bits allocated to Basic I/O Units
I/O refresh methods: Programming Manual (W394)
and Special I/O Units.
With the CS1-H CPU Units, the CPU BUS UNIT I/O
REFRESH (DLNK(226)) instruction can be used to refresh
bits allocated to CPU Bus Units in the CIO and DM Areas.
Timing of special
Data links for Controller Link Units and SYSMAC LINK
--refreshing for CPU Bus Units, remote I/O for DeviceNet Units, and other special
Units
refreshing for CPU Bus Units is performed at the following
times:
CS1-H CPU Units: I/O refresh period and when the CPU
BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH (DLNK(226)) instruction is executed
I/O memory holding
Depends on the ON/OFF status of the IOM Hold Bit in the I/O memory: SECTION 9 Memwhen changing operat- Auxiliary Area.
ory Areas
ing modes
Programming Manual (W394):
6-6-1 Hot Start/Cold Start Function
Holding I/O memory: 9-2-3 Data
Area Properties
Load OFF:
Load OFF
All outputs on Output Units can be turned OFF when the
CPU Unit is operating in RUN, MONITOR, or PROGRAM
Programming Manual (W394):
mode.
6-7-2 Load OFF Function and 72-3 Online Editing
Input response time
Time constants can be set for inputs from Basic I/O Units. Input response time: 10-4-6 I/O
setting
The time constant can be increased to reduce the influence Response Time
of noise and chattering or it can be decreased to detect
Input response settings:
shorter pulses on the inputs.
Programming Manual (W394):
6-11-1 I/O Response Time Settings
Startup mode: Programming
Startup mode setting
Supported
The startup mode will be as follows if the PLC Setup is set Manual (W394)
to use the Programming Console mode (default) and a Programming Console is not connected:
CS1-H CPU Units: RUN mode
Flash memory (CS1-H • The user program and parameter area data (e.g., PLC
--CPU Units only)
Setup) are always backed up automatically in flash
memory.
• CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later only:
When downloading projects from CX-Programmer Ver.
5.0 or higher, symbol table files (including CX-Programmer symbol names, I/O comments), comment files (CXProgrammer rung comments, other comments), and
program index files (CX-Programmer section names,
section comments, or program comments) are stored in
comment memory within the flash memory.

Section 2-1

Specifications
Item

Specification

Memory Card functions Automatically reading programs (autoboot) from the
Memory Card when the
power is turned ON.

Supported

Program replacement during Supported
PLC operation
Format in which data is
stored in Memory Card

Filing
Debugging

Online editing

Program protection

User program: Program file
format
PLC Setup and other
parameters: Data file format
I/O memory: Data file format
(binary format), text format,
or CSV format
Functions for which Memory User program instructions,
Card read/write is supported Programming Devices
(including Programming
Consoles), Host Link computers, AR Area control bits,
easy backup operation
Memory Card data and the EM (Extended Data Memory)
Area can be handled as files.
Control set/reset, differential monitoring, data tracing
(scheduled, each cycle, or when instruction is executed),
storing location generating error when a program error
occurs
When the CPU Unit is in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode,
multiple program sections (“circuits”) of the user program
can be edited together. This function is not supported for
block programming areas.
(With the CX-Programmer is used, multiple program sections of the user program can be edited together. When a
Programming Console is used, the program can be edited
in mnemonics only.).

Overwrite protection: Set using DIP switch.
Copy protection: Password set using Programming Device.
Error check
User-defined errors (i.e., user can define fatal errors and
non-fatal errors)
The FPD(269) instruction can be used to check the execution time and logic of each programming block.
FAL and FALS instructions can be used with the CS1-H
CPU Units to simulate errors.
Error log
Up to 20 errors are stored in the error log. Information
includes the error code, error details, and the time the error
occurred.
A CS1-H CPU Unit can be set so that user-defined FAL
errors are not stored in the error log.
Serial communications Built-in peripheral port: Programming Device (including
Programming Console) connections, Host Links, NT Links
Built-in RS-232C port: Programming Device (excluding
Programming Console) connections, Host Links, no-protocol communications, NT Links
Serial Communications Board (sold separately): Protocol
macros, Host Links, NT Links

Reference
Memory Cards and file memory:
3-2 File Memory and Programming Manual (W394) Section 5
File Memory Functions
Automatic file transfer at startup
and file operations using CMND:
Programming Manual (W394)
5-2-3 Using Instruction in User
Program
Replacing the program with
CMND: Programming Manual
(W394)
Data stored in the Memory Card:
Programming Manual (W394)
5-2-3 Using Instruction in User
Program

Memory Card read/write operations: Programming Manual
(W394)

File memory: Programming Manual (W394)
Debugging, set/reset, differential
monitoring, data tracing: Programming Manual (W394)
Operating modes: Programming
Manual (W394)

Program protection: Programming Manual (W394)
Failure diagnosis: Programming
Manual (W394)
Fatal and nonfatal errors: 11-2-4
Error Processing Flowchart
User-defined errors: Programming Manual (W394)
Error log: Programming Manual
(W394)

Serial communications systems:
2-5-1 Serial Communications
System
Serial communications: Programming Manual (W394)

Section 2-1

Specifications
Item
Clock

Power OFF detection
time
Power OFF detection
delay time
Memory protection

Sending commands to
a Host Link computer
Remote programming
and monitoring

Specification
Provided on all models. Accuracy: ± 30 s/mo. at 25°C
(accuracy varies with the temperature)

Note Used to store the time when power is turned ON and
when errors occur.
10 to 25 ms (not fixed)
Power OFF operation and power
OFF detection time: 10-3 Power
OFF Operation
0 to 10 ms (user-defined, default: 0 ms)
Power OFF detection delay time:
Programming Manual (W394)
Memory protection: 9-2-3 Data
Held Areas: Holding bits, contents of Data Memory and
Extended Data Memory, and status of the counter Comple- Area Properties
tion Flags and present values.
Note If the IOM Hold Bit in the Auxiliary Area is turned
ON, and the PLC Setup is set to maintain the IOM
Hold Bit status when power to the PLC is turned ON,
the contents of the CIO Area, the Work Area, part of
the Auxiliary Area, timer Completion Flag and PVs,
Index Registers, and the Data Registers will be
saved for up to 20 days.
FINS commands can be sent to a computer connected via
the Host Link System by executing Network Communications Instructions from the PLC.
Host Link communications can be used for remote programming and remote monitoring through a Controller Link
System or Ethernet network.

Communicating across Remote programming and monitoring using the Support
network layers
Software, as well as FINS message communications, can
be conducted across network layers, including other types
of network.
Pre-Ver. 2.0:
Three layers
Version 2.0 or later: Eight layers for Controller Link and
Ethernet (see note). Three layers for
DeviceNet and SYSMAC LINK.

Storing comments in
CPU Unit

Program check

Control output signals

Battery life

Reference
Clock: Programming Manual
(W394)

Host Links and non-solicited
communications: 2-5-2 Systems
Remote programming and monitoring: Programming Manual
(W394)
Controller Link 2-5-3 Communications Network System
Host Links and FINS message
service: 2-5-2 Systems

Note To construct a network of eight layers, it is necessary
to use the CX-Integrator or CX-Programmer (version
4.0 or higher) to set routing tables.
I/O comments can be stored as symbol table files in the
I/O comments: CX-Programmer
Memory Card, EM file memory, or comment memory (see Operation Manual (W446)
note).
Storing comments in CPU Unit:
Programming Manual (W394)
Note Comment memory is supported for CS/CJ-series
CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later only.
Program checks are performed at the beginning of opera- Program check: Programming
Manual (W394)
tion for items such as no END instruction and instruction
errors.
CX-Programmer can also be used to check programs.
RUN output: The internal contacts will turn ON (close)
RUN output: Programming Manwhile the CPU Unit is operating.
ual (W394)
These terminals are provided only on the C200HWPA204R and C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Units.
Battery Set: CS1W-BAT01
Battery life and replacement
period: 12-2-1 Battery Replacement

Section 2-1

Specifications
Item

Specification

Reference

Self-diagnostics

CPU errors (watchdog timer), I/O verification errors, I/O
bus errors, memory errors, and battery errors.

Other functions

Storage of number of times power has been interrupted.
(Stored in A514.)

2-1-2
Item
Power
Supply
Unit
Supply
voltage
Operating
voltage
range
Power
consumption
Inrush
current

Output
capacity
(See note
6.)

Output
terminal
(service
supply)

CPU, I/O bus, memory, and battery errors: 11-2-4 Error Processing Flowchart
Number of power interruptions:
10-3 Power OFF Operation

General Specifications
C200HWPA204

C200HWPA204C

Specifications
C200HWC200HWPA204S
PA209R

C200HWPD024

C200HWPD025

100 to 240 V AC (wide range), 50/60 Hz (See 100 to 120 V AC or
note 7.)
200 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
85 to 264 V AC
85 to 132 V AC or
170 to 264 V AC

24 V DC

120 VA max.

180 VA max.

40 W max.

60 W max.

100 to 120 V AC input: 15 A max. (cold start
at room temperature) for 8 ms max.
200 to 240 V AC input: 30 A max. (cold start
at room temperature) for 8 ms max.

30 A max.
100 to 120 V
40 A max.
200 to 240 V

30 A max.

0.625 A,
26 V DC

9 A, 5 V DC
(including the
CPU Unit
power supply)
1.3 A,
26 V DC

4.6 A, 5 V DC
(including the
CPU Unit
power supply)
0.625 A,
26 V DC

5.3 A, 5 V DC
(including the
CPU Unit
power supply)
1.3 A,
26 V DC

Total: 30 W
max.
Not provided

Total: 45 W
max.
Not provided

Total: 30 W
max.
Not provided

Total: 40 W
max.
Not provided

100 VA max.

C200HWPA204R

120 VA max.

100 to 120 V
AC input: 20
A max. (cold
start at room
temperature)
for 8 ms max.
200 to 240 V
AC input: 30
A max. (cold
start at room
temperature)
for 8 ms max.
4.6 A, 5 V DC (including the CPU Unit power supply)

0.625 A,
26 V DC
0.8 A,
24 V DC
Total: 30 W
max.
Provided.
At consumption of less
than 0.3 A,
24-V DC supply will be
+17%/–11%;
at 0.3 A or
greater,
+10%/–11%
(lot 0197 or
later)

19.2 to 28.8 V 19.2 to 28.8 V
DC
DC

Section 2-1

Specifications
Item
Power
Supply
Unit

Specifications
C200HWC200HWPA204S
PA209R

C200HWPA204

C200HWPA204C

C200HWPA204R

RUN
output
(See note
2.)

Not provided

Contact configuration:
SPST-NO
Switch
capacity:
250 V AC,
2 A (resistive
load)
250 V AC,
0.5 A (induction load),
24 V DC, 2 A

Not provided

Replacement
notification
function

Not provided

With
Alarm output
(open-collector output)
30 V DC
max., 50 mA
max.

Not provided

C200HWPD024

Contact con- Not provided
figuration:
SPST-NO
Switch capacity: 240 V AC,
2A (resistive
load)
120 V AC,
0.5 A (induction load)
24 V DC, 2 A
(resistive
load)
24 V DC, 2 A
(induction
load)
Not provided Not provided

20 MΩ min.
20 MΩ min.
20 MΩ min.
20 MΩ min.
(at 500 V DC) (at 500 V DC) (at 500 V DC) (at 500 V DC)
between all
between AC between AC between AC
external terexternal and external and external and
minals and
GR terminals GR terminals GR terminals
GR terminal,
(See note 1.)
and between (See note 1.) (See note 1.)
all alarm output terminals.
20 MΩ min.
(at 250 V DC)
between all
alarm output
terminals and
GR terminal.
2,300 V AC
2,300 V AC,
2,300 V AC
2,300 V AC
2,300 V AC
50/60 Hz for 50/60 Hz for 1 50/60 Hz for 50/60 Hz for 50/60 Hz for
1 min
minute
1 min
1 min
1 min
between AC between all
between AC between AC between AC
external and external terexternal and external and external and
GR terminals minals and
GR terminals GR terminals GR terminals
(See note 1.) GR terminal
(See note 1.) (See note 1.) (See note 1.)
Leakage cur- and between Leakage cur- Leakage cur- Leakage curall alarm out- rent: 10 mA
rent: 10 mA
rent: 10 mA
rent: 10 mA
put terminals max.
max.
max.
max.
with a leakage current of
10 mA max.
1,000 V AC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between all alarm output terminals and
GR terminal with a leakage current of 10 mA max.
2 kV on power supply line (conforming to IEC61000-4-4)

C200HWPD025
Not provided

Not provided

Insulation 20 MΩ min.
resistance (at 500 V DC)
between AC
external and
GR terminals
(See note 1.)

20 MΩ min.
(at 500 V DC) between DC
external and GR terminals
(See note 1.)

Dielectric
strength
(See note
5.)

1,000 V AC 50/60 Hz for
1 min between DC external
and GR terminals (See note
1.).
Leakage current: 10 mA max.

Noise
immunity
Vibration
10 to 57 Hz, 0.075-mm amplitude, 57 to 150 Hz, acceleration: 9.8 m/s2 in X, Y, and Z directions for 80
resistance minutes (Time coefficient: 8 minutes ×coefficient factor 10 = total time 80 min.)
CPU Unit mounted to a DIN track: 2 to 55 Hz, 2.94 m/s2 in X, Y, and Z directions for 20 minutes
Shock
147 m/s2 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions (according to JIS 0041)
resistance
Ambient
0 to 55°C
operating
temperature

Section 2-1

Specifications
Item
Power
Supply
Unit

C200HWPA204

Ambient
operating
humidity

10% to 90%
(with no condensation)

Atmosphere
Ambient
storage
temperature
Grounding
Enclosure
Weight
CPU Rack
dimensions
(mm)
(See note
3.)
Safety
measures

C200HWPA204C

C200HWPA204R

Specifications
C200HWC200HWPA204S
PA209R

C200HWPD024

C200HWPD025

10% to 90%
10% to 90%
(without con- (with no condensation)
densation)
(See note 4.)
Must be free from corrosive gases.

10% to 90%
(with no condensation)

10% to 90% (with no condensation)

–20 to 75°C
(excluding
battery)

–20 to 75°C (excluding battery)

–20 to 75°C
(See note 4.)

–20 to 75°C
(excluding
battery)

Less than 100 Ω
Mounted in a panel.
All models are each 6 kg max.
2 slots:198.5 × 157 × 123 (W x H x D)
3 slots: 260 × 130 × 123 (W x H x D)
5 slots: 330 × 130 × 123 (W x H x D)
8 slots: 435 × 130 × 123 (W x H x D)
10 slots:505 × 130 × 123 (W x H x D)
Conforms to UL, CSA, cULus, cUL, NK, Lloyds, and EC directives.

Note

1. Disconnect the Power Supply Unit’s LG terminal from the GR terminal
when testing insulation and dielectric strength.
Testing the insulation and dielectric strength with the LG terminal and the
GR terminals connected will damage internal circuits in the CPU Unit.
2. Supported only when mounted to CPU Backplane.
3. The depth is 153 mm for the C200HW-PA209R/PD025 Power Supply Unit,
111 mm for the C200HW-PA204C Power Supply Unit.
4. Maintain an ambient storage temperature of −25 to 30°C and relative humidity of 25% to 70% when storing the C200HW-PA204C for longer than 3
months to keep the replacement notification function in optimum working
condition.
5. Change the applied voltage gradually using the adjuster on the Tester. If
the full dielectric strength voltage is applied or turned OFF using the switch
on the Tester, the generated impulse voltage may damage the Unit.
6. The Power Supply Unit’s internal parts may deteriorate and be damaged if
the power supply output capacity is exceeded for a long time or the outputs
are short-circuited.
7. The power supply voltage for C200HW-PA204 Power Supply Units manufactured before March 2010 and C200HW-PA204R Power Supply Units
manufactured before May 2010 is 100 to 120 V AC/200 to 240 V AC
(switched using short bar). For details on the differences between these
Units, refer to Unit Differences by Manufacturing Date (Reference Information) on page 189

Section 2-2

CPU Unit Components

2-2
2-2-1

CPU Unit Components
Components
8. Inner Board
connector
compartment

1. Indicators

9. Peripheral port

2. Memory Card indicators
10. RS-232C port

3. Memory Card power supply switch

4. Memory Card eject button
6. Memory Card
connector

7. Memory Card

Battery compartment cover lifted

Inner Board
(e.g., Serial Communications Board)
5. DIP switch

Section 2-2

CPU Unit Components
1,2,3...

1. Indicators
The following table describes the LED indicators on the front panel of the
CPU Unit.
Indicator
RUN (green)

Meaning
Lights when the PLC is operating normally in MONITOR or RUN
mode.
ERR/ALM (red) Flashes if a non-fatal error occurs that does not stop the CPU Unit.
If a non-fatal error occurs, the CPU Unit will continue operating.
Lights if a fatal error occurs that stops the CPU Unit or if a hardware error occurs. If a fatal or hardware error occurs, the CPU Unit
will stop operating, and the outputs from all Output Units will turn
OFF.
INH (orange)
Lights when the Output OFF Bit (A50015) turns ON. If the Output
OFF Bit is turned ON, the outputs from all Output Units will turn
OFF.
BKUP (orange) Lights when data is being backed up from RAM to the flash memory.
Do not turn OFF the CPU Unit when this indicator is lit.
PRPHL
Flashes when the CPU Unit is communicating via the peripheral
(orange)
port.
COMM (orange) Flashes when the CPU Unit is communicating via the RS-232C
port.
MCPWR
Flashes when power is being supplied to the Memory Card.
(green)
BUSY (orange) Flashes when the Memory Card is being accessed.

2. Memory Card Indicators
The MCPWR indicator flashes green when power is being supplied to the
Memory Card and the BUSY indicator flashes orange when the Memory
Card is being accessed.
3. Memory Card Power Supply Switch
Press the Memory Card power supply switch to disconnect power before
removing the Memory Card. Also, press the Memory Card Power Supply
Switch to perform an easy backup operation (i.e., to write to or verify the
Memory Card), or to stop the MCPWR indicator flashing due to a write or
verify malfunction when performing an easy backup to the Memory Card.
4. Memory Card Eject Button
Press the Memory Card eject button to remove the Memory Card from the
CPU Unit before turning the power OFF or to perform an easy backup operation.
5. DIP Switch
A CS-series CPU Unit has an 8-pin DIP switch that is used to set basic operational parameters for the CPU Unit. The DIP switch is located under the
cover of the battery compartment. The DIP switch pin settings are described in the following table.

CPU Unit Components
Pin No.
1
2
3
4

6
7
8

Setting
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF

Section 2-2

Function
Writing disabled for user program memory.
Writing enabled for user program memory.
The user program is automatically transferred and executed when power is turned ON.
The user program is automatically transferred but not executed when power is turned ON.
Always OFF.
Use peripheral port communications parameters set in the PLC Setup.
Auto-detect Programming Console or CX-Programmer communications parameters at the
peripheral port.
Auto-detect Programming Console or CX-Programmer communications parameters at the RS232C port.
Use RS-232C port communications parameters set in the PLC Setup.
User-defined pin. Turns OFF the User DIP Switch Pin Flag (A39512).
User-defined pin. Turns ON the User DIP Switch Pin Flag (A39512).
Easy backup by reading/writing to Memory Card.
Easy backup by verifying contents of Memory Card.
Always OFF.

6. Memory Card Connector
The Memory Card connector connects the Memory Card to the CPU Unit.
7. Memory Card
Memory Cards fit into the slot located on the lower right side of the CPU
Unit. Memory Cards are not provided with the PLC and must be ordered
separately and installed in the CPU Unit.
8. Inner Board Connector Compartment
The Inner Board connector compartment is used to connect Inner Boards
such as the Serial Communications Board.
9. Peripheral Port
The peripheral port is connected to Programming Devices, such as a Programming Console or Host Computers. Refer to 3-3 Programming Devices
for details.
10. RS-232C Port
The RS-232C port is connected to Programming Devices (excluding Programming Console), Host Computers, general-purpose external devices,
Programmable Terminals, and other devices. Refer to 3-3 Programming
Devices for details.

Section 2-2

CPU Unit Components

2-2-2

CS-series CPU Unit Capabilities

CS1-H CPU Units
Model

CS1H-CPU67H
CS1H-CPU66H
CS1H-CPU65H
CS1H-CPU64H
CS1H-CPU63H
CS1G-CPU45H

CS1G-CPU44H

CS1G-CPU43H
CS1G-CPU42H

I/O bits

5120 bits
(Up to 7
Expansion
Racks)

5120 bits
(Up to 7
Expansion
Racks)
1280 bits
(Up to 3
Expansion
Racks)
960 bits
(Up to 2
Expansion
Racks)

Program
capacity

Data memory
capacity
(See note.)

250K steps
120K steps
60K steps
30K steps
20K steps
60K steps

448K words
256K words
128K words
64K words
64K words
128K words

30K steps

64K words

20K steps
10K steps

64K words
64K words

Ladder
instruction
processing
speed
0.02 µs

Internal communications
ports

Optional
products

Peripheral port Memory Cards
and
Inner Boards
RS-232C port. such as Serial
Communications Boards

0.04 µs

Note The available Data Memory capacity is the sum of the Data Memory (DM) and
the Extended Data Memory (EM).

2-2-3

Unit Classifications
CS-series CPU Units can exchange data with Basic I/O Units, Special I/O
Units, and CS-series CPU Bus Units as shown in the following diagram.
Basic I/O Units

C200H Basic I/O Units
C200H Interrupt Input Units
C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units
CS-series Basic I/O Units

CS-series Units

Special I/O Units

C200H High-density I/O Units
(classified as C200H Special I/O Units)
C200H Special I/O Units
CS-series Special I/O Units

CPU Bus Units

CS-series CPU Bus Units

I/O Units

Section 2-2

CPU Unit Components

2-2-4

Data Communications

CPU Unit Data Communications
Unit

CS-series Basic I/O
Units
C200H Basic I/O
Units
C200H Group-2 Highdensity I/O Units
(classified as Basic
I/O Units)
CS-series Special I/O
Units

Data Exchange during cyclic servicing
(allocations)

According to I/O
I/O refreshing
allocations
(Words are allocated
in order according to
the position the Unit is
mounted.)

Unit No. allocations

CPU Bus Units

I/O refreshing using
IORF instruction

Yes
Yes
Yes

Special I/O Unit Area
(CIO): 10 words/Unit
Special I/O Unit Area
(DM): 100 words/Unit

C200H Special I/O
Units

Event service data
communications
(IORD/IOWR
instruction)
Not provided.

CS-series CPU Bus
Unit Area (CIO):
5 words/ Unit
CS-series CPU Bus
Unit Area (DM): 100
words/Unit

Yes
(Not available for some
Units.)
Yes
(Not available for some
Units.)
Not provided.

Yes
(Not available for some
Units.)
Yes
(Not available for some
Units.)
No

CPU Unit Connections
Unit

CS-series Basic I/O
Units
C200H Basic I/O
Units
C200H Group-2 Highdensity I/O Units
(classified as Basic
I/O Units)
CS-series Special I/O
Units
C200H Special I/O
Units
CPU Bus Units

Maximum Number of Units on
CPU Racks and
Expansion
Racks

CPU Rack
(See note 5.)

Racks to which Unit can be mounted
C200H
CS-series
SYSMAC BUS
Expansion
Expansion
Slave Racks
I/O Racks
Racks
(See note 5.)

80
(See note 1.)
80
(See note 1.)
80
(See note 1.)

Yes

80
(See notes 2 and
4.)
16

Yes

Yes
(See note 3.)

Yes (See notes 3
and 4.)
No

Note

1. The maximum number of Units on CPU Racks and Expansion Racks is 80
because there is a maximum of 80 slots.
2. There is a maximum of 80 slots.
3. Some CS-series CPU Bus Units cannot be mounted to a CS-series Expansion Rack.
4. Up to 89 Special I/O Units can be mounted as follows: Up to 79 CS-series
Special I/O Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack and CS-series Expansion Racks and up to 10 C200H Special I/O Units can be mounted to the

CPU Unit Components

Section 2-2
SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks. The C200H Special I/O Units must be assigned unit numbers 0 to 9, and each Remote I/O Master Unit must be
counted as a CS-series Special I/O Unit.
5. C200H Units and Racks cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Racks
or Expansion Racks.

Section 2-3

Basic System Configuration

2-3

Basic System Configuration

2-3-1

Basic System Configuration

CPU Rack

A CPU Rack consists of a CPU Unit, a Power Supply Unit, a CPU Backplane,
Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units. A Serial Communications Board and Memory Card are optional.
Note

1. The Backplanes required depend on which CPU Racks, Expansion I/O
Racks, and Slave Racks are used.
2. Expansion Racks cannot be connected to a 2-slot CPU Rack.
3. A maximum of four C200HS-INT01 Interrupt Input Units can be connected
to one CPU Unit.

Expansion Racks

The Expansion Racks required for the C200H CPU Units and CS-series CPU
Units are different.
• C200H Expansion I/O Racks can be connected to CPU Racks, CS-series
Expansion Racks, or other C200H Expansion I/O Racks.
• CS-series Expansion Racks can be connected to CPU Racks or other
CS-series Expansion Racks. A CS-series Expansion Rack consists of a
Power Supply Unit, a CS-series Expansion Backplane or C200H Expansion I/O Backplane, a Basic I/O Unit, a Special I/O Unit, and a CS-series
CPU Bus Unit.
Note a) CS-series Expansion Racks cannot be connected after C200H
Expansion I/O Racks.
b) CS-series Basic I/O Units, CS-series Special I/O Units and CS-series CPU Bus Units cannot be mounted to C200H Expansion I/O
Racks.
c) Interrupt Input Units cannot be mounted to CS-series Expansion
Racks or C200H Expansion I/O Racks.

CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Racks

SYSMAC BUS Slave
Racks

Up to 5 SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks can be connected to one SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Master Unit. A maximum of 5 Units, however, can be connected
to one CPU Unit.
A SYSMAC BUS Slave Rack consists of a Remote I/O Slave Unit, a Remote
I/O Slave Rack Backplane, a Basic I/O Unit, and a Special I/O Unit.
Note

1. C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units, Interrupt Input Units, CS-series
Basic I/O Units, CS-series Special I/O Units and CS-series CPU Bus Units
cannot be mounted to SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks.

Section 2-3

Basic System Configuration

2. SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks can be connected to C200H Expansion I/O
Racks using C200H I/O Connecting Cables.
CPU Rack
CPU Backplane

Power Supply Unit

I/O Units
Special I/O Units
CS-series CPU Bus Units

Memory Card

Serial Communications Board

Remote I/O Master Unit

Expansion Rack

I/O Backplane
I/O Connecting
Cables

I/O Units
Special I/O Units
CS-series CPU Bus Units

Power Supply Unit

Optical fiber cables
Two-core cables

SYSMAC BUS Slave Rack
Backplane

I/O Units
Special I/O Units

Remote I/O Slave Unit

Section 2-3

Basic System Configuration

2-3-2

CPU Rack
A CS-series CPU Rack consists of a CPU Backplane, a Power Supply Unit,
and various other Units.
CPU Backplane (2, 3, 5, 8, or 10 slots)
CPU Unit
Power Supply Unit

Peripheral port
RS-232C port

Other Units
(Depending on the CPU Backplane, 2, 3, 5, 8,
or 10 Units can be mounted)

Inner Board
connector

Memory Card compartment

Memory Card

Name
CPU Rack

Configuration

Remarks

CPU Backplane

One of each Unit required for every CPU Rack.
Refer to the following table for details on applicable models.

CPU Unit
Power Supply Unit
Memory Card
Serial Communications Board

Install as required.
Refer to the following table for details on applicable models.

Units
CS1-H CPU Units
Name
CS-series CS1-H CPU
Units

Model

Specifications

CS1H-CPU67H

I/O bits: 5,120, Program capacity: 250K steps
Data Memory: 448K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 13 banks)

CS1H-CPU66H

I/O bits: 5,120, Program capacity: 120K steps
Data Memory: 256K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 7 banks)

CS1H-CPU65H

I/O bits: 5,120, Program capacity: 60K steps
Data Memory: 128K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 3 banks)

CS1H-CPU64H

I/O bits: 5,120, Program capacity: 30K steps
Data Memory: 64K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 1 banks)

CS1H-CPU63H

I/O bits: 5,120, Program capacity: 20K steps
Data Memory: 32K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 1 banks)

CS1H-CPU45H

I/O bits: 5,120, Program capacity: 60K steps
Data Memory: 128K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 3 banks)

CS1H-CPU44H

I/O bits: 1,280, Program capacity: 30K steps
Data Memory: 64K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 1 banks)

CS1H-CPU43H

I/O bits: 960, Program capacity: 20K steps
Data Memory: 64K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 1 banks)

CS1H-CPU42H

I/O bits: 960, Program capacity: 10K steps
Data Memory: 64K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 1 banks)

Section 2-3

Basic System Configuration
Name
Standard CPU
Backplanes

CS-series-only CPU
Backplanes

Name
Power Supply Units

Model

Specifications

CS1W-BC023

2 slots (Expansion Racks cannot be connected)

CS1W-BC033

3 slots

CS1W-BC053

5 slots

CS1W-BC083

8 slots

CS1W-BC103

10 slots

CS1W-BC022

2 slots (See note 1.)

CS1W-BC032

3 slots (See note 1.)

CS1W-BC052

5 slots (See note 1.)

CS1W-BC082

8 slots (See note 1.)

CS1W-BC102

10 slots (See note 1.)

Model
C200HW-PA204
C200HW-PA204C
C200HW-PA204R
C200HW-PA204S

C200HW-PA209R

Memory Cards

Serial Communications
Boards
Programming Consoles

Programming Console
Key Sheet
Programming Console
Connecting Cables

C200HW-PD024
C200HW-PD025
HMC-EF372
HMC-EF672
HMC-EF183
HMC-AP001
CS1W-SCB21
CS1W-SCB41
CQM1H-PRO01-E
CQM1-PRO01-E
C200H-PRO27-E
CS1W-KS001-E
CS1W-CN114
CS1W-CN224
CS1W-CN624

Programming Device
Connecting Cables
(for peripheral port)

CS1W-CN118
CS1W-CN226
CS1W-CN626

Specifications
100 to 240 V AC
Output capacity: 4.6 A at 5 V DC
100 to 240 V AC (with replacement notification)
Output capacity: 4.6 A at 5 V DC
100 to 240 V AC (with RUN output)
Output capacity: 4.6 A at 5 V DC
100 to 120 V AC or 200 to 240 V AC (with 0.8 A 24 V DC service
power supply)
Output capacity: 4.6 A at 5 V DC
100 to 120 V AC or 200 to 240 V AC (with RUN output)
Output capacity: 9 A at 5 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
Flash memory, 30 MB
Flash memory, 64 MB
Flash memory, 128 MB (See note 3.)
Memory Card Adapter
2 × RS-232C ports, protocol macro function
1 × RS-232C port + 1 × RS-422/485 port, protocol macro function
An English Keyboard Sheet (CS1W-KS001-E) is required.

For CQM1-PRO01 or C200H-PRO27
Connects the CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console.
(Length: 0.05 m)
Connects the CQM1-PRO27-E Programming Console.
(Length: 2.0 m)
Connects the CQM1-PRO27-E Programming Console.
(Length: 6.0 m)
Connects DOS computers, D-Sub 9-pin receptacle (For converting
between RS-232C cable and peripherals) (Length: 0.1 m)
Connects DOS computers, D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 2.0 m)
Connects DOS computers, D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 6.0 m)

Note: 1. C200H Units (C200H Basic I/O Units, C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units, and C200H Special I/O
Units) cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Backplanes.
2. When using the CX-Programmer with the computer connected via a Programming Device Connecting
Cable for the peripheral port, a Host Link (SYSWAY) software connection is not possible. Use a toolbus
(peripheral bus) connection.

Section 2-3

Basic System Configuration

3. The HMC-EF183 cannot be used with all CPU Units. Before ordering, refer to Precaution on Applicable
Units on page 164.
Other Units
Name
Programming Device
Connecting Cables (for
RS-232C port)

Model
XW2Z-200S-CV
XW2Z-500S-CV
XW2Z-200S-V
XW2Z-500S-V

USB−Serial Conversion
Cable
Battery Set

CS1W-CIF31
CS1W-BAT01

Specifications
Connects DOS computers
D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 2.0 m), Static-resistant connector used.
Connects DOS computers
D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 5.0 m), Static-resistant connector used.
Connects DOS computers
D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 2.0 m) (See note.)
Connects DOS computers
D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 5.0 m) (See note.)
Converts between a USB connector and a D-Sub 9-pin connector.
Cable length: 0.5 m
For CS Series only.

Note A peripheral bus connection is not possible when connecting the CX-Programmer via an RS-232C Connecting Cable. Use the Host Link (SYSWAY)
connection.

Connecting Programming Devices
Programming Console

When using a Programming Console, connect the Programming Console to
the peripheral port of the CPU Unit and set pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front
panel of the Unit to OFF (automatically uses default communications parameters for the peripheral port).
CQM1H-PRO01-E/CQM1-PRO01-E
The Programming Console can be connected only to the peripheral port.

The following cable is included with the
CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console
Programming Console
Cable
Length
CQM1H-PRO01-E Not required
2m
(pre-wired).
CQM1-PRO01-E
CS1W-CN114
0.05 m

CS1W-KS001-E
English Keyboard
Sheet required.

CQM1H-PRO01-E,
CQM1-PRO01-E
Programming
Console

Note Set pin 4 of the DIP switch on the
front panel of the CPU Unit to OFF.

Peripheral port

Section 2-3

Basic System Configuration
C200H-PRO27-E

The Programming Console can be connected only to the peripheral port.

CS1W-KS001-E
English Keyboard
Sheet required.

Programming Console

CQM1-PRO27-E

C200H-PRO27-E
Programming
Console

Cable
CS1W-CN224
CS1W-CN624

Length
2.0 m
6.0 m

Note Set pin 4 of the DIP switch on the
front panel of the CPU Unit to OFF.

Peripheral port

Note When an OMRON Programmable Terminal (PT) is connected to the RS-232C
port and Programming Console functions are being used, do not connect the
Programming Console at the same time.

Connecting Personal Computers Running Support Software
Connecting to Peripheral Port
RS-232C
Connecting Cables for Peripheral Port
Computer
DOS computer
(RS-232C, 9-pin)

DOS

Peripheral
port

Cable

Length

Computer
connector

CS1W-CN118

0.1 m

CS1W-CN226

2.0 m

D-Sub,
9-pin

CS1W-CN626

6.0 m

Note The CS1W-CN118 Cable is used with an RS-232C
cable to connect to the peripheral port on the CPU
Unit as shown below. The CS1W-CN118 Cable can
not be used with an RS-232C cable whose model
number ends in -V for a peripheral bus connection
and must be used for a Host Link (SYSMAC WAY)
connection.
RS-232C Cable
XW2Z-200S-@@: 2 m
XW2Z-500S-@@: 5 m

CS1W-CN118 Cable
Peripheral
port

Section 2-3

Basic System Configuration
Connecting to RS-232C Port
Connecting Cables for RS-232C Port
Computer

RS-232C Cable
DOS version
(RS-232C, 9-pin)

XW2Z-200S-CV
or XW2Z-200S-V: 2 m
XW2Z-500S-CV
or XW2Z-500S-V: 5 m

DOS

Cable

Length

XW2Z-200S-CV 2.0 m
or XW2Z-200S-V
XW2Z-500S-CV 5.0 m
or XW2Z-500S-V

Computer
connector
D-Sub,
9-pin

Note The XW2Z-200S-CV and XW2Z-500S-CV use static-resistRS-232C port

ant connectors and can be connected to the peripheral bus
or the Host Link. The XW2Z-200S-V and XW2Z-500S-V,
however, can only be connected to the Host Link, not the
peripheral bus.

Using Personal Computer’s USB Port (USB-Serial Conversion Cable)
Connecting to Peripheral Port
Cable
CS1W-CN226/626

Connection diagram

USB A plug connector (male)
CS1W-CIF31

D-sub connector
(9-pin, male)

CS/CJ-series PLC
Customizable Counter Unit
CS/CJ-series peripheral connector

D-sub connector
(9-pin, female)

Peripheral
port

Recommended cable:
CS1W-CN226/626

CQM1-CIF02

USB A plug connector (male)
CS1W-CIF31

D-sub connector
(9-pin, male)

CS/CJ-series PLC (See note.)
C-series peripheral CS/CJ-series
peripheral connector

D-sub connector connector
(9-pin, female)

Peripheral port

Recommended cable:
CQ1M-CIF02

CS1W-CN114

Note Connection supported for Host Link only when using
CS/CJ-series PLCs.

Section 2-3

Basic System Configuration
Cable

Connection diagram

XW2Z-200S-CV/
500S-CV or
XW2Z-200S-V/
500S-V for RS-232C
USB A plug connector (male)
CS1W-CIF31

D-sub connector
(9-pin, male)

CS/CJ-series PLC
Customizable Counter Unit
D-sub connector (9-pin, male)

D-sub connector
(9-pin, female)

XW2Z-200S-CV/500S-CV
or XW2Z-200S-V/500S-V
(See note.)
D-sub connector
(9-pin, female)

Peripheral
port

CS/CJ-series
peripheral connector
CS1W-CN118

Note Connection supported for Host Link only when using
CS/CJ-series PLCs.

Connecting to RS-232C Port
Cable
XW2Z-200S-CV/500SCV or
XW2Z-200S-V/500S-V
for RS-232C

Connection diagram

USB A plug connector (male)
CS1W-CIF31

CS/CJ-series PLC
D-sub connector
(9-pin, male)
D-sub connector (9-pin, male)
D-sub connector
(9-pin, female)

RS-232C port
D-sub connector
(9-pin, female)

Recommended cable:
XW2Z-200S-CV/500S-CV or
XW2Z-200S-V/500S-V (See note.)

Note Connection supported for Host Link only when
using CS/CJ-series PLCs.

2-3-3

Expansion Racks
To expand the number of Units in the system, other Expansion Racks can be
connected to CPU Racks. The other Expansion Racks that can be connected
to the CPU Racks are Standard CS-series Expansion Racks, CS-series Longdistance Expansion Racks, CS-series-only Expansion Racks, and C200H
Expansion I/O Racks.
C200H Expansion I/O Racks can be connected after CS-series Expansion
Racks, however, the CS-series Expansion Racks cannot be connected after
C200H Expansion I/O Racks.
C200H Expansion I/O Racks cannot be connected in the same series as CSseries Long-distance Expansion Racks.
Note

1. Expansion Racks cannot be connected to a 2-slot CPU Rack (Backplane:
CS1W-BC02@).

Section 2-3

Basic System Configuration

2. C200H Units (C200H Basic I/O Units, C200H Group-2 High-density I/O
Units, and C200H Special I/O Units) cannot be used on CS-series-only
CS-series Expansion Backplanes (CS1W-BI@@2).
3. C200H Units cannot be used on the CPU Rack or Expansion Racks if a
CS-series-only CPU Backplane (CS1W-BC@@2) is used. The C200H
Units will not be recognized by the CPU Unit.
4. When using a CS-series-only Expansion Rack (CS1W-BI@@2) with a CPU
Unit with a lot number of 000427 (27 April 2000) or earlier, CS-series Units
and C200H Units cannot be used on any Expansion Racks past the CSseries-only CPU Expansion Rack. When using a CS-series-only CPU
Backplane (CS1W-BC@@2), CS-series Units and C200H Units cannot be
used on any Expansion Racks.
When using C200H Units and both CS1W-BC@@2 and CS1W-BI@@2
Backplanes are used, use a CPU Unit with a lot number of 000428 (28 April
2000) or later. (When using a CS-series-only CPU Backplane (CS1WBC@@2), the restriction described in note 3 above applies, and so C200H
Units cannot be mounted on Expansion Racks even if a CPU Unit with a
lot number of 000428 or later is used.)
Examples of Mixing Backplanes (❍: Mountable, ×: Not mountable)

Example 1

Example 2

Rack

Backplane name

Backplane model

CS-series
Units

C200H Units

CPU Rack
Expansion Racks
Expansion Racks
CPU Rack
Expansion Racks

CPU Backplane
CS-series Expansion Backplane
C200H Expansion I/O Backplane
CPU Backplane
CS-series-only Expansion Backplane
CS-series Expansion Backplane
CPU Backplane
CS-series-only Expansion Backplane
C200H Expansion I/O Backplane
CS-series-only CPU Backplane
CS-series-only Expansion Backplane
CS-series Expansion Backplane

CS1W-BC@@3
CS1W-BI@@3
C200HW-BI@@1-V1
CS1W-BC@@3
CS1W-BI@@2

❍
❍
×
❍
❍ (See note 4.)

❍
❍
❍
❍
× (See note 2.)

CS1W-BI@@3
CS1W-BC@@3
CS1W-BI@@2

❍ (See note 4.) ❍ (See note 4.)
❍
❍
❍ (See note 4.) × (See note 2.)

Example 3

Expansion Racks
CPU Rack
Expansion Racks

Example 4

Expansion Racks
CPU Rack
Expansion Racks
Expansion Racks

C200HW-BI@@1-V1 ×
❍ (See note 4.)
CS1W-BC@@2
❍
× (See note 3.)
CS1W-BI@@2
❍ (See note 4.) × (See notes 2
and 3.)
CS1W-BI@@3
❍ (See note 4.) × (See note 3.)

Refer to Configuration Device List and 2-4 Units on CS-series Units and
C200H Units.

Section 2-3
CPU Unit

Power Supply Unit

Basic System Configuration
CPU Rack
(Other than a 2-slot CPU Rack)

Power Supply Unit

CS-series
I/O Connecting Cable
(30 cm, 70 cm, 2 m, 3 m,
5 m, 10 m, or 12 m)

CS-series Expansion Backplane
(3, 5, 8, 10 slots)
Power Supply Unit

CS to C200H I/O Connecting
Cables (30 cm, 70 cm, 2 m,
3 m, 5 m, 10 m, or 12 m)

C200H Expansion I/O Backplane
(3, 5, 8, 10 slots)

CS I/O Connecting Cables
Length
Cable
0.3 m
CS1W-CN313
0.7 m
CS1W-CN713
2m
CS1W-CN223
3m
CS1W-CN323
5m
CS1W-CN523
10 m
CS1W-CN133
12 m
CS1W-CN133B2
CS to C200H I/O Connecting Cables
Length
Cable
0.3 m
CS1W-CN311
0.7 m
CS1W-CN711
2m
CS1W-CN221
3m
CS1W-CN321
5m
CS1W-CN521
10 m
CS1W-CN131
12 m
CS1W-CN131B2

Expansion Patterns
The following diagrams show the 4 possible expansion patterns.

CS I/O
Connecting
Cable

CPU Rack
(Excluding the
2-slot Rack.)
CS to C200H
I/O Connecting
Cable

CS Ex* pansion
Rack

CPU Rack
(Excluding the
2-slot Rack.)
CS I/O Connecting Cable

C200H
Expansion I/O
Rack

7 Expansion Racks
max.

C200H
Expansion I/O
Rack

CS to C200H
I/O Connecting
Cable
3 Expansion
Racks max.

*
CS Ex* pansion
Rack

C200H
Expansion I/O
Rack

Note: The above configuration is not possible if a
CS-series-only CPU Backplane is used.
* Power Supply Unit

CPU Rack
(Excluding the
2-slot Rack.)

CS Expansion
Rack

C200H
Expansion I/O
Rack

C200H I/O Connecting Cable

C200H I/O Connecting Cable
CS I/O
Connecting
Cable

C200H I/O Connecting Cable
CS Ex* pansion
Rack

3. CPU Rack connected to CS
Expansion Rack connected to
C200H Expansion I/O Rack
CPU Unit

2. CPU Rack connected to C200H
Expansion I/O Rack
CPU Unit

CPU Unit

1. CPU Rack connected to CS
Expansion Rack

C200H I/O Connecting Cable

7 Expansion
Racks max. (3
C200H Expansion
I/O Racks max.)

C200H
Expansion I/O
Rack

Note: The above configuration is not possible if a
CS-series-only CPU Backplane is used.
When using a CS-series-only CPU
Expansion Rack with a CPU Unit with a lot
number of 000427 (27 April 2000) or earlier,
C200H Units cannot be used past the CSseries-only CPU Expansion Rack.

Section 2-3

Basic System Configuration

CPU Unit

4. CPU Rack connected to CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks

CS-series
Connecting
Cable(30 cm/70 cm)

I/O Control
Unit**

Series A (50 m max.)

CPU Rack
(Excluding the
2-slot Rack.)

The following Units can be mounted: CS1/C200H I/O Units,
CS1/C200H Special I/O Units, and CS1 CPU Bus Units.

CS-series
Expansion Rack

Series B (50 m max.)

I/O Interface
Unit

CV-series
Expansion
I/O Cables
(See table
below.)
I/O Interface
Unit

CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Rack

I/O Interface
Unit

I/O Interface
CS-series Long-distance Unit
Expansion Rack

CS-series Longdistance
Expansion Rack

Terminator
I/O Interface
Unit

The following Units
can be mounted: CSseries I/O Units, CSseries Special I/O
Units, and CS-series
CPU Bus Units.
(C200H Units cannot
be mounted.)

CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Rack
* Power Supply Unit

I/O Interface
Unit

CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Rack

**The I/O Control Unit can be mounted to
the CPU Rack or a CS-series Expansion
Rack (Rack No. 1). A CS-series Longdistance Expan-sion Rack is a CS-series
Expansion Rack con-nected after an I/O
Control Unit.

Terminator

Note The following CV-series Expansion I/O Cables are used to connect to the CSseries Long-distance Expansion Racks (i.e., between the I/O Control Unit and
the first I/O Interface Unit and between I/O Interface Units).
Model number
CV500-CN312
CV500-CN612
CV500-CN122
CV500-CN222
CV500-CN322
CV500-CN522
CV500-CN132
CV500-CN232
CV500-CN332
CV500-CN432
CV500-CN532

Length
0.3 m
0.6 m
1m
2m
3m
5m
10 m
20 m
30 m
40 m
50 m

Section 2-3

Basic System Configuration

Power Supply Unit

Note CS-series Expansion Racks must be connected before C200H Expansion I/O
Racks. The following configuration is not allowed.

C200H Expansion I/O Rack

Power Supply Unit

Not Allowed
CS-series Expansion Rack

Maximum Expansion Racks
Expansion pattern
CPU Rack with CS-series
Expansion Racks
CPU Rack with CS-series
Expansion Racks and
C200H Expansion I/O Racks
CPU Rack with C200H
Expansion I/O Racks
CPU Rack with CS-series
Expansion Racks and
CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Racks

Rack
CS-series Expansion Racks

Maximum No. of Racks
7 Racks

Remarks
The total cable length must
be 12 m or less.

CS-series Expansion Racks 7 Racks (with 3 C200H
and C200H Expansion I/O
Expansion I/O Racks max.)
Racks
C200H Expansion I/O Racks 3 Racks
CS-series Expansion Racks
and CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks

7 Racks (with 1 CS-series
Expansion Rack max.)

The total cable length must
be 0.7 m or less to the last
CS-series Expansion Rack.
The total cable length must
be 50 m or less each for up
to two series of CS-series
Long-distance Expansion
Racks (100 m max. total).

Note C200H Units (C200H Basic I/O Units, C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units,
and C200H Special I/O Units) cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU
Racks.

Section 2-3

Basic System Configuration
Rack Configurations
Rack
Standard CS-series Expansion Racks

Configuration
Remarks
CS-series Expansion Backplane
One of each Unit is required.
Power Supply Unit
Note CS-series Expansion
Racks can be conCPU Backplane or CS-series CS I/O Connecting Cables
nected to C200H
Expansion Backplane
Expansion I/O Racks,
C200H Expansion I/O
CS to C200H I/O Connecting
however, C200H
Backplane
Cables
Expansion I/O Racks
must be connected
after CS-series
Expansion Racks.
CS-series-only Expansion
CS-series-only Backplane
One of each Unit is required.
Racks
Power Supply Unit
Note C200H Units and
Racks cannot be used
CPU Backplane or CS-series CS I/O Connecting Cables
with CS-series-only
Expansion Backplane
CPU Racks or Expansion Racks.
C200H Expansion I/O Racks C200H Expansion I/O Backplane
One of each Unit is required.
Power Supply Unit
CS-series Expansion
CS to C200H I/O Connecting
Backplane
Cables
C200H Expansion I/O
C200H I/O Connecting
Backplane
Cables
CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Racks

Mount an I/O Control Unit (CS1W-IC102) to the leftmost slot
on the CPU Rack or the last CS-series Expansion Rack.
Mount an I/O Interface Unit (CS1W-II102) to the leftmost
slot on each Long-distance Expansion Rack.
Attach a Terminator (CV500-TER01) to the last Long-distance Expansion Rack in each series. Two Terminators are
provided with the I/O Control Unit.

Each I/O Control Unit and
I/O Interface Unit requires
one slot.
These Units are not allocated I/O words.
Use CV-series I/O Connecting Cables.
A CS-series Expansion Rack
cannot be connected to a
CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Rack using a CS
I/O Connecting Cable.

Configuration Device List
Name
Standard CS-series Expansion Backplanes

CS-series-only CS-series
Expansion Backplanes

C200H Expansion I/O
Backplanes

Model
CS1W-BI033
CS1W-BI053
CS1W-BI083
CS1W-BI103
CS1W-BI032
CS1W-BI052

Specifications
3 slots
5 slots
8 slots
10 slots
3 slots
5 slots

CS1W-BI082
CS1W-BI102
C200HW-BI031
C200HW-BI051
C200HW-BI081-V1 (See note.)
C200HW-BI101-V1 (See note.)

8 slots
10 slots
3 slots
5 slots
8 slots
10 slots

Cable Length
Can be used for Long-distance Expansion Racks.

Can be used for Long-distance Expansion Racks.

Cannot be used for Long-distance Expansion Racks.

Note Using the C200HW-BI081/BI101
The C200HW-BI081 or C200HW-BI101 can be used, but always use the
C200HW-BI081-V1 or C200HW-BI101-V1 if you are using the C200HWPA209R Power Supply.

Section 2-3

Basic System Configuration
Name
Power Supply Units

Model
C200HW-PA204

C200HW-PA204C

C200HW-PA204R

C200HW-PA204S

C200HW-PA209R

I/O Control Unit

C200HW-PD024
C200HW-PD025
CS1W-CN313 (See note.)
CS1W-CN713 (See note.)
CS1W-CN223
CS1W-CN323
CS1W-CN523
CS1W-CN133
CS1W-CN133B2
CS1W-CN311
CS1W-CN711
CS1W-CN221
CS1W-CN321
CS1W-CN521
CS1W-CN131
CS1W-CN131B2
C200H-CN311
C200H-CN711
C200H-CN221
C200H-CN521
C200H-CN131
CS1W-IC102

I/O Interface Unit

CS1W-II102

CS I/O Connecting Cables

CS to C200H I/O
Connecting Cables

C200H I/O Connecting
Cables

Specifications
100 to 240 V AC
--Output capacity: 4.6 A at 5 V
DC
100 to 240 V AC (with
replacement notification)
Output capacity: 4.6 A at 5 V
DC
100 to 240 V AC (with RUN
output)
Output capacity: 4.6 A, 5 V
DC

Cable Length

100 to 120 V AC or 200 to
240 V AC (with 0.8 A 24 V
DC service power supply)
Output capacity: 4.6 A at 5 V
DC
100 to 120 V AC or 200 to
240 V AC (with RUN output)
Output capacity: 9 A at 5 V
DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
Connects CS-series Expansion Backplanes to CPU
Backplanes or other CSseries Expansion Backplanes.

0.3 m
0.7 m
2m
3m
5m
10 m
12 m
Connects C200H Expansion 0.3 m
I/O Backplanes to CPU
0.7 m
Backplanes or CS-series
2
m
Expansion Backplanes.
3m
5m
10 m
12 m
Connects C200H Expansion 0.3 m
I/O Backplanes to other
0.7 m
C200H Expansion I/O Back2m
planes.
5m
10 m
Mounts to the leftmost slot on --the CPU Rack or a CS-series
Expansion Rack to enable
connecting CS-series Longdistance Expansion Racks.
Mounts to the leftmost slot on
an CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Rack.

100

Section 2-3

Basic System Configuration
Manufacturing Number Legend
Four-digit Numbers
@ @ @ @

Year (e.g., 1997 = 7, 2001 = 1
Month (January to September = 1 to 9, October to December = X to Z)
Day of month (01 to 31)

Six-digit Numbers
@ @ @ @ @ @
Symbol
Day of month (01 to 31)
Month (January to September = 01 to 12)
Year (e.g., 2003 = 03)

Name
CV-series I/O Connecting
Cables

Model
CV500-CN312
CV500-CN612
CV500-CN122
CV500-CN222
CV500-CN322
CV500-CN522
CV500-CN132
CV500-CN232
CV500-CN332
CV500-CN432
CV500-CN532

Connectable Units

Unit

Standard CPU
Rack
CS-series-only
CPU Rack
Standard CSseries Expansion Racks
C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks
CS-series-only
Expansion
Racks
CS-series
Long-distance
Expansion
Racks

Specifications
Connects CS-series Longdistance Expansion Racks.

Cable Length
0.3 m
0.6 m
1m
2m
3m
5m
10 m
20 m
30 m
40 m
50 m

The following table shows the Units that can be connected to CPU Racks, CSseries Expansion Racks, and C200H Expansion I/O Racks.
Refer to 2-4 Units for details on the limitations on each particular Unit.

CS-series
Basic I/O Units

C200H
Special I/O
Units
(See note 2.)
Yes

CPU Bus
Units
(See note 3.)
Yes

Yes

C200H Group-2
CS-series
High-density
Special
I/O Units (Basic
I/O Units
I/O Units)
Yes
Yes

Yes

Yes
(See note 2.)

Note

C200H Basic
I/O Units

1. The CS1W-INT01 and C200HS-INT01 Interrupt Input Units are Basic I/O
Units, but they can be mounted only to the CPU Rack.

101

Section 2-3

Basic System Configuration

2. Although CS-series CPU Bus Units can be mounted to CS-series Longdistance Expansion Racks, it is not recommended because doing so will
increase the cycle time.
Maximum Number of Units

The maximum number of expansion slots is 80, so the maximum number of
Units that can be connected is 80. The total number of each type of Unit is not
limited in the mounting location.

Note

1. CS1W-INT01 and C200HS-INT01 Interrupt Input Units are Basic I/O Units
but can be connected to CPU Racks only (four C200HS-INT01 and two
CS1W-INT01 Units max. per CPU Rack).
2. Up to 16 C200H Special I/O Units can be mounted.
3. Up to 16 CPU Bus Units can be mounted.

2-3-4

SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks
SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks are used to perform basic CS-series remote I/O
communications. The SYSMAC BUS Slave Rack allows comparatively smallscale (512 bits max.) remote I/O communications using Basic I/O Units and
Special I/O Units. The Slave Racks are connected using two-core cable or
optical fiber cables. Units such as Basic I/O Units and Special I/O Units can
be mounted to some Slave Racks. I/O Terminals can also be connected.

Configuration
Rack
SYSMAC BUS Slave
Racks

Configuration
Backplane
Remote I/O Slave Unit

Remarks
One of each required per
Rack.

SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Unit (two-conductor or optical fiber cables)

SYSMAC BUS (two-conductor or optical fiber cables)

Remote I/O

Slave Rack

Slave Rack
SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Slave
Unit

SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Slave
Unit

Maximum No. of Units and Racks
Per CPU Rack
Master Units
Slave Racks
2 Units max.
8 Racks max.

102

Per Master Unit
Slave Racks
8 Racks max.

Per Slave Rack
Maximum Units
10 Units max.
(depending on the
Backplane used)

Section 2-3

Basic System Configuration
Configuration Devices
Master Units
Unit

Model

Maximum Units
per CPU Unit

Maximum Slave Racks and I/O
bits per CPU Unit and Master
Unit
Slave Racks

Slave Rack
communications cables

Transmission
distance (total
extension)

I/O bits

SYSMAC BUS
Wired Remote
I/O Master Units

C200H-RM201

2 Units

1,280
(80 words)

Two-core cable

200 m

SYSMAC BUS
Optical Remote
I/O Master Units

C200H-RM001PV1

2 Units

1,280
(80 words)

Optical fiber
cable (PCF or
APF)
(See note.)

PCF: 200 m
APF: 20 m

Note PCF: Plastic Clad Optical Fiber Cable
APF: All Plastic Optical Fiber Cable.
Slave Racks
Name

Model

SYSMAC BUS Slave Rack
Backplanes

SYSMAC BUS Wired Remote
I/O Master Units

Specifications

C200H-BC101-V2

10 Units

C200H-BC081-V2

8 Units

C200H-BC051-V2

5 Units

Remarks
---

C200H-BC031-V2

3 Units

C200H-RT201

Power supply voltage: 100 to
120 V AC or 200 to 240 V AC

C200H-RT202

Power supply voltage:
24 V DC

SYSMAC BUS Optical Remote C200H-RT001-P
I/O Master Units

Power Supply Unit is not
required.

Power supply voltage: 100 to
120 V AC or 200 to 240 V AC

C200H-RT002-P

Power supply voltage:
24 V DC

Note Words are allocated to Units on SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks from the
SYSMAC BUS Area and not from the I/O Bit Area.

Connectable Units
Unit

CS-series
Basic I/O Units

C200H Basic
I/O Units

C200H Group-2
High-density I/O
Units (Basic I/O
Units)

CS-series Special I/O Units

C200H Special
I/O Units

CPU Bus Units

SYSMAC BUS
Wired Slave
Racks

Yes

Yes
(See note.)

SYSMAC BUS
Optical Slave
Racks

Yes

Yes
(See note.)

Note

1. C200H DeviceNet Master Units (C200HW-DRM21-V1), CompoBus/S
Master Units, PLC Link Units, and SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Units
cannot be connected to Wired Slave Racks.
2. Special I/O Unit words (CIO 2000 to CIO 2959) are allocated to C200H
Special I/O Units according to unit numbers.
3. Up to a total of 10 C200H Special I/O Units can be mounted to all Slave
Racks in a SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O System. Only unit numbers 0 to 9
can be used. The number of C200H Special I/O Units that can be mounted
to any one Slave Rack depends on the specific Units that are used, as
shown in the following table. For the purpose of calculating the maximum
number of Units, Units are classified into four groups, A to D.

103

Section 2-3

Basic System Configuration

Group
Units

A
High-speed Counter Units,
NC111/NC112/NC113/NC213
Position Control Units, ASCII
Units, Analog I/O Units, ID
Sensor Units, Fuzzy Logic Units
4 Units max.

B
High-density I/O Units, Temperature Controller Units,
Heating/Cooling Control
Units, PID Control Units,
Cam Positioner Units
8 Units max.

Maximum Units in
each group for
each Slave Rack
Maximum Units for 3A + B + 2C + 6D ≤ 12 and A + B + C + D ≤ 8
all groups for each
Slave Rack

C
Temperature
Sensor Units,
Voice Units

6 Units max.

D
NC211/NC413
Position Control Units,
Motion Control
Units
2 Units max.

Note I/O READ/WRITE instructions (IORD/IOWR) cannot be used with C200H
Special I/O Units that are mounted to a Slave Rack.

104

Section 2-4

Units

2-4
2-4-1

Units
Basic I/O Units

Input Units
CS-series Basic Input Units
Name

Specifications

Model

AC Input 100 to 120 V DC,
Units
100 to 120 V AC 16
inputs

Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)

Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack

C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks

Reference

CS-series CS-series
ExpanLongsion
distance
Racks
Expansion
Racks

SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks

CS1W-IA111

Yes

200 to 240 V AC, 16 CS1W-IA211
inputs

Yes

DC Input 24 V DC, 16 inputs
Units

CS1W-ID211

Yes

Interrupt
Input
Units

24 V DC, 16 inputs

CS1W-INT01

Yes

Yes (See
note 1.)

Highspeed
Input
Units

24 V DC, 16 inputs

CS1W-IDP01

Yes

DC Input 24 V DC, 32 inputs
Units
24 V DC, 64 inputs

CS1W-ID231

Yes

CS1W-ID261

Yes

24 V DC, 96 inputs

CS1W-ID291

Yes

Note

1. The interrupt function can be used only when the Unit is mounted to the
CPU Rack. (The Interrupt Input Unit can be used as a regular I/O Unit on
Expansion Racks.)
2. The C200H-ID001 (8 no-voltage contact inputs, NPN) cannot be used with
CS-series PLCs.

105

Section 2-4

Units
C200H Basic Input Units
Name

Specifications

Model

Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)

Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack

C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks

Reference

CS-series CS-series
ExpanLongsion
distance
Racks
Expansion
Racks

SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks

AC Input 100 to 120V AC,
Units
8inputs

C200H-IA121

Yes

100 to 120V AC,
16inputs

C200H-IA122

Yes

100 to 120V AC,
16inputs

C200H-IA122V 16

Yes

200 to 240V AC,
8inputs

C200H-IA221

Yes

200 to 240V AC,
16inputs

C200H-IA222

Yes

200 to 240V AC,
16inputs

C200H-IA222V 16

Yes

12 to 24
V AC/V DC,
8inputs

C200H-IM211

Yes

24 V AC/V DC,
16inputs

C200H-IM212

Yes

DC Input 12 to 24 V DC,
Units
8inputs

C200H-ID211

Yes

24 V DC, 16 inputs

C200H-ID212

Yes

12 to 24 V DC,
8inputs

C200HS-INT01 16

Yes

Yes
(See note
1.)

AC/DC
Input
Units

Interrupt
Input
Units

Note

3-6 Basic
I/O Units
and Appendix A Specifications of
Basic I/O
Units and
High-density I/O
Units

C200H High-density Input Units (Group 2)
Name

Specifications

Model

Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)
32

Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack

Yes

C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks

Yes

Reference

CS-series CS-series
ExpanLongsion
distance
Racks
Expansion
Racks

SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks

Yes

DC Input 24 V DC, 32 inputs
Units
24 V DC, 32 inputs

C200H-ID216

C200H-ID218

Yes

12 V DC, 64inputs

C200H-ID111

Yes

24 V DC, 64 inputs

C200H-ID217

Yes

24 V DC, 64 inputs

C200H-ID219

Yes

Note C200H Units and Racks cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Racks or
Expansion Racks.

106

Section 2-4

Units
Basic Output Units
CS-series Basic Output Units
Name

Relay
Output
Units

Specifications

Model

Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)

Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack

C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks

CS-series CS-series
ExpanLongsion
distance
Racks
Expansion
Racks

Reference
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks

250 V AC/
24 V DC, 2 A;
120 V DC, 0.1A;
8 points, independent contacts

CS1W-OC201

Yes

250 V AC/24 V
DC, 2 A; 120 V
DC, 0.1 A;
16 points

CS1W-OC211

Yes

250 V AC, 1.2 A,
8outputs, with
fuse burnout
detection circuit

CS1W-OA201

Yes

250 V AC, 0.5 A,
16 outputs

CS1W-OA211

Yes

Transis- 12 to 24 V DC,
tor Out- 0.5 A,
put Units 16sinkingoutputs

CS1W-OD211

Yes

12 to 24 V DC,
0.5 A,
32sinkingoutputs

CS1W-OD231

Yes

12 to 24 V DC,
0.3 A,
64sinkingoutputs

CS1W-OD261

Yes

12 to 24 V DC,
0.1 A,
96sinkingoutputs,
with fuse burnout
detection circuit

CS1W-OD291

Yes

24 V DC, 0.5 A,
CS1W-OD212
16sourcingoutputs,
load short-circuit
protection

Yes

24 V DC, 0.3 A,
CS1W-OD232
32sourcingoutputs,
load short-circuit
protection

Yes

24 V DC, 0.3 A,
CS1W-OD262
64sourcingoutputs,
load short-circuit
protection

Yes

24 V DC, 0.1 A,
CS1W-OD292
96sourcingoutputs,
with fuse burnout
detection circuit

Yes

Triac
Output
Units

3-6 Basic
I/O Units
and
Appendix
A Specifications of
Basic I/O
Units and
High-density I/O
Units

107

Section 2-4

Units
C200H Basic Output Units
Name

Relay
Output
Units

Triac
Output
Units

Transistor Output
Units,
Sinking

108

Specifications

Model

Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)

Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack

C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks

CS-series CS-series
ExpanLongsion
distance
Racks
Expansion
Racks

Reference
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks

250V AC/24V DC,
2 A, independent
contacts, 5 outputs
max.

C200H-OC223

Yes

250 V AC/24 V DC,
2 A, independent
contacts, 8 outputs
max.

C200H-OC224

Yes

250 V AC/24 V DC,
2 A, independent
contacts, 8 outputs
max.

C200H-OC224V 16
(no longer manufactured)

Yes

250 V AC/24 V DC,
2 A, independent
contacts, 8 outputs
max.

C200H-OC224N

Yes

250V AC/24V DC,
2 A, 8 outputs max.

C200H-OC221

Yes

250V AC/24V DC,
2 A, 12outputs max.

C200H-OC222

Yes

250 V AC/24V DC,
2A, 12 outputs max.

C200H-OC222V 16
(no longer manufactured)

Yes

250 V AC/24V DC,
2A, 12 outputs max.

C200H-OC222N

Yes

250V AC/24V DC,
C200H-OC226
16
2 A, 16 outputs max. (no longer manufactured)

Yes

250V AC/24V DC,
C200H-OC226N
2 A, 16 outputs max.

Yes

250V AC/24V DC,
C200H-OC225
2 A, 16 outputs max.

Yes

250 V AC, 1 A,
8outputs, with fuse
burnout detection
circuit

C200H-OA221
16
(no longer manufactured)

Yes

250 V AC, 1.2 A,
8outputs, with fuse
burnout detection
circuit

C200H-OA223

Yes

250 V AC, 0.3 A,
12outputs

C200H-OA222V

Yes

250 V AC, 0.5 A,
12outputs

C200H-OA224

Yes

24 V DC, 2.1 A,
8outputs

C200H-OD213

Yes

12 to 48 V DC, 1A,
8 outputs

C200H-OD411

Yes

24 V DC, 0.3 A,
12outputs

C200H-OD211

Yes

24 V DC, 0.3 A,
16outputs

C200H-OD212

Yes

Section 2-4

Units
Name

Transistor Output
Units,
Sourcing

Specifications

Model

Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)

Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack

C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks

CS-series CS-series
ExpanLongsion
distance
Racks
Expansion
Racks

Reference
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks

24 V DC, 0.8 A,
C200H-OD214
8outputs, load shortcircuit protection.

Yes

5 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A,
8outputs

C200H-OD216

Yes

5 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A,
12outputs

C200H-OD217

Yes

24 V DC, 1 A,
16outputs, load
short-circuit protection.

C200H-OD21A

Yes

Note C200H Units and Racks cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Racks or
Expansion Racks.
C200H High-density Group-two Output Units
Name

Specifications

Model

Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)

Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack

C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks

CS-series CS-series
ExpanLong-dission
tance
Racks
Expansion
Racks

Reference
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks

Transis- 4.5 V DC/16 mA to C200H-OD218
tor Out- 26.4 V/100mA,
put Units 32sinking outputs

Yes

4.5 V DC/16 mA to C200H-OD219
26.4 V/100mA,
64sinking outputs

Yes

24 V DC, 0.5 A,
32 outputs, sourcing outputs, load
short-circuit protection

Yes

C200H-OD21B

Note C200H Units and Racks cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Racks or
Expansion Racks.

109

Section 2-4

Units
Mixed I/O Units
CS-series Basic I/O Units
Name

DC
Input/
Transistor Output Units

TTL I/O
Units

Specifications

Model

Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)

Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack

C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks

CS-series CS-series
ExpanLongsion
distance
Racks
Expansion
Racks

Reference
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks

24V DC, 32 inputs CS1W-MD261
12 to 24 V DC,
0.3A, 32 sinking
outputs

64-point
I/O

Yes

24V DC, 48 inputs CS1W-MD291
12 to 24 V DC,
0.1A, 48 sinking
outputs, with fuse
burnout detection
circuit

96-point
I/O

Yes

24V DC, 32 inputs CS1W-MD262
24 V DC, 0.3A, 32
sourcing outputs,
load short-circuit
protection.

64-point
I/O

Yes

24V DC, 48 inputs CS1W-MD292
12 to 24 V DC,
0.1A, 48 sourcing
outputs, with fuse
burnout detection
circuit

96-point
I/O

Yes

5 V DC, 3.5 mA,
32 inputs
5 V DC, 35 mA,
32 outputs

64-point
I/O

Yes

CS1W-MD561

3-6 Basic
I/O Units
and
Appendix
A Specifications of
Basic I/O
Units and
High-density I/O
Units

B7A Interface Units
CS-series Basic I/O Units
Name

Specifications

Model

Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)

Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack

C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks

CS-series
Expansion
Racks

CS-series
Longdistance
Expansion
Racks

Reference
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks

B7A
Input
Units

32 inputs

CS1W-B7A12

Yes

B7A
Output
Units

32 outputs

CS1W-B7A02

Yes

B7A
Input/
Output
Units

16 inputs/
16 outputs

CS1W-B7A21

32-point
I/O

Yes

32 inputs/
32 outputs

CS1W-B7A22

64-point
I/O

Yes

3-8 B7A
Interface
Units

C200H Basic I/O Units
Name

Specifications

Model

Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)

Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack

C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks

CS-series
Expansion
Racks

CS-series
Longdistance
Expansion
Racks

Reference
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks

B7A
Input
Units

16 inputs

C200H-B7AI1

Yes

B7A
Output
Units

16 outputs

C200H-B7AO1

Yes

110

3-8 B7A
Interface
Units

Section 2-4

Units

Note C200H Units and Racks cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Racks or
Expansion Racks.
C200H High-density I/O Units (Group 2)
Name

Specifications

Model

Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)

Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack

C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks

CS-series
Expansion
Racks

CS-series
Longdistance
Expansion
Racks

Reference
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks

B7A
Input
Units

32 inputs

C200H-B7A12

Yes

B7A
Output
Units

32 outputs

C200H-B7A02

Yes

B7A I/O
Units

16 inputs,
16outputs

C200H-B7A21

32-point
I/O

Yes

32 inputs,
32outputs

C200H-B7A22

64-point
I/O

Yes

3-8 B7A
Interface
Units

Note C200H Units and Racks cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Racks or
Expansion Racks.

Analog Timer Unit
C200H Basic Unit
Name

Analog
Timer
Units

Specifications

4-point timer

Model

C200H-TM001

Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)
16 points

Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack

Yes

C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks

Yes

CS-series
Expansion
Racks

CS-series
Longdistance
Expansion
Racks

Yes

Reference
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks

Yes

3-9 Analog
Timer
Units

Note C200H Units and Racks cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Racks or
Expansion Racks.

2-4-2

Special I/O Units

CS-series Special I/O Units
Name

Specifications

Model

Number of
words
allocated
(CIO 2000 to
CIO 2959)

Number of
words
allocated
(D20000 to
D29599)

Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack

C200H
Expansion
I/O Racks

CS-series
Expansion
Racks

CS-series
Longdistance
Expansion
Racks

SYSMAC
BUS Slave
Racks

Unit
No.

Reference

W345

Analog I/O Unit

4 inputs (4 to 20 mA,
1 to 5 V, etc.)
4 outputs (1 to 5 V,
0 to 10 V, etc.)

CS1W-MAD44

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

Analog Input
Unit

4 inputs (4 to 20 mA,
1 to 5 V, etc.)

CS1W-AD041-V1

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

8 inputs (4 to 20 mA,
1 to 5 V, etc.)

CS1W-AD081-V1

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

16 inputs (4 to 20
mA,
1 to 5 V, etc.)

CS1W-AD161

20 words

200 words

Yes

0 to 95
(See
note.)

4 outputs (1 to 5 V,
4 to 20 mA, etc.)

CS1W-DA041

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

8 outputs
(1 to 5 V, etc.)

CS1W-DA08V

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

8 outputs
(4 to 20 mA)

CS1W-DA08C

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

Analog Output
Unit

111

Section 2-4

Units
Name

Specifications

Model

Number of
words
allocated
(CIO 2000 to
CIO 2959)

Number of
words
allocated
(D20000 to
D29599)

Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack

C200H
Expansion
I/O Racks

CS-series
Expansion
Racks

CS-series
Longdistance
Expansion
Racks

SYSMAC
BUS Slave
Racks

Unit
No.

Reference

W368

Isolated Thermocouple Input
Unit

4 inputs (D, E, J, K,
N, R, S, T, or ±80 mV
DC)

CS1W-PTS01-V1

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

High-resolution
Isolated Thermocouple Input
Unit

4 inputs (B, E, J, K,
L, N, R, S, T, U,
WRe5-26, PL II, or
mV)

CS1W-PTS11

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

Isolated Resistance Thermometer Input
Unit

4 inputs
(Pt100, JPt100)

CS1W-PTS02

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

Isolated
Ni508.4Ω
Resistance
Thermometer
Input Unit

4 inputs (Ni508.4Ω)

CS1W-PTS03

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

High-resolution
Isolated Resistance Thermometer Input
Unit

4 inputs (Pt100,
JPt100, Pt50, or
Ni508.4 Ω)

CS1W-PTS12

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

Isolated 2-wire
Transmission
Device Input
Unit

4 inputs (1 to 5 V, 4
to 20 mA) 2-wire
transmission device
power supply built in

CS1W-PTW01

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

Isolated DC
Input Unit

4 inputs (1 to 5 V,
4 to 20 mA, etc.)

CS1W-PDC01

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

High-resolution
Isolated DC
Input Unit

4 inputs (1 to 5 V,
4 to 20 mA, etc.)

CS1W-PDC11

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

Isolated Control Output Unit
(Analog Output
Unit)

4 outputs (1 to 5 V,
4 to 20 mA)

CS1W-PMV01

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

Isolated Control Output Unit
(Analog Output
Unit, advanced
type)

4 outputs
(−10 to 10 V, −1 to
1 V: 1/16,000 resolution; 0 to 10 V, 0 to
5 V, 0 to 1 V: 1/8,000
resolution; 0 to 5 V:
1/4,000 resolution)

CS1W-PMV02

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

Power Transducer Input Unit

8 inputs (−1 to 1 mA,
0 to 1 mA)

CS1W-PTR01

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

DC Input Unit
(100 mA)

8 inputs (−100 to
100 mV, 0 to
100 mV)

CS1W-PTR02

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

Isolated Pulse
Input Unit

4 pulse inputs (0 to
20 kpulses/s, 0 to 20
pulses/s)

CS1W-PPS01

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

Note Allocated two unit numbers.
Name

Position
Control
Units

Motion
Control
Units

112

Specifications

Model

Number of
words
allocated
(CIO 2000 to
CIO 2959)

Number of
words
allocated
(D20000 to
D29599)

CPU
Rack

Mountable Racks
C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks

Unit No.

CS-series
Expansion
Racks

CS-series
Longdistance
Expansion
Racks

SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks

Pulse output, 1 axis, 1 to
500 kpulses/s, open-collector output

CS1W-NC113

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

Pulse output, 1 axis, 1 to
500 kpulses/s, line-driver
output

CS1W-NC133

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

Pulse outputs, 2 axes, 1 to
500 kpulses/s, open-collector outputs

CS1W-NC213

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

Pulse outputs, 2 axes, 1 to
500 kpulses/s, line-driver
outputs

CS1W-NC233

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

Pulse outputs, 4 axes, 1 to
500 kpulses/s, open-collector outputs

CS1W-NC413

20 words

200 words

Yes

0 to 95 (See
note 1.)

Pulse output, 4 axes, 1 to
500 kpulses/s, line-driver
outputs

CS1W-NC433

20 words

200 words

Yes

0 to 95 (See
note 1.)

Two axes, analog output
for each axis, supports Glanguage

CS1W-MC221-V1

30 words

None

Yes

0 to 95 (See
note 2.)

Four axes, analog output
for each axis, supports Glanguage

CS1W-MC421-V1

50 words

None

Yes

0 to 95 (See
note 3.)

Reference

W376

W359

Section 2-4

Units
Name

Customizable
Counter
Unit

Specifications

Model

Number of
words
allocated
(CIO 2000 to
CIO 2959)

Number of
words
allocated
(D20000 to
D29599)
100 words
(90 for general data
ex-change)

CS1W-HIO01

10 words

4 Kwords, 12 contact
inputs, 8 contact outputs,
2 pulse inputs, 2 pulse
outputs

CS1W-HCP22

10 words

4 Kwords, 12 contact
inputs, 8 contact outputs,
1 pulse input, 1 analog
input, 2 analog outputs

CS1W-HCA12-V1

4 Kwords, 12 contact
inputs, 8 contact outputs,
2 pulse inputs, 2 analog
outputs

C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks

Unit No.

CS-series
Expansion
Racks

CS-series
Longdistance
Expansion
Racks

SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks

Reference

Yes

0 to 95

Yes

0 to 95

10 words

Yes

0 to 95

CS1W-HCA22

10 words

Yes

0 to 95

Pulse inputs for two axes,
counting rate: 500 kcps
max., line driver compatible

CS1W-CT021

40 words

400 words

Yes

0 to 95 (Allo- W902
cated words
for 4 unit
numbers.)

Pulse inputs for four axes,
counting rate: 500 kcps
max., line driver compatible

CS1W-CT041

40 words

400 words

Yes

0 to 95 (Allocated words
for 4 unit
numbers.)

GP-IB
Interface
Unit

Conforms to IEEE-4881978.

CS1W-GPI01

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 95

CompoNet Master Unit

CompoNet remote I/O

CS1W-CRM21

Yes

Communications
mode No. 0: 128
inputs/128 outputs
for Word Slaves

20 words

None

0 to 95 (Allocated words
for 2 unit
numbers.)

Communications
mode No. 1: 256
inputs/256 outputs
for Word Slaves

40 words

None

0 to 95 (Allocated words
for 4 unit
numbers.)

Communications
mode No. 2: 512
inputs/512 outputs
for Word Slaves

80 words

None

0 to 95 (Allocated words
for 8 unit
numbers.)

Communications
mode No. 3: 256
inputs/256 outputs
for Word Slaves and
128 inputs/128 outputs for Bit Slaves

80 words

None

0 to 95 (Allocated words
for 8 unit
numbers.)

Communications
mode No. 8: 1,024
inputs/1,024 outputs
for Word Slaves and
256 inputs/256 outputs for Bit Slaves
maximum

10 words

Depends
on setting

0 to 95 (Allocated words
for 1 unit
numbers.)

Highspeed
Counter
Unit

4 Kwords, 12 contact
inputs, 8 contact outputs

Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack

Note

W384

W410

W456

1. Allocated two unit numbers.
2. Allocated three unit numbers.
3. Allocated five unit numbers.

113

Section 2-4

Units
C200H Special I/O Units
C200H High-density I/O Units
Note

1. Functionally, these Units are I/O Units, but are categorized as Special I/O
Units.
2. C200H Units and Racks cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Racks
or Expansion Racks.

Name

Specifications

Model

Number of
words allocated
(CIO 2000 to
CIO 2959)

Number of
words allocated
(D20000 to
D29599)

Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack

C200H
Expansion
I/O Racks

CS-series
Expansion
Racks

CS-series
Long-distance
Expansion
Racks

SYSMAC
BUS Slave
Racks

Unit
No.

Reference

3-7 C200H
High-density I/O
Units (Special
I/O Units) and
Appendix A
Specifications
of Basic I/O
Units and Highdensity I/O
Units

DC Input
Units

24 V DC, 32 inputs

C200H-ID215

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

TTL Input
Units

5 V DC, 32 inputs

C200H-ID501

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

Transistor
Output
Units

24 V DC, 32 sinking
outputs

C200H-OD215

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

TTL Output
Units

5 V DC, 32 sinking
outputs

C200H-OD501

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

TTL I/O
Units

5 V DC, 16 inputs,
16 sinking outputs

C200H-MD501

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

DC
Input/Transistor Output Units

24 V DC, 16 inputs,
16 sinking outputs

C200H-MD215

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

12 V DC, 16 inputs,
16 sinking outputs

C200H-MD115

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

C200H Special I/O Units
Note C200H Units and Racks cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Racks or
Expansion Racks.
Name

Temperature
Control Units

114

Specifications

Model

Number of
words allocated
(CIO 2000 to
CIO 2959)

Number of
words allocated
(D20000 to
D29599)

Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack

C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks

CS-series
Expansion Racks

CS-series
Long-distance
Expansion
Racks

SYSMAC
BUS Slave
Racks

Unit
No.

Thermocouple input,
time-proportioning PID,
or ON/OFF transistor
output

C200H-TC001

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

Thermocouple input,
time-proportioning PID,
or ON/OFF voltage output

C200H-TC002

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

Thermocouple input,
PID current output

C200H-TC003

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

Temperature-resistance thermometer
input, time-proportioning PID, or ON/OFF
transistor output

C200H-TC101

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

Temperature-resistance thermometer
input, time-proportioning PID, or ON/OFF
voltage output

C200H-TC102

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

Temperature-resistance thermometer
input, PID current output

C200H-TC103

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

Reference

W225

Section 2-4

Units
Name

Heat/Cool
Temperature
Control Units

Temperature
Sensor Units

PID Control
Units

Cam Positioner Units

ASCII Units

Analog Input
Units

Analog Output Units

Analog I/O
Units

Specifications

Model

Number of
words allocated
(CIO 2000 to
CIO 2959)

Number of
words allocated
(D20000 to
D29599)

Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack

C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks

CS-series
Expansion Racks

CS-series
Long-distance
Expansion
Racks

SYSMAC
BUS Slave
Racks

Unit
No.

Thermocouple input,
time-proportioning PID,
or ON/OFF transistor
output

C200H-TV001

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

Thermocouple input,
time-proportioning PID,
or ON/OFF voltage output

C200H-TV002

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

Thermocouple input,
PID current output

C200H-TV003

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

Temperature-resistance thermometer
input, time-proportioning PID, or ON/OFF
transistor output

C200H-TV101

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

Temperature-resistance thermometer
input, time-proportioning PID, or ON/OFF
voltage output

C200H-TV102

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

Temperature-resistance thermometer
input, PID current output

C200H-TV103

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

Thermocouple input,
K(CA) or J(IC), selectable

C200H-TS001

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

C200H-TS002

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

Temperature-resistance thermometer,
JPt 100 Ω

C200H-TS101

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

Temperature-resistance thermometer,
Pt 100 Ω

C200H-TS102

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

Voltage output/current
input, time-proportioning PID, or ON/OFF
transistor output

C200H-PID01

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

Voltage output/current
input, time-proportioning PID, or ON/OFF
voltage output

C200H-PID02

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

Voltage output/current
input, PID current output

C200H-PID03

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

48 cam outputs (16
external outputs and 32
internal outputs)
Resolver speed: 20 µs
(5 kHz)

C200H-CP114

10 words

11 words

Yes

0 to 9

Reference

W240

W124

W241

W224

24-Kbyte RAM

C200H-ASC02

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

W165

200-Kbyte RAM, 2 RS232C ports

C200H-ASC11

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to F

W306

200-Kbyte RAM, RS232C port, RS-422/485
port

C200H-ASC21

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to F

200-Kbyte RAM, 3 RS232C ports

C200H-ASC31

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to F

4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to
10 V (selectable), 4
inputs, 1/4,000 resolution

C200H-AD001

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 9

4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to
10 V/–10 to +10 V
(selectable); 8 inputs;
1/4,000 resolution

C200H-AD002

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to F

4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to
10 V/–10 to +10 V
(selectable); 8 inputs;
1/4,000 resolution

C200H-AD003

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to F

W345

4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to
10 V (selectable); 2
outputs; 1/4,000 resolution

C200H-DA001

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 9

W229

4 to 20 mA, –10 to
+10 V (selectable),
4 outputs

C200H-DA002

10 words

None

Yes

0 to F

1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, –10
to +10 V (selectable), 8
outputs; 1/4,000 resolution

C200H-DA003

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to F

4 to 20 mA, 8 outputs;
1/4,000 resolution

C200H-DA004

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to F

2 inputs (4 to 20 mA,
1 to 5 V, etc.)
2 outputs (4 to 20 mA,
1 to 5 V, etc.)

C200H-MAD01

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to F

W229

W325

115

Section 2-4

Units
Name

High-speed
Counter
Units

Specifications

Model

Number of
words allocated
(CIO 2000 to
CIO 2959)

Number of
words allocated
(D20000 to
D29599)

Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack

C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks

CS-series
Expansion Racks

CS-series
Long-distance
Expansion
Racks

SYSMAC
BUS Slave
Racks

Unit
No.

Reference

One-axis pulse input,
counting rate: 50 kcps
max.

C200H-CT001-V1

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 9

One-axis pulse input,
counting rate: 75 kcps
max., line driver compatible

C200H-CT002

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 9

Two-axis pulse input,
counting rate: 75 kcps
max., line driver compatible

C200H-CT021

20 words

100 words

Yes

0 to F

W311

Motion Control Units

G-language programmable, two-axis analog
outputs

C200H-MC221

20 words

100 words
(Uses first 2
words.)

Yes

0 to F

W315
W314

Position Control Units

Two axes, pulse output
for each axis, speeds: 1
to 250,000 pps, directly
connects to servomotor
driver

C200H-NC211

20 words

200 words

Yes

0 to 9

W166

One axis, pulse output,
speed: 1 to 99,990 pps

C200H-NC111

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 9

W137

One axis, pulse output,
speeds 1 to 250,000
pps, directly connects
to servomotor driver,
line driver compatible
(Z level)

C200H-NC112

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 9

W128

One axis, pulse output,
speeds 1 to 500,000
pps, directly connects
to servomotor driver

C200HW-NC113

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to F

W334

Two axes, pulse output
for each axis, speeds 1
to 500,000 pps, directly
connects to servomotor
driver

C200HW-NC213

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to F

Four axes, pulse output
for each axis, speeds 1
to 500,000 pps, directly
connects to servomotor
driver

C200HW-NC413

20 words

200 words

Yes

0 to F

ID Sensor
Units

Electromagnetic coupling

C200H-IDS01-V1

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

Microwave type

C200H-IDS21

10 words

None

Yes

0 to 9

Voice Unit
(See note 6.)

Adaptive differential
pulse-code modulation

C200H-OV001

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 9

W172

Fuzzy Logic
Unit

8 inputs, 4 outputs

C200H-FZ001

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to 9

W208

JPCN-1 Unit

Settable as master or
slave

C200H-JRM21

10 words

100 words

Yes

0 to F

---

DeviceNet
Master Units

DeviceNet Remote I/O,
1,600 bits max.

C200HW-DRM21V1

(See note 1.)

None

Yes

0 to F

W347

C200H I/O
Link Units

DeviceNet Slave, 512
inputs/512 outputs
max.

C200HW-DRT21

10 words

None

Yes

0 to F

W347

CompoBus/S Master Units

CompoBus/S Remote
I/O, 256 bits max.

C200HW-SRM21V1

10 words or
20 words

None

Yes

0 to F

W266

PLC Link
Units

PLC Link, single level:
32 units, multilevel:
16 Units

C200H-LK401

(See note 2.)

None

Yes

0 to 9

W135

SYSMAC
BUS Remote
I/O Master
Units

Wired

C200H-RM201

(See note 3.)

---

Yes

0 to 3

W120

Optical

C200H-RM001PV1

---

Yes

0 to 3

W136

Note

W141

W153

1. The DeviceNet Slaves are allocated up to 1,600 I/O bits (100 words) in the
DeviceNet Area.
2. PLC Link Units are allocated up to 1,024 bits (64 words) in the Link Area.
3. Each Slave Rack connected to a Remote I/O Master Unit is allocated
10 words in the SYSMAC BUS Area.
Each I/O Terminal is allocated 1 word in the I/O Terminal Area.
4. The C200HW-CLK21 Controller Link Unit (C200HX/HG/HE) cannot be
used. Use the CS1W-CLK21(-V1) or CS1W-CLK23 Controller Link Unit
(CS-series CPU Bus Unit). Data links and message services are supported between C200HX/HG/HE and CS-series PLCs.

116

Units

Section 2-4
5. The C200H-LK@@@-@@ Host Link Unit (C200H, C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE) cannot be used. Use the CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit (CS-series CPU Bus Unit).
6. Observe the following precautions when using the C200H-OV001 Voice
Unit.
• The Voice Unit cannot be used if an OMRON Programmable Terminal
(PT) set for NT Link Mode is connected to the peripheral port or RS232C port on the CPU Unit.
• When using both a Voice Unit and an OMRON PT, connect the PT to
a CS1W-SCB@@@ Serial Communications Board or to a CS1WSCU@@@ Serial Communications Unit.
• When a Voice Unit is mounted, set to baud rate for the peripheral port
or RS-232C port on the CPU Unit to 9,600 bps or less when communicating with a computer or other external device.

117

Section 2-4

Units

2-4-3

CS-series CPU Bus Units

Name

Controller
Link Units

Specifications

Model

Number
of words
allocated
CIO 1500
to
CIO 1899

Number
of words
allocated
D30000
to
D31599

CPU
Bus
Unit
System
Settings

Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack

C200H
Expansion
I/O Racks

CS-series
Expansion
Racks

CS-series
Long-distance
Expansion
Racks

SYSMAC
BUS Slave
Racks

Wired

CS1WCLK21-V1,
CS1WCLK23

25 words

100 words

Used
(data link
tables)

Yes

Optical ring,
H-PCF cable

CS1WCLK12-V1,
CS1WCLK13

25 words

100 words

Used
(data link
tables)

Yes

Optical ring,
GI cable

CS1WCLK52-V1,
CS1WCLK53

25 words

100 words

Used
(data link
tables)

Yes

Coaxial

CS1WSLK21

25 words

100 words

Used
(data link
tables)

Yes

Optical

CS1WSLK11

25 words

100 words

Used
(data link
tables)

Yes

Two RS-232C Ports

CS1WSCU21-V1

25 words

20 words

Not used

Yes

Two RS-422A/ 485 Ports

CS1WSCU31-V1

25 words

20 words

Not used

Yes

10Base-5

CS1WETN01

25 words

100 words

Used

Yes

100Base-TX (Can be used
as 10Base-T.)

CS1WETN21

25 words

100 words

Used

EtherNet/IP
Unit

Tag data links, FINS commu- CS1Wnications, CIP message com- EIP21
munications, FTP server, etc.

25 words

100 words

FL-net Unit

100Base-TX cyclic transmis- CS1Wsions and message transmis- FLN22
sions

25 words

DeviceNet
Unit

DeviceNet remote I/O 2,048
CS1Wpt, user settings without Con- DRM21-V1
figurator

PROFIBUSDP Master
Unit

PROFIBUS-DP remote I/O
7,168 words

Loop Control
Unit

SYSMAC
LINK Units

Unit
No.

0 to F
(See
note
1.)

Reference

W309

---

W367

0 to F
(See
note
2.)

Yes

0 to F

W336

Yes

0 to F
(See
note
2.)

W343

Yes

0 to F
(See
note
2.)

W420
W421

Not used

Yes

0 to F
(8
Units
max.)

W465

100 words

Used

Yes

0 to F
(See
note
2.)

W440

25 words

100 words

Not used

Yes

0 to F

W380

CS1WPRM21

25 words

100 words

Not used

Yes

0 to F

W409

PID operations: 32 max.
Loop, process operations:
250 max.

CS1WLC001

25 words

None

Not used

Yes

0 to F
(See
note
3.)

W374
W375

Position
Control
Units
supporting
MECHATROLINK-II
communications

MECHATROLINK-II,
16 axes max.

CS1WNCF71

25 words

None

Not used

Yes

0 to F

W426

High-resolution Motion
Control Unit

MECHATROLINK II, Real
axes: 30, Virtual axes: 2,
Special motion control language

CS1WMCH71

25 words

100 words

Not used

Yes

0 to F

---

SYSMAC
SPU Unit
(High-speed
Storage and
Processing
Unit)

One CF card
type I/II slot
(used with
OMRON HMCEF@@@ Memory Card)

One
Ethernet
port

CS1WSPU01

Not used

Yes

0 to F

W229

Two
Ethernet
ports

CS1WSPU02

Not used

Serial Communications
Unit

Ethernet
Unit

Note

1. A maximum of eight Units can be mounted.
2. A maximum of four Units can be mounted.
3. A maximum of three Units can be mounted.
4. Some CPU Bus Units are allocated words in the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area. The system must be designed so that the number of words allocated
in the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area does not exceed its capacity. Refer to 27 CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity for details.

118

Section 2-5

Expanded System Configuration

2-5
2-5-1

Expanded System Configuration
Serial Communications System
The CS-series system configuration can be expanded by using the following
serial communications ports.
• CPU Unit built-in ports × 2 (peripheral port and RS-232C port)
• Serial Communications Board ports × 2 (RS-232C or RS-422/485)
• Serial Communications Unit ports × 2 (RS-232C)
• ASCII Unit ports × 2 (RS-232C or RS-422/485)
1,2,3...

1. If the CPU Unit built-in ports, the Serial Communications Board ports, or
Serial Communications Unit ports are used, words can be allocated to various protocols, such as Host Link and protocol macro.
2. Up to 16 Serial Communications Units and 16 ASCII Units can be connected to one CPU Unit. The system configuration can then be expanded by
connecting devices with RS-232C or RS-422/485 ports, such as Temperature Sensor Units, Bar Code Readers, ID Systems, personal computers,
Board Computers, Racks, and other companies’ PLCs.

ASCII Unit (16 Units max.)
Serial Communications Unit (16 Units max.)
CPU Unit
Serial Communications Board
Communications ports 1

Peripheral port
RS-232C port

Communications ports 2

Expanding the system configuration as shown above allows a greater
number of serial communications ports, and greater flexible and simpler
support for different protocols.
3. The Serial Gateway is supported for CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later and Serial Communications Boards/Units with unit version 1.2 or later.
• CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later: Gateway from FINS network to
serial communications (CompoWay/F only) is possible through the
peripheral port and RS-232C port.
• Serial Communications Boards/Units with unit version 1.2 or later: Gateway from FINS network to serial network (CompoWay/F, Modbus, or Host
Link) is possible. Using a Gateway to Host Link enables Host Links with
the PLC as master.

119

Section 2-5

Expanded System Configuration
System Configuration Example
Programming Device

Programming
CX Programmer Console
Host computer
Programmable
Terminal

NT Link
Serial Communications Unit
Serial Communications Unit
Ver. 1.2 or later

CPU Unit

Peripheral
port

CompoWay Master
Modbus Master

Serial Communications Board

Host Link Master

RS-232C port
Protocol macro
General-purpose
external devices
(such as other
companies' PLCs)
CPU Unit
Host Link slave

Peripheral Bus

Communications
conditions
automatically
recognized.

RS-232C port

Host Link slave

RS-232C port
Protocol macro
General-purpose external devices
(such as Temperature Sensor
Units, Bar Code Readers)

CompoWay/Fcompatible device
Modbuscompatible device

Refer to page 127 for a table showing which communications protocols are
supported by each Unit.

2-5-2

Systems
The serial communications port mode (protocol) can be switched in the CPU
Unit’s PLC Setup. Depending on the protocol selected, the following systems
can be configured.

Protocols
The following protocols support serial communications.
Protocol

Host Link (SYSMAC WAY)
slave

Main connection

Personal computer
OMRON Programmable
Terminals

No-protocol (customer) com- General-purpose external
munications
devices
NT Links (1: N)

120

OMRON Programmable
Terminals

Use

Communications between
the Host computer and the
PLC. Commands can be
sent to a computer from the
PLC.
No-protocol communications with general-purpose
devices.
High-speed communications with Programmable
Terminals via direct access.

Applicable commands,
communications
instructions
Host Link commands/ FINS
commands. Commands can
be sent to a computer from
the PLC.
TXD(236), RXD(235),
TXDU(256), RXDU(255)
None

Section 2-5

Expanded System Configuration
Protocol

Main connection

Peripheral bus (See note 1.)

Programming Devices
CX-Programmer

Protocol macro (See note 2.) General-purpose external
devices

General-purpose (BASIC
languages) (See note 3.)

General-purpose external
devices

Serial Gateway

OMRON Component
PLC

CompoWay/F Master
(See note 4.)

CompoWay/F slave

Modbus Master
(See note 5.)

Modbus slave

Host Link FINS
(SYSWAY) Master
(See note 5.)

Host Link FINS (SYSWAY)
slave (PLC)

Note

Use

Communications between
Programming Devices and
the PLC from the computer.
Sending and receiving messages (communications
frames) according to the
communications specifications of external devices.
(SYSMAC-PST is used to
create protocols by setting
various parameters.)
Free communications with
general-purpose external
devices using BASIC commands.
Converts FINS commands
that are received into CompoWay/F, Modbus, or Host
Link protocols, and then
transmits the converted
command to the serial line.
Converts FINS commands
(encapsulated CompoWay/F
commands) received at the
serial port into CompoWay/F
commands.
Converts FINS commands
(encapsulated Modbus commands) received at the serial
port into Modbus commands.

Applicable commands,
communications
instructions
None

PMCR(260) instruction

BASIC program

FINS command
2803 hex received
(including sending FINS
command using
CMND(490))
FINS command
2804 hex or 2805 hex
received
(including sending FINS
command using
CMND(490))
Converts FINS commands
Any FINS command
into FINS commands encap- received except those sent
sulated in Host Link
to serial port
(including sending FINS
command using
CMND(490))

1. The peripheral bus mode is used for Programming Devices excluding Programming Console. If Programming Console is to be used, set pin 4 of the
DIP switch on the front panel of the Unit to OFF so that the default peripheral port communications parameters are used instead of those specified
in the PLC Setup.
2. Serial Communications Unit or Serial Communications Board required.
3. ASCII Unit required.
4. CPU Unit with version 3.0 or later (peripheral port and RS-232C port) and
Serial Communications Board/Unit with unit version 1.2 or later only.
5. Serial Communications Board/Unit with unit version 1.2 or later only.

Host Link System (SYSWAY 1:N Mode) (Slave)
The Host Link System allows the I/O memory of the PLC to be read/written,
and the operating mode to be changed from a Host computer (personal computer or Programmable Terminal) by executing Host Link commands or FINS
commands that are preceded by a header and followed by a terminator. Alternatively, FINS commands (preceded by a header and followed by a termina-

121

Section 2-5

Expanded System Configuration

tor) can be sent to a computer connected via the Host Link System by
executing Network Communications Instructions (SEND(090), RECV(098),
and CMND(490)) from the CPU Unit.
Host computer

FINS commands sent via
SEND/RECV/CMND
instructions from the PLC

Applicable port
CPU Unit
Peripheral port RS-232C port

Host Link commands or FINS
commands

Note

Yes

(See note 1.)

(See note 2.)

Serial
Communications
Board

Serial
Communications
Unit

Yes

1. Set pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit to ON, and
set the serial communications mode in the PLC Setup to Host Link.
2. Set pin 5 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit to OFF, and
set the serial communications mode in the PLC Setup to Host Link.
3. Host Link master functions can be performed by sending the CMND(490)
instruction via the Serial Gateway when using Serial Communications
Boards/Units with unit version 1.2 or later.
PLC (Host Link Master)
Serial Communications
Board/Unit

Serial
Gateway

CMND(490)

FINS command sent

FINS

Host Link
header

Host Link
terminator
PLC (Host Link slave)

No-protocol (Custom) Communications System
No-protocol communications allow simple data transmissions, such as inputting bar code data and outputting printer data using communications port I/O
instructions. The start and completion codes can be set, and RS and CS signal control is also possible with no-protocol communications.
The following table shows the usage of each communications port I/O
instruction, based on the communications port being used and the direction of
the data transfer (sending or receiving).
Communications
port

122

CPU Unit's built-in
RS-232C port

Serial port on a Serial Communi- Serial port on a Serial Communications Unit (unit version 1.2 or cations Board (unit version 1.2
later)
or later)

Section 2-5

Expanded System Configuration
Send
Receive

TXD(236)
RXD(235)

TXDU(256)
RXDU(255)

CPU

TXD(236)
RXD(235)

Applicable port

SCU

CPU Unit

Serial
Communications
Unit (SCU)

Peripheral port RS-232C port

RS-232C

Yes
(See note 1.)

Yes
(See note 2.)

RXDU

TXDU
General-purpose
external device
RXD

TXD
General-purpose
external device

Note

1. Set pin 5 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit to OFF, and
set the serial communications mode in the PLC Setup to no-protocol communications.
2. No-protocol communications are supported for Serial Communications
Units with unit version 1.2 or later only.

NT Link System (1:N Mode)
If the PLC and Programmable Terminal (PT) are connected together using
RS-232C ports, the allocations for the PT’s status control area, status notify
area, objects such as touch switches, indicators, and memory maps can be
allocated in the I/O memory of the PLC. The NT Link System allows the PT to
be controlled by the PLC, and the PT can periodically read data from the status control area of the PLC, and perform necessary operations if there are any
changes in the area. The PT can communicate with the PLC by writing data to
the status notify area of the PLC from the PT. The NT Link system allows the
PT status to be controlled and monitored without using PLC ladder programs.
The ratio of PLCs to PTs is 1: n (8 ≥ n ≥ 1).
Set the PT communications settings for a 1:N NT Link. Either one or up to
eight PTs can be connected to each PLC.
Version-1 CPU Units support high-speed NT Links (1:N mode). In this way,
equipment monitoring and settings can be made faster from the PT. The applicable PTs are the NS-series PTs, the NT31(C)-V2 and the NT631(C)-V2.

123

Section 2-5

Expanded System Configuration
1:N Mode

1:N Mode

Applicable port
CPU Unit

RS-232C

Peripheral port RS-232C port
Yes
Yes
(See note 1.) (See note 2.)

RS-232C

RS-232C to RS-422/485
Conversion Adapter

Note

Programmable
Terminal
RS-422A/485

Serial
Communications
Board

Serial
Communications
Unit

Yes

1. Turn ON pin 4 on the DIP switch on
the front of the CPU Unit and set the
serial communications mode in the
PLC Setup for an NT Link.
2. Turn OFF pin 5 on the DIP switch on
the front of the CPU Unit and set the
serial communications mode in the
PLC Setup for an NT Link.

Programmable Programmable Programmable
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal

Note

1. The PLC can be connected to any PT port that supports 1:N NT Links. It
cannot be connected to the RS-232C ports on the NT30 or NT30C, because these ports support only 1:1 NT Links.
2. The NT20S, NT600S, NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C cannot be used if the CPU Unit’s cycle time is 800 ms or longer (even if only
one of these PTs is connected).
3. The Programming Console functionality of a PT (Expansion Function) can
be used only when the PT is connected to the RS-232C or peripheral port
on the CPU Unit. It cannot be used when connected to an RS-232C or RS422A/485 port on a Serial Communications Board or Serial Communications Unit.
4. When more than one PT is connected to the same PLC, be sure that each
PT is assigned a unique unit number. Malfunctions will occur if the same
unit number is set on more than one PT.
5. The 1:1 and 1:N NT Link protocols are not compatible with each other, i.e.,
they are separate serial communications protocols.

Protocol Macros
The CX-Protocol is used to create data transmission procedures (protocols)
for general-purpose external devices according to the communications specifications (half-duplex or full-duplex, asynchronous) of the general-purpose
external devices. The protocols that have been created are then recorded in a
Serial Communications Board, enabling data to be sent to and received from
the external devices by simply executing the PMCR(260) instruction in the
CPU Unit. Protocols for data communications with OMRON devices, such as
Temperature Controller, Intelligent Signal Processors, Bar Code Readers, and
Modems, are supported as standard protocols. (See note.)
Note The standard protocols are provided with the CX-Protocol, Serial Communications Boards, and Serial Communications Units.

124

Section 2-5

Expanded System Configuration
Host computer
CX-Protocol or PSS Support
Software for protocol macro
function

Protocol

Applicable port
CPU Unit
Peripheral port RS-232C port

Serial
Communications
Board
Yes

Serial
Communications
Unit
Yes

Messages

CompoWay/F
(Host Function)

General-purpose external device

The CS-series CPU Unit can operate as a host to send CompoWay/F commands to OMRON components connected in the system. CompoWay/F commands are executed by using the CompoWay/F send/receive sequences in
the standard protocols of the protocol macro function.
Protocol macro

CompoWay/F command
CompoWay/F

OMRON
device

Serial Gateway Mode
When using CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later (peripheral port and RS232C port), the received FINS message is automatically converted into CompoWay/F according to the message (see note). When Serial Communications
Boards/Units with unit version 1.2 or later are used, the received FINS message is automatically converted into either CompoWay/F, Modbus-RTU, Modbus-ASCII, or Host Link FINS according to the message.
Note CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later (peripheral port and RS-232C port)
support automatic conversion into CompoWay/F only (automatic conversion
into Modbus-RTU, Modbus-ASCII, and Host Link FINS is not possible).

125

Section 2-5

Expanded System Configuration
CompoWay/F, Modbus-RTU, Modbus-ASCII
FINS

CPU Unit with unit
version 3.0 or later
(peripheral port or RS232C port)
Serial Communications
Board/Unit with unit
version 1.2 or later

CompoWay
(See note.)

Network
CMND(490) FINS command sent

Serial
Gateway

CompoWay
(See note.)

FINS

Note: Or Modbus-RTU command or Modbus-ASCII command.
These commands cannot be sent to the CPU Unit.

CompoWay
(See note.)

CompoWay-compatible
OMRON Component, or
Modbus-RTU-compatible
or Modbus-ASCIIcompatible device

Host Link FINS
FINS

Serial Communications
Board/Unit with unit
version 1.2 or later
Note: Not supported
for CPU Units

CX-Programmer or other
Programming Device that
uses CX-Server as the
communications driver

Network
CMND(490)

Serial
Gateway

FINS command
sent

FINS
FINS

PLC (Host Link Master)
FINS

Host Link
header

Host Link
terminator

PLC (Host Link slave)

126

Section 2-5

Expanded System Configuration
Unit/Protocol Compatibility
Unit

CPU Units
Serial
Communications
Boards

Serial
Communications
Units

ASCII
Units

Model

Port

CS1G/HCPU@@-E

Peripheral
RS-232C
CS1W-SCB21- RS-232C
V1
RS-232C

Peripheral bus
(See
note 1.)

Host
Link
(slave)

Yes
Yes
---

Yes
Yes
Yes

---

Yes

CS1W-SCB41- RS-232C
--V1
RS-422/485 ---

Yes

CS1W-SCU21- RS-232C
V1
RS-232C
CS1W-SCU31- RS422A/
V1
485
RS422A/
485
C200H-ASC11 RS-232C
RS-232C
C200H-ASC21 RS-232C
RS-422/485
C200H-ASC31 RS-232C
RS-232C
RS-232C
(Terminal
port)

Note

Yes

---

Yes

---

Yes

---

Yes

---

Yes

---------------

No-protocol
(customer)
communications
--Yes
Yes (See
note 2.)
Yes (See
note 2.)
Yes (See
note 2.)
Yes (See
note 2.)
Yes (See
note 2.)
Yes (See
note 2.)
Yes (See
note 2.)
Yes (See
note 2.)
---------------

Protocol
macro

NT Link
(1:N
Mode)

GeneralSerial
purpose Gateway
(using
(See
BASIC) note 2.)

----Yes

Yes
Yes
Yes

-------

Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes

---

Yes

---

Yes

---

Yes

---

Yes

---

Yes

---

Yes

---

Yes

---------------

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

---------------

1. The peripheral bus mode is used for Programming Devices excluding Programming Console. If Programming Console is to be used, set pin 4 of the
DIP switch on the front panel of the Unit to OFF so that the default peripheral port communications parameters are used instead of those specified
in the PLC Setup.
2. Supported for CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later and Serial Communications Boards/Units with unit version 1.2 or later only. For CPU Units,
however, only automatic CompoWay/F connection is possible.

127

Section 2-5

Expanded System Configuration
Host Link System

The following system configurations are possible for a Host Link System.
Host Link Slave
C-mode Commands

Host Link
Host Link commands

FINS Commands

Host Link
FINS
Host Link terminator
Host Link header

In Host Link mode, FINS commands contained between a header and terminator can be sent from the host computer to any PLC on the Network. Communications are possible with PLCs on the same or different types of
interconnected Networks up to two levels away (three levels including the
local level but not including the Host Link connection).

Host Link
FINS

FINS

Host Link
terminator
Host Link header

Host Link

Controller Link Network
or Ethernet

Bridge

Ethernet

Controller Link Network
Controller Link
Network

128

Gateway

Section 2-5

Expanded System Configuration
Communications from Host Computer
SEND(090)/
RECV(098)
CMND(490)

SEND(090): Sends data to the Host computer.
RECV(098): Receives data from the Host computer.
CMND(490): Executes a specified FINS command.

Host Link
FINS
Host Link terminator
Host Link header

Host Link
Controller
Link Network

FINS
Host Link
terminator

FINS

Host Link header

Host Link

Bridge

Ethernet

SEND(090)/
RECV(098)
CMND(490)

Controller Link Network
Controller Link Network
Gateway

Host Link Master

Using a Serial Communications Board/Unit with unit version 1.2 or later and
Serial Gateway mode enables received FINS commands to be enclosed in a
Host Link header and terminator and transmitted to the PLC on the serial line
(Host Link slave).

129

Section 2-5

Expanded System Configuration
FINS

Network
CMND(490)

Serial Communications
Board/Unit with unit
version 1.2 or later
Serial
Gateway

FINS command
sent

CX-Programmer or other
Programming Device
that uses CX-Server as
the communications
driver

FINS
FINS

PLC (Host Link Master)

Host Link
header

FINS

Host Link
header

Host Link
terminator

PLC (Host Link slave)

FINS Messages
FINS (Factory Interface Network Service) messages are commands and
responses that are used as a message service in an OMRON Network. FINS
messages enable the user to control operations such as sending and receiving data and changing operating modes when necessary. The features of
FINS messages are as follows:
Flexible Communications

FINS messages are defined in the application layer and do not rely on the
physical layer, data link layer, or other lower-level layers. This enables flexible
communications on the CPU bus and different types of networks. Basically,
communications with Ethernet, SYSMAC NET, SYSMAC LINK, Controller
Link, DeviceNet, or Host Link Networks, and between the CPU Unit and CPU
Bus Units or Inner Boards is possible via the CPU bus.
CS-series CPU Bus Unit
Inner Board
Ethernet

FINS

TCP/IP FINS

Host Link
FINS
FINS

Controller Link

Note A TCP/IP header must be attached to the FINS command for an Ethernet Network, and a Host Link header must be attached to the FINS command for a
Host Link Network

130

Section 2-5

Expanded System Configuration
Supports Network Relay

Up to three network levels (eight levels for unit version 2.0 or later), including
the local network, can be bypassed to access other Racks.

Network 2

Network 1

Network 3

Note With CS/CJ-series CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later, remote programming/monitoring is possible up to 8 levels away. Refer to 1-6-5 Communications through a
Maximum of 8 Network Levels for details.
Access to CPU Unit Plus
Other Devices on Racks

The CPU Unit, CS-series CPU Bus Units, personal computers (boards), Inner
Boards, and other devices can be identified and specified using unit
addresses.
CS-series
CPU Bus Unit
Inner Board
CPU Unit

Network-to-Serial
Conversion or Network-toSerial-to-Network
Conversion

Personal
computer
board

Using a Serial Communications Board/Unit with unit version 1.2 or later and
Serial Gateway mode enables received FINS commands to be automatically
converted into CompoWay/F, Modbus-RTU, Modbus-ASCII, or Host Link FINS
commands according to the FINS message. FINS commands that have been
converted into Host Link FINS commands can also be converted back into
Host Link FINS commands.

FINS

Network

Serial Communications
Unit with unit version 1.2
or later
Serial
Gateway

FINS

Network
Serial (Host Link)

PLC
(Host Link slave)
FINS

Network

131

Section 2-5

Expanded System Configuration

2-5-3

Communications Network System

Information Systems

The following network systems can be configured when using CS-series
Units.

Ethernet
Message Communications
Host computer to PLC
PLC to PLC or Host computer

Ethernet Unit

FTP Server Function

Socket Service

Host computer to PLC

Sends/receives data using TCP
or UDP protocol

Transmission of files to Memory
Card installed in CPU Unit

Controller Link Unit
Controller Link Support Board

Controller Link
Configurator

Simple Network configuration
(twisted-pair cables/ optical
fiber cables)
Data link and message communications
DeviceNet

CompoBus/S

Message communications
and large-capacity data
transmission
Links between PLC and personal computer

Multi-vendor network
DeviceNet

Optical Controller Link Units
provide a bypass function
when a node fails.

Remote I/O message
communications
Remote I/O: Many points,
free allocation
Message communications
between PLCs, DeviceNet
and Explicit messages

High-speed remote I/O

Multi-level network

Many Types of Slaves
Remote I/O Terminals, Remote I/O Modules, Sensor
Amp Terminals, Sensor Terminals, Bit Chain Terminals

Various connection
methods
Superior Slaves
Remote I/O Terminals,
Remote Adapters, Analog
I/O Terminals, Sensor
Terminals, I/O Link Units,
Temperature Input
Terminals, High-density
I/O Terminals

Various connection methods
Superior Master Units
Serial Communications Units
CPU Units

SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O
Remote I/O via I/O Units
Multiple and optical fiber
cables
Slave Racks, I/O Terminals, I/O Relay Terminals

132

Control Systems

Large-capacity, flexible, and
effective data links

Section 2-5

Expanded System Configuration
Ethernet

If an Ethernet Unit is connected to the system, FINS messages can be used
to communicate between the Host computer connected to the Ethernet and
the PLC, or between PLCs. By executing FTP commands for the PLC from
the Host computer connected to the Ethernet, the contents of the files on the
Memory Card installed in the CPU Unit can be read or written (transferred).
Data can be sent and received using UDP and TCP protocols. These functions enable a greater compatibility with information networks.
Host computer
FTP command
Ethernet
FINS

FINS

Ethernet Unit

Controller Link
The Controller Link Network is the basic framework of the OMRON PLC FA
Network. Connecting a Controller Link Unit to the network enables data links
between PLCs, so that data can be shared without programming, and FINS
message communications between PLCs, which enable separate control and
data transfer when required. The Controller Link Network connections use
either twisted-pair cables or optical fiber cables. Data links and message communications are also possible between the PLC and personal computer. Data
links enable large-capacity and free allocations. FINS message communications also allow large-capacity data transfer.
Controller Link Unit

Messages

Controller Link Unit
Controller Link
Support
Board

Controller Link
Free
allocation

Data link

DeviceNet
DeviceNet is a multi-vendor network consisting of multi-bit control and information systems and conforms to the Open Field DeviceNet specification.
Connecting a DeviceNet Master Unit to the network enables remote I/O communications between the PLC and the Slaves on the network. Remote I/O
communications enable large-capacity I/O and user-set allocations. Analog
I/O Terminals are used for the Slaves. Message communications are possible
between PLCs and between the PLC and DeviceNet devices manufactured by
other companies.

133

Section 2-5

Expanded System Configuration

The following Units can be used to connect to a DeviceNet network from a
CS-series PLC. There are differences in functionality, including in the words
that are allocated for fixed allocations.
Name
CS-series
DeviceNet
Unit

Model
Classification
CS1W-DRM21 CS-series CPU
Bus Unit

C200H
C200HWDeviceNet DRM21-V2
Master Unit

C200H Special
I/O Unit

Master/slave
Fixed allocations for remote I/O master
Master and slave In CS-series
One of following three groups
DeviceNet Area Outputs: CIO 3200 to CIO 3263
Inputs: CIO 3300 to CIO 3363
Outputs: CIO 3400 to CIO 3463
Inputs: CIO 3500 to CIO 3563
Outputs: CIO 3600 to CIO 3663
Inputs: CIO 3700 to CIO 3763
Master only
In C200H
Outputs: CIO 0050 to CIO 0099
DeviceNet Area Inputs: CIO 0350 to CIO 0399

DeviceNet
Master Unit

Messages

Remote I/O

DeviceNet Slaves

CompoBus/S
CompoBus/S is a high-speed ON/OFF bus for remote I/O communications.
Connecting a CompoBus/S Master Unit to the network allows remote I/O
communications between the PLC and Slaves. High-speed communications
are performed with 256 points in a cycle time of 1 ms max.
CompoBus/S Master Unit

CompoBus/S
Remote I/O

PROFIBUS-DP
PROFIBUS (PROcess FIeldBUS) is an open fieldbus standard for a wide
range of applications in manufacturing, processing, and building automation.
The Standard, EN 50170 (the Euronorm for field communications), to which
PROFIBUS adheres, ensures vendor independence and transparency of
operation. It enables devices from various manufacturers to intercommunicate
without having to make any special interface adaptations.

134

Section 2-5

Expanded System Configuration
PROFIBUS-DP Master Unit

PROFIBUS-DP
Remote I/O

Communications Network Overview
System
Information networks

Network
Ethernet

Controller Link

RS-232C →
Controller Link
Control networks

Controller Link

Function
Between Host computer and PLC.
Between PLCs.
Between Host computer and Memory
Card installed in CPU
Unit.
Between PLC and
nodes with socket service, such as UNIX
computers.
Between PLC and personal computer
directly connected to
the Network.
Between Host Link
computer and PLC on
the Network.
Between PLCs.

PLC Link
DeviceNet

PLC and Network
devices (Slaves).

CompoBus/S

PROFIBUS-DP

Communications
FINS message
communications

Communications
Device
Ethernet Unit

FTP server

Socket service

FINS message
communications
Data link (offset,
simple settings)
Host Link commands
and gateway.

Controller Link Support Board and Controller Link Unit

FINS message
communications
Data link (offset,
simple settings)
Simple data link
FINS message
communications in an
open network.
Large-capacity remote
I/O (fixed or free allocation) in an open network
High-speed remote I/O
in a network with
OMRON devices only.
Large-capacity remote
I/O (user-set allocation) in an open network

Controller Link Unit

RS-232C cables and
Controller Link Unit

PLC Link Unit
C200H DeviceNet
Master Unit (C200HWDRM21-V1) and Configurator

CompoBus/S Master
Unit
PROFIBUS-DP Master
Unit and Configurator

135

Expanded System Configuration

Section 2-5

Communications Specifications
Network

Ethernet

Controller Link

PLC Link

DeviceNet

136

Communications
Max.
Commu- Max. No. Commu- Data link Max.
Connectnicaof Units
nicacapacity remote
able
Mes- Data
Re- baud rate
tions
tions
(per netI/O
devices
sages link mote
distance
medium
work)
points
I/O
Yes
----10 Mbps
2.5 km/
--Coaxial
----Host com100 m
or
puter-totwistedPLC, PLCpair
to-PLC
100 Mbps 100 m
--Twisted- ----pair
32,000
--PLC-to-PLC,
Special
Yes
Yes
--2 Mbps
Twisted- 62
personal
(twisted- words
pair
(62 for
computer-topair)
cables:
Wired
PLC
cables or
500 m
Units
(1.5 km
only with optical
with two Repeater fiber
Repeater Units, 32 cables
Units)
without
Repeater
Optical
Units)
cables:
20 km/
30km
--Yes
--128 Kbps 500 m
32
RS64 words --232C,
RS-422,
optical
fiber
cables
63
Special
--2,048 PLC-toYes
--Yes
500 Kbps 100 m
cables
Slave
Communi(Slaves:
cations
Remote I/O
cycle:
Terminals,
Approx.
Remote
5 ms (128
Adapters.
inputs,
Sensor Ter128 outminals,
puts)
CQM1 I/O
Link Units,
Analog Output Terminals, Analog
Input Terminals)

Section 2-6

Unit Current Consumption
Network

Communications
Mes- Data
Resages link mote
I/O

Max.
Commu- Max. No. Commu- Data link Max.
baud rate
nicaof Units
nicacapacity remote
tions
tions
(per netI/O
distance
medium
work)
points

---

Yes

750 Kbps 100 m
Communications
cycle:
Approx.
1 ms max.
(128
inputs,
128 outputs)

Two-core --wires,
special
flat
cables

256

PROFIBUS-DP ---

---

Yes

100 m
12 Mbps
Communications
cycle:
Approx.
3.5 ms
max. (128
inputs,
128 outputs)

125

Special
cables

7,168
words

CompoBus/S

2-6

---

Connectable
devices
PLC-toSlave
(Slaves:
Remote I/O
Terminals,
Remote I/O
Modules.
Sensor Terminals, Sensor Amp
Terminals,
Bit Chain
Terminals)
PLC-toSlave
(Slaves: All
PROFIBUSDP slaves)

Unit Current Consumption
The amount of current/power that can be supplied to the Units mounted in a
Rack is limited by the capacity of the Rack’s Power Supply Unit. Refer to the
following tables when designing your system so that the total current consumption of the mounted Units does not exceed the maximum current for
each voltage group and the total power consumption does not exceed the
maximum for the Power Supply Unit.

2-6-1

CPU Racks and Expansion Racks
The following table shows the maximum currents and power that can be supplied by Power Supply Units in CPU Racks and Expansion Racks (both CSseries Expansion Racks and C200H Expansion I/O Racks).
When calculating current/power consumption in a CPU Rack, be sure to
include the power required by the CPU Rack and CPU Unit themselves. Likewise, be sure to include the power required by the Expansion Rack itself
When calculating current/power consumption in an Expansion Rack.
Power Supply
Unit
C200HW-PA204
C200HW-PA204S
C200HW-PA204R
C200HW-PA204C
C200HW-PD204
C200HW-PA209R
C200HW-PD025

Max. Current Consumption
5-V group
26-V group
24-V group
(Internal logic)
(Relays)
(Service)
4.6 A
0.625 A
None
4.6 A
0.625 A
0.8 A
4.6 A
0.625 A
None
4.6 A
0.625 A
None
4.6 A
0.625 A
None
9A
1.3 A
None
5.3 A
1.3 A
None

Max. Total
Power
Consumption
30 W
30 W
30 W
30 W
30 W
45 W
40 W

137

Section 2-6

Unit Current Consumption

2-6-2

SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Slave Racks
The following table shows the maximum currents and power that can be supplied by Power Supply Units in SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Slave Racks. Be
sure to include the power required by the Rack itself When calculating current/power consumption.
Slave Unit

C200H-RT201
(Wired)
C200H-RT202
(Wired)
C200H-RT001-P
(Optical)
C200H-RT002-P
(Optical)

Max. Current Consumption
Max. Total
Power
5-V group
26-V group 24-V group
Consumption
(Internal logic)
(Relays)
(Service)
2.7 A
0.625 A
0.8 A
28 W
2.7 A

0.625 A

None

23 W

2.7 A

0.625 A

0.8 A

28 W

2.7 A

0.625 A

None

23 W

The current consumed by each voltage group must not exceed the maximum
current shown in the table above.
1,2,3...

1. Current required at 5 V DC by all Units (A) ≤ Max. Current shown in table
2. Current required at 26 V DC by all Units (B) ≤ Max. Current shown in table
3. Current required at 24 V DC by all Units (C) ≤ Max. Current shown in table
Also, the power consumed by all Units must not exceed the maximum shown
in the table above.
A × 5 V DC + B × 26 V DC + C × 24 V DC ≤ Max. Power shown in table

2-6-3
Example 1

Example Calculations
In this example, the following Units are mounted to a CPU Rack with a
C200HW-PA204S Power Supply Unit.
Unit
CPU Backplane
(8 slots)
CPU Unit
Input Units

Model
CS1W-BC083

CS1H-CPU66H
C200H-ID216
CS1W-ID291
Output Units
C200H-OC221
Special I/O Unit
C200HW-NC213
CS-series CPU Bus CS1W-CLK21
Unit
Service power supply (24 V DC)

Quantity
1

Voltage group
5 V DC 26 V DC 24 V DC
0.11 A
-----

1
2
2
2
1
1

0.82 A
0.10 A
0.20 A
0.01 A
0.30 A
0.33 A

------0.075 A
-----

-------------

0.3 A used

---

0.3 A

Current Consumption
Group
5 V DC
26 V DC
24 V DC

138

Current consumption
0.11 A + 0.82 A + 0.10 A × 2 + 0.20 A × 2 + 0.01 A × 2 + 0.30 A + 0.33 A
= 2.18 A (≤4.6 A)
0.075 A × 2 = 0.15 A (≤0.625 A)
0.3 A = 0.3 A (≤0.8 A)

Section 2-6

Unit Current Consumption
Power Consumption
2.18 A × 5 V + 0.15 A × 26 V + 0.3 A × 24 V
= 10.9 W + 3.9 W + 7.2 W
= 22.0 W (≤30 W)
Example 2

In this example, the following Units are mounted to a CS-series Expansion
Rack with a C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit.
Unit
CS-series Expansion Backplane
(10 slots)
Input Units
Output Units

Model

Quantity

CS1W-BI103

5 V DC
0.23 A

CS1W-ID291
CS1W-OD291

2
8

0.20 A
0.48 A

Voltage group
26 V DC 24 V DC
-----

-----

Current Consumption
Group
5 V DC
26 V DC
24 V DC

Current consumption
0.23 A + 0.20 A × 2 + 0.48 A × 8 = 4.47 A (≤9 A)
-----

Power Consumption
4.47 A × 5 V = 22.35 W (≤45 W)
Example 3

In this example, the following Units are mounted to a SYSMAC BUS Remote
I/O Slave Rack with a C200H-RT201 Slave Unit.
Unit
Input Units
Output Units

Model
C200H-ID211
C200H-OD411

Quantity
2
3

Voltage group
5 V DC 26 V DC 24 V DC
0.11 A
----0.14 A
-----

Current Consumption
Group
5 V DC
26 V DC
24 V DC

Current consumption
0.11 A × 2 + 0.14 A × 3 = 0.64 A (≤2.7A)
-----

Power Consumption
0.64 A × 5 V = 3.2 W (≤28 W)

139

Section 2-6

Unit Current Consumption

2-6-4

Current Consumption Tables

5-V DC Voltage Group
Name
CS1-H CPU Units
(These values include current
consumption by a Programming Console or CX-Programmer connection.)
Serial Communications
Boards
Standard CPU Backplanes
CS-series-only CPU Backplanes
Standard CS-series Expansion Backplanes
CS-series-only Expansion
Backplanes
C200H Expansion I/O Backplanes

I/O Control Units
I/O Interface Units

Model
CS1H-CPU6@H

Current consumption (A)
0.82 (See note.)

CS1G-CPU4@H

0.78 (See note.)

CS1W-SCB21
CS1W-SCB41
CS1W-BC@@3
CS1W-BC@@2

0.28 (See note.)
0.37 (See note.)
0.11
0.11

CS1W-BI@@3

0.23

CS1W-BI@@2

0.23

C200HW-BI031
C200HW-BI051
C200HW-BI081-V1
C200HW-BI101-V1
CS1W-IC102
CS1W-II102

0.15
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.92
0.23

Note NT-AL001 Link Adapters consume 0.15/Unit when used.
Add 0.04 A for each CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter that is used.
Add 0.20 A for each NV3W-M@20L Programmable Terminal that is used.
Basic I/O Unit
Category
C200H Input Units

Name
DC Input Units
AC Input Units

AC/DC Input Units
Interrupt Input Unit
C200H Group-2 High- DC Input Units
density Input Units

140

Model
C200H-ID211
C200H-ID212
C200H-IA121
C200H-IA122
C200H-IA122V
C200H-IA221
C200H-IA222
C200H-IA222V
C200H-IM211
C200H-IM212
C200HS-INT01
C200H-ID216
C200H-ID217
C200H-ID218
C200H-ID219
C200H-ID111

Current
consumption (A)
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.02
0.10
0.12
0.10
0.12
0.12

Section 2-6

Unit Current Consumption
Category

Name

CS-series Basic Input DC Input Units
Units

AC Input Units

C200H Output Units

B7A Input Unit
Interrupt Input Unit
High-speed Input
Unit
Relay Output Units

Transistor Output
Units

B7A Interface Units
Triac Output Units

C200H Group-2 High- Transistor Output
density Output Units Units

Model

Current
consumption (A)

CS1W-ID211
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-ID261
CS1W-ID291
CS1W-IA111
CS1W-IA211
CS1W-B7A12
CS1W-INT01
CS1W-IDP01

0.10
0.15
0.15
0.20
0.11
0.11
0.09
0.10
0.10

C200H-OC221
C200H-OC222
C200H-OC222V
C200H-OC222N
C200H-OC225
C200H-OC226

0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.05
0.03

C200H-OC226N
C200H-OC223
C200H-OC224
C200H-OC224V
C200H-OC224N
C200H-OD411
C200H-OD213
C200H-OD214
C200H-OD216
C200H-OD211
C200H-OD217
C200H-OD212
C200H-OD21A
C200H-B7AO1
C200H-B7A02
C200H-OA221
C200H-OA223
C200H-OA222V
C200H-OA224
C200H-OD218
C200H-OD21B
C200H-OD219

0.03
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.01
0.16
0.01
0.18
0.10
0.10
0.18
0.14
0.27
0.18
0.27
0.18
0.18
0.27

141

Section 2-6

Unit Current Consumption
Category

Name

Model

CS-series Basic Output Units

Relay Output Units
Transistor Output
Units

Triac Output Units

CS-series Basic I/O
Units

B7A Output Unit
DC Input/ Transistor Output Units

TTL I/O Unit
B7A I/O Units
C200H Basic Output
Unit
C200H High-density
Output Unit
C200H High-density
I/O Units

B7A Output Unit

C200H Basic Unit

Analog Timer Unit

B7A I/O Units

CS1W-OC201
CS1W-OC211
CS1W-OD211
CS1W-OD212
CS1W-OD231
CS1W-OD232
CS1W-OD261
CS1W-OD262
CS1W-OD291
CS1W-OD292
CS1W-OA201
CS1W-OA211
CS1W-B7A02
CS1W-MD261
CS1W-MD262
CS1W-MD291
CS1W-MD292
CS1W-MD561
CS1W-B7A21
CS1W-B7A22
C200H-B7AO1

Current
consumption (A)
0.10
0.13
0.17
0.17
0.27
0.27
0.39
0.39
0.48
0.48
0.23
0.41
0.09
0.27
0.27
0.35
0.35
0.27
0.09
0.09
0.10

C200H-B7A02

0.10

C200H-B7A21
C200H-B7A22
C200H-TM001

0.10
0.10
0.06

Special I/O Units
Category

Name

C200H HighDC Input Unit
density I/O Units TTL Input Unit
(Special I/O
Transistor Output
Units)
Unit
TTL Output Unit
TTL I/O Unit
DC Input/
Transistor Output
Units

142

Model
C200H-ID215
C200H-ID501
C200H-OD215

Current
consumption (A)
0.13
0.13
0.22

C200H-OD501
C200H-MD501
C200H-MD215
C200H-MD115

0.22
0.18
0.18
0.18

Section 2-6

Unit Current Consumption
Category
C200H Special
I/O Units

Name

Model

Temperature Control Units

C200H-TC001
C200H-TC002
C200H-TC003
C200H-TC101
C200H-TC102
C200H-TC103
Heat/Cool Tempera- C200H-TV001
ture Control Units
C200H-TV002
C200H-TV003
C200H-TV101
C200H-TV102
C200H-TV103
Temperature SenC200H-TS001
sor Units
C200H-TS002
C200H-TS101
C200H-TS102
PID Control Units
C200H-PID01
C200H-PID02
C200H-PID03
Cam Positioner Unit C200H-CP114
ASCII Units
C200H-ASC02
C200H-ASC11
C200H-ASC31
Analog Input Units

C200H-AD001
C200H-AD002
C200H-AD003
Analog Output Units C200H-DA001
C200H-DA002
C200H-DA003
C200H-DA004

Current
consumption (A)
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.30
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.55
0.45
0.10
0.65
0.60
0.10
0.10

143

Section 2-6

Unit Current Consumption
Category
C200H Special
I/O Units

Name

Analog I/O Unit
C200H-MAD01
High-speed Counter C200H-CT001-V1
Units
C200H-CT002
C200H-CT021
Motion Control Unit C200H-MC221

Position Control
Units

ID Sensor Units
Voice Unit
DeviceNet Master
Unit
CompoBus/S Master Unit
PLC Link Unit
SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Slave
Units
CS-series Special I/O Units

144

Model

Analog I/O Unit
Analog Input Units

C200H-NC211
C200H-NC111
C200H-NC112
C200HW-NC113
C200HW-NC213
C200HW-NC413
C200H-IDS01-V1
C200H-IDS21
C200H-OV001
C200HW-DRM21V1
C200HW-SRM21V1
C200H-LK401
C200H-RM201
C200H-RM001-PV1

CS1W-MAD44
CS1W-AD041V1/081-V1
CS1W-AD161
Analog Output Units CS1WDA041/08V/08C
Isolated ThermoCS1W-PTS01-V1
couple Input Unit
High-resolution
CS1W-PTS11
Isolated Thermocouple Input Unit
Isolated Resistance CS1W-PTS02
Thermometer Input
Unit
Isolated Ni508.4Ω
CS1W-PTS03
Resistance Thermometer Input Unit
High-resolution
CS1W-PTS12
Isolated Resistance
Thermometer Input
Unit
Isolated 2-wire
CS1W-PTW01
Transmission Device
Input Unit
Isolated DC Input
CS1W-PDC01
Unit
High-resolution Iso- CS1W-PDC11
lated DC Input Unit
Isolated Control
CS1W-PMV01
Output Unit (Analog
Output Unit)

Current
consumption (A)
0.10
0.30
0.30
0.45
0.65
(0.85 with Teaching
Box)
0.50
0.15
0.15
0.30
0.30
0.50
0.25
0.25
0.30
0.25
0.15
0.35
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.13
0.15
0.13
0.15
0.12

0.15

0.12

0.15

0.15
0.12
0.15

Section 2-6

Unit Current Consumption
Category
CS-series Special I/O Units

Name
Power Transducer
Input Unit
DC Input Unit
(100 mA)
Isolated Pulse Input
Unit
Motion Control Units

Model
CS1W-PTR01

Current
consumption (A)
0.15

CS1W-PTR02

0.15

CS1W-PPS01

0.20

CS1W-MC221

0.6 (0.80 when connected to a Teaching Box)
0.7 (1.00 when connected to a Teaching Box)
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.36
0.36
0.60
0.80
0.75
0.75
0.36
0.45
0.33
0.40

CS1W-MC421

Position Control
Units

CS1W-NC113
CS1W-NC133
CS1W-NC213
CS1W-NC233
CS1W-NC413
CS1W-NC433
Customizable
CS1W-HIO01-V1
Counter Units
CS1W-HCP22-V1
CS1W-HCA12-V1
CS1W-HCA22-V1
High-speed Counter CS1W-CT021
Unit
CS1W-CT041
GP-IB Interface Unit CS1W-GPI01
CompoNet Master
CS1W-CRM21
Unit

145

Section 2-6

Unit Current Consumption
CS-series CPU Bus Units
Category
CS-series CPU Bus
Units

Name
Controller Link
Unit

Serial Communications Units
SYSMAC LINK
Unit
Ethernet Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit
FL-net Unit
DeviceNet Unit
PROFIBUS-DP
Master Unit
Position Control
Unit supporting
MECHATROLINKII communications
Loop Control Unit
High-resolution
Motion Control
Unit
SYSMAC SPU
Units (High-speed
Storage and Processing Unit)

Model

Current
consumption (A)
0.33

CS1W-CLK21-V1,
CS1W-CLK23
CS1W-CLK12-V1,
CS1W-CLK13
CS1W-CLK52-V1,
CS1W-CLK53
CS1W-SCU21-V1
CS1W-SCU31-V1
CS1W-SLK21
CS1W-SLK11
CS1W-ETN01
CS1W-ETN21
CS1W-EIP21
CS1W-FLN22
CS1W-DRM21-V1
CS1W-PRM21

0.30 (See note.)
0.40
0.48
0.47
0.40
0.38
0.41
0.38
0.29
0.40

CS1W-NCF71

0.36

CS1W-LC001
CS1W-MCH71

0.36
0.80

CS1W-SPU01
CS1W-SPU02

0.56
0.70

0.58
0.65

Category
C200H Output Units

Name
Relay Contact
Output Unit

Transistor
Output Units

146

Model
C200H-OC221
C200H-OC222
C200H-OC223
C200H-OC224
C200H-OC225
C200H-OC222V/N
C200H-OC226(N)
C200H-OC224V/N
C200H-OD216
C200H-OD217

Current
consumption (A)
0.075 for 8 points
when ON simultaneously

0.09 for 8 points
when ON simultaneously
0.075 for 8 points
when ON simultaneously

Section 2-6

Unit Current Consumption
Category
C200H Special I/O
Units

CS-series Basic
Output Units

CS-series Special I/O
Units

Name

Model

Analog Input
Units
Analog Output
Units

C200H-AD003

Analog I/O Unit
Analog Input
Unit

CS1W-MAD44
CS1W-AD041/081
CS1W-AD161
CS1W-DA041/08V
CS1W-DA08C
CS1W-PTS01-V1

C200H-DA003
C200H-DA004
Analog I/O Units C200H-MAD01
ID Sensor Units C200H-IDS01-V1
C200H-IDS21
Relay Output
CS1W-OC201
Units
CS1W-OC211

Analog Output
Unit

Isolated Thermocouple Input
Unit
High-resolution CS1W-PTS11
Isolated Thermocouple Input
Unit
Isolated Resis- CS1W-PTS02
tance Thermometer Input Unit
Isolated Ni508Ω
Resistance
Thermometer
Input Unit
High-resolution
Isolated Resistance Thermometer Input Unit
Isolated 2-wire
Transmission
Device Input
Unit
Isolated DC
Input Unit
High-resolution
Isolated DC
Input Unit
Isolated Control
Output Unit
(Analog Output
Unit)
Power Transducer Input Unit
DC Input Unit
(100 mA)
Isolated Pulse
Input Unit
Customizable
Counter Unit

Current
consumption (A)
0.10
0.20
0.25
0.2
0.12
0.12
0.006 per ON
output point
0.006 per ON
output point
0.20
0.09
0.06
0.18
0.25
0.15

0.08

0.15

CS1W-PTS03

0.15

CS1W-PTS12

0.07

CS1W-PTW01

0.16

CS1W-PDC01

0.15

CS1W-PDC11

0.12

CS1W-PMV01

0.16

CS1W-PTR01

0.08

CS1W-PTR02

0.08

CS1W-PPS01

0.16

CS1W-HCA12-V1
CS1W-HCA22-V1

0.15
0.15

147

Section 2-7

CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity

2-7

CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity
Settings for most CPU Bus Units and Inner Boards are stored in the CPU Bus
Unit Setting Area in the CPU Unit. Refer to 9-27 Parameter Areas for details.
The CPU Bus Units are allocated the required number of works for settings
from this area.
There is a limit to the capacity of the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area of 10,752
bytes (10 Kbytes). The system must be designed so that the number of words
used in the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area by all of the CPU Bus Units and the
Inner Board does not exceed this capacity. If the wrong combination of Units
is used, the capacity will be exceeded and either Units will operate from
default settings only or will not operate at all.

2-7-1

System Setting Allocations to CPU Bus Units
Classification
CS-series CPU
Bus Units

Inner Boards

Name

Model number

Allocation
(bytes)
512

Controller Link Unit

CS1WCLK11/12/21/52(-V1),
CS1W-CLK13/23/53

Serial Communications Unit
Ethernet Unit

CS1W-SCU21/31-V1

CS1W-ETN01
CS1W-ETN21
CS1W-FLN22
CS1W-SLK21/11
CS1W-DRM21-V1
CS1W-NCF71
CS1W-MCH71
CS1W-LC001
CS1W-MCH71

412
99.4
988
512
0
0
0
0
0

FL-net Unit
SYSMAC LINK Unit
DeviceNet Unit
Position Control Unit
Motion Control Unit
Loop Control Unit
High-resolution
Motion Control Unit
Storage and Process- CS1W-SPU01/02
ing Unit
Serial CommunicaCS1W-SCB21/41
tions Board

0
0

Note Any Unit with a usage of “0” does not use the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area at
all.

148

Section 2-8

I/O Table Settings

2-8

I/O Table Settings
The following settings are used in the I/O tables on the CX-Programmer.

2-8-1

CS-series Basic I/O Units
Name

AC Input Units

AC/DC Input Units
DC Input Units

DC Input Units classified as C200H Group-2
Units
Interrupt Input Units
High-speed Input Unit
Contact Output Units

Triac Output Units

Transistor Output Units

Model
CS1W-IA111
CS1W-IA211
CS1W-IA121/221
CS1W-IA122/122V/222/222V
C200H-IM211
C200H-IM212
CS1W-ID211
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-ID261

16pt Unit − 16pt Input
16pt Unit − 16pt Input
CS/CJ 8pt Unit − 8pt Input
16pt Unit − 16pt Input
CS/CJ 8pt Unit − 8pt Input
16pt Unit − 16pt Input
16pt Unit − 16pt Input
32pt Unit − 32pt Input
64pt Unit − 64pt Input

Addresses
per Unit
-------------------

CS1W-ID291
C200H-ID211

96pt Unit − 96pt Input
CS/CJ 8pt Unit − 8pt Input

-----

6
1

0
0

C200H-ID212
C200H-ID216/218
C200H-ID111/217/219

16pt Unit − 16pt Input
32pt Unit − 32pt Input
64pt Unit − 64pt Input

-------

1
2
4

0
0
0

CS1W-INT01
C200HS-INT01
CS1W-IDP01
CS1W-OC201
CS1W-OC211
C200H-OC223

Interrupt Unit (8 Bit)
Interrupt Unit (8 Bit)
16pt Unit − 16pt Input
8pt Unit − 8pt Output
16pt Unit − 16pt Output
5pt Unit - 5pt Output

-------------

1
1
1
0
0
0

0
0
0
1
1
1

C200H-OC221/224/224V/224N
C200H-OC222/222V/222N
C200H-OC225/226/226N
CS1W-OA201
CS1W-OA211
CS1W-OA221/223
CS1W-OA222V/224
CS1W-OD211/212
CS1W-OD231/232
CS1W-OD261/262
CS1W-OD291/292
C200H-OD213/214/216/411
C200H-OD211/217
C200H-OD212/21A
C200H-OD218/21B
C200H-OD219

8pt Unit − 8pt Output
12pt Unit - 12pt Output
16pt Unit − 16pt Output
8pt Unit − 8pt Output
16pt Unit − 16pt Output
8pt Unit − 8pt Mixed
12pt Unit − 12pt Output
16pt Unit − 16pt Output
32pt Unit − 32pt Output
64pt Unit − 64pt Output
96pt Unit − 96pt Mixed
8pt Unit − 8pt Mixed
12pt Unit − 12pt Output
16pt Unit − 16pt Output
32pt Unit − 32pt Output
64pt Unit − 64pt Output

---------------------------------

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
6
1
1
1
2
4

64pt Unit − 64pt Mixed
96pt Unit − 96pt Mixed
64pt Unit - 64pt Mixed

-------

2
3
2

Transistor Output Units
classified as C200H
Group-2 Units
DC Input/Transistor Out- CS1W-MD261/262
put Units
CS1W-MD291/292
TTL I/O Units
CS1W-MD561

Unit type setting

Input
Words
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4

Output
Words
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

149

Section 2-8

I/O Table Settings
Name
B7A Interface Units
classified as CS-series
Basic I/O Units

B7A Interface Units
B7A Interface Units
classified as C200H
Group-2 Units

Analog Timer Unit

Model
CS1W-B7A12
CS1W-B7A02
CS1W-B7A21
CS1W-B7A22
C200H-B7AI1
C200H-B7AO1
C200H-B7A12
C200H-B7A02
C200H-B7A21
C200H-B7A22
C200H-TM001

Note

Unit type setting
32pt Unit − 32pt Input
32pt Unit − 32pt Output
32pt Unit − 32pt Mixed
64pt Unit − 64pt Mixed
16pt Unit − 16pt Input
16pt Unit − 16pt Output
32pt Unit − 32pt Input
32pt Unit − 32pt Output
32pt Unit − 32pt Mixed
64pt Unit − 64pt Mixed
4 times
Internal bits: 8 inputs and 4
outputs

Addresses Input Output
per Unit Words Words
-----------------------

2
0
1
2
1
0
2
0
1
2
1

0
2
1
2
0
1
0
2
1
2

1. An I/O setting error will occur if Units are not set correctly.
2. An I/O verification error will occur if the number of input or output words is
set incorrectly.

150

Section 2-8

I/O Table Settings

2-8-2

CS-series Special I/O Units
Name

Analog I/O Unit
Analog Input Units
Analog Output Units
Isolated Thermocouple
Input Unit
High-resolution Isolated
Thermocouple Input Unit
Isolated Resistance Thermometer Input Unit
Isolated Ni508.4Ω Resistance Thermometer Input
Unit
High-resolution Isolated
Resistance Thermometer
Input Unit
Isolated 2-wire Transmission Device Input Unit
Isolated DC Input Unit

Model

Unit type setting

Addresses Input Output
per Unit
Words Words
5
5
CS1W-MAD44
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Analog Input/Out- 1
put Unit
CS1W-AD041/081-V1 CS/CJ SIO Unit − Analog Input Unit 1
9
1
CS1W-AD161
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Analog Input Unit 2
17
1
CS1WCS/CJ SIO Unit − Analog Output
1
1
9
DA041/08V/08C
Unit
CS1W-PTS01-V1
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
1
10
0
Input/Output Unit
CS1W-PTS11
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
1
10
0
Input/Output Unit
CS1W-PTS02
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
1
10
0
Input/Output Unit
CS1W-PTS03
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
1
10
0
Input/Output Unit
CS1W-PTS12

CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
Input/Output Unit

CS1W-PTW01

CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
Input/Output Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
Input/Output Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
Input/Output Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
Input/Output Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
Input/Output Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
Input/Output Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
Input/Output Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Motion Control
Unit

3
5
1
1
2
1

20
32
3
6
12
5

10
18
2
4
8
5

1
2

5
11

5
9

4
8
8
1

21
41
45
Variable

17
33
25
Variable

CS1W-PDC01

High-resolution Isolated DC CS1W-PDC11
Input Unit
Isolated Control Output Unit CS1W-PTR01
(Analog Output Unit)
Power Transducer Input
Unit

CS1W-PTR02

DC Input Unit (100 mA)

CS1W-PMV01

Isolated Pulse Input Unit

CS1W-PPS01

Motion Control Units

CS1W-MC221
CS1W-MC421
Position Control Units
CS1W-NC113/133
CS1W-NC213/233
CS1W-NC413/433
Customizable Counter Units CS1WHIO01/HCP22/HCA22
High-speed Counter Units
CS1W-CT021/041
GP-IB Interface Unit
CompoNet Master Unit

CS1W-GPI01
CS1W-CRM21

CS/CJ SIO Unit − Numerical Control Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Customizable
Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit − High Speed
Counter Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Other SIO Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit Communications
mode No. 0
− CompoNet
Master Unit
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 8

Note A Special I/O setting error will occur if Units, the number of input, or the number of output words is set incorrectly.

151

Section 2-8

I/O Table Settings

2-8-3

C200H Special I/O Units
Name

High-density I/O Units

Temperature Control
Units
Heating/Cooling Control Units
Temperature Sensor
Units
PID Control Units
Cam Positioner Unit
ASCII Units
Analog Input Units

Analog Output Units

Analog I/O Units

High-speed Counter
Units

Motion Control Units
Position Control Units

ID Sensor Units
Voice Unit
Fuzzy Logic Control
Unit

152

Model

Addresses Input Output
per Unit
Words Words
C200H-ID501/215
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
2
0
C200H-OD501/215 (standard
1
0
2
mode)
C200H-OD501/215 (dynamic
1
0
8
mode)
C200H-MD501/215/115
1
1
1
(standard mode)
C200H-MD501/215/115
1
8
0
(dynamic mode)
C200HC200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
7
3
TC001/002/003/101/102/103
C200HC200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
7
3
TV001/002/003/101/102/103
C200H-TS001/002/101/102
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
5
1
C200H-PID01/02/03
C200H-CP114
C200H-ASC02
C200H-ASC11/21/31
C200H-AD001
C200H-AD002
C200H-AD003 (normal mode)
C200H-AD003 (adjustment
mode)
C200H-DA001
C200H-DA002
C200H-DA003/004 (normal
mode)
C200H-DA003/004 (adjustment mode)
C200H-MAD01 (normal
mode)
C200H-MAD01 (adjustment
mode)
C200H-CT001-V1/CT002
(mode 1 or 2)
C200H-CT001-V1/CT002
(mode 3)
C200H-CT001-V1/CT002
(mode 4, 5, or 6)
C200H-CT021
C200H-MC221
C200H-NC111/112
C200H-NC211
C200H-NC114
C200HW-NC213
C200HW-NC413
C200H-IDS01-V1/IDS21
C200H-OV001
C200H-FZ001

Unit type setting

C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
1
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
1
1
1

7
8
1
5
5
9
9
2

3
2
3
5
1
1
1
8

C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
1
1

1
0
1

3
4
9

C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1

C200H High Speed Counter Unit 1

8
12
5
10
3
6
12
1
1
1

2
8
5
10
2
4
8
4
5
4

1
2
1
2
1
1
2
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
C200H Numerical Control Unit
C200H Numerical Control Unit

Section 2-8

I/O Table Settings
Name
JPCN-1 Unit
C200H DeviceNet Master Unit
DeviceNet Slave Unit
(C200H I/O Link Unit)
CompoBus/S Master
Unit

Model

Unit type setting

Addresses Input Output
per Unit
Words Words

C200H-JRM21
C200HW-DRM21-V1

C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1

2
9

8
1

C200HW-DRT21

C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1

-----

C200HW-SRM21-V1 (unit
number 1)
C200HW-SRM21-V1 (unit
number 2)
PLC Link Unit
C200H-LK401
SYSMAC BUS Remote C200H-RM001-PV1/RM201
I/O Master Unit

PC Link Unit LK401
SYSMAC BUS Master

Note A Special I/O setting error will occur if Units, the number of input, or the number of output words is set incorrectly.

2-8-4

CS-series CPU Bus Units

Unit type setting
Communications

Name
Controller Link Unit
Serial Communications Unit
Ethernet Unit

Position Control Unit
Motion Controllers
Loop Controllers
General-purpose
Devices

FL-net Unit
SYSMAC LINK Unit
DeviceNet Unit
Position Control Unit
Motion Control Unit
Loop Control Unit
Storage and Processing Unit
Open Network Controller

Model
CS1W-CLK13/23/53
CS1W-CLK12/21/52(-V1)
CS1W-SCU21-V1
CS1W-SCU31-V1
CS1W-ETN01/11/21
CS1D-ETN21D
CS1W-FLN01/02/12/22
CS1W-SLK11/21
CS1W-DRM21-V1
CS1W-NCF71
CS1W-MCH71
CS1W-LC001
CS1W-SPU01/02
CS1W-EIS/EIX-CTS
ITBC-CTS01

Note The DeviceNet Unit is not support by CX-Programmer version 2.0 or earlier,
and I/O tables containing the DeviceNet Unit cannot be created with these
versions. Create the tables online.

153

I/O Table Settings

154

Section 2-8

SECTION 3
Nomenclature, Functions, and Dimensions
This section provides the names of components and their functions for various Units. The Unit dimensions are also
provided.
3-1

CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-3 CPU Unit Memory Block Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-4 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

156
156
156
159
163

3-2

File Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-1 Specifications of Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-2 Files Handled by CPU Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-3 Initializing File Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-4 Using File Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-5 Memory Card Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-6 Installing and Removing the Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

163
164
165
166
167
170
170

3-3

Programming Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-2 Programming Consoles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-3 CX-Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-4 Peripheral Port Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-5 RS-232C Port Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

172
172
174
175
179
180

3-4

Power Supply Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-1 Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-2 Components and Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-4 Selecting a Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-5 Replacement Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

183
183
184
186
187
190

3-5

Backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-1 CPU Backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-2 CS-series Expansion Backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-3 C200H Expansion I/O Backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-4 I/O Control Units, I/O Interface Units, and Terminators . . . . . . . . .

197
197
199
201
203

3-6

Basic I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-1 C200H and CS-series Basic I/O Units with Terminal Blocks . . . . .
3-6-2 Interrupt Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-3 Units with High-speed Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-4 CS-series Basic I/O Units with Connectors (32-, 64-, and 96-pt Units)
3-6-5 C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

207
207
213
219
220
223

3-7

C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

225

3-8

B7A Interface Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8-1 CS-series B7A Interface Units (CS-series Basic I/O Units). . . . . . .
3-8-2 C200H Basic B7A Interface Units (C200H Basic I/O Units) . . . . .
3-8-3 B7A Interface Units (C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units) . . .

231
231
245
247

3-9

Analog Timer Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

256

155

Section 3-1

CPU Units

3-1

CPU Units

3-1-1

Models

CS1-H CPU Units
I/O points

5,120

Expansion
Racks
7 max.

1,280
960

3 max.
2 max.

3-1-2

Programming

Data Memory
(DM + EM)

250K steps

448K words

LD instruction
Model
processing
time
0.02 µs
CS1H-CPU67H

120K steps
60K steps
30K steps
20K steps
60K steps
30K steps
20K steps
10K steps

256K words
128K words
64K words
64K words
128K words
64K words
64K words
64K words

CS1H-CPU66H
CS1H-CPU65H
CS1H-CPU64H
CS1G-CPU63H
CS1G-CPU45H
CS1G-CPU44H
CS1G-CPU43H
CS1G-CPU42H

0.04 µs

Weight

350 g
max.

Components
RUN
ERR/ALM

1. LED indicators

INH
PRPHL/COMM

2. Battery compartment
3. DIP switch (under battery cover)

OPEN

MCPWR

BUSY

OPEN

4. Memory Card indicators
10. Peripheral port
PERIPHERAL

5. Memory Card power supply switch
9. RS-232C port

PORT

8. Inner Board connector compartment

6. Memory Card eject button
7. Memory Card connector

156

Section 3-1

CPU Units
Indicators

The following table describes the LED indicators located on the front panel of
the CPU Units.
Indicator
RUN

Color
Green

Status
ON
Flashing
OFF

ERR/ALM

Red

Flashing

INH

Orange

OFF
ON

BKUP

Orange

OFF
ON

PRPHL

Orange

COMM

Orange

MCPWR

Green

BUSY

Orange

OFF
Flashing
OFF
Flashing
OFF
ON
Flashing

OFF
Flashing
OFF

Meaning
PLC is operating normally in MONITOR or RUN mode.
System download mode error or DIP switch settings error.
PLC has stopped operating while in PROGRAM mode, or has stopped operating
due to a fatal error, or is downloading data from the system.
A fatal error has occurred (including FALS instruction execution), or a hardware
error (watchdog timer error) has occurred.
The CPU Unit will stop operating, and the outputs from all Output Units will turn
OFF.
A non-fatal error has occurred (including FAL instruction execution)
The CPU Unit will continue operating.
CPU Unit is operating normally.
Output OFF Bit (A50015) has been turned ON. The outputs from all Output Units
will turn OFF.
Output OFF Bit (A50015) has been turned OFF.
User program and parameter area data is being backed up to flash memory in the
CPU Unit or being restored from flash memory.
Note Do not turn OFF the power supply to the PLC while this indicator is lit.
Data is not being written to flash memory.
CPU Unit is communicating (sending or receiving) via the peripheral port.
CPU Unit is not communicating via the peripheral port.
CPU Unit is communicating (sending or receiving) via the RS-232C port.
CPU Unit is not communicating via the RS-232C port.
Power is being supplied to the Memory Card.
Flashes once: Easy backup read, write, or verify normal
Flashes five times: Easy backup write malfunction
Flashes three times: Easy backup write warning
Flashes continuously: Easy backup read or verify malfunction
Power is not being supplied to the Memory Card.
Memory Card is being accessed.
Memory Card is not being accessed.
CS1-H CPU Unit

RUN

ERR/ALM
INH BKUP
PRPH COMM

157

Section 3-1

CPU Units
DIP Switch Settings
Pin no. Setting
Function
1
ON
Writing disabled for user program memory.
(See note.)
OFF
Writing enabled for user program memory.
2
ON
The user program is automatically transferred from the Memory Card when power is
turned ON.
OFF
The user program is not automatically transferred from the Memory Card when power is
turned ON.

3
4

OFF
ON
OFF

OFF
6

ON
OFF

OFF
8

OFF

Always OFF. (See note.)
Peripheral port communications parameters
set in the PLC Setup are used.
Peripheral port communications parameters
set using Programming Console or CX-Programmer (Peripheral bus only) are used.
RS-232C port communications parameters
set using a CX-Programmer (Peripheral bus
only) are used.
RS-232C port communications parameters
set in the PLC Setup are used.
User-defined pin. Turns OFF the User DIP
Switch Pin Flag (A39512).
User-defined pin. Turns ON the User DIP
Switch Pin Flag (A39512).
Writing from the CPU Unit to the Memory
Card.

Usage
Used to prevent programs from being accidently overwritten from Programming
Devices (including Programming Console).

Default
OFF

Used to store the programs in the Memory
OFF
Card to switch operations, or to automatically
transfer programs at power-up (Memory
Card ROM operation).
Note When pin 7 is ON, easy backup reading from the Memory Card is given priority, so even if pin 2 is ON, the user
program is not automatically transferred from the Memory Card when
power is turned ON.
Turn ON to use the peripheral port for a
device other than Programming Console or
CX-Programmer (Peripheral bus only).

OFF
OFF

Turn ON to use the RS-232C port for a Programming Device.

OFF

Set pin 6 to ON or OFF and use A39512 in
the program to create a user-defined condition without using an I/O Unit.

OFF

OFF
Press and hold the Memory Card Power
Supply Switch for three seconds.
Note Normally, this pin should be left turned
OFF.
Restoring from the Memory Card to the CPU To read from the Memory Card to the CPU
Unit.
Unit, turn ON the PLC power.
This operation is given priority over automatic
transfer (pin 2 is ON) when power is ON.
Verifying contents of Memory Card.
Press and hold the Memory Card Power
Supply Switch for three seconds.
Always OFF.
OFF

Note

1. The following data cannot be overwritten when pin 1 is ON:
• All parts of the user program (programs in all tasks)
• All data in the parameter area (such as the PLC Setup and I/O table)
When pin 1 is ON, the user program and parameter area will not be cleared
when the memory clear operation is performed from a Programming Device.
2. The DIP switch is not used to set the display language with CS1-H CPU
Units. The language is selected on the startup display on the Programming
Console.
3. The CPU Unit will not enter any mode except PROGRAM mode after backing up data to a Memory Card using DIP switch pin 7. To enter RUN or
MONITOR mode, turn OFF the power supply, turn OFF pin 7, and then restart the PLC. This will enable changing the operating mode as normal.

158

Section 3-1

CPU Units

3-1-3

CPU Unit Memory Block Map
The memory of CS-series CPU Units is configured in the following blocks.
• I/O Memory: The data areas accessible from the user program
• User Memory: The user program and parameter areas (See Note 1.)
The above memory is backed up using a CS1W-BAT01 Battery. If the battery
voltage is low, the data in these areas will not be stable.
With the CS1-H CPU Units, however, the CPU Unit has a built-in flash memory to which the user program and parameter area data is backed up whenever the user memory is written to, including data transfers and online editing
from a Programming Device (CX-Programmer or Programming Console, data
transfers from a Memory Card, etc. The user program and the parameter area
data will be held when using a CS1-H CPU Unit.
The internal flash memory of CS1-H CPU Units with unit version 3.0 also contains a comment memory and FB program memory area. The comment memory is used to store symbol table files, comment files, and program index files
(if comment memory is selected as the transfer destination when transferring
projects from a CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0). The FB source memory area is
used to store function block program data.

159

Section 3-1

CPU Units
CPU Unit

Built-in RAM
I/O Memory Area

Drive 1: EM file memory
(See Note 2.)

Flash Memory
(CS1-H CPU Units only)

User program

Written
automatically

User program

Parameter Area
(See Note 1.)
Written
automatically

Comment memory area

Battery
The battery life is 5 years at an
ambient temperature of 25°C.

Drive 0: Memory
Card
(flash memory)

Written
automatically

Parameter Area

Backup

File memory
Automatically backed up to flash memory whenever a write
operation for the user memory area (user program or parameter
area) is performed from a Programming Device.
Used to store symbol table files, comment files, and program
index files. CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later, Memory
Card, EM file memory, or comment memory can be selected as
the destination when transferring projects from CX-Programmer
Ver. 5.0.

FB program memory area

For CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later, when transferring
projects containing function blocks from the CX-Programmer,
the function block program information is automatically stored
in the FB program memory area.

Note

1. The Parameter Area stores system information for the CPU Unit, such as
the PLC Setup.
2. Part of the EM (Extended Data Memory) Area can be converted to file
memory to handle data files and program files in RAM memory format,
which has the same format as Memory Cards. File memory in the EM Area
is backed up by a battery.

160

Section 3-1

CPU Units
Opening the Battery
Compartment Cover

Insert a small flat-blade screwdriver into the opening at the bottom of the battery compartment cover and lift open the cover.

Insert a small flat-blade
screwdriver into the opening
at the bottom of the battery
compartment cover and lift
open the cover.

Battery

DIP switch

Opening the Peripheral Port Cover and Connecting Cables

Insert a small flat-blade
screwdriver into the
opening at the top of the
port cover and pull open.

Make sure the connector is
in facing the correct direction.

Hold the grips on the side of the
connector and push into the port.

161

Section 3-1

CPU Units
Installing Inner Boards
1,2,3...

1. Press in the lever at the top of the Inner Board connector compartment and
pull out.

Press in the lever on the top of the
cover and pull out.

Press in the lever on the bottom of
the cover and pull out.

2. Remove the cover of the Inner Board connector compartment.

Inner Board connector

3. Insert the Inner Board into the compartment.

Note

1. Always make sure the power is OFF before installing the Inner Board. Installing the Inner Board when the power is ON may cause CPU Unit malfunction, damage to internal components, and improper communications.
2. Before installing the Inner Board, be sure to touch a grounded metal object
to discharge static electricity from your body.

162

Section 3-2

File Memory

3-1-4

Dimensions
CS1H-CPU@@H, CS1G-CPU@@H

3-2

File Memory
For CS-series CPU Units, the Memory Card and a specified part of the EM
Area can be used to store files. All user programs, the I/O Memory Area, and
the Parameter Area can be stored as files.
File memory

Memory Card

EM file memory
Bank 0
Bank n
Bank C

Memory type
Memory capacity
Flash mem30 Mbytes
ory
64 Mbytes

Model/Contents
HMC-EF372
HMC-EF672

128 Mbytes

HMC-EF183 (See note 3.)

RAM

The maximum capacity of the CPU
Unit’s EM Area (e.g., the maximum
capacity for a CPU67 is 832 Kbytes)

The specified bank (set in the PLC
Setup) to the last bank of the EM Area
in the I/O Memory.

CPU Unit’s
internal flash
memory

Comment files
CPU66H/67H: 128 Kbytes
Other CPU Units: 64 Kbytes
Program index files
CPU66H/67H: 128 Kbytes
Other CPU Units: 64 Kbytes
Symbol table files
CPU45H/65H66H/67H: 128 Kbytes
Other CPU Units: 64 Kbytes

CX-Programmer rung comments and
other comments

EM file
memory

Comment memory
(CS/CJ-series CPU
Units with unit version
3.0 or later only)

Note

CX-Programmer section names, section comments, and program comments
CX-Programmer global symbol tables,
local symbol tables, and settings for
automatically allocated areas.

1. A Memory Card can be written up to approximately 100,000 times. (Each
write operation to the Memory Card must be counted regardless of the size
of the write.) Be particularly careful not to exceed the life of the Memory
Card when writing to it from the ladder program.
2. The HMC-AP001 Memory Card Adapter is shown below.

3. The HMC-EF183 cannot be used with all CPU Units. Before ordering, refer
to Precaution on Applicable Units on page 164.

163

Section 3-2

File Memory

3-2-1

Specifications of Memory Card

Specifications
Model number
Memory Card capacity
Common
Dimensions
specifications Weight
Current
consumption
Environmental
specifications
No. of writes
Factory
No. of files
specifications writable to
root directory
File system

HMC-EF183
HMC-EF672
HMC-EF372
128 Mbytes
64 Mbytes
30 Mbytes
42.8 × 36.4 × 3.3 mm (W × H × T)
15 g max.
Approx. 30 mA (when used with PLC)
Same as general specifications of PLC
100,000 (guaranteed value)
511

FAT16

Precaution on Applicable Units
The HMC-EF183 Memory Card cannot be used with the following CPU Units
and PTs. Confirm applicability when ordering.
1) CS-series CPU Units
• All CS1G-CPU@@H and CS1H-CPU@@H CPU Units manufactured
before January 9, 2002 (lot number 020108 and earlier)
2) CJ-series CPU Units
• All CJ1G-CPU@@H and CJ1H-CPU@@H CPU Units manufactured before
January 9, 2002 (lot number 020108 and earlier)
• All CJ1G-CPU@@ CPU Units (i.e., those without an H in the model number suffix: CPU@@H)
3) NS7-series PTs
All NS7-SV0@ PTs manufactured before May 9, 2002 (lot number 0852 and
earlier)

Memory Card Recognition Time
Several seconds is normally required for the CPU Unit to recognize the Memory Card after it is inserted. The required time depends on the PLC's cycle
time, the Memory Card Capacity, the number of files stored on the Memory
Card, and other factors.
The recognition times given in the following table are guidelines for a CS1HCPU@@H CPU Unit with a PLC cycle time of 0.4 ms and all PLC Setup
parameters set to the default values.
Model
Recognition time

164

HMC-EF183
8s

HMC-EF672
5s

HMC-EF372
3s

Section 3-2

File Memory

3-2-2

Files Handled by CPU Unit
Files are ordered and stored in the Memory Card or EM file memory according to the file name and the extension attached to it.

General-use Files
File type
Data files

Contents
File name
Specified
Binary
********
range in I/O Text
(See note 1.)
memory
CSV
Program file
All user programs
Parameter file PLC Setup, registered I/O
tables, routing tables, CSseries CPU Bus Unit settings,
SYSMAC LINK data link tables,
and Controller Link data link
tables

Files Transferred
Automatically at Startup

Extension
.IOM
.TXT
.CSV
.OBJ
.STD

Including Parameter File
File type
Data files

Program file
Parameter file

Contents
DM area data (stores data for
specified number of words starting from D20000)
DM area data (stores data for
specified number of words starting from D00000)
EM area for bank No. @ (stores
data for specified number of
words starting from E@_00000)
All user programs
PLC Setup, registered I/O tables,
routing tables, CS-series CPU
Bus Unit settings, SYSMAC
LINK data link tables, and Controller Link data link tables

File name
AUTOEXEC

Extension
.IOM

ATEXECDM

.IOM

ATEXECE@

.IOM

AUTOEXEC
AUTOEXEC

.OBJ
.STD

Excluding Parameter File (CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later)
File type
Data files

Program file

Parameter file

Contents
File name
REPLACE
DM area data (stores data for
specified number of words start- (CPU Unit Ver.
ing from D20000)
2.0 or later
only)
REPLCDM
DM area data (stores data for
specified number of words start- (CPU Unit Ver.
ing from D00000)
2.0 or later
only)
EM area for bank No. @ (stores REPLCE@
data for specified number of
(CPU Unit Ver.
words starting from E@_00000) 2.0 or later
only)
All user programs
REPLACE
(CPU Unit Ver.
2.0 or later
only)
--Not needed

Extension
.IOM

.IOM

.OBJ

---

165

Section 3-2

File Memory
Easy Backup Files
File type
Data files

Program files
Parameter files

Contents
Words allocated to Special I/O
Units, CPU Bus Units, and Inner
Boards in the DM area
CIO area
DM area
EM area
All user programs
PLC Setup, registered I/O tables,
routing tables, CS-series CPU Bus
Unit settings, SYSMAC LINK data
link tables, and Controller Link data
link tables

Unit/Board backup Data from specific Units or Boards
files (CS1-H CPU
Units only)
Symbol table files CX-Programmer global symbol
(See note 4.)
tables, local symbol tables, settings
for automatically allocated areas
Comment files
CX-Programmer rung comments
(See note 4.)
and comments
Program index
CX-Programmer section names,
files (See note 4.) section comments, and program
comments

Note

File name
BACKUP

Extension
.IOM

BACKUPIO
BACKUPDM
BACKUPE@
BACKUP

.IOR
.IOM
.IOM
.OBJ
.STD

BACKUP@@ .PRM

BKUPSYM

.SYM

BKUPCMT

.CMT

BCKUPPRG .IDX

1. Specify 8 ASCII characters. For a file name with less than 8 characters,
add spaces (20 hex).
2. Always specify the name of files to be transferred automatically at powerup as AUTOEXEC or ATEXEC@@.
3. The BACKUP@@.PRM files are as follows:
Unit/Board
CPU Bus Units
Special I/O Units
Inner Board

@@
10 to 1F
20 to 6F
E1

Unit number
0 to F
0 to 79
---

4. Supported for CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later only.

3-2-3

Initializing File Memory
File memory
Memory Card

EM file memory

166

Initializing procedure

Data capacity after
initialization
1. Install Memory Card into Essentially the specific capacity
CPU Unit.
of the Memory Card
2. Initialize the Memory
Card using a Programming Device (including
Programming Console).
1 bank:
Approx. 61 KB
1. Convert the part of the
Approx. 825 KB
EM Area from the specified 13 banks:
bank No. to the last bank
No. to file memory in the
PLC Setup.
2. Initialize the EM file
memory using a Programming Device (excluding
Programming Console).

Section 3-2

File Memory

3-2-4

Using File Memory
Note For details on using file memory, refer to SECTION 5 File Memory of the
CS/CJ Series PLC Programming Manual.

Memory Cards
Reading/Writing Files Using Programming Device
File
Program files
I/O memory files
Parameter files

1,2,3...

File name and extension
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.OBJ
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.IOM
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.STD

Data transfer direction
Between CPU Unit and Memory Card,

1. Install the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Initialize the Memory Card if necessary.
3. Name the file containing the data in the CPU Unit and save the contents in
the Memory Card.
4. Read the file that is saved in the Memory Card to the CPU Unit.

Automatically Transferring Memory Card Files to the CPU Unit at Power-up
Including Parameter File
File
Program file
I/O memory files

Parameter file

1,2,3...

File name and extension
AUTOEXEC.OBJ
AUTOEXEC.IOM
ATEXECDM.IOM
ATEXECE@.IOM
AUTOEXEC.STD

Data transfer direction
From Memory Card to CPU Unit

1. Install the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Set pin 2 of the DIP switch to ON.
3. The files are read automatically when the power is turned ON.
Excluding Parameter File
File
Program file
I/O memory files

Parameter file

1,2,3...

File name and extension
REPLACE.OBJ
REPLACE.IOM
REPLCDM.IOM
REPLCE@.IOM
Not needed

Data transfer direction
From Memory Card to CPU Unit

1. Install the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Set pin 2 of the DIP switch to ON.
3. Turn ON the power to the PLC. The files will be read automatically when
the power is turned ON.

Reading/Writing I/O Memory Files Using FREAD(700)and FWRIT(701)
File
I/O memory files

1,2,3...

File name and extension
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.IOM
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.TXT
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.CSV

Data transfer direction
Between CPU Unit and
Memory Card

1. Install the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Initialize the Memory Card using a Programming Device.

167

Section 3-2

File Memory

3. Using the FWRIT(701) instruction, name the file of the specified I/O memory area, and save to the Memory Card.
4. Using the FREAD(700) instruction, read the I/O memory files from the
Memory Card to the I/O memory in the CPU Unit.
Note When using spreadsheet software to read data that has been written to the
Memory Card in CSV or text format, it is now possible to read the data using
Windows applications by mounting a Memory Card in the personal computer
card slot using a HMC-AP001 Memory Card Adapter.
Reading and Replacing Program Files during Operation
File
Program files

1,2,3...

File name and extension
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.OBJ

Data transfer direction
Memory Card to CPU Unit

1. Install a Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Set the following information: Program File Name (A654 to A657) and Program Password (A651).
3. Next, from the program, turn ON the Replacement Start Bit (A65015).

Backing Up or Restoring CPU Unit Data or Data for Specific Units and Boards
File
Program files
Data files

File name and extension
BACKUP.OBJ
BACKUP.IOM
BACKUPIO.IOR
BACKUPDM.IOM
BACKUPE@.IOM
BACKUP.STD
BACKUP@@.PRM

Data transfer direction
CPU Unit to Memory Card
(when backing up)
Memory Card to CPU Unit
(when restoring)

Parameter files
Unit/Board backup
files (CS1-H CPU
Units only)
Symbol table files BKUPSYM.SYM
Comment files
BKUPCMT.CMT
Program index files BKUPPRG.IDX

1,2,3...

1. Install a Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Turn ON pin 7 on the DIP switch.
3. To back up data, press and hold the Memory Card Power Supply Switch
for three seconds. To restore data, turn ON the PLC power.

Transferring Files between
Memory Cards and the
CX-Programmer

1,2,3...

The following files can be transferred between a Memory Card and the CXProgrammer.
File
Symbols file
Comment file
Program index file

File name and extension
SYMBOLS.SYM
COMMENTS.CNT
PROGRAM.IDX

Data transfer direction
Between CX-Programmer and
Memory Card

1. Insert a formatted Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Place the CX-Programmer online and use the file transfer operations to
transfer the above files from the personal computer to the PLC or from the
PLC to the personal computer.

168

Section 3-2

File Memory
EM File Memory
Reading/Writing EM File Memory Files Using Programming Device
File
Program files
I/O memory files
Parameter files

1,2,3...

File name and extension
Data transfer direction
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.OBJ
Between CPU Unit and EM
file memory
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.IOM
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.STD

1. Convert the part of the EM Area specified by the first bank number into file
memory in the PLC Setup.
2. Initialize the EM file memory using a Programming Device.
3. Name the data in the CPU Unit and save in the EM file memory using the
Programming Device.
4. Read the EM file memory files to the CPU Unit using the Programming Device.

Reading/Writing I/O Memory Files in EM File Memory Using FREAD(700)and FWRIT(701)
File
I/O memory files

1,2,3...

File name and extension
Data transfer direction
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.IOM
Between CPU Unit and EM
file memory

1. Convert the part of the EM Area specified by the first bank number into file
memory in the PLC Setup.
2. Initialize the EM file memory using a Programming Device.
3. Using the FWRIT(701) instruction, name the specified area in I/O memory
with a file name and save in the EM file memory.
4. Using the FREAD(700) instruction, read the I/O memory files from the EM
file memory to the I/O memory in the CPU Unit.

Note The following files can be transferred between EM file memory and the CXProgrammer.
File
Symbols file
Comment file
Program index file

1,2,3...

File name and extension
Data transfer direction
SYMBOLS.SYM
Between CX-Programmer
and EM file memory
COMMENTS.CNT
PROGRAM.IDX

1. Format the EM Area in the CPU Units as file memory.
2. Place the CX-Programmer online and use the file transfer operations to
transfer the above files from the personal computer to the PLC or from the
PLC to the personal computer.

Comment Memory (Unit Version 3.0 or Later Only)
The internal flash memory in CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or
later contains a comment memory area. The following comment data and section data (symbol table files, comment files, and program index files) can be
stored in or read from the comment memory when both the Memory Card and
EM file memory are not available.
Note When using CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 to download projects, either of the following locations can be selected as the transfer destination for comment data
and section data.
• Memory Card
• EM file memory

169

Section 3-2

File Memory

• Comment memory (in CPU Unit’s internal flash memory)

3-2-5

Memory Card Dimensions

3-2-6

Installing and Removing the Memory Card

Installing the Memory Card
1,2,3...

1. Pull the top end of the Memory Card cover forward and remove from the
Unit.

∇

2. Insert the Memory Card with the label facing to the right. (Insert with the ∆
on the Memory Card label and the
on the CPU Unit facing each other.)

Product label

3. Push the Memory Card securely into the compartment. If the Memory Card
is inserted correctly, the Memory Card eject button will be pushed out.

170

Section 3-2

File Memory
Removing the Memory Card
1,2,3...

1. Press the Memory Card power supply switch.

Memory Card power supply switch

2. Press the Memory Card eject button after the BUSY indicator is no longer
lit.
BUSY indicator

Memory Card eject button

3. The Memory Card will eject from the compartment.
4. Remove the Memory Card cover when a Memory Card is not being used.

Note

1. Never turn OFF the PLC while the CPU is accessing the Memory Card.
2. Never remove the Memory Card while the CPU is accessing the Memory
Card. Press the Memory Card power supply switch and wait for the BUSY
indicator to go OFF before removing the Memory Card. In the worst case,
the Memory Card may become unusable if the PLC is turned OFF or the
Memory Card is removed while the Card is being accessed by the CPU.
3. Never insert the Memory Card facing the wrong way. If the Memory Card
is inserted forcibly, it may become unusable.

171

Section 3-3

Programming Devices
Installing the Memory Card into a Personal Computer
HMC-AP001 Memory Card Adapter

Memory Card
Personal computer PC card slot

Note

1. When a Memory Card is inserted into a computer using a Memory Card
Adapter, it can be used as a standard storage device, like a floppy disk or
hard disk.
2. When deleting all of the data in a Memory Card or formatting it in any way,
always place it in the CPU Unit and perform the operation from the CX-Programmer or a Programming Console.

3-3
3-3-1

Programming Devices
Overview
There are 2 types of Programming Devices that can be used: Any of three
models of Hand-held Programming Consoles or the CX-Programmer, which is
operated on a Windows computer. The CX-Programmer is usually used to
write the programs, and a Programming Console is then used to change the
operating modes, edit the programs, and monitor a limited number of points.
The following table provides a comparison between the CX-Programmer functions and the Programming Console functions.

Function
Editing and referencing I/O tables
Selecting tasks
Writing
Inputting instructions
programs
Inputting addresses
I/O comment, rung comment
Setting global/local symbols
Editing programs

Programming Console
Yes
Yes
Writes instructions one at a time using
mnemonics
Addresses only
No

CX-Programmer
Yes
Yes
Writes multiple blocks using mnemonics or ladder programs
Addresses or symbols
Yes

Checking programs
Monitoring programs

No
Monitors in program address units

Yes (Automatic allocation of local symbols)
Yes
(Cutting, pasting, inserting within programs; searching/exchanging instructions, addresses, and symbols;
displaying cross-references)
Yes
Monitors multiple blocks

172

Inserts instructions and searches for
program addresses

Section 3-3

Programming Devices
Function
Monitoring I/O memory
Changing I/O memory present values
Online editing
Debugging
Changing timer and
counter settings
Control set/ reset

Programming Console
Simultaneous, 2 points max.
Changes 1 point at a time
Edits in instruction units
Yes

Executes 1 point at a time (or resets all
at once)
Differentiation monitoring Yes
Reading cycle time
Yes
Data tracing
No
Time chart monitoring
No
Reading error information
Yes (error message display)
Reading error log
No
Reading/setting timer information
Yes
Reading/setting PLC parameters
Yes
Setting CPU Bus Unit parameters
No
File memInitializing Memory Card Yes
ory operaInitializing EM file mem- Yes
tions
ory
Transferring files between Yes
CPU Unit and file memory
Remote
Between Host Link and
No
programNetwork PLC
ming and
Via modem
No
monitoring
Setting password protection
No
Managing files
No
Printing
No

CX-Programmer
Monitors multiple points
Yes
Edits multiple adjacent blocks
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes
Yes
Manages files by project.
Yes

173

Section 3-3

Programming Devices

3-3-2

Programming Consoles
There are three Programming Consoles that can be used with the CS-series
CPU Units: The CQM1H-PRO01-E, CQM1-PRO01-E, and C200H-PRO27-E.
These Programming Consoles are shown here.

CQM1H-PRO01-E Programming Console
Connection

LCD area
Mode selector switch
FUN

SFT

AC
OUT
N

TIM
O

8
7
F

6
5

1
1

6
D

DR
IR
*EM
WR/LR
K

AR
HR

EM
DM
P

CH
*DM
Q

CONT
#
R

CF
SRCH
U

DEL

MON

RESET

SHIFT
E

SET

EM_/EXT

. IR+
. IR
D
. −IR
TR
J

*EM_

9
8

TK
CNT
I

ST
OR

AA
LD

NOT

TN
AND
G

TEXT
!

CLR

VRFY

CHG

INS

↑

Operation keys (Install the
CS1W-KS001-E Key Sheet
(See Note.)

WRITE

↓

Cable included with CQM1H-PRO01-E
Programming Console
CQM1H-PRO01-E Programming Console

CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console
Connection

LCD area
Mode selector switch
FUN

SFT

A
ST
OR

AA
LD

AC
OUT
N

6
D

DR
IR
*EM
WR/LR
K

AR
HR

EM
DM
P

CH
*DM
Q

CONT
#
R

CF
SRCH
U

DEL

MON

RESET

SHIFT
E

SET

EM_/EXT

. IR+
. IR
D
. −IR
TR
J

*EM_

5
5

1
1

TIM

8
F

4
4

C
TK
CNT
I

8
7

NOT

TN
AND
G

TEXT
!

CLR

VRFY

CHG

INS

↑

Operation keys (Install the
CS1W-KS001-E Key Sheet
(See Note.)

WRITE

↓

CS1W-CN114 (cable length: 0.05 m)
Cable included with CQM1-PRO01-E
Programming Console
CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console
Connect the CPU Unit to the Programming Console with the following cables.
CS1W-CN114 (Cable length: 0.05 m)

174

Section 3-3

Programming Devices
C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console

LCD area
Mode selector switch
FUN

SFT

TN
AND
G

ST
OR
H

AA
LD

AC
OUT
N

TIM
O

1
1

6
6
D

DR
IR

. −IR
TR
J

*EM
WR/LR
K

AR
HR

EM
DM
P

CH
*DM
Q

CONT
#
R

SET

DEL

MON

RESET

SHIFT

CF
SRCH
U

EM_/EXT

5
5

. IR+
. IR
D

*EM_

9
8

4
4

C
TK
CNT
I

8
7

NOT

TEXT
!

CLR

VRFY

CHG

INS

Operation keys (Install
the CS1W-KS001-E
Key Sheet (See Note.)

↑

WRITE

↓

CS1W-CN224 (Cable length: 2.0 m)
CS1W-CN624 (Cable length: 6.0 m)
Cassette jacks
C200H-PRO27-E
Connect the CPU Unit to the Programming Console with the following cables.
CS1W-CN224 (Cable length: 2.0 m)
CS1W-CN624 (Cable length: 6.0 m)

Note The Key Sheet is not used with CS-series CPU Units.

3-3-3

CX-Programmer
Item
Applicable PLC

OS
Personal computer
Connection method
Communications
protocol with PLC
Offline operation
Online operation
Basic functions

Details
CS-series, CJ-series, CP-series, NSJ-series, CV-series,
C200HX/HG/HE (-Z), C200HS, CQM1, CPM1, CPM1A,
SRM1, C1000H/2000H
Microsoft Windows 95 (See note.), 98, NT 4.0 (Service Pack
6), 2000, Me, XP
DOS version
CPU Unit’s peripheral port or built-in RS-232C port
Peripheral bus or Host Link
Programming, I/O memory editing, creating I/O tables, setting
PLC parameters, printing, program changing
Transmitting, referencing, monitoring, creating I/O tables, setting PLC parameters
1. Programming: Creates and edits ladder programs and mnemonic programs for the applicable PLC.
2. Creating and referencing I/O tables.
3. Changing the CPU Unit operating mode.
4. Transferring: Transfers programs, I/O memory data, I/O
tables, PLC Setup, and I/O comments between the personal
computer and the CPU Unit.
5. Program execution monitoring: Monitors I/O status/present
values on ladder displays, I/O status/present values on mnemonic displays, and present values on I/O memory displays

Note Windows 95 cannot be used when connecting via a Controller Link Support
Board (PCI bus) or a SYSMAC LINK Support Board (PCI bus).

175

Section 3-3

Programming Devices
Connections
Personal computer
DOS

Peripheral port connection

RS-232C port connection

9-pin
male
9-pin
female

9-pin
male
Peripheral port
10-pin female

CS1W-CN118 (0.1 m) (See note 1)
CS1W-CN226 (2.0 m)
CS1W-CN616 (6.0 m)

CS1W-CN118
CS1W-CN226
CS1W-CN616

Note

9-pin
female

RS-232C port
9-pin female

9-pin
female

10-pin

XW2Z-200S-CV/200S-V (See note 2)
XW2Z-500S-CV/500S-V (See note 2)
XW2Z-200SCV/200S-V or
XW2Z-500SCV/500S-V

9-pin
female

9-pin
male

1. The CS1W-CN118 Cable is used with one of the RS-232C Cables shown
on the right (XW2Z-@@@S-@@) to connect to the peripheral port on the
CPU Unit.
Peripheral port

RS-232C Cable
CS1W-CN118 Cable

2. If cables with model numbers ending in -V instead of -CV are used to connect the computer running the CX-Programmer to the RS-232C port (including when using a CS1W-CN118 Cable), a peripheral bus connection
cannot be used. Use a Host Link (SYSMAC WAY) connection. To connect
to the port using a peripheral bus connection, prepare an RS-232C cable
as described in 3-3-5 RS-232C Port Specifications.
CX-Programmer Connecting Cables
Unit

CPU Units

Serial Communications
Boards/Units

Unit port

Computer

Peripheral port

DOS

D-Sub, 9-pin,
male

Built-in
RS-232C
port
D-Sub, 9pin,
female
RS-232C
Port
D-Sub, 9pin,
female

DOS

D-Sub, 9-pin,
male

DOS

D-Sub, 9-pin,
male

Note

176

Computer
port

Model
Serial
communications
mode
Peripheral Bus or CS1W-CN226
Host Link
CS1W-CN626
Peripheral Bus or XW2Z-200S-CV
Host Link
XW2Z-500S-CV

Host Link

XW2Z-200S-CV
XW2Z-500S-CV

Length

2.0 m
6.0 m
2m
5m

2m
5m

Cable notes

--Use a staticresistant connector.

Use a staticresistant connector.

1. Before connecting a connector from the above table to an RS-232C port,
touch a grounded metal object to discharge static electricity from your
body.
The XW2Z-@@@S-CV Cables have been strengthened against static because they use a static-resistant connector hood (XM2S-0911-E). Even so,
always discharge static electricity before touching the connectors.

Section 3-3

Programming Devices

2. Do not use commercially available RS-232C personal computer cables. Always use the special cables listed in this manual or make cables according
to manual specifications. Using commercially available cables may damage the external devices or CPU Unit.
RS-232C Cables for a Peripheral Port
Unit

CPU Units

Unit port

Built-in
peripheral port

Computer
DOS

Computer
port

Serial
Model
communications
mode
Peripheral Bus or CS1W-CN118 +
Host Link
XW2Z-200S-CV/
500S-CV

D-Sub, 9-pin,
male

Length

0.1 m+
(2 m or
5 m)

Cable notes

XW2Z@@@S-CV
models use a
static-resistant connector

Using a CQM1-CIF01/02 Cable for a Peripheral Port
Unit

CPU Units

Unit port

Built-in
peripheral port

Computer
DOS

Model
Serial
communications
mode
Host Link
CS1W-CN114 +
CQM1-CIF02

Computer
port
D-Sub, 9-pin,
male

Length

0.05 m +
3.3 m

Cable notes

---

Using a RS-232C Cable for a IBM PC/AT or Compatible
Unit

CPU Units

Unit port

Built-in
RS-232C
port
D-Sub, 9pin,
female
Serial Communi- RS-232C
cations
port
Boards/Units
D-Sub,
9-pin,
female

Computer

Computer
port

DOS

D-Sub, 9-pin,
male

DOS

D-Sub, 9-pin,
male

Serial
Model
communications
mode
Host Link
XW2Z-200S-V
XW2Z-500S-V

Host Link

XW2Z-200S-V
XW2Z-500S-V

Length

2m
5m

Cable notes

---

2m
5m

Connection Method for USB-Serial Conversion Cable
Computer

CS1W-CIF31

Cable 1

Cable 2

PLC

CS1W-CN226/626 CS/CJ-series
Peripheral Port Programming
Device Connecting Cable
CS1W-CN114 C-series PeripheralCS/CJ-series Peripheral
Conversion Cable

OR
CS1W-CIF31
USB Connecting Cable

CQM1H-CIF02 C-series
Peripheral Port Programming
Device Connecting Cable

OR
XW2Z-@@@ RS-232C
Programming Device
Connecting Cable

+
CS1W-CN118 RS-232C-CS/CJseries Peripheral Conversion
Cable

177

Section 3-3

Programming Devices
CX-Programmer Connecting Cables
Cables Connecting to CPU Units
USB
Connecting
Cable
Model
CS1WCIF31

Cable 1
Connector

Cable 2

Cable model

D-sub, 9- CS1W-CN226/626
pin
(length: 2 m/6 m)
female

Connector

Cable model

CS/CJseries
peripheral

Not required.

C-series
peripheral

Unit port
Connector
CS/CJseries
peripheral

Serial
communications
mode
(network)

Peripheral Bus
(Toolbus) or Host
Link (SYSWAY)

CS1W-CN114
(length: 5 cm)

CS/CJseries
peripheral

Host Link
(SYSWAY)

XW2Z-200S-V/
D-sub, 9- D-sub, 9500S-V (length: 2 m/ pin male pin
5 m)
female

CS1W-CN118
(length: 0.1 m)

CS/CJseries
peripheral

Peripheral Bus
(Toolbus) or Host
Link (SYSWAY)

XW2Z-200S-V/
D-sub, 9- D-sub, 9500S-V (length: 2 m/ pin male pin
5 m)
female

CS1W-CN118
(length: 0.1 m)

CS/CJseries
peripheral

Host Link
(SYSWAY)

CQM1-CIF02
(length: 3.3 m)

XW2Z-200S-CV/
500S-CV (length:
2 m/5 m)

RS-232C Peripheral Bus
D-sub, 9- (Toolbus) or Host
pin
Link (SYSWAY)
female

RS-232C Not required.
D-sub, 9pin male

Host Link
(SYSWAY)

XW2Z-200S-V/
RS-232C Not required.
500S-V (length: 2 m/ D-sub, 95 m)
pin male

Cables Connecting to Serial Communications Boards/Units
USB
ConConnecting nector
Cable
Model
CS1W- D-sub,
CIF31
9-pin
female
CS1W- D-sub,
CIF31
9-pin
female

Cable 1
Cable model

XW2Z-200S-CV/
500S-CV
(length: 2 m/5 m)
XW2Z-200S-V/
500S-V
(length: 2 m/5 m)

Cable 2

Unit port

Connector

RS-232C
D-sub, 9-pin
male
RS-232C
D-sub, 9-pin
male

Not required.

RS-232C
D-sub, 9-pin
female

Serial
communications
mode
(network)
Host Link
(SYSWAY)

Not required.

Communications Modes when Connecting a CX-Programmer to a CS-series CPU Unit
Serial communications mode
Characteristics
Peripheral Bus
High-speed communications are possible. Consequently, connecting via a peripheral bus is recommended when using a CX-Programmer.
Only 1:1 connection is possible.
When using a CS-series CPU Unit, the baud rate of
the communications devices can be automatically
recognized for connection.
Host Link
This is a communications protocol with a generalpurpose host computer.
Either 1:1 or 1:N connections are possible.
Host Link communications are slow compared with
the Peripheral Bus communications.
The following connections are possible: Via a
modem or optical fiber adapter, over long distance
using a RS-422A/485, and 1:N.

Note The CX-Programmer can be used for remote programming and monitoring. It
can be used to program and monitor not only the PLC to which it is directly
connected, but also to program and monitor any PLC connected through a
Controller Link or Ethernet network to which the PLC that the CX-Programmer

178

Section 3-3

Programming Devices

is connected to is a part of. All programming and monitoring functionality for
the directly connected PLC is supported for remote programming and monitoring, the PLC can be connected though either the peripheral or an RS-232C
port, and either the peripheral bus or Host Link bus can be used. Remote programming is possible for up to three levels of networks (counting the local network but not counting the peripheral bus or Host Link connection between the
CX-Programmer and the local PLC).
CX-Programmer
Peripheral port
or RS-232C port

Peripheral bus
or Host Link

FINS
Remote programming
and monitoring

Controller Link or Ethernet Network

CX-Programmer

Peripheral bus
or Host Link

Bridge

Ethernet Network

Controller Link Network
Controller Link Network

3-3-4

Gateway

Peripheral Port Specifications

Communications Mode Selection Flowchart

Connecting Device (Protocol)

Communications Mode

Programming Console

CX-Programmer

1. Peripheral bus (auto-detect)

Peripheral bus connection

Communicate with the
CX-Programmer's communications
settings (peripheral bus).

Communicate with the PLC Setup's
communications settings
(peripheral bus).

Host Link connection

2. Peripheral bus

3. Host Link

Host computer

OMRON PT

4. NT Link

OMRON component (CompoWay/F)

5. Serial Gateway

179

Section 3-3

Programming Devices
Peripheral Port Communications Settings
Connection

Communications Settings
Pin 4 of Front-panel PLC Setup peripheral port
DIP Switch
setting (See note.)
OFF (factory setting) ---

1. Peripheral bus
(auto-detect)
2. Peripheral bus
3. Host Link
4. NT Link
5. Serial Gateway

ON
ON
ON
ON

Peripheral bus
Host Link (default setting)
NT Link
Serial Gateway

Note Set from the CX-Programmer or Programming Console.

3-3-5

RS-232C Port Specifications

Connector Pin Arrangement
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Connector hood

Signal
FG
SD (TXD)
RD (RXD)
RS (RTS)
CS (CTS)
5V
DR (DSR)
ER (DTR)
SG (0 V)
FG

Name
Protection earth
Send data
Receive data
Request to send
Clear to send
Power supply
Data set ready
Data terminal ready
Signal ground
Protection earth

Direction
--Output
Input
Output
Input
--Input
Output
-----

Note Do not use the 5-V power from pin 6 of the RS-232C port for anything other
than an NT-AL001, CJ1W-CIF11 Link Adapter, or NV3W-M@20L Programmable Terminal. Using this power supply for any other external device may damage the CPU Unit or the external device.
Connection between CS-series CPU Unit and Personal Computer
The following connections are in Host Link serial communications mode.
CS-series
CPU Unit

Personal computer

Pin
Signal No.

Shield
RS-232C
interface

D-Sub, 9-pin connector
Male connector on cable

Note

RS-232C
interface

D-Sub, 9-pin connector
Female connector on cable

1. Refer to Appendix E Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit
when converting between RS-232C and RS-422A/485 for 1:N connections.
2. Refer to Appendix E Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit
when making your own RS-232C cable.

180

Section 3-3

Programming Devices

The following connections are in Peripheral Bus serial communications mode.
CS-series
CPU Unit

Personal computer

Pin
Signal No.

Pin
No.

RS-232C
interface

D-Sub, 9-pin connector
Male connector on cable

Applicable Connectors

Signal

D-Sub, 9-pin connector
Female connector on cable

CPU Unit Connector
Item
Plug
Hood

Model
XM2A-0901
XM2S-0911-E

Specifications
9-pin male
Used together (One
of each provided
9-pin, millimeter
with CPU Unit.)
screws

Personal Computer Connector
Item
Plug
Hood

Model
XM2D-0901
XM2S-0913

Specifications
9-pin female
Used together
9-pin, inch screws

IBM PC/AT or compatible
(9-pin male connector)

CS1-series CPU Unit

Plug: XM2D-0901 (9-pin female)

RS-232C port

Hood: XM2S-0913
Recommended cable
Hood: XM2S-0911-E

Plug: XM2A-0901 (9-pin male)

Provided with CPU Unit

Note Use the special cables provided from OMRON for all connections whenever
possible. If cables are produced in-house, be sure they are wired correctly.
External devices and the CPU Unit may be damaged if general purpose (e.g.,
computer to modem) cables are used or if wiring is not correct.
Recommended Cables

Fujikura Ltd.:

UL2464 AWG28 × 5P IFS-RVV-SB (UL product)
AWG 28 × 5P IFVV-SB (non-UL product)

181

Section 3-3

Programming Devices

Hitachi Cable, Ltd.: UL2464-SB(MA) 5P × 28AWG (7/0.127) (UL product)
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P × 28AWG (7/0.127) (non-UL product)
RS-232C Port Specifications
Item
Communications method
Synchronization
Baud rate
Transmission distance
Interface
Protocol

Specification
Half duplex
Start-stop
0.3/0.6/1.2/2.4/4.8/9.6/19.2/38.4/57.6/115.2 kbps
(See note.)
15 m max.
EIA RS-232C
Host Link, NT Link, 1:N, No-protocol, or Peripheral Bus

Note Baud rates for the RS-232C are specified only up to 19.2 kbps. The CS Series
supports serial communications from 38.4 kbps to 115.2 kbps, but some computers cannot support these speeds. Lower the baud rate if necessary.

Communications Mode Selection Flowchart
Connecting Device (Protocol)
CX-Programmer

Communications Mode

Peripheral bus connection

Communicate with the
CX-Programmer’s communications
settings (peripheral bus).

1. Peripheral bus (auto-detect)

Communicate with the PLC Setup’s
communications settings
(peripheral bus).

2. Peripheral bus

Host Link connection

3. Host Link

Host computer

OMRON PT

4. NT Link

General-purpose external serial device

5. No-protocol

OMRON component (CompoWay/F)

6. Serial Gateway

RS-232C Port Communications Settings
Connection

1. Peripheral bus
(auto-detect)
2. Peripheral bus
3. Host Link
4. NT Link
5. No-protocol
6. Serial Gateway

Communications Settings
Pin 5 of Front-panel
PLC Setup RS-232C port
DIP Switch
setting (See note.)
ON
--OFF (factory setting)
OFF (factory setting)
OFF (factory setting)
OFF (factory setting)
OFF (factory setting)

Peripheral bus
Host Link (default setting)
NT Link
No-protocol
Serial Gateway

Note Set from the CX-Programmer or Programming Console.

182

Section 3-4

Power Supply Units

3-4

Power Supply Units

3-4-1

Power Supply Units

Model

Supply voltage

Power
RUN
Replacement
output
output
notification
terminals
function
C200HW-PA204
100 to 240 V AC
5 V DC, 4.6 A,
No
No
Without
26 V DC, 0.625 A,
C200HW-PA204C (Wide range)
No
No
Display: Sup(See note 2.)
total 30 W
ported Output:
Supported
C200HW-PA204R
No
Yes
Without
No
Without
Yes
C200HW-PA204S 100 to 120 V AC or 5 V DC, 4.6 A,
24 V DC,
26 V DC, 0.625 A,
200 to 240 V AC
(Select the voltage total 30 W (See note 1.) 0.8 A
C200HW-PA209R using the metal
5 VDC, 9 A,
No
Yes
Without
short bar on the
26 V DC, 1.3A,
voltage selector
total 45 W
terminals.)
C200HW-PD024

24 V DC

C200HW-PD025

24 V DC

Note

Output capacity

5 V DC, 4.6 A, 26 V DC, No
0.625 A, total 30 W
5 V DC, 5.3 A, 26 V DC, No
1.3 A, total 40 W

Weight

500 g max.
500 g max.

1,000 g
max.

Without

550 g max.

Without

630 g max.

1. For C200HW-PA204S, the total also includes the power consumption of
the power supply output terminals.
2. The power supply voltage for C200HW-PA204 Power Supply Units manufactured before March 2010 and C200HW-PA204R Power Supply Units
manufactured before May 2010 is 100 to 120 V AC/200 to 240 V AC
(switched using short bar). For details on the differences between these
Units, refer to Unit Differences by Manufacturing Date (Reference Information) on page 189.

183

Section 3-4

Power Supply Units

3-4-2

Components and Switch Settings
POWER indicator
(Lights when 5 V is output
from Power Supply Unit)
External connection terminals
C200HW-PA204
AC input

C200HW-PA204S

AC100-240V
INPUT

AC input
Voltage
selector

24 VDC
power
output

C200HW-PA204R
AC input

(See note.)

C200HW-PA209R

AC100-240V
INPUT

AC input

DC input

Voltage
selector

DC24V

(See note.)

RUN
output

C200HW-PD024/025

RESISTIVE

Note 100 to 120 V AC: Closed circuit, 200 to 240 V AC: Open circuit
Always open the circuit (remove the metal jumper) before applying a voltage
of 200 to 240 V AC.
(Example: C200HW-PA204C)
Replacement notification display
POWER indicator
Lit: 5-V output from Power Supply Unit.
PA204C

PA204C

Terminals
external connect
L2 /N 100 to 240
VAC
IN PU T
C200HW-PA204C
POWER
POW

AC input

LG
GR
TEST

ALA RM
OUTPU T
30 VDC, 50 mA
NORMAL: ON
AL ARM : OFF

Alarm output
(replacement notification
output)

− NC
− NC

TEST switch
The TEST switch can be used to temporarily turn OFF the
alarm output that notifies when replacement is needed.

184

Section 3-4

Power Supply Units
AC Input

Either a power supply of 100 to 120 V AC or 200 to 240 V AC can be selected.
The C200HW-PA204/PA204R/PA204C supplies 100 to 240 V AC (allowable
voltage fluctuation range: 85 to 264 V AC).
The C200HW-PA204C has a wide-range supply voltage, so voltage selector
terminals are not provided.
Note The L2/N and L1 display on the AC power supply terminal is L1/N and L2 on
some products, however, the function and performance of the terminals are
the same.

Voltage Selector
Before applying a voltage of 100 to 120 V AC, close the circuit using the metal
jumper.
Note Always remove the metal jumper before applying a voltage of 200 to 240 V
AC. Not doing so will damage the Unit.

LG
Ground to a resistance of 100 Ω or less to increase noise resistance and
avoid electric shock.

GR
Ground to a resistance of 100 Ω or less to avoid electric shock.

24-V DC Power Output (PA204 Only)
This terminal outputs a service voltage of 24 V DC. Use this terminal to supply
power to DC Input Units (C200HW-PA204S only). The total current consumption of the 5-V and 24-V outputs must be 30 W max.

DC Input
24-V DC power is supplied from this terminal.

RUN Output (PA204R/PA209R Only)
The internal contact turns ON when the CPU Unit is operating (RUN or MONITOR mode). (The RUN output does not turn ON on Expansion Racks.)

Alarm Output (PA204C Only)
The alarm output is used to notify when Power Supply Unit replacement is
required. The output is normally ON. The output turns OFF when the time
until replacement is 6 months or less.

185

Power Supply Units

3-4-3

Dimensions

C200HW-PA204
C200HW-PA204S
C200HW-PA204R
C200HW-PD204

186

Section 3-4

Power Supply Units

C200HW-PA204C

PA204C

130

C200HW-PA204C
POWER
PO

TEST
TE

11
54

100
105.2

C200HW-PA209R
C200HW-PD025

3-4-4

Selecting a Power Supply Unit
After determining what power supply voltage is required, whether power output terminals and a RUN output are required, and whether replacement notification is required, calculate the current and power requirements for each
Rack.

Condition 1: Current Requirements
There are three voltage groups for internal power consumption: 5 V DC,
26 V DC, and 24 V DC.
Current Consumption at 5 V DC (Internal Logic Power Supply)
The following table shows the current that can be supplied to Units (including
the CPU Unit) and Backplanes that use 5-V DC power.
Power Supply Unit
C200HW-PA204/204S/204R/204C
C200HW-PD204

Maximum current at 5 V DC
4.6 A

187

Section 3-4

Power Supply Units
Power Supply Unit
C200HW-PA209R
C200HW-PD025

Maximum current at 5 V DC
9A
5.3 A

Current Consumption at 26 V DC (Relay Driving Power Supply)
The following table shows the current that can be supplied to Units that use
26-V DC power.
Power Supply Unit
C200HW-PA204/204S/204R/204C
C200HW-PD204
C200HW-PA209R/PD025

Maximum current at 26 V DC
0.625 A
1.3 A

Current Consumption at 24 V DC (Power Output Terminals)
The C200HW-PA204S Power Supply Unit can supply up to 0.8 A at 24 V DC
through its power output terminals.

Condition 2: Power Requirements
The following table shows the maximum total power that can be supplied at
5 V DC, 26 V DC, and 24 V DC.
Power Supply Unit
C200HW-PA204/204S/204R/204C
C200HW-PD204
C200HW-PA209R
C200HW-PD025

Maximum total power output
30 W
45 W
40 W

Refer to 2-6 Unit Current Consumption for tables showing the current consumed by each particular Unit as well as example calculations.

Precautions when Replacing the C200HW-PA204/PA204R
The following precautions apply when replacing a C200HW-PA204/PA204R.
■

Startup Time
The time from when the power is turned ON until the PLC operation starts is
approximately 1 second faster. Make sure that the system will not be
adversely affected by the change in timing.

■

Power Failure Detection Voltage
The power failure detection voltage is 85 V max. The PLC will stop operating if
the voltage drops below this voltage level.

Note If the previously used Power Supply Unit was switchable between 100 to 120
V AC and 200 to 240 V AC and 200 to 240 V AC was used, power failures
were detected when the voltage dropped to 170 V or lower and the PLC operation stopped. With C200HW-PA204 Units manufactured from March 2010
and C200HW-PA204R Units manufactured from May 2010, however, operation will not stop between 85 V and 170 V. Therefore, make sure that the system will not be adversely affected by the change in detection voltage.

188

Section 3-4

Power Supply Units
Unit Differences by Manufacturing Date (Reference Information)
■ Differences in C200HW-PA204 Models
Model
Manufacturing date March 2010 or later
Identification on
C200HW-PA204/Wide AC
nameplate

C200HW-PA204
Before March 2010
C200HW-PA204

C200HW-PA204 / Wide AC

Input
specifications
Power failure
detection voltage
Power supply
startup time (See
note.)
Service power
supply
RUN output
Terminal block
wiring

100 to 240 V AC (wide range)

C200HW-PA204

200 ms max.

100 to 120 V AC/200 to 240 V AC
(Switched with short bar.)
100 to 120 V AC: 85 V max.
200 to 240 V AC: 170 V max.
1,500 ms max.

Not supported.

Not supported.
C200HW-PA204

85 V max.

L2/N

AC input

100 to
240 V AC
INPUT

AC input

Unconnected terminals

Voltage
selector

Unconnected terminals

NC
NC

Unconnected terminals

L2/N 100 to
120 V AC
200 to
240 V AC
L1 INPUT
100 to 120
CLOSE
200 to 240
OPEN

NC
NC

Note The time from when the external input (AC power supply) is input until 5 V or
26 V is output.

189

Section 3-4

Power Supply Units
■ Differences in C200HW-PA204R Models
Model
Manufacturing date May 2010 or later
Identification on
C200HW-PA204R/Wide AC
nameplate

C200HW-PA204R
Before May 2010
C200HW-PA204R

C200HW-PA204R / Wide AC

Input
specifications
Power failure
detection voltage
Power supply
startup time (See
note.)
Service power
supply
RUN output
Terminal block
wiring

100 to 240 V AC (wide range)

C200HW-PA204R

200 ms max.

100 to 120 V AC/200 to 240 V AC
(Switched with short bar.)
100 to 120 V AC: 85 V max.
200 to 240 V AC: 170 V max.
1,500 ms max.

Not supported.

Supported
C200HW-PA204R

85 V max.

L2/N

AC input

100 to
240 V AC
INPUT

AC input

Unconnected terminals

Voltage
selector

NC
LG

RUN output

RUN
OUTPUT
250 V AC
24 V DC
2A

RUN
output

L2/N 100 to
120 V AC
200 to
240 V AC
L1 INPUT

100 to 120
CLOSE
200 to 240
OPEN

RUN
OUTPUT
250 V AC
24 V DC
2A

Note The time from when the external input (AC power supply) is input until 5 V or
26 V is output.

3-4-5

Replacement Notification

Principle of Replacement Notification
The Power Supply Unit has a built-in electrolytic capacitor. The electrolytic
capacitor is impregnated with electrolytic solution that starts to penetrate the
sealing rubber from the time of manufacture. As time elapses, the internal
electrolytic solution continues to evaporate, resulting in decreased electrostatic capacity and deterioration in other characteristics. Over time, the characteristic deterioration of the electrolytic capacitor prevents the Power Supply
Unit from being utilized to its full capacity. In particular, the speed at which the
electrolytic capacitor deteriorates fluctuates greatly with the ambient temperature (generally, a temperature rise of 10°C will double the rate of a reaction, as
stated by Arrhenius' law).
The C200HW-PA204C Power Supply Unit with Replacement Notification monitors the internal temperature of the Power Supply Unit while the power is
turned ON, and calculates the level of deterioration of the electrolytic capacitor from the operating time and internal temperature. The replacement notification function displays the approximate time until the Power Supply Unit will
stop functioning at its full capacity due to the characteristic deterioration of the
electrolytic capacitor, based on the calculated level of deterioration. When 6
months are remaining until replacement is required, the alarm output will turn
OFF.

190

Section 3-4

Power Supply Units

Note The replacement notification function provides an indication of when the deterioration of the electrolytic capacitor will prevent the power supply functioning
at its full capacity. It does not provide information on failures occurring due to
other causes.

Power Supply Unit with Replacement Notification
Model
C200HW-PA204C

Specifications
Output capacity: 4.6 A at 5 V DC, 0.625 A at 26 V DC, total of
30 W
With replacement notification

Power Supply Unit Replacement Notification Module
C200HW-PA204C
Replacement notification display (7-segment, red)
C200HW-PA204C
POWER
PO

POWER indicator (green)

TEST
TE
ST

Alarm output
(replacement notification output)
Test switch

Function
Replacement Notification Function Displays
The replacement notification for the Power Supply Unit is shown using three
7-segment LED displays.
• At time of purchase “FUL” is displayed. The display changes to “HLF” as
the electrolytic capacitor deteriorates (“HLF” may not be displayed,
depending on the operating environment).
• When the time until replacement is required drops below 2 years, the display will change corresponding to the operating time from “1.5” to “1.0” to
“0.5” to “0.0”/”A02.” When the remaining service life reaches 6 months or
less, the display will alternate between “0.0” and “A02” in 2-second intervals.

191

Section 3-4

Power Supply Units

Capacity at
time of
manufacture
Replacement
required
Electrolytic
capacitor level

Replacement notification display 2.0 yr
(7-Segment)
Alarm output
(replacement notification output)

1.5 yr

1.0 yr

0.5 yr

0 yr

Remaining
life plan

Output
OFF

Output ON

The output turns OFF when the remaining
life span reaches 6 months, and the
following display is repeatedly alternated.

Note

1. The time remaining until replacement does not include periods when the
power is turned OFF.
2. Until approximately one month of operating time has accumulated, the display will always be “FUL” and the alarm output will remain ON (conducting)
due to the estimated deterioration speed.
3. The time remaining until replacement will vary the operating and storage
conditions, so periodically check the display.
4. Fluctuation in the time remaining until replacement may result in the alarm
output repeatedly turning ON and OFF.
5. The precision of the replacement notification function will be adversely affected by applications in which the power is frequently turned ON and OFF.
6. Due to the service life of the electronic components, replace the Power
Supply Unit approximately 15 years after purchase, even if the replacement notification display or output has not indicated that replacement is required.

Alarm Output (Replacement Notification Output)
The output remains ON until the remaining service life drops below 6 months
and then turns OFF.
Note

1. The alarm output will also turn OFF under the following conditions.
• The AC input to the Power Supply Unit is turned OFF.
• An error is detected by the self-diagnostic function.
• The TEST switch is pressed for at least 3 seconds.
2. Example of Using the Alarm Output:
Monitoring Power Supply Replacement Notification in the System (6
Months or Less Until Replacement Is Required)

192

Section 3-4

Power Supply Units
Alarm output

ON
OFF
Turns OFF when 6 months remains
Alarm output
[ TIM 000 5 s ]

Internal Flag

T000

The Flag is programmed to allow for the delay in the alarm output at system
startup. The Flag does not turn ON when the alarm output is ON (normal
operation). When the alarm output turns OFF (replacement required), the
Flag turns ON, and the replacement notification can be monitored from the
system.
Maintenance Function Using the TEST Switch
• Press the TEST switch for at least 3 seconds to display “A02” and force
the alarm output OFF. Release the switch to return to normal operating
status.
The TEST switch is used initially or periodically to check the connection
status between the alarm output and external devices.
• Press the TEST switch for less than 3 seconds to display the unit version
information for the Power Supply Unit.
Note

1. Replace the Power Supply Unit within 6 months when the display on the
front panel of the Power Supply Unit alternates between 0.0 and A02 or the
alarm output automatically turns OFF.
2. Maintain an ambient storage temperature of −20 to 30°C and humidity of
25% to 70% when storing the product (with the power turned OFF) for
longer than 3 months to keep the replacement notification function in optimum working condition. The replacement time is calculated from when the
power is turned ON only. The precision of the replacement period will decline if the electrolytic capacitor deteriorates during storage.

Display and Alarm Output Operation
Normal Display: Replacement Notification Display
When 6 months or less are remaining until replacement is required, the display will alternate between “0.0” and “A02” (in 2 second intervals), and the
alarm output will turn OFF.
Remaining service life:
1 year to 6 months

Remaining service life:
6 months max.
2s

Alarm output

OFF

Operation at Powerup
The following initial display is shown when the power is turned ON, after which
the replacement notification is displayed. The alarm output turns ON approximately 0.2 seconds after the power is turned ON.

193

Section 3-4

Power Supply Units
Power ON

Display start

Initial display (approx. 1.1 s)
0.1 s
0.3 s
0.1 s

0.3 s

Replacement
required display

Display
Alarm
output

OFF

ON
1 s max.
0.2 s max.

When replacement is already required, the alarm display will follow the initial
display. The alarm output will turn ON approximately 0.2 seconds after the
power is turned ON, and then turn OFF after approximately 5 seconds.
Power ON

Display start
Initial display (approx. 1.1 s)

Alarm display

Alarm output OFF

Display
Alarm
output

OFF

ON
5 s max.

1 s max.
0.2 s max.

Operation at Power OFF
When the power is turned OFF, the display will turn OFF after the PLC operation stops. The alarm output will turn OFF after the display turns OFF.
Power
interruption
Replacement
notification display

PLC operation
stopped

Notification display
OFF

Alarm output
OFF

Display
Alarm
output

Approx. 70 ms
(See note.)

OFF

100 VAC: Approx. 2 s
200 VAC: Approx. 7 s
(See note.)

If replacement is already required, the display will turn OFF after the PLC
operation stops. When the display turns OFF, the alarm output will turn ON
momentarily and then turn OFF again.
Power
interruption

PLC operation
stopped

Alarm display

Notification display OFF
+ alarm output ON
Alarm output
OFF

Display
Alarm
output

OFF

ON
Approx. 70 ms
(See note.)

OFF

100 VAC: Approx. 2 s
200 VAC: Approx. 7 s
(See note.)

Note The values shown are reference values (calculated for a no-load status on the
Power Supply Unit's output).
Operation when TEST Switch Is Pressed
The following operation will be performed when the TEST switch on the
replacement notification function module is pressed. When the switch is
pressed for less than 3 seconds, the unit version will be displayed 3 times at
0.5-second intervals. When the switch is pressed for at least 3 seconds, the
alarm output will momentarily turn OFF, and the alarm display A02 will be
shown. The operation will return to the normal display and output when the

194

Section 3-4

Power Supply Units

switch is released. Use the TEST switch to check the connection between the
replacement notification output and devices.
1. Operation when TEST switch is pressed for less than 3 seconds.
TEST switch

ON
0.5 s

0.5 s

2. Operation when TEST switch is pressed for 3 seconds or longer.
3s
TEST switch

ON
0.5 s

0.5 s

Alarm output

0.5 s

OFF

Note In standard operating conditions, the Power Supply Unit replacement notification function will be activated after between several years to beyond a decade.
For long-term use, be sure to periodically check TEST switch operations, and
make sure that the alarm output is operating normally.
Self-diagnostic Function
Error name
Unit overheated
error

Unit error

Display

Alarm output
Error details (cause)
status
OFF
Internal overheating has
occurred in the Power Supply
Unit as a result of usage under
conditions that exceed the specified values, insufficient ventilation, or incorrect installation.
(See note.)
OFF
System error from external
noise or hardware malfunction.

Recovery method
Remove the cause of the overheating error.

Turn ON the input's power supply
again.If the Unit does not recover,
the error may be caused by a Unit
malfunction. Consult with your
OMRON representative.

Note If the error continues for 3 hours or longer, the replacement notification function will be disabled. Even if the cause of the overheating is removed, the display will continue as “Hot,” and the notification output will remain OFF. In this
state, the internal parts may deteriorate even if the PLC operation is normal,
so replace the Power Supply Unit.

Precautions when Replacing Earlier Units
The following precautions apply when replacing a C200HW-PA204/PA204S/
PA204R with a C200HW-PA204C.
Terminal Wiring
• Be sure to wire the ground terminals correctly. Incorrect ground terminal
wiring will adversely affect the Unit's resistance to noise. (For details on
terminal arrangements for each Power Supply Unit, refer to 3-4-2 Components and Switch Settings.)
• The C200HW-PA204C is not provided with a service power supply and
RUN output (RUN).

195

Section 3-4

Power Supply Units
Startup Time

The startup time of the C200HW-PA204 and C200HW-PA204R depends on
the manufacturing date. Refer to the tables of differences for details.
The time from when the power is turned ON until the PLC operation starts is
approximately 1 second faster. Make sure that the system will not be
adversely affected by the change in timing.
Power Failure Detection Voltage
The power failure detection voltage of the C200HW-PA204 and C200HWPA204R depends on the manufacturing date. Refer to the tables of differences
for details.
The power failure detection voltage is 85 V. The PLC will stop operating if the
voltage drops below this voltage level.
Note If the previously used Power Supply Unit was switchable between 100 to 120
V AC and 200 to 240 V AC and 200 to 240 V AC was used, power failures
were detected when the voltage dropped to 170 V or lower and the PLC operation stopped. With C200HW-PA204C, however, operation will not stop
between 85 V and 170 V. Therefore, make sure that the system will not be
adversely affected by the change in detection voltage.

Comparison between the C200HW-PA204C and the C200HW-PA204
Item

C200HW-PA204C
C200HW-PA204C

C200HW-PA204 (Manufactured
March 2010 or later)
C200HW-PA204/Wide AC

C200HW-PA204 (Manufactured before March 2010)
C200HW-PA204

Identification on
nameplate
Input specifications

100 to 240 V AC (wide range)

100 to 120 V AC/200 to 240 V
AC (Switched with short bar.)
100 to 120 V AC: 85 V max.
200 to 240 V AC: 170 V max.
1,500 ms max.

Power failure detec- 85 V max.
tion voltage
Power supply startup 200 ms max.
time (See note.)
RUN output
Not supported

85 V max.
200 ms max.

Not supported (Supported by the Not supported (Supported by
PA204R)
the PA204R)

Terminal block wiring C200HW-PA204C
AC
input

C200HW-PA204
L2/N

100 to
240 V AC
INPUT

AC
input

Unconnected
terminals

ALARM
OUTPUT
30 V DC,
50 mA
NORMAL: ON
ALARM: OFF

Replacement notification

100 to
240 V AC
INPUT

AC input

On replacement notification
module
Supported (7-segment display
+ transistor outputs)

Voltage
selector

NC
LG

Unconnected
terminals

POWER indicator

L2/N

Alarm output
(replacement
notification
output)

C200HW-PA204

Unconnected
terminals

100 to 120 V AC
200 to 240 V AC
INPUT
L1

100 to 120
CLOSE
200 to 240
OPEN

NC
NC

On hood of Power Supply Unit

Not supported

Note The time from when the external input (AC power supply) is input until 5 V or
26 V is output.

196

Section 3-5

Backplanes

3-5
3-5-1

Backplanes
CPU Backplanes

CPU Backplane Models
Standard CS-series CPU Backplanes
Number of
slots
2 slots
3 slots
5 slots
8 slots
10 slots

Model
CS1W-BC023
CS1W-BC033
CS1W-BC053
CS1W-BC083
CS1W-BC103

CS-series-only CPU Backplanes
Number of
slots
2 slots
3 slots
5 slots
8 slots
10 slots

Model
CS1W-BC022
CS1W-BC032
CS1W-BC052
CS1W-BC082
CS1W-BC102

Note C200H Units (C200H Basic I/O Units, C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units,
and C200H Special I/O Units) cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Backplanes.

Components and Switch Settings
Unit mounting slots
(for mounting each Unit)
Backplane mounting screws
(4 M4 screws)
(The Backplane is structured so that
it can be insulated from the control
panel when installed.)

Unit connectors

Power Supply Unit connector

CPU Unit connector
See note.

Unit lock lever
(Fix each Unit securely. Press down on
the lock lever to remove the Unit)

Note Mount an I/O Control Unit (CS1W-IC102)
I/O cable connector
here to connect a CS-series Long-distance Ex(for connecting a CS-series Expansion Rack
pansion Rack next.
or a C200H Expansion I/O Rack)

197

Section 3-5

Backplanes

the larger gap next to the connector first and then rotate the CV500-COV01
and insert it on the side with the narrower gap.

Name
C200H Unit Connector Cover
CS-series Special I/O Unit Connector Cover

Model
C500-COV01
CV500-COV01

Dimensions and Weights

157

145

CS1W-BC023/022 (2 Slots)

5.9

105.25
172.3
198.5

5.2
35

23.7

21.9

20.2
CS1W-BC023

Weight: 600 g max.

198

CS1W-BC022

5.2

Section 3-5

Backplanes

135 (including protruding parts)

132

118

CS1W-BC@@@ (3, 5, 8, or 10 Slots)

5.2
35
L
W

Model
CS1W-BC033
CS1W-BC053
CS1W-BC083
CS1W-BC103
CS1W-BC032
CS1W-BC052
CS1W-BC082
CS1W-BC102

3-5-2

124
6

Number of slots
3
5
8
10
3
5
8
10

L (mm)
246
316
421
491
246
316
421
491

W (mm)
260
330
435
505
260
330
435
505

Weight (max.)
750 g
900 g
1,200 g
1,400 g
750 g
900 g
1,200 g
1,400 g

CS-series Expansion Backplanes
CS-series Expansion Backplanes are used for both CS-series Expansion
Racks and CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks.

CS-series Expansion Backplane Models
Standard CS-series Expansion Backplane
Number of slots
3 slots
5 slots
8 slots
10 slots

Model
CS1W-BI033
CS1W-BI053
CS1W-BI083
CS1W-BI103

CS-series-only Expansion Backplane
Number of slots
3 slots
5 slots
8 slots
10 slots

Model
CS1W-BI032
CS1W-BI052
CS1W-BI082
CS1W-BI102

Note C200H Units (C200H Basic I/O Units, C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units,
and C200H Special I/O Units) cannot be used with CS-series-only Expansion
Backplanes.

199

Section 3-5

Backplanes
Components and Switch Settings
Unit mounting slots
(for mounting each Unit)

Backplane mounting screws
(4 M4 screws)
(The Backplane is structured
so that it can be insulated
from the control panel when
installed.)

Unit connectors

Power Supply Unit connector

See note .
I/O cable connector
(for connecting the following Rack)

I/O cable connector
(for connecting the previous Rack)

Unit lock lever
(Fix each Unit securely. Press down
on the lock lever to remove the Unit)

Note Mount an I/O Control Unit (CS1W-IC102) here to start connecting CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks next. Mount an
I/O Interface Unit (CS1W -II102) if this Rack is a CS-series Long-distance Expansion Rack (i.e., the previous Rack is connected
via an I/O Control Unit or an I/O Interface Unit).

Note Always cover the connectors that are not being used with Connector Covers
(sold separately) as a measure against dust.
When you attach the CV500-COV01 to a CS-series Backplane (for CS-series
Units only), it will go on easier if you insert the CV500-COV01 on the side with
the larger gap next to the connector first and then rotate the CV500-COV01
and insert it on the side with the narrower gap.

Name
C200H Unit Connector Cover
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Connector Cover

200

Model
C500-COV01
CV500-COV01

Section 3-5

Backplanes
Dimensions

130

118

CS1W-BI@@@

5.2
59.75

17
6

Model
CS1W-BI033
CS1W-BI053
CS1W-BI083
CS1W-BI103
CS1W-BI032
CS1W-BI052
CS1W-BI082
CS1W-BI102

3-5-3

Number of slots
3
5
8
10
3
5
8
10

L (mm)
246
316
421
491
246
316
421
491

W (mm)
260
330
435
505
260
330
435
505

Weight (max.)
750 g
900 g
1,200 g
1,400 g
750 g
900 g
1,200 g
1,400 g

C200H Expansion I/O Backplanes
C200H Expansion I/O Racks cannot be connected together with CS-series
Long-distance Expansion Racks.

C200H Expansion I/O Backplane Models
Number of slots
3 slots
5 slots
8 slots
10 slots

Model
C200HW-BI031
C200HW-BI051
C200HW-BI081-V1
C200HW-BI101-V1

201

Section 3-5

Backplanes
Components and Switch Settings
Unit mounting slots
(for mounting each Unit)

Backplane mounting screws
(4 M4 screws)

Unit connectors

I/O cable connector
(for connecting the previous Rack:
CPU Rack, CS-series Expansion Rack,
or C200H Expansion I/O rack)

Power Supply Unit connector
Unit lock lever
(Fix each Unit securely. Press down
on the lock lever to remove the Unit)

I/O cable connector
(for connecting the following Rack:
C200H Expansion I/O Rack)

Note Always cover the connectors that are not being used with Connector Covers
(sold separately) as a measure against dust.
Name
C200H Unit Connector Cover
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Connector
Cover

Model
C500-COV01
CV500-COV01

Dimensions
C200HW-BI@@@

Model
C200HW-BI031
C200HW-BI051
C200HW-BI081-V1
C200HW-BI101-V1

Number of slots
3
5
8
10

W (mm)

Weight (max.)
500 g
650 g
950 g
1,100 g

Number of slots
3 slots

Model
C200HW-ATT32

5 slots

C200HW-ATT52

8 slots

C200HW-ATT82

10 slots

C200HW-ATTA2

189
259
364
434

Optional Products
Product

Backplane
Insulation Plate
(for C200H
Expansion I/O
Backplane)

202

Specifications
Used to electrically
insulate the C200H
Expansion I/O Rack
from the mounting
surface in the control panel to
improve noise
resistance.

Section 3-5

Backplanes

3-5-4

I/O Control Units, I/O Interface Units, and Terminators
I/O Control Units and I/O Interface Units are used to create CS-series Longdistance Expansion Racks. Terminators are connected to the last CS-series
Long-distance Expansion Rack in each series. (Up to two series of CS-series
Long-distance Expansion Racks can be connected.)

CS1W-IC102 I/O Control Unit
An I/O Control Unit is connected to the leftmost slot on the CPU Rack or the
last CS-series Expansion Rack to start connecting CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Racks.
Part Names and Functions
Indicators
OUT A OUT B

Connector to Backplane

Connector to I/O Interface
Unit of series B

Connector to I/O Interface
Unit of series A

Indicators
Indicator
RDY (green)

Status
Lit
Operating normally.
Not lit Bus error.

TERM ERR (red)

Lit
Not lit

Meaning

Terminator missing.
Terminator connected.

203

Section 3-5

Backplanes
Dimensions and Weight
190
IC102
RDY

123

TERM
ERRB
OUT
A OUT
OUT A OUT B

130

34.5
236.5

Weight: 300 g max. (including cable to Backplane)

Backplane

Connection Method on CPU Rack

Connect to I/O
cable connector.
CPU Rack

Series A

Series B

Note Connect a Terminator (CV500-TER01) to the unused connector when connecting only series A or series B.
Connection Method on
CS-series Expansion Rack

Connect the I/O Control Unit to the output I/O cable connector (right side).
To CPU Rack
or previous CS
series Expansion Rack

CS-series Expansion Rack

Series A

Series B

Note Connect a Terminator (CV500-TER01) to the unused connector when connecting only series A or series B.

204

Section 3-5

Backplanes
CS1W-II102 I/O Interface Unit

Mount an I/O Interface Unit to the leftmost slot on each CS-series Long-distance Expansion Rack.
Part Names and Functions
Indicator
IN

OUT

Connector to
Backplane
IN expansion connector
(to previous Rack)

OUT expansion connector
(to following Rack)

Indicator
Indicator
RDY (green)

Status
Meaning
Lit
Operating normally.
Not lit Bus error (bus reset) or system error.

Dimensions and Weight
190
II102
RDY
IN

123

OUT

130

34.5
Weight: 300 g max. (including connector to Backplane)

236.5

Backplane

205

Section 3-5

Backplanes
Connection Method

Connect the I/O Interface Unit to the input I/O cable connector on the Backplane (left side). Always connect a Terminator (CV500-TER01) to the connector for the next Rack when it is not used (i.e., on the last CS-series Longdistance Expansion Rack in the series).
To the previous Rack
(I/O Control Unit or I/O
Interface Unit)

CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Rack

To the next Rack
(I/O Interface Unit)

CV500-TER01 Terminator

Connect a Terminator when not used.

Two Terminators are provided with an I/O Control Unit

Weight: 50 g max.

206

Section 3-6

Basic I/O Units

3-6

Basic I/O Units

3-6-1

C200H and CS-series Basic I/O Units with Terminal Blocks
Name

Basic Input
Units (with
terminal
blocks)

AC Input Units

Specifications

Model

100 to 120 V AC, 100 to 120 V DC, 16 inputs CS1W-IA111
100 to 120 V AC, 8 inputs
C200H-IA121
100 to 120 V AC, 16 inputs
C200H-IA122
C200H-IA122V
200 to 240 V AC, 8 inputs
C200H-IA221
200 to 240 V AC, 16 inputs
C200H-IA222
C200H-IA222V
200 to 240 V AC, 16 inputs
CS1W-IA211
AC/DC Input Units 12 to 24 V AC/V DC, 8 inputs
C200H-IM211
24 V AC/V DC, 16 inputs
C200H-IM212
DC Input Units
12 to 24 V DC, 8 inputs
C200H-ID211
12 to 24 V DC, 16 inputs
C200H-ID212
24 V DC, 16 inputs
CS1W-ID211
Interrupt Input
24 V DC, 16 inputs
CS1W-INT01
Units
12 to 24 V DC, 8 inputs
C200HS-INT01
High-speed Input 24 V DC, 16 inputs
CS1W-IDP01
Unit
C200H OutRelay Output
2 A at 250 V AC/24 V DC max., 0.1 A at
CS1W-OC201
put Units (with Units
120 V DC, independent contacts, 8 outputs
terminal
2 A at 250 V AC/24 V DC max., 0.1 A at
CS1W-OC211
blocks)
120 V DC, 16 outputs
2 A at 250 V AC/24 V DC max., independent C200H-OC223
contacts, 5 outputs
2 A at 250 V AC/24 V DC max., independent C200H-OC224
contacts, 8 outputs
C200H-OC224N
C200H-OC224V
(no longer manufactured)
C200H-OC124N
2 A at 250 V AC/24 V DC max., 8 outputs
C200H-OC221
2 A at 250 V AC/24 V DC max., 12 outputs
C200H-OC222
C200H-OC222V
(no longer manufactured)
C200H-OC222N
2 A at 250 V AC/24 V DC max., 16 outputs
C200H-OC225
C200H-OC226 (no
longer manufactured)
C200H-OC226N

External
view/dimensions
reference No.
5
1
3
3
1
3
3
5
1
3
1
3
5
5
1
5
5
5
1
3
3
3

1
3
3

3
3
4

207

Section 3-6

Basic I/O Units
Name

Specifications

C200H OutTriac Output Units
put Units (with
terminal
blocks)

Transistor Output
Units, Sinking

Transistor Output
Units, Sourcing

Model

1.2 A at 250 V AC max., 8 outputs, with fuse CS1W-OA201
burnout detection circuit
C200H-OA221 (no
1 A at 250 V AC max., 8 outputs, with fuse
burnout detection circuit
longer manufactured)
1.2 A at 250 V AC max., 8 outputs, with fuse C200H-OA223
burnout detection circuit
0.3 A at 250 V AC max., 12 outputs
C200H-OA222V
0.5 A at 250 V AC max., 12 outputs
C200H-OA224
0.5 A at 250 V AC max., 16 outputs
CS1W-OA211
2.1 A at 24 V DC, 8 outputs
C200H-OD213
1 A at 12 to 48 V DC, 8 outputs
C200H-OD411
0.3 A at 24 V DC, 12 outputs
C200H-OD211
0.3 A at 24 V DC, 16 outputs
C200H-OD212
0.5 A at 12 to 24 V DC, 16 outputs
CS1W-OD211
0.8 A at 24 V DC, load short-circuit protecC200H-OD214
tion, 8 outputs
0.3 A at 5 to 24 V DC common, 8 outputs
C200H-OD216
0.3 A at 5 to 24 V DC common, 12 outputs
C200H-OD217
0.5 A at 24 V DC, load short-circuit protecCS1W-OD212
tion, 16 outputs
1 A at 24 V DC, load short-circuit protection, C200H-OD21A
16 outputs

External
view/dimensions
reference No.
5
1

2
3
3
5
1
1
3
3
5
1
1
3
5
3

Note Immediate refreshing (!) or refreshing using IORF(097) is possible for all
C200H Basic I/O Units.
Optional Products
Name

I/O Unit Cover

Terminal Block Covers

CS-series Special I/O Unit
Connector Cover

C200H Unit Connector
Cover

Relay

208

Specifications
Model
Cover for 10-pin terminal
C200H-COV11
block; 8-point Input/5-point
Output Unit

Short protection for 10-pin
terminal block (package of
10 covers); 8 inputs, 8 outputs
Short protection for 19-pin
terminal block (package of
10 covers); 12 inputs, 12
outputs
Protective cover for unused
connectors on Backplane
Protective cover for unused
connectors on Backplane

C200H-COV02

24 V DC, C200H-OC221/
OC222/OC223/OC224/
OC225

G6B-1174P-FD-US-M

C200H-COV03

CV500-COV01
C200H-COV01

Section 3-6

Basic I/O Units
Components and Switch Settings
C200H 10-pin/19-pin Terminal Block
10-pin terminal block

19-pin terminal block

Unit mounting hooks
Hooked onto Backplane to mount Unit.

Model label
I/O indicator

I/O indicator

Terminal block
connector
(10-pin)

10-pin Terminal Block

Model label
I/O indicator

Terminal block
connector

10-pin Terminal Block (C200H-OA223)

10-pin terminal block
8-point Unit
C200H-ID211,
C200H-IM211,
C200H-IA121,
C200H-IA221,
C200H-OC221,
C200H-OD216
8-point Unit
C200H-OD213,
F indicator (fuse C200H-OD411,
C200H-OA221,
burnout)
C200H-OA223
(illustrated above)

19-pin terminal block
16-point Unit
C200H-ID212,
C200H-IA122,
C200H-IA222,
C200H-IM212,
C200H-IA122V,
C200H-IA222V,
C200H-OD21A,
C200H-OD212,
C200H-OC225,
C200H-OC226N,
C200H-OC226
(illustrated above)

8-point Unit
C200H-OD214
ALARM indicator

12-point Unit

5-point Unit

8-point Unit

C200H-OC223

19-pin Terminal Block
(C200H-OC226 19-pin
Terminal Block)

C200H-OC222,
C200H-OC222V,
C200H-OD211,
C200H-OD217,
C200H-OA224,
C200H-OA222V
C200H-OC222N
C200H-OC224,
C200H-224V,
C200H-224N

209

Section 3-6

Basic I/O Units
CS-series Basic Input Units (20-pin Terminal Block)

16-point Unit

8-point Unit

20-pin terminal block
CS1W-ID211
INT01
IDP01
OD211
IA111
IA211
OC211
OA211
CS1W-OC201

ERR

210

16-point Units
CS1W-OD212
with ERR indicator (load short-circuit)

8-point Units
with ERR indicator (fuse burnout)

CS1W-OA201

Section 3-6

Basic I/O Units
Dimensions
C200H Units with 10-pin Terminal Blocks

Backplane

C200H-IA121
C200H-IA221
C200H-ID211
C200H-IM211
C200H-OA221
C200H-OC221
C200H-OC223
C200H-OD216
C200H-OD213
C200H-OD411
C200H-OD214

(See note.)

Backplane

C200H-OA223

(See note.)

Note The heights of the Units including the Backplane are 5 mm greater on the
CPU Backplane and CS-series Expansion Backplane (123 and 143 mm).

211

Section 3-6

Basic I/O Units
Units with 19-pin Terminal Blocks

Backplane

C200H-IA122
C200H-IA122V
C200H-IA222
C200H-IA222V
C200H-ID212
C200H-IM212
C200H-OA222V
C200H-OA224
C200H-OC222
C200H-OC222V
C200H-OC224
C200H-OC224V
C200H-OC225
C200H-OD211
C200H-OD212
C200H-OD217
C200H-OD21A
C200H-OC222N
C200H-OC224N

(See note.)
Terminal Dimensions

Backplane

C200H-OC226
C200H-OC226N

(See note .)

Note The heights of the Units including the Backplane are 5 mm greater on the
CPU Backplane and CS-series Expansion Backplane (150 and 174 mm).

212

Section 3-6

Basic I/O Units
CS-series Basic I/O Units (20-pin Terminal Blocks)

Backplane

CS1W-IA111
CS1W-IA211
CS1W-ID211
CS1W-INT01
CS1W-IDP01
CS1W-OD211
CS1W-OD212
CS1W-OA201
CS1W-OA211
CS1W-OC201
CS1W-OC211

Terminal Dimensions

3-6-2
Functions

Interrupt Input Units
Interrupt Input Units are used to execute interrupt programs on the rising or
falling edge of an input signal (See note.). When the specified interrupt input
turns ON (or OFF), execution of the cyclic program in the CPU Unit is interrupted and an I/O interrupt task (task number 100 to 131) is executed. When
execution of the I/O interrupt task has been completed, the cyclic program is
again executed starting from the instruction after which it was interrupted.
Note Only the CS1W-INT01 can detect falling edges. The interrupt control instructions, however, can be used to switch between upward and downward differentiation.
Interrupt Input Unit

CPU Unit

1 cyclic task
MSKS(690)

Input
(rising or
falling
edge)

Immediate
interrupt

I/O interrupt task is
executed when the in
put turns ON (or OFF).

I/O interrupt task

213

Section 3-6

Basic I/O Units
Applicable Units

Either of the following Interrupt Input Units can be used.
Model
CS1W-INT01
C200HS-INT01

Specifications
24 V DC 16 inputs
24 V DC 8 inputs

No. of Units mountable
to CPU Rack
2 max.
4 max.

Application Precautions
All Interrupt Input Units must be mounted to the CPU Rack. The interrupt input
function will not be supported if an Interrupt Input Unit is mounted to an
Expansion Rack. If mounted to an Expansion Rack, the Unit can be used as a
normal I/O Unit.
There are limits to the number of Interrupt Input Units that can be mounted.
(See table, above.)
Use only CS-series or only C200H Interrupt Input Units on the same CPU
Rack. The CS-series and C200H Interrupt Input Units cannot be used
together.
Can be used only with CPU Units with model numbers ending in “-V1,” i.e.,
CS1W-CPU4@-V1 or CS1W-CPU6@-V1.
The input response time cannot be changed for the CS1W-INT01, and the
related portions of the Basic I/O Unit input time constants in the PLC Setup,
and the setting status in A220 to A259 will not be valid.
Use CX-Programmer Version 2.0 or higher when using the CS1W-INT01
Interrupt Input Unit. Earlier versions of CX-Programmer do not support this
Unit. (The Programming Consoles, however, can be used for this Unit.)
Input Signal Width

Input signals must meet the following conditions.

Unit
CS1W-INT01
C200HS-INT01

214

OFF

ON time
0.1 ms min.
0.2 ms min.

OFF time
0.5 ms min.
0.5 ms min.

Section 3-6

Basic I/O Units
Components
CS1W-INT01

Input indicators

C200HS-INT01

Unit lock notch
(fit into the Backplane)

Input indicators

Model label

I/O indicator

10-pin Terminal
Block connector

Using I/O Interrupts
1,2,3...

1. Mount the Input Interrupt Unit to the CPU Rack and create the I/O tables.
2. Create the I/O task (see note 1).
3. Use the SET INTERRUPT MASK Instruction (MSKS(690)) in the cyclic
program to enable the required interrupt input numbers (see note 1).
4. Turn ON or OFF the inputs on the Interrupt Input Unit for the interrupt input
numbers that have been enabled.

Note

1. The relationship between Interrupt Input Unit numbers, interrupt input
numbers, and I/O interrupt tasks is shown in the following table.
Model
CS1W-INT01
C200HS-INT01

Interrupt Input
Unit number
0
1
0
1
2
3

Interrupt input
number
0 to 15
0 to 7

I/O interrupt task
number
100 to 115
116 to 131
100 to 107
108 to 115
116 to 123
124 to 131

2. The CS1W-INT01 can set to detect either rising or falling edges.

215

Section 3-6

Basic I/O Units
MSKS(690) Instruction
Specifying Rising/Falling Edge for CS1W-INT01
MSKS(690)

N: Control data 1 (Interrupt Input Unit No.)
S: Control data 2 (interrupt mask data)

The MSKS(690) instruction is used to set rising edge or falling edge detection
for each interrupt input number.
• The value of N will determine which Interrupt Input Unit will perform the
I/O interrupt processing.
• The value of S will determine rising or falling edge detection for each
interrupt input number.
Operand

Value
Details
CS1W- C200HSINT01
INT01
2, 3
--Interrupt Input Unit Number
Numbers 2 and 3 are assigned to the Units in
order from left to right.
2: Interrupt Input Unit 0 (interrupt task numbers
100 to 115)
3: Interrupt Input Unit 1 (interrupt task numbers
116 to 131)
0000 to
--Rising/Falling Edge Designation
FFFF hex
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to the interrupt input numbers (interrupt tasks 100 to 115 or 116 to 131).
0: Rising edge
1: Falling edge

Specifying I/O Interrupt Processing
MSKS(690)

N: Control data 1 (Interrupt Input Unit No.)
S: Control data 2 (interrupt mask data)

The MSKS(690) instruction is used to set I/O interrupt processing or scheduled interrupt processing.
• The value of N will determine which Interrupt Input Unit will perform the
I/O interrupt processing.
• The value of S will determine which interrupt number will be enabled.

216

Section 3-6

Basic I/O Units
Operand

Value
Details
CS1WC200HSINT01
INT01
0, 1
0 to 3
Interrupt Input Unit Number
Numbers are assigned to the Units in order from
left to right.
CS1W-INT01 (unit numbers 0 and 1)
0: Interrupt Input Unit 0 (interrupt task numbers
100 to 115)
1: Interrupt Input Unit 1 (interrupt task numbers
116 to 131)
CS1W-INT01 (unit numbers 0 to 3)
0: Interrupt Input Unit 0 (interrupt task numbers
100 to 107)
1: Interrupt Input Unit 1 (interrupt task numbers
108 to 115)
2: Interrupt Input Unit 2 (interrupt task numbers
116 to 123)
3: Interrupt Input Unit 3 (interrupt task numbers
123 to 131)
0000 to
0000 to
Interrupt Mask Data
FFFF hex 00FF hex Bits 00 to 15 for the CS1W-INT01 and the rightmost 8 bits for the C200H-INT01are used for the
Interrupt Input Unit’s interrupt input number.
1: Interrupt masked
(interrupt input disabled)
0: Interrupt valid
(interrupt input enabled)

217

Section 3-6

Basic I/O Units
Dimensions
CS1W-INT01

Backplane

C200HS-INT01

(See note .)

Note The height of the Unit including the Backplane is 5 mm greater on the CPU
Backplane and CS-series Expansion Backplane (123 mm).

218

Section 3-6

Basic I/O Units

3-6-3

Units with High-speed Inputs

Functions

The CS1W-IDP01 enables inputting pulse signals that are shorted than the
cycle time of the CPU Unit. C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)
also supported high-speed inputs.

I/O Units with High-speed
Inputs

Model
CS1W-IDP01
C200H-ID501
C200H-ID215
C200H-MD501
C200H-MD115
C200H-MD215

Name
High-speed Input Unit
TTL Input Unit
DC Input Unit
TTL I/O Unit
DC Input/Transistor
Output Unit

Specifications
24 V DC, 16 inputs
5 V DC, 32 inputs
24 V DC, 32 inputs
5 V DC,16 inputs/16 outputs
12 V DC,16 inputs/16 outputs
24 V DC,16 inputs/16 outputs,

Note Refer to 3-7 C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units) for details on
C200H High-density I/O Units
Components
CS1W-IDP01

Input indicators

Input Signal Width

High-speed input signals must meet the following conditions for the ON time.
ON OFF

Model
CS1W-IDP01
C200H-ID501/215
C200H-MD501/215/115

Dimensions

ON time
0.1 ms min.
1.0/4.0 ms min. (switchable)

The High-speed Input Unit has the same dimensions as the Interrupt Input
Unit. Refer to page 218.

219

Section 3-6

Basic I/O Units

3-6-4

CS-series Basic I/O Units with Connectors
(32-, 64-, and 96-pt Units)
CS-series Basic I/O Units are classified as Basic I/O Units.

Models
Name
DC Input Unit

Specifications
24 V DC, 32 inputs
24 V DC, 64 inputs
24 V DC, 96 inputs

Model
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-ID261
CS1W-ID291

Transistor Output Unit,
Sinking

0.5 A at 12 to 24 V DC, 32 outputs
0.3 A at 12 to 24 V DC, 64 outputs
0.1 A at 12 to 24 V DC, with fuse burnout
detection circuit, 96 outputs
0.5 A at 24 V DC, load short-circuit protection, 16 outputs
0.5 A at 24 V DC, load short-circuit protection, 32 outputs
0.3 A at 24 V DC, load short-circuit protection, 64 outputs
0.1 A at 24 V DC, with fuse burnout
detection circuit, 96 outputs
24 V DC input, 0.3 A output at 12 to
24 V DC, 32 inputs/32 outputs
24 V DC input, 0.1 A output at 12 to 24 V
DC, with fuse burnout detection circuit,
48 inputs/48 outputs
24 V DC input, 0.3 A output at 24 V DC,
load short-circuit protection, 32
inputs/32 outputs

CS1W-OD231
CS1W-OD261
CS1W-OD291

Transistor Output Unit,
Sourcing

DC Input/Transistor
Output Unit, Sinking

DC Input/Transistor
Output Unit, Sourcing

TTL I/O Unit

220

CS1W-OD212
CS1W-OD232
CS1W-OD262
CS1W-OD292
CS1W-MD261
CS1W-MD291

CS1W-MD262

24 V DC input, 0.1 A output at 24 V DC, CS1W-MD292
with fuse burnout detection circuit, 48
inputs/48 outputs
3.5 mA at 5 V DC, 32 inputs
CS1W-MD561
35 mA at 5 V DC, 32 outputs

Section 3-6

Basic I/O Units

Note Immediate refreshing (!) or refreshing using IORF(097) is possible for CSseries High-density I/O Units.
Unit mounting hooks
Hooked onto Backplane to
mount Unit.

Model label
I/O indicators

Display Switch
for 64-point I/O Units

56-pin I/O wiring
connectors 2

Unit lock notch
(Attach Unit to Backplane
and fix securely)
32-point Units
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-OD231

Area 1
Area 2

Display switch
0, 1
2, 3
m
m+2
m+1
m+3

Display Switch
for 96-point I/O Units

32-point Units with ERR indicator
(load short-circuit indicator)
CS1W-OD232
Display switch (3-level selection)
Display switch
0, 1
2, 3
4, 5
Area 1
m
m+2
m+4
Area 2
m+1
m+3
m+5

64-point Units
CS1W-ID261
CS1W-OD261
CS1W-MD261
CS1W-MD561

64-point Units with ERR indicator
(load short-circuit indicator)
CS1W-OD262
CS1W-MD262

96-point Units
CS1W-ID291/OD291/OD292/MD291/MD292
F (fuse burnt out) indicator
Available on Output Units.
Lights when one or more fuses in the Unit blows.
Lights when external power is OFF.

221

Section 3-6

Basic I/O Units

Units with 56-pin
connectors
CS1W-ID291
CS1W-OD291
CS1W-OD292
CS1W-MD291
CS1W-MD292

Units with Two
40-pin connectors
CS1W-ID261
CS1W-0D261
CS1W-OD262
CS1W-MD261
CS1W-MD262
CS1W-MD561

Using Pressure-welded Connector
Connecting Cables:
G79-@@@C-@@@-@@@
XW2Z-@@@

Backplane

Using Soldered or Crimped Connector

Backplane

Units with One
40-pin connector
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-0D231
CS1W-0D232

Indicator switch

Dimensions

123

123
Approx. 169 for 32- and 64-pt Units
Approx. 179 for 96-pt Units

222

150

Section 3-6

Basic I/O Units

3-6-5

C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units
C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units are classified as Basic I/O Units.

Models
Name

Specifications

DC Input Unit

24 V DC, input current:
4.1 mA typical, 32 inputs
24 V DC, input current:
6 mA typical, 32 inputs
12 V DC, 64 inputs
24 V DC, input current:
4.1 mA typical, 64 inputs
24 V DC, input current:
6 mA typical, 64 inputs
Transistor Output Unit 16 mA at 4.5 V to 100 mA
at 26.4 V, 32 outputs
16 mA at 4.5 V to 100 mA
at 26.4 V, 64 outputs
24 V DC, 0.5 A, sourcing,
32 inputs

Note

Model

C200H-ID216

Appearance/
dimensions
reference No.
1

C200H-ID218

C200H-ID111
C200H-ID217

2
2

C200H-ID219

C200H-OD218

C200H-OD219

C200H-OD21B 1

1. C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units cannot be mounted to SYSMAC
BUS Slave Racks.
2. Immediate refreshing (!) is not possible for C200H Group-2 High-density
I/O Units, but refreshing using IORF (097) is possible for these Units.

Components and Switch Settings
Unit mounting hooks
Hooked onto Back
plane to mount Unit.

Model label

I/O indicators

I/O No. setting switch

I/O No. setting switch
(Cannot be used with
the CS-series)

Indicator selector switch
(Select whether the I/O
indicator is CN1 or CN2.)

(Cannot be used with
the CS-series)

I/O wiring connector

1. Units with One 40-pin Connector

40-pin I/O wiring
connector × 2

2. Units with Two 40-pin Connectors

Note The I/O number setting switch on the front panel of C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units is not used for the CS Series, i.e., the I/O number setting will not
affect allocations. Words are allocated to the Units according to their position
on the Rack in the same way as for Basic I/O Units.

223

Section 3-6

Basic I/O Units
Units with One 40-pin Connector
32-point Unit
C200H-ID216
C200H-ID218

32-point Unit
C200H-OD218
F (fuse burnt out)
indicator

Units with Two 40-pin Connectors
64-point Unit
C200H-ID111
C200H-ID217
C200H-ID219

64-point Unit
F (fuse burnt out)
indicator

C200H-OD219

Dimensions
1. Units with 40-pin
Connector

2. Units with Two 40-pin
Connectors

Backplane

Unit Dimensions with Backplane and Connector

(See note .)
Approx. 143 (See note .)

Note The height of the Unit including the Backplane is 5 mm greater on the CPU
Backplane and CS-series Expansion Backplane (123 and 148 mm).

224

Section 3-7

C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)

3-7

C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)
C200H High-density I/O Units are classified as C200H Special I/O Units.

Models
Name
TTL Input Unit
DC Input Unit
TTL Output Unit
Transistor Output Unit
TTL I/O Unit
DC Input/Transistor
Output Unit

Specifications
5 V DC, 32 inputs
24 V DC, 32 inputs
5 V DC, 32 outputs
24 V DC, 32 outputs
5 V DC, 16 inputs/16 outputs
12 V DC, 16 inputs/16 outputs
24 V DC, 16 inputs/16 outputs

Model
C200H-ID501
C200H-ID215
C200H-OD501
C200H-OD215
C200H-MD501
C200H-MD115
C200H-MD215

Dynamic I/O mode
----128 outputs
128 outputs
128 inputs
128 inputs
128 inputs

Static I/O mode
High-speed inputs
High-speed inputs
----High-speed inputs
High-speed inputs
High-speed inputs

Note Immediate refreshing (!) is not possible for C200H High-density I/O Units, but
refreshing using IORF (097) is possible.

Components and Switch Settings
Unit lock notch

Model label
I/O indicators

24-pin I/O wiring
connectors × 2

Note

Unit number setting switch
Set the unit number between 0 and
9. Ten words are allocated per Unit
in the Special I/O Unit Area (words
2000 to 2959) according to the unit
number setting.

1. Be sure to turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before setting the unit
number.
2. Set the unit number using a flat-blade screwdriver.
3. Do not stop in the middle of setting the value (between 0 and 9) or the setting will not be complete.
4. Make sure that the groove in the unit number setting switch does not become damaged.

225

Section 3-7

C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)
Back of Unit
DIP switch
123456

Model

RUN mode

High-speed
inputs

SW1

SW2

C200H-ID501

C200H-ID215

ON
Highspeed
input
function
enabled
----Highspeed
input
function
enabled
32 static --128
dynamic outputs
outputs
---

OFF
---

OFF
Normal
input

High-speed input
Normal input
minimum
response time
response pulse
SW3
SW4
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
4 ms
1 ms
-----

Dynamic data
output logic
SW5
ON
15 ms
max.

OFF
2.5 ms
max.

Normal
input

4 ms

1 ms

---

15 ms
max.

2.5 ms
max.

---

Positive
logic
output
(See
note.)

C200H-OD215

128
32 static --dynamic outputs
outputs

---

Positive
logic
output
(See
note.)

C200H-MD501

128
16 static
dynamic inputs,
inputs
16 static
outputs

Normal
input

4 ms

1 ms

15 ms
max.

2.5 ms
max.

---

Negative
logic
output
(See
note.)
Negative
logic
output
(See
note.)
---

C200H-MD115

128
16 static
dynamic inputs,
inputs
16 static
outputs

Normal
input

4 ms

1 ms

15 ms
max.

2.5 ms
max.

---

C200H-MD215

128
16 static
dynamic inputs,
inputs
16 static
outputs

Normal
input

4 ms

1 ms

15 ms
max.

2.5 ms
max.

---

C200H-OD501

Highspeed
input
function
enabled
Highspeed
input
function
enabled
Highspeed
input
function
enabled

Note Negative and positive logic output are only available with 128-point dynamic
output mode.
C200H High-density I/O Units are classified as C200H Special I/O Units and
have the following functions.

226

Section 3-7

C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)
Dynamic I/O Mode

The High-density I/O Units (other than the C200H-ID501 and C200H-ID215)
can provide high-density I/O rather than the normal output (static output
mode) and I/O (static I/O mode). High-density I/O (dynamic output and
dynamic input modes: 128 points) is achieved by combining the I/O signals
with a strobe signal output. The High-density I/O Units require less wiring, use
a numeric display device in dynamic output mode with large number capacity,
and use keyboard switches in dynamic input mode.
High-speed Inputs
The High-density I/O Units (other than the C200H-OD501 and C200HOD502) also provide high-speed inputs. High-speed inputs are possible with 8
input points. This function enables accurate reading of short pulse inputs from
photomicroswitches and other devices.

Dynamic I/O Mode
Dynamic Output Mode
C200H-OD501/OD215
Data output

Numeric display

: :

Strobe output
: :

Data output

Numeric display

: :

Strobe output
: :

By combining data signals (DATA 0 to 7 and DATA 8 to 15) with strobe signals
(STB 0 to 7/ STB 8 to 15, 128 bits (8 words) can be output to a numerical display device as shown in the following diagram.

227

Section 3-7

C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)
Word n

Word n

Word n + 1

Word n + 3

Rightmost
byte

Leftmost
byte

Rightmost
byte

Leftmost
byte

Data output
DATA 0 to 7
Strobe output
STB 0
STB 1

STB 2
to
STB 7
DATA 8 to 15 can also be output as STB 8 to 15 at the same time.

Dynamic Input Mode
C200H-MD501/MD115/MD215

Strobe
output

Keyboard switch,
thumbwheel
switch, etc.

Data input

Strobe
output

Keyboard switch,
thumbwheel
switch, etc.

Data input

Using strobe signals STB 0 to 7 as outputs, data signals DATA 0 to 7 as
inputs, strobe signals STB 8 to 15 as outputs, and data signals DATA 8 to 15
as inputs, 128 bits (8 words) can be input from strobe input keyboard switches
or thumbwheel switches as shown in the following diagram.

228

Section 3-7

C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)
Word n
Rightmost
bytes

Word n
Leftmost
bytes

Word n + 1 Word n + 3
Rightmost Leftmost
bytes
bytes

Data input
DATA 0 to 7
Strobe output
STB 0
STB 1

STB 2
to
STB 7
DATA 8 to 15 can also be output as STB 8 to 15 at the same time.

High-speed Inputs
The inputs 8 to 15 from the CN2 connector can be used for pulse input. The
minimum pulse width is 1 ms or 4 ms (selectable).
A High-density I/O Unit will recognize a pulse input when the pulse input
occurs (i.e., the inputs turns ON and then OFF again), and the pulse width is
greater than 1 ms or 4 ms (according to the selected minimum pulse width).
The data is refreshed in the Special I/O Unit Area (word n + 1, bits 8 to 15) of
I/O memory during the CPU Unit’s I/O refresh period.
High-density I/O Unit

CPU Unit

I/O refresh
1 ms or 4 ms

High-speed
input buffer

The High-density I/O Unit data in the high-speed input buffer can also be
refreshed during program execution by executing the IORF(097) instruction
for the desired Special I/O Unit.
High-density I/O Unit

CPU Unit

I/O refresh
1 ms or 4 ms

High-speed
input buffer

+
+

229

Section 3-7

C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)

Backplane

Dimensions

Fujitsu connection
cable

123

Backplane

Approx. 168

G79-@C Connecting Cable

123
150

230

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units

3-8
3-8-1

B7A Interface Units
CS-series B7A Interface Units (CS-series Basic I/O Units)

Overview
The B7A is a 1:1 transmission path that does not require a master. A total of
16 signals are transmitted using a two-conductor or three-conductor VCTF
cable (maximum length: 500 m). The CS1W-B7A@@ B7A Interface Unit is a
CS-series Basic I/O Unit that exchanges up to 64 points of I/O data mainly
with B7A Link Terminals using a B7A transmission path.
The B7A Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal can be used in the same way
as a standard Basic I/O Unit and I/O Terminal without any need to worry about
communications. This characteristic reduces the wiring when using more than
one relatively remote sensor or actuator.

System Configuration
B7 Interface Unit
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMN

SYSMAC CS1G

PROGRAMABLE CONTROLLER
CPU42

OPEN

MCPWR

BUSY

OPEN

PERIPHERAL

CPU
Unit
PORT (RS-232C)

B7A Input Link Terminal
Transmission
distance:
500 m max.

Sensors
Switches
B7A Output Link Terminal

Lamps or other output devices

231

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units
Models
B7A Interface Unit
CS1W-B7A12

CS1W-B7A02

CS1W-B7A21

CS1W-B7A22

Specifications

I/O words allocated
Connectable B7A Link Terminals
to Unit
(See note 1.)
32 inputs
2 input words
Inputs: Two 16-point Input Terminals, one
32-point Input Terminal, or one 16-point Input
(two B7A ports)
Terminal
32 outputs
2 output words
Outputs: Two 16-point Output Terminals or
one 32-point Output Terminal or one 16-point
(two B7A ports)
Output Terminal
16 inputs, 16 outputs 1 input word and
Inputs: One 16-point Input Terminal
1 output word
Outputs: One 16-point Output Terminal
(two B7A ports)
or
One Mixed I/O Terminal
(16 inputs/16 outputs)
32 inputs, 32 outputs 2 input words and
Inputs: Two 16-point Input Terminals or one
2 output words
32-point Input Terminal
(four B7A ports)
Outputs: Two 16-point Output Terminals or
one 32-point Output Terminal
or
Two Mixed I/O Terminals
(16 inputs/16 outputs)

Note

1. A 10-point B7A Link Terminal cannot be connected to a B7A Interface Unit.
B7A Interface Units can be connected together.
2. Wireless transmissions are possible if B7AP Power Couplers are used on
a B7A transmission path, reducing the wiring required for moving objects
and rotating objects.

232

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units
B7A Communications Specifications
Item
Transmission
method
Transmission delay
(communications
delay on
transmission path)
Transmission points

External power
supply voltage
(See note 3.)
External supply
current
(See note 4.)

Minimum input time
(See note 5.)
Transmission
distance

Specifications
One-way time-sharing multiplex transmissions
High-speed 3 ms typical, 5 ms max.
Standard
19.2 ms typical, 31 ms max.

CS1W-B7A12 32 inputs (2 ports)
CS1W-B7A02 32 outputs (2 ports)
CS1W-B7A21 16 inputs (1 port), 16 outputs (1 port)
CS1W-B7A22 32 inputs (2 ports), 32 outputs (2 ports)
12 to 24 V DC (allowable voltage range: 10.8 to 26.4 V)

CS1W-B7A12 20 mA min.
CS1W-B7A02 60 mA min.
CS1W-B7A21 30 mA min.
CS1W-B7A22 60 mA min.
High-speed 16 ms
Standard
2.4 ms
High-speed Power supply on one side
(common power supply)
Power supply on both sides
(separate power supplies)
Standard

Cables

Power supply on one side
(common power supply)
Power supply on both sides
(separate power supplies)

10 m max.
50 m max. (with shielded cable)
10 m max.
100 m max. (with shielded cable)
100 m max.
500 m max.

VCTF, 0.75 mm2, 3 conductors (power supply on one side (common power supply))
VCTF, 0.75 mm2, 2 conductors (power supply on both sides (separate power supplies))
Shielded cable, 0.75 mm2, 3 conductors (power supply on one side (common power supply))
Shielded cable, 0.75 mm2, 2 conductors (power supply on both sides (separate power supplies))

Note

1. When separate power supplies are used, the B7A Interface Unit and B7A
Link Terminal are supplied by separate external power supplies.
2. When a common power supply is used, the B7A Interface Unit and B7A
Link Terminal are supplied by the same external power supply.
3. Use a SELV power supply with overcurrent protection. A SELV power supply refers to a power supply with double or reinforced insulation between
input and output and with an output voltage of 30 V rms with a 42.4-V peak
or an output voltage of 60 VDC max. We recommend OMRON S8@@-series Power Supply Units for the external power supplies.
4. The capacity of the external supply current does not include the capacity
required by the B7A Link Terminal.
5. The minimum input time is the minimum time required by the B7A Interface
Unit to read the input signals from the CPU Unit.

233

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units
Common Specifications
Item
Applicable PLCs
Unit classification
Transmission delay

Specifications
CS Series
CS-series Basic I/O Unit
Standard (19.2 ms typical) or high-speed (3 ms typical),
switchable
(Switchable by using the setting switch on the front panel.
Settings are read when power is turned ON or Unit is
restarted.)
Factory setting: Standard (19.2 ms typical)
Note A transmission error will occur if B7A Link Terminals
with different transmission delay times are connected to each other.
Hold status or reset inputs (loads off) (switch settable)

Transmission error
input status processing
Front panel connection Terminal block
Current consumption
5 V DC: 90 mA max. (supplied from Power Supply Unit)
Weight
CS1W-B7A12: 230 g max.
CS1W-B7A02: 230 g max.
CS1W-B7A21: 240 g max.
CS1W-B7A22: 240 g max.

I/O Memory Allocations
The B7A Interface Unit is a Basic I/O Unit. Each Unit is allocated two or four
words in the I/O Area (which starts at CIO 0000). The words are allocated
according to the mounting position of the Unit as shown in the following table.
Port

1
2
3
4

Input/output
CS1WB7A12
Input
Input
-----

CS1WB7A02
Output
Output
-----

CS1WB7A21
Output
Input
-----

CS1WB7A22
Output
Output
Input
Input

Allocated word
(n: First word
allocated to Unit)
Word n
Word n+1
Word n+2
Word n+3

Transmission Error Processing
Input Ports
The B7A Interface Unit detects transmission errors at the input ports. When a
transmission error is detected at an input port, the corresponding indicator
and Transmission Error Flag turn ON.
■

Indicators
When a transmission occurs at an input port, indicators ERR1 to ERR2 on the
front panel will turn ON according to the port where the error occurred.
Port where
error
occurred
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4

234

CS1W-B7A12
ERR1
ERR2
-----

LED error indicators
CS1W-B7A02 CS1W-B7A21
---------

--ERR1
-----

CS1W-B7A22
----ERR1
ERR2

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units
■

Transmission Error Flag
The corresponding Transmission Error Flag in the first word allocated to the
Unit in the CPU Unit's Auxiliary Area will turn ON for each input port, as
shown in the following table. Words A050 to A080 are allocated to Basic I/O
Unit as information words.
Example: Rack 0, Slot 0
Port where
error
occurred
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4

CS1W-B7A12
A05000
A05001
-----

Transmission Error Flag
CS1W-B7A02 CS1W-B7A21
---------

--A05000
-----

CS1W-B7A22
----A05000
A05001

Example: Rack 0, Slot 1
Port where
error
occurred
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
■

CS1W-B7A12
A05008
A05009
-----

Transmission Error Flag
CS1W-B7A02 CS1W-B7A21
---------

--A05008
-----

CS1W-B7A22
----A05008
A05009

Transmission Error Input Status Processing
If an error occurs at an input port, the Unit will hold the status of the input bit in
the CPU Unit's I/O memory from immediately before the transmission error
occurred. When transmission returns to normal, the signals that have been
normally received will be input to the input bit.

Output Ports
The B7A Interface Unit does not detect transmission errors at output ports.
Detect output port transmission errors at the B7A Link Terminal that is connected to the B7A Interface Unit.

235

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units
Parts and Names

Indicators

Connection terminals

Indicators
■

CS1W-B7A12

Display
Name
ERROR1 Port 1 transmission error

Color
Red

Status
ON

ERROR2 Port 2 transmission error

Red

OFF
ON

OFF
3 ms

Transmission
delay setting

Orange

ON
OFF

LOAD
OFF

15IN +
ERR

Transmission
Orange
error input
status processing setting

Input mode
setting

Orange

OFF

236

Condition
A transmission error has
occurred at port 1 of the B7A
Unit.
The Unit is operating normally.
A transmission error has
occurred at port 2 of the B7A
Unit.
The Unit is operating normally.
The high-speed transmission
delay (3 ms) is set.
The standard transmission
delay (19.2 ms) is set.
Transmission error input status
processing is set to reset status
(loads OFF).
Transmission error input status
processing is set to hold status.
The input mode is set to 15
inputs + error input.
The input mode is set to 16
inputs.

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units
■

CS1W-B7A02

Display
3 ms

Name
Transmission
delay setting

Color
Orange

Status
ON
OFF

■

CS1W-B7A21

Display
Name
ERROR Port 1 transmission error

Color
Red

Status
ON

3 ms

Orange

OFF
ON

Transmission
delay setting

OFF
LOAD
OFF

15IN +
ERR

Transmission
error input status processing
setting

Orange

Input mode set- Orange
ting

OFF
ON
OFF

■

Condition
The high-speed transmission
delay (3 ms) is set.
The standard transmission
delay (19.2 ms) is set.

Condition
A transmission error has
occurred at port 1 of the B7A
Unit.
The Unit is operating normally.
The high-speed transmission
delay (3 ms) is set.
The standard transmission
delay (19.2 ms) is set.
Transmission error input status
processing is set to reset status
(loads OFF).
Transmission error input status
processing is set to hold status.
The input mode is set to 15
inputs + error input.
The input mode is set to 16
inputs.

CS1W-B7A22

237

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units

Display
Name
ERROR1 Port 1 transmission error

Color
Red

Status
ON

ERROR2 Port 2 transmission error

Red

OFF
ON

Orange

OFF
ON

3 ms

Transmission
delay setting

OFF
LOAD
OFF

Transmission
error input status processing
setting

15IN +
ERR

Orange

Input mode set- Orange
ting

OFF
ON
OFF

Function Setting Switch

Set functionality using the DIP switch on the back of the Unit.

ON
OFF

■

CS1W-B7A12
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6

Name
Transmission delay
Transmission error process
Input mode
ERROR 1 indicator enable
ERROR 2 indicator enable
Not used. (Leave OFF.)

OFF
Standard (19.2 ms)
Hold status
16 inputs
Disabled
Disabled
NA

ON
High-speed (3 ms)
Reset Inputs
15 inputs + error input
Enabled
Enabled
NA

Defaults: Pins 4 and 5 are turned ON and all other pins are turned OFF.
■

CS1W-B7A02
Pin
Name
1
Transmission delay
2 to 6 Not used. (Leave OFF.)

Defaults: All pins are turned OFF

238

OFF
Standard (19.2 ms)
NA

ON
High-speed (3 ms)
NA

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units
■

CS1W-B7A21
Pin
1
2
3
5
4, 6

Name
Transmission delay
Transmission error process
Input mode
ERROR indicator enable
Not used. (Leave OFF.)

OFF
Standard (19.2 ms)
Hold status
16 inputs
Disabled
NA

ON
High-speed (3 ms)
Reset Inputs
15 inputs + error input
Enabled
NA

Defaults: Pin 5 is turned ON and all other pins are turned OFF
■

CS1W-B7A22
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6

Name
Transmission delay
Transmission error process
Input mode
ERROR 1 indicator enable
ERROR 2 indicator enable
Not used. (Leave OFF.)

OFF
Standard (19.2 ms)
Hold status
16 inputs
Disabled
Disabled
NA

ON
High-speed (3 ms)
Reset Inputs
15 inputs + error input
Enabled
Enabled
NA

Defaults: Pins 4 and 5 are turned ON and all other pins are turned OFF
Terminal Names and
Allocations
■

Terminal
B0

Name
SIG IN1

A1
B1

SIG IN2

A5
B5

−

IN1

IN2

A0, A2 to A4, A6 NC
to A8, B2, B3,
B6 to B8
A9
−V
B9
+V

CS1W-B7A12

Function
Word
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Ter- n
minal.
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input
B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Ter- n+1
minal.
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input
B7A Link Terminal.
Not used.
---

Appearance

SIG IN1
IN1

SIG IN2
IN2

Connect to – terminal on external power supply.
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.

239

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units
■

CS1W-B7A02

Terminal

Name
Function
Word
SIG OUT1 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link
n
Terminal.
A1
+V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
B1
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output
− OUT1
B7A Link Terminal.
B4
SIG OUT2 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link
n+1
Terminal.
A5
+V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
B5
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output
− OUT2
B7A Link Terminal.
A0, A2 to A4, A6 NC
Not used.
--to A8, B2, B3,
B6 to B8
A9
−V
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.
B9
+V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.

Appearance

■

Terminal

SIG OUT1
OUT1

SIG OUT2
OUT2

CS1W-B7A21

Name
Function
Word
SIG OUT1 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link
n
Terminal.
A1
+V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
B1
Connect
to – power supply terminal on Output
OUT1
−
B7A Link Terminal.
B4
SIG IN1
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Ter- n+1
minal.
A5
+V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
B5
Connect
to – power supply terminal on Input
− IN1
B7A Link Terminal.
A0, A2 to A4, A6 NC
Not used.
--to A8, B2, B3,
B6 to B8
A9
−V
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.
B9
+V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.

Appearance

240

SIG OUT
OUT

SIGIN
IN

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units
■

Terminal
B0
A1
B1
B2
A3
B3
B4
A5
B5
B6
A7
B7
A0, A2, A4, A6,
A8, B8
A9
B9

CS1W-B7A22

Name
Function
SIG OUT1 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
+V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output
− OUT1
B7A Link Terminal.
SIG OUT2 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
+V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output
− OUT2
B7A Link Terminal.
SIG IN1
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
+V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A
− IN1
Link Terminal.
SIG IN2
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
+V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A
− IN2
Link Terminal.
NC
Not used.
−V
+V

Word

Appearance

n
SIG OUT1
OUT1

n+1

SIG OUT2
OUT2
SIGIN1
IN1

n+2

SIGIN2
IN2

n+3

---

Connect to – terminal on external power supply.
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.

Preparing and Connecting Cables
Cables
Terminal connector
Recommended wire size
20-pin
AWG22 (0.32 mm2)

• The current capacity of a wire depends on the ambient temperature and
insulation thickness.
Terminal Screws and Crimp Terminals
M3.5 self-rising screws are used for all power supply wiring terminals.
Note Always turn OFF the Unit's power supply and communications power supply
before attaching or removing connectors.
Use the following procedure to prepare and connect the cables.
1) Preparing the Covering
First, use the following procedure to prepare the cable.
1,2,3...

1. Strip approximately 10 mm of the sheath covering the signal lines to match
the crimp terminals. Next, twist together the wires of each signal line firmly.
Approx. 10 mm

241

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units

2. Use vinyl tape or a heat-shrink tube to cover the end of the VCTF cable
sheath, as shown in the following diagram.
Cover with vinyl tape
or heat-shrinking tube.

2) Preparing Cable Signal Lines
Attach the crimp terminals to the cable's signal lines.
1,2,3...

1. Attaching Crimp Terminals
Insert the end of the cable into the terminal and crimp.
6.5 mm max.

7 mm max.

Note Always use the specified crimp tool to attach the crimp terminals. If
a crimp tool is not used, the cable will not be crimped properly, which
may cause the cable to become detached from the terminal.
2. Insulate the stripped end of each signal line with vinyl tape or heat-shrink
tubing.
Wiring
• Wire the Units so that the I/O indicators are not covered by the wiring.
• Do not place the wiring for I/O Units in the same duct or raceway as power
lines. Inductive noise can cause errors in operation or damage.
• Tighten the terminal screws to the torque of 0.8 N.m.

M3.5
Self-rising screw
A
20-pin 18 mm

• Power Supply on One Side (Common Power Supply)
V1
SIG1
G1

• Power Supply on Both Sides (Separate Power Supplies)
SIG1
G1

242

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units
Wiring Methods
Note

1. Confirm that terminals are connected correctly. If connections are incorrect, the internal components of the B7A Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal may be damaged.
2. Route the signal lines in separate ducts both inside and outside the control
panel to isolate them from power lines.
3. Connect cables at a distance that is within the range given in the specifications.
4. Always turn OFF the power to the CPU Unit and all other Units before connecting the communications cables.
5. Always lay communications cables within ducts.

Standard Mode
■

Common Power Supply

B7A Interface Unit

SIG

Transmission distance: 100 m max.

B7A Link Terminal

SIG

B7A Link Terminal
Transmission cable: VCTF, 0.75 mm2 min.
12 to 24 VDC

■

Separate Power Supplies

B7A Interface Unit

SIG

12 to 24 VDC

Transmission distance: 500 m max.

B7A Link Terminal

SIG
12 to 24 VDC
B7A Link Terminal

Transmission cable: VCTF, 0.75 mm2 max.
12 to 24 VDC

High-speed Mode
Note If shielded cable is not used, the maximum transmission distance is 10 m
regardless of whether a common or separate power supplies are used. (Use
VCTF cable of 0.75 mm2 or higher.)

243

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units
■

Common Power Supply

B7A Interface Unit

SIG

Transmission distance: 50 m max.

B7A Link Terminal

Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 max.

SIG

Ground

B7A Link Terminal

Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 max.
12 to 24 VDC

■

Ground

Separate Power Supplies

B7A Interface Unit

SIG

12 to 24 VDC
Transmission distance: 100 m max.

B7A Link Terminal

Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 max.
SIG

Ground
12 to 24 VDC

B7A Link Terminal

Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 max.

12 to 24 VDC

Ground

Dimensions (Unit: mm)

Backplane

130

124
147

244

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units

3-8-2

C200H Basic B7A Interface Units (C200H Basic I/O Units)
The Basic B7A Interface Unit used with the B7A Link Terminal allows the
transmission and reception of 16-point I/O data over two wires.
The following Basic B7A Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal models are
available.
B7A Interface Unit
(C200H Basic I/O Unit)
16-point input: C200H-B7AI1

B7A Link Terminals

16-point output: C200H-B7AO1

B7A-T6@1 (Screw terminal models)
B7A-T6D2 (Modular models)
B7A-R6@@1 (Screw terminal models)
B7A-R6A52 (Modular models)

Note If the B7A Interface Unit is mounted to a Rack with a C200HW-PD024 24-V
DC Power Supply Unit, supply 24 V DC from an independent power supply to
the B7A Interface Unit or use a transformer to separate the power supply line
to the B7A Interface Unit from the power supply lines to the CPU Unit and I/O
Power Supply Unit.

I/O indicator
ERR indicator

Connection terminals
Connection terminals for the B7A Link Terminal:
Connect this terminal to the SIG terminal of the
B7A Link Terminal.
Connect this terminal to the negative power terminal of the B7A Link Terminal.
12 to 24 VDC

Supply 12 to 24 VDC.

I/O Indicator

Indicates the ON or OFF status of input from the B7A Link Terminal or the ON
and OFF status of output to the B7A Link Terminal.

ERR Indicator

Incorporated by the B7AI1 and lit when the B7AI1’s data transmission or
reception is abnormal.

Connection Terminals

SIG:
V–:

Connects to the SIG terminal of the B7A Link Terminal.
Connects to the negative power terminal of the B7A Link Terminal.

!Caution If the terminals are not connected correctly, the internal circuitry of the B7A
Link Terminal will be damaged.
Note

1. The transmission cable must be a VCTF cable with a thickness of
0.75 mm2 minimum.
2. Do not wire power lines or high-tension lines along with the transmission
cable in the same conduit.

245

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units
Input Mode Selector

The B7AI1 incorporates an input mode selector on the back panel of the Unit,
with which the following modes can be set.

Input mode
Function

Switch setting
Bit no. allocation 00 to 14
15
Status of input indicator lamp 15
Status of the ERR indicator

15 points + 1 error
Fifteen-point input from the B7A Link Terminal is effective. Bit 15 is used as transmission error bit.
Upper side
Input 00 to input 14
Transmission error bit
Not used

16 points
Sixteen-point input from the B7A Link Terminal is effective.

Lower side
Input 00 to input 14
Input 15
Lit when input 15 is ON. Not lit when input
15 is OFF.
Lit when there is a transmission error and OFF during normal transmission

The ERR indicator is lit when an error occurs. If the error is corrected, the
ERR indicator is OFF at the next transmission cycle.
When there is a transmission error, the B7A Link Terminal will hold the data
just before the occurrence of the transmission error. If there is a transmission
error because the B7A Link Terminal is turned off, however, data 0 is transmitted in the first transmission cycle when the B7A Link Terminal is turned on
again.
Transmission errors between the C200H-B7AO1 and B7A Link Terminal are
detected by the B7A Link Terminal only. Check the ERR indicator and error bit
for any error.

Performance Specifications
Item
I/O points
Transmission distance

Transmission delay
Minimum input time (See note 1.)
Internal current consumption
External power supply (See note 2.)
Weight

Note

C200H-B7AI1
C200H-B7AO1
16 points or 15 points and 1 error input 16 output points
500 m max. if power is supplied to the Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal separately.
100 m max. if power is supplied to the Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal from
a single power supply. (24 V DC±10%)
Typ. 19.2 ms, 31 ms max.
–––
16 ms
5 V DC, 100 mA max.
12 to 24 V DC ±10%, 10 mA min.
12 to 24 V DC ±10%, 30 mA min.
200 g max.

1. The minimum input time refers to the minimum time required for reading
the input signals from the CPU Unit. The ON/OFF width of the signal transmitted from the CPU Unit to the Output Relay of the B7A Interface Unit
should be set to a value larger than the minimum input time.
2. The value of the external power supply does not include the value required
by the B7A Link Terminal.

246

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units

3-8-3

B7A Interface Units (C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units)

Features and System Configuration
Group-2 B7A Interface Unit

CPU
Unit

Input B7A Link Terminal

Sensor
Switch

Transmission
distance: 500 m
max.

Output B7A Link Terminal

Lamps and other loads

A B7A Interface Unit (C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Unit) used with two or
four B7A Link Terminals allows the transmission and reception of 32-point or
64-point I/O data over two-conductor cables.
A B7A Interface Unit (C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Unit) can be mounted
to a CPU Rack or an Expansion I/O Rack. They cannot be mounted to Slave
Racks.
I/O words are allocated in the same way as for C200H Basic I/O Units, i.e.,
according to the position on the Rack. Units with 32 I/O points are allocated
two words; Units with 64 I/O points are allocated four words.
Refer to the B7A Link Terminals Datasheet for more information on B7A Link
Terminals.

Models
The following B7A Interface Units (C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units) are
available.
B7A Interface Unit
C200H-B7A12
C200H-B7A02
C200H-B7A21
C200H-B7A22

Inputs
32 points
None
16 points
32 points

Outputs
None
32 points
16 points
32points

247

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units

Comparison between B7A Interface Units Classified as Basic I/O Units and C200H
Group-2 High-density I/O Units
Type

C200H
Basic I/O
Units
C200H
Group 2
High-density I/O
Units

Models

Word allocations

C200H-B7AI1 Same as I/O Units (in order
C200H-B7AO1 mounted).
C200H-B7A12
C200H-B7A02
C200H-B7A21
C200H-B7A22

Same as I/O Units (in order
mounted).

Note

Connectable B7A Link Terminals
Transmission Transmission
Points
delay
errors
Standard types Input status
16-point Termionly (19.2 ms) held automati- nals only (10cally
point, 32-point,
Switch setting and mixed I/O TerStandard
(19.2 ms) and to hold or reset minals cannot be
connected.
Input status.
high-speed
(3 ms) types
(set via switch)

1. With CS-series PLCs, I/O is allocated to B7A Interface Units (C200H
Group-2 High-density I/O Units) just like other Basic I/O Units (allocating
outputs first and then inputs for I/O Units). The unit number setting on the
front panel of the B7A Interface Unit does not affect I/O allocations.
Name
32-point Input Unit
32-point Output Unit
16-point Input/
16-point Output Unit
32-point Input/32point Output Unit

Model
Words per Unit
C200H-B7A12 2
C200H-B7A02
C200H-B7A21
C200H-B7A22 4

Order of allocation
2 input words
2 output words
1 output word then 1
input word
2 output words then 2
input words

2. B7A Link Terminals with 10 points or those with 8 input and 8 output points
cannot be connected to the B7A Interface Units. B7A Link Terminals with
16 points, two circuits of 16 points each (32 points total) or 16 points of
mixed I/O can be connected.

Connectable B7A Link Terminals
Only 16-point B7A Link Terminals can be connected to a B7A Interface Unit.
These are listed in the following tables.
Input Terminals
Type
Screw terminals

Modular
PLC connectors

Model
B7A-T6@1
B7AS-T6@1
B7A-T6@6
B7AS-T6@6
B7A-T6D2
B7A-T6D7
B7A-T@E3
B7A-T@E8

Transmission delay
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)

Output Terminals
Type
Screw terminals

Modular
PLC connectors

248

Model
B7A-R6@@1
B7AS-R6@@1
B7A-R6@@6
B7AS-R6@@6
B7A-R6A52
B7A-R6A57
B7A-R@A@3
B7A-R@A@8

Transmission delay
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units
Note

1. Do not connect Terminals with different transmission delays to the same
Interface Unit. Doing so will cause a transmission error.
2. Only 16-point or 32-point B7A Link Terminals can be connected to B7A Interface Units. Mixed I/O B7A Link Terminals and 10-point B7A Link Terminals cannot be connected.

Parts and Names (C200H-B7A22 shown below)
Front

I/O number switch
Not used for CS PLCs.
Status indicators
The indicators depend on the model of B7A Interface Unit.

Connection terminals
Connect to the SIG terminal of the B7A Link Terminal
and to the negative power terminal of the B7A Link
Terminal. The actual use of these terminals depends
on the B7A Interface Unit.

External Power Supply Terminals
Supply 12 to 24 VDC.

12
VDC
12toto2424
VDC

Back

DIP switch
Used to set the transmission delay,
transmission error processing mode, input mode, and ERROR indicator operation.

249

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units
Indicator Operation

The indicators depend on the model of B7A Interface Unit, as shown below.

Name
Input transmission error

Color
Red

Transmission
delay setting

Orange

LOAD OFF

Transmission
error process

Orange

15IN+ERR

Input mode
setting

Orange

ERROR 1
ERROR 2
ERROR
3ms

Function
Lights when an error occurs in transmissions from an Input B7A Link Terminal.
For the B7A12/22, ERROR 1 is for the first word allocated to the B7A Interface
Unit; ERROR 2 is for the second word.
Lit when the transmission delay is set to the high-speed setting (3 ms).
Not lit when the transmission delay is set to the standard setting (19.2 ms).
Lit when the processing for transmission errors is set to reset input status.
Not lit when the processing for transmission errors is set to hold input status.
Lit when the input mode is set to use 15 inputs and 1 error input.
Not lit when the input mode is set to use 16 inputs.

Note With CS-series PLCs, I/O is allocated to Group-2 B7A Interface Units just like
other Basic I/O Units. The unit number setting on the front panel of the Group2 B7A Interface Unit is not used and does not affect I/O allocations.

DIP Switch Settings
Set the DIP switch as described before for the various models of B7A Interface Units.
C200H-B7A22/12
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6

Function
Transmission delay
Transmission error process
Input mode
ERROR 1 indicator enable
ERROR 2 indicator enable
Not used.

OFF
Standard (19.2 ms)
Hold status
16 inputs
Disabled
Disabled
NA

ON
High-speed (3 ms)
Reset Inputs
15 inputs + error input
Enabled
Enabled
NA

Factory settings: Pins 4 and 5 ON, others OFF.
C200H-B7A21
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6

Function
Transmission delay
Transmission error process
Input mode
ERROR indicator enable
Not used.
Not used.

OFF
Standard (19.2 ms)
Hold status
16 inputs
Disabled
NA
NA

Factory settings: Pin 5 ON, others OFF.

250

ON
High-speed (3 ms)
Reset Inputs
15 inputs + error input
Enabled
NA
NA

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units
C200H-B7A02
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6

Function
Transmission delay
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.

OFF
Standard (19.2 ms)
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA

ON
High-speed (3 ms)
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA

Factory settings: All pins OFF.
Transmission Delay

Pin 1 is used to set the transmission delay. The same delay is used for all
words allocated to the Unit.
Set the transmission delay to match that of the B7A Link Terminal. A transmission error will occur if the same transmission delay is not set.
The “3ms” indicator will be lit whenever the high-speed (3 ms) transmission
delay is set.

Transmission Error
Process

Pin 2 is used to turned ON to specify resetting input status when transmission
errors occur. If pin 2 is turned OFF, input status will be held when transmission
errors occur.
The LOAD OFF indicator will be lit whenever pin 2 is turned ON.

Input Mode

Pin 3 is turned ON to specify use of only 15 inputs and the use of bit 15 as a
Transmission Error Flag. If pin 3 is OFF, 16 normal inputs can be used.
The “15IN+ERR” indicator will be lit whenever pin 3 is turned ON.

ERROR Indicators

Pin 4 or pins 4 and 5 are turned ON to enable the ERROR, ERROR 1, and/or
ERROR 2 indicators. These indicators will not light even if a transmission
error occurs if the corresponding pin is turned OFF.

Transmission Error Precautions
Startup

The Transmission Error Flag for the B7A Interface Unit will be OFF when
power is turned on to the CS-series PLCs. If normal transmissions with the
B7A Link Terminal are not possible within about 10 ms, the Transmission Error
Flag (bit 15) will turn ON (i.e., if its operation is enabled by the input mode setting).
All input bits will remain OFF until normal transmissions are achieved.

Inputs

When a transmission error occurs, input status will be either held or all inputs
will be reset according to the setting for the transmission error process, and
the Transmission Error Flag (bit 15) will turn ON (i.e., if its operation is enabled
by the input mode setting). The Transmission Error Flag will go OFF and the
input status will return to normal when normal transmissions are achieved
again.

Outputs

Transmission errors for Output B7A Link Terminals are not detected at the
B7A Interface Unit and must be confirmed using the error indicators or error
outputs on the Link Terminal.

Wiring
Terminal Names and
Allocations

The use of the terminals depends on the model of the B7A Interface Unit. “m”
indicates the first word allocated to the Unit.

251

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units
C200H-B7A22
Terminal
Name
B0
SIG OUT1
B1
– OUT1
B2
B3

SIG OUT2
– OUT2

B4
B5

SIG IN1
– IN1

B6
B7

SIG IN2
– IN2

B8
A0 to A7
B9
A8

Function
Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Not used.

+V
–V

Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.

Word
m

m+1

m+2

m+3

---

C200H-B7A21
Terminal
Name
B0
SIG OUT1
B1
– OUT1
B2, B3
B4
B5

NC
SIG IN1
– IN1

B6 to B8
A0 to A7
B9
A8

Function
Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
Not used.
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Not used.

+V
–V

Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.

Word
m

--m+1

----

C200H-B7A12
Terminal
Name
B0
SIG IN1
B1
– IN1

252

B2, B3
B4
B5

NC
SIG IN2
– IN2

B6 to B8
A0 to A7
B9
A8

Function
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Not used.
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Not used.

+V
–V

Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.

Word
m

--m+1

---

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units
C200H-B7A02
Terminal
Name
B0
SIG OUT1
B1
– OUT1
B2, B3
B4
B5

NC
SIG OUT2
– OUT2

B6 to B8
A0 to A7
B9
A8

Function
Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
Not used.
Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
Not used.

+V
–V

Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.

Recommended Cables
and Transmission
Distance

Word
m

--m+1

---

The following cables are recommended to connect the B7A Interface Unit to
B7A Link Terminals. The wiring method and transmission distance depend on
the transmission delay and on whether or not a common power supply is
being used for the B7A Link Terminal and the Interface Unit.

Standard Transmission
Delays (19.2 ms): Cap-tire
Cable

High-speed Transmission
Delays (3 ms): Shielded
Cable

Power supply
Common

VCTF, 0.75 mm x 3 conductors

Transmission distance
100 m max.

Separate

VCTF,0.75 mm2 x 2 conductors

500 m max.

Power supply
Common
Separate

Cable
2

Shielded cable, 0.75 mm x 3 conductors
Shielded cable, 0.75 mm2 x 2 conductors

Transmission distance
50 m max.
100 m max.

Terminal Construction
Use hook-type crimp connectors with a line thickness of 0.25 to 1.65 mm2.
The construction of the terminals is shown in the illustration.

Wiring Method
Standard Transmission Delays (19.2 ms)

Common Power Supply

B7A Link Terminal

B7A Interface Unit

Transmission distance: 100 m max.
B7A Link Terminal

Transmission cable: VCTF 0.75 mm2 or higher
12 to 24 V DC

253

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units
Separate Power Supplies

B7A Link Terminal

B7A Interface Unit
12 to 24 V DC
Transmission distance: 500 m max.

B7A Link Terminal
12 to 24 V DC

Transmission cable: VCTF 0.75 mm2 or higher
12 to 24 V DC

High-speed Transmission Delays (3 ms): Shielded Cable
B7A Link Terminal

Common Power Supply
B7A Interface Unit

Transmission distance: 50 m max.

B7A Link Terminal
Shielded cable: 0.75

mm2

or higher

GND

Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 or higher
24 V DC+10%

GND

Separate Power Supplies

B7A Link Terminal

B7A Interface Unit
12 to 24 V DC
Transmission distance: 100 m max.

Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 or higher

B7A Link Terminal

GND
12 to 24 V DC

12 to 24 V DC

Note

Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 or higher
GND

1. We recommend grounding the shielded cable.
2. If shielded cable is not used, the maximum transmission distance is 10 m
regardless of whether a common or separate power supplies are used.
(Use 0.75 mm2 or higher VCTF cable.)
3. To prevent noise on the transmission cable, do not lay it near power cables
or high-voltage lines.

254

Section 3-8

B7A Interface Units
Specifications
Item
I/O points

C200H-B7A12
32 input points or
30 input points and 2
error inputs

Transmission
method
Transmission
distance (see
note 1)
Transmission
delay

One-way distributed multiplex transmission

Minimum input
time (see note
2, 3)
Internal current
consumption
External power
supply (see note
4)
Weight
Dimensions

C200H-B7A02
32 output points

C200H-B7A21
16 output points and
16 input points or
15 input points + 1 error
input

C200H-B7A22
32 output points and
32 input points or
30 input points + 2 error
inputs

0.05 A min.

0.08 A min.

Standard: 500 m max.
High-speed: 100 m max.
Standard: Typ. 19.2 ms, 31 ms max.
High-speed: Typ. 3 ms, 5 ms max.
Standard: 16 ms
High-speed: 2.4 ms
5 V DC, 100 mA max.
12 to 24 V DC ±10%
0.05 A min.

0.06 A min.

300 g max.
35 x 130 x 128 mm (W x H x D)

Note

1. The transmission distance also depends on whether a common or separate power supplies are used.
2. The minimum input time refers to the minimum time required for reading
the input signals from the CPU Unit.
3. The ON/OFF width of the signal transmitted from the CPU Unit to the Output Relay of the B7A Interface Unit should be set to a value larger than the
minimum input time.
4. The capacity of the external power supply does not include the capacity required by the B7A Link Terminal.

Dimensions

130

x
x

x
x
Backplane

x
x
128

145

255

Section 3-9

Analog Timer Units

3-9

Analog Timer Units
Analog Timer Units are classified as Basic I/O Units.
Analog Timer Units have 4 built-in timers (numbers 0 to 3). The timer settings
can be adjusted using the internal and external variable resistors without
requiring a Programming Device. The timer can also be used as a accumulative register to temporarily pause the timer operation using a timer pause
input.

Models
Name
Analog Timer Unit

Specifications
Model
4-point timer
C200H-TM001
Timer settings: 0.1 to 1.0 s, 1.0 to 10 s, 10
to 60 s, 1 to 10 min.

The Analog Timer Unit is classified as a Basic I/O Unit and is allocated one
word in the I/O Area. The word (16 bits) allocated to the Unit is used for the 4
timers’ start input, pause input, time-up output, and data transfer with the CPU
Unit.
Allocated words
1 word (16 bits)

Bits
4 (bits 0 to 3)

Details
Set Bit

4 (bits 4 to 7)

Pause Inputs

4 (bits 8 to 11)

Time-up Outputs

Direction
CPU Unit to Analog Timer Unit
CPU Unit to Analog Timer Unit
Analog Timer Unit
to CPU Unit

The timer settings are adjusted using the internal and external variable resistors. The timer settings can be selected using the DIP switch for each timer
number from one of the following four settings.
0.1 to 1 s, 1 to 10 s, 10 to 60 s, 1 to 10 min

256

Section 3-9

Analog Timer Units
Timer set input

Analog Timer Unit

Timer up output

Setting value

Timer pause input
Resistance
value

Setting value
Resistance
value
Setting value
Resistance
value
Setting value
Resistance
value

Components and Switch Settings
Timer status indicators
The SET indicators in the top row light when the corresponding
timer is operating and the TIME UP indicators in the bottom row
light when the corresponding time is up.

TM001
SET
TIME UP
0 1 2 3
1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4

Internal variable resistor
• Sets variable resistance of specified
timer setting.
• The settings of these resistors are
only effective when the selector
switch on the Unit is ON (set to the
right).
• Numbers 0 to 3 correspond to timers
T0 to T3, respectively.
• Set or adjust times using the flatblade screwdriver supplied with the
Unit. turning the variable resistor
clockwise to increase the time value.

Min.

(0: OFF, 1: ON)
Timer
Pin
8
T0
7
6
T1
5
4
T2
3
2
T3
1

0.1 to 1 s

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1 to 10 s

1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0

10 to 60 s 1 to 10 m

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
1
2

Max.

INT/EXT selector switch
ON
Internal variable resistor
OFF External variable resistor
T0
SW4

Time range setting
Each timer uses 2 pins. The upper 8 pins 8 to 1 are used for
timers T0 to T3 as follows:

T1
SW3

Note

T2
SW2

T3
SW1

External variable resistor connectors
• Cable connector for when timer is set with external volume
instead of internal volume.
• Turn OFF (set to left) the Internal/external volume selector
switch.
• Numbers 0 to 3 correspond to timers T0 to T3.
• The external volume resistance is 20 kΩ.
• Use the following connectors. The C4K-CN223 (2 m) connector
with cable can also be used.

Name

Model

Connector

IL-2S-S3L-(N)

Contact

IL-C2-1-10000

Manufacturer
Japan Aviation
Electronics
Industry, Ltd.

1. When the internal variable resistor is used, make sure that the external
variable resistor connector for the same timer number is open. Otherwise
the internal variable resistor settings will not function properly.
2. Use AWG 28 to AWG 22 lead wires for the external variable resistor connectors.
3. Soldering is not required to wire the external variable resistor connectors.
Wire the connector as shown in the following diagram.

257

Section 3-9

Analog Timer Units
Analog Timer Unit connector

External variable resistor: 20 kΩ
Diameter: 16
Shaft length: 15 mm
Check manufacturer's specifications

Analog Timer Unit Specifications
Item
Oscillation
method
Number of timer
points
Time setting
range

Specifications
CR oscillation
4
Use the DIP switch to set any of the following four ranges.
0.1 to 1 s (typical)
1 to 10 s (typical)
10 to 60 s (typical)
1 to 10 min (typical)
The timing operation can be paused by the user program, so the timers can be used as cumulative registers.
SET and TIME UP

Timer pause
function
Operation
indicators
External
Either the external variable resistor or the internal variable resistor can be selected using the INT/EXT
variable resistor selector switch on the front panel of the Unit. External variable resistors are connected by wiring the
connector. Use 20 kΩ variable resistors
Relay number
One word (16 bits) is allocated in the I/O Area.
allocations
Bit I/O
Word n

Internal current
consumption
Weight

258

00
01
02
03

Output
Output
Output
Output

T0 Set Bit
T1 Set Bit
T2 Set Bit
T3 Set Bit

04
05
06
07

Output
Output
Output
Output

T0 Pause Input Bit
T1 Pause Input Bit
T2 Pause Input Bit
T3 Pause Input Bit

08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15

Input
Input
Input
Input
---------

T0 Completion Flag
T1 Completion Flag
T2 Completion Flag
T3 Completion Flag
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used

60 mA 5 V DC max.
200 g max.

"1" when time is running

0: Operates
1: Stops

"1" when time is up

Section 3-9

Analog Timer Units
Timer Operation

• When the Timer Start Input turns ON, the Timer Set Bits allocated to the
Analog Timer Unit (word n bits 00 to 03) turn ON, and the Analog Timer
will operate. The timer set indicator (SET) on the Analog Timer Unit will
light.
• After the time specified by the internal variable resistor or external variable resistor has elapsed, the Unit’s Completion Output (word n bits 08 to
11) will turn ON, and the Time Up Output will turn ON. The TIME UP indicator on the Analog Timer Unit will turn light.
Timer Start Input
Timer Set Bit
Word n bit 00 to 03

Word n bit 08 to 11
Time Up Output
Completion Flag

Timer Start Input

Time Up Output
Timer setting time

Dimensions

259

Analog Timer Units

260

Section 3-9

SECTION 4
Operating Procedures
This section outlines the steps required to assemble and operate a CS-series PLC system.
4-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

262

4-2

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

264

261

Section 4-1

Introduction

4-1

Introduction
The following procedure outlines the recommended steps to follow when preparing CS-series PLCs for operation.
1,2,3...

1. Installation
Set the DIP switches on the front of each Unit as required.
Mount the CPU Unit, Power Supply Unit, and other Units to the Backplane.
Install the Inner Board and Memory Card if required.
See 5-2 Installation for details.
2. Wiring
Connect the power supply wiring, I/O wiring, and Programming Device
(CX-Programmer or Programming Console). Connect communications
wiring as required.
See 5-3 Wiring for details on power supply and I/O wiring.
3. Initial Settings (Hardware)
Set the DIP switches an Rotary switches on the front of the CPU Unit and
other Units.
See 6-1 DIP Switch Settings for details.
4. Confirming Programming Device Connection
a) Connect a Programming Device (i.e., the CX-Programmer or a Programming Console).
b) Check the power supply wiring and voltage, turn ON the power supply,
and check to be sure the Programming Device will connect to the CPU
Unit.
See 3-3 Programming Devices for details.
5. Registering the I/O Table
Check the Units to verify that they are installed in the right slots. With the
PLC in PROGRAM mode, register the I/O table from the Programming Device (CX-Programmer or Programming Console). (Another method is to
create the I/O table in CX-Programmer and transfer it to the CPU Unit.)
See 8-1 I/O Allocations for details.
6. PLC Setup Settings
With the PLC in PROGRAM mode, change the settings in the PLC Setup
as necessary from the Programming Device (CX-Programmer or Programming Console). (Another method is to change the PLC Setup in CX-Programmer and transfer it to the CPU Unit.)
See 7-1 PLC Setup for details.
7. DM Area Settings
a) Use a Programming Device (CX-Programmer or Programming Console) to make any necessary settings in the parts of the DM Area that
are allocated to Special I/O Units, CS-series CPU Bus Units, and Inner
Boards.
b) Reset the power (ON → OFF → ON) or toggle the Restart Bit for each
Unit or Board. See the Unit’s or Board’s Operation Manual for details.
8. Writing the Program
Write the program with a Programming Device (CX-Programmer or Programming Console.)
9. Transferring the Program (CX-Programmer Only)

262

Section 4-1

Introduction

With the PLC in PROGRAM mode, transfer the program from CX-Programmer to the CPU Unit. See 7-1 Program Transfer in the CS/CJ Series
Programmable Controllers Programming Manual (W394) for details.
10. Testing Operation
a) Checking I/O Wiring
Output wiring
Input wiring

With the PLC in PROGRAM mode, force-set output bits
and check the status of the corresponding outputs.
Activate sensors and switches and either check the status
of the indicators on the Input Unit or check the status of the
corresponding input bits with the Programming Device’s
Bit/Word Monitor operation.

b) Auxiliary Area Settings (As Required)
Check operation of special Auxiliary Area Settings such as the following:
Output OFF
Bit
Hot Start Settings

When necessary, turn ON the Output OFF Bit (A50015)
from the program and test operation with the outputs
forced OFF.
When you want to start operation (switch to RUN mode)
without changing the contents of I/O memory, turn ON the
IOM Hold Bit (A50012).

c) Trial Operation
Test PLC operation by switching the PLC to MONITOR mode.
d) Monitoring and Debugging
Monitor operation from the Programming Device. Use functions such
as force-setting/force-resetting bits, tracing, and online editing to debug the program.
See SECTION 7 Program Transfer, Trial Operation, and Debugging in
the CS/CJ Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual
(W394) for details.
11. Saving and Printing the Program
12. Running the Program
Switch the PLC to RUN mode to run the program.

263

Section 4-2

Examples

4-2

Examples

1. Installation
Mount the Backplane and install each Unit. When necessary, install the Inner
Board or Memory Card.

Make sure that the total power consumption of the Units is less than the maximum capacity of the Power Supply Unit.

2. Wiring
Connect the power supply and I/O wiring.

Note When 220-V AC power (200 to 240 V AC) is being supplied, be sure to
remove the jumper bar that shorts the voltage selector terminals. The Power
Supply Unit will be damaged if 220 V AC is supplied with the jumper bar connected.

3. Initial Settings (Hardware)
Make necessary hardware settings such as the DIP switch settings on the
CPU Unit. Be sure that the communications settings for the peripheral port
and RS-232C port are correct, especially when connecting a Programming
Device (CX-Programmer or Programming Console).
In the following example, a Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port so pin 4 is turned OFF. CX-Programmer is connected to the RS232C port, so pin 5 is turned ON.

264

Section 4-2

Examples

Note When devices other than a Programming Device are connected to the peripheral port and RS-232C port, turn ON pin 4 and turn OFF pin 5.

Programming Console

Programming Device

4. Verifying the Programming Device Connection
Connecting to the CX-Programmer
1,2,3...

1. Connect the CX-Programmer's connecting cable to the peripheral port or
RS-232C port.
Note When connecting to the RS-232C port, pin 5 of the CPU Unit's DIP
switch must be ON.

CX-Programmer
Support Software

2. When connecting to the RS-232C port, pin 5 of the CPU Unit's DIP switch
must be ON.After checking the power supply wiring and voltage, turn ON
the power and verify the Power Supply Unit's POWER Indicator is lit.
3. Start the CX-Programmer and automatically connect online to the PLC.

265

Section 4-2

Examples

4. When connecting online automatically, the CPU Unit is connected in RUN
mode.Verify that the CX-Programmer has connected online with the PLC.

5. Change the operating mode from RUN mode to PROGRAM mode.

Connecting to the Programming Console
1. Connect the Programming Console to the CPU Unit's peripheral port (the
upper port).

Programming
Console

2. Verify that the Programming Console's mode is PROGRAM mode.
3. After checking the power supply wiring and voltage, turn ON the power and
verify the Power Supply Unit's POWER Indicator is lit.
4. Verify that the Programming Console has the following display.
3:JPN~ENG
PASSWORD!

5. Input the password (the Clear and Monitor Keys) and verify that the Programming Console has the following display.
CLR

MON

3:JPN~ENG

Note If the PLC Setup's Startup Mode Setting is set to PRCN (Startup Mode determined by the Programming Console's mode switch, the default setting), but a
Programming Console isn't connected when the power is turned ON, the CPU
Unit will enter RUN Mode and start operating.

266

Section 4-2

Examples
5. Registering the I/O Table

Registering the I/O table allocates I/O memory to the Units actually installed in
the PLC. This operation is required in CS-series PLCs.
Note The user program and parameter area data in CS1-H CPU Units is backed up
in the built-in flash memory. The BKUP indicator will light on the front of the
CPU Unit when the backup operation is in progress. Do not turn OFF the
power supply to the CPU Unit when the BKUP indicator is lit. The data will not
be backed up if power is turned OFF.
■

Using the CX-Programmer Online
Mounting All Units and Then Creating I/O Tables
Use the following procedure to register the I/O table with the CX-Programmer
that is connected to the PLC.

Install the Units.

1,2,3...

1. Install all of the Units in the PLC.
2. Connect CX-Programmer Connecting Cable to the peripheral port or RS232C port. (The power must be OFF.)
Note If the host computer is being connected to the RS-232C port, pin 5
of the CPU Unit’s DIP switch must be set to ON.
3. Start the CX-Programmer and connect online to the PLC.
4. Double-click I/O Table on the project tree in the main window. The I/O Table Window will be displayed.
5. Select Options and then Create. The models and positions of Units
mounted to the Racks will be written to the Registered I/O Table in the CPU
Unit.

267

Section 4-2

Examples
Using the CX-Programmer Offline

Use the following procedure to create the I/O table offline with the CX-Programmer and later transfer the I/O table from to the CPU Unit.
Write the
I/O table.

1,2,3...

Transfer the
I/O table.

1. Double-click I/O Table on the project tree in the main window. The I/O Table Window will be displayed.
2. Double-click the Rack to be edited. The slots for that Rack will be displayed.
3. Right-click the slots to be edited and select the desired Units from the pulldown menu.
4. Select Options and then Transfer to PLC to transfer the I/O table to the
CPU Unit.

Note The first word allocated to each Rack can be set by selecting Rack/Slot Start
Addresses from the Option Menu of the PLC IO Table Window of the CX-Programmer.
■

Using a Programming Console
Mounting All Units and Then Creating I/O Tables

Programming Console
Install the Units.

268

Section 4-2

Examples
1,2,3...

1. Install all of the Units in the PLC.
2. Connect the Programming Console to the peripheral port.
(It can be connected with the power on.)
3. Perform the following Programming Console operation.

CLR

FUN

SHIFT

000000 CT00

CH
*DM

CHG

000000 I/O TBL ?
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT
????
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT
????
Password (9713)

WRITE

Specify holding or clearing
CPU Bus Unit information.

000000CPU BU ST?
0:CLR 1:KEEP
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT OK
000000 CT00

CLR

Note With the CS1-H CPU Units, detailed I/O table error information is stored in
A261 whenever the I/O tables cannot be created for any reason. This information can be used to facilitate troubleshooting if an error occurs.

6. PLC Setup Settings
These settings are the CPU Unit’s software configuration. See 7-1 PLC Setup
for details on the settings.
Note When a Programming Console is used to set the PLC Setup, the PLC Setup
settings are arranged by word addresses. Refer to the provided Programming
Console settings sheet for details.

269

Section 4-2

Examples
Making the Settings with the CX-Programmer

1. Double-click the Settings Icon in the main window's project directory tree.
The PLC Settings Dialog Box will be displayed.

2. Make the required settings.
3. After completing the settings, transfer the PLC Setup to the PLC.
Making the Settings with the Programming Console
When a Programming Console is used to set the PLC Setup, the PLC Setup
settings are arranged by word addresses. Refer to the provided Programming
Console settings sheet for details.
Setting with a Programming Console

In this example, the Programming Console is used to set the Watch Cycle
Time (maximum cycle time) in 10-ms units.
The following diagram shows the required Programming Console operations.
Address
209

Bits

Setting
Enable for Watch Cycle Time
setting

0 to 14

Watch Cycle Time setting

CLR

FUN

VRFY

000000 CT00
PC SETUP
0:MODE1:PC SETUP
PC SETUP
+000 0000

Specifying a word address in the PLC Setup.
(Example: 209)

270

Setting range
0: Use default
1: Use setting in
bits 0 to 14.
0001 to 0FA0

Section 4-2

Examples

↓

↑

CHG

PC SETUP
+209
PC SETUP
+209
0000
PC SETUP?
+209
0000 0000

Example: Input 8064.
8

WRITE

PC SETUP
+209
8064

7. DM Area Settings
The following table shows the parts of the DM Area are allocated to Special
I/O Units, CS-series CPU Bus Units, and Inner Boards for initial settings. The
actual settings depend on the model of Unit or Inner Board being used.
Unit/Board
Special I/O Units
CPU Bus Units
Inner Board

Allocated words
D20000 to D29599 (100 words × 96 Units)
D30000 to D31599 (100 words × 16 Units)
D32000 to D32099 (100 words × 1 Board)

After writing the initial settings to the DM Area, be sure to restart the Units by
turning the PLC off and then on again or toggling the Restart Bits for the
affected Units.
Special I/O Unit or
CS-series CPU Bus Unit

Restart

8. Writing the Program
Write the program with the CX-Programmer or a Programming Console.
Unlike earlier OMRON PLCs, the CS-series PLC’s program can be divided
into independently executable tasks. A single cyclic task can be written for
program execution like earlier PLCs or several cyclic tasks can be written for a

271

Section 4-2

Examples

more flexible and efficient program. The following table shows the differences
when programming with CX-Programmer or a Programming Console.
Programming
Device
CX-Programmer

Programming Console

Relationship between Tasks
and Program

Writing a new program
Cyclic tasks
Interrupt tasks

Specify the type of task and
All can be writtask number for each program. ten.
(Cyclic tasks 0
to 31)
Only one can
Task = program
(Cyclic task 0 is the main pro- be written.
(Cyclic task 0)
gram)

Editing an existing program
Cyclic tasks
Interrupt
tasks
All can be
All can be
edited.
edited.

All can be written.
(Interrupt tasks 0
to 255)
Several can be
All can be
written.
edited.
(Interrupt tasks 1
to 3, 100 to 131)

All can be
edited.

Note When writing the program with a Programming Console, specify whether
there are interrupt tasks during the memory clear operation.

9. Transferring the Program
When the program has been created in a Programming Device other than a
Programming Console, it must be transferred to the PLC’s CPU Unit.

10. Testing Operation
10-a) I/O Wiring Checks
Before performing a Trial Operation in MONITOR mode, check the I/O wiring.
Check Output Wiring
With the PLC in PROGRAM mode, force-set and force-reset output bits and
verify that the corresponding outputs operate properly.

Force-reset

Check Input Wiring
Activate input devices such as sensors and switches and verify that the corresponding indicators on the Input Units light. Also, use the Bit/Word Monitor
operation in the Programming Device to verify the operation of the corresponding input bits.
Input Unit

10-b) Auxiliary Area Settings
Make any required Auxiliary Area settings, such as the ones shown below.
These settings can be made from a Programming Device (including a Programming Console) or instructions in the program.

272

Section 4-2

Examples
IOM Hold Bit (A50012)

Turning ON the IOM Hold Bit protects the contents of I/O memory (the CIO
Area, Work Area, Timer Completion Flags and PVs, Index Registers, and
Data Registers) that would otherwise be cleared when the operating mode is
switched from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
Retained
I/O
memory

Operating mode changed

IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup
When the IOM Hold Bit has been turned ON and the PLC Setup is set to protect the status of the IOM Hold Bit at startup (PLC Setup address 80 bit 15
turned ON), the contents of I/O memory that would otherwise be cleared will
be retained when the PLC is turned ON.
Retained
I/O
memory

PLC turned ON.

Output OFF Bit (A50015)

Output Unit

Turning ON the Output OFF Bit causes all outputs on Basic I/O Units and
Special I/O Units to be turned OFF. The outputs will be turned OFF regardless
of the PLC’s operating mode.

10-c) Trial Operation
Use the Programming Console or Programming Device (CX-Programmer) to
switch the CPU Unit to MONITOR mode.
Using CX-Programmer
The PLC can be put into MONITOR mode with a host computer running CXProgrammer.
Trial Operation
Select PLC, Mode, RUN.
Actual operation
CX-Programmer

Select PLC, Mode, RUN.

273

Section 4-2

Examples
Using a Programming Console

Turn the Mode Switch to MONITOR for the Trial Operation. (Turn the switch to
RUN for full-scale PLC operation.)
Trial Operation

Programming
Console

Actual operation

10-d) Monitoring and Debugging
There are several ways to monitor and debug PLC operation, including the
force-set and force-reset operations, differentiation monitoring, time chart
monitoring, data tracing, and online editing.
Force-Set and Force-Reset
When necessary, the force-set and force-reset operations can be used to
force the status of bits and check program execution.
When a Programming Console is being used, monitor the bits with Bit/Word
Monitor or 3-word Monitor. Press the SHIFT+SET Keys to force-set a bit or
press the SHIFT+RESET Keys to force-reset a bit. The forced status can be
cleared by pressing the NOT Key.
CX-Programmer
1. Click the bit to be force-set or force-reset.
2. Select Force On or Off from the PLC
menu.

Programming Console
Force-set:

SHIFT

SET

Force-reset:

SHIFT

SET

Bit/Word Monitor display
3-word Monitor display
Clear:

274

NOT

Section 4-2

Examples
Differentiation Monitor

The differentiation monitor operation can be used to monitor the up or down
differentiation of particular bits.
When a Programming Console is being used, monitor the bit with Bit/Word
Monitor. Press the SHIFT+Up Arrow Keys to specify up differentiation or press
the SHIFT+Down Arrow Keys to specify down differentiation.
CX-Programmer
1. Click the bit for differential monitoring.
2. Click Differential Monitor from the PLC
Menu. The Differential Monitor Dialog Box
will be displayed.
3. Click Rising or Falling.
4. Click the Start Button. The buzzer will
sound when the specified change is
detected and the count will be incremented.
5. Click the Stop Button. Differential monitoring will stop.

Programming Console
Detect up-differentiation:

SHIFT

Detect down-differentiation:

SHIFT

Bit/Word Monitor display

Time Chart Monitoring
The CX-Programmer’s time chart monitor operation can be used to check and
debug program execution.
Data Tracing
The CX-Programmer’s data trace operation can be used to check and debug
program execution.
Online Editing
When a few lines of the program in the CPU Unit have to be modified, they
can be edited online with the PLC in MONITOR mode or PROGRAM mode.
When more extensive modifications are needed, upload the program from the
CPU Unit to the host computer, make the necessary changes, and transfer
the edited program back to the CPU Unit.

11. Save and Print the Program
Save
To save a created program, select File - Save or File - Save As from the CXProgrammer menus.

Print
To print a created program, first preview the print output by selecting the
desired section in the CX-Programmer's project workspace and selecting File

275

Section 4-2

Examples

- Print Preview from the CX-Programmer menu. If the preview is acceptable,
select File - Print to print.

12. Run the Program
Switch the PLC to RUN mode to run the program.

276

SECTION 5
Installation and Wiring
This section describes how to install a PLC System, including mounting the various Units and wiring the System. Be sure
to follow the instructions carefully. Improper installation can cause the PLC to malfunction, resulting in very dangerous
situations.
5-1
5-2

5-3

Fail-safe Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

278

Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

280

5-2-1

Installation and Wiring Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

280

5-2-2

Installation in a Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

282

5-2-3

Mounting Height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

284

5-2-4

Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

285

5-2-5

Mounting Units to the Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

286

5-2-6

DIN Track Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

288

5-2-7

I/O Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

290

5-2-8

Inner Board Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

298

Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

299

5-3-1

Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

299

5-3-2

Wiring CS-series and C200H Basic I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

310

5-3-3

Wiring CS-series and C200H I/O Units with Connectors . . . . . . . .

312

5-3-4

Connecting I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

319

5-3-5

Reducing Electrical Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

323

277

Section 5-1

Fail-safe Circuits

5-1

Fail-safe Circuits
Be sure to set up safety circuits outside of the PLC to prevent dangerous conditions in the event of errors in the PLC or external power supply.

Supply Power to the PLC before Outputs
If the PLC’s power supply is turned on after the controlled system’s power
supply, outputs in Units such as DC Output Units may malfunction momentarily. To prevent any malfunction, add an external circuit that prevents the
power supply to the controlled system from going on before the power supply
to the PLC itself.

Managing PLC Errors
When any of the following errors occurs, PLC operation will stop and all outputs from Output Units will be turned OFF.
• Operation of the Power Supply Unit’s overcurrent protection circuit
• A CPU error (watchdog timer error) or CPU on standby
• A fatal error* (memory error, I/O bus error, duplicate number error, Inner Board stopped error, too many I/O points error, program error, cycle time too long error, or FALS(007) error)
Be sure to add any circuits necessary outside of the PLC to ensure the safety
of the system in the event of an error that stops PLC operation.
Note *When a fatal error occurs, all outputs from Output Units will be turned OFF
even if the IOM Hold Bit has been turned ON to protect the contents of I/O
memory. (When the IOM Hold Bit is ON, the outputs will retain their previous
status after the PLC has been switched from RUN/MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode.)

Managing Output Malfunctions
It is possible for an output to remain ON due to a malfunction in the internal
circuitry of the Output Unit, such as a relay or transistor malfunction. Be sure
to add any circuits necessary outside of the PLC to ensure the safety of the
system in the event that an output fails to go OFF.

Emergency Stop Circuit
The following emergency stop circuit controls the power supply to the controlled system so that power is supplied to the controlled system only when
the PLC is operating and the RUN output is ON.
An external relay (CR1) is connected to the RUN output from the Power Supply Unit as shown in the following diagram.

278

Section 5-1

Fail-safe Circuits
MCB1
Power supply
MCB2
CR1
Controlled system
Transformer
or noise filter
CS-series PLC
Twisted-pair wires
DC voltage
regulator
PLC RUN (See
note.)
output

CR1

+ DC

– input/output

Surge suppressor

Note This configuration is possible with the C200HW-PA204R and C200HWPA204R Power Supply Units only. When a Power Supply Unit without a RUN
output is used, program the Always ON Flag (A1) as the execution condition
for an output point from an Output Unit. Do not include a circuit that stops the
controlled system by latching the RUN output during operation. Relay contacts are used, and so chattering may cause incorrect operation.

Interlock Circuits
When the PLC controls an operation such as the clockwise and counterclockwise operation of a motor, provide an external interlock such as the one
shown below to prevent both the forward and reverse outputs from turning ON
at the same time.
Interlock circuit
000501

CS-series
PLC

000502

MC2
MC1 Motor clockwise

MC1

MC2 Motor counterclockwise

This circuit prevents outputs MC1 and MC2 from both being ON at the same
time even if both CIO 000500 and CIO 000501 are both ON, so the motor is
protected even if the PLC is programmed improperly or malfunctions.

279

Section 5-2

Installation

5-2
5-2-1

Installation
Installation and Wiring Precautions
Be sure to consider the following factors when installing and wiring the PLC to
improve the reliability of the system and make the most of the PLC’s functions.

Ambient Conditions
Do not install the PLC in any of the following locations.
• Locations subject to ambient temperatures lower than 0°C or higher than
55°C.
• Locations subject to drastic temperature changes or condensation.
• Locations subject to ambient humidity lower than 10% or higher than
90%.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to excessive dust, salt, or metal filings.
• Locations that would subject the PLC to direct shock or vibration.
• Locations exposed to direct sunlight.
• Locations that would subject the PLC to water, oil, or chemical reagents.
Be sure to enclose or protect the PLC sufficiently in the following locations.
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power lines.

Installation in Cabinets or Control Panels
When the PLC is being installed in a cabinet or control panel, be sure to provide proper ambient conditions as well as access for operation and maintenance.
Temperature Control
The ambient temperature within the enclosure must be within the operating
range of 0°C to 55°C. When necessary, take the following steps to maintain
the proper temperature.
• Provide enough space for good air flow.
• Do not install the PLC above equipment that generates a large amount of
heat such as heaters, transformers, or high-capacity resistors.
• If the ambient temperature exceeds 55°C, install a cooling fan or air conditioner.
Control
panel

CS-series
PLC

Louver

280

Fan

Section 5-2

Installation

• If a Programming Console will be left on the PLC, the ambient temperature must be within the Programming Console’s operating range of 0°C to
45°C.
Accessibility for Operation and Maintenance
• To ensure safe access for operation and maintenance, separate the PLC
as much as possible from high-voltage equipment and moving machinery.
• The PLC will be easiest to install and operate if it is mounted at a height of
about 1.3 m (4 feet).
Improving Noise Resistance
• Do not mount the PLC in a control panel containing high-voltage equipment.
• Install the PLC at least 200 mm (6.5 feet) from power lines.
Power lines

200 mm min.
CS-series PLC

200 mm min.

• Ground the mounting plate between the PLC and the mounting surface.
• When I/O Connecting Cables are 10 m or longer, connect the control panels in which Racks are mounted with heavier power wires (3 wires at least
2 mm2 in cross-sectional area).
PLC Orientation
• Each Rack must be mounted in an upright position to provide proper cooling.
Top

Bottom

281

Section 5-2

Installation
• Do not install a Rack in any of the following positions.

Note Always use the standard installation method. A nonstandard installation will
decrease heat dissipation, and may delay the replacement notification signal
(in particular for C200H-PA204C Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification), or degrade or damage the internal elements.

5-2-2

Installation in a Control Panel
• A typical installation is a CPU Rack mounted above an Expansion Rack
on a mounting plate in the control panel.
• The spacing between the CPU Rack and Expansion Rack (or between
two Expansion Racks) should be sufficient to allow space for a wiring
duct, wiring, air circulation, and replacement of Units in the Racks.
Note If the C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit is to be used at an ambient temperature of 50 °C or higher, provide a minimum space of 80 mm between the
top of the Unit and any other objects, e.g., ceiling, wiring ducts, structural supports, devices, etc.
80 mm min.

Duct or other object
C200HW-PA209R

80 mm min.
80 mm min.

Duct or other object
C200HW-PA209R

80 mm min.

Duct or other object

• Up to 7 Expansion Racks can be connected.
Each I/O Connecting Cable can be up to 12 m long, but the sum total of
all cables between the CPU Rack and Expansion Racks must be 12 m or
less.

282

Section 5-2

Installation

• The mounting plate should be grounded completely and we recommend
using a mounting plate that has been plated with a good conductor to
improve noise resistance.
• If all of the Racks cannot be mounted to the same mounting plate, the
individual plates should be securely connected together using 3 wires of
at least 2 mm2 in cross-sectional area.
• The Backplanes are mounted to the plate(s) with four M4 screws each.
• Whenever possible, route I/O wiring through wiring ducts or raceways.
Install the duct so that it is easy to fish wire from the I/O Units through the
duct. It is handy to have the duct at the same height as the Racks.
Duct
20 mm min.
Backplane
Phillips
screwdrivers

Unit

20 mm min.
Duct

Wiring Ducts

The following example shows the proper installation of wiring duct.
118 to 153 mm
CPU
Rack
30 mm
30 mm
40 mm

Mounting
bracket

Duct
Expansion
Rack

Note Tighten the Unit mounting screws, PLC Rack mounting screws, terminal block
screws, and cable screws to the following torques.
Unit Mounting Screws
CPU Unit:
Power Supply Unit:
I/O Units:

0.9 N·m
0.9 N·m
0.4 N·m

Backplane Mounting Screws: 0.9 N·m
Terminal Screws
M3.5: 0.8 N·m
M3:
0.5 N·m
Cable Connector Screws
M2.6: 0.2 N·m

283

Section 5-2

Installation
Routing Wiring Ducts

Install the wiring ducts at least 20 mm between the tops of the Racks and any
other objects, (e.g., ceiling, wiring ducts, structural supports, devices, etc.) to
provide enough space for air circulation and replacement of Units. If the
C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit is to be used at an ambient temperature
of 50 °C or higher, provide a minimum space of 80 mm.
Input duct

Power duct

Output duct
200 mm min.

CPU Rack

Breakers,
fuses

Expansion Rack

Power
equipment
such as
transformers
and magnetic
relays

Fuses, relays, timers, etc.
(NOT heat-generating equipment, power equipment, etc.) Terminal blocks
for PLC

5-2-3

Terminal blocks for
power equipment

Mounting Height
The mounting height of CPU Racks, Expansion Racks, or Slave Racks is 118
to 153 mm for a CS-series Backplane, depending on I/O Units mounted. If
Programming Devices or connecting cables are attached, the additional
dimensions must be taken into account. Allow sufficient clearance in the control panel in which the PLC is mounted.

118 to 153 mm
Approx. 180 to 223 mm

284

Section 5-2

Installation

5-2-4

Mounting Dimensions

Backplanes
CPU Backplane with 2 Slots
198.5
Four, M4
6
CS1W-BC023
CPU Backplane

157

145±0.3

172.3±0.3

Unit: mm

Note Expansion Backplanes cannot be connected to 2-slot CPU Backplanes.
CPU Backplane with 3, 5, 8, or 10 Slots
A±0.3

Unit: mm

135

(including protruding parts)

Four, M4
6
CPU Backplane

132

118±0.3

80 min.

66 min.

135

(including protruding parts)

A±0.3

6
6

132

Expansion Backplane

Four, M4

Backplane
Standard CPU Backplanes

CS-series-only CPU Backplanes

Expansion Backplanes

118±0.3

CS-series Expansion Backplanes

C200H Expansion
I/O Backplanes

Model
CS1W-BC033
CS1W-BC053
CS1W-BC083
CS1W-BC103
CS1W-BC032
CS1W-BC052
CS1W-BC082
CS1W-BC102
CS1W-BI033
CS1W-BI053
CS1W-BI083
CS1W-BI103
C200HW-BI031
C200HW-BI051
C200HW-BI081-V1
C200HW-BI101-V1

A
246 mm
316 mm
421 mm
491 mm
246 mm
316 mm
421 mm
491 mm
246 mm
316 mm
421 mm
491 mm
245 mm
316 mm
350 mm
420 mm

W
260 mm
330 mm
435 mm
505 mm
260 mm
330 mm
435 mm
505 mm
260 mm
330 mm
435 mm
505 mm
259 mm
330 mm
364 mm
434 mm

285

Section 5-2

Installation
Backplane Insulation Plates

Backplane Insulation Plates can be installed on C200H I/O Backplanes only.
There are four models available, corresponding to the number of slots on the
Backplane. The dimensions at locations A, B, C, D, and E are shown below in
millimeters for each Backplane Insulation Plate.
Unit: mm

M4 screws for mounting to PLC
(4/5 places)

5-dia. holes for mounting
Base Insulation Plate
(4/6 places)

(B)

6
12 dia.

5 dia.

135 (118) 110

C
D
(A)
(E)

Insulation Plates for I/O Backplanes
Specifications
For 3 slots
For 5 slots
For 8 slots
For 10 slots

5-2-5

Model
C200HW-ATT32
C200HW-ATT52
C200HW-ATT82
C200HW-ATTA2

E
190
260
365
435

Dimensions (mm)
D
C
B
140
----210
----315
----385
-----

A
175
245
350
420

Mounting Units to the Backplane
There are two methods for mounting or removing Units in the Backplane. The
following table shows which method to use for each type of Unit.
Group
A

286

Unit type
CS-series CPU Units,
Power Supply Units,
CS-series Basic I/O
Units,
CS-series Special I/O
Units,
CS-series CPU Bus
Units, and
SYSMAC BUS Remote
I/O Slave Units
C200H Basic I/O Units,
C200H Special I/O
Units

Installation method
Hook the top of the Unit
into the slot on the
Backplane and tighten
the screw on the bottom
of Unit.

Removal method
Loosen the screw on
the bottom of the Unit
and rotate the Unit
upward.

Hook the top of the Unit
into the slot on the
Backplane and secure
the bottom of the Unit
with the Backplane’s
lock lever.

Press and hold the lock
lever at the bottom of
the Unit and rotate the
Unit upward.

Section 5-2

Installation
1,2,3...

1. Mount the Unit to the Backplane by hooking the top of the Unit into the slot
on the Backplane and rotating the I/O Unit downwards. (Groups A and B)
Hook

Backplane

Lock lever

2. Make sure that the connector on the back of the Unit is properly inserted
into the connector in the Backplane. (Groups A and B)
3. With the Group-A Units, use a Phillips-head screwdriver to tighten the
screw on the bottom of Unit. The screwdriver must be held at a slight angle,
so be sure to leave enough space below each Rack.
Note The screws at the bottoms of the Units must be tightened to the following torques.
CPU Unit:
0.9 N·m
Power Supply Unit: 0.9 N·m
I/O Units:
0.4 N·m

Duct
20 mm min.
Phillips
screwdriver

Units in
group A

Backplane

20 mm min.
Duct

With Group-B Units, the lock lever will snap into place when the Unit is
properly inserted. Check that the lock lever is engaged and the Unit is secure.

287

Section 5-2

Installation

4. To remove a Group-A Unit, use a phillips-head screwdriver to loosen the
screw at the bottom of the Unit, rotate the Unit upward, and remove it.

To remove a Group-B Unit, hold down the lock lever with a tool such as a
screwdriver, rotate the Unit upward, and remove it.

Lock lever

5-2-6

DIN Track Mounting
Do not use DIN Track to mount Backplane in locations subject to vibration;
use locking screws to attach the Backplane directly.
Mount the DIN Track in the control panel with M4 screws in at least three
places. Tighten the mounting screws to a torque of 1.2 N·m.

DIN Track Mounting Bracket
Use DIN Track Mounting Brackets to mount Racks to the DIN Track.
C200H-DIN01
Mounting Bracket

DIN Track

288

Section 5-2

Installation
DIN Track
The following DIN Tracks are available.

Model
PFP-50N
PFP-100N
PFP-100N2

Specification
50 cm long, 7.3 mm high
1 m long, 7.3 mm high
1 m long, 16 mm high

DIN Track Installation
1,2,3...

1. Attach Mounting Brackets to each side (left and right) of the Backplane as
shown below.
Backplane (rear view)

DIN Track Mounting
Bracket

There are two Backplane mounting screws each on the left
and right sides of the Backplane. Use these screws to attach
the DIN Track Mounting Brackets to the Backplane.
(Tighten to a torque of 0.9 N·m.)

2. Mount the Backplane to the DIN Track so that the hooks on the Mounting
Brackets fit into the upper portion of the DIN Track as shown below.
These hooks fit into the DIN Track

Backplane

DIN Track
DIN Track Mounting Bracket

289

Section 5-2

Installation

3. Loosen the hold-down bracket’s screws and slide the Backplane upward
so that the Mounting Bracket and Backplane clamp securely onto the DIN
Track. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.5 N·m.

DIN Track Mounting Bracket

DIN Track

Hold-down bracket Projections Slide this screw to the top of the
projection and then tighten it.

5-2-7

I/O Connecting Cables
I/O Connecting Cables are used to connect the CPU Rack and Expansion
Racks. There are four types of I/O Connecting Cables.
Type

CS → CS
CS1W-CN@@3
I/O Connecting Cables

Connectors
CPU Rack end
Expansion Rack end
Simple lock conSimple lock connector
nector

CS → C200H
CS1W-CN@@1
I/O Connecting Cables

Simple lock connector

C200H → C200H
C200H-CN@@1
I/O Connecting Cables
CV500-CN@@2
Cables for CS-series
Long-distance Expansion Racks (CV-series
I/O Connecting
Cables)

Two-screw connec- Two-screw
tor
connector
Simple lock conSimple lock connector
nector

290

Model number

Two-screw connector

Usage
CPU Rack →
CS-series Expansion Rack
CS-series Expansion Rack →
CS-series Expansion Rack
CPU Rack →
C200H Expansion I/O Rack
CS-series Expansion Rack →
C200H Expansion I/O Rack
C200H Expansion I/O Rack →
C200H Expansion I/O Rack
CPU Rack or CS-series Longdistance Expansion Rack →
CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Rack

Section 5-2

Installation
Available Models
CS → CS I/O
Connecting Cables

Model number

CS → C200H I/O
Connecting Cables

Model number

CS1W-CN713

Cable
length
0.3 m
(See note.)
0.7 m
(See note.)

CS1W-CN223

C200H → C200H I/O
Connecting Cables

Cable
length

Model number

Cable
length

Cables for CS-series Longdistance Expansion Racks
(CV-series I/O Connecting
Cables)

Model number

Cable
length

CS1W-CN311

0.3 m

C200H-CN311

0.3 m

CV500-CN312

0.3 m

CS1W-CN711

0.7 m

C200H-CN711

0.7 m

CV500-CN612

0.6 m

CS1W-CN221

C200H-CN221

CV500-CN122

CS1W-CN323

CS1W-CN321

C200H-CN521

CV500-CN222

CS1W-CN523

CS1W-CN521

C200H-CN131

10 m

CV500-CN322

CS1W-CN133

10 m

CS1W-CN131

10 m

CV500-CN522

CS1W-CN131B2

12 m

CV500-CN132

10 m

CV500-CN232

20 m

CV500-CN332

30 m

CV500-CN432

40 m

CV500-CN532

50 m

CS1W-CN313

CS1W-CN133B2 12 m

Note Restrictions in Using CS-series I/O Connecting Cables
When using a CS1W-CN313 or CS1W-CN713 CS-series I/O Connecting
Cable with a CS1-H CPU Unit, always use a Cable manufactured on September 20, 2001 or later. Do not use Cables that do not have manufacturing numbers or Cables manufacture earlier than September 20, 2001.
Manufacturing Number Legend
Four-digit Numbers
@ @ @ @
Year (e.g., 1997 = 7, 2001 = 1)
Month (January to September = 1 to 9, October to December = X to Z)
Day of month (01 to 31)

Six-digit Numbers
@ @ @ @ @ @
Symbol
Day of month (01 to 31)
Month (January to September = 01 to 12)
Year (e.g., 2003 = 03)

• Install the Racks and select I/O Connecting Cables so that the total length
of all I/O Connecting Cables does not exceed 12 m.
• The following diagram shows where each I/O Connecting Cable must be
connected on each Rack. The Rack will not operate if the cables aren’t
connected properly. (The “up” direction is towards the CPU Unit and
“down” is away from the CPU Unit.)

291

Section 5-2

Installation
CPU Rack

Down

CS-series Expansion Rack

Down

C200H Expansion I/O Rack

Down

• The following diagram shows two examples of proper Rack connections.

Total cable length: 12 m max.

CPU Rack

CS → CS
I/O Connecting Cable
CS-series Expansion Rack
CS → CS
I/O Connecting Cable
CS-series Expansion Rack
CS → C200H
I/O Connecting Cable

C200H Expansion I/O Rack

Total cable length: 12 m max.

CPU Rack

CS → C200H
I/O Connecting Cable

C200H Expansion I/O Rack

C200H → C200H
I/O Connecting Cable
C200H Expansion I/O Rack
C200H → C200H
I/O Connecting Cable
C200H Expansion I/O Rack

292

Section 5-2

Installation
Example
CPU Rack
(Excluding the
2-slot Rack.)
Total cable
length: 0.7 m
max.

CS-series
Expansion
Rack

Series B (0.5 m max.)

Total cable
length: 50 m
max.

CS-series Longdistance
Expansion Rack

Total cable
length: 50 m
max.

Terminator

CS-series Longdistance
Expansion Rack

Terminator

• I/O Control Unit can also be mounted on the CPU Rack.
• Only one CS-series Expansion Rack can be connected.
• The cable length between the CPU Rack and CS-series Expansion Rack
must be 0.7 m max.
• Up to two series of CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks can be
connected.
• A maximum of seven CS-series and CS-series Long-distance Expansion
Racks can be connected (including all Racks in both series).
• Each series of CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks must be 50 m
max. with a total of 100 m max. for both series.
• C200H Expansion I/O Racks cannot be connected together with CSseries Long-distance Expansion Racks.
• A CS-series Expansion Rack cannot be connected to a CS-series Longdistance Expansion Rack using a CS I/O Connecting Cable.

293

Section 5-2

Installation
Cable Connections

There are two types of connectors used in the I/O Connecting Cables: Simple
locking connectors for CS-series Racks and screw-in connectors for C200H
Racks.
The connectors can be inserted only one way; they cannot be inserted upside
down. Be sure that the connectors fit properly as they are inserted.
CS → CS
I/O Connecting Cable
This cable has simple locking
connectors on both ends.

CPU Rack or
CS-series Expansion Rack

CS → C200H
I/O Connecting Cable
This cable has a simple locking
connector on one end and a
screw-in connector on the other.
CPU Rack or
CS-series Expansion Rack

Simple locking
connector
CS-series Expansion Rack

C200H Expansion
I/O Rack

C200H → C200H
I/O Connecting Cable
This cable has screw-in
connectors on both ends.

C200H Expansion
I/O Rack

Simple locking
connectors

Screw-in
connectors
Screw-in
connector

Cables to CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks
Mounting the I/O Control Unit to the CPU Rack

CPU Rack

I/O Control Unit

CV-series
Expansion
I/O Cables

CS-series Longdistance Expansion
Rack

Series B
Series A
I/O Interface Unit

294

I/O Interface Unit

Section 5-2

Installation

Mounting the I/O Control Unit to a CS-series Expansion Rack

CPU Rack

CS-series I/O Connecting Cable

CS-series Expansion Rack

I/O Control Unit
CS-series Longdistance
Expansion Rack

CS-series Longdistance
Expansion Rack

CV-series
Expansion
I/O Cables

Series B
Series A

I/O Interface Unit

Connecting the Simple Locking Connectors
Insert the connector until it locks in place. The PLC will not operate properly if
the connector isn’t inserted completely.
Note When using an I/O Connecting Cable with a locking connector, be
sure that the connector is firmly locked in place before using it.

Connecting the Screw-in Connectors
Insert the connector and secure it by tightening the two screws to a torque of
0.2 N·m. The PLC will not operate properly if the connector isn’t inserted completely. To remove the connector, simply loosen the screws and pull it out.

Do not route the I/O Connecting Cables through ducts that contain the I/O or
power wiring.

295

Section 5-2

Installation

• An I/O bus error will occur and the PLC will stop if an I/O Connecting
Cable’s connector separates from the Rack. Be sure that the connectors
are secure.
• A 75-mm hole will be required if the I/O Connecting Cable must pass
through a hole when connecting a CS-series Long-distance Expansion
Rack and a 63-mm hole will be required for Cables connecting other
Racks. The cables can withstand a pulling force up to 49 N (11 lbs), so be
sure that they aren’t pulled too forcefully.
• Do not cut or reconnect I/O Connecting Cables. Handle them with caution
when mounting the PLC or when using wiring ducts.
• Do not bend the I/O Connecting Cables too severely. The minimum bending radii are shown in the following diagram.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before connecting Cables.
CS → CS I/O Connecting Cable
(Cable diameter: 8.6 mm)

C200H → C200H I/O Connecting Cable
(Cable diameter: 5.1 mm)

69 mm
R

CS → C200H I/O Connecting Cable
(Cable diameter: 5.1 mm)

41 mm

Cables for CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks
(Cable diameter: 10 mm)

41 mm

80 mm

Mounting the Brackets for Securing the Expansion Cable
Expansion Cable Brackets can be used to prevent Expansion Cables from
accidentally coming loose.
Note Expansion Cable Brackets must be ordered separately from Expansion Cables and Backplanes.
Screw holes are required in the Backplane. Use a Backplane manufactured in
August 2007 or later. Earlier Backplanes do not have screw holes, so the
Brackets cannot be mounted. (Refer to Manufacturing Number Legend on
page 291.)
1,2,3...

296

1. Connect the Cables according to the description in 5-2-7 I/O Connecting
Cables.

Section 5-2

Installation

2. Mount the Expansion Cable Bracket from the top, and tighten the screws
(included) on the top and bottom using a Phillips screwdriver.
Phillips screwdriver

CS1D-ATT01 Expansion Cable Bracket
Backplane
Expansion Cable

Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.5 N·m.

Mounting Long-distance Expansion Cable Brackets
Long-distance Expansion Cable Brackets can be used to prevent Expansion
Cables from accidentally coming loose.
Note Two Long-distance Expansion Cable Brackets are included with the
CS1W-II102 I/O Interface Unit.
1,2,3...

1. Connect the Cables according to the description in 5-2-7 I/O Connecting
Cables.
2. Mount the Long-distance Expansion Cable Bracket from the top, and use
a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws (included) on the top and bottom.
Mounting screws (2 places)
Connection to Backplane

Long-distance
Expansion Cable

• Tighten the screws to a torque of
0.5 N·m.
• When connecting two Long-distance Expansion Cables to a single Long-distance Expansion
Unit, turn one of the Mounting
Brackets upside down and
attached them from the sides as
shown in the figure to the left.

R≥80 mm

Long-distance Expansion Cable
Brackets (included with the
CS1W-II102 I/O Interface Unit)
CS1W-IC102 I/O Control Unit
CS1W-II102 I/O Interface Unit

297

Section 5-2

Installation

5-2-8

Inner Board Installation
Always turn the power off before installing or removing the Inner Board.
Installing or removing the Inner Board with the power on can cause the CPU
Unit to malfunction, damage internal components, or cause communications
errors.
Before installing the Inner Board, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic
object, such as a metal water pipe, in order to discharge any static build-up.

CPU Unit
Inner Board
(such as a Serial
Communications
Board)

1,2,3...

1. Press the catches at the top and bottom of the Inner Board compartment
cover and pull the cover forward.

Press the top catch.

Press the bottom catch.

2. Remove the Inner Board compartment cover.

298

Section 5-3

Wiring

3. Align the Inner Board with the groove and slide it into the compartment.

5-3
5-3-1

Wiring
Power Supply Wiring

AC Power Supply Units
When 200 to 240 V AC power is being supplied, be sure to remove the jumper
bar that shorts the voltage selector terminals. The Unit will be damaged if 220
V AC is supplied with the jumper bar connected.
220 V AC
power

Voltage selector
terminals

Not connected
(OPEN)

CORRECT

220 V AC
power

Unit will be damaged
if connected.

INCORRECT!
(Unit will be damaged.)

Note If 110 V AC power is supplied but the jumper bar has been removed to select
220 V AC, the Unit will not operate because the power supply voltage will be
below the 85% minimum level.
• Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit until wiring has
been completed. This label prevents wire strands and other foreign matter
from entering the Unit during wiring procedures.

299

Section 5-3

Wiring
C200HW-PA204 or C200HW-PA204S Power Supply Unit
Screws (3.5 mm head with
self-raising pressure plate)

1:1 isolation
transformer
Voltage selector (C200HW-PA204S only):
Closed for 110 V AC
Open for 220 V AC*

AC power
source
100 to 200 V AC

24-V DC output
Note The 24-V DC service power supply is
provided on the C200HW-PA204S only.

Note To prevent damage, be sure that the jumper bar on the voltage selector terminals has been removed before applying 220 V AC power.

C200HW-PA204R or C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit
Screws (3.5 mm head with
self-raising pressure plate)

1:1 isolation
transformer
Voltage selector (C200HW-PA209R only):
Closed for 110 V AC
Open for 220 V AC1

RUN
OUTPUT

300

Power
supply

AC power
source
100 to 200 V AC

RUN output2
ON when the PLC is in RUN or MONITOR mode.
OFF when the PLC is in PROGRAM mode or a fatal
error has occurred.

Section 5-3

Wiring
C200HW-PA204C Power Supply Unit
PA204C
3.5-mm self-rising screws

L2 /N 100 to
240 VAC
INPUT

1:1 isolation
transformer

AC power
source
100 to 240 V AC
ALARM
OUTPUT
30 VDC, 50 mA
NORMAL: ON
ALARM: OFF

Alarm output (replacement notification
output)
ON: Power Supply Unit replacement
not required for at least 6 months.
OFF: Power Supply Unit replacement
required within 6 months.

24 V DC
power supply

NC
NC

!Caution Be careful when connecting personal computers or other peripheral devices
to a PLC to which is mounted a non-insulated Unit (CS1W-CLK12/15(-V1),
CS1W-CLK13/53, or CS1W-ETN01) connected to an external power supply.
A short-circuit will be created if the 24 V side of the external power supply is
grounded and the 0 V side of the peripheral device is grounded. When connecting a peripheral device to this type of PLC, either ground the 0 V side of
the external power supply or do not ground the external power supply at all.

Incorrect
External power supply
24 V

Non-insulated
DC power supply

Peripheral
cable

Shield
0V
SG

FG
Non-insulated Unit

Note

CPU Unit

GR
FG

Peripheral device
(e.g., personal
computer)

1. To prevent damage, be sure that the jumper bar on the voltage selector terminals has been removed before applying 220 V AC power.
2. If a Power Supply Unit without a RUN output is being used, an output that
acts as a RUN output can be created by programming the Always ON Flag
(A1) as the execution condition for an output from an Output Unit.

AC Power Source
• Supply 100 to 120 V AC or 200 to 240 V AC.
• The C200HW-PA204/PA204R/PA204C supplies 100 to 240 V AC (allowable voltage fluctuation range: 85 to 264 V AC). The C200HW-PA204/
PA204R/PA204C has a wide-range supply voltage (100 to 240 V AC), so
voltage selector terminals are not provided.

301

Section 5-3

Wiring
• Keep voltage fluctuations within the specified range:
Power Supply Unit
model
C200HW-204S/PA209R
C200HW-PA204/
PA204R/PA204C

Supply voltage

Allowable voltage
fluctuations
85 to 132 V AC
170 to 264 V AC
85 to 264 V AC

100 to 120 V AC
200 to 240 V AC
100 to 240 V AC

• The terminal block indicator L2/N-L1 may appear as L1/N-L2 in some
Units, but the function of the terminals is the same.
• If one power supply phase of the equipment is grounded, connect the
grounded phase side to the L2/N (or L1/N if so indicated) terminal.
Voltage Selector

Shorted: 100 to 120 V AC
Open:
200 to 240 V AC
Short-circuit the voltage selector terminals with the jumper bar to select 100 to
120 V AC supply voltage. For 200 to 240 V AC leave them open.
Note The Power Supply Unit will be damaged if 200 to 240 V AC power is supplied
and the voltage selector terminals are connected with the jumper bar.

Isolation Transformer

The PLC’s internal noise isolation circuits are sufficient to control typical noise
in power supply lines, but noise between the PLC and ground can be significantly reduced by connecting a 1-to-1 isolation transformer. Do not ground the
secondary coil of the transformer.

Power Consumption

The power consumption will be 120 VA max. per Rack, but there will be a
surge current of at least 5 times the max. current when power is turned ON.

24-V DC Output
(C200HW-PA204S Only)

Use these terminals as the power supply for 24-V DC Input Units. Never externally short these terminals; PLC operation will stop if these terminals are
shorted.
Although the 24-V DC output can supply up to 0.8 A, the combined power
consumption for both 5 V DC and 24 V DC must be 30 W or less, i.e., the
capacity of the 24-V DC output will be reduced if the Units mounted to the
Rack consume a lot of current. Refer to Appendix C Unit Current and Power
Consumption for the power consumption of each Unit.
The output voltage of the 24-V DC output will vary with the current consumption of the load as shown in the following table. Be sure to check the current
consumption and allowable voltage ranges of the devices connected before
using these terminals.
Load current on 24-V DC output
Accuracy of 24-V DC output for lot
No. 0197 or later
Accuracy of 24-V DC output for lot
No. 3187 or earlier

Less than 0.3 A
+17%
–11%
+10%
–20%

0.3 A or higher
+10%
–11%

Note Lot numbers are as shown in the following diagram.

0 1 9

7
1997 (Rightmost digit of year)
September (Month: 1 to 9 = Jan. to Sept, X/Y/Z = Oct/Nov/Dec)
01 (Day: 01 to 31)

302

Section 5-3

Wiring

We recommend connecting a dummy load as shown in the following diagram
if the maximum operating voltage of the connected device is 26.4 V (24 V
+10%).

IL
Connected
device
(Photoelectric
Switch, Sensor Input Unit,
etc.

Dummy
load
R
L
24 V DC
OUTPUT

Resistance of the dummy load: 120 Ω when IL = 0.1 A
240 Ω when IL = 0.2 A
Not necessary when IL = 0.3 A
24
R=
(I
L: Total current of connected devices)
0.3 – lL
Power rating of the dummy load (with a safety factor of 5):
30 W (120 Ω) when IL = 0.1 A
W = (0.3 – lL) × 26.4 × 5
15 W (240 Ω) when IL = 0.2 A
Note Since the dummy load will generate heat, be careful not to allow any combustible materials to come in contact with the resistor.
Alarm Output (C200HW-PA204C Only)
Connect the alarm output to a PLC's Input Unit or external LED indicator to
enable notification when Power Supply Unit replacement is required.
ON: Power Supply Unit replacement not required for at least 6 months.
OFF: Power Supply Unit replacement required within 6 months.
Output Specifications:
Transistor open-collector output
30 VDC max., 50 mA max.
ON: Residual voltage of 2 V max., OFF: Leakage current of 0.1 mA max.

PLC Input Unit Wiring Example
Connect the positive terminals of the 24-V DC power supply to the Input Unit
common (COM) terminals.

303

Section 5-3

Wiring
IN Unit
CS1W-ID2**
C200H-ID2**

CPU Unit

C200HW-PA204C
PA204C

IN0

L2 /N

100 t o
240
VAC
IN PUT

L
IN(N)

ALA RM
OUTPUT
30VDC,50mA
N ORM ALON
ALARM OFF

IN (N+ 1)

COM

24 V DC
power supply

Connect the negative terminal of the 24-V DC power supply to the Input Unit
common (COM) terminal.
IN Unit
CS1W-ID2**
C200H-ID2**

CPU Unit

C200HW-PA204C
PA204C

IN0

L2 /N 100 t o
240 V AC
IN PUT
L1

ALA RM
OUTPUT
30VDC,50mA
NORMAL:OFF

ALARM:OFF

IN(N)
IN (N+ 1)

− NC

COM

− NC

24 V DC
power supply

External Display Device Connection Example
The alarm output (replacement notification output) is an NC contact. Therefore, wire the alarm output using an NC contact or other means to turn ON an
error indicator or LED display as shown in the following diagram.
C200HW-PA204C
PA204C

Power
supply
L2 /N 100 to
240 VAC
IN PUT
L1

ALA RM
OU TPU T
30VD C, 50 mA
NORM AL: ON

Relay
(NC contact)

ALARM: OFF

NC
NC

Note

24 VDC
power supply

1. The OL display will also light if the PLC's power supply fails.
2. Separate the alarm output cables from power lines and high-voltage lines.

304

Section 5-3

Wiring

3. Do not apply a voltage or connect a load to the alarm output that exceeds
the rated voltage or load.
RUN Output
(C200HW-PA204R/209R)

This output is ON whenever the CPU Unit is operating in RUN or MONITOR
mode; it is OFF when the CPU Unit is in PROGRAM mode or a fatal error has
occurred.
The RUN output can be used to control external systems, such as in an emergency stop circuit that turns off the power supply to external systems when
the PLC is not operating. (See 5-1 Fail-safe Circuits for more details on the
emergency stop circuit.)
Contact
form
Maximum
switching
capacity

C200HW-PA204R
SPST-NO

C200HW-PA209R
SPST-NO

240 V AC:2 A for resistive loads
250 V AC: 2 A for resistive loads
0.5 A for inductive loads 120 V AC:0.5 A for inductive loads
24 V DC: 2 A
24 V DC: 2 A for resistive loads
2 A for inductive loads

Wiring
Terminal screws
Recommended wire size
Recommended tightening
torque

M3.5 self-rising screws
AWG 20 to 14 (0.517 to 2.08 mm2)
0.8 N·m

Recommended crimp terminals
7 mm max.

7 mm max.

Manufacturer
JST Mfg.

Note

Models

Shape

V1.25-YS3A

Y-shaped terminal with sleeve
V1.25-M3(RAV1.25-3.5) Round terminal
with sleeve
V2-YS3A
Y-shaped terminal with sleeve
V2-M3(RAV2-3.5)
Round terminal
with sleeve

Applicable wire range
(stranded wire)
0.25 to 1.65 mm2 (AWG
22 to 16)

1.04 to 2.63 mm2 (AWG
16 to 14)

1. Use crimp terminals for wiring.
2. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to the terminals.
20 mm max.
M3.5 self-raising terminals

Torque to 0.8 N·m

!Caution Tighten the AC power supply terminal block screws to the torque of 0.8 N·m.
Loose screws may result in short-circuit, malfunction, or fire.
Note

1. Supply power to all of the Power Supply Units from the same source.

305

Section 5-3

Wiring

2. Be sure to check the setting of the voltage selector before supplying power.
3. Do not forget to remove the label from the top of the Power Supply Unit after wiring the Unit. The label will block air circulation needed for cooling.

DC Power Supplies
Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit until wiring has
been completed. This label prevents wire strands and other foreign matter
from entering the Unit during wiring procedures. (Remove the label after wiring has been completed to allow air circulation needed for cooling.)

C200HW-PD024/025 Power Supply Unit
Screw (3.5 mm head with
self-raising pressure plate)

DC
power
source

DC Power Source

Supply 24 V DC. Keep voltage fluctuations within the specified range (19.2 to
28.8 V DC).

Power Supply Capacity

The maximum power consumption is 40 W per Rack for C200HW-PD024 and
60 W per Rack for C200HW-PD025, but there will be a surge current of about
5 times that level when the power is turned on.

Wiring
Terminal screws
Recommended wire size
Recommended tightening
torque

M3.5 self-rising screws
AWG 20 to 14 (0.517 to 2.08 mm2)
0.8 N·m

Recommended crimp terminals
7 mm max.

Manufacturer
JST Mfg.

306

7 mm max.

Models
V1.25-YS3A

Shape

Y-shaped terminal with sleeve
V1.25-M3(RAV1.25-3.5) Round terminal
with sleeve
V2-YS3A
Y-shaped terminal with sleeve
V2-M3(RAV2-3.5)
Round terminal
with sleeve

Applicable wire range
(stranded wire)
0.25 to 1.65 mm2 (AWG
22 to 16)

1.04 to 2.63 mm2 (AWG
16 to 14)

Section 5-3

Wiring
Note

1. Use crimp terminals for wiring.
2. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to the terminals.
3. Wire the power supply with the correct polarity. Supply power to all of the
Power Supply Units from the same source.
4. Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.

Grounding
The diagram below shows the location of the ground and line ground terminals.

AC100V-120V/
AC2100-240V/
INPUT

100-200
CLOSE
200-240
OPEN

LG (Noise-filter neutral terminal)
Ground this terminal to less than 100 Ω to improve
noise resistance and prevent electric shock.
DC24V/0.8A
OUTPUT

GR (Ground terminal)
Ground this terminal to less than 100 Ω to prevent
electric shock.

• To help prevent electrical shock, ground the ground terminal (GR: ) with
a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω using a 14-gauge wire (minimum
cross-sectional area of 2 mm2).
• The line ground terminal (LG: ) is a noise-filtered neutral terminal. If
noise is a significant source of errors or electrical shocks are a problem,
connect the line ground terminal to the ground terminal and ground both
with a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω.
• The ground wire should not be more than 20 m long.
• The following grounding configurations are acceptable.
• The CS-series Backplanes are designed to be mounted so that they are
isolated (separated) from the mounting surface to protect them from the
effects of noise in the installation environment (e.g., the control panel).
(C200HX/HG/HE and C200H Backplanes are mounted directly to the
mounting surface. If Expansion I/O is being affected by control panel or
other environmental noise, use the C200HW-ATT@@ or C200H-ATT@@
Backplane Insulation Plates to isolate the Backplanes.
Note Make sure that the C200HW-PA204C is wired correctly. The C200HWPA204C terminals are wired differently from other Power Supply Units.
• Do not share the PLC’s ground with other equipment, such as motors and
inverters, or ground the PLC to the metal structure of a building. The configuration shown in the following diagram may worsen operation.

307

Section 5-3

Wiring
CS-series PLC

Other equipment

Ground
(100 or less)
CS-series PLC

Other equipment

Ground
(100 or less)
CS-series PLC

Ground
(100 or less)

Other equipment
(e.g., motors and inverters)

!Caution Tighten the AC power supply terminal block screws to the torque of 0.8 N·m.
Loose screws may result in short-circuit, malfunction, or fire.
Grounding Long-distance Expansion Racks
A difference in potential will occur between remote ground points if more than
one point is grounded on the CPU Rack and Long-distance Expansion Racks
in a CS-series Long-distance Expansion System. This is caused by high-frequency noise from power lines, potential and phase differences between
power lines, and other factors. To prevent noise from entering on the GR
(ground) terminal as a result of a difference in potential, wire the system as
shown below.
• Connect all of the GR terminals on the Racks and ground them at one
point only to 100 Ω or less.
• Short the LR terminals to the GR terminals.
• Use a ground wire of 2 mm2 min.
• Insert 1:1 isolating transformers into the power supply lines and do not
ground the secondary sides of the transformers.

308

Section 5-3

Wiring
Recommended Wiring

IC101

I102
CPU

L2
L1

1:1 Isolating
transformer

L2
L1
LG
GR

LG
GR

CPU Rack

1:1 Isolating
transformer

Match to the I/O
Expansion Cable.

Expansion Rack

I/O Expansion Cable
Control panel

Control panel

Wiring Susceptible to Noise
IC101

I102
CPU L2
L1

L2
L1

LG
GR

Noise source

Expansion Rack

CPU Rack
I/O Expansion Cable
Control panel

Grounded to building

Control panel

Wiring Communications Lines
When using communications from one or more Rack in the system, ground
the entire system so that only one point is grounded. (Refer to user documentation for the devices connected.) For detailed connection methods, refer to
the Operation Manual for the Communications Unit.
Recommended Wiring
Control panel

Control panel
IC101

II102 Expansion

CPU Rack

Rack
GR

I/O Expansion Cable

Wiring Susceptible to Noise
Control panel

Control panel
IC101

CPU Rack

II102

Expansion Rack
GR

I/O Expansion Cable
Noise source
GR

309

Section 5-3

Wiring
Wiring
Terminal screws
Recommended wire size
Recommended tightening
torque

M3.5 self-rising screws
AWG 14 min. (2 mm2 min.)
0.8 N·m

Recommended crimp terminals
7 mm max.

7 mm max.

Manufacturer
JST Mfg.

Models

Shape

V2-YS3A
V2-M3(RAV2-3.5)

Note

Y-shaped terminal with sleeve
Round terminal
with sleeve

Applicable wire range
(stranded wire)
1.04 to 2.63 mm2 (AWG
16 to 14)

1. Use crimp terminals for wiring.
2. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to the terminals.

5-3-2

Wiring CS-series and C200H Basic I/O Units

I/O Unit Specifications

Double-check the specifications for the I/O Units. In particular, do not apply a
voltage that exceeds the input voltage for Input Units or the maximum switching capacity for Output Units. Doing so may result in breakdown, damage, or
fire.
When the power supply has positive and negative terminals, be sure to wire
them correctly.

Electric Wires

The following wire gauges are recommended.
Terminal Block Connector
10-terminal

Wire Size
AWG 22 to 18 (0.32 to 0.82 mm2)

19-terminal/20-terminal

AWG 22 (0.32 mm2)

Note The current capacity of electric wire depends on factors such as the ambient
temperature and insulation thickness as well as the gauge of the conductor.
Wiring
Terminal screws
Recommended wire size
Recommended tightening
torque

M3.5 self-rising screws
AWG 22 to 18 (0.326 to 0.823 mm2)
0.8 N·m

Recommended crimp terminals
1. C200H Basic I/O Units with 10-terminal or 19-terminal Terminal Blocks
7 mm max.

310

7 mm max.

Section 5-3

Wiring
2. CS-series Basic I/O Units with 20-terminal Terminal Blocks
6.5 mm max.

7 mm max.

Manufacturer
JST Mfg.

Note

Models

Shape

V1.25-YS3A

Y-shaped terminal with sleeve
V1.25-M3(RAV1.25-3.5) Round terminal
with sleeve

Applicable wire range
(stranded wire)
0.25 to 1.65 mm2 (AWG
22 to 16)

1. Use crimp terminals for wiring.
2. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to the terminals.
Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit until wiring has
been completed. This label prevents wire strands and other foreign matter
from entering the Unit during wiring procedures. (Remove the label after wiring has been completed to allow air circulation needed for cooling.)
During wiring

After wiring
Remove the label.

• Wire the Units so that they can be easily replaced. In addition, make sure
that the I/O indicators are not covered by the wiring.
• Do not place the wiring for I/O Units in the same duct or raceway as power
lines. Inductive noise can cause errors in operation.
• Tighten the terminal screws to the torque of 0.8 N·m.
• The terminals have screws with 3.5-mm diameter heads and self-raising
pressure plates. Connect the lead wires to the terminals as shown below.

Screw (3.5 mm screw with
self-raising pressure plate)
Terminal
block

10P
19P
20P

Terminal Blocks

A
23 mm
14 mm
18 mm

The I/O Units are equipped with removable terminal blocks. The lead wires do
not have to be removed from the terminal block to remove it from an I/O Unit.
The terminal block on a C200H Basic I/O Units can be removed by pressing
the terminal block locks. The terminal block on a CS-series Basic I/O Units
can be removed by taking out the terminal block mounting screws.

311

Section 5-3

Wiring

Terminal block
mounting screws
(black screws
under cover)

Terminal block locks

CS-series Basic I/O Units
(including Interrupt Input
Units and High-speed Input
Units)

C200H Basic I/O Units

I/O Unit Covers

The C200H-COV11 Cover is available to cover the terminal block on Units
with 10-terminal terminal block connectors. These Covers can be purchased
separately if extra protection is required.

Attach

Remove

5-3-3

C200H-COV11
I/O Unit cover

Wiring CS-series and C200H I/O Units with Connectors
This section describes wiring for the following Units:
• C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units
• CS-series Basic I/O Units with Connectors (32-, 64-, and 96-point Units)
• C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)
C200H High-density I/O Units and CS-series Basic I/O Units with connectors
use special connectors to connector to external I/O devices. The user can
combine a special connector with cable or use a preassembled OMRON
cable to connect a High-density I/O Unit to a terminal block or Relay Terminal.
The available OMRON cables are described later in this section.
CS-series Basic I/O Units with connectors have the same connector pin allocations as the C200H High-density I/O Units to make them compatible.
• Be sure not to apply a voltage that exceeds the input voltage for Input
Units or the maximum switching capacity for Output Units.
• When the power supply has positive and negative terminals, be sure to
wire them correctly. Loads connected to Output Units may malfunction if
the polarity is reversed.
• Use reinforced insulation or double insulation on the DC power supply
connected to DC I/O Units when required by EC Directives (low voltage).
• When connecting the connector to the I/O Unit, tighten the connector
screws to a torque of 0.2 N·m.

312

Section 5-3

Wiring

• Turn ON the power after checking the connector’s wiring. Do not pull the
cable. Doing so will damage the cable.
• Bending the cable too sharply can damage or break wiring in the cable.

Available Connectors
Use the following connectors when assembling a connector and cable.
C200H Group-2 Highdensity I/O Units and CSseries Basic 32- and 64point I/O Units

The following connectors are recommended for attachment to C200H Group2 High-density I/O Units and CS-series 32- and 64-point I/O Units.
Connection
Solder-type
(included with Unit)
Crimp-type

Pins
OMRON set
40
C500-CE404
40

C500-CE405

Crimp-type

C500-CE403

Fujitsu parts
Socket: FCN-361J040-AU
Connector bar: FCN-360C040-J2
Socket: FCN-363J040
Connector bar: FCN-360C040-J2
Contacts: FCN-363J-AU
FCN-367J040-AU/F

Note Solder-type connectors are included with each Unit.
CS-series 96-point Basic
I/O Units

The following connectors are recommended for attachment to CS-series 96point I/O Units.
Connection
Solder-type
(included with Unit)
Crimp-type

Pins
OMRON set
56
CS1W-CE561
56

CS1W-CE562

Crimp-type

CS1W-CE563

Fujitsu parts
Socket: FCN-361J056-AU
Connector bar: FCN-360C056-J2
Socket: FCN-363J056
Connector bar: FCN-360C056-J2
Contacts: FCN-363J-AU
FCN-367J056-AU/F

Note Solder-type connectors are included with each Unit.
C200H High-density I/O
Units

The following connectors are recommended for attachment to C200H Highdensity I/O Units.
Connection
Solder-type
(included with Unit)
Crimp-type

Pins
OMRON set
24
C500-CE241
24

C500-CE242

Crimp-type

C500-CE243

Fujitsu parts
Socket: FCN-361J024-AU
Connector bar: FCN-360C024-J2
Socket: FCN-363J024
Connector bar: FCN-360C024-J2
Contacts: FCN-363J-AU
FCN-367J024-AU/F

Note Solder-type connectors are included with each Unit.

Wire
We recommend using cable with wire gauges of AWG 24 to AWG 28
(0.2 mm2 to 0.08 mm2). Use cable with external wire diameters of 1.61 mm
max.

Wiring Procedure
The wiring procedure is the same for the C200H Group-2 High-density I/O
Units, CS-series High-density I/O Units, and C200H High-density I/O Units
(C200H Special I/O Units).
1,2,3...

1. Check that each Unit is installed securely.
Note Do not force the cables.
2. Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit until wiring has
been completed. This label prevents wire strands and other foreign matter

313

Section 5-3

Wiring

from entering the Unit during wiring. (Remove the label after wiring has
been completed to allow air circulation needed for cooling.)
Before wiring

ID215

CH
3

12 13 14
15

RUN
0 1 2
CN1
8 9 10
0 1 2
CN2
8 9 10

CAUT11ION 6 7
12 13 14
15
6

3
11

12 13 14
15
5 6 7

12 13 14
15

MACINE
NO.

C200H-00215

MACINE
NO.

CN1
CN2
B A A
B

Remove label
after wiring

CN1
CN2
B A A
B

C200H-00215

ID215
RUN
0 1 2
CN1
8 9 10
0 1 2
CN2
8 9 10

After wiring

1
12

3. When solder-type connectors are being used, be sure not to accidentally
short adjacent terminals. Cover the solder joint with heat-shrink tubing.
Solder-type connector
included with Unit.

Heat-shrink tubing
Wire (0.2 to 0.13 mm2)

Note Double-check to make sure that the Output Unit’s power supply leads haven’t
been reversed. If the leads are reversed, the Unit’s internal fuse will blow and
the Unit will not operate.

314

Section 5-3

Wiring

4. Assemble the connector (included or purchased separately) as shown in
the following diagram.
Small screws (3)

Connector bar

Small screws (2)
Socket
Connector-attaching
screws
Nuts (3)

Cable-securing
bracket
Nuts (2)

5. Insert the wired connector.

High-density I/O Unit

Connector
High-density I/O Unit

Connector

6. Remove the protective label after wiring has been completed to allow air
circulation needed for cooling.
After wiring

Remove label after wiring.

Tighten the connector-attaching screws to a torque of 0.2 N·m.

315

Section 5-3

Wiring
Preassembled Cables

The following examples show applications for preassembled OMRON Cables.
Contact your OMRON dealer for more details.
C200H Group-2 Highdensity I/O Units

The following cables are compatible with C200H Group-2 High-density I/O
Units.

1,2,3...

1. Connecting to a terminal block.

C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Unit
C200H-ID216/218 (32 input points)
C200H-ID217/219 (64 input points)*
C200H-OD218/21B (32 output points)
C200H-OD219 (64 output points)*
*(Two sets needed for 64-point Units.)

C200H Group-2 High-density Input Unit
C200H-ID216 (32 input points)
C200H-ID217 (64 input points)*
*(Two sets needed for 64-point Unit.)

XW2Z-@@@D Connecting Cable
for Connector-Terminal Block
Conversion Unit

XW2Z-@@@B Connecting Cable
for Connector-Terminal Block
Conversion Unit

16 inputs
Connector-Terminal Block
Conversion Unit with Flat Cable
XW2B-40G5 (M3.5 terminal screws)
XW2B-40G4 (M2.5 terminal screws)

Connector-Terminal Block
16 inputs Conversion Unit (common-type)
XW2C-20G5-IN16

2. Connecting to a Relay Terminal.
C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Unit
C200H-ID216/218 (32 input points)
C200H-ID217/219 (64 input points)*
*(Two sets needed for 64-point Units.)

G79-I@C-@ Connecting Cable
for Relay Terminals
(For I/O Units with PLC32/64point connectors.)

G79-I@16 Input Relay Terminals

316

C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Unit
C200H-OD218/OD21B (32 output points)
C200H-OD219 (64 output points)*
*(Two sets needed for 64-point Unit.)

G79-O@C-@ Connecting Cable
for Relay Terminals
(For I/O Units with PLC32/64-point
connectors.)

G7TC-OC16, G70D-@O@16,
G70A-ZOC16-3
Output Relay Terminals
G70D-@O16-1 (OD21B only)
G70A-ZOC16-1 (OD21B only)

Section 5-3

Wiring
CS-series Basic I/O Units
with Connectors
1,2,3...

The following cables are compatible with CS-series High-density I/O Units.
1. Connecting to a terminal block. (Two of the following Cables and Conversion Units are required.)

CS-series Basic I/O Unit
CS1W-ID291 (96 input points)
CS1W-OD291 (96 output points)
CS1W-OD292 (96 output points)
CS1W-MD291 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)
CS1W-MD292 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)

XW2Z-@@@H-1 Connecting
Cable for Connector-Terminal
Block Conversion Unit
2 required

XW2Z-@@@H-3 Connecting
Cable for Connector-Terminal
Block Conversion Unit

2 required
Connector-Terminal Block
Conversion Unit with Flat Cable
XW2B-60G4 or XW2B-60G5
CS-series Basic I/O Unit
CS1W-ID291 (96 input points)
CS1W-OD291 (96 output points)
CS1W-OD292 (96 output points)
CS1W-MD291 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)
CS1W-MD292 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)

XW2Z-@@@H-2 Connecting
Cable for Connector-Terminal
Block Conversion Unit
2 required

CS-series Basic I/O Unit
CS1W-ID291 (96 input points)
CS1W-OD291 (96 output points)
CS1W-OD292 (96 output points)
CS1W-MD291 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)
CS1W-MD292 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)

Connector-Terminal Block Conversion
Unit with Flat Cable
XW2B-40G4 or XW2B-40G5
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion
Unit with Flat Cable
XW2B-20G4 or XW2B-20G5

Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit with Flat Cable
XW2B-20G5 or XW2B-20G4
CS-series Basic I/O Unit
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-ID261
CS1W-OD231
CS1W-OD232
CS1W-OD261
CS1W-OD262
CS1W-MD261
CS1W-MD262

Connecting Cable
XW2Z-@@@B
XW2Z-@@@D

Connector-Terminal Block
Conversion Unit
XW2B-40G4, XW2B-40G5, or
XW2C-20GB-IN16 (Connectable to Input Unit only.)

317

Section 5-3

Wiring

2. Connecting to a Relay Terminal. (Two of the following Cables and Relay
Terminals are required.)
CS-series Basic I/O Unit
CS1W-ID291 (96 input points)
CS1W-OD291 (96 output points)
CS1W-OD292 (96 output points)
CS1W-MD291 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)
CS1W-MD292 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)

CS-series Basic I/O Unit
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-ID261
CS1W-MD261 (inputs)
CS1W-OD291
CS1W-OD261
CS1W-MD261 (outputs)
CS1W-OD292
CS1W-OD262
CS1W-MD262 (outputs)

G79-@@@C-@@@-@@@
Connecting Cable for Relay Terminals
2 required
G7TC-I@16 Input Relay Terminals or
G7TC-OC16 Output Relay Terminals
(CS1W-OD291/MD291)
G7TC-OC16-1 Output Relay
Terminals (CS1W-OD292/MD292)

2 required

Connecting Cable
#1:
G79-I@C-@
#2, #3: G79-O@C-@

#1: G7TC-I@16
#2: G7TC-OC16
G70D-@O@16
G70A-ZOC16-3 and relays
#3: G70D-@O@16-1
G70A-ZOC16-4

C200H High-density I/O
Units
1,2,3...

The following cables are compatible with C200H High-density I/O Units (a
kind of C200H Special I/O Unit).
1. Connecting to a terminal block.
C200H High-density Input Unit
C200H-ID215 (32 input points)
C200H-ID501 (32 input points)
C200H-OD215 (32 output points)
C200H-OD501 (32 output points)
C200H-MD215 (16 inputs/16 outputs)
C200H-MD115 (16 inputs/16 outputs)
C200H-MD501 (16 inputs/16 outputs)

XW2Z-@@@A Connecting Cable for ConnectorTerminal Block Conversion Unit
(For I/O Units with PLC32-point connectors.)
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit
XW2B-20G4/20G5/20G5-D (all 16 points)
XW2B-40G5-T (32-point twin connector)
OR
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit
XW2C-20G5-IN16 (16 input points, common-type)

318

Section 5-3

Wiring
2. Connecting to a Relay Terminal.

C200H High-density I/O Unit
C200H-OD215 (32 output points)
C200H-OD501 (32 output points)
C200H-MD215 (16 inputs/16 outputs)

C200H High-density I/O Unit
C200H-ID215 (32 input points)
C200H-ID501 (32 input points)

2 required

G79-@C Connecting Cable
for Relay Terminals
(For I/O Units with
PC32/64-point connectors.)

2 required

G79-I@16
Input Relay Terminal

5-3-4

G79-@C Connecting Cable
for Relay Terminals
(For I/O Units with
PC32/64-point connectors.)

G7TC-OC@@
G70D, G70A
Output Relay Terminal

Connecting I/O Devices

Input Devices
Use the following information for reference when selecting or connecting input
devices.
DC Input Units

The following types of DC input devices can be connected.
Contact output

IN DC Input Unit
COM

Two-wire DC output

IN DC Input Unit
Sensor
Power
Supply

COM

NPN open-collector output
+

Output
7 mA
0V

Sensor
Power
Supply
IN DC Input Unit
COM

319

Section 5-3

Wiring
NPN current output
+
Current
regulator

IN DC Input Unit

Output
7 mA
0V

Sensor
Power
Supply

COM

PNP current output
+

Sensor
Power
Supply

Output

IN AC/DC Input Unit

7 mA

COM

Voltage current output
+

COM

Output
0V

IN DC Input Unit
Sensor
Power
Supply

The circuit below should NOT be used for I/O devices having a voltage output.
Voltage output
Sensor
Power
Supply

+
Output
0V

AC Input Units

IN DC Input Unit
COM

The following types of AC input devices can be connected.
Contact output

IN AC Input Unit
COM

AC Switching
IN AC Input Unit
Proximity
switch
main
circuit
COM

320

Section 5-3

Wiring

Note When using a reed switch as the input contact for an AC Input Unit, use a
switch with an allowable current of 1 A or greater. If Reed switches with
smaller allowable currents are used, the contacts may fuse due to surge currents.
Precautions when
Connecting a Two-wire DC
Sensor

When using a two-wire sensor with a 12-V DC or 24-V DC input device, check
that the following conditions have been met. Failure to meet these conditions
may result in operating errors.

1,2,3...

1. Relation between voltage when the PLC is ON and the sensor residual
voltage:
VON ≤ VCC – VR
2. Relation between voltage when the PLC is ON and sensor control output
(load current):
IOUT (min) ≤ ION ≤ IOUT (max.)
ION = (VCC – VR – 1.5 [PLC internal residual voltage])/RIN
When ION is smaller than IOUT (min), connect a bleeder resistor R. The
bleeder resistor constant can be calculated as follows:
R ≤ (VCC – VR)/(IOUT (min.) – ION)
Power W ≥ (VCC – VR)2/R × 4 [allowable margin]

Note The residual voltage in the PLC is 4.0 V for the following Units:
C200H-ID211/ID212/IM211/IM212/INT01
The residual voltage is 1.5 V for all other Units.
3. Relation between current when the PLC is OFF and sensor leakage current:
IOFF ≥ Ileak
If Ileak is larger than IOFF, connect a breeder resistor. The breeder resistor
constant can be calculated as follows:
R ≤ RIN × VOFF/(Ileak × RIN – VOFF)
Power W ≥ (VCC – VR)2/R × 4 [allowable margin]
DC Input Unit
Two-wire sensor

RIN

R
VCC

VCC:
VON:
ION:
IOFF:
RIN:

Power voltage
PLC ON voltage
PLC ON current
PLC OFF current
PLC input impedance

VR :
IOUT:
Ileak:
R:

Sensor output residual current
Sensor control current (load current)
Sensor leakage current
Bleeder resistance

4. Precautions on Sensor Surge Current
An incorrect input may occur if a sensor is turned ON after the PLC has
started up to the point where inputs are possible. Determine the time required for sensor operation to stabilize after the sensor is turned ON and
take appropriate measures, such as inserting into the program a timer delay after turning ON the sensor.

321

Section 5-3

Wiring

Example
In this example, the sensor’s power supply voltage is used as the input to
CIO 000000 and a 100-ms timer delay (the time required for an OMRON
Proximity Sensor to stabilize) is created in the program. After the Completion Flag for the timer turns ON, the sensor input on CIO 000001 will cause
output bit CIO 000100 to turn ON.
000000
TIM
0000
#0001

TIM0000

000001
000100

Output Wiring Precautions
Output Short-circuit
Protection

If a load connected to the output terminals is short-circuited, output components and the and printed circuit boards may be damaged. To guard against
this, incorporate a fuse in the external circuit. Use a fuse with a capacity of
about twice the rated output.

Transistor Output
Residual Voltage

A TTL circuit cannot be connected directly to a transistor output because of
the transistor’s residual voltage. It is necessary to connect a pull-up resistor
and a CMOS IC between the two.

Output Leakage Current

If a Triac Output Unit is used to drive a low-current load, the leakage current
may prevent the output device from turning OFF. To prevent this, connect a
bleeder resistor in parallel with the load as shown in the following diagram.
OUT
PLC

Bleeder resistor

Load power supply

COM

Use the following formula to determine the resistance and rating for the
bleeder resistor.

Output Surge Current

VON: ON voltage of the load (V)
I: Leakage current (mA)
R: Bleeder resistance (KΩ)

VON
I

When connecting a transistor or triac output to an output device having a high
surge current (such as an incandescent lamp), steps must be taken to avoid
damage to the transistor or triac. Use either of the following methods to
reduce the surge current.
Method 1
Add a resistor that draws about 1/3 of the current consumed by the bulb.
L

OUT
R
COM

322

Section 5-3

Wiring
Method 2
Add a control resistor as shown in the following diagram.
R

OUT

COM

5-3-5

Reducing Electrical Noise

I/O Signal Wiring

Whenever possible, place I/O signal lines and power lines in separate ducts or
raceways both inside and outside of the control panel.
1 = I/O cables
2 = Power cables

Suspended duct

In-floor duct

Conduits

If the I/O wiring and power wiring must be routed in the same duct, use
shielded cable and connect the shield to the GR terminal to reduce noise.
Inductive Loads

When an inductive load is connected to an I/O Unit, connect a surge suppressor or diode in parallel with the load as shown below.
IN
L

Diode

DC input

COM

OUT
Relay output or
triac output

Surge suppressor
COM

OUT
Relay output or
transistor output

Diode

COM

Note Use surge suppressors and diodes with the following specifications.
Surge suppressor specifications
Diode specifications
Resistor: 50 Ω
Breakdown voltage: 3 times load voltage min.
Capacitor: 0.47 µF
Mean rectification current: 1 A
Voltage: 200 V

323

Section 5-3

Wiring
External Wiring

Observe the following precautions for external wiring.
• When multi-conductor signal cable is being used, avoid combining I/O
wires and other control wires in the same cable.
• If wiring racks are parallel, allow at least 300 mm (12 inches) between the
racks.
Low-current cables
PLC I/O wiring
300 mm min.
Control cables
PLC power supply and
general control circuit wiring
300 mm min.
Power cables
Power lines

Ground to 100 Ω or less

If the I/O wiring and power cables must be placed in the same duct, they must
be shielded from each other using grounded steel sheet metal.

PLC I/O wiring

PLC power supply
and general
control wiring

Steel sheet metal
Power lines
200 mm min.

Ground to 100 Ω or less

324

SECTION 6
DIP Switch Settings
This section describes the settings of the DIP switch and how they affect operation.
6-1

DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

326

325

Section 6-1

DIP Switch Settings

6-1

DIP Switch Settings
There are two kinds of initial settings for a CS-series PLC: hardware settings
and software settings. Hardware settings are made with the CPU Unit’s DIP
switch and software settings are made in the PLC Setup (using a Programming Device).
The DIP switch can be reached by opening the battery compartment cover on
the front of the CPU Unit.
Note Always touch a grounded piece of metal to discharge any static electricity
from your body before touching the DIP switch. Otherwise, the PLC may malfunction due to static discharge.
Pin
Function
1
Write-protection
ON
for user program OFF
memory (UM)
(See note 1.)
2
Automatic transON
fer of the program
at start-up

OFF

3
4

CS1-H CPU Unit
Always OFF.
Peripheral port
communications
parameters

RS-232C port
communications
parameters

OFF
(default)
6

326

User-defined pin

Yes

Description
User program memory is write-protected when
this pin is ON. Turn ON to prevent the program
from being changed accidentally.
The program (AUTOEXEC.OBJ) and PLC
Setup (AUTOEXEC.STD) will be transferred
from the Memory Card to the CPU Unit automatically at start-up when this pin is ON. (See
note 4.)
A PLC’s software (program and PLC Setup)
can be completely initialized just by inserting a
new Memory Card and turning on the power.
This can be used to switch the system to a new
arrangement very quickly.
Note When pin 7 is ON, reading from the
Memory Card for easy backup is given
priority; even if pin 2 is ON, the program
will not be automatically transferred.

Not used.

OFF
(default)

Setting
Write-protected
Read/write

ON
OFF
(default)

Use parameters • Leave this pin OFF when using a Programming Console or CX-Programmer (periphset in the PLC
eral bus setting) connected to the peripheral
Setup.
port.
Auto-detect Pro•
Turn
this pin ON when the peripheral port is
gramming
being used for a device other than a ProDevice
gramming Console or CX-Programmer
(See note 2.)
(peripheral bus setting).
Auto-detect Pro- • Leave this pin OFF when the RS-232C port
is being used for a device other CX-Programming
grammer (peripheral bus setting) such as a
Device
Programmable Terminal or host computer.
(See note 3.)
•
Turn this pin ON when using CX-ProgramUse parameters
mer (peripheral bus setting) connected to the
set in the PLC
RS-232C port.
Setup.
A39512 ON
A39512 OFF

The ON/OFF status of this pin is reflected in
A39512. Use this function when you want to
create an Always-ON or Always-OFF condition
in the program without using an Input Unit.

Section 6-1

DIP Switch Settings
Pin
7

Function
Easy backup setting

Setting
ON

Writing from the
CPU Unit to the
Memory Card
Restoring from
the Memory
Card to the CPU
Unit.

OFF
(default)
8

Not used

Note

OFF
(default)

Verifying
contents of
Memory Card.
Always OFF.

Description
Press and hold the Memory Card Power Supply
Switch for three seconds.
To read from the Memory Card to the CPU Unit,
turn ON the PLC power.
This operation is given priority over automatic
transfer (pin 2 is ON) when power is ON. (See
note 5.)
Press and hold the Memory Card Power Supply
Switch for three seconds.

1. The following data is write-protected when pin 1 is ON: the user program
and all data in the parameter area such as the PLC Setup and registered
I/O table. Furthermore when pin 1 is ON, the user program and parameter
area won’t be cleared even when the memory clear operation is performed
from a Programming Device.
2. The auto-detect goes through baud rates in the following order: Programming Console → Peripheral bus at 9,600 bps, 19,200 bps, 38,400 bps, and
115,200 bps. Programming Devices that aren’t in peripheral bus mode and
devices in peripheral bus mode operating at 51,200 bps will not be detected.
3. The auto-detect operation goes through baud rates in the following order:
Peripheral bus at 9,600 bps, 19,200 bps, 38,400 bps, and 115,200 bps.
Programming Devices that aren’t in peripheral bus mode and devices in
peripheral bus mode operating at any other speeds will not be detected.
4. When pin 2 is ON and the power is turned ON, any I/O Memory file (AUTOEXEC.IOM, ATEXEC@@.IOM) (prefer to the CS/CJ Series Programming Manual) will also be transferred automatically. Both the program
(AUTOEXEC.OBJ) and the parameter area (AUTOEXEC.STD) must exist
in the Memory Card. I/O Memory files (AUTOEXEC.IOM, ATEXEC@@.IOM) are optional.
5. After reading data from the Memory Card to the CPU Unit with the simple
backup operation, the CPU Unit will remain in PROGRAM mode and cannot be changed to MONITOR or RUN mode until the power supply has
been cycled. After completing the backup operation, turn OFF the power
supply to the CPU Unit, change the settings of pin 7, and then turn the
power supply back ON.
DIP switch
settings

Pin
4

OFF

PLC Setup settings
Peripheral port settings
Default NT Link Peripheral Host Link
Serial
bus
Gateway
Programming Console or CX-Programmer in Peripheral
Bus Mode
(Auto-detect connected device’s baud rate)
OMRON CX-ProHost com- OMRON
Host
compocomputer PT (NT grammer in puter or
nent
Link)
Peripheral CX-Proor CXBus Mode grammer (CompoProgramin host
Way/F)
mer in
link mode
host link
mode

327

Section 6-1

DIP Switch Settings

DIP switch
settings

Pin
5

OFF

PLC Setup settings
Peripheral port settings
Default NT Link
NoPeripheral Host Link
protocol
bus
Host comCX-ProOMRON Standard
Host
grammer in puter or
computer PT (NT external
Peripheral CX-Prodevice
Link)
or CXBus Mode grammer
Programin host
mer in
link mode
host link
mode
CX-Programmer in Peripheral Bus Mode
(Auto-detect connected device’s baud rate)

Serial
Gateway
OMRON
component
(CompoWay/F)

Note Use the following settings for the network on the CX-Programmer and pin 4 on
the DIP switch when connecting the CX-Programmer via the peripheral or RS232C port.
CX-Programmer network Peripheral port
RS-232C port
setting
connections
connection
Toolbus (peripheral bus)
Turn OFF pin 4. Turn ON pin 5.
SYSMAC WAY (Host Link) Turn ON bit 4.
Turn OFF pin 5.

PLC Setup
None
Set to Host Link.

When CX-Programmer is set to host link mode, it won’t be possible to communicate (go online) in the following cases:
• The computer is connected to the CPU Unit’s peripheral port and pin 4 is
OFF.
• The computer is connected to the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port and pin 5 is
ON.
To go online, set CX-Programmer to peripheral bus mode, turn pin 4 ON (turn
pin 5 OFF for the RS-232C port), and set the communications mode to host
link mode in the PLC Setup.

328

SECTION 7
PLC Setup
This section describes the settings in the PLC Setup and how they are used to control CPU Unit operation.
7-1

7-2

PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

330

7-1-1

Overview of the PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

330

7-1-2

PLC Setup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

332

Explanations of PLC Setup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

357

329

Section 7-1

PLC Setup

7-1
7-1-1

PLC Setup
Overview of the PLC Setup
The PLC Setup contains basic CPU Unit software settings that the user can
change to customize PLC operation. These settings can be changed from a
Programming Console or other Programming Device. The various settings for
the CPU Unit are made in the PLC Setup.
The following table lists cases in which the PLC Setup must be changed. In
other cases, the PLC can be operated with the default settings.
Note To read or set parameters in the PLC Setup, use the version of CX-Programmer that corresponds to the parameters.
For example, with CX-Programmer Ver.3.@,when the PLC Setup is uploaded
from a PLC that was used to set the PLC Setup for CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or
higher only, the PLC Setup that was set cannot be downloaded again. (The
following screen will be displayed.) Use the CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 in this
case.
Scheduled Interrupt Time Units
Interval
Scheduled interrupt task

Cases when settings must be changed
The input response time settings for Basic I/O Units must be changed in the
following cases:
• Chattering or noise occur in CS-series Basic I/O Units.
• Short pulse inputs are being received for intervals longer than the cycle
time.
Data in all regions of I/O Memory (including the CIO Area, Work Areas,
Timer Flags and PVs, Task Flags, Index Registers, and Data Registers)
must be retained when the PLC’s power is turned on.
The status of bits force-set or force-reset from a Programming Device
(including Programming Consoles) must be retained when the PLC’s power
is turned on.
• You do not want the operating mode to be determined by the Programming Console’s mode switch setting at startup.
• You want the PLC to go into RUN mode or MONITOR mode and start
operating immediately after startup.
• You want the operating mode to be other than PROGRAM mode when
the power is turned ON.
Disabling detection of low-battery errors when it is not required.
Detecting interrupt-task errors is not required.
Data files are required but a Memory Card cannot be used or the files are
written frequently. (Part of the EM Area will be used as file memory.)
The peripheral port will not be used with the Programming Console or CXProgrammer (peripheral bus) communications speed auto-detection and will
not used the default host link communications settings such as 9,600 bps.
Note Pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit must be OFF to
change the PLC Setup settings.

330

Setting(s) to be changed
Basic I/O Unit Input Response Time

IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup

Forced Status Hold Bit Status at Startup

Startup Mode

Detect Low Battery
Detect Interrupt Task Error
EM File Memory
Peripheral Port Settings

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
Cases when settings must be changed

Setting(s) to be changed

The RS-232C port will not be used with the Programming Console or CXRS-232C Port Settings
Programmer (peripheral bus) communications speed auto-detection and will
not use the default host link communications settings such as 9,600 bps.
Note Pin 5 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit must be OFF to
change the PLC Setup settings.
You want to speed up communications with a PT via an NT Link.
Set the peripheral port or the RS-232C port
communications port baud rate to “highspeed NT Link.”
You want the intervals for scheduled interrupts to be set in units of 1 ms
Scheduled Interrupt Time Units
rather than 10 ms.
You want CPU Unit operation to be stopped for instruction errors, i.e., when Instruction Error Operation
the ER Flag or AER Flag is turned ON. (You want instruction errors to be
fatal errors.)
You want to find the instructions where instruction errors are occurring
(where the ER Flag is turning ON.
You want a minimum cycle time setting to create a consistent I/O refresh
Minimum Cycle Time
cycle.
You want to set a maximum cycle time other than 1 second (10 ms to
Watch Cycle Time
40,000 ms).
You want to delay peripheral servicing so that it is executed over several
Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time
cycles.
You want to give priority to servicing peripherals over program execution.
Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode
Here, “peripherals” include CPU Bus Units, Special I/O Units, Inner Boards,
the built-in RS-232C port, and the peripheral port.
A power OFF interrupt task will be used.
Power OFF Interrupt Task
You want to extend the detection of a power interruption to 10 to 20 ms.
Power OFF Detection Delay Time
You want to shorten the average cycle time when a lot of Special I/O Units Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing
are being used.
You want to extend the I/O refreshing interval for Special I/O Units.
You want to improve both program execution and peripheral servicing
CPU Processing Mode
response.
You do not want to record user-defined errors for FAL(006) and FPD(269) in FAL Error Log Registration
the error log.
You want to reduce fluctuation in the cycle time caused by text string proBackground Execution for Table Data, Text
cessing
String, and Data Shift Instructions
You do not want to wait for Units and Boards to complete startup processing Startup Condition
to start CPU Unit operation.

331

Section 7-1

PLC Setup

7-1-2

PLC Setup Settings
The Programming Console addresses given in this section are used to access
and change settings in the PLC Setup when using a Programming Console or
the Programming Console function of an NS-series Programming Terminal.
The PLC Setup is stored in the Parameter Area, which can be accessed only
from a Programming Device. Addresses in the Parameter Area cannot be
used as instruction operands in the same way as addresses in the I/O Memory Area.

Startup Operation Settings (CX-Programmer’s Startup Tab Page)

7-1-2-1

Startup Tab Page

Startup Hold Settings
Forced Status Hold Bit
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+80

Settings

0: Cleared
1: Retained
Default: 0

Function

Related
flags and
words

This setting determines whether or not the A50013
status of the Forced Status Hold Bit
(Forced Sta(A50013) is retained at startup.
tus Hold Bit)
When you want all of the bits that have been
force-set or force-reset to retain their forced
status when the power is turned on, turn ON
the Forced Status Hold Bit and set this setting to 1 (ON).

New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
at startup

IOM Hold Bit
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+80

332

Settings

0: Cleared
1: Retained
Default: 0

Function

Related
flags and
words

New
setting’s
effectiveness

This setting determines whether or not the A50012 (IOM Takes effect
Hold Bit)
at startup
status of the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is
retained at startup.
When you want all of the data in I/O Memory
to be retained when the power is turned on,
turn ON the IOM Hold Bit and set this setting to 1 (ON).

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
Mode Setting
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+81

---

Settings

Function

Use programming console
(PRCN):
Programming Console’s
mode switch
Program: PROGRAM
mode
Monitor: MONITOR mode
Run: RUN mode
Default: Program

Related
flags and
words

This setting determines whether the
--Startup Mode will be the mode set on
the Programming Console’s mode switch
or the mode set here in the PLC Setup.
If this setting is PRCN and a Programming Console isn’t connected, startup
mode will depend on the CPU Unit being
used.
CS1 CPU Unit: PROGRAM mode
CS1-H CPU Unit: RUN mode

New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
at startup

Execution Settings
Startup Condition
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+83

Settings

0: Wait for Units and
Boards.
1: Don’t wait.
Default: 0

Function

Related
flags and
words

To start the CPU Unit in MONITOR or PRO- --GRAM mode even if there is one or more
Boards or Units that has not completed startup processing, set this setting to 1 (Don’t
wait for Units and Boards). (The operation
for Inner Boards, however, also depends on
the next setting.)
To wait for all Units and Boards to finish startup processing, set this setting to 0 (Wait for
Units and Boards).

New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
at startup

Note This setting applies only to specific Units and Boards.
Specific Units
This setting applies to the ITNC-EIS01-CST and ITNC-EIX01-CST Open Network Controller-CS1 Bus Interface Units.
Specific Boards
There are currently no Inner Boards that are applicable as of July 2006.
Inner Board Setting
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+84

Settings

0: Wait for Boards.
1: Don’t wait.
Default: 0

Function

Related
flags and
words

--To start the CPU Unit in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode even if there is one or more of
Boards that has not completed startup processing, set this setting to 1 (Don’t wait for
Boards).
To wait for all Boards to finish startup processing, set this setting to 0 (Wait for Boards).
This setting is valid only if the Startup Condition is set to 1 (Don’t wait for Units and
Boards).

New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
at startup

Note There are currently no Inner Boards that are applicable as “Specific Boards”
as of July 2006.

333

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
7-1-2-2

CPU Unit Settings (CPU Settings Tab Page on the CX-Programmer)

Execute Process
Detect Low Battery
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+128
15

Settings

0: Detect
1: Do not detect
Default: 0

Function

This setting determines whether CPU Unit
battery errors are detected. If this setting is
set to 0 and a battery error is detected, the
ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will
flash and the Battery Error Flag (A40204)
will be turned ON, but CPU Unit operation
will continue.

Related
flags and
words

New setting’s effectiveness

A40204 (Bat- Takes effect
tery Error
the next cycle
Flag)

Detect Interrupt Task Error
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+128

334

Settings

0: Detect
1: Do not detect
Default: 0

Function

This setting determines whether interrupt
task errors are detected. If this setting is set
to 0 and an interrupt task error is detected,
the ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will
flash and the Interrupt Task Error Flag
(A40213) will be turned ON, but CPU Unit
operation will continue.

Related
flags and
words
A40213
(Interrupt
Task Error
Flag)

New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
the next cycle

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
Stop CPU on Instruction Error (Instruction Error Operation)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+197

Settings

0: Continue
1: Stop
Default: 0

Function

Related
flags and
words

This setting determines whether instruction
errors (instruction processing errors (ER)
and illegal access errors (AER)) are treated
as non-fatal or fatal errors. When this setting
is set to 1, CPU Unit operation will be
stopped if the ER or AER Flags is turned
ON (even when the AER Flag is turned ON
for an indirect DM/EM BCD error).
Related Flags: A29508 (Instruction Processing Error Flag)
A29509 (Indirect DM/EM BCD Error Flag)
A29510 (Illegal Access Error Flag)

A29508,
A29509,
A29510
(If this setting
is set to 0,
these flags
won’t be
turned ON
even if an
instruction
error occurs.)

Function

Related
flags and
words

New
setting’s
effectiveness
At start of
operation.

Don’t Register FAL to Error Log
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+129

Settings

0: Record userdefined FAL errors
in error log.
1: Don’t record userdefined FAL errors
in error log.
Default: 0

This setting determines if user-defined FAL --errors created with FAL(006) and time monitoring for FPD(269) will be recorded in the
error log (A100 to A199). Set it to 1 so prevent these errors from being recorded.

New
setting’s
effectiveness
Whenever
FAL(006) is
executed
(every cycle)

Memory Allocation Settings
EM File Setting Enabled
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+136

Settings

Function

0: None
1: EM File Memory
Enabled
Default: 0

This setting determines whether part of the
EM Area will be used for file memory.

Related
flags and
words
---

New
setting’s
effectiveness
After initialization from
Programming Device
or via FINS
command.

EM Start File No. (Starting Memory Starting Bank)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+136

0 to 3

Settings

0 to 6
Default: 0

Function

If bit 7 (above) is set to 1, the setting here
specifies the EM bank where file memory
begins. The specified EM bank and all subsequent banks will be used as file memory.
This setting will be disabled if bit 7 is set to
0.

Related
flags and
words
A344 (EM
File Memory
Starting
Bank)

New
setting’s
effectiveness
After initialization from
Programming Device
or via FINS
command.

335

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
Background Execution Settings
Table Data Process Instructions
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+198

Settings

Function

0: Not executed in
background
1: Executed in background
Default: 0

This setting determines if Table Data
Instructions will be processed over multiple
cycle times (i.e., processed in the background).

Related
flags and
words
---

New
setting’s
effectiveness
Start of operation

String Data Process Instructions
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+198

Settings

Function

0: Not executed in
background
1: Executed in background
Default: 0

This setting determines if Text String Data
Instructions will be processed over multiple
cycle times (i.e., processed in the background).

Related
flags and
words
---

New
setting’s
effectiveness
Start of operation

Data Shift Process Instructions
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+198

Settings

Function

Related
flags and
words

0: Not executed in
This setting determines if Data Shift Instruc- --background
tions will be processed over multiple cycle
1: Executed in back- times (i.e., processed in the background).
ground
Default: 0

New
setting’s
effectiveness
Start of operation

Communications Port Number for Background Execution
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+198

7-1-2-3

0 to 3

Settings

0 to 7: Communications ports 0 to 7
(internal logical
ports)

Function

Related
flags and
words

The communications port number (internal --logical port) that will be used for background
execution.

New
setting’s
effectiveness
Start of operation

FB Communications Instruction Settings
(Settings for OMRON FB Library)
The following PLC Setup settings are used only when using the OMRON FB
Library.

Number of Resends
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+200

336

0 to 3

Settings

0 to F: 0 to 15
Default: 0

Function

Set the number of retries for sending commands when executing DeviceNet explicit
messages or FINS messages within function blocks.

Related
flags and
words
A58000 to
A58003

New
setting’s
effectiveness
Start of
operation

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
FB Communications Instruction Response Monitoring Time
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+201

0 to 15

Settings

Function

0001 to FFFF (Unit: A response timeout occurs when no
0.1 s, 0.1 to 6553.5) response is returned within the time set
here for FINS commands executed within a
0000: 2 s
function block.

Related
flags and
words
A581

New
setting’s
effectiveness
Start of
operation

DeviceNet Communications Instruction Response Monitoring Time
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+202

0 to 15

Settings

Function

0001 to FFFF (Unit: A response timeout occurs when no
0.1 s, 0.1 to 6553.5) response is returned within the time set
here for explicit messages commands exe0000: 2 s
cuted within a function block.

Related
flags and
words
A582

New setting’s
effectiveness
Start of operation

Note The number of resends and response monitoring time must be set by the user
in the FB communications instructions settings in the PLC Setup, particularly
when using function blocks from the OMRON FB Library to execute FINS
messages or DeviceNet explicit messages communications. The values set in
this PLC Setup for OMRON FB Library will be automatically stored in the
related Auxiliary Area words A580 to A582 and used by the function blocks
from the OMRON FB Library.

337

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
7-1-2-4

Time and Interrupt Settings (CX-Programmer Timings Tab Page)

Enable Watch Cycle Time Setting
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+209

Settings

0: Default
1: Bits 0 to 14
Default: 0

Function

Related
flags and
words

A40108
Set to 1 to enable the Watch Cycle Time
Setting in bits 0 to 14. Leave this setting at 0 (Cycle Time
Too Long
for a maximum cycle time of 1 s.
Flag)

New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
at the start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)

Watch Cycle Time
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+209

0 to 14

Settings

001 to FA0: 10 to
40,000 ms
(10-ms units)
Default: 001 (1 s)

Function

This setting is valid only when bit 15 of 209
is set to 1. The Cycle Time Too Long Flag
(A40108) will be turned ON if the cycle time
exceeds this setting.

Related
flags and
words
A264 and
A265
(Present
Cycle Time)

New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
at the start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)

Cycle Time (Minimum Cycle Time)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+208

338

0 to 15

Settings

0001 to 7D00: 1 to
32,000 ms
(1-ms units)
Default: 0000
(No minimum)

Function

Related
flags and
words

Set to 0001 to 7D00 to specify a minimum
--cycle time. If the cycle time is less than this
setting, it will be extended until this time
passes. Leave this setting at 0000 for a variable cycle time. (Can’t be changed during
operation.)
This cycle time will apply to the program
execution cycle when a parallel processing
mode is used.

New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
at the start of
operation

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
Schedule Interrupt Interval
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+195

0 to 3

Settings

0 hex: 10 ms
1 hex: 1.0 ms
Default: 0 hex

Function

Sets the time interval for the scheduled
interrupt task.

Related
flags and
words
---

New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
at the start of
operation.
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)

Power OFF Detection Time (Power OFF Detection Delay Time)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+225

0 to 7

Settings

00 to 0A:
0 to 10 ms
(1-ms units)
Default: 00

Function

Related
flags and
words

--This setting determines how much of a
delay there will be from the detection of a
power interruption (approximately 10 to
25 ms after the AC power supply voltage
drops below 85% of the rated value or DC
power supply voltage drops below 80% of
the rated value) to the confirmation of a
power interruption. The default setting is 0
ms.
When the power OFF interrupt task is
enabled, it will be executed when the power
interruption is confirmed. If the power OFF
interrupt task is disabled, the CPU will be
reset and operation will be stopped.

New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
at startup or
at the start of
operation.
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)

Power OFF Interrupt Disable
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+225

Settings

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Default: 0

Function

Related
flags and
words

When this setting is set to 1, the power OFF --interrupt task will be executed when power
is interrupted.

New setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
at startup or
at the start of
operation.
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)

339

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
7-1-2-5

Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing (CX-Programmer SIOU Refresh Tab
Page)

Item

Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)

Cyclic Refreshing of Units 0 to
15

+226

0 to 15

Cyclic Refreshing of Units 16
to 31

+227

0 to 15

Cyclic Refreshing of Units 32
to 47

+228

0 to 15

Cyclic Refreshing of Units 48
to 63

+229

0 to 15

Cyclic Refreshing of Units 64
to 79

+230

0 to 15

Cyclic Refreshing of Units 80
to 95

+231

0 to 15

Settings

0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0

Function

Related
flags and
words

--These settings determine whether
data will be exchanged between the
specified Unit and the Special I/O
Unit’s allocated words (10
words/Unit) during cyclic refreshing
for Special I/O Units.
Turn ON the corresponding bit to disable cyclic refreshing when the Unit
will be refreshed in an interrupt task
by IORF(097), several Special I/O
Units are being used and you don’t
want to extend the cycle time, or the
cycle time is so short that the Special
I/O Unit’s internal processing can’t
keep up.
(Special I/O Units can be refreshed
from the program with IORF(097).)

New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes
effect at the
start of
operation

Note If a Special I/O Unit is not refreshed periodically from the CPU Unit (at least
every 11 seconds), a CPU Unit monitoring error will occur. (The ERH indicator
and RUN indicator will be lit on the Special I/O Unit.) If cyclic I/O refreshing of
a Special I/O Unit is disabled, use the IORF(097) instruction to refresh the
Unit from the user program.

340

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
7-1-2-6

Basic I/O Unit Input Response Times (Unit Settings Tab Page on the CXProgrammer)

Item

Rack 0, Slot 0
Rack 0, Slot 1
Rack 0, Slot 2
Rack 0, Slot 3
Rack 0, Slot 4
Rack 0, Slot 5
Rack 0, Slot6
Rack 0, Slot 7
Rack 0, Slot 8
Rack 0, Slot 9
Rack 1, Slots 0 to 9
Rack 2, Slots 0 to 9
Rack 3, Slots 0 to 9
Rack 4, Slots 0 to 9
Rack 5, Slots 0 to 9
Rack 6, Slots 0 to 9
Rack 7, Slots 0 to 9

Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
+15 to 19
+20 to 24
+25 to 29
+30 to 34
+35 to 39
+40 to 44
+45 to 49

0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
See
Rack 0.

Settings

00: 8 ms
10: 0 ms
11: 0.5 ms
12: 1 ms
13: 2 ms
14: 4 ms
15: 8 ms
16: 16 ms
17: 32 ms
Default:
00 (8 ms)

Function

Sets the input response time
(ON response time = OFF
response time) for CS-series
Basic I/O Units. The default
setting is 8 ms and the setting
range is 0.5 ms to 32 ms.
This value can be increased to
reduce the effects of chattering and noise, or it can be
reduced to allow reception of
shorter input pulses.

Related
flags and
words
A220 to
A259:
Actual
input
response
times for
Basic I/O
Units

New setting’s
effectiveness
Takes
effect at
startup

341

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
7-1-2-7

Host Link (RS-232C) Port Tab Page
The following settings are valid when pin 5 on the DIP switch on the CPU Unit
is ON.

Host Link Settings
Communications Settings
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
15

Settings

0: Standard
1: PLC Setup (custom)
Default: 0

Function

Related
flags and
words

*The default settings are for 1 start bit, 7
A61902
data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits, and a baud (RS-232C
rate of 9,600 bps.
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.

Mode: Communications Mode
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
8 to 11

Settings

00: Host link
05: Host link
Default: 0

Function

Related
flags and
words

This setting determines whether the RS232C port will operate in host link mode or
another serial communications mode. (Host
link can be specified with 00 or 05.)
The Peripheral bus mode is for communications with Programming Devices other than
the Programming Console.

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

Function

Related
flags and
words

These settings are valid only when the communications mode is set to host link or noprotocol.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.

Format: Data Bits
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
3

342

Settings

0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
Default: 0

When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
Format: Stop Bits
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
2

Settings

0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
Default: 0

Function

Related
flags and
words

These settings are valid only when the communications mode is set to host link or noprotocol.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

Function

Related
flags and
words

These settings are valid only when the communications mode is set to host link or noprotocol.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

Function

Related
flags and
words

These settings are valid only when the communications mode is set to host link or noprotocol.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.

Format: Parity
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
0 to 1

Settings

00: Even
01: Odd
10: None
Default: 00

When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.

Baud Rate (bps)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+161

0 to 7

Settings

00: 9,600 bps
01: 300 bps
02: 600 bps
03: 1,200 bps
04: 2,400 bps
05: 4,800 bps
06: 9,600 bps
07: 19,200 bps
08: 38,400 bps
09: 57,600 bps
0A: 115,200 bps
Default: 00

When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.

Unit Number (for CPU Unit in Host Link Mode)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+163
0 to 7

Settings

00 to 1F:
(0 to 31)
Default: 00

Function

Related
flags and
words

This setting determines the CPU Unit’s unit
number when it is connected in a 1-to-N
(N=2 to 32) Host Link.

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.

343

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
NT Link Settings
Mode: Communications Mode
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
8 to 11

Settings

Function

Related
flags and
words

This setting determines whether the RS232C port will operate in host link mode or
another serial communications mode.
Note Communications will not be possible
with PTs set for 1:1 NT Links.

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

Settings

Function

Related
flags and
words

00: Standard
0A: High-speed NT
Link*
Default: 00

* Set to 115,200 bps when setting this value
from the CX-Programmer. To return to the
standard setting, leave the setting set to
“PLC Setup” and set the baud rate to 9,600
bps.

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

02: 1:N NT Link
Default: 0

When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.

Baud Rate (bps)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+161
0 to 7

When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.

NT Link Max. (Maximum Unit Number in NT Link Mode)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+166
0 to 3

Settings

0 to 7
Default: 0

Function

Related
flags and
words

This setting determines the highest unit
number of PT that can be connected to the
PLC.

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

Function

Related
flags and
words

When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.

Peripheral Bus Settings
Communications Settings
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
15

Settings

0: Standard*
1: PLC Setup (custom)
Default: 0

*The default settings are for a baud rate of
9,600 bps.

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.

Mode: Communications Mode
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
8 to 11

344

Settings

04: Peripheral bus
Default: 0

Function

Related
flags and
words

This setting determines whether the RS232C port will operate in host link mode or
another serial communications mode. (Host
link can be specified with 00 or 05.)
The Peripheral Bus mode is for communications with Programming Devices other than
the Programming Console.

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
Baud Rate (bps)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+161
0 to 7

Settings

00: 9,600 bps
06: 9,600 bps
07: 19,200 bps
08: 38,400 bps
09: 57,600 bps
0A: 115,200 bps
Default: 00

Function

Settings 00 and 06 through 0A are valid
when the communications mode is set to
peripheral bus.

Related
flags and
words
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.

No-protocol Settings
Standard/Custom Settings
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
15

Settings

0: Standard
1: Custom
Default: 0

Function

Related
flags and
words

The standard settings are as follows:
A61902
1 stop bit, 7-bit data, even parity, 2 stop bits, (RS-232C
Port Settings
9,600 bps
Changing
Flag)

When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Serial Communications Mode
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
08 to 11

Settings

Related
flags and
words

When setting is read
by CPU Unit

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Function

Related
flags and
words

When setting is read
by CPU Unit

This setting is valid only in no-protocol communications mode. Set the Standard/Custom setting (word 160, bit 15) to 1 to enable
this setting.

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Function

Related
flags and
words

When setting is read
by CPU Unit

This setting is valid only in no-protocol communications mode. Set the Standard/Custom setting (word 160, bit 15) to 1 to enable
this setting.

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Function

03 Hex: No-protocol This setting determines whether the RS232C port will operate in no-protocol mode
Default: 00 Hex
or another serial communications mode.

Data Length
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
3

Settings

0: 7-bit
1: 8-bit
Default: 0

Stop Bits
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
2

Settings

0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
Default: 0

345

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
Parity
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
00 to 01

Settings

Function

Related
flags and
words

When setting is read
by CPU Unit

This setting is valid only in no-protocol communications mode. Set the Standard/Custom setting (word 160, bit 15) to 1 to enable
this setting.

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Settings

Function

Related
flags and
words

When setting is read
by CPU Unit

00 Hex: 9,600 bps
01 Hex: 300 bps
02 Hex: 600 bps
03 Hex: 1,200 bps
04 Hex: 2,400 bps
05 Hex: 4,800 bps
06 Hex: 9,600 bps
07 Hex: 19,200 bps
08 Hex: 38,400 bps
09 Hex: 57,600 bps
0A Hex: 115,200 bps
Default: 00 Hex

This setting is valid only in no-protocol communications mode. Set the Standard/Custom setting (word 160, bit 15) to 1 to enable
this setting.

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Settings

Function

Related
flags and
words

When setting is read
by CPU Unit

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

00 Hex: Even
01 Hex: Odd
10 Hex: None
Default: 00

Baud Rate
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+161
00 to 07

Send Delay
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+162
00 to 15

346

0000 to 270F Hex (0 When the TXD(236) instruction is executed,
to 99,990 ms)
data will be sent from the RS-232C after the
send delay set here has expired.
Unit: 10 ms
Default: 0000

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
Start Code/End Code
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+164
8 to 15

+165

Settings

00 to FF
Default: 00

0 to 7

00 to FF
Default: 00

0: None
1: Code in 164
Default: 0
0: None
1: Code in 164
2: CR+LF
Default: 0

8 to 9

0 to 7

00: 256 bytes
01 to FF:
1 to 255 bytes
Default: 00

Function

Related
flags and
words

When setting is read
by CPU Unit

Start code: Set this start code only when the
start code is enabled (1) in bits 12 to 15 of
165.
End code: Set this end code only when the
end code is enabled (1) in bits 8 to 11 of
165.
Start code setting:
A setting of 1 enables the start code in 164
bits 8 to 15.

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Related
flags and
words

New setting’s effectiveness

A61901
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Function

Related
flags and
words

New setting’s effectiveness

This setting determines whether the communications mode for the RS-232C port
port.
The peripheral bus mode is used for all Programming Devices except for Programming
Consoles.
This setting determines whether the communications mode for the RS-232C port.
(Host Link can be used when specified to
either 0 or 5 hex.)

A61901 (RS232C Port
Settings
Changing
Flag)

Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

A61901 (RS232C Port
Settings
Changing
Flag)

Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

End code setting:
With a setting of 0, the amount of data being
received must be specified. A setting of 1
enables the end code in bits 0 to 7 of 164. A
setting of 2 enables an end code of CR+LF.
Set the data length to be sent and received
with no-protocol communications. The end
code and start code are not included in the
data length.
Set this value only when the end code setting in bits 8 to 11 of 165 is “0: None.”
This setting can be used to change the
amount of data that can be transferred at
one time by TXD(236) or RXD(235). The
default setting is the maximum value of 256
bytes.

Serial Gateway Settings
Communications Settings
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
15

Settings

0: Default (standard)*
1: PLC Setup (custom)
Default: 0

Function

*The default settings are for a baud rate of
9,600 bps.

Mode: Communications Mode
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
8 to 11

+160

8 to 11

Settings

9: Serial Gateway
Default: 0

0: Host Link
5: Host Link
Default: 0

347

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
Data Bits
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
3

Settings

0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
Default: 0

Function

Related
flags and
words

These settings are valid when the RS-232C A61901
Port Settings Selection is set to 1: PLC
(RS-232C
Setup.
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

New setting’s effectiveness
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Stop Bits
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
2

Settings

0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
Default: 0

Function

Related
flags and
words

These settings are valid when the RS-232C A61901
Port Settings Selection is set to 1: PLC
(RS-232C
Setup.
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

New setting’s effectiveness
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Parity
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
0 to 1

Settings

00: Even
01: Odd
10: None
Default: 00

Function

Related
flags and
words

New setting’s effectiveness

These setting is valid only when the communications mode is set to Host Link.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Function

Related
flags and
words

New setting’s effectiveness

These setting is valid only when the communications mode is set to Host Link.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Baud Rate (bps)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+161
0 to 7

348

Settings

00: 9,600
01: 300
02: 600
03: 1,200
04 2,400
05: 4,800
06: 9,600
07: 19,200
08: 38,400
09: 57,600
0A: 115,200
Default: 00

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
Response Monitoring Time
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+167
8 to 15

7-1-2-8

Settings

00: 5 s
01 to FF: 100 to
25,500 ms (Unit:
100 ms)
Default: 00

Function

Related
flags and
words

New setting’s effectiveness

Monitors the time from when the FINS command that has been converted into the
specified protocol using Serial Gateway is
sent until the response is received.
Default: 5 s; PLC Setup: 0.1 to 25.5 s
Note: If a timeout occurs, the FINS end
code 0205 hex (response timeout) will be
returned to the FINS source.

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Peripheral Port Tab Page

The following settings are valid when pin 4 on the DIP switch on the CPU Unit
is ON.

Host Link Settings
Communications Settings
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
15

Settings

0: Standard*
1: PLC Setup (Custom)
Default: 0

Function

Related
flags and
words

A61901
*The default settings are for 1 start bit, 7
data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits, and a baud (Peripheral
Port Settings
rate of 9,600 bps.
Changing
Flag)

When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Mode: Communications Mode
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
8 to 11

Settings

00: Host Link
05: Host link
Default: 0

Function

Related
flags and
words

When setting is read
by CPU Unit

This setting determines whether the peripheral port will operate in host link mode or
another serial communications mode. (Host
link can be specified with 00 or 05.)
The Peripheral Bus Mode is for communications with Programming Devices other than
the Programming Console.

A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

349

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
Format: Data Bits
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
3

Settings

0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
Default: 0

Function

Related
flags and
words

When setting is read
by CPU Unit

These settings are valid only when the communications mode is set to Host link.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.

A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Function

Related
flags and
words

When setting is read
by CPU Unit

These settings are valid only when the communications mode is set to Host link.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.

A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Function

Related
flags and
words

When setting is read
by CPU Unit

These setting is valid only when the communications mode is set to Host link.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.

A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Function

Related
flags and
words

When setting is read
by CPU Unit

This setting is valid only when the communications mode is set to the Host Link mode.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.

A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Function

Related
flags and
words

When setting is read
by CPU Unit

This setting determines the CPU Unit’s unit
number when it is connected in a 1-to-N
(N=2 to 32) Host Link.

A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Format: Stop Bits
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
2

Settings

0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
Default: 0

Format: Parity
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
0 and 1

Settings

00: Even
01: Odd
10: None
Default: 00

Baud Rate (bps)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+145
0 to 7

Settings

00: 9,600 bps
01: 300 bps
02: 600 bps
03: 1,200 bps
04: 2,400 bps
05: 4,800 bps
06: 9,600 bps
07: 19,200 bps
08: 38,400 bps
09: 57,600 bps
0A: 115,200 bps
Default: 00

Unit Number (for CPU Unit in Host Link Mode)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+147
0 to 7

350

Settings

00 to 1F
(0 to 31)
Default: 00

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
NT Link Settings
Mode: Communications Mode
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
8 to 11

Settings

02: 1:N NT Link
Default: 0

Function

Related
flags and
words

When setting is read
by CPU Unit

This setting determines whether the RS232C port will operate in host link mode or
another serial communications mode.
Note Communications will not be possible
with PTs set for 1:1 NT Links.

A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Function

Related
flags and
words

When setting is read
by CPU Unit

Baud Rate (bps)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+145
0 to 7

Settings

00: Standard
0A: High-speed NT
Link*
Default: 00

* Set to 115,200 bps when setting this value A61901
from the CX-Programmer.
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

NT Link Max. (Maximum Unit Number in NT Link Mode)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+150
0 to 3

Settings

0 to 7
Default: 0

Function

Related
flags and
words

When setting is read
by CPU Unit

This setting determines the highest unit
number of PT that can be connected to the
PLC in NT Link mode.

A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Function

Related
flags and
words

When setting is read
by CPU Unit

A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Function

Related
flags and
words

When setting is read
by CPU Unit

This setting determines whether the communications mode for the peripheral port.
The Peripheral Bus Mode is used for all Programming Devices except for Programming
Consoles.

A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Peripheral Bus Settings
Communications Setting
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
15

Settings

0: Default (standard)*
1: PLC Setup (custom)
Default: 0

*The default settings are for a baud rate of
9,600 bps.

Mode: Communications Mode
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
8 to 11

Settings

4: Peripheral bus
Default: 0

351

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
Baud Rate (bps)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+145
0 to 7

Settings

00: 9,600 bps
06: 9,600 bps
07: 19,200 bps
08: 38,400 bps
09: 57,600 bps
0A: 115,200 bps
Default: 00

Function

Related
flags and
words

When setting is read
by CPU Unit

The following settings are valid for the
Peripheral Bus Mode: 00 and 06 to 0A hex.

A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Function

Related
flags and
words

New setting’s effectiveness

A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Function

Related
flags and
words

New setting’s effectiveness

This setting determines whether the communications mode for the peripheral port.
The peripheral bus mode is used for all Programming Devices except for Programming
Consoles.

A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Function

Related
flags and
words

New setting’s effectiveness

These settings are valid when the Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to 1: PLC
Setup.

A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Function

Related
flags and
words

New setting’s effectiveness

These settings are valid when the Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to 1: PLC
Setup.

A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Serial Gateway Settings
Communications Setting
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
15

Settings

0: Default (standard)*
1: PLC Setup (custom)

*The default settings are for a baud rate of
9,600 bps.

Mode: Communications Mode
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
8 to 11

Settings

9: Serial Gateway
Default: 0

Format: Data Bits
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
3

Settings

0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
Default: 0

Format: Stop Bits
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
2

352

Settings

0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
Default: 0

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
Format: Parity
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
0 to 1

Settings

00: Even
01: Odd
10: None
Default: 00

Function

Related
flags and
words

New setting’s effectiveness

These setting is valid only when the communications mode is set to Host Link.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.

A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Function

Related
flags and
words

New setting’s effectiveness

These setting is valid only when the communications mode is set to Host Link.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.

A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Function

Related
flags and
words

New setting’s effectiveness

Monitors the time from when the FINS command is converted into CompoWay/F using
Serial Gateway and sent until the response
is received.
Default: 5 s; PLC Setup: 0.1 to 25.5 s
Note: If a timeout occurs, the FINS end
code 0205 hex (response timeout) will be
returned to the FINS source.

A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)

Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)

Baud Rate (bps)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+145
0 to 7

Settings

00: 9,600
01: 300
02: 600
03: 1,200
04 2,400
05: 4,800
06: 9,600
07: 19,200
08: 38,400
09: 57,600
0A: 115,200
Default: 00

Response Monitoring Time
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+151
8 to 15

7-1-2-9

Settings

00: 5 s
01 to FF: 100 to
25,500 ms (Unit:
100 ms)
Default: 00

Peripheral Service Tab Page (CPU Processing Mode Settings)

Peripheral Service Mode (Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode)
Instruction Execution Time
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+219
08 to 15

Settings

00
05 to FF (hex)
Default: 00 (hex)

Function

Related
flags and
words

The Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode will A266 and
A267
be used if a time slice is set for instruction
execution (5 to 255 ms in 1-ms increments).
Instructions will be executed at the set time
slice.
00: Disable priority servicing
05 to FF: Time slice for instruction execution
(5 to 255 ms in 1-ms increments)

When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)

353

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
Peripheral Service Execution Time
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+219
00 to 07

Settings

00 to FF (hex)
Default: 00 (hex)

Function

Related
flags and
words

A266 and
This parameter sets the time slice for
peripheral servicing (0.1 to 25.5 ms in 0.1- A267
ms increments). The specified amount of
time will be used to service peripherals for
each time slice.
00: Disable priority servicing
01 to FF: Time slice for peripheral servicing
(0.1 to 25.5 ms in 0.1-ms increments)

When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)

Target Units (Units for Priority Servicing)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+220
08 to 15
00 to 07
+221
08 to 15
00 to 07
+222
08 to 15

Settings

00
10 to 1F
20 to 2F
E1
FC
FD
Default: 00

Function

Up to five Units can be specified for priority
servicing.
00: Disable priority servicing
10 to 1F: CPU Bus Unit unit number (0 to
15) + 10 (hex)
20 to 7F: CS-series Special I/O Unit unit
number (0 to 96) + 20 (hex)
FC: RS-232C port
FD: Peripheral port

Related
flags and
words
---

When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)

Sync/Async Comms (Parallel Processing Modes)
The following setting is supported only by the CS1-H CPU Units

Execution Mode (Parallel Processing Mode)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+219
08 to 15

354

Settings

00
01
02
Default: 00

Function

Related
flags and
words

This parameter specifies if I/O memory
--access is to be included in the peripheral
service processing executed in parallel with
instruction execution.
00: Not specified (disable parallel processing)
01: Synchronous (Synchronous Memory
Access
02: Asynchronous (Asynchronous Memory
Access)

When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
Set Time to All Events (Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time)

Enable Fixed Servicing Time
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+218
15

Settings

0: Default*
1: Bits 0 to 7
Default: 0

Function

Set to 1 to enable the fixed peripheral servicing time in bits 0 to 7.
*Default: 4% of the cycle time

Related
flags and
words
---

When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)

Fixed Servicing Time
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+218
0 to 7

Settings

00 to FF:
0.0 to 25.5 ms
(0.1-ms units)
Default: 00

Function

Set the peripheral servicing time.
This setting is valid only when bit 15 of 218
is set to 1.

Related
flags and
words
---

When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)

355

Section 7-1

PLC Setup
7-1-2-10

FINS Protection Tab Page (Protection Against FINS Writes Across
Networks) (CS-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Only)

Enabling FINS Write Protection (Use FINS Write Protection)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+448

Settings

0: Disable FINS
write protection
1: Enable FINS write
protection
Default: 0

Function

Enables or disables write protection for the
CPU Unit from FINS command sent over a
network (i.e., all connections except for
serial connections).

Related
flags and
words
---

New setting’s
effectiveness
At any time

Nodes Excluded from Write Protection (Protection Releasing Addresses)
New setting’s
effectiveness
Set the nodes and networks from which FINS write operations will be enabled. The total number of nodes set to be
excluded from write protection will be automatically set.
A maximum of 32 nodes can be set. If these settings are not made (i.e., if the total number of nodes is 0), write operations
will be disabled for all nodes but the local node.
Note: This setting is valid only when FINS write protection has been enabled.
+449 to
8 to 15
0 to 127
FINS command source network address
--At any time
480
(00 to 7F hex)
FINS command source node address
--0 to 7
1 to 255
(01 to FE hex)
Note: 255 (FF hex)
can be set to include
all nodes in the
specified network.
+448
0 to 7
0 to 32
Number of nodes excluded from protection --(00 to 20 hex)
(Automatically calculated by the CX-Programmer; do not set.)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)

356

Settings

Function

Related
flags and
words

Section 7-2

Explanations of PLC Setup Settings

7-2

Explanations of PLC Setup Settings

Basic I/O Unit Input Response Time
The input response time can be set for CS-series Basic I/O Units by Rack and
Slot number. Increasing this value reduces the effects of chattering and noise.
Decreasing this value allows reception of shorter input pulses, (but do not set
the ON response time or OFF response time to less than the cycle time).
Pulses shorter than the input
response time are not received.

Input such as a
proximity switch

Input bit

Input response time Input response time

The default setting for the input response time is 8 ms and the setting range is
0 to 32 ms. When the input response time is set to 0 ms, the only delay will be
the delays in the Unit’s internal elements. For information on the Unit’s internal
elements, refer to Appendix A Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units and check the input response time for the Unit that you are
using.
The input response time settings are transferred to the CS-series Basic I/O
Units when the PLC is turned on.
When the Unit’s settings are changed, they are stored in A220 to A259 (Actual
Input Response Times for Basic I/O Units). When the settings in the PLC
Setup have been changed with the PLC in PROGRAM mode, the PLC Setup
settings will differ from the actual settings in the Units. In this case, the values
in A220 to A259 can be checked to see the input response times actually set
in the Units.

IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup
The IOM Hold Bit (A50012) can be turned ON to retain all of the data in I/O
Memory when the CPU Unit’s operating mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN/MONITOR mode. When the PLC is turned on, the
IOM Hold Bit itself will be cleared (OFF) unless it is protected with this PLC
Setup setting.
If the IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup setting is ON, the status of the IOM Hold
Bit will be protected when the PLC is turned on. If this setting is ON and the
IOM Hold BIt itself is ON, all data in I/O memory will be retained when the
PLC is turned on.
Note If the backup battery fails or is disconnected, the IOM Hold Bit will be cleared
whether this setting is ON or OFF.

357

Section 7-2

Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
OFF (0): IOM Hold Bit cleared at start-up
Non-retained parts
of I/O memory

Power
OFF

Power Non-retained parts
ON
of I/O memory:

Cleared

Mode switch

Retained

Power on

IOM Hold Bit: 1
(ON)

Not retained

IOM Hold Bit: 0
(OFF)

Not retained when
power is turned on.

ON (1): IOM Hold Bit protected at start-up

Non-retained parts
of I/O memory

Mode switch

Retained

IOM Hold Bit: 1
(ON)

Power
OFF

Power
ON Non-retained parts

of I/O memory:
Retained

Power on

Retained

IOM Hold Bit: 0
(OFF)

Retained when
power is turned on.

Forced Status Hold Bit at Startup
The Forced Status Hold Bit (A50013) can be turned ON to retain the forced
status of all bits that have been force-set or force-reset when the CPU Unit’s
operating mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN/MONITOR
mode. When the PLC is turned on, the Forced Status Hold Bit itself will be
cleared (OFF) unless it is protected with this PLC Setup setting.
If the Forced Status Hold Bit at Startup setting is ON, the status of the Forced
Status Hold Bit will be protected when the PLC is turned on. If this setting is
ON and the Forced Status Hold BIt itself is ON, all force-set and force-reset
bits will retain their forced status when the PLC is turned on.
Note If the backup battery fails or is disconnected, the Forced Status Hold Bit will
be cleared whether this setting is ON or OFF.

358

Section 7-2

Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
OFF (0): Forced Status Hold Bit cleared at start-up

Forced bit status

Mode switch

Power
OFF

Retained

Power
ON

Forced bit status

Power on

Forced Status
Hold Bit: 1 (ON)

Not retained

Forced Status
Hold Bit: 0 (OFF)

Not retained when
power is turned
ON.

ON (1): Forced Status Hold Bit protected at start-up

Forced bit status

Mode switch

Power
OFF

Retained

Forced Status
Hold Bit: 1 (ON)

Power
ON

Forced bit status

Power on

Retained

Forced Status
Hold Bit: 0 (OFF)

Retained when
power is turned
ON.

Startup Mode Setting
This setting determines whether the startup mode will be the mode set on the
Programming Console’s mode switch or the mode set here in the PLC Setup.
!Caution The CS1-H CPU Unit will start in RUN mode if it is set to use the mode that is
specified on the Programming Console but a Programming Console is not
connected.

PRCN: Programming Console's mode switch
Mode switch
setting
RUN mode

Power ON

Other: PLC Setup's Startup Mode setting
PRG: PROGRAM mode
MON: MONITOR mode
RUN: RUN mode

Power ON

359

Section 7-2

Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
Detect Low Battery

This setting determines whether CPU Unit battery errors are detected. Set the
PLC Setup so that battery errors are not detected when using battery-free
operation. Refer to information on battery-free operation in the CS/CJ Series
Programming Manual for details.
If this setting is set to detect errors (0) and a battery error is detected, the Battery Error Flag (A40204) will be turned ON.
Note

1. The contents of the DM, EM, and HR Areas in the CPU Unit are not backed
up to flash memory; they are backed up only by a Battery. If the Battery
voltage drops, this data may be lost. Provide countermeasures in the program using the Battery Error Flag (A40204) to re-initialize data or take other actions if the Battery voltage drops.
2. A battery error will be detected when the battery is disconnected or its voltage drops below the minimum allowed.

Backup
Disconnected or
voltage too low

Battery Error Flag
(A40204) ON

Detect Interrupt Task Error
If this setting is set to detect errors (0), an interrupt task error will be detected
in the following cases:
• An interrupt task is executed for more than 10 ms during I/O refreshing of
a C200H Special I/O Unit or SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O.
• IORF(097) is executed in an interrupt task to refresh a Special I/O Unit’s
I/O while that Unit’s I/O is being refreshed during cyclic refreshing.

EM File Memory Settings
These settings are used to specify converting not converting part of the EM
Area to file memory.
CX-Programmer

With the CX-Programmer, file memory will be formatted when file memory
conversion and the number of banks to be converted is specified when transferring the PLC Setup. (EM banks cannot be formatted as file memory unless
they have been specified as file memory in the PLC Setup.)
Once part of the EM Area has been formatted for use as file memory, it can be
converted back to normal EM Area usage by changing these PLC Setup settings back to their previous value and “un-formatting” the EM banks with a
Programming Device.

Programming Console

360

The specified EM bank and all subsequent banks will be set aside as file
memory. Changing these settings using the Programming Console does not
format the specified EM banks; the EM banks must be formatted with a Programming Device after changing these PLC Setup settings. When formatting
the EM banks with a Programming Console, refer to 7-2 Memory Card Format
in the Programming Console Operation Manual (W341).

Section 7-2

Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
Note

1. The actual starting file memory bank is stored in A344 (EM File Memory
Starting Bank). When the settings in the PLC Setup have been changed
but the EM Area hasn’t been formatted, the PLC Setup setting will differ
from the actual file memory setting in the EM Area. In this case, the values
in A344 can be checked to see the actual file memory setting.
2. The EM Area cannot be formatted if the current EM bank is one of the
banks that is being converted to file memory.
The following example shows EM banks 2 to C (12) converted to file memory.
EM File Memory setting: 1
(EM file memory enabled)

Bank 0
Bank 1
Bank 2
:
Bank C

EM Starting Bank setting: 2

Converted

EM file memory

Peripheral Port Settings
These settings are effective only when pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front of
the CPU Unit is ON.
The default settings for the peripheral port are: host link mode, 1 start bit, 7
data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits, and a baud rate of 9,600 bps. Set the peripheral port settings in the PLC Setup when you need to change these settings.
Note When pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit is OFF, the CPU
Unit automatically detects the communications parameters of a connected
Programming Device (including Programming Consoles). Those automatically
detected parameters are not stored in the PLC Setup.
ON
ON
4
Peripheral port communications settings when DIP
switch pin 4 is ON:
Default settings:
Host link mode, 1 start bit, 7 data bits, even parity,
2 stop bits, and a baud rate of 9,600 bps
User-defined settings:
Set the communications mode (host link, NT Link,
or peripheral bus) and other settings such as the
baud rate.

361

Section 7-2

Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
RS-232C Port Settings

These settings are effective only when pin 5 of the DIP switch on the front of
the CPU Unit is OFF.
The default settings for the RS-232C port are: host link mode, 1 start bit, 7
data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits, and a baud rate of 9,600 bps. Set the RS232C port settings in the PLC Setup when you need to change these settings.
Specify the frame format when no-protocol mode is selected.
The RS-232C port settings can also be changed with STUP(237). The RS232C Port Settings Changing Flag (A61902) is turned ON when STUP(237) is
executed and it is turned OFF when the RS-232C port settings have been
changed.
Note When pin 5 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit is ON, the CPU Unit
automatically detects the communications parameters of a Programming
Device (including Programming Consoles) connected to the RS-232C port.
Those automatically detected parameters are not stored in the PLC Setup.
ON
ON
5
RS-232C port communications settings when DIP
switch pin 5 is OFF:
Default settings:
Host link mode, 1 start bit, 7 data bits, even parity,
2 stop bits, and a baud rate of 9,600 bps
User-defined settings:
Set the communications mode (host link, NT Link,
no-protocol*, or peripheral bus) and other settings
such as the baud rate.
*See notes 1 and 2 for details on no-protocol mode.

Note

1. A no-protocol transmission delay (address 162) can be set in no-protocol
mode. The operation of this delay is shown in the following diagram.
No-protocol delay

Delay
Transmission

Time

TXD(236)

2. The following table shows the message formats that can be set for transmissions and receptions in no-protocol mode. The format is determined by
the start code (ST) and end code (ED) settings. (From 1 to 256 bytes can
be received in no-protocol mode.)

362

Section 7-2

Explanations of PLC Setup Settings

Start code setting
None
Yes

None
DATA
ST+DATA

End code setting
Yes
CR+LF
DATA+ED
DATA+CR+LF
ST+DATA+ED
ST+DATA+CR+LF

Scheduled Interrupt Time Units
This setting determines the time units for the scheduled interrupt interval settings. Set the scheduled interrupt interval from the program with MSKS(690).
Note This setting cannot be changed while the CPU Unit is in RUN or MONITOR
mode.
Scheduled Interrupt Time Units
Interval
Scheduled interrupt task

Instruction Error Operation
This setting determines whether instruction execution errors are treated as
non-fatal (0) or fatal errors (1). A program error will be generated as an
instruction error if any of the following flags is turned ON.
Instruction error flag
Instruction Processing Error Flag
Indirect DM/EM BCD Error Flag

Illegal Access Error Flag

Address
Cause
A29508 The ER Flag was turned ON.
A29509 The contents of a DM/EM word wasn’t
BCD when BCD was required for indirect addressing.
A29510 Attempted to access part of memory
that is off-limits from the program.

If this setting is OFF (0), PLC operation will continue after one of these errors.
If this setting is ON (1), PLC operation will stop after one of these errors.

363

Section 7-2

Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
Minimum Cycle Time

Set the minimum cycle time to a non-zero value to eliminate inconsistencies in
I/O responses. This setting is effective only when the actual cycle time is
shorter than the minimum cycle time setting. If the actual cycle time is longer
than the minimum cycle time setting, the actual cycle time will remain
unchanged.

Note The minimum cycle time setting cannot be changed while the CPU Unit is in
RUN or MONITOR mode. As the length of the cycle time increases, the interval for servicing Programming Devices will also increase. The may slow down
the response to online operations from a Programming Device or make it difficult to establish an online connection.

Fixed cycle time

Watch Cycle Time

If the cycle time exceeds the watch (maximum) cycle time setting, the Cycle
Time Too Long Flag (A40108) will be turned ON and PLC operation will be
stopped. This setting must be changed if the normal cycle time exceeds the
default watch cycle time setting of 1 s.
Note The watch cycle time setting cannot be changed while the CPU Unit is in RUN
or MONITOR mode.
Watch Cycle
Time

Watch
Time

Actual Cycle
Time

Watch Cycle
Time

Actual Cycle
Time

Watch Cycle
Time

Actual Cycle
Time
↓
OVER

Cycle Time
Too Long Flag
A40108
CPU Unit operation
is stopped.

Note The default value for the watch cycle time is 1 s (1,000 ms).

Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time
This setting determines whether the peripheral servicing for the following processes is performed with the default settings (4% of the cycle time) or all
together in a fixed servicing time.
Exchange data with CS-series Special I/O Units when necessary
Exchange data with CS-series CPU Bus Units when necessary
Exchange data with peripheral port
Exchange data with serial communications ports
Exchange data with Inner Board
Service file access operations (Memory Card)

364

Section 7-2

Explanations of PLC Setup Settings

Peripheral servicing is performed at the end of the cycle, just after I/O refreshing.
Power ON
Initialization
Common processes

Cycle
time

Program
execution
(Tasks
executed in
order)
I/O refreshing
Peripheral servicing

The following table shows a breakdown of the peripheral servicing time.
Peripheral servicing time
Event service time for
CS-series Special I/O Units
Event service time for
CS-series CPU Bus Units
Event service time for
peripheral port
Event service time for
RS-232C port

Default value
4% of the previous
cycle’s cycle time
Same as above.

Setting range
Uniform servicing time in ms:
0.0 to 25.5 ms in 0.1-ms units

Same as above.
Same as above.

Event service time for
Same as above.
serial communication ports
File access service time for Same as above.
Memory Card

The default value for each servicing process is 4% of the last cycle’s cycle
time.
In general, we recommend using the default value. Set a uniform servicing
time only when peripheral servicing is being delayed because each service
process is being spread over several cycles.
Note

1. When the peripheral servicing time is set to a time longer than the default
value, the cycle time will also be longer.
2. The fixed peripheral servicing time setting cannot be changed while the
CPU Unit is in RUN mode or MONITOR mode.
3. Use the Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode to give priority to servicing peripheral over program execution. Refer to the CS/CJ Series Programming
Manual for details.

365

Section 7-2

Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
Power OFF Interrupt Task

This setting determines whether or not a power OFF interrupt task will be executed when a power interruption is detected. (When this setting is set to 0, the
regular program will just stop when a power interruption is detected.)
The power OFF interrupt task will be stopped when the power hold time (processing time after power interrupt + power OFF detection delay time) has
elapsed. The maximum power hold time is 10 ms.
When a power OFF detection delay time has to be set, be sure that the power
OFF interrupt task can be executed in the available time (10 ms – power OFF
detection delay time).
Note The power OFF interrupt task setting cannot be changed while the CPU Unit
is in RUN mode or MONITOR mode.
Power OFF Detection
Delay Time

This setting determines how much of a delay there will be from the detection
of a power interruption (approximately after the power supply voltage drops
below 85% of the rated value) until a power interruption is established and the
regular program is stopped. The setting can be between 0 and 10 ms.
It takes a maximum of 10 ms for the internal 5 V DC power supply to drop to
0 V DC after the initial power interrupt detection time. Extend the time until
detection of a power interruption when momentary interruptions in a bad
power supply are causing PLC operation to stop.
Note The power OFF detection delay time setting cannot be changed while the
CPU Unit is in RUN mode or MONITOR mode.

Power Interrupt Detection Time
AC power supply: 10 to 25 ms
(not consistent)
DC power supply: 2 to 5 ms
(not consistent)

Power holding time (fixed: 10 ms)

Power interrupt
detection time

Regular program

Time

Power OFF
detection
delay time
0 to 10 ms
Power OFF
interrupt task
(See note.)

Stop

Note The execution time for the power OFF interrupt task must be less than the
maximum time available, namely: 10 ms – power OFF detection delay time.
Refer to CS/CJ Series Programming Manual for details on the power interrupt
task and on CPU Unit operation when power is turned OFF.

366

Section 7-2

Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing

When a Special I/O Unit will be refreshed in an interrupt task by IORF(097),
always disable cyclic refreshing for that Unit with this setting. The expected
results will not be achieved and the Interrupt Task Error Flag (A40213) will be
turned ON if IORF(097) is executed in an interrupt task during normal I/O
refreshing.
Special I/O Unit

CPU Unit

Special
I/O Unit
Area

These settings determine whether or not
data will be exchanged with the 10 words
allocated to each Special I/O Unit in the
Special I/O Unit Area during cyclic I/O
refreshing.

367

Explanations of PLC Setup Settings

368

Section 7-2

SECTION 8
I/O Allocations
This section describes I/O allocations to Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units, and data exchange with
CPU Bus Units.
8-1

8-2

8-3

I/O Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

370

8-1-1

Unit Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

370

8-1-2

Creating I/O Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

372

I/O Allocation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

375

8-2-1

I/O Allocations to Basic I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

375

8-2-2

I/O Allocations to Special I/O Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

380

8-2-3

I/O Allocations to CPU Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

381

8-2-4

I/O Allocations to SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

381

Allocating First Words to Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

382

8-4

Allocating First Words to Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

385

8-5

Detailed Information on I/O Table Creation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

388

8-6

Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

388

8-6-1

Special I/O Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

388

8-6-2

Disabling Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

390

8-6-3

CPU Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

391

369

Section 8-1

I/O Allocations

8-1

I/O Allocations
In CS-series PLCs, memory must be allocated to the Units mounted in the
PLC. I/O tables containing the models and locations of all Units and the allocations made to each must be created and these I/O tables must be registered in the CPU Unit. When the power supply is turned ON to the CPU Unit,
the I/O tables are compared against the mounted Units to verify their accuracy.

8-1-1

Unit Types
Memory is allocated differently to Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CSseries CPU Bus Units.

Basic I/O Units
Basic I/O Units

CS-series/C200H Basic I/O Units

00000
CH
0123

4567

I/O Area
CS-series/C200H Group-2
High-density I/O Units

Allocation

CIO 0000 to CIO 0319 (See note 1.)
(Memory is allocated in one-word
units based on mounting position in
the Racks.)

CH
0123

4567

1 CH
10CH 0 2 4
1 3 5

Note

CN1

CN2

1
29
B

C200H Group-2 High-density
I/O Units (See note 2.)

OD219
A0

CH
7
15
7
15

CH2

CN1

CN2

20
B

370

C200H-00219

CH1

1. The Rack's first word setting can be
changed from the default setting (CIO 0000)
to any word from CIO 0000 to CIO 0999.
The first word setting can be changed only
with a Programming Device other than a
Programming Console.
2. The unit number setting on the front of
C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units is
ignored. Words are allocated to these Units
based on their location in the Rack, just like
Basic I/O Units.

Section 8-1

I/O Allocations
Special I/O Units
Special I/O Units
CS-series Special I/O Units

C200H-00215

Special I/O Unit Area
Allocation

C200H Special I/O Units
(See note 2.)

ID215
RUN
0 1 2
3
CN1
8 9 10
11
0 1 2
3
CN2
8 9 10
11

CIO 2000 to CIO 2959
(Each Unit is allocated ten words
based on its unit number setting.)

Note 1. Although there are 96 unit number settings,
a maximum of 80 Units can actually be
mounted to a PLC because that is the
maximum number of slots possible.
2. Some Units classified as I/O Units (namely
C200H High-density I/O Units) are actually
treated as Special I/O Units.

CH
4

12 13 14
15
4 5 6
7
12 13 14
15

C200H-00215

MACINE
NO.
CN1

CN2
B A A
B
12
1

1
12

CS-series CPU Bus Units
CS-series CPU Bus Units

CPU Bus Unit Area
Allocation

CIO 1500 to CIO 1899
(Each Unit is allocated 25 words
based on its unit number setting.)

C200H-00215

RDY
COMM1
COMM2

PORT1

PORT2
SCB21

371

Section 8-1

I/O Allocations

8-1-2

Creating I/O Tables
There are two ways to allocate I/O memory to CS-series Units.
• Create the I/O tables online based on the Units actually mounted to the
PLC. This can be done from either the CX-Programmer or a Programming
Console. The Programming Device is connected online and then the I/O
tables are created based on the Units that are mounted.
• Create the I/O tables offline without basing them directly on the mounted
Units and then transfer the I/O tables to the PLC. This is done offline on
the CX-Programmer.
The word addresses, number of words, and mounting slot for each Unit are
registered in the CPU Unit as I/O tables. Data is exchanged between the Units
and the CPU Unit, e.g., to help prevent mistakes in mounting when replacing
Units.

Creating I/O Tables Based on Mounted Units
Connect a Programming Console or the CX-Programmer to a CPU Unit in a
PLC with all the Units mounted and create the I/O tables. In the I/O table creation operation, information on the Unit models and mounting locations are
registered in the parameter area of the CPU Unit as the registered I/O tables
for all Units mounted to the basic PLC system and SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O
Racks.
CX-Programmer or Programming Console

I/O table creation operation

Online

Information on models and
positions of mounted Units:
Registered I/O table
CPU Unit
Registered I/O tables written to
parameter area in CPU Unit.

I/O Memory Allocations
When I/O memory is allocated automatically, words are automatically allocated to Units in the order they are mounted to the Racks. Words are allocated to Units from left to right starting on Rack 0 and then left to right on each
Rack through Rack 7.
In order from left to right starting with slot 00
Rack 0

In order from Rack 0
through Rack 7

372

Rack 1

In order from left to right starting with slot 00

Section 8-1

I/O Allocations
I/O Table Creation with CX-Programmer

Use the following procedure to create the I/O tables online with the CX-Programmer.
1,2,3...

1. Double-click IO Table in the project tree in the main window. The I/O Table
Window will be displayed.
2. Select Options - Create. The models and positions of the Units mounted
to the Racks will be written to the CPU Unit as the registered I/O tables.

I/O Table Creation with a Programming Console
Use the following procedure to register the I/O table with a Programming Console.
CLR

FUN

SHIFT

CH
*DM

000000 CT00
000000 I/O TBL ?

Note If the Rack first words have already been set from the CX-Programmer, “Rack 1st Word En” will be displayed on the second line (CS1H only).

CHG

000000 I/O TBL
WRIT
????

000000 I/O TBL
WRIT
9713

WRITE

000000CPU BU ST?
0:CLR 1:KEEP

CLR

000000 I/O TBL
WRIT OK
000000 CT00

Creating I/O Tables without Mounted Units
With the CX-Programmer, I/O tables can be created offline without mounted
Units and then transferred to the CPU Unit. The information on Unit models
and mounting locations are written to the parameter area of the CPU Unit as
the registered I/O tables.

I/O Table Creation with CX-Programmer
Use the following procedure to create the I/O tables offline with the CX-Programmer and then transfer them to the CPU Unit. Once the Units that are to
be mounted are set for each Rack, the CX-Programmer will automatically allocate words according to Rack and slot positions starting from CIO 0000.
1,2,3...

1. Double-click IO Table in the project tree in the main window. The I/O Table
Window will be displayed.
2. Double-click the Rack to be edited. The slots will be displayed for the Rack.
3. Right-click the slot to which to assign a Unit and select the Unit from the
pop-up menu.

373

Section 8-1

I/O Allocations

4. When all the desired Units have been assigned to slots, select Options Transfer to PLC. The I/O tables will be transferred.
With the CX-Programmer, you can also assign any desired word to an I/O Unit
regardless of it’s position on the Racks.
Setting the First Word on a Rack
The first word allocated on a Rack can be set to allocate specific words to the
Units on the Rack regardless of the order in which the Rack is connected.
Words will be allocated consecutively to the Units on the Rack in the order
that Units are mounted to the Rack. Refer to 8-3 Allocating First Words to
Racks for details.
Setting the First Word on Each Rack

Rack 0

Rack 1

The first word for slot 00 on the Rack is set. Words
are then allocated in order to Units from left to right.

Note The first words for Racks cannot be set at the same time as the first words for
slots.
Setting the First Word for a Slot
The first word allocated to the Unit in any slot on any Rack can be set regardless of the order of the Rack or the position of the slot. Words are then allocated in sequence to the following Units in the order they are mounted. Refer
to 8-4 Allocating First Words to Slots for details.
Setting the First Words for Specific Slots
A word is set for slot 00 on the CPU Rack for group 00.
A word is set for slot 02 on the CPU Rack for group 01.
Rack 0

Rack 1

A word is set for slot 02 on Rack 1 for group 02.

Note The first words for Racks cannot be set at the same time as the first words for
slots.

374

Section 8-2

I/O Allocation Methods
Overview
Method

Operation

Using actual
mounted Units
Not using
actual
mounted Units

Perform I/O table
creation online.
Edit the I/O tables
offline and transfer
them to CPU Unit.

Note

Allocations
Automatic allocations according to
mounting position
Automatic allocations according to
mounting position
Partial manual
Allocating Rack
allocation without first words
restrictions by
Allocation slot first
mounting position words

Rack allocation
order
In order from Rack 0
to Rack 7
In order from Rack 0
to Rack 7
User-set

Slot allocation
order within Rack
Left to right from
slot 00
Left to right from
slot 00
Left to right from
slot 00
Left to right from
any slot allocated a
first word

1. Always create I/O tables either online or by editing them offline and transferring them to the CPU Unit. The CPU Unit will not be able to recognize
Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, or Units on SYSMAC
BUS I/O Rack unless I/O tables are registered in the CPU Unit.
2. For CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later, CPU Bus Units can be used even if
they are not registered in the I/O tables, this function is provided to enable
online connections from Programming Devices running on personal computers (e.g., the CX-Programmer) and is not intended for normal system
operation. Always register I/O tables in the CPU Unit before starting operation.
3. The C200HX/HG/HE, C200H, and C200HS PLCs use fixed word allocations for slots, enabling operation without I/O tables. I/O tables were created only to prevent Units from being mounted to the wrong slot. With the
CS-series PLCs, the words allocated to any particular slots are not fixed.
Words are merely allocated to the Units actually mounted. If no Unit is
mounted, no words are allocated. If the mounted Unit requires more than
one word, the required number of words is allocated. Operation for CS-series PLCs is thus not possible unless I/O tables are registered.

8-2
8-2-1

I/O Allocation Methods
I/O Allocations to Basic I/O Units
Basic I/O Units include the following Units:
• CS-series Basic I/O Units
• C200H Basic I/O Units
• C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units
These Units are allocated words in the I/O Area (CIO 0000 to CIO 0319) and
can be mounted to the CPU Rack, CS-series Expansion Racks, and C200H
Expansion I/O Racks (See note 2).
Note

1. Refer to 2-4 Units for list of specific Basic I/O Units.
2. CS-series Basic I/O Units cannot be mounted to C200H Expansion I/O
Racks.

375

Section 8-2

I/O Allocation Methods
Allocation Methods

When I/O tables are created in the order of the Racks and the order that Units
are mounted, I/O words will be allocated as described below. If a Programming Console or the CX-Programmer is connected online and the I/O tables
are created automatically according to the Units that are actually mounted,
the CPU Unit will automatically create and register the I/O tables. If the I/O
tables are created offline using the CX-Programmer, the CX-Programmer will
automatically allocate words according to the Unit settings that have been
made.

Basic I/O Units on the CPU Rack
Basic I/O Units on the CPU Rack are allocated words from left to right starting
from CIO 0000 and each Unit is allocated as many words as it requires.
Note

1. Units that have 1 to 16 I/O points are allocated 16 bits (1 word) and Units
that have 17 to 32 I/O points are allocated 32 bits (2 words).
2. I/O words are not allocated to empty slots. To allocate words to an empty
slot, change the I/O table with a Programming Device.
3. The unit number setting on the front of C200H Group-2 High-density I/O
Units is ignored. Words are allocated to these Units based on their location
on the Rack, just like Basic I/O Units.

CIO
0000

Power Supply Unit

CPU Unit

Slot numbers 2, 3, 5, 8, and 10
CPU Rack

Example 1

Power Supply Unit

IN
IN OUT OUT
IN
8
16
64
32
8
CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0000 0001 0002 0006 0007
to
to
0005
0008

CPU Unit

The following example shows the I/O allocations to 5 Basic I/O Units on the
CPU Rack.
CPU Rack

Example 2
The following example shows the I/O allocations to 4 Basic I/O Units on the
CPU Rack with one empty slot.

376

IN
96

CIO
0000

CIO
0001
to
0002

CIO
0003
to
0008

Empty OUT
96
CIO
0009
to
0014

Power Supply Unit

IN
32

CPU Unit

CPU Rack
IN
16

Section 8-2

I/O Allocation Methods
Example 3

The following example shows the I/O allocations to 5 Basic I/O Units in the
CPU Rack. Two slots are filled with Dummy Units to reserve I/O words for
those slots.

IN
8

CPU Unit

CIO
0000
to
0001

OUT
ReRe8
served served
16
32
CIO
0002
CIO
CIO
0003 0004
to
0005

Power Supply Unit

CPU Rack
IN
32

CIO
0006

Note Use the CX-Programmer’s I/O table change operation to reserve words for the
empty slots.

Basic I/O Units on CS-series and C200H Expansion Racks

Power Supply Unit

CIO
0000

Power Supply Unit

Words are allocated in order
beginning with the Expansion
Rack nearest the CPU Rack.

Power Supply Unit

CPU Unit

I/O allocation to Basic I/O Units continues from the CPU Rack to the Expansion Rack (CS-series Expansion Rack or C200H Expansion I/O Rack) connected to the CPU Rack. Words are allocated from left to right and each Unit
is allocated as many words as it requires, just like Units in the CPU Rack.
CPU Rack

CS-series Expansion Rack

377

Section 8-2

I/O Allocation Methods
Example

IN
16
CIO
0010

IN Empty OUT OUT
5
12
32
CIO CIO
CIO
0013 0014
0011
and
0012

IN
8

IN OUT served IN
16 32
16
8

Re-

CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0015 0016 0017 0018 0019
and
0020

Power Supply Unit

CPU Rack

Power Supply Unit

IN
32

CS-series Expansion
Rack

Power Supply Unit

IN OUT OUT
64 16 32
CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0000 0001 0003 0007 0008
and to
and
0002 0006
0009
IN
16

CPU Unit

The following example shows the I/O allocation to Basic I/O Units in the CPU
Rack and two CS-series Expansion Racks.

CS-series Expansion
Rack

Note Use the CX-Programmer’s I/O table change operation to reserve a word for
the empty slot.

Allocations to CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks
In configurations containing CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks, up to
two series of CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks can be included.
Words are automatically allocated to the Units mounted to the Racks in order
of rack number and slot in the same way as for other configurations. The CPU
Rack is rack 0, the CS-series Expansion Rack (if there is one) is Rack 1. Rack
numbers are then assigned in order to the Racks in series A of CS-series
Long-distance Expansion Racks and finally to the Racks in series B of CSseries Long-distance Expansion Racks, to a maximum rack number of 7.
Although words are automatically allocated, the first word on each Rack can
be set.
Note

1. I/O words are not allocated to the I/O Control Units or I/O Interface Units.
2. No C200H Units of any kind can be mounted to CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Racks.
3. CS-series CPU Bus Units should always be placed on the CPU Rack or
CS-series Expansion Rack. Although they can be placed on CS-series
Long-distance Expansion Racks, doing so is not recommended because it
will increase the cycle time.

378

Section 8-2

I/O Allocation Methods
Reserving I/O Words for Expected Changes

If the system configuration will be changed at a later date, changes to the program can be minimized by reserving I/O words in advance for future Unit
changes or additions. To reserve I/O words, edit the I/O table with the CX-Programmer.
I/O Table Editing Operation
1,2,3...

1. Double-click IO Table in the project tree in the main window. The I/O Table
Window will be displayed.

2. Right-click the slot for which a word is to be reserved and select the Dummy item from under the Basic I/O Unit with the correct number of I/O points.

Note

1. Do not execute the I/O table creation operation after completing the above
editing operation. The reserved word settings will be lost.
2. The following High-density I/O Units are not Basic I/O Units, but Special I/O
Units. These Units are allocated 10 words/Unit in the Special I/O Unit Area
(CIO 2000 to CIO 2959) based on their unit number settings. Refer to 8-22 I/O Allocations to Special I/O Units for more details.
Name
High-density
I/O Units

Specifications
32-point DC Input Unit
32-point TTL Input Unit
32-point Transistor Output Unit
32-point TTL Output Unit
16-point TTL Input/16-point TTL Output Unit
16-point DC Input/16-point Transistor Output Unit
16-point DC Input/16-point Transistor Output Unit

Model
C200H-ID215
C200H-ID501
C200H-OD215
C200H-OD501
C200H-MD501
C200H-MD215
C200H-MD115

379

Section 8-2

I/O Allocation Methods

8-2-2

I/O Allocations to Special I/O Units
Special I/O Units include the following Units:
• CS-series Special I/O Units
• C200H Special I/O Units
Each of these Units is allocated ten words in the Special I/O Unit Area
(CIO 2000 to CIO 2959) according the unit number set on the Unit.
Special I/O Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack, CS-series Expansion
Racks, and C200H Expansion I/O Racks (see note 2).
Note

1. Refer to 2-4 Units for more details on the available Special I/O Units.
2. CS-series Special I/O Units cannot be mounted to C200H Expansion I/O
Racks.

Word Allocation

The following table shows which words in the Special I/O Unit Area are allocated to each Unit according to unit number.
Unit number
0
1
2

Words allocated
CIO 2000 to CIO 2009
CIO 2010 to CIO 2019
CIO 2020 to CIO 2029

:
15

:
CIO 2150 to CIO 2159

:
95

:
CIO 2950 to CIO 2959

Special I/O Units are ignored during I/O allocation to Basic I/O Units. Slots
containing Special I/O Units are treated as empty slots and aren’t allocated
any words in the I/O Area.

IN Special OUT Special OUT
I/O
I/O
16
16
32
Unit

Unit

CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0000 2000
0001 2010 0002
and
to
to
2009
2019 0003

Slot
0
1
2
3
4

380

Unit
C200H-ID212 16-point DC Input Unit
C200H-AD002 Analog Input Unit
C200H-OD21A 16-point Transistor Output Unit
C200H-NC211 Position Control Unit
C200H-OD218 32-point Transistor Output Unit

Words
required
1
10
1
20
2

Words allocated

Power Supply Unit

The following example shows the I/O word allocation to Basic I/O Units and
Special I/O Units in the CPU Rack.

CPU Unit

Example

CPU Rack

Unit
number
CIO 0000
--CIO 2000 to CIO 2009
0
CIO 0001
--CIO 2010 to CIO 2029
1
CIO 0002 and CIO 0003 ---

Group
Basic I/O Unit
Special I/O Unit
Basic I/O Unit
Special I/O Unit
Basic I/O Unit

Section 8-2

I/O Allocation Methods

8-2-3

I/O Allocations to CPU Bus Units
Each CPU Bus Unit is allocated 25 words in the CPU Bus Unit Area
(CIO 1500 to CIO 1899) according the unit number set on the Unit. CPU Bus
Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack or CS-series Expansion Racks.

Word Allocations

The following table shows which words in the CS-series CPU Bus Unit Area
are allocated to each Unit.
Unit number

Words allocated
CIO 1500 to CIO 1524
CIO 1525 to CIO 1549
CIO 1550 to CIO 1574

0
1
2

CIO 1875 to CIO 1899

CS-series CPU Bus Units are ignored during I/O allocation to Basic I/O Units.
Slots containing CS-series CPU Bus Units are treated as empty slots and
aren’t allocated any words in the I/O Area.
The following example shows the I/O word allocation to Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CS-series CPU Bus Units in the CPU Rack.

Special CPU
I/O
Bus
Unit
Unit

CIO
0000

Slot

Unit

Words
required

0
1

C200H-ID212 16-point DC Input Unit
C200H-ASC02/11/21/31 ASCII Unit

C200H-SCU21-V1 Serial Communications Unit 25

C200H-OD21A 16-point Transistor Output Unit

C200H-SCU21-V1 Serial Communications Unit 25

8-2-4

CIO
2000
to
2009

1
10

CIO
1500
to
1521

OUT
16

CPU
Bus
Unit

CIO
0001

CIO
1525
to
1549

Words allocated

CPU Rack
Power Supply Unit

IN
16

CPU Unit

Example

Unit
number

Group

CIO 0000
CIO 2000 to
CIO 2009
CIO 1500 to
CIO 1524
CIO 0001

--0

Basic I/O Unit
Special I/O Unit

CS-series CPU Bus
Unit
Basic I/O Unit

CIO 1525 to
CIO 1549

---

CS-series CPU Bus
Unit

I/O Allocations to SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks
Each SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Slave Rack is allocated 10 words in the
SYSMAC BUS Area (CIO 3000 to CIO 3079) according the unit number (0 to
7) set on the Slave Unit. No words in the I/O Area are allocated to Units in
Slave Racks.
Each slot in the Slave Rack is allocated one of the Rack’s 10 words. The
words are allocated from left to right. One word is allocated to every slot even
if the slot is empty and the last two words allocated to each Rack are not used
because the Slave Racks have only 8 slots.
The Master and Slave Units themselves do not require any words.

381

Section 8-3

Allocating First Words to Racks
Example

The following example shows the word allocation to 3 Slave Racks.
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O
Master Unit

SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Remote I/O Slave Rack
Slave Unit with
unit number 0

1
2
3
:
8
Not used.
Not used.
9
10
:
16
17
18
19
20
:
26
Not used.
Not used.

Slave Unit with
unit number 2

Slave Unit with
unit number 1

Slave Unit with
unit number 0

Slave Unit with
unit number 1

Slave Unit with
unit number 2

CIO 3000 to CIO 3079 can be used as work words/bits when a SYSMAC BUS
System is not being used. Also, even if a SYSMAC BUS System is used,
words that are not allocated in the SYSMAC BUS System, such as CIO 3030
to CIO 3079 in the above example, can be used as work bits/words.

8-3

Allocating First Words to Racks
In the CS-series PLCs, the first word allocated to each Rack can be set with
the CX-Programmer’s I/O table edit operation. For example, the CPU Rack
can be set to be allocated words starting with CIO 0000; the next Rack, words
starting with CIO 0100; the next Rack, words starting with CIO 0200; etc. This
can make it easier to check word allocations to Units without calculating all the
way from the CPU Rack.
Note The first words for Racks cannot be set at the same time as the first words for
slots.

Word Allocations

382

For Racks in which the first word address has been set, words are allocated to
Units in the order that the Units are mounted (from left to right) beginning with
the specified first word. Words are not allocated to empty slots.

Section 8-3

Allocating First Words to Racks

For Racks in which the first word address has not been set, words are allocated in rack-number order (lowest to highest) continuing from the last word
allocated to the previous rack and starting with CIO 0000 on the first Rack for
which the first word is not set.
Example: Setting the First Words for Racks

First word:
CIO 0100

Rack number 1
First word:
CIO 0200

CIO CIO CIO
0200 0201 0202

Empty

CIO
0203

Power Supply Unit

CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0000 0001 0002 0003 0004

CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0300 0301 0302 0303 0304

Power Supply Unit

Rack number 3
First word:
CIO 0300

CPU Rack

CS Expansion Rack

Rack number 2
No first word
setting

Power Supply Unit

CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0100 0101 0102 0103 0104

Power Supply Unit

Rack number 0

CPU Unit

In this example, the first words have been set for Racks 0 (the CPU Rack), 2,
and 3. For simplicity, only 16-bit Units have been used.

CS Expansion Rack

Rack First Word Settings
Rack
CPU Rack
Rack 1
Rack 2
Rack 3

First word
CIO 0100
CIO 0200
Not set
CIO 0300

383

Section 8-3

Allocating First Words to Racks

Note Rack numbers (0 to 7) are fixed according to the order that the Racks are
physically connected with cable. The CPU Rack is always Rack 0 and the
other Racks are, in order, Racks 1 to 7. These numbers cannot be changed.
In the above example, the shaded Racks are allocated words starting from the
specified first words. The non-shaded Racks are allocated in order from left to
right and in order of Rack starting from CIO 0000.

Setting First Rack Words from the CX-Programmer
The first word allocated on each Rack can be set from the CX-Programmer.
These settings are not possible from a Programming Console.
Note For CS1-H CPU Units, an indication of whether or not the first rack words
have been set will be displayed on a Programming Console.
Use the following procedure to set the first rack words.
1,2,3...

1. Select the Rack/Slot Start Addresses from the Option Menu on the I/O
Table Window. The following dialog box will be displayed.

2. Select the Rack Start Addresses Settings Option and click the OK Button.
3. In the dialog box that will appear, remove the checkmarks from the settings
disabling the first rack word settings and set the address of the first words
for the CPU Rack and Expansion Racks (1 to 7).

Setting
Rack Start Address
Invalid

Setting range
Default
Remarks
0 to 9000
0
Same for all Racks
Selected or cleared Selected (invalid)

4. Click the OK Button.
Note Up to 8 Racks can be set for any CPU Unit model.

384

Section 8-4

Allocating First Words to Slots
Confirming First Rack Word Settings on a Programming Console

With a CS1-H CPU Unit, the Programming Console can be used to check
whether or not the first word has been set on a Rack. Use the following procedure.
1,2,3...

1. Press the FUN, SHIFT, and CH Keys to start the I/O table creation operation. If the first work for a Rack has been set, a message saying so will appear on the second line of the display.
FUN

SHIFT

CH
*DM

000000I/O TBL ?
Rack 1st Word En

If nothing is displayed, then a first word has not been set.
2. Press the CHG Key, enter the password (9713), and then press the
WRITE Key to continue creating the I/O tables, or press the CLR Key to
cancel the operation and return to the initial display.

Precautions in Setting Rack First Words
• Be sure to make first word settings so that allocated words do not overlap.
The first word setting for a rack can be any address from CIO 0000 to
CIO 0900. If the same word is allocated to two Racks, the I/O tables cannot be created and the Duplication Error Flag (A26103) in the I/O Table
Error Information will turn ON.
• Always register the I/O table after installing an I/O Unit, after setting a rack
number, or after setting the first word allocation for a Rack. The I/O Table
Registration operation registers the I/O words allocated to the Racks.
• I/O words will not be allocated to empty slots. If an I/O Unit will be
installed later, reserve words for the empty slot by changing the I/O table
with a Programming Device’s I/O Table Change Operation.
• If the actual system configuration is changed after registering the I/O table
so that the number of words or I/O type does not match the I/O table, an
I/O verification error (A40209) or I/O setting error (A40110) will occur. A
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Setting Error (A40203) or Special I/O Unit Setting Error (A40202) may occur as well.
• When a Unit is removed, words can be reserved for the missing Unit using
the I/O Table Change Operation. If a Unit is changed or added, all of the
words in the program following that Unit’s allocated words will be changed
and the I/O Table Registration Operation will have to be performed again.

8-4

Allocating First Words to Slots
In the CS-series PLCs, the first word allocated to a slot on any Rack can be
set with the CX-Programmer’s I/O table edit operation regardless of the position of the slot. This feature can be used whenever it’s necessary to control
allocations to specific Units, e.g., to group allocated I/O words by device or circuit.
The first word can be set for up to 64 slots.
Note The first words for slots cannot be set at the same time as the first words for
Racks.

Word Allocations

When setting first words for slots, the first word must be set for slot 00 on the
CPU Rack. The first word can then be set for any slot on any Rack for up to 63
other slots.

385

Section 8-4

Allocating First Words to Slots

Each first word set for a slot creates a group starting with that slot. Words are
allocated starting from the specified word to the first slot in the group and continuing left to right allocating consecutive words to each Unit until the next
group (i.e., until the next Unit for which a first slot word is set). The next group
can start on the same Rack or on a following Rack.
Example: Setting the First Words for Racks
In this example, a first slot word has been set in the middle of each Rack. For
simplicity, only 16-bit Units have been used.

CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0000 0001 0002 0100 0101

Power Supply Unit

0
Rack number 0

Group 01 set for first
slot word of CIO 0200

CPU Unit

Group 00 set for first
slot word of CIO 0000

CPU Rack

Group 02 set for first slot word of CIO 0200

CIO CIO CIO
0102 0103 0200

Empty

CIO
0201

CS Expansion Rack
Power Supply Unit

Group 03 set for first slot word of CIO 0300

CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0202 0203 0300 0301 0302

Power Supply Unit

CS Expansion Rack

First Slot Word Settings
Group
00
01
02
03

Rack
CPU Rack
CPU Rack
Rack 1
Rack 2

Slot
00
03
02
02

Word
CIO 0000
CIO 0100
CIO 0200
CIO 0300

Note Group 00 must start at slot 00 on the CPU Rack. Any word can be set. Any
slot can be set on any Rack for groups 01 to 63.

Setting First Slot Words from the CX-Programmer
First slot words can be set from the CX-Programmer. These settings are not
possible from a Programming Console.
Note For CS1-H CPU Units, an indication of whether or not the first rack words
have been set will be displayed on a Programming Console.
Use the following procedure to set the first rack words.

386

Section 8-4

Allocating First Words to Slots
1,2,3...

1. Select the Rack/Slot Start Addresses from the Option Menu on the I/O
Table Window. The following dialog box will be displayed.

2. Select the Slot Start Addresses Settings Option and click the OK Button.
3. In the dialog box that will appear, set the first word for slot 00 on the CPU
Rack.

4. To change the setting from CIO 0000, click the Edit Button. The follow dialog box will appear.

5. Set the desired word and click the OK Button.
6. To set slot first words for other groups, click the Add Button and make the
appropriate settings for the Rack, slot, and word.
Up to 64 groups can be set for the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0. Only 8
groups can be set for the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 1.0
Setting
Group

Setting range
Default
00 to 63
00

Rack

CPU Rack
(“MainRack”)
Racks 1 to 7
00 to 99
0 to 999

Slot
First word

CPU Rack

0
0

Remarks
Groups numbers are allocated
automatically in the order the
groups are displayed and set.
Group 00 always starts at slot 00
on the CPU Rack.

---

387

Detailed Information on I/O Table Creation Errors

Section 8-5

Precautions in Setting First Slot Words
When the I/O tables are edited, the CX-Programmer checks for any duplications in word allocations caused by first word settings. It is conceivable, however, that duplications in word allocations could occur after the I/O tables have
been registered, e.g., as the result of replacing a 1-word Unit with a 2-word
Unit. In this case the extra word needed by the new Unit would still also be
allocated to the next Unit.
When the PLC is turned ON, the CPU Unit checks the registered I/O tables
against the actual Units mounted to the PLC. If there are any duplications, and
error will occur and it will be no longer possible to edit the I/O tables. If this
happens, the I/O tables will have to be deleted and recreated or retransferred
from a Programming Devices.

8-5

Detailed Information on I/O Table Creation Errors
With a CS1-H CPU Unit, the contents of A261 provides information on the
Unit causing the error whenever one occurs when creating the I/O tables from
the Programming Console or CX-Programmer. This information will make it
easier to find the Unit causing the problem with troubleshooting I/O tables.
Refer to SECTION 11 Troubleshooting for actual procedures.
Name

CPU Bus Unit Setup
Area Initialization
Error Flag
I/O Overflow Flag

Address
Word Bit
A261 00

Duplication Error Flag

I/O Bus Error Flag

SYSMAC BUS Recognition Error Flag

Special I/O Unit Error
Flag

I/O Unconfirmed Error
Flag

8-6

Contents

When
At
Setting
changing startup timing
to RUN
mode
ON: Error in CPU Bus Unit Setup
Held
Cleared When I/O
tables are
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
created
ON: Overflow in maximum number of I/O points.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: The same unit number was used more than
once.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: I/O bus error
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: SYSMAC BUS detection ended in an error.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: Error in a Special I/O Unit
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: I/O detection has not been completed.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.

Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units
This section describes how data can be exchanged between Special I/O Units
or CS-series CPU Bus Units, and the CPU Unit.

8-6-1

Special I/O Units
Special I/O Units include C200H Special I/O Units and CS-series Special I/O
Units. Data can be exchanged between Special I/O Units and the CPU Unit
through the Special I/O Unit Area, the DM Area, or FINS commands.

Special I/O Unit Area
(I/O Refreshing)

388

Data is exchanged each cycle during I/O refreshing of the Special I/O Unit
Area. Basically, 10 words are allocated to each Special I/O Unit based on its
unit number setting. The number of words actually used by the Special I/O
Unit varies; there are models that require 2 words, 4 words, and 20 words.

Section 8-6

Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units

The Special I/O Unit Area ranges from CIO 2000 to CIO 2959 (10 words × 96
Units).
Special I/O Unit
CPU Unit
Special I/O Unit Area
10 words/Unit

Transferred in
I/O refreshing

Transfer of Words Allocated in DM Area
C200H Special I/O Units

The 100 words allocated to each Unit are transferred from the DM Area to the
Unit when the PLC is turned on or the Unit is restarted. Some C200H Special
I/O Units do not use any of the allocated DM words and others use only a part
of the allocated words.

CS-series Special I/O
Units

There are three times that data may be transferred through the words allocated to each Unit. The timing of data transfers depends on the model being
used.

1,2,3...

1. Data transferred when the PLC is turned on.
2. Data transferred when the Unit is restarted.
3. Data transferred when necessary.
Some models transfer data in both directions, from the DM Area to the Unit
and from the Unit to the DM Area. See the Unit’s Operation Manual for details
on data transfers.

Special I/O Unit Words in the DM Area: D20000 to D29599 (100 Words x 96 Units)
Each Special I/O Unit is allocated 100 words in the DM Area in the range of
D20000 to D29599 (100 words × 96 Units). These 100 words are generally
used to hold initial settings for the Special I/O Unit. When the contents of this
area are changed from the program to reflect a change in the system, the
Restart Bits for affected Units must be turned ON to restart the Units.
Special I/O Unit
CPU Unit
Transferred when power is turned
on or the Unit is restarted.

DM Area for Special I/O Units
100 words/Unit

Transferred each cycle
and when necessary.

389

Section 8-6

Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units
FINS Commands

The CMND(490) instruction can be added to the ladder program to issue a
FINS command to the Special I/O Unit.
Special I/O Unit
CPU Unit

The FINS command is transmitted
when CMND(490) has been
executed in the program.

FINS command transmission

FINS commands can be transmitted to Special I/O Units in other PLCs in the
network, not just the local PLC.
Serial Communications Special I/O Unit
CPU Unit
Unit

Serial Communications Unit
CPU Unit

The FINS command is transmitted
when CMND(490) has been
executed in the program.

FINS command transmission

Special I/O Unit Initialization
Special I/O Units are initialized when the PLC’s power is turned on or the
Unit’s Restart Bit is turned ON. The Unit’s Special I/O Unit Initialization Flag
(A33000 to A33515) will be ON while the Unit is initializing.
I/O refreshing (cyclic I/O refreshing or refreshing by IORF(097)) will not be
performed for a Special I/O Unit while its Initialization Flag is ON.

8-6-2

Disabling Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing
Ten words are allocated to each Special I/O Unit in the Special I/O Unit Area
(CIO 2000 to CIO 2959) based on the unit number set on the front of each
Unit. The data in the Special I/O Unit Area is refreshed in the CPU Unit every
cycle during I/O refreshing (just after execution of the END(001) instruction).
I/O refreshing may take too long if too many Special I/O Units are installed. If
I/O refreshing is taking too much time, the PLC Setup can be set to disable
cyclic refreshing for particular Special I/O Units. (The Special I/O Unit Cyclic
Refreshing Disable Bits are in PLC Setup addresses 226 to 231.)
If the I/O refreshing time is too short, the Unit’s internal processing will not be
able to keep pace, the Special I/O Unit Error Flag (A40206) will be turned ON,
and the Special I/O Unit may not operate properly. In this case, the cycle time
can be extended by setting a minimum cycle time in the PLC Setup or cyclic
I/O refreshing with the Special I/O Unit can be disabled. When cyclic refreshing has been disabled, the Special I/O Unit’s data can be refreshed during
program execution with IORF(097).
Note

1. Always disable a Special I/O Unit’s cyclic refreshing if the Unit’s I/O will be
refreshed in an interrupt task with IORF(097). An interrupt task error
(A40213) will occur if cyclic refreshing and IORF(097) refreshing are performed simultaneously.
2. Whenever disabling a Special I/O Unit’s cyclic refreshing, be sure that the
I/O for that Unit is refreshed with IORF(097) in the program at least every

390

Section 8-6

Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units

11 seconds during operation. A CPU Unit service monitoring error will occur in the Special I/O Unit if it is not refreshed every 11 seconds.

8-6-3

CPU Bus Units
Data can be exchanged between CPU Bus Units and the CPU Unit through
the CPU Bus Unit Area, the DM Area, or FINS commands.

CPU Bus Unit Area (I/O Refreshing)
Data is exchanged each cycle during I/O refreshing of the CPU Bus Unit Area.
Basically, 25 words are allocated to each CPU Bus Unit based on its unit number setting. The number of words actually used by the CPU Bus Unit varies.
The Special I/O Unit Area ranges from CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 (25 words × 16
Units).
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Unit
CPU Bus Unit Area
25 words/Unit

Transferred in
I/O refreshing

Note With CS1-H CPU Units, the CPU BUS I/O REFRESH instruction
(DLNK(226)) can be executed in the ladder program to refresh the
CIO Area words allocated to the CPU Bus Unit of a specified unit
number.

Transfer of Words Allocated in the DM Area
Each CPU Bus Unit is allocated 100 words in the DM Area in the range of
D30000 to D31599 (100 words × 16 Units). There are three times that data
may be transferred through the words allocated to each Unit. The timing of
data transfers depends on the model being used.
1,2,3...

1. Data transferred when the PLC is turned ON.
2. Data transferred each cycle.
3. Data transferred when necessary.
Note With CS1-H CPU Units, the CPU BUS I/O REFRESH instruction
(DLNK(226)) can be executed in the ladder program to refresh the
DM Area words allocated to the CPU Bus Unit of a specified unit
number.
Some models transfer data in both directions, from the DM Area to the Unit
and from the Unit to the DM Area. See the Unit’s Operation Manual for details
on data transfers.
These 100 words are generally used to hold initial settings for the CPU Bus
Unit. When the contents of this area are changed from the program to reflect a
change in the system, the Restart Bits (A50100 to A50115) for affected Units
must be turned ON to restart the Units.

391

Section 8-6

Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Unit
Transferred when power is turned
on or the Unit is restarted.

DM Area for CPU Bus Units
100 words/Unit

Transferred each cycle
and when necessary.

FINS Commands
The CMND(490) instruction can be added to the ladder program to issue a
FINS command to the CPU Bus Unit.
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Unit

The FINS command is transmitted
when CMND(490) has been
executed in the program.

FINS command transmission

FINS commands can be transmitted to CPU Bus Units in other PLCs in the
network, not just the local PLC.
Serial Communications CPU Bus Unit
Unit
CPU Unit

Serial Communications Unit
CPU Unit

The FINS command is transmitted
when CMND(490) has been
executed in the program.

Command transmission

CPU Bus Unit Initialization
CPU Bus Units are initialized when the PLC’s power is turned on or the Unit’s
Restart Bit is turned ON. The Unit’s CPU Bus Unit Initialization Flag (A30200
to A30215) will be ON while the Unit is initializing.
Cyclic I/O refreshing will not be performed for a CPU Bus Unit while its Initialization Flag is ON.

392

SECTION 9
Memory Areas
This section describes the structure and functions of the I/O Memory Areas and Parameter Areas.
9-1
9-2

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

394

I/O Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

395

9-2-1

I/O Memory Area Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

395

9-2-2

Overview of the Data Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

398

9-2-3

Data Area Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

403

9-3

Precautions in Using C200H Special I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

404

9-4

CIO Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

405

9-5

C200H DeviceNet Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

411

9-6

CS-series DeviceNet Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

412

9-7

PLC Link Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

414

9-8

Data Link Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

416

9-9

CPU Bus Unit Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

417

9-10 Inner Board Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

418

9-11 Special I/O Unit Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

419

9-12 SYSMAC BUS Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

421

9-13 I/O Terminal Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

422

9-14 Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

423

9-15 Holding Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

424

9-16 Auxiliary Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

425

9-17 TR (Temporary Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

448

9-18 Timer Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

449

9-19 Counter Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

450

9-20 Data Memory (DM) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

451

9-21 Extended Data Memory (EM) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

453

9-22 Index Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

455

9-23 Data Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

461

9-24 Task Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

463

9-25 Condition Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

463

9-26 Clock Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

466

9-27 Parameter Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

467

9-27-1 PLC Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

467

9-27-2 Registered I/O Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

467

9-27-3 Routing Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

468

9-27-4 CPU Bus Unit Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

468

393

Section 9-1

Introduction

9-1

Introduction
The CPU Unit’s memory (RAM with battery back-up) can be divided into three
parts: the User Program Memory, I/O Memory Area, and Parameter Area.
This section describes the I/O Memory Area and Parameter Area.

I/O Memory Area
This region of memory contains the data areas which can be accessed by
instruction operands. The data areas include the CIO Area, Work Area, Holding Area, Auxiliary Area, DM Area, EM Area, Timer Area, Counter Area, Task
Flag Area, Data Registers, Index Registers, Condition Flag Area, and Clock
Pulse Area.
I/O Memory Area

Instruction

Parameter Area
This region of memory contains various settings that cannot be specified by
instruction operands; they can be specified from a Programming Device only.
The settings include the PLC Setup, I/O Table, Routing Table, and CPU Bus
Unit settings.
Programming Device
Programming Device
Parameter Area
Parameter Area

394

Section 9-2

I/O Memory Areas

9-2

I/O Memory Areas

9-2-1

I/O Memory Area Structure
The following table shows the basic structure of the I/O Memory Area.

Area

CIO
Area

I/O Area

Size

Range

External I/O
allocation

Bit
access

Word
access

Access
Read

Write

Change
from
Programming
Device

Status at
startup
or mode
change

Forcing
bit status

Cleared
(See note
5.)

5,120
bits (320
words)

CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319
(See note
1.)

Basic I/O OK
Units

C200H
DeviceNet
Words

1,600
bits (100
words)

Outputs:
CIO 0050
to
CIO 0099
Inputs:
CIO 0350
to
CIO 0399
(See note
2.)

DeviceNet
Slaves

PLC Link
Words

32 bits (4
words)

CIO 0247
to
CIO 0250
A442

---

Data Link
Area

3,200
bits (200
words)

CIO 1000
to
CIO 1199

Data link
or PLC
Link

CPU Bus
Unit Area

6,400
bits (400
words)

CIO 1500
to
CIO 1899

CPU Bus OK
Units

Special I/O
Unit Area

15,360
bits (960
words)

CIO 2000
to
CIO 2959

Special
I/O Units

Inner Board
Area

1,600
bits (100
words)

CIO 1900
to
CIO 1999

Inner
Boards

SYSMAC
BUS Area

1,280
bits (80
words)

CIO 3000
to
CIO 3079
(See note
8.)

Slave
Racks

I/O Terminal
Area

512 bits
(32
words)

CIO 3100
to
CIO 3131
(See note
9.)

Slaves
other
than
Racks

CS-series
DeviceNet
Area

9,600
bits (600
words)

CIO 3200
to
CIO 3799

DeviceNet
Slaves

Internal I/O
Areas

37,504
bits
(2,344
words)
4,800
bits (300
words)

CIO 1200
to
CIO 1499
CIO 3800
to
CIO 6143

---

Work Area

8,192
bits (512
words)

W000 to
W511

---

Holding Area (See
note 10.)

8,192
bits (512
words)

H000 to
H511

---

Maintained

395

Section 9-2

I/O Memory Areas
Area

Auxiliary Area

Size

Range

External I/O
allocation

Word
access

Access
Read

Change
from
Programming
Device

Status at
startup
or mode
change

Forcing
bit status

Varies
from
address
to
address.

Write

15,360
bits (960
words)

A000 to
A447

TR Area

16 bits

TR0 to
TR15

---

Cleared

DM Area

32,768
words

D00000 to
D32767

---

No (See
note 3.)

Maintained

EM Area

32,768
words
per bank
(0 to C,
13 max.)

E0_00000 --to
EC_32767

No (See
note 3.)

Maintained

Timer Completion
Flags

4,096
bits

T0000 to
T4095

---

Cleared
(See note
5.)

Counter Completion
Flags

4,096
bits

C0000 to
C4095

---

Maintained

Timer PVs

4,096
words

T0000 to
T4095

---

Cleared
(See note
5.)

No (See
note 6.)

Counter PVs

4,096
words

C0000 to
C4095

---

Maintained

No (See
note 7.)

Task Flag Area

32 bits

TK00 to
TK31

---

Cleared

Index Registers (See 16 regisnote 4.)
ters

IR0 to
IR15

---

Indirect
addressing only

Specific
instructions
only

Cleared
(See note
5.)

Data Registers (See
note 4.)

DR0 to
DR15

---

Cleared
(See note
5.)

16 registers

---

Bit
access

A448 to
A959

Note

1. The I/O Area can be expanded to CIO 0000 to CIO 0999 by changing the
first words allocated to Racks.
2. C200H DeviceNet Words are used for fixed allocations by the C200H DeviceNet Master Unit (C200HW-DRM21-V1). The CS-series DeviceNet Unit
(CS1W-DRM21) does not use this same area for fixed allocations, but rather uses the CS-series DeviceNet Area (CIO 3200 to CIO 3799).
3. Bits can be manipulated using TST(350), TSTN(351), SETB(532),
RSTB(533), OUTB(534).
4. Index registers and data registers can be used either individually by task
or they can be shared by all the tasks (CS1-H CPU Units only).
5. If the I/O Memory Hold Bit (A50012) is turned ON, the contents of these
areas will be maintained when the operating mode is changed. If in addition the IOM Hold Bit is selected under Startup Hold in the PLC Setup, the
contents of these areas will be maintained when the power supply is turned
ON.
6. Timer PVs can be refreshed indirectly by forced setting/resetting the Timer
Completion Flag.
7. Counter PVs can be refreshed indirectly by forced setting/resetting
Counter Completion Flags.
8. These words can be used as work words/bits when SYSMAC BUS Slaves
are not used.
9. These words can be used as work words/bits when I/O Terminals are not
used.

396

I/O Memory Areas

Section 9-2
10. The Function Block Holding Area words are allocated from H512 to H1535.
These words can be used only for the function block instance area (internally allocated variable area).

397

Section 9-2

I/O Memory Areas

9-2-2

Overview of the Data Areas
The data areas in the CS-series I/O Memory Area are described in detail
below.

CIO Area
It isn’t necessary to input the “CIO” acronym when specifying an address in
the CIO Area. The CIO Area is generally used for data exchanges such as I/O
refreshing with various Units. Words that aren’t allocated to Units may be
used as work words and work bits in the program only.
Word

Bit
CIO 0000

I/O Area
CIO 0319
(CIO 0320)
(Not used.)
(CIO 0999)
CIO 1000

See note 1.

Bit
Word
15
CIO 0000

Data Link Area
CIO 1199
CIO 1200
Internal I/O Area
CIO 1499
CIO 1500

CIO 0099
CS1 CPU Bus Unit Area
(25 words/Unit)

CIO 0247
CIO 0250

Inner Board Area

CIO 0319
CIO 0320

CIO 1899
CIO 1900

I/O Area

CIO 0050
DeviceNet Area
(Outputs)

PLC Link Area

(Not used.)
CIO 0349
CIO 0350

CIO 1999
CIO 2000

DeviceNet Area
(Input)

Special I/O Unit Area
(10 words/Unit)
CIO 2959
(CIO 2960)

CIO 0399
CIO 0400
(Not used.)
(Not used.)

(CIO 2999)
CIO 3000
SYSMAC BUS Area
CIO 3079
(CIO 3080)
(CIO 3099)
CIO 3100
CIO 3131
(CIO 3132)
(CIO 3199)
CIO 3200

(Not used.)
I/O Terminal Area
(Not used.)
CS/CJ Series
DeviceNet Area

(CIO 3799)
CIO 3800

CIO 6143

398

See note 2.

Internal I/O Area

CIO 0999

See note 2.

Section 9-2

I/O Memory Areas
Note

1. It is possible to use CIO 0320 to CIO 0999 for I/O words by making the appropriate settings for the first words on the Racks. Settings for the first
words on the Racks can be made using the CX-Programmer to set the first
Rack addresses in the I/O table. The settings range for the first Rack addresses is from CIO 0000 to CIO 0900.
2. When using a C200H DeviceNet Master Unit (C200HW-DRM21-V1), be
sure the same words are not allocated to both Basic I/O Units and DeviceNet I/O.
3. The parts of the CIO Area that are labelled “Not used” may be used in programming as work bits. In the future, however, unused CIO Area bits may
be used when expanding functions. Always use Work Area bits first.

I/O Area

These words are allocated to external I/O terminals on Basic I/O Units. Words
that aren’t allocated to external I/O terminals may be used only in the program.

C200H DeviceNet Area

These words are allocated to Slaves for DeviceNet Remote I/O Communications for C200H DeviceNet Master Units (C200HW-DRM21-V1). Allocations
are fixed and cannot be changed. Be sure that allocates to not overlap with
those used for other I/O points.
The CS-series DeviceNet Unit (CS1W-DRM21) does not use this same area
for fixed allocations.

PLC Link Area

When PLC Link Units are used to create a PLC Link system, the PLC Link
Area contains flags that indicate PLC Link errors and the operating status of
CPU Units in the PLC Link. CIO 247 to CIO 250 are equivalent to SR 247 to
SR 250 in the C200HX/HG/HE PLCs. (The PLC Link Operating Level Flags,
A44211 and A44212, are equivalent to AR 2411 and AR 2412 in the
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs.)

Link Area

These words are used for data links in Controller Link Networks. Words that
aren’t used in data links may be used only in the program.

CPU Bus Unit Area

These words are allocated to CPU Bus Units to transfer status information.
Each Unit is allocated 25 words and up to 16 Units (with unit numbers 0 to 15)
can be used. Words that aren’t used by CPU Bus Units may be used only in
the program.

Special I/O Unit Area

These words are allocated to CS-series Special I/O Units and C200H Special
I/O Units. Each Unit is allocated 10 words and up to 96 Units (unit numbers 0
to 95) can be used. (C200H Special I/O Units are limited to unit numbers 0 to
F (15).)
Words that aren’t used by Special I/O Units may be used only in the program.

Inner Board Area

These words are allocated to Inner Boards such as Communications Boards.
Up to 100 words can be allocated for input and output.

SYSMAC BUS Area

These words are allocated to Slave Racks connected to SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Master Units. Each Rack is allocated 10 words and up to 8 Racks
(rack numbers 0 to 7) can be used. These words can be used as work
words/bits when SYSMAC BUS Slaves are not used.

I/O Terminal Area

These words are allocated to Units other than Slave Racks (such as I/O Interfaces and I/O Terminals) that are connected to SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O
Master Units. Each Unit is allocated 1 word except for Optical I/O Units which
take 2 words; up to 32 Units (unit numbers 0 to 31) can be used. These words
can be used as work words/bits when I/O Terminals are not used.

399

Section 9-2

I/O Memory Areas
CS-series DeviceNet Area

These words are allocated to Slaves for DeviceNet Remote I/O Communications for CS-series DeviceNet Units (CS1W-DRM21). Allocations are fixed
and cannot be changed. Be sure that allocates to not overlap with those used
for other I/O points.
The C200H DeviceNet Master Unit (C200HW-DRM21-V1) does not use this
same area for fixed allocations

Internal I/O Area

These words can be used only in the program; they cannot be used for I/O
exchange with external I/O terminals. Be sure to use the work words provided
in the Work Area (WR) before allocating words in the Internal I/O Area or
other unused words in the CIO Area. It is possible that these words will be
assigned to new functions in future versions of CS-series CPU Units, so the
program may have to be changed before being used in a new CS-series PLC
if CIO Area words are used as work words in the program.
Note CIO 25207 and CIO 25213 will be used for the Module (M-Net) Interface Network Restart Bits when a M-Net Interface Unit is connected to the CS-series
PLC. Do not use these bits are work bits in programming. The M-Net Interface
Unit is restarted by turning ON these bits.

Work Area (WR)
Words in the Work Area can be used only in the program; they cannot be
used for I/O exchange with external I/O terminals. No new functions will be
assigned to this area in future versions of CS-series PLCs, so use this area
for work words and bits before any words in the CIO Area.
Word 15

Bit

W511

Holding Area (HR)
Words in the Holding Area can be used only in the program. These words
retain their content when the PLC is turned on or the operating mode is
switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN or MONITOR mode.
Word 15

Bit

H511

Note The Function Block Holding Area words are allocated from H512 to H1535.
These words can be used only for the function block instance area (internally
allocated variable area). These words cannot be specified as instruction operands in the user program.

400

Section 9-2

I/O Memory Areas
Auxiliary Area (AR)

The Auxiliary Area contains flags and control bits used to monitor and control
PLC operation. This area is divided into two parts: A000 to A447 are readonly and A448 to A959 can be read or written. Refer to 9-16 Auxiliary Area for
details on the Auxiliary Area.
Note The undefined addresses of the Auxiliary Area may be allocated to functions
in future version upgrades of the CPU Unit. Do not use these words as CIO
Area words in the user program.
Word 15

Bit

Read-only area

A447
A448
Read-write area

A959

Temporary Relay Area (TR)
The TR Area contains bits that record the ON/OFF status of program
branches. The TR bits are used with mnemonics only.

Data Memory Area (DM)
The DM Area is a multi-purpose data area that can be accessed in word-units
only. These words retain their content when the PLC is turned on or the operating mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN or MONITOR
mode.
Word
D00000
D20000

D06032 to D06063: C200H
DeviceNet Status Area
Special I/O Unit Area
(10 words/Unit)

D29599

D30000
CPU Bus Unit Area
(100 words/Unit)
D31599
D32000
Inner Board Area

D32767

401

Section 9-2

I/O Memory Areas
Extended Data Memory Area (EM)

The EM Area is a multi-purpose data area that can be accessed in word-units
only. These words retain their content when the PLC is turned on or the operating mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN or MONITOR
mode.
The EM Area is divided into 32,767-word regions called banks. The number of
EM banks depends upon the model of CPU Unit, with a maximum of 13 banks
(0 to C). Refer to 2-1 Specifications for details on the number of EM banks
provided in each model of CPU Unit.
Word

Word

E0_00000

EC_00000

E0_32767

EC_32767

Timer Area
There are two timer data areas, the Timer Completion Flags and the Timer
Present Values (PVs). Up to 4,096 timers with timer numbers T0000 to T4095
can be used. The same number is used to access a timer’s Completion Flag
and PV.
Timer Completion Flags

These flags are read as bits. A Completion Flag is turned ON by the system
when the corresponding timer times out (the set time elapses).

Timer PVs

The PVs are read and written as words (16 bits). The PVs count up or down
as the timer operates.

Counter Area
There are two counter data areas, the Counter Completion Flags and the
Counter Present Values (PVs). Up to 4,096 counters with counter numbers
C0000 to C4095 can be used. The same number is used to access a
counter’s Completion Flag and PV.
Counter Completion Flags

These flags are read as bits. A Completion Flag is turned ON by the system
when the corresponding counter counts out (the set value is reached).

Counter PVs

The PVs are read and written as words (16 bits). The PVs count up or down
as the counter operates.

Condition Flags
These flags include the Arithmetic Flags such as the Error Flag and Equals
Flag which indicate the results of instruction execution as well as the Always
ON and Always OFF Flags. The Condition Flags are specified with labels
(symbols) rather than addresses.

Clock Pulses
The Clock Pulses are turned ON and OFF by the CPU Unit’s internal timer.
These bits are specified with labels (symbols) rather than addresses.

Task Flag Area (TK)
Task Flags range from TK00 to TK31 and correspond to cyclic tasks 0 to 31. A
Task Flag will be ON when the corresponding cyclic task is in executable

402

Section 9-2

I/O Memory Areas

(RUN) status and OFF when the cyclic task hasn’t been executed (INI) or is in
standby (WAIT) status.

Index Registers (IR)
These registers (IR0 to IR15) are used to store PLC memory addresses
(absolute memory addresses in RAM) to indirectly address words in I/O memory. The Index Registers can be used separately in each task or, for CS1-H
CPU Units, they can be shared by all tasks.

Data Registers (DR)
These registers (DR0 to DR15) are used together with the Index Registers.
When a Data Register is input just before an Index Register, the content of the
Data Register is added to the PLC memory address in the Index Register to
offset that address. The Data Registers are used separately in each task or,
for CS1-H CPU Units, they can be shared by all tasks.

9-2-3

Data Area Properties

Content After Fatal Errors, Forced Set/Reset Usage
Area

CIO I/O Area
Area C200H DeviceNet Words
PLC Link Words
Data Link Area
CPU Bus Units
Special I/O Unit Area
Inner Board Area
SYSMAC BUS Area
I/O Terminal Area
CS-series DeviceNet
Area
Internal I/O Area
Work Area (W)
Holding Area (H)
Auxiliary Area (A)
Data Memory Area (D)
Extended Data Memory Area
(E)
Timer Completion Flags (T)
Timer PVs (T)
Counter Completion Flags (C)
Counter PVs (C)
Task Flags (TK)
Index Registers (IR)
Data Registers (DR)

External allocation

Fatal Error Generated
Forced Set/
Forced
Reset
Execution of FALS(007) Other Fatal Error
Functions
IOM Hold
IOM Hold IOM Hold IOM Hold
Usable?
Bit OFF
Bit ON
Bit OFF
Bit ON
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Retained Yes

Basic I/O Units
DeviceNet Slaves
None
Controller Link or
PLC Link data links
CPU Bus Units
Special I/O Units
Inner Boards
SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Slaves
SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Terminals
DeviceNet Slaves or
Master
None
None
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained Retained
Status varies from address to address.
Retained
Retained
Retained Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained

Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained

Cleared
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared

Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Retained
Retained

Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No

403

Section 9-3

Precautions in Using C200H Special I/O Units
Content After Mode Change or Power Interruption
Area

PLC Power OFF to ON

Mode Changed1

CIO
Area

IOM Hold
Bit OFF
Cleared

IOM Hold
Bit ON
Retained

IOM Hold Bit Cleared2
IOM Hold
IOM Hold
Bit OFF
Bit ON
Cleared
Cleared

IOM Hold Bit Held2
IOM Hold
IOM Hold
Bit OFF
Bit ON
Cleared
Retained

I/O Area
C200H DeviceNet Words
PLC Link Words
Data Link Area
CPU Bus Units
Special I/O Unit Area
Inner Board Area
SYSMAC BUS Area
I/O Terminal Area
CS-series DeviceNet Area
Internal I/O Area
Work Area (W)
Holding Area (H)
Auxiliary Area (A)
Data Memory Area (D)
Extended Data Memory Area (E)
Timer Completion Flags (T)
Timer PVs (T)
Counter Completion Flags (C)
Counter PVs (C)

Cleared
Retained
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Retained
Status varies from address to address.
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Retained
Cleared
Cleared
Retained
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained

Cleared
Retained

Retained
Retained

Retained
Retained
Cleared
Cleared
Retained
Retained

Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained

Task Flags (TK)
Index Registers (IR)
Data Registers (DR)

Cleared
Cleared
Cleared

Note

Cleared
Retained
Retained

Cleared
Cleared
Cleared

1. Mode changed from PROGRAM to RUN/MONITOR or vice-versa.
2. The PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup” setting determines
whether the IOM Hold Bit’s status is held or cleared when the PLC is turned
on.

9-3

Precautions in Using C200H Special I/O Units
Observe the following precautions when using C200H Special I/O Units.

Memory Areas

404

There are differences between the words allocated to Special I/O Units in the
PLC memory areas, as shown in the following table.
PLC
C200H/C200HS
IR/CIO
IR 100 to IR 199
Area
allocations

C200HX/HG/HE
IR 100 to IR 199
IR 400 to IR 459

DM Area
DM 1000 to DM 1999
allocations

DM 1000 to DM 1999
DM 2000 to DM 2599

CS Series
CIO 2000 to CIO 2959
(allocated CIO 2000 to
CIO 2159 for unit
numbers 0 up to 15)
D20000 to D29599
(allocated D20000 to
D21599 for unit numbers 0 up to 15)

Section 9-4

CIO Area
Restrictions

There are special restrictions in programming, allocations, and data communications with the CPU Unit for the following C200H Special I/O Units. Refer to
Appendix F Restrictions in Using C200H Special I/O Units for details.
Unit
ASCII Units
High-speed Counter Units
ID Sensor Units
Position Control Units
Fuzzy Logic Units
High-speed Counter Units
Motion Control Units
C200H I/O LInk Units

Model number
C200H-ASC02/ASC11/ASC21/ASC31
C200H-CT001-V1/CT002
C200H-IDS01-V1/IDS21
C200H-NC111/NC112/NC211
C200H-FZ001
C200H-CT021
C200H-MC221
C200H-DRT21

There are no special restrictions for other C200H Special I/O Units.

9-4

CIO Area
I/O Area addresses range from CIO 0000 to CIO 0319 (CIO bits 000000 to
031915), but the area can be expanded to CIO 0000 to CIO 0999 by changing
the first Rack word with any Programming Device other than a Programming
Console. The maximum number of bits that can be allocated for external I/O
will still be 5,120 (320 words) even if the I/O Area is expanded.
Note The maximum number of external I/O points depends upon the CPU Unit
being used.
Words in the I/O Area can be allocated to I/O terminals on Basic I/O Units
(CS-series Basic I/O Units, C200H Basic I/O Units, and C200H Group-2 Highdensity I/O Units).
Words are allocated to Basic I/O Units based on the slot position (left to right)
and number of words required. The words are allocated consecutively and
empty slots are skipped. Words in the I/O Area that aren’t allocated to Basic
I/O Units can be used only in the program.
CIO 0000 to CIO 0319 include the C200H DeviceNet Output Area (CIO 0050
to CIO 0099) and the PLC Link Words CIO 0247 to CIO 0250. Be sure that
word allocations do not overlap allocations for other I/O points when using a
C200H DeviceNet Master Unit (C200HS-DRM1-V1) or when using a PLC Link
Unit.

I/O Area Initialization
1,2,3...

The contents of the I/O Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
(See the following explanation of IOM Hold Bit Operation.)
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
(See the following explanation of IOM Hold Bit Operation.)
3. The I/O Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the I/O Area will be retained if FALS(007) is executed.)

IOM Hold Bit Operation

If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, the contents of the I/O Area won’t be
cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice-versa.

405

Section 9-4

CIO Area

If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the I/O
Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled. All I/O bits,
including outputs, will retain the status that they had before the PLC was
turned off.
Note If the I/O Hold Bit is turned ON, the outputs from the PLC will not be turned
OFF and will maintain their previous status when the PLC is switched from
RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode. Make sure that the external
loads will not produce dangerous conditions when this occurs. (When operation stops for a fatal error, including those produced with the FALS(007)
instruction, all outputs from Output Unit will be turned OFF and only the internal output status will be maintained.)
Forcing bit Status

Bits in the I/O Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Note When designating addresses in programming or allocations inside C200H
Special I/O Units, “000” to “255” will specify CIO 0000 to CIO 0255 in the CPU
Unit and “000” to “511” will specify CIO 0000 to CIO 0511 in the CPU Unit.
Other addresses in this area cannot be specified inside the C200H Special
I/O Units.

Input Bits
A bit in the I/O Area is called an input bit when it is allocated to an Input Unit.
Input bits reflect the ON/OFF status of devices such as push-button switches,
limit switches, and photoelectric switches. There are three ways for the status
of input points to be refreshed in the PLC: normal I/O refreshing, immediate
refreshing, and IORF(097) refreshing.
Normal I/O Refreshing

The status of I/O points on external devices is read once each cycle after program execution.
In the following example, CIO 000101 is allocated to switch 1, an external
switch connected to the input terminal of an Input Unit. The ON/OFF status of
switch 1 is reflected in CIO 000101 once each cycle.
Ladder symbol

Mnemonic
LD 000101

000101

Input Unit

CPU Unit
Bit allocation
CIO 000101

Switch 1
Once
each
cycle

Immediate Refreshing

406

When the immediate refreshing variation of an instruction is specified by
inputting an exclamation point just before the instruction, and the instruction’s
operand is an input bit or word, the word containing the bit or the word itself
will be refreshed just before the instruction is executed. This immediate
refreshing is performed in addition to the normal I/O refreshing performed
once each cycle.

Section 9-4

CIO Area

Note Immediate refreshing will be performed for input bits allocated to Basic I/O
Units only (excluding C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units and Basic I/O
Units mounted in Remote I/O Slave Racks), not High-density I/O Units which
are Special I/O Units.
1,2,3...

1. Bit Operand
Just before the instruction is executed, the ON/OFF status of the 16 I/O
points allocated to the word containing the specified bit will be read to the
PLC.
2. Word Operand
Just before the instruction is executed, the ON/OFF status of the 16 I/O
points allocated to the specified word will be read to the PLC.
In the following example, CIO 000101 is allocated to switch 1, an external
switch connected to the input terminal of an Input Unit. The ON/OFF status of
switch 1 is read and reflected in CIO 000101 just before !LD 000101 is executed.
Ladder symbol
000101

Mnemonic
!LD 000101

Input Unit

CPU Unit
CIO 000101

Switch 0
Switch 1

Switch 7
Read
just before
instruction
execution.

IORF(097) Refreshing

When IORF(097) (I/O REFRESH) is executed, the input bits in the specified
range of words are refreshed. This I/O refreshing is performed in addition to
the normal I/O refreshing performed once each cycle.
Note IORF(097) refreshes input bits allocated to Basic I/O Units (excluding Basic
I/O Units mounted in Remote I/O Slave Racks), C200H Group-2 High-density
I/O Units, and other High-density I/O Units which are Special I/O Units.
The following IORF(097) instruction refreshes the status of all I/O points in I/O
Area words CIO 0000 to CIO 0003. The status of input points is read from the
Input Units and the status of output bits is written to the Output Units.

In the following example, the status of input points allocated to CIO 0000 and
CIO 0001 are read from the Input Unit. (CIO 0002 and CIO 0003 are allocated
to Output Units.)

407

Section 9-4

CIO Area
Input Unit

CPU Unit

Switch 0
Switch 16
Switch 1
Switch 17
Switch 15

Read
when
IORF
(097)
is
executed.

Switch 31

Limitations on Input bits

There is no limit on the number of times that input bits can be used as normally open and normally closed conditions in the program and the addresses
can be programmed in any order.
An input bit cannot be used as an operand in an Output instruction.
000100

00001

Input Response Time
Settings

Not allowed if CIO 000100 is an input bit.

The input response times for each CS-series Input Unit can be set in the PLC
Setup. Increasing the input response time will reduce chattering and the
effects of noise and decreasing the input response time allows higher speed
input pulses to be received.
The default value for input response times is 8 ms and the setting range is 0 to
32 ms.
Note If the time is set to 0 ms, there will still be an ON delay time of 20 µs max. and
an OFF delay time of 300 µs due to delays caused by internal elements.
Pulses shorter than the time
constant are not received.
Input from switch

Input bit

Input time constant

Output Bits
A bit in the I/O Area is called an output bit when it is allocated to an Output
Unit. The ON/OFF status of an output bits are output to devices such as actuators. There are three ways for the status of output bits to be refreshed to an
Output Unit: normal I/O refreshing, immediate refreshing, and IORF(097)
refreshing.
Normal I/O Refreshing

The status of output bits are output to external devices once each cycle after
program execution.
In the following example, CIO 000201 is allocated to an actuator, an external
device connected to an output terminal of an Output Unit. The ON/OFF status
of CIO 000201 is output to that actuator once each cycle.

408

Section 9-4

CIO Area
Ladder symbol

Mnemonic
OUT 000201

000201

CPU Unit
Bit allocation

CIO 000201
Output Unit
Actuator
Once
each
cycle

Immediate Refreshing

When the immediate refreshing variation of an instruction is specified by
inputting an exclamation point just before the instruction, and the instruction’s
operand is an output bit or word, the content of the word containing the bit or
the word itself will be output just after the instruction is executed. This immediate refreshing is performed in addition to the normal I/O refreshing performed
once each cycle.
Note Immediate refreshing will be performed for output bits allocated to Basic I/O
Units only (excluding C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units and Basic I/O
Units mounted in Remote I/O Slave Racks), not High-density I/O Units which
are Special I/O Units.

1,2,3...

1. Bit Operand
Just after the instruction is executed, the ON/OFF status of the 16 I/O
points allocated to the word containing the specified bit will be output to the
output device(s).
2. Word Operand
Just after the instruction is executed, the ON/OFF status of the 16 I/O
points allocated to the specified word will be output to the output device(s).
In the following example, CIO 000201 is allocated to an actuator, an external
device connected to the output terminal of an Output Unit. The ON/OFF status of CIO 000201 is output to the actuator just after !OUT 000201 is executed.
Ladder symbol
000201

Mnemonic
OUT 000201

!
CPU Unit
Bit allocation

CIO 000201
Output Unit
Actuator

Output
just after
instruction
execution.

409

Section 9-4

CIO Area
IORF(097) Refreshing

When IORF(097) (I/O REFRESH) is executed, the ON/OFF status of output
bits in the specified range of words is output to their external devices. This I/O
refreshing is performed in addition to the normal I/O refreshing performed
once each cycle.
Note IORF(097) refreshes output bits allocated to Basic I/O Units (excluding Basic
I/O Units mounted in Remote I/O Slave Racks), C200H Group-2 High-density
I/O Units, and other High-density I/O Units which are Special I/O Units.
The following IORF(097) instruction refreshes the status of all I/O points in I/O
Area words CIO 0000 to CIO 0003. The status of input points is read from the
Input Units and the status of output bits is written to the Output Units.
In this example, the status of input points allocated to CIO 0002 and CIO 0003
are output to the Output Unit. (CIO 0000 and CIO 0001 are allocated to Input
Units.)

CPU Unit
Bit allocation

CIO 0002
Output Unit
Actuator
CIO 0003

Output when
IORF (097)
is executed.

Limitations on Output Bits

Output bits can be programmed in any order. Output bits can be used as operands in Input instructions and there is no limit on the number of times that an
output bit is used as a normally open and normally closed condition.

An output bit can be used in only one Output instruction that controls its status. If an output bit is used in two or more Output instructions, only the last
instruction will be effective.
CIO 000000 is controlled
by CIO 000010.

Only this instruction is
effective.

Note All outputs on Basic I/O Units and Special I/O Units can be turned OFF by
turning ON the Output OFF Bit (A50015). The status of the output bits won’t
be affected even though the actual outputs are turned OFF.

410

Section 9-5

C200H DeviceNet Area

9-5

C200H DeviceNet Area
The C200H DeviceNet Area is divided into two parts:
1,2,3...

1. The DeviceNet Output Area contains 50 words with addresses ranging
from CIO 0050 to CIO 0099.
2. The DeviceNet Input Area contains 50 words with addresses ranging from
CIO 0350 to CIO 0399.
Words in the C200H DeviceNet Area are used for fixed allocations to Slaves
for DeviceNet remote I/O communications for the C200H DeviceNet Master
Unit (C200HW-DRM21-V1).
Note The CS-series DeviceNet Unit (CS1W-DRM21) does not use this
same area for fixed allocations, but rather uses the CS-series DeviceNet Area (CIO 3200 to CIO 3799).
Data is exchanged regularly to Slaves in the network (independent of the program) through the C200H DeviceNet Master Unit (C200HW-DRM21-V1)
mounted in the CPU Rack.
Words can be allocated to Slaves in two ways: fixed allocation (words allocated by node number) or free allocation (user-set word allocation).
• With fixed allocations, words in the C200H DeviceNet Area are allocated
automatically in node-number order.
• With user-set allocations, the user can allocate words to Slaves from the
following words.
CIO 0000 to CIO 0235, CIO 0300 to CIO 0511, CIO 1000 to CIO 1063
H000 to H099
D00000 to D05999
The same ranges can be allocated for both CS-series and C200HX/G/E PLCs
except that LR 00 to LR 63 in the C200HX/G/E PLCs correspond to CIO 1000
to CIO 1063 in the CS-series PLCs. (The entire Master Status Area is from
D06032 to D06063.)
For details on word allocations, refer to the C200HDeviceNet Operation Manual (W267).
C200H DeviceNet Master
Unit (C200HW-DRM21-V1)

C200H DeviceNet Area

CPU Unit

DeviceNet
Slaves

With fixed allocation, words are assigned according to node numbers.
(If a Slave requires two or more words, it will occupy as many node
numbers as words required.)

411

Section 9-6

CS-series DeviceNet Area
DeviceNet Area
Initialization

The contents of the DeviceNet Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...

1. The operating mode is changed between PROGRAM and RUN or MONITOR mode and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The DeviceNet Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the DeviceNet Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)

IOM Hold Bit Operation

If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the DeviceNet Area won’t
be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the
DeviceNet Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.

Forcing Bit Status

Bits in the DeviceNet Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Note

1. The C200H DeviceNet Output Area overlaps the I/O Area. When using DeviceNet communications with the default allocations, be sure that words
are not also allocated to other I/O points.
2. With the CS-series CPU Units, words beginning at D06032 are allocated
as follows for the C200H DeviceNet Master Status and the Communications Cycle Present Value:

9-6

DeviceNet Master Status:

D06032 + unit number × 2

Communications Cycle Present Value:

D06033 + unit number × 2

CS-series DeviceNet Area
The CS-series DeviceNet Area addresses run from CIO 3200 to CIO 3799
(600 words).
Words in the CS-series DeviceNet Area are used for fixed allocations to
Slaves for DeviceNet remote I/O communications for the CS-series DeviceNet
Unit (CS1W-DRM21).
Note The C200H DeviceNet Master Unit (C200HW-DRM21-V1) does not
use this same area for fixed allocations, but rather uses the C200H
DeviceNet Area (CIO 0050 to CIO0099 and CIO 0350 to CIO 0399).
The Fixed Allocation Setting Switches 1 to 3 (Software Switches) in the CIO
Area words allocated to the DeviceNet Unit determine which fixed allocation
words are used.
Area
Fixed Allocation Area 1
Fixed Allocation Area 2
Fixed Allocation Area 3

412

Master to Slave
(Output Words)
CIO 3200 to CIO 3263
CIO 3400 to CIO 3463
CIO 3600 to CIO 3663

Slave to Master
(Input Words)
CIO 3300 to CIO 3363
CIO 3500 to CIO 3563
CIO 3700 to CIO 3763

Section 9-6

CS-series DeviceNet Area

Note If the DeviceNet Unit is set to use the I/O slave function, the following
words are also allocated.
Area
Fixed Allocation Area 1
Fixed Allocation Area 2
Fixed Allocation Area 3

Master to Slave
(Output Word)
CIO 3370
CIO 3570
CIO 3770

Slave to Master
(Input Word)
CIO 3270
CIO 3470
CIO 3670

Data is exchanged regularly to Slaves in the network (independent of the program) through the CS-series DeviceNet Unit (CS1W-DRM21) mounted in the
CPU Rack.
Words can be allocated to Slaves in two ways: fixed allocation (words allocated by node number) or free allocation (user-set word allocation).
• With fixed allocations, words in the CS-series DeviceNet Area are allocated automatically in node-number order in one of the fixed allocation
areas (1 to 3).
• With user-set allocations, the user can allocate words to Slaves from the
following words.
CIO 0000 to CIO 6143
W000 to W511
H000 to H511
D00000 to D32767
E00000 to E32767 (banks 0 to C)
For details on word allocations, refer to the CS/CJ Series DeviceNet Unit
Operation Manual (W380).
CPU Unit

CS-series DeviceNet Unit
(CS1W-DRM21)

CS-series DeviceNet Area

DeviceNet Slaves

With fixed allocations, words are assigned according to node numbers.
(If a Slave requires two or more words, it will use as many node
numbers as words required.)

Forcing Bit Status

Bits in the CS-series DeviceNet Area can be force-set and force-reset.

DeviceNet Area
Initialization

The contents of the DeviceNet Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...

413

Section 9-7

PLC Link Area
IOM Hold Bit Operation

9-7

PLC Link Area
The PLC Link Area contains 5 words with addresses ranging from CIO 0247
to CIO 0250. A442 is also used for PLC Links. Use these words to monitor
PLC Link errors, monitor CPU Unit operating status, and detect PLC Link
operating levels.
Note The Link Area (CIO 1000 to CIO 1063) is used to exchange data between
PLCs in a PLC Link system, just as the LR Area is used in other OMRON
PLCs. The flags in the PLC Link Area indicate the status of PLC Link operations.
PLC Link Error Flags
When a transmission error occurs or there is a power interruption at another
Unit after the PLC link is established, the flag corresponding to the other Unit’s
unit number will be turned ON. These flags are read-only, although the PLC
Link Error Flag will be turned ON if the CPU Unit is stopped by a FALS(007)
error.
CPU Unit RUN Flags
The flag corresponding to the a CPU Unit’s unit number will be ON when the
CPU Unit is operating in RUN or MONITOR mode. The corresponding flag will
be OFF when the CPU Unit is in PROGRAM mode. These flags can be used
to determine another Unit’s operating status. These flags are read-only.
Operating Level Detection Flags
The flags in A442 can be used to determine whether a PLC Link Unit is
mounted to the PLC as well as the Unit’s operating level. A44211 will be ON if
the PLC Link Unit is in operating level 1 and A44212 will be ON if the PLC Link
Unit is in operating level 0.

414

Section 9-7

PLC Link Area
CIO Area Flags

Flag type
CPU Unit
RUN Flags

PLC Link
Error Flags

Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15

The following table shows the allocation of the CIO Area flags related to PLC
Link operation. (The numbers in parentheses show the allocation for multilevel
systems; operating level 0 is #0 and operating level 1 is #1.)
CIO 0247
Unit 24 (#1, Unit 8)
Unit 25 (#1, Unit 9)
Unit 26 (#1, Unit 10)
Unit 27 (#1, Unit 11)
Unit 28 (#1, Unit 12)
Unit 29 (#1, Unit 13)
Unit 30 (#1, Unit 14)
Unit 31 (#1, Unit 15)
Unit 24 (#1, Unit 8)
Unit 25 (#1, Unit 9)
Unit 26 (#1, Unit 10)
Unit 27 (#1, Unit 11)
Unit 28 (#1, Unit 12)
Unit 29 (#1, Unit 13)
Unit 30 (#1, Unit 14)
Unit 31 (#1, Unit 15)

PLC Link Area
Initialization

CIO 0248
Unit 16 (#1, Unit 0)
Unit 17 (#1, Unit 1)
Unit 18 (#1, Unit 2)
Unit 19 (#1, Unit 3)
Unit 20 (#1, Unit 4)
Unit 21 (#1, Unit 5)
Unit 22 (#1, Unit 6)
Unit 23 (#1, Unit 7)
Unit 16 (#1, Unit 0)
Unit 17 (#1, Unit 1)
Unit 18 (#1, Unit 2)
Unit 19 (#1, Unit 3)
Unit 20 (#1, Unit 4)
Unit 21 (#1, Unit 5)
Unit 22 (#1, Unit 6)
Unit 23 (#1, Unit 7)

CIO 0249
Unit 8 (#0, Unit 8)
Unit 9 (#0, Unit 9)
Unit 10 (#0, Unit 10)
Unit 11 (#0, Unit 11)
Unit 12 (#0, Unit 12)
Unit 13 (#0, Unit 13)
Unit 14 (#0, Unit 14)
Unit 15 (#0, Unit 15)
Unit 8 (#0, Unit 8)
Unit 9 (#0, Unit 9)
Unit 10 (#0, Unit 10)
Unit 11 (#0, Unit 11)
Unit 12 (#0, Unit 12)
Unit 13 (#0, Unit 13)
Unit 14 (#0, Unit 14)
Unit 15 (#0, Unit 15)

CIO 0250
Unit 0 (#0, Unit 0)
Unit 1 (#0, Unit 1)
Unit 2 (#0, Unit 2)
Unit 3 (#0, Unit 3)
Unit 4 (#0, Unit 4)
Unit 5 (#0, Unit 5)
Unit 6 (#0, Unit 6)
Unit 7 (#0, Unit 7)
Unit 0 (#0, Unit 0)
Unit 1 (#0, Unit 1)
Unit 2 (#0, Unit 2)
Unit 3 (#0, Unit 3)
Unit 4 (#0, Unit 4)
Unit 5 (#0, Unit 5)
Unit 6 (#0, Unit 6)
Unit 7 (#0, Unit 7)

The contents of the PLC Link Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...

1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The PLC Link Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the PLC Link Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)

IOM Hold Bit Operation

If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the PLC Link Area won’t
be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the PLC
Link Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.

Forcing Bit Status

Bits in the PLC Link Area can be force-set and force-reset.

Auxiliary Area Flags

A44211 will be ON when the PLC Link Unit is in operating level #1. A44212
will be ON when the Unit is in operating level #0 or a PLC Link Unit isn’t
mounted in the PLC. (The other bits in A442 are not used.)
Refer to 9-16 Auxiliary Area and to Appendix B Auxiliary Area for more details
on A422.
Note

1. The PLC Link Area (CIO 0247 to CIO 0250) overlaps the I/O Area. When
using PLC Link Units, be sure that words are not also allocated to other I/O
points.
2. When designating addresses in programming or allocations inside C200H
Special I/O Units, “247” to “250” will actually specify CIO 0247 to CIO 0250
in the CPU Unit. A422 cannot be specified inside a C200H Special I/O Unit.

415

Section 9-8

Data Link Area

9-8

Data Link Area
Data Link Area addresses range from CIO 1000 to CIO 1199 (CIO
bits 100000 to 119915). Words in the Link Area are used for data links when
LR is set as the data link area for Controller Link Networks. It is also used for
PLC Links.
A data link automatically (independently of the program) shares data with Link
Areas in other CS-series CPU Units in the network through a Controller Link
Unit mounted to the PLC’s CPU Rack.
Data links can be generated automatically (using the same number of words
for each node) or manually. When a user defines the data link manually, he
can assign any number of words to each node and make nodes receive-only
or transmit-only. Refer to the Controller Link Units Operation Manual (W309)
for more details.
Words in the Link Area can be used in the program when LR is not set as the
data link area for Controller Link Networks and PLC Links are not used.
Link Areas
Controller
Link Unit

Controller
Link Unit

CPU Unit

Controller
Link Unit

CPU Unit

Controller Link Network

Link Area words are also allocated to PLC Link Systems when a PLC Link is
created by connecting PLC Link Units.
Link Areas
PLC Link Unit
CPU Unit

PLC Link
Unit

PLC Link Unit
CPU Unit

CPU Unit

Links to C200HX/HG/HE,
C200HS, and C200H PLCs

Link Area words CIO 1000 to CIO 1063 in CS-series PLCs correspond to Link
Relay Area words LR 00 to LR 63 for data links created in C200HX/HG/HE
PLCs and PLC Links created in C200HX/HG/HE, C200HS, or C200H PLCs.
When converting C200HX/HG/HE, C200HS, or C200H programs for use in
CS-series PLCs, change addresses LR 00 through LR 63 to their equivalent
Link Area addresses CIO 1000 through CIO 1063.

Link Area Initialization

The contents of the Link Area will be cleared in the following cases:

1,2,3...

416

Section 9-9

CPU Bus Unit Area

4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the Link Area will be retained if FALS(007) is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation

If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the Link
Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the Link Area won’t be
cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.

Forcing Bit Status

Bits in the Link Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Note When designating addresses in programming or allocations inside C200H
Special I/O Units, “LR 00” to “LR63” will actually specify CIO 1000 to CIO1063
in the CPU Unit. CIO 1064 to CIO 1199 in the CPU Unit cannot be specified in
the C200H Special I/O Unit.

9-9

CPU Bus Unit Area
The CPU Bus Unit Area contains 400 words with addresses ranging from
CIO 1500 to CIO 1899. Words in the CPU Bus Unit Area can be allocated to
CPU Bus Units to transfer data such as the operating status of the Unit. Each
Unit is allocated 25 words based on the Unit’s unit number setting.
Data is exchanged with CPU Bus Units once each cycle during I/O refreshing,
which occurs after program execution. (Words in this data area cannot be
refreshed with immediate-refreshing or IORF(097).)
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Unit
CPU Bus Unit Area
(25 words/Unit)
I/O
refreshing

Each CPU Bus Unit is allocated 25 words based on its unit number, as shown
in the following table.
Unit number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D

Allocated words
CIO 1500 to CIO 1524
CIO 1525 to CIO 1549
CIO 1550 to CIO 1574
CIO 1575 to CIO 1599
CIO 1600 to CIO 1624
CIO 1625 to CIO 1649
CIO 1650 to CIO 1674
CIO 1675 to CIO 1699
CIO 1700 to CIO 1724
CIO 1725 to CIO 1749
CIO 1750 to CIO 1774
CIO 1775 to CIO 1799
CIO 1800 to CIO 1824
CIO 1825 to CIO 1849

417

Section 9-10

Inner Board Area
Unit number
E
F

Allocated words
CIO 1850 to CIO 1874
CIO 1875 to CIO 1899

The function of the 25 words depends upon the CPU Bus Unit being used. For
details, refer to the Unit’s operation manual.
Words in the CPU Bus Unit Area that aren’t allocated to CPU Bus Units can
be used only in the program.
Note The addresses in the CS-series CPU Bus Unit Area cannot be designated
directly in programming or allocations inside C200H Special I/O Units.
CPU Bus Unit Area
Initialization

The contents of the CPU Bus Unit Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...

1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The CPU Bus Unit Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the CPU Bus Unit Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)

IOM Hold Bit Operation

If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the CS-series CPU Bus
Unit Area won’t be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is
changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the CSseries CPU Bus Unit Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is
cycled.

Forcing Bit Status

Bits in the CPU Bus Unit Area can be force-set and force-reset.

9-10 Inner Board Area
The Inner Board Area contains 100 words with addresses ranging from
CIO 1900 to CIO 1999. Words in the Inner Board Area can be allocated to an
Inner Board to transfer data such as the operating status of the Unit. All 100
words must be allocated to just one Inner Board.
Data is exchanged with the Inner Board once each cycle during normal I/O
refreshing, which occurs after program execution. Depending on the type of
Inner Board that is mounted, data can also be refreshed directly.
Inner Board
CPU Unit
I/O refreshing

Inner Board Area
(100 words/Board)

The function of the 100 words in the Inner Board Area depends upon the
Inner Board being used. For details, refer to the Board’s Operation Manual.
When the words in the Inner Board Area aren’t allocated to an Inner Board,
they can be used only in the program.

418

Section 9-11

Special I/O Unit Area
Inner Board Area
Initialization

The contents of the Inner Board Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...

1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The Inner Board Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the Inner Board Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)

IOM Hold Bit Operation

If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the Inner Board Area
won’t be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed
from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the Inner
Board Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.

Forcing Bit Status

Bits in the Inner Board Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Note The addresses in the Inner Board Area cannot be designated directly in programming or allocations inside C200H Special I/O Units.

9-11 Special I/O Unit Area
The Special I/O Unit Area contains 960 words with addresses ranging from
CIO 2000 to CIO 2959. Words in the Special I/O Unit Area are allocated to
CS-series and C200H Special I/O Units to transfer data such as the operating
status of the Unit. Each Unit is allocated 10 words based on its unit number
setting.
Data is exchanged with Special I/O Units once each cycle during I/O refreshing, which occurs after program execution. The words can also be refreshed
with IORF(097).
Special I/O Unit
CPU Unit

Special I/O Unit Area
(10 words/Unit)

I/O
refreshing or
IORF
(097)

Note The addresses in the Special I/O Unit Area cannot be designated directly in
programming or allocations inside C200H Special I/O Units.

419

Section 9-11

Special I/O Unit Area

Each Special I/O Unit is allocated 25 words based on its unit number, as
shown in the following table.
Unit number

Allocated words

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 (A)
11 (B)
12 (C)
13 (D)

CIO 2000 to CIO 2009
CIO 2010 to CIO 2019
CIO 2020 to CIO 2029
CIO 2030 to CIO 2039
CIO 2040 to CIO 2049
CIO 2050 to CIO 2059
CIO 2060 to CIO 2069
CIO 2070 to CIO 2079
CIO 2080 to CIO 2089
CIO 2090 to CIO 2099
CIO 2100 to CIO 2109
CIO 2110 to CIO 2119
CIO 2120 to CIO 2129
CIO 2130 to CIO 2139

14 (E)
15 (F)
16
17

CIO 2140 to CIO 2149
CIO 2150 to CIO 2159
CIO 2160 to CIO 2169
CIO 2170 to CIO 2179

CIO 2950 to CIO 2959

C200H
Special I/O Units
Valid unit numbers

CS-series
Special I/O Units
Valid unit numbers

Not available on
C200H Units

The function of the 10 words allocated to a Unit depends upon the Special I/O
Unit being used. For details, refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual.
Words in the Special I/O Unit Area that aren’t allocated to Special I/O Units
can be used only in the program.
Special I/O Unit Area
Initialization
1,2,3...

The contents of the Special I/O Unit Area will be cleared in the following
cases:
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The Special I/O Unit Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the Special I/O Unit Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)

IOM Hold Bit Operation

If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the Special I/O Unit Area
won’t be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed
from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the Special I/O Unit Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.

Forcing Bit Status

420

Bits in the Special I/O Unit Area can be force-set and force-reset.

Section 9-12

SYSMAC BUS Area

9-12 SYSMAC BUS Area
The SYSMAC BUS Area contains 80 words with addresses ranging from
CIO 3000 to CIO 3079. Words in the SYSMAC BUS Area are allocated to
Slave Racks connected to Wired or Optical SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master
Units (C200H-RM201 or C200H-RM001-PV1). Up to two Masters can be
mounted to the CPU Rack or a C200H Expansion I/O Rack. A maximum of 8
Slave Racks can be managed by one CPU Unit, whether one or two Masters
are mounted.
Each Slave Rack is allocated 10 words based on the Rack’s rack number setting (0 to 7).
Rack number
0
1
2
3
4

Allocated words
CIO 3000 to CIO 3009
CIO 3010 to CIO 3019
CIO 3020 to CIO 3029
CIO 3030 to CIO 3039
CIO 3040 to CIO 3049

5
6
7

CIO 3050 to CIO 3059
CIO 3060 to CIO 3069
CIO 3070 to CIO 3079

Up to 10 C200H Basic I/O Units can be mounted in a Slave Rack. One word
(16 bits) is allocated to each slot in the Slave Rack from left to right. Allocations are fixed by slot, e.g., if there is no Unit in a slot, the word normally allocated to that slot will not be used.
Note

1. Up to two Masters can be mounted for any one CPU Unit A maximum of 8
Slave Racks can be managed by one CPU Unit, regardless of whether one
or two Masters are mounted.
2. C200H Special I/O Units can also be mounted to Slave Racks, but they will
be allocated words according to their unit number and will not be allocated
SYSMAC BUS Area words.
3. SYSMAC BUS Units other than Slave Racks (such as I/O Terminals) can
also be connected. These other Units are allocated words in the I/O Terminal Area. Refer to 9-13 I/O Terminal Area for details.
Wired or Optical Master Unit
CPU Unit
SYSMAC BUS Area

Wired or Optical
Slave Unit

Slave Rack

Wired or Optical
Slave Unit

Total length 200 m max.,
2 conductors

Slave Rack

421

Section 9-13

I/O Terminal Area
1,2,3...

1. Ten words are allocated to each Rack based on the rack number set on the
Slave Unit.
2. The ten words in each Rack are allocated to the slots in the Rack from left
to right (one word/slot).

SYSMAC BUS Area
Initialization

The contents of the SYSMAC BUS Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...

1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The SYSMAC BUS Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the SYSMAC BUS Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)

IOM Hold Bit Operation

If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the SYSMAC BUS Area
won’t be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed
from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the SYSMAC BUS Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.

Forcing Bit Status

Bits in the SYSMAC BUS Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Note

1. A C200H Expansion I/O Rack can also be connected to a Remote I/O
Slave Rack. If that is done, then the C200H Expansion I/O Rack is counted
as a Remote I/O Slave Rack and allocated the next unit number. The total
number of Remote I/O Slave Racks is eight, of which only two can be
C200H Expansion I/O Racks.
2. The addresses in the SYSMAC BUS Area cannot be designated directly in
programming or allocations inside C200H Special I/O Units.

9-13 I/O Terminal Area
The I/O Terminal Area contains 32 words with addresses ranging from
CIO 3100 to CIO 3131. Words in the I/O Terminal Area can be allocated to
Slaves other than Slave Racks (such as I/O Interfaces, I/O Terminals, and
Optical I/O Units) connected to a Wired or Optical SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O
Master Units (C200H-RM201 or C200H-RM001-PV1). Up to two Masters can
be mounted to the CPU Rack or a C200H Expansion I/O Rack. Up to 32
Slaves are allowed for each CPU Unit.
Each Slave is allocated 1 word based on its unit number setting (0 to 31)
except for Optical I/O Units, which are allocated 2 words each. The words are
allocated according to unit numbers even when two Master Units are being
used.
Unit number

422

0
1

Allocated word
CIO 3100
CIO 3101

CIO 3131

Section 9-14

Work Area

Both Slave Racks and SYSMAC BUS Slaves other than Slave Racks (such as
I/O Terminals) can be connected. Slave Racks are allocated words in the
SYSMAC BUS Area. Refer to 9-12 SYSMAC BUS Area for details.
Wired or Optical Master Unit
CPU Unit
I/O Terminal Area

Words are allocated to Slaves other than Slave Racks
(such as I/O Interfaces, I/O Terminals, and Optical I/O
Units) according to their unit numbers.

Note The addresses in the I/O Terminal Area cannot be designated directly in programming or allocations inside C200H Special I/O Units.
I/O Terminal Area
Initialization

The contents of the I/O Terminal Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...

1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The I/O Terminal Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the I/O Terminal Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)

IOM Hold Bit Operation

If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the I/O Terminal Area
won’t be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed
from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the I/O
Terminal Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.

Forcing Bit Status

Bits in the I/O Terminal Area can be force-set and force-reset.

9-14 Work Area
The Work Area contains 512 words with addresses ranging from W000 to
W511. These words can be used only in the program as work words.
There are unused words in the CIO Area (CIO 1200 to CIO 1499 and
CIO 3800 to CIO 6143) that can also be used in the program, but use any
available words in the Work Area first because the unused words in the CIO
Area may be allocated to new functions in future versions of CS-series CPU
Units.
Work Area Initialization

The contents of the Work Area will be cleared in the following cases:

423

Section 9-15

Holding Area
1,2,3...

1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The Work Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the Work Area will be retained when FALS(007)
is executed.)

IOM Hold Bit Operation

If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the Work Area won’t be
cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the Work
Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.

Forcing Bit Status

Bits in the Work Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Note The addresses in the Work Area cannot be designated directly in programming or allocations inside C200H Special I/O Units.

9-15 Holding Area
The Holding Area contains 512 words with addresses ranging from H000 to
H511 (bits H00000 to H51115). These words can be used only in the program.
Holding Area bits can be used in any order in the program and can be used as
normally open or normally closed conditions as often as necessary.
Holding Area Initialization

Data in the Holding Area is not cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled
or the PLC’s operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN or
MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
A Holding Area bit will be cleared if it is programmed between IL(002) and
ILC(003) and the execution condition for IL(002) is OFF. To keep a bit ON
even when the execution condition for IL(002) is OFF, turn ON the bit with the
SET instruction just before IL(002).

Self-maintaining Bits

When a self-maintaining bit is programmed with a Holding Area bit, the selfmaintaining bit won’t be cleared even when the power is reset.

Note

1. If a Holding Area bit is not used for the self-maintaining bit, the bit will be
turned OFF and the self-maintaining bit will be cleared when the power is
reset.
2. If a Holding Area bit is used but not programmed as a self-maintaining bit
as in the following diagram, the bit will be turned OFF by execution condition A when the power is reset.

424

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area

3. The Function Block Holding Area words are allocated from H512 to H1535.
These words can be used only for the function block instance area (internally allocated variable area). These words cannot be specified as instruction operands in the user program.
Precautions

When a Holding Area bit is used in a KEEP(011) instruction, never use a normally closed condition for the reset input if the input device uses an AC power
supply. When the power supply goes OFF or is temporarily interrupted, the
input will go OFF before the PLC’s internal power supply and the Holding Area
bit will be reset.
Set input
Input
Unit
Reset input

Instead, use a configuration like the one shown below.
Set input
Input
Unit
Reset input

There are no restrictions in the order of using bit address or in the number of
N.C. or N.O. conditions that can be programmed.
Note

When designating addresses in programming or allocations inside C200H
Special I/O Units, “HR 00” to “HR 99” will actually specify H000 to H099 in the
CPU Unit and “AR 00” to “AR 27” will actually specify H100 to H127 in the
CPU Unit. Other addresses in this area cannot be specified inside the C200H
Special I/O Units.

9-16 Auxiliary Area
The Auxiliary Area contains 960 words with addresses ranging from A000 to
A959). These words are preassigned as flags and control bits to monitor and
control operation.
A000 through A447 are read-only, but A448 through A959 can be read or written from the program or a Programming Device.
Note

1. The addresses in the Auxiliary Area cannot be designated directly in programming or allocations inside C200H Special I/O Units.
2. The undefined addresses of the Auxiliary Area may be allocated to functions in future version upgrades of the CPU Unit. Do not use these words
as CIO Area words in the user program.

Forcing Bit Status
Bits in the Auxiliary Area cannot be force-set and force-reset continuously.

425

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area
Writing Auxiliary Area Data

The following operations can be performed from a Programming Device to
write data in the Auxiliary Area.
• Using the CX-Programmer: Online set/reset (not force-set/force-reset)
(only for version 1.2 or higher), changing present values when monitoring
programming addresses (set values dialog box), or transferring data to
the PLC after editing the PLC data tables. Refer to the CX-Programmer
User Manual (W446).
• Using a Programming Console: Temporarily force-setting/force-resetting
bits from the Bit/Word Monitor or the 3-word Monitor operation (see Programming Consoles Operation Manual).

Functions
The following table lists the functions of Auxiliary Area flags and control bits.
The table is organized according to the functions of the flags and bits. Some
of these functions are not supported by some CPU Unit models and unit versions. For more details or to look up a bit by its address, refer to Appendix B
Auxiliary Area.

Initial Settings
Name
I/O Response Times in Basic
I/O Units
IOM Hold Bit

Address
A22000 to
A25915
A50012

Description
Contains the current I/O response times for CS-series Basic
I/O Units.
Determines whether the contents of I/O memory are
retained when the PLC’s power is reset or the PLC’s operating mode is changed (from PROGRAM to RUN/MONITOR
or vice-versa).
Turn ON this bit to maintain I/O memory when changing
between PROGRAM and RUN or MONITOR mode.
Turn OFF this bit to clear I/O memory when changing the
changing between PROGRAM and RUN or MONITOR
mode.
Determines whether the status of force-set and force-reset
bits is maintained when the PLC’s power is reset or the
PLC’s operating mode is changed (between PROGRAM and
RUN or MONITOR mode).
Set to A5A5 hex to disable power interrupts (except the
Power OFF Interrupt task) between DI(693) and EI(694)
instructions.

Access
Read-only

Forced Status Hold BIt

A50013

Power Interruption Disable
Setting (CS1-H CPU Units
only)

A530

Address
A39512

Description
Contains the status set on pin 6 of the CPU Unit’s DIP
switch. (Refreshed every cycle.)

Access
Read-only

Address
A05000 to
A08915

Description
Access
Indicates whether fuses in Basic I/O Units are intact or
Read-only
blown. The flags correspond to rack 0, slot 0 through rack 7,
slot 9.

Read/write

CPU Unit Settings
Name
Status of DIP Switch Pin 6

Basic I/O Unit Settings
Name
Basic I/O Unit Status Area

426

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area
CPU Bus Unit Flags/Bits
Name
CPU Bus Unit Initialization
Flags

Address
A30200 to
A30215

CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits

A50100 to
A50115

Description
Access
These flags correspond to CPU Bus Units 0 to 15. A flag will Read-only
be ON while the corresponding Unit is initializing after the
power is turned ON or the Unit’s Restart Bit (in A501) is
turned ON.
These bits correspond to CPU Bus Units 0 to 15. Turn a bit Read/write
from OFF to ON to restart the corresponding Unit.

Special I/O Unit Flags/Bits
Name
Special I/O Unit Initialization
Flags

Address
A33000 to
A33515

Special I/O Unit Restart Bits

A50200 to
A50715

Description
Access
These flags correspond to Special I/O Units 0 to 95. A flag
Read-only
will be ON while the corresponding Unit is initializing after
the power is turned ON or the Unit’s Restart Bit is turned
ON. (Restart Bits A50200 to A50715 correspond to Units 0
to 95.)
These bits correspond to Special I/O Units 0 to 95. Turn a bit Read/write
from OFF to ON to restart the corresponding Unit.

Inner Board Flags/Bits
Name
Inner Board Monitoring Area
Inner Board Restart Bit

Address
A35500 to
A35915
A60800

Description
The function of these words is defined in the Inner Board.

Access
Read-only

Turn the bit from OFF to ON to restart the corresponding
Inner Board.

Read/write

Description
This flag is turned ON for one cycle when program execution
starts (the operating mode is switched from PROGRAM to
RUN/MONITOR).
When a task switches from INI to RUN status for the first
time, this flag will be turned ON within the task for one cycle
only.
When a task switches from WAIT or INI to RUN status, this
flag will be turned ON within the task for one cycle only.
The only difference between this flag and A20015 is that this
flag also turns ON when the task switches from WAIT to
RUN status.
This word contains the system timer used after the power is
turned ON.
0000 hex is set when the power is turned ON and this value
is automatically incremented by 1 every 10 ms. The value
returns to 0000 hex after reaching FFFF hex (655,350 ms),
and then continues to be automatically incremented by 1
every 10 ms.
Note: The timer will continue to be incremented when the
operating mode is switched to RUN mode.
Example: The interval can be counted between processing
A and processing B without requiring timer
instructions. This is achieved by calculating the
difference between the value in A000 for processing A and the value in A000 for processing B. The
interval is counted in 10 ms units.

Access
Read-only

Flags for Programming
Name
First Cycle Flag

Address
A20011

Initial Task Execution Flag

A20015

Task Started Flag

A20014

10-ms Incrementing Free
Running Timer

A000

Read-only

427

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area
Name

Address

100-ms Incrementing Free
Running Timer

A001

1-s Incrementing Free
Running Timer
(Unit version 4.0 or later)

A002

Description

Access

This word contains the system timer used after the power is Read-only
turned ON.
0000 hex is set when the power is turned ON and this value
is automatically incremented by 1 every 100 ms. The value
returns to 0000 hex after reaching FFFF hex (655,350 ms),
and then continues to be automatically incremented by 1
every 10 ms.
Note: The timer will continue to be incremented when the
operating mode is switched to RUN mode.
This word contains the system timer used after the power is Read-only
turned ON.
0000 hex is set when the power is turned ON and this value
is automatically incremented by 1 every 1 s. The value
returns to 0000 hex after reaching FFFF hex (65,535 s),
and then continues to be automatically incremented by 1
every 1 s.
Note: The timer will continue to be incremented when the
operating mode is switched to RUN mode.

Cycle Time Information
Name
Maximum Cycle Time

Address
A262 to
A263

Present Cycle Time

A264 to
A265

Peripheral Servicing Cycle
Time

A268

Description
Access
These words contain the maximum cycle time in units of
Read-only
0.1 ms. In a Parallel Processing Mode, the maximum cycle
time of the program execution cycle will be given.
The time is updated every cycle and is recorded in 32-bit
binary (0 to FFFF FFFF, or 0 to 429,496,729.5 ms). (A263 is
the leftmost word.)
Read-only
These words contain the present cycle time in units of
0.1 ms. In a Parallel Processing Mode, the maximum cycle
time of the program execution cycle will be given. The time is
updated every cycle and is recorded in 32-bit binary (0 to
FFFF FFFF, or 0 to 429,496,729.5 ms). (A265 is the leftmost
word.)
Read-only
In Parallel Processing with Synchronous or Asynchronous
Memory Access, this word contains the peripheral servicing
cycle time in units of 0.1 ms. The time is updated every cycle
and is recorded in 16-bit binary (0 to 4E20 hex, or 0.0 to
2,000.0 ms).

Task Information
Name
Task Number when Program
Stopped

Address
A294

Maximum Interrupt Task Processing Time
Interrupt Task with Max. Processing Time

A440

IR/DR Operation between
Tasks

A09914

428

A441

Description
This word contains the task number of the task that was
being executed when program execution was stopped
because of a program error.
Contains the Maximum Interrupt Task Processing Time in
units of 0.1 ms.
Contains the task number of the interrupt task with the maximum processing time. Hexadecimal values 8000 to 80FF
correspond to task numbers 00 to FF. Bit 15 is turned ON
when an interrupt has occurred.
Turn ON this bit to share index and data registers between
all tasks. Turn OFF this bit to use separate index and data
registers between in each task.

Access
Read-only

Read-only
Read-only

Read-only

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area
Debugging Information
■

Online Editing

Name
Online Editing Wait Flag

Address
A20110

Description
ON when an online editing process is waiting.
(An online editing request was received while online editing
was disabled.)
ON when an online editing process is being executed.

Access
Read-only

Online Editing Processing
Flag
Online Editing Disable Bit Validator
Online Editing Disable Bit

A20111
A52700 to
A52707
A52709

The Online Editing Disable Bit (A52709) is valid only when
this byte contains 5A.
Turn this bit ON to disable online editing.
(A52700 to A52707 must be set to 5A.)

Read/write

Address
A50015

Description
Access
Turn this bit ON to turn OFF all outputs from Basic I/O Units, Read/write
Output Units, and Special I/O Units.

Address
A50809

Description
Access
ON when the differentiate monitor condition has been estab- Read/write
lished during execution of differentiation monitoring.

Name
Sampling Start Bit

Address
A50815

Access
Read/write

Trace Start Bit

A50814

Trace Busy Flag

A50813

Trace Completed Flag

A50812

Trace Trigger Monitor Flag

A50811

Description
When a data trace is started by turning this bit from OFF to
ON from a Programming Device, the PLC will begin storing
data in Trace Memory by one of the three following methods:
1) Periodic sampling (10 to 2,550 ms)
2) Sampling at execution of TRSM(045)
3) Sampling at the end of every cycle.
Turn this bit from OFF to ON to establish the trigger condition. The offset indicated by the delay value (positive or negative) determines which data samples are valid.
ON when the Sampling Start Bit (A50815) is turned from
OFF to ON. OFF when the trace is completed.
ON when sampling of a region of trace memory has been
completed during execution of a Trace. OFF when the next
time the Sampling Start Bit (A50815) is turned from OFF to
ON.
ON when a trigger condition is established by the Trace Start
Bit (A50814). OFF when the next Data Trace is started by
the Sampling Start bit (A50815).

Description
Indicates the type of Memory Card, if any, installed.

Access
Read-only

ON when the Memory Card is not formatted or a formatting
error has occurred.
ON when an error occurred while writing data to file memory.
ON when data cannot be written to file memory because it is
write-protected or the data exceeds the capacity of the file
memory.
ON when a file could not be read because of a malfunction
(file is damaged or data is corrupted).

Read-only

■

Differentiate Monitor

Name
Differentiate Monitor Completed Flag
■

Read/write

Output Control

Name
Output OFF Bit

■

Read-only

Data Tracing

Read/write

Read/write
Read/write

Read/write

File Memory Information
Name
Memory Card Type
Memory Card Format Error
Flag
File Transfer Error Flag
File Write Error Flag

File Read Error

Address
A34300 to
A34302
A34307
A34308
A34309

A34310

Read-only
Read-only

Read-only

429

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area
Name

Address

File Missing Flag

A34311

File Memory Operation Flag

A34313

Memory Card Detected Flag

A34315

Number of Items to
Transfer

A346 to
A347

Accessing File Data Flag
A34314
EM File Memory Format Error A34306
Flag
EM File Memory Starting
Bank

A344

Program Index File Flag

A34501

Comment File Flag

A34502

Symbol Table File Flag

A34503

File Deletion Flags

A39506

A39507

430

Description
ON when an attempt is made to read a file that doesn’t exist,
or an attempt is made to write to a file in a directory that
doesn’t exist.
ON while any of the following operations is being executed.
OFF when none of them are being executed.
Memory Card detection started.
CMND instruction sending a FINS command to the local
CPU Unit.
FREAD/FWRIT instructions.
Program replacement using the control bit in the Auxiliary
Area.
Easy backup operation.
If this flag is ON, write and comparison operations to the
Memory Card cannot be executed.
ON when a Memory Card has been detected.
OFF when a Memory Card has not been detected.
These words contain the number of words or fields remaining to be transferred (8-digit hexadecimal).
For binary files (.IOM), the value is decremented for each
word that is read. For text (.TXT) or CSV (.CSV) data, the
value is decremented for each field that is read.
ON while file data is being accessed.
Turns ON when a format error occurs in the first EM bank
allocated for file memory.
Turns OFF when formatting is completed normally.
Contains the starting bank number of EM file memory (bank
number of the first formatted bank).
This number is read when starting to write data from a Memory Card. If the largest bank number for which there is an
EM file for simple backup (BACKUPE@.IOM, where represents consecutive bank numbers) is the same as the largest
bank number supported by the CPU Unit, the EM Area will
be formatted as file memory using the value in A344. If the
maximum bank numbers are different, the EM Area will be
returned to it’s unformatted (not file memory) status.
Turns ON when the comment memory contains a program
index file.
0: No file
1: File present
Turns ON when the comment memory contains a comment
file.
0: No file
1: File present
Turns ON when the comment memory contains a symbol
table file.
0: No file
1: File present
The system automatically deleted the remainder of an EM
file memory file that was being updated when a power interruption occurred.
The system automatically deleted the remainder of a Memory Card file that was being updated when a power interruption occurred.

Access
Read-only

Read-only

Read-only
Read-only

Read-only

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area
Name

Address

Simple Backup Write Capacity A397

Program Replacement End
Code

A65000 to
A65007

Replacement Error Flag

A65014

Replacement Start Bit

A65015

Description

Access

If a write for a simple backup operation fails, A397 will con- Read-only
tain the Memory Card capacity that would have been
required to complete the write operation. The value is in
Kbytes. (This indicates that the Memory Card did not have
the specified capacity when the write operation was started.)
0001 to FFFF hex: Write error (value indicates required
capacity from 1 to 65,535 Kbytes).
A397 will be cleared to 0000 hex when the write is completed successfully for a simple backup operation.
Read-only
Normal End (i.e., when A65014 is OFF)
01 hex: Program file (.OBJ) replaced.
Error End (i.e., when A65014 is ON)
00 hex: Fatal error
01 hex: Memory error
11 hex: Write-protected
12 hex: Program replacement password error
21 hex: No Memory Card
22 hex: No such file
23 hex: Specified file exceeds capacity (memory error).
31 hex: One of the following in progress:
File memory operation
User program write
Operating mode change
ON when the Replacement Start Bit (A65015) has been
Read/write
turned ON to replace the program, but there is an error. If
the Replacement Start Bit is turned ON again, the Replacement Error Flag will be turned OFF.
Program replacement starts when the Replacement Start Bit Read/write
is turned ON if the Program Password (A651) is valid (A5A5
hex). Do not turn OFF the Replacement Start Bit during program replacement.
When the power is turned ON or program replacement is
completed, the Replacement Start Bit will be turned OFF,
regardless of whether replacement was completed normally
or in error.
It is possible to confirm if program replacement is being executed by reading the Replacement Start Bit using a Programming Device, PT, or host computer.

431

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area
Name

Address

Program Password

A651

Program File Name

A654 to
A657

432

Description

Access

Store the password to replace a program.
Read/write
A5A5 hex: Replacement Start Bit (A65015) is enabled.
Any other value: Replacement Start Bit (A65015) is disabled.
When the power is turned ON or program replacement is
completed, the Replacement Start Bit will be turned OFF,
regardless of whether replacement was completed normally
or in error.
Read/write
When program replacement starts, the program file name
will be stored in ASCII. File names can be specified up to
eight characters in length excluding the extension.
File names are stored in the following order: A654 to A657
(i.e., from the lowest word to the highest), and from the highest byte to the lowest. If a file name is less than eight characters, the lowest remaining bytes and the highest remaining
word will be filled with spaces (20 hex). Null characters and
space characters cannot be used within file names.
Example: File name is ABC.OBJ

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area
Program Error Information
Name
Program Error Flag
(Fatal error)
Program Error Task

Address
A40109
A294

Instruction Processing Error
Flag

A29508

Indirect DM/EM BCD Error
Flag

A29509

Illegal Access Error Flag

A29510

No END Error Flag

A29511

Task Error Flag

A29512

Differentiation Overflow Error
Flag
Illegal Instruction Error Flag

A29513
A29514

UM Overflow Error Flag

A29515

Program Address Where
Program Stopped

A298 and
A299

Description
Access
ON when program contents are incorrect. CPU Unit opera- Read-only
tion will stop.
Read-only
Provides the type and number of the tack that was being
executed when program execution stops as a result of a program error.
This flag and the Error Flag (ER) will be turned ON when an
instruction processing error has occurred and the PLC
Setup has been set to stop operation for an instruction error.
This flag and the Access Error Flag (AER) will be turned ON
when an indirect DM/EM BCD error has occurred and the
PLC Setup has been set to stop operation an indirect
DM/EM BCD error.
This flag and the Access Error Flag (AER) will be turned ON
when an illegal access error has occurred and the PLC
Setup has been set to stop operation an illegal access error.
ON when there isn’t an END(001) instruction in each program within a task.
ON when a task error has occurred. The following conditions
will generate a task error.
1) There isn’t an executable cyclic task.
2) There isn’t a program allocated to the task.
ON when the specified Differentiation Flag Number exceeds
the allowed value.
ON when a program that cannot be executed has been
stored.

Read-only

ON when the last address in UM (user program memory)
has been exceeded.
These words contain the 8-digit hexadecimal program
address of the instruction where program execution was
stopped due to a program error.
(A299 contains the leftmost digits.)

Read-only

Description
When an error has occurred, the error code, error contents,
and error’s time and date are stored in the Error Log Area.
When an error occurs, the Error Log Pointer is incremented
by 1 to indicate the location where the next error record will
be recorded as an offset from the beginning of the Error Log
Area (A100).
Turn this bit ON to reset the Error Log Pointer (A300) to 00.
When a non-fatal error (user-defined FALS(006) or system
error) or a fatal error (user-defined FALS(007) or system
error) occurs, the 4-digit hexadecimal error code is written to
this word.

Access
Read-only

Read-only

Read-only
Read-only

Read-only

Error Information
■ Error Log, Error Code

Name
Error Log Area
Error Log Pointer

Address
A100 to
A199
A300

Error Log Pointer Reset Bit
Error Code

A50014
A400

Read-only

Read/write
Read-only

433

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area
■ FAL/FALS Error Information

Name
FAL Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
Executed FAL Number Flags

FALS Error Flag
(Fatal error)
FAL/FALS Number for System Error Simulation

Address
A40215
A360 to
A391
A40106
A053

Description
ON when a non-fatal error is generated by executing
FAL(006).
The flag corresponding to the specified FAL number will be
turned ON when FAL(006) is executed. Bits A36001 to
A39115 correspond to FAL numbers 001 to 511.
ON when a fatal error is generated by the FALS(007)
instruction.
Set a dummy FAL/FALS number to use to simulate the system error using FAL(006) or FALS(007).
0001 to 01FF hex: FAL/FALS numbers 1 to 511
0000 or 0200 to FFFF hex: No FAL/FALS number for system
error simulation. (No error will be generated.)

Access
Read-only
Read-only

Read-only
Read/write

■ Memory Error Information

Name
Memory Error Flag
(Fatal error)

Address
A40115

Description
ON when an error occurred in memory or there was an error
in automatic transfer from the Memory Card when the power
was turned ON.
The ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light
and CPU Unit operation will stop when this flag turns ON.
If the automatic data transfer at startup fails, A40309 will be
turned ON. If an error occurs in automatic transfer at startup,
this error cannot be cleared.
When a memory error occurs, the Memory Error Flag
(A40115) is turned ON and one of the following flags is
turned ON to indicate the memory area where the error
occurred.
A40300: User program
A40304: PLC Setup
A40305: Registered I/O Table
A40307: Routing Table
A40308: CS-series CPU Bus Unit Settings
ON when an error occurs in automatically transferring a file
from the Memory Card to the CPU Unit at startup, including
when a file is missing or a Memory Card is not mounted.
The error can be cleared by turning OFF the power. (This
error cannot be cleared while the power is ON.)
Turns ON when the flash memory fails.

Memory Error Location

A40300 to
A40308

Read-only

Address
A40210

Description
ON when there is a setting error in the PLC Setup.

Access
Read-only

A406

When there is a setting error in the PLC Setup, the location
of that error is written to A406 in 4-digit hexadecimal. The
location is given as the address set on the Programming
Console.

Read-only

Startup Memory Card Transfer A40309
Error Flag

Flash Memory Error

A40310

Access
Read-only

Read-only

■ PLC Setup Error Information

Name
PLC Setup Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
PLC Setup Error Location

434

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area
■ Interrupt Task Error Information

Name
Interrupt Task Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)

Address
A40213

Interrupt Task Error Cause
Flag
Interrupt Task Error, Task
Number

A42615

Description
Access
ON when the Detect Interrupt Task Errors setting in the PLC Read-only
Setup is set to “Detect” and one of the following occurs.
IORD(222) or IOWR(223) in a cyclic task are competing with
IORD(222) or IOWR(223) in an interrupt task.
An interrupt task is executed for more than 10 ms during I/O
refreshing of a C200H Special I/O Unit or a SYSMAC BUS
I/O Unit.
IORD(222) or IOWR(223) was executed in an interrupt task
when I/O was being refreshed.
Indicates the cause of an Interrupt Task Error.
Read-only

A42600 to
A42611

The function of these bits depends upon the status of
Read-only
A42615 (the Interrupt Task Error Cause Flag).
A42615 OFF:
Contains the interrupt task number when an interrupt task
was executed for more than 10 ms during I/O refreshing of a
C200H Special I/O Unit or a SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Unit.
A42615 ON:
Contains the Special I/O Unit’s unit number when an attempt
was made to refresh a Special I/O Unit’s I/O from an interrupt task with IORF(097) while the Unit’s I/O was being
refreshed by cyclic I/O refreshing (duplicate refreshing).

Name
Basic I/O Unit Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)

Address
A40212

Basic I/O Unit Error, Slot
Number

A40800 to
A40807

Basic I/O Unit Error, Rack
Number

A40808 to
A40815

I/O Setting Error Flag
(Fatal error)

A40110

I/O Verification Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)

A40209

Expansion I/O Rack Number
Duplication Flags

A40900 to
A40907

Too Many I/O Points Flag
(Fatal error)

A40111

Description
ON when an error has occurred in a Basic I/O Unit (including
C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units and C200H Interrupt
Input Units).
Contains the binary slot number where the error occurred
when an error has occurred in a Basic I/O Unit (including
C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units and C200H Interrupt
Input Units).
Contains the binary rack number where the error occurred
when an error has occurred in a Basic I/O Unit (including
C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units and C200H Interrupt
Input Units).
ON when an Input Unit has been installed in an Output
Unit’s slot or vice-versa, so the Input and Output Units clash
in the registered I/O table.
ON when a Basic I/O Unit registered in the I/O Table does
not match the Basic I/O Unit actually installed in the PLC
because a Unit was added or removed.
The corresponding flag will be turned ON when an Expansion I/O Rack’s starting word address was set from a Programming Device and two Racks have overlapping word
allocations or a Rack’s starting address exceeds CIO 0901.
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to Racks 0 to 7.
ON when the number of I/O points being used in Basic I/O
Units exceeds the maximum allowed for the PLC.

■ I/O Information

Access
Read-only

Read-only

435

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area
Name
Too Many I/O Points, Details

Address
A40700 to
A40712

Description
Access
The 6 possible causes of the Too Many I/O Points Error are Read-only
listed below. The 3-digit binary value in A40713 to A40715
indicates the cause of the error. (The causes corresponding
to values 0 to 5 are listed below.)
The 13-bit binary value in A40700 to A40712 indicates the
details: the excessive value or the duplicated unit number.
The number of I/O points will be written here when the total
number of I/O points set in the I/O Table (excluding Slave
Racks) exceed the maximum allowed for the CPU Unit.
The number of interrupt inputs will be written here when
there are more than 32 interrupt inputs.
The unit number of the Slave Unit will be written here when a
unit number is duplicated or the number of I/O points on a
C500 Slave Unit exceeds 320.
The unit number of the I/O Terminal (excluding Slave Racks)
will be written here when a unit number is duplicated
The unit number of the Master Unit will be written here when
a unit number is duplicated or the unit number is outside of
the allowed setting range.
The number of Racks will be written here when the number
of Expansion I/O Racks exceeds the maximum.

Too Many I/O Points, Cause

A40713 to
A40715

I/O Bus Error Flag
(Fatal error)
I/O Bus Error Slot Number

A40114

These three bits indicate the cause of the Too Many I/O
Points Error. (See A40700 to A40712.)
000 (0): Too many I/O points.
001 (1): Too many Interrupt Input points.
010 (2): Slave Unit’s unit number duplicated or the number
of I/O points on a C500 Slave Unit exceeds 320.
011 (3): I/O Terminal’s unit number duplicated.
100 (4): Master Unit’s unit number duplicated or unit number
is out-of-range (not 0 or 1).
101 (5): Too many Expansion Racks connected.
110 (6): The unit number of the Remote I/O Master Unit is 4,
6, or 7, or an Special I/O Unit’s unit number cannot be
detected.
ON when an error occurs in a data transfer between the
CPU Unit and a Unit mounted to a slot.
Contains the 8-bit binary slot number (00 to 09) where an
I/O Bus Error occurred.
ON: Error in CPU Bus Unit Setup
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: Overflow in maximum number of I/O points.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: The same unit number was used more than once.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: I/O bus error
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: SYSMAC BUS detection ended in an error.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: Error in a Special I/O Unit
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: I/O detection has not been completed.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.

I/O Table Errors

A40400 to
A40407
A26100
A26102
A26103
A26104
A26106
A26107
A26109

436

Read-only

Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area
Name
I/O Bus Error Rack Number

Address

Description

Access

A40408 to
A40415
A40113

Contains the 8-bit binary rack number (00 to 07) where an
Read-only
I/O Bus Error occurred.
Read-only
ON in the following cases:
Two CPU Bus Units have been assigned the same unit number.
Two Special I/O Units have been assigned the same unit
number.
Two Basic I/O Units have been allocated the same data area
words.
The same rack number is set for more than one Expansion
Rack.

Name
CPU Bus Unit Number Duplication Flags

Address
A410

CPU Bus Unit Error, Unit
Number Flags

A417

CPU Bus Unit Setting Error,
Unit Number Flags

A427

CPU Bus Unit Setting Error
Flag
(Non-fatal error)
CPU Bus Unit Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)

A40203

Description
Access
The Duplication Error Flag (A40113) and the corresponding Read-only
flag in A410 will be turned ON when a CPU Bus Unit’s unit
number has been duplicated.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Read-only
Unit and a CPU Bus Unit, the CPU Bus Unit Error Flag
(A40207) and the corresponding flag in A417 are turned ON.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
When a CPU Bus Unit Setting Error occurs, A40203 and the Read-only
corresponding flag in A27 are turned ON.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
ON when an installed CPU Bus Unit does not match the
Read-only
CPU Bus Unit registered in the I/O table.

Duplication Error Flag
(Fatal error)

■ CPU Bus Unit Information

A40207

Read-only
ON when an error occurs in a data exchange between the
CPU Unit and a CPU Bus Unit (including an error in the CPU
Bus Unit itself).

Name
Special I/O Unit Number
Duplication Flags

Address
A41100 to
A41615

Special I/O Unit Setting Error
Flag
(Non-fatal error)
Special I/O Unit Setting Error,
Unit Number Flags

A40202

Description
Access
The Duplication Error Flag (A40113) and the corresponding Read-only
flag in A411 through A416 will be turned ON when a Special
I/O Unit’s unit number has been duplicated. (Bits A41100 to
A41615 correspond to unit numbers 0 to 95.)
ON when an installed Special I/O Unit does not match the
Read-only
Special I/O Unit registered in the I/O table.

Special I/O Unit Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)

A40206

Special I/O Unit Error, Unit
Number Flags

A41800 to
A42315

■ Special I/O Unit Information

A42800 to
A43315

Read-only
When a Special I/O Unit Setting Error occurs, A40202 and
the corresponding flag in these words are turned ON. (Bits
A42800 to A43315 correspond to unit numbers 0 to 95.)
Read-only
ON when an error occurs in a data exchange between the
CPU Unit and a Special I/O Unit (including an error in the
Special I/O Unit itself).
When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Read-only
Unit and a Special I/O Unit, the Special I/O Unit Error Flag
(A40206) and the corresponding flag in these words are
turned ON. (Bits A42800 to A43315 correspond to unit numbers 0 to 95.)

437

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area
■ Inner Board Information

Name
Inner Board Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)

Address
A40208

Inner Board Error
Information

A424

Inner Board Stopped Error
Flag (Fatal error)

A40112

Description
Access
ON when an error occurs in a data exchange between the
Read-only
CPU Unit and the Inner Board (including an error in the Inner
Board itself).
When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Read-only
Unit and the Inner Board, the Inner Board Error Flag
(A40208) and the appropriate error code will be written to
A424.
ON when there is an Inner Board Error (watchdog timer
Read-only
error).

■ SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Information

Name
SYSMAC BUS Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)

Address
A40205

SYSMAC BUS Master Error
Flags

A40500 to
A40501

Slave Number of
SYSMAC BUS Error After
Start-up

A42504 to
A42506
A42504
only
A42508 to
A42515

SYSMAC BUS Slave Number
Refresh Bit

A50900

Description
ON when an error occurs in a data transfer in the SYSMAC
BUS system. The number of the Master involved is indicated
with bits A40500 and A40501.
When a transmission error occurs in the SYSMAC BUS system, the flag for the affected Master Unit will be turned ON.
A40500: Flag for Master Unit #0
A40501: Flag for Master Unit #1
When there is an error in a Slave Rack, these bits contain
the Slave’s unit number.
When there is an error in an Optical I/O Unit (excluding
Slave Racks), the status of A42504 (0 or 1) indicates
whether the Unit is low or high.
When there is an error in a Slave Rack, this byte contains
the 2-digit hexadecimal unit number of the Master to which
the Slave is connected.
(0xB0 for Master Unit 0, 0xB1 for Master Unit 1)
When there is an error in an Optical I/O Unit, this byte contains its 2-digit hexadecimal unit number (00 to 1F, or 0 to 31
decimal).
Turn this bit ON to refresh the error information in A425 (unit
number of Slave where error occurred after startup).

Access
Read-only

Description
These flags indicate whether a PLC Link Unit is mounted to
the PLC and the PLC Link Unit’s operating level.
ON when the Unit is in operating level #1.
These flags indicate whether a PLC Link Unit is mounted to
the PLC and the PLC Link Unit’s operating level.
ON when the Unit is in operating level #0.

Access
Read-only

Read-only

Read-only
Read-only

Read-only

Read/write

■ PLC Link Information

Name
PLC Link Operating Level
Flags

Address
A44211

A44212

438

Read-only

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area
■ Other PLC Operating Information

Name
Battery Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)

Address
A40204

Description
ON if the CPU Unit’s battery is disconnected or its voltage is
low and the PLC Setup has been set to detect this error.
(Detect Low Battery)
ON if the cycle time exceeds the maximum cycle time set in
the PLC Setup. In the Parallel Processing Modes, the program execution cycle time will be used. (Watch Cycle Time)
Turns ON when the peripheral servicing time in a Parallel
Processing Mode exceeds 2 s. This will also cause a cycle
time error and operation will stop.
Turn this bit ON to set the monitoring time in FPD(269) automatically with the teaching function.
Data from the I/O memory areas that are maintained when
power is turned OFF (HR, DM, etc.) are backed up with a
Battery. A39511 turns ON if the Battery voltage drops and
the data can no longer be maintained. The data in the I/O
memory will not be dependable when this happens.

Access
Read-only

Cycle Time Too Long Flag
(Fatal error)

A40108

Address
Description
The clock data from the clock built into the CPU Unit is stored here in BCD.
A35100 to
Seconds: 00 to 59 (BCD)
A35107
A35108 to
Minutes: 00 to 59 (BCD)
A35115
A35200 to
Hour: 00 to 23 (BCD)
A35207
A35208 to
Day of the month: 01 to 31 (BCD)
A35215
A35300 to
Month: 01 to 12 (BCD)
A35307
A35308 to
Year: 00 to 99 (BCD)
A35315
A35400 to
Day of the week: 00: Sunday, 01: Monday,
A35407
02: Tuesday, 03: Wednesday, 04: Thursday,
05: Friday, 06: Saturday

Access
Read-only
Read-only

Peripheral Servicing Too Long A40515
Flag
FPD Teaching Bit

A59800

Memory Backup Battery Failure Flag

A39511

Read-only

Read/write
Read-only

Clock
■ Clock Information

Name
Clock Data

Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only

The internal clock time is saved in the above words in the Auxiliary Area once
every few cycles. For details on internal clock accuracy, refer to 2-1-1 CPU
Unit Specifications.

439

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area
■ Operation Start and End Times

Name
Operation Start Time

Address
A515 to
A517

Operation End Time

A518 to
A520

Description
Access
The time that operation started as a result of changing the
Read/write
operating mode to RUN or MONITOR mode is stored here in
BCD.
A51500 to A51507: Seconds (00 to 59)
A51508 to A51515: Minutes (00 to 59)
A51600 to A51607: Hour (00 to 23)
A51608 to A51615: Day of month (01 to 31)
A51700 to A51707: Month (01 to 12)
A51708 to A51715: Year (00 to 99)
Note: The previous start time is stored after turning ON the
power supply until operation is started.
The time that operation stopped as a result of changing the Read/write
operating mode to PROGRAM mode is stored here in BCD.
A51800 to A51807: Seconds (00 to 59)
A51808 to A51815: Minutes (00 to 59)
A51900 to A51907: Hour (00 to 23)
A51908 to A51915: Day of month (01 to 31)
A52000 to A52007: Month (01 to 12)
A52008 to A52015: Year (00 to 99)
Note: If an error occurs in operation, the time of the error will
be stored. If the operating mode is then changed to PROGRAM mode, the time that PROGRAM mode was entered
will be stored.

■ Power Supply ON/OFF Time Information

Name
Startup Time

Address
A510 and
A511

Power Interruption Time

A512 and
A513

Number of Power
Interruptions

A514

Total Power ON Time

A523

Power ON Clock Data 1 (See
note.)

A720 to
A722

440

Description
These words contain the time (in BCD) at which the power
was turned ON. The contents are updated every time that
the power is turned ON.
A51000 to A51007: Seconds (00 to 59)
A51008 to A51015: Minutes (00 to 59)
A51100 to A51107: Hour (00 to 23)
A51108 to A51115: Day of the month (01 to 31)
These words contain the time (in BCD) at which the power
was interrupted. The contents are updated every time that
the power is interrupted.
A51200 to A51207: Seconds (00 to 59)
A51208 to A51215: Minutes (00 to 59)
A51300 to A51307: Hour (00 to 23)
A51308 to A51315: Day of month (01 to 31)
Contains the number of times (in binary) that power has
been interrupted since the power was first turned on. To
reset this value, overwrite the current value with 0000.
Contains the total time (in binary) that the PLC has been on
in 10-hour units. The data is stored is updated every 10
hours. To reset this value, overwrite the current value with
0000.

Access
Read/write

Read/write

These words contain the startup date/time (the same time
Read/write
as the startup time stored in words A510 to A511 as well as
the month and year information) for the last time that power
was turned ON. The data is BCD.
A72000 to A72007: Seconds (00 to 59)
A72008 to A72015: Minutes (00 to 59)
A72100 to A72107: Hour (00 to 23)
A72108 to A72115: Day of month (01 to 31)
A72200 to A72207: Month (01 to 12)
A72208 to A72215: Year (00 to 99)

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area
Name

Address

Power ON Clock Data 2 (See
note.)

A723 to
A725

Power ON Clock Data 3 (See
note.)

A726 to
A728

Power ON Clock Data 4 (See
note.)

A729 to
A731

Power ON Clock Data 5 (See
note.)

A732 to
A734

Power ON Clock Data 6 (See
note.)

A735 to
A737

Power ON Clock Data 7 (See
note.)

A738 to
A740

Power ON Clock Data 8 (See
note.)

A741 to
A743

Power ON Clock Data 9 (See
note.)

A744 to
A746

Power ON Clock Data 10 (See A747 to
note.)
A749

Description
These words contain the startup time/date for the second-tolast time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
These words contain the startup time/date for the third-tolast time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
These words contain the startup time/date for the fourth-tolast time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
These words contain the startup time/date for the fifth-to-last
time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
These words contain the startup time/date for the sixth-tolast time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
These words contain the startup time/date for the seventhto-last time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
These words contain the startup time/date for the eighth-tolast time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
These words contain the startup time/date for the ninth-tolast time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
These words contain the startup time/date for the tenth-tolast time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.

Access
Read/write

Read/write

Note Supported only by unit version 3.0 or later.

441

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area
■

User Data Revision Times

Name
User Program Date

Address
A090 to
A093

Parameter Date

A094 to
A097

Description
Access
These words contain in BCD the date and time that the user Read-only
program was last overwritten.
A09000 to A09007: Seconds (00 to 59)
A09008 to A09015: Minutes (00 to 59)
A09100 to A09107: Hour (00 to 23)
A09108 to A09115: Day of month (01 to 31)
A09200 to A09207: Month (01 to 12)
A09208 to A09215: Year (00 to 99)
A09308 to A09307: Day of the week
(00: Sunday, 01: Monday, 02: Tuesday, 03: Wednesday, 04:
Thursday, 05: Friday, 06: Saturday)
Read-only
These words contain in BCD the date and time that the
parameters were last overwritten.
A09400 to A09407: Seconds (00 to 59)
A09408 to A09415: Minutes (00 to 59)
A09500 to A09507: Hour (00 to 23)
A09508 to A09515: Day of month (01 to 31)
A09600 to A09607: Month (01 to 12)
A09608 to A09615: Year (00 to 99)
A09708 to A09707: Day of the week
(00: Sunday, 01: Monday, 02: Tuesday, 03: Wednesday, 04:
Thursday, 05: Friday, 06: Saturday)

Information on Read Protection Using a Password
Name
UM Read Protection Flag

Address
A09900

Task Read Protection Flag

A09901

Program Write Protection for
Read Protection

A09902

Enable/Disable Bit for Program Backup

A09903

442

Description
Indicates whether the entire user program in the PLC is
read-protected.
0: UM not read-protected.
1: UM read-protected.
Indicates whether read protection is set for individual tasks.
0: Tasks not read-protected.
1: Tasks read-protected.
Indicates whether the program is write-protected.
0: Write-enabled.
1: Write-protected.
Indicates whether creating a backup program file (.OBJ) is
enabled or disabled.
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.

Access
Read-only

Read-only

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area
Communications
■

Network
Network Communications Information

Name
Address
Communications Port Enabled A20200 to
Flags
A20207

Communications Port Completion Codes

A203 to
A210

Communications Port Error
Flags

A21900 to
A21907

Description
Access
ON when a network instruction (SEND(090), RECV(098),
Read-only
CMND(490), or PMCR(260)) can be executed with the corresponding port number or background execution can be
executed with the corresponding port number (CS1-H CPU
Units only). Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications
ports 0 to 7.
When the simple backup operation is used to performed a
write or compare operation for a Memory Card on a CS1-H
CPU Unit, a communications port will be automatically allocated, and the corresponding flag will be turned ON during
the operation and turned OFF when the operation has been
completed.
These words contain the completion codes for the correRead-only
sponding port numbers when network instructions
(SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), or PMCR(260))
have been executed. The contents will be cleared when
background execution has been completed (for CS1-H CPU
Unit only). Words A203 to A210 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
When the simple backup operation is used to performed a
write or compare operation for a Memory Card on a CS1-H
CPU Unit, a communications port will be automatically allocated, and a completion code will be stored in the corresponding word.
Read-only
ON when an error occurred during execution of a network
instruction (SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), or
PMCR(260)). Turns OFF then execution has been finished
normally. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports
0 to 7.
When the simple backup operation is used to performed a
write or compare operation for a Memory Card on a CS1-H
CPU Unit, a communications port will be automatically allocated. The corresponding flag will be turned ON if an error
occurs and will be turned OFF if the simple backup operation ends normally.

443

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area

Auxiliary Area Bits and Words Used when Automatically Allocating
Communications Ports
Name
Network Communications
Port Allocation Enabled Flag

Address
A20215

First Cycle Flags after Network Communications Finished

A21400 to
A21407

First Cycle Flags after Network Communications Error

A21500 to
A21507

Network Communications
Completion Code Storage
Address

A216 to
A217

Used Communications Port
Numbers

A218

444

Description
ON when there is a communications port available for automatic allocation.
Note: Use this flag to confirm whether a communications
port is available for automatic allocation before executing communications instructions when using 9 or
more communications instructions simultaneously.
Each flag will turn ON for just one cycle after communications have been completed. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to
ports 0 to 7. Use the Used Communications Port Number
stored in A218 to determine which flag to access.
Note: These flags are not effective until the next cycle after
the communications instruction is executed. Delay
accessing them for at least one cycle.
Each flag will turn ON for just one cycle after a communications error occurs. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to ports 0 to 7.
Use the Used Communications Port Number stored in A218
to determine which flag to access. Determine the cause of
the error according to the Communications Port Completion
Codes stored in A203 to A210.
Note: These flags are not effective until the next cycle after
the communications instruction is executed. Delay
accessing them for at least one cycle.
The completion code for a communications instruction is
automatically stored at the address with the I/O memory
address given in these words. Place this address into an
index register and use indirect addressing through the index
register to read the communications completion code.
Stores the communications port numbers used when a communications instruction is executed using automatic communication port allocations.
0000 to 0007 hex: Communications port 0 to 7

Access
Read-only

Read-only

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area
Information on Explicit Message Instructions
Name
Address
Explicit Communications Error A21300 to
Flag
A21307

Network Communications
Error Flag

A21900 to
A21907

Network Communications
Response Code

A203 to
A210

Description
Access
Turn ON when an error occurs in executing an Explicit Mes- Read-only
sage Instruction (EXPLT(720), EGATR(721), ESATR(722),
ECHRD(723), or ECHWR(724)).
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
The corresponding bit will turn ON both when the explicit
message cannot be sent and when an error response is
returned for the explicit message.
The status will be maintained until the next explicit message
communication is executed. The bit will always turn OFF
when the next Explicit Message Instruction is executed.
Turn ON if the explicit message cannot be sent when execut- Read-only
ing an Explicit Message Instruction (EXPLT(720),
EGATR(721), ESATR(722), ECHRD(723), or ECHWR(724)).
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
The corresponding bit will turn ON when the explicit message cannot be sent.
The status will be maintained until the next explicit message
communication is executed. The bit will always turn OFF
when the next Explicit Message Instruction is executed.
The following codes will be stored when an Explicit Message Read-only
Instruction (EXPLT(720), EGATR(721), ESATR(722),
ECHRD(723), or ECHWR(724)) has been executed.
A203 to A210 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
If the Explicit Communications Error Flag turns OFF, 0000
hex is stored.
If the Explicit Communications Error Flag is ON and the Network Communications Error Flag is ON, the FINS end code
is stored.
If the Explicit Communications Error Flag is ON and the Network Communications Error Flag is OFF, the explicit message end code is stored.
During communications, 0000 hex will be stored and the
suitable code will be stored when execution has been completed. The code will be cleared when operation is started.

SYSMAC BUS Communications Information
Name
SYSMAC BUS Master 1
Restart Bit

Address
A52614

SYSMAC BUS Master 0
Restart Bit

A52615

Description
Access
Turn this bit ON to restart SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Read/write
Unit 1. (Turned OFF automatically when restart processing
is completed.)
Turn this bit ON to restart SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Read/write
Unit 0. (Turned OFF automatically when restart processing
is completed.)

445

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area
■ Peripheral Port Communications Information

Name
Peripheral Port Communications Error Flag

Address
A39212

Peripheral Port Restart Bit
Peripheral Port Settings
Change Bit
Peripheral Port Error Flags

A52601
A61901

Peripheral Port PT Communications Flags

A52808 to
A52815
A39400 to
A39407

Peripheral Port PT Priority
Registered Flags

A39408 to
A39415

Description
ON when a communications error has occurred at the
peripheral port.
Note: This flag is disabled in NT Link (1:N) mode.
Turn this bit ON to restart the peripheral port.
ON while the peripheral port’s communications settings are
being changed.
These flags indicate what kind of error has occurred at the
peripheral port.
The corresponding bit will be ON when the peripheral port is
communicating with a PT in NT link mode. Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.

Access
Read-only

Read/write
Read/write
Read/write
Read-only

The corresponding bit will be ON for the PT that has priority Read-only
when the peripheral port is communicating in NT link mode.
Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.

■ RS-232C Port Communications Information

Name
RS-232C Port Communications Error Flag

Address
A39204

RS-232C Port Restart Bit
RS-232C Port Settings
Change Bit

A52600
A61902

RS-232C Port Error Flags

A52800 to
A52807
A39205

These flags indicate what kind of error has occurred at the
Read/write
RS-232C port.
ON when the RS-232C port is able to send data in no-proto- Read-only
col mode.

A39206

ON when the RS-232C port has completed the reception in
no-protocol mode.

A39207

ON when a data overflow occurred during reception through Read-only
the RS-232C port in no-protocol mode.

RS-232C Port PT Communications Flags

A39300 to
A39307

RS-232C Port PT Priority
Registered Flags

A39308 to
A39315

RS-232C Port Reception
Counter
(No-protocol mode)

A39300 to
A39315

The corresponding bit will be ON when the RS-232C port is Read-only
communicating with a PT in NT link mode. Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
The corresponding bit will be ON for the PT that has priority Read-only
when the RS-232C port is communicating in NT link mode.
Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
Indicates (in binary) the number of bytes of data received
Read-only
when the RS-232C port is in no-protocol mode.

RS-232C Port Send Ready
Flag
(No-protocol mode)
RS-232C Port Reception
Completed Flag
(No-protocol mode)
RS-232C Port Reception
Overflow Flag
(No-protocol mode)

Description
ON when a communications error has occurred at the RS232C port.
Note: Do not access this flag in peripheral bus mode, 1:N
NT Link mode, or Serial PLC Link Master/Slave
mode.
Turn this bit ON to restart the RS-232C port.
ON while the RS-232C port’s communications settings are
being changed.

Access
Read-only

Read/write
Read/write

Read-only

■ Serial Device Communications Information

Name
Communications Units 0 to
15, Ports 1 to 4 Settings
Change Bits

Address
A62001 to
A63504

Communications Board Ports
1 to 4 Settings Change Bits

A63601 to
A63604

446

Description
Access
The corresponding flag will be ON when the settings for that Read/write
port are being changed.
(Bits 1 to 4 in A620 to A635 correspond to ports 1 to 4 in
Communications Units 0 to 15.)
The corresponding flag will be ON when the settings for that Read/write
port are being changed.
(Bits 1 to 4 correspond to ports 1 to 4.)

Section 9-16

Auxiliary Area
Instruction-related Information
Step Flag

Name

Address
A20012

Current EM Bank

A301

Macro Area Input Words

A600 to
A603

Macro Area Output Words

A604 to
A607

Description
ON for one cycle when step execution is started with
STEP(008).
This word contains the current EM bank number in 4-digit
hexadecimal.
When MCRO(099) is executed, it copies the input data from
the specified source words (input parameter words) to A600
through A603.
After the subroutine specified in MCRO(099) has been executed, the results of the subroutine are transferred from
A604 through A607 to the specified destination words (output parameter words).

Access
Read-only
Read-only
Read/write

Read/write

Background Execution Information
Name
DR00 Output for Background
Execution

Address
A597

IR00 Output for Background
Execution

A595 and
A596

Equals Flag for Background
Execution
ER/AER Flag for Background
Execution

A59801
A39510

Description
When a data register is specified as the output for an
instruction processed in the background, A597 receives the
output instead of DR00.
0000 to FFFF hex
When an index register is specified as the output for an
instruction processed in the background, A595 and A596
receive the output instead of IR00.
0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex
(A596 contains the leftmost digits.)
Turns ON if matching data is found for an SRCH(181)
instruction executed in the background.
Turns ON if an error or illegal access occurs during background execution. Turns OFF when power is turned ON or
operation is started.

Access
Read-only

Description
Turns ON if the FB program memory contains FB program
data.
0: No data
1: Data present

Access
Read-only

Read-only

Read-only
Read-only

Function Block Information
■ Function Block Memory Information

Name
FB Program Data Flag

Address
A34500

■ OMRON FB Library Information

Name
FB Communications Instruction Response Required
FB Communications Instruction Port No.
FB Communications Instruction Retries
FB Communications Instruction Response Monitoring
Time

Address
A58015

FB DeviceNet Communications Instruction Response
Monitoring Time

A582

A58008 to
A58011
A58000 to
A58003
A581

Description
0: Not required
1: Required
0 to 7 hex: Communications port No. 0 to 7
F hex: Automatic allocation
Automatically stores the number of retries in the FB communications instruction settings specified in the PLC Setup.
Automatically stores the FB communications instruction
response monitoring time set in the PLC Setup.
0001 to FFFF hex (Unit: 0.1 s; Range: 0.1 to 6553.5)
0000 hex: 2 s
Automatically stores the FB DeviceNet communications
instruction response monitoring time set in the PLC Setup.
0001 to FFFF hex (Unit: 0.1 s; Range: 0.1 to 6553.5)
0000 hex: 2 s

Access
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only

Read-only

447

Section 9-17

TR (Temporary Relay) Area

Note These Auxiliary Area bits/words are not to be written by the user. The number
of resends and response monitoring time must be set by the user in the FB
communications instructions settings in the PLC Setup, particularly when
using function blocks from the OMRON FB Library to execute FINS messages
or DeviceNet explicit messages communications. The values set in the Settings for OMRON FB Library in the PLC Setup will be automatically stored in
the related Auxiliary Area words A580 to A582 and used by the function
blocks from the OMRON FB Library.

9-17 TR (Temporary Relay) Area
The TR Area contains 16 bits with addresses ranging from TR0 to TR15.
These temporarily store the ON/OFF status of an instruction block for branching. TR bits are useful when there are several output branches and interlocks
cannot be used.
It is not necessary to consider TR bits when displaying ladder diagrams on the
CX-Programmer.
The TR bits can be used as many times as required and in any order required
as long as the same TR bit is not used twice in the same instruction block.
TR bits can be used only with the OUT and LD instructions. OUT instructions
(OUT TR0 to OUT TR15) store the ON OFF status of a branch point and LD
instructions recall the stored ON OFF status of the branch point.
TR bits cannot be changed from a Programming Device.
Examples

In this example, a TR bit is used when two outputs have been directly connected to a branch point.
Instruction

Operand

LD
OR
OUT
AND
OUT
LD
AND
OUT

000000
000001
TR 0
000002
000003
TR 0
000004
000005

In this example, a TR bit is used when an output is connected to a branch
point without a separate execution condition.
Instruction
LD
OUT
AND
OUT
LD
OUT

448

Operand
000000
TR 0
000001
000002
TR 0
000003

Section 9-18

Timer Area

Note A TR bit is not required when there are no execution conditions after the
branch point or there is an execution condition only in the last line of the
instruction block.
Instruction
LD
OUT
OUT

Operand
000000
000001
000002

Instruction

Operand

LD
OUT
AND
OUT

000000
000001
000002
000003

9-18 Timer Area
The 4,096 timer numbers (T0000 to T4095) are shared by the TIM, TIMX,
TIMH(015),
TIMHX(551),
TMHH(540),
TMHHX(552),
TTIM(087),
TTIMX(555), TIMW(813), TIMWX(816), TMHW(815), and TMHWX(817)
instructions. Timer Completion Flags and present values (PVs) for these
instructions are accessed with the timer numbers. (The TIML(542),
TIMLX(553), MTIM(543), and MTIMX(554) instructions do not use timer numbers.)
When a timer number is used in an operand that requires bit data, the timer
number accesses the Completion Flag of the timer. When a timer number is
used in an operand that requires word data, the timer number accesses the
PV of the timer. Timer Completion Flags can be used as often as necessary
as normally open and normally closed conditions and the values of timer PVs
can be read as normal word data.
With CS1-H CPU Units, the refresh method for timer PVs can be set from the
CX-Programmer to either BCD or binary.
Note It is not recommended to use the same timer number in two timer instructions
because the timers will not operate correctly if they are timing simultaneously.
(If two or more timer instructions use the same timer number, an error will be
generated during the program check, but the timers will operate as long as the
instructions are not executed in the same cycle.)

449

Section 9-19

Counter Area

The following table shows when timer PVs and Completion Flags will be reset.
Instruction name

Effect on PV and Completion Flag
Mode change1 PLC start-up1

TIMER: TIM or TIMX
PV → 0
Flag → OFF
HIGH-SPEED TIMER:
TIMH(015) or TIMHX(551)
ONE-MS TIMER:
TMHH(540) or TMHHX(552)
ACCUMULATIVE TIMER:
TTIM(087) or TTIMX(555)
TIMER WAIT: TIMW(813) or
TIMWX(816)
HIGH-SPEED TIMER WAIT:
TMHW(815) or TMHWX(817)

Note

PV → 0
Flag → OFF

CNR(545) or
CNRX(547)
PV → 9999
Flag → OFF

Operation in
Jumps and Interlocks
Jumps
Interlocks
(JMP-JME) or
(IL-ILC)
Tasks on standby
PVs refreshed in
PV → SV
operating timers
(Reset to SV.)
Flag → OFF

PV Maintained

PVs refreshed in
operating timers

-----

1. If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the PV and Completion Flag will be
retained when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice-versa. The PV and
Completion Flag will be cleared when power is cycled.
2. If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the PV and Completion Flag will be retained when the PLC’s power is cycled.
3. Since the TIML(542), TIMLX(553), MTIM(543), and MTIMX(554) instructions do not use timer numbers, they are reset under different conditions.
Refer to the descriptions of these instructions for details.
4. The present value of TIM, TIMX, TIMH(015), TIMHX(551), TMHH(540),
TMHHX(552), TIMW(813), TIMWX(816), TMHW(815), and TMHWX(817)
timers programmed with timer numbers 0000 to 2047 will be updated even
when jumped between JMP and JME instructions or when in a task that is
on standby. The present value of timers programmed with timer numbers
2048 to 4095 will be held when jumped or when in a task that is on standby.

Forcing Bit Status

Timer Completion Flags can be force-set and force-reset.
Timer PVs cannot be force-set or force-reset, although the PVs can be
refreshed indirectly by force-setting/resetting the Completion Flag.
Note When designating addresses in programming or allocations inside C200H
Special I/O Units, “T000” to “T511” will actually specify T0000 to T0511 in the
CPU Unit. T0512 to T4095 cannot be specified inside the C200H Special I/O
Units.

9-19 Counter Area
The 4,096 counter numbers (C0000 to C4095) are shared by the CNT, CNTX,
CNTR(012), CNTRX(548), CNTW(814), and CNTWX(818) instructions.
Counter Completion Flags and present values (PVs) for these instructions are
accessed with the counter numbers.
When a counter number is used in an operand that requires bit data, the
counter number accesses the Completion Flag of the counter. When a
counter number is used in an operand that requires word data, the counter
number accesses the PV of the counter.
With CS1-H CPU Units, the refresh method for counter PVs can be set from
the CX-Programmer to either BCD or binary.

450

Section 9-20

Data Memory (DM) Area

It is not recommended to use the same counter number in two counter
instructions because the counters will not operate correctly if they are counting simultaneously. If two or more counter instructions use the same counter
number, an error will be generated during the program check, but the counters
will operate as long as the instructions are not executed in the same cycle.
The following table shows when counter PVs and Completion Flags will be
reset.
Instruction name
Reset
COUNTER: CNT or
CNTX
REVERSIBLE
COUNTER: CNTR(012)
or CNTRX(548)

PV → 0000
Flag → OFF

Effect on PV and Completion Flag
Mode
PLC startup Reset Input CNR(545) or
Interlocks
change
CNRX(548)
(IL-ILC)
Maintained
Maintained
Reset
Reset
Maintained

COUNTER WAIT:
CNTW(814) or
CNTWX(818)

Note When designating addresses in programming or allocations inside C200H
Special I/O Units, “C000” to “C511” will actually specify T0000 to T0511 in the
CPU Unit. C0512 to C4095 cannot be specified inside the C200H Special I/O
Units.

9-20 Data Memory (DM) Area
The DM Area contains 32,768 words with addresses ranging from D00000 to
D32767. This data area is used for general data storage and manipulation
and is accessible only by word.
Data in the DM Area is retained when the PLC’s power is cycled or the PLC’s
operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode
or vice-versa.
Although bits in the DM Area cannot be accessed directly, the status of these
bits can be accessed with the BIT TEST instructions, TST(350) and
TSTN(351).
Bits in the DM Area cannot be force-set or force-reset.
Note

1. If using a C200H DeviceNet Master Unit (C200HW-DRM21-V1), use the
following words as the status area. Data in this area is updated when the
C200H DeviceNet Master Unit is used, so the area cannot be used for other applications.
• Master Status: D06032 + (2 x unit number)
• Current Communications Cycle Time: D06033 + (2 x unit number)
The CS-series DeviceNet Unit (CS1W-DRM21) does not use the above
words.
2. When designating addresses in programming or allocations inside GroupI and Group-II C200H Special I/O Units, DM 0000 to DM 0999 will actually
specify D00000 to D00999 in the CPU Unit and DM 1000 to DM1999 will
actually specify D20000 to D20999 (part of the Special I/O Unit Area) in
the CPU Unit. Other addresses in this area cannot be specified. When designating addresses in programming or allocations inside Group-III and
Group-IV C200H Special I/O Units, DM 0000 to DM 6655 will actually
specify D00000 to D06655 in the CPU Unit. Other addresses in this area
cannot be specified.

451

Section 9-20

Data Memory (DM) Area
Indirect Addressing

Words in the DM Area can be indirectly addressed in two ways: binary-mode
and BCD-mode.
Binary-mode Addressing (@D)
When a “@” character is input before a DM address, the content of that DM
word is treated as binary and the instruction will operate on the DM word at
that binary address. The entire DM Area (D00000 to D32767) can be indirectly addressed with hexadecimal values 0000 to 7FFF.
@D00100

0100

D00256
Address actually used.

BCD-mode Addressing (*D)
When a “*” character is input before a DM address, the content of that DM
word is treated as BCD and the instruction will operate on the DM word at that
BCD address. Only part of the DM Area (D00000 to D09999) can be indirectly
addressed with BCD values 0000 to 9999.
*D00100

DM Area Allocation to
Special Units Inner Board

1,2,3...

0100

D00100
Address actually used.

Parts of the DM Area are allocated to Special I/O Units, CS-series CPU Bus
Units, and Inner Boards for functions such as initial Unit settings. The timing
for data transfers is different for these Units, but may occur at any of the three
following times.
1. Transfer data when the PLC’s power is turned on or the Unit is restarted.
2. Transfer data once each cycle.
3. Transfer data when required.
Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on data transfer timing.
Special I/O Units (D20000 to D29599)
Each Special I/O Unit is allocated 100 words (based on unit numbers 0 to 95).
Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on the function of these
words.
Special I/O Unit
CPU Unit
Data transferred to the
Special I/O
Unit when the
PLC is turned
on or the Unit
is restarted.

DM Area for Special I/O Units
(100 words/Unit)

Data transferred to the
CPU Unit at
cyclic refreshing or when
necessary.

CPU Bus Units (D30000 to D31599)
Each CPU Bus Unit is allocated 100 words (based on unit numbers 0 to F).
Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on the function of these
words. With some CPU Bus Units such as Ethernet Units, initial settings must
be registered in the CPU Unit’s Parameter Area; this data can be registered
with a Programming Device other than a Programming Console.

452

Section 9-21

Extended Data Memory (EM) Area
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Unit
Data transferred to the
CS1 Special
Unit when
the PLC is
turned on or
the Unit is
restarted.

DM Area for CPU Bus Units
(100 words/Unit)

Data transferred to the
CPU Unit at
cyclic refresh-ing or
when necessary.

Inner Board (D32000 to D32099)
The Inner Board is allocated 100 words. Refer to the Board’s Operation Manual for details on the function of these words.
CPU Unit
DM Area for Inner Board
(100 words)

Data transferred to the Inner Board when the
PLC is turned on or the Board is restarted.

9-21 Extended Data Memory (EM) Area
The EM Area is divided into 13 banks (0 to C) that each contain 32,768 words.
EM Area addresses range from E0_00000 to EC_32767. This data area is
used for general data storage and manipulation and is accessible only by
word.
Data in the EM Area is retained when the PLC’s power is cycled or the PLC’s
operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode
or vice-versa.
Although bits in the EM Area cannot be accessed directly, the status of these
bits can be accessed with the BIT TEST instructions, TST(350) and
TSTN(351).
Bits in the EM Area cannot be force-set or force-reset.
Specifying EM Addresses

1,2,3...

There are two ways to specify an EM address: the bank and address can be
specified at the same time or an address in the current bank can be specified
(after changing the current bank, if necessary). In general, we recommend
specifying the bank and address simultaneously.
1. Bank and Address Specification
With this method, the bank number is specified just before the EM address.
For example, E2_00010 specifies EM address 00010 in bank 2.
2. Current Bank Address Specification
With this method, just the EM address is specified. For example, E00010
specifies EM address 00010 in the current bank. (The current bank must
be changed with EMBC(281) to access data in another bank. A301 contains the current EM bank number.)
The current bank will be reset to 0 when the operating mode is changed
from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode, unless the IOM Hold Bit

453

Section 9-21

Extended Data Memory (EM) Area

(A50012) is ON. The current bank is not changed as the program proceeds
through cyclic tasks and the current bank will be returned to its original value (in the source cyclic task) if it has been changed in an interrupt task.
Indirect Addressing

Words in the EM Area can be indirectly addressed in two ways: binary-mode
and BCD-mode.
Binary-mode Addressing (@E)
When a “@” character is input before a EM address, the content of that EM
word is treated as binary and the instruction will operate on the EM word in
the same bank at that binary address. All of the words in the same EM bank
(E00000 to E32767) can be indirectly addressed with hexadecimal values
0000 to 7FFF and words in the next EM bank (E00000 to E32767) can be
addressed with hexadecimal values 8000 to FFFF.
@E1_00100

0200

@E00100

0200

E1_00512
Address actually used.
E0_00512
Address actually used.

(When the current
bank is bank 0.)

BCD-mode Addressing (*E)
When a “*” character is input before a EM address, the content of that EM
word is treated as BCD and the instruction will operate on the EM word in the
same bank at that BCD address. Only part of the EM bank (E00000 to
E09999) can be indirectly addressed with BCD values 0000 to 9999.

File Memory Conversion

*E1_00100

0200

*E00100

0200

E1_00200
Address actually used.
E0_00200
Address actually used.

(When the current
bank is bank 0.)

Part of the EM Area can be converted for use as file memory with settings in
the PLC Setup. All EM banks from the specified bank (EM File Memory Starting Bank) to the last EM bank will be converted to file memory.
Once EM banks have been converted to file memory, they cannot be
accessed (read or written) by instructions. An Illegal Access Error will occur if
a file-memory bank is specified as an operand in an instruction.
The following example shows EM file memory when the EM File Memory
Starting Bank has been set to 3 in the PLC Setup.
EM bank number
0
1
2
3
.
.
.
B
C

Example:
EM File Memory Starting
Bank set to 3 in the PLC Setup

EM file memory
(Cannot be accessed
from instructions.)

Note When designating addresses in programming or allocations inside C200H
Special I/O Units, “EM 0000” to “EM 6143” will actually specify E0_00000 to
E0_06143 in the CPU Unit. Other addresses in this area cannot be specified.

454

Section 9-22

Index Registers

9-22 Index Registers
The sixteen Index Registers (IR0 to IR15) are used for indirect addressing.
Each Index Register can hold a single PLC memory address, which is the
absolute memory address of a word in I/O memory. Use MOVR(560) to convert a regular data area address to its equivalent PLC memory address and
write that value to the specified Index Register. (Use MOVRW(561) to set the
PLC memory address of a timer/counter PV in an Index Register.)
Note Refer to Appendix C Memory Map for more details on PLC memory
addresses.
Indirect Addressing

When an Index Register is used as an operand with a “,” prefix, the instruction
will operate on the word indicated by the PLC memory address in the Index
Register, not the Index Register itself. Basically, the Index Registers are I/O
memory pointers.
• All addresses in I/O memory (except Index Registers, Data Registers, and
Condition Flags) can be specified seamlessly with PLC memory
addresses. It isn’t necessary to specify the data area.
• In addition to basic indirect addressing, the PLC memory address in an
Index Register can be offset with a constant or Data Register, auto-incremented, or auto-decremented. These functions can be used in loops to
read or write data while incrementing or decrementing the address by one
each time that the instruction is executed.
With the offset and increment/decrement variations, the Index Registers can
be set to base values with MOVR(560) or MOVRW(561) and then modified as
pointers in each instruction.
I/O Memory
Set to a base value
with MOVR(560) or
MOVRW(561).

Pointer

Note It is possible to specify regions outside of I/O memory and generate an Illegal
Access Error when indirectly addressing memory with Index Registers. Refer
to Appendix C Memory Map for details on the limits of PLC memory
addresses.

455

Section 9-22

Index Registers

The following table shows the variations available when indirectly addressing
I/O memory with Index Registers. (IR@ represents an Index Register from IR0
to IR15.)
Variation
Indirect addressing

Indirect addressing
with constant offset

Indirect addressing
with DR offset

Indirect addressing
with auto-increment

Function
The content of IR@ is treated as
the PLC memory address of a bit
or word.
The constant prefix is added to the
content of IR@ and the result is
treated as the PLC memory
address of a bit or word.
The constant may be any integer
from –2,048 to 2,047.
The content of the Data Register
is added to the content of IR@ and
the result is treated as the PLC
memory address of a bit or word.
After referencing the content of
IR@ as the PLC memory address
of a bit or word, the content is
incremented by 1 or 2.

Indirect addressing
The content of IR@ is decrewith auto-decrement mented by 1 or 2 and the result is
treated as the PLC memory
address of a bit or word.

Example

Syntax

Example
Loads the bit at the PLC
memory address contained
in IR0.

,IR@

LD ,IR0

Constant ,IR@
(Include a + or –
in the constant.)

LD +5,IR0

Adds 5 to the contents of IR0
and loads the bit at that PLC
memory address.

DR@,IR@

LD
DR0,IR0

Increment by 1:
,IR@+
Increment by 2:
,IR@++
Decrement by 1:
,–IR@
Decrement by 2:
,– –IR@

LD , IR0++

Adds the contents of DR0 to
the contents of IR0 and
loads the bit at that PLC
memory address.
Loads the bit at the PLC
memory address contained
in IR0 and then increments
the content of IR0 by 2.

LD , – –IR0 Decrements the content of
IR0 by 2 and then loads the
bit at that PLC memory
address.

This example shows how to store the PLC memory address of a word
(CIO 0002) in an Index Register (IR0), use the Index Register in an instruction, and use the auto-increment variation.
MOVR(560)

0002

IR0

Stores the PLC memory address of
CIO 0002 in IR0.

MOV(021)

#0001

,IR0

Writes #0001 to the PLC memory address contained in IR0.

MOV(021)

#0020

+1,IR0 Reads the content of IR0, adds 1,
and writes #0020 to that PLC memory address.

Regular
data area
address

PLC memory address
I/O memory

MOVE TO REGISTER instruction
MOVR(560) 0002 IR0

Pointer
#0001
#0020

Note

456

1. Auto-incrementing and auto-decrementing for index registers are performed whenever an instruction using them is executed. Care is required
in application, particularly with instructions like OUT, which are executed

Section 9-22

Index Registers

every cycle. Refer to 1-1-5 Inputting Data in Operands in the Instructions
Reference for details.
Example
MOVR 000013 IR0
LD
P_Off
OUT ,IR0+
With the above programming, OUT will turn OFF CIO 000013 and IR0 will
be incremented to point to CIO 000014.
MOVR 000013 IR0
LD
P_Off
SET
,IR0+
SET is executed only when the input condition is ON. With the above programming, SET will not be executed and IR0 will not be incremented.
2. The PLC memory addresses are listed in the diagram above, but it isn’t
necessary to know the PLC memory addresses when using Index Registers.
Since some operands are treated as word data and others are treated as bit
data, the meaning of the data in an Index Register will differ depending on the
operand in which it is used.
1,2,3...

1. Word Operand:
MOVR(560)
0000
MOV(021)
D00000

IR2
, IR2

When the operand is treated as a word, the contents of the Index Register
are used “as is” as the PLC memory address of a word.
In this example MOVR(560) sets the PLC memory address of CIO 0002 in
IR2 and the MOV(021) instruction copies the contents of D00000 to
CIO 0002.
2. Bit Operand:
MOVR(560)
SET

000013
+5 , IR2

,IR2

When the operand is treated as a bit, the leftmost 7 digits of the Index Register specify the word address and the rightmost digit specifies the bit number. In this example, MOVR(560) sets the PLC memory address of
CIO 000013 (0C000D hex) in IR2. The SET instruction adds +5 from bit 13
to this PLC memory address, so it turns ON bit CIO 000102.
Index Register
Initialization

The Index Registers will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...

IOM Hold Bit Operation

If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, the Index Registers won’t be cleared
when a FALS error occurs or the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM
mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, and if the Index Registers
are not set to be shared between tasks (default setting), Index Registers will
be held in the following way when power is interrupted. For tasks that were
completed before power was interrupted, the values for the cycle during which
power was interrupted will be held. For tasks that were not completed before
power was interrupted, the values for the cycle before the cycle during which

457

Section 9-22

Index Registers

power was interrupted will be held. For example, in a program with three
tasks, tasks 0, 1, and 2, if power is interrupted in the nth cycle during execution of task 1, then the execution result for the nth cycle of task 0 and the execution results for the (n−1)th cycle of tasks 1 and 2 will be held.
If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status at
Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, and the Index Registers are
set to be shared between tasks, Index Registers will not be held when the
PLC’s power supply is reset (ON →OFF →ON). The Index Registers may take
undefined values. Be sure to set the values before continuing.
Forcing Bit Status

Bits in Index Registers cannot be force-set and force-reset.

Direct Addressing

When an Index Register is used as an operand without a “,” prefix, the instruction will operate on the contents of the Index Register itself (a two-word or
“double” value). Index Registers can be directly addressed only in the instructions shown in the following table. Use these instructions to operate on the
Index Registers as pointers.
The Index Registers cannot be directly addressed in any other instructions,
although they can usually be used for indirect addressing.
Instruction group
Instruction name
Data Movement
MOVE TO REGISTER
Instructions
MOVE TIMER/COUNTER PV TO REGISTER
DOUBLE MOVE
DOUBLE DATA EXCHANGE
Table Data ProSET RECORD LOCATION
cessing InstrucGET RECORD NUMBER
tions
Increment/DecreDOUBLE INCREMENT BINARY
ment Instructions
DOUBLE DECREMENT BINARY
Comparison
DOUBLE EQUAL
Instructions
DOUBLE NOT EQUAL
DOUBLE LESS THAN
DOUBLE LESS THAN OR EQUAL
DOUBLE GREATER THAN
DOUBLE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
DOUBLE COMPARE
Symbol Math
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOUT
Instructions
CARRY
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT
WITHOUT CARRY

Mnemonic
MOVR(560)
MOVRW(561)
MOVL(498)
XCGL(562)
SETR(635)
GETR(636)
++L(591)
– –L(593)
=L(301)
< >L(306)
< L(311)
< =L(316)
> L(321)
> =L(326)
CMPL(060)
+L(401)
–L(411)

The SRCH(181), MAX(182), and MIN(183) instructions can output the PLC
memory address of the word with the desired value (search value, maximum,
or minimum) to IR0. In this case, IR0 can be used in later instructions to
access the contents of that word.

Precautions
Do not use Index Registers until a PLC memory address has been set in the
register. The pointer operation will be unreliable if the registers are used without setting their values.
The values in Index Registers are unpredictable at the start of an interrupt
task. When an Index Register will be used in an interrupt task, always set a
PLC memory address in the Index Register with MOVR(560) or MOVRW(561)
before using the register in that task.

458

Section 9-22

Index Registers

Each Index Register task is processed independently, so they do not affect
each other. For example, IR0 used in Task 1 and IR0 used in Task 2 are different. Consequently, each Index Register task has 16 Index Registers.

Limitations when Using Index Registers
1,2,3...

1. It is only possible to read the Index Register for the last task executed within the cycle from the Programming Devices. If using Index Registers with
the same number to perform multiple tasks, it is only possible with the Programming Devices to read the Index Register value for the last task performed within the cycle from the multiple tasks. Nor is it possible to write
the Index Register value from the Programming Devices.
2. It is not possible to either read or write to the Index Registers using Host
Link commands or FINS commands.
3. The Index Registers cannot share tasks between them for CS1 CPU Units.
(With CS1-H CPU Units, a PLC Setup setting can be made from the CXProgrammer to share Index Registers between tasks.)

Monitoring and Sharing
Index Registers

It is possible to monitor or share Index Registers as follows:
To use the Programming Devices to monitor the final Index Register values for
each task, or to monitor the Index Register values using Host Link commands
or FINS commands, write a program to store Index Register values from each
task to another area (e.g., DM area) at the end of each task, and to read Index
Register values from the storage words (e.g., DM area) at the beginning of
each task. The values stored for each task in other areas (e.g., DM area) can
then be edited using the Programming Devices, Host Link commands, or
FINS commands.
Note Be sure to use PLC memory addresses in Index Registers.

459

Section 9-22

Index Registers

IR storage words for task 1
Task 1

D01001 and D01000
stored in IR0

or
Actual memory address of
CIO 0000 (0000C000 Hex)
stored in IR0

Contents of IR0 stored in
D01001 and D01000

IR storage words for task 2
Task 2

D02001 and D02000
stored in IR0

or
Actual memory address
CIO 0005 (0000C005 Hex)
stored in IR0

Contents of IR0 stored in
D02001 and D02000

Peripheral servicing

460

Read D01001
and D01000

Read D02001
and D02000

Section 9-23

Data Registers
Sharing Index Registers

The following setting can be made from the PLC properties dialog box on the
CX-Programmer to control sharing index and data registers between tasks.

9-23 Data Registers
The sixteen Data Registers (DR0 to DR15) are used to offset the PLC memory addresses in Index Registers when addressing words indirectly.
The value in a Data Register can be added to the PLC memory address in an
Index Register to specify the absolute memory address of a bit or word in I/O
memory. Data Registers contain signed binary data, so the content of an
Index Register can be offset to a lower or higher address.
I/O Memory
Set to a base value
with MOVR(560) or
MOVRW(561).

Pointer

Set with a regular
instruction.

Examples

The following examples show how Data Registers are used to offset the PLC
memory addresses in Index Registers.
LD

DR0 ,IR0

MOV(021) #0001 DR0 ,IR1

Range of Values

Adds the contents of DR0 to the contents
of IR0 and loads the bit at that PLC memory address.
Adds the contents of DR0 to the contents
of IR1 and writes #0001 to that PLC
memory address.

The contents of data registers are treated as signed binary data and thus
have a range of –32,768 to 32,767.
Hexadecimal content
Decimal equivalent
8000 to FFFF
–32,768 to –1
0000 to 7FFF
0 to 32,767

Data Register Initialization
1,2,3...

The Data Registers will be cleared in the following cases:
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.

461

Section 9-23

Data Registers
IOM Hold Bit Operation

If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, the Data Registers won’t be cleared when
a FALS error occurs or the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode
to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, and if the Data Registers
are not set to be shared between tasks (default setting), Data Registers will
be held in the following way when power is interrupted. For tasks that were
completed before power was interrupted, the values for the cycle during which
power was interrupted will be held. For tasks that were not completed before
power was interrupted, the values for the cycle before the cycle during which
power was interrupted will be held. For example, in a program with three
tasks, tasks 0, 1, and 2, if power is interrupted in the nth cycle during execution of task 1, then the execution result for the nth cycle of task 0 and the execution results for the (n−1)th cycle of tasks 1 and 2 will be held.
If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status at
Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, and the Data Registers are
set to be shared between tasks, Data Registers will not be held when the
PLC’s power supply is reset (ON →OFF →ON). The Data Registers may take
undefined values. Be sure to set the values before continuing.

Forcing Bit Status

Bits in Data Registers cannot be force-set and force-reset.

Precautions

Data Registers are normally local to each task. For example, DR0 used in
task 1 is different from DR0 used in task 2. (With CS1-H CPU Units, a PLC
Setup setting can be made from the CX-Programmer to share Data Registers
between tasks.)
The content of Data Registers cannot be accessed (read or written) from a
Programming Device.
Do not use Data Registers until a value has been set in the register. The register’s operation will be unreliable if they are used without setting their values.
The values in Data Registers are unpredictable at the start of an interrupt
task. When a Data Register will be used in an interrupt task, always set a
value in the Data Register before using the register in that task.

Sharing Data Registers

462

The following setting can be made from the PLC properties dialog box on the
CX-Programmer to control sharing index and data registers between tasks.

Section 9-24

Task Flags

9-24 Task Flags
Task Flags range from TK00 to TK31 and correspond to cyclic tasks 0 to 31. A
Task Flag will be ON when the corresponding cyclic task is in executable
(RUN) status and OFF when the cyclic task hasn’t been executed (INI) or is in
standby (WAIT) status.
Note These flags indicate the status of cyclic tasks only (including extra cyclic
tasks), they do not reflect the status of interrupt tasks.
Task Flag Initialization

The Task Flags will be cleared in the following cases, regardless of the status
of the IOM Hold Bit.

1,2,3...

1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled.

Forcing Bit Status

The Task Flags cannot be force-set and force-reset.

9-25 Condition Flags
These flags include the Arithmetic Flags such as the Error Flag and Equals
Flag which indicate the results of instruction execution. In earlier PLCs, these
flags were in the SR Area.
The Condition Flags are specified with labels, such as CY and ER, or with
symbols, such as P_Carry and P_Instr_Error, rather than addresses. The status of these flags reflects the results of instruction execution, but the flags are
read-only; they cannot be written directly from instructions or Programming
Devices.
Note The CX-Programmer treats condition flags as global symbols beginning with
P_.
All Condition Flags are cleared when the program switches tasks, so the status of the ER and AER flags are maintained only in the task in which the error
occurred.
The Condition Flags cannot be force-set and force-reset.
Summary of the Condition
Flags

The following table summarizes the functions of the Condition Flags, although
the functions of these flags will vary slightly from instruction to instruction.

463

Section 9-25

Condition Flags

Refer to the description of the instruction for complete details on the operation
of the Condition Flags for a particular instruction.
Name
Error Flag

P_ER

Access Error Flag

P_AER

Carry Flag

P_CY

Greater Than Flag

P_GT

Equals Flag

P_EQ

Less Than Flag

P_LT

Negative Flag
Overflow Flag

P_N
P_OF

Underflow Flag

P_UF

Greater Than or
Equals Flag
Not Equal Flag

P_GE

Less Than or
Equals Flag
Always ON Flag
Always OFF Flag

Symbol

P_NE
P_LE
P_On
P_Off

Using the Condition Flags

Label
Function
ER
Turned ON when the operand data in an instruction is incorrect (an
instruction processing error) to indicate that an instruction ended
because of an error.
Note: When the PLC Setup is set to stop operation for an instruction
error (Instruction Error Operation), program execution will be
stopped and the Instruction Processing Error Flag (A29508) will
be turned ON when the Error Flag is turned ON.
AER
Turned ON when an Illegal Access Error occurs. The Illegal Access
Error indicates that an instruction attempted to access an area of
memory that should not be accessed.
Note: When the PLC Setup is set to stop operation for an instruction
error (Instruction Error Operation), program execution will be
stopped and the Instruction Processing Error Flag (A429510)
will be turned ON when the Access Error Flag is turned ON.
CY
Turned ON when there is a carry in the result of an arithmetic operation or a “1” is shifted to the Carry Flag by a Data Shift instruction.
The Carry Flag is part of the result of some Data Shift and Symbol
Math instructions.
>
Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is
greater than the second or a value exceeds a specified range.
=
Turned ON when the two operands of a Comparison Instruction are
equal the result of a calculation is 0.
<
Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is less
than the second or a value is below a specified range.
N
Turned ON when the most significant bit (sign bit) of a result is ON.
OF
Turned ON when the result of calculation overflows the capacity of the
result word(s).
UF
Turned ON when the result of calculation underflows the capacity of
the result word(s).
>=
Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is
greater than or equal to the second.
<>
Turned ON when the two operands of a Comparison Instruction are
not equal.
<=
Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is less
than or equal to the second.
ON
Always ON. (Always 1.)
OFF
Always OFF. (Always 0.)

The Condition Flags are shared by all of the instructions, so their status may
change often in a single cycle. Be sure to read the Condition Flags immediately after the execution of instruction, preferably in a branch from the same
execution condition.
Instruction A

Condition Flag
Example: P_EQ

Instruction

LD
Instruction A
The result from instruction A is AND
reflected in the Equals Flag.
Instruction B

Operand

Instruction B

Since the Condition Flags are shared by all of the instructions, program operation can be changed from its expected course by interruption of a single task.
Be sure to consider the effects of interrupts when writing the program. Refer

464

Section 9-25

Condition Flags

to SECTION 2 Programming of CS/CJ Series Programmable Controllers
(W394) for more details.
The Condition Flags are cleared when the program switches tasks, so the status of a Condition Flag cannot be passed to another task. For example the
status of a flag in task 1 cannot be read in task 2. (The flag’s status must be
transferred to a bit.)
Note The condition flags cannot be designated directly in programming or allocations inside C200H Special I/O Units.

Saving and Loading Condition Flag Status
The CCS(282) and CCL(283) instructions can be used to save and load the
Condition Flag status. These can be used to access the status of the Condition Flags at other locations in a task or in a different task.
The following example shows how the Equals Flag is used at a different location in the same task.
Task

CMP

CCS

Stores result of comparison in the Condition
Flags. This will enable loading the results to
use with Instruction B.
Saves status of Condition Flags.

Instruction A

CCL
P_EQ
Instruction B

Loads the statuses of the Conditions Flags
that were stored.
The result of the comparison instruction in the
Equals Flag can be used by Instruction B
without interference from Instruction A.

465

Section 9-26

Clock Pulses

9-26 Clock Pulses
The Clock Pulses are flags that are turned ON and OFF at regular intervals by
the system.
Name

Label

0.02 s Clock Pulse 0.02s

Symbol

P_0_02_s

Programming
Console
name
0.02 s

Operation

ON for 0.01 s
OFF for 0.01 s

0.01 s

0.1 s Clock Pulse

0.1s

P_0_1s

0.1 s

ON for 0.05 s
OFF for 0.05 s

0.05 s

0.2 s Clock Pulse

0.2s

P_0_2s

0.2 s

ON for 0.1 s
OFF for 0.1 s

0.1 s

1 s Clock Pulse

P_1s

ON for 0.5 s
OFF for 0.5 s

0.5 s

1 min Clock Pulse

1min

P_1min

1 min

ON for 30 s
OFF for 30 s

30 s

The Clock Pulses are specified with labels (or symbols) rather than
addresses.
Specify the flags as shown above using the CX-Programmer or Programming
Console.
Note The CX-Programmer treats condition flags as global symbols beginning with
P_.
The Clock Pulses are read-only; they cannot be overwritten from instructions
or Programming Devices.
The Clock Pulses are cleared at the start of operation.
Using the Clock Pulses

The following example turns CIO 000000 ON and OFF at 0.5 s intervals.
P_1s

000000

Instruction
Operand
LD
P_1s
OUT
000000

← 0.5 s

←
000000

←0.5 s

←

Note The clock pulses cannot be designated directly in programming or allocations
inside C200H Special I/O Units.

Clock Pulses Update Timing
Clock pulses are updated during program execution, so the ON and OFF status may differ at the beginning and end of the program.

466

Section 9-27

Parameter Areas
Error

The clock pulses have a maximum error of 0.01% at 25°C. For long-term time
control, it is recommended that control be based on the internal clock rather
than the clock pulses. The internal clock itself also has an error factor.

9-27 Parameter Areas
Unlike the data areas in I/O memory which can be used in instruction operands, the Parameter Area can be accessed only from a Programming Device.
The Parameter Area is made up of the following parts.
• The PLC Setup
• The Registered I/O Table
• The Routing Table
• The CPU Bus Unit Settings

9-27-1 PLC Setup
The user can customize the basic specifications of the CPU Unit with the settings in the PLC Setup. The PLC Setup contains settings such as the serial
port communications settings and minimum cycle time setting.
Refer to 7-1 PLC Setup for details on the PLC Setup settings and refer to the
Programming Device’s Operation Manual for details on changing these settings.

9-27-2 Registered I/O Table
The Registered I/O Table is a table in the CPU Unit that contains the information on the model and slot location of all of the Units mounted to the CPU
Rack, Expansion I/O Racks, and Slave Racks. The I/O Table is written to the
CPU Unit with a Programming Device operation.
The CPU Unit allocates I/O memory to actual I/O points (on Basic I/O Units or
Remote I/O Units) and CPU Bus Units based on the information in the Registered I/O Table. Refer to the Programming Device’s Operation Manual for
details on registering the I/O Table.

16-point Input

Communications

12-point Output

16-point Output

Analog

Programming Device

CPU Unit
Registered
I/O
Table

Analog

Communications

Output 12

Input 16

Output 16

The I/O Verification Error Flag (A40209) will be turned ON if the models and
locations of the Units actually mounted to the PLC (CPU Rack, Expansion I/O
Racks, and Slave Racks) do not match the information in the Registered I/O
Table.

467

Section 9-27

Parameter Areas

9-27-3 Routing Table
When transferring data between networks, it is necessary to create a table in
each CPU Unit that shows the communications route from the local PLC’s
Communications Unit to the other networks. These tables of communications
routes are called “Routing Tables.”
Create the Routing Tables with a Programming Device or the Controller Link
Support Software and transfer the tables to each CPU Unit. The following diagram shows the Routing Tables used for a data transfer from PLC #1 to PLC
#4.
Node number M
Network 2
PLC #1

PLC #2

PLC #3

Unit number n
Network 1

Network 3

PLC #4

Node number N

1,2,3...

1. Relay Network Table of PLC #1:
Destination network
3

Relay network
1

Relay node
N

2. Relay Network Table of PLC #2:
Destination network
3

Relay network
2

Relay node
M

3. Local Network Table of PLC #3:
Local network
3

Unit number
n

Relay Network Table
This table lists the network address and node number of the first relay node to
contact in order to reach the destination network. The destination network is
reached through these relay nodes.
Local Network Table
This table lists the network address and unit number of the Communications
Unit connected to the local PLC.
These are settings for the CS-series CPU Bus Units which are controlled by
the CPU Unit. The actual settings depend on the model of CS-series CPU
Bus Unit being used; refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details.

9-27-4 CPU Bus Unit Settings
These settings are not managed directly like the I/O memory’s data areas, but
are set from a Programming Device like the Registered I/O Tables.
Example 1: For Controller Link Units, user-set data link parameters and network parameters are managed as CPU Bus Unit settings.
Example 2: For Ethernet Units, the settings required to operate as an Ethernet node, such as the IP address table, are managed as CPU Bus Unit settings.

468

Section 9-27

Parameter Areas

Refer to the Programming Device’s Operation Manual for details on changing
these settings.
Programming Device
CS-series CPU Bus Unit
CPU Unit

CS-series
CPU Bus
Unit Settings

469

Parameter Areas

470

Section 9-27

SECTION 10
CPU Unit Operation and the Cycle Time
This section describes the internal operation of the CPU Unit and the cycle used to perform internal processing.
10-1 CPU Unit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

473

10-1-1 General Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

473

10-1-2 I/O Refreshing and Peripheral Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

475

10-1-3 Initialization at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

477

10-2 CPU Unit Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

478

10-2-1 Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

478

10-2-2 Status and Operations in Each Operating Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

479

10-3 Power OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

480

10-3-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

480

10-3-2 Instruction Execution for Power Interruptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

483

10-4 Computing the Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

485

10-4-1 CPU Unit Operation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

485

10-4-2 Cycle Time Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

486

10-4-3 I/O Unit Refresh Times for Individual Units and Boards. . . . . . . . .

492

10-4-4 Cycle Time Calculation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

498

10-4-5 Online Editing Cycle Time Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

499

10-4-6 I/O Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

499

10-4-7 Interrupt Response Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

502

10-5 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

503

10-5-1 Sequence Input Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

504

10-5-2 Sequence Output Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

505

10-5-3 Sequence Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

505

10-5-4 Timer and Counter Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

506

10-5-5 Comparison Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

507

10-5-6 Data Movement Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

508

10-5-7 Data Shift Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

509

10-5-8 Increment/Decrement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

510

10-5-9 Symbol Math Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

510

10-5-10 Conversion Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

511

10-5-11 Logic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

513

10-5-12 Special Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

514

10-5-13 Floating-point Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

514

10-5-14 Double-precision Floating-point Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

515

10-5-15 Table Data Processing Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

516

10-5-16 Data Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

517

10-5-17 Subroutine Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

518

10-5-18 Interrupt Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

518

10-5-19 Step Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

518

10-5-20 Basic I/O Unit Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

519

471

472

10-5-21 Serial Communications Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

520

10-5-22 Network Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

520

10-5-23 File Memory Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

520

10-5-24 Display Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

521

10-5-25 Clock Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

521

10-5-26 Debugging Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

521

10-5-27 Failure Diagnosis Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

522

10-5-28 Other Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

522

10-5-29 Block Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

522

10-5-30 Text String Processing Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

524

10-5-31 Task Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

525

10-5-32 Model Conversion Instructions (Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later Only) . . . . .

525

10-5-33 Special Function Block Instructions (Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later Only). .

525

10-5-34 Function Block Instance Execution Time (CPU Units with Unit
Version 3.0 or Later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

526

Section 10-1

CPU Unit Operation

10-1 CPU Unit Operation
10-1-1 General Flow
The following flowchart shows the overall operation of the CPU Unit.
Note The CPU Unit’s processing mode is set to Normal Mode, Parallel Processing
with Synchronous Memory Access, or Parallel Processing with Asynchronous
Memory Access in the PLC Setup (Programming Console address 219, bits
08 to 15). This setting is also possible from the CX-Programmer.

Normal Mode
In the normal mode, the program is executed before I/O is refreshed and
peripherals are serviced. This cycle is executed repeatedly.

473

Section 10-1

CPU Unit Operation
Power ON

Startup
initialization
Initialize hardware
memory and system work
area.
Detect I/O.
Automatically transfer data
from Memory Card.

Overseeing Check the Battery.
processing

Check for Memory Card
and other devices.
Read DIP switch settings.

Program
execution

Cycle time

Verify actual Units with
registered I/O tables.
Clear I/O memory.
Check user memory.
Clear forced status, etc.

Check I/O bus.
Check user program
memory.

Operation processing: Execute the user program.
Error processing: Turn OFF outputs. (Reset Units
for bus errors.)
After error: Clear I/O memory is an error occurs
(unless a FALS(007) instruction created the error).

I/O refreshing
(even in
Refresh data for the following
PROGRAM
Units.
mode)

Basic I/O Units
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master
Units
Special I/O Units (both words
allocated in CIO and DM area and
specific data for each Unit)

Peripheral
servicing

Perform the following
servicing if any events have
occurred.
Special I/O Unit event
servicing
CPU Bus Unit event servicing

CPU Bus Units (both words
allocated in CIO and DM area and
specific data for each Unit)
Inner Boards (both words
allocated in CIO and DM area and
specific data for each Unit)

Peripheral port servicing
RS-232C port servicing
Inner Board event servicing
File access servicing
Communications port
servicing

Parallel Processing
The following two types of processing are performed in parallel in either of the
Parallel Processing Modes.
1,2,3...

1. Program execution: Includes user program execution and I/O refreshing. It
is this cycle time that is monitored from a Programming Device.
2. Peripheral servicing: Programming Devices and events from Special I/O
Units and CPU Bus Units are serviced when they occur.
There are two different Parallel Processing Modes. Parallel Processing with
Synchronous Memory Access refreshes I/O memory in the program execution

474

Section 10-1

CPU Unit Operation

cycle and Parallel Processing with Asynchronous Memory Access refreshes
I/O memory in the peripheral servicing cycle.
Power ON
Startup
initialization
Initialize hardware
memory and system
work area.
Detect I/O.
Automatically transfer
data from Memory
Card.

Program
Execution
Cycle

Overseeing
processing

Peripheral Servicing Cycle

Read DIP switch settings.
Check I/O bus.
Operation processing: Execute the user
program.
Error processing: Turn OFF outputs.
(Reset Units for bus errors.)
After error: Clear I/O memory is an error
occurs (unless a FALS(007) instruction
created the error).

Program
execution

Program
execution
cycle time

Verify actual Units with
registered I/O tables.
Clear I/O memory.
Check user memory.
Clear forced status,
etc.

I/O
refreshing
(even in
PROGRAM
mode)

Overseeing
processing

Peripheral
servicing
cycle time

Refresh data for the following Units.
Basic I/O Units
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Units
Special I/O Units (both words allocated in
CIO and DM area and specific data for
each Unit)
CPU Bus Units (both words allocated in
CIO and DM area and specific data for
each Unit)
Inner Boards (both words allocated in CIO
and DM area and specific data for each
Unit)

Peripheral
servicing

Check the Battery.
Check I/O bus.
Check user program
memory.

Perform the following servicing if any
events have occurred.
Special I/O Unit event servicing
CPU Bus Unit event servicing
Peripheral port servicing
RS-232C port servicing
Inner Board event servicing
Communications port servicing
Note: In Parallel Processing with
Synchronous Memory Access, any
events requiring I/O memory access are
serviced in the program execution cycle.

Peripheral Perform the following servicing if any events
occurred.
servicing have
File access servicing
Note: In Parallel Processing with Synchronous
Memory Access, any events requiring I/O
memory access are serviced here.

Note Always disconnect the Programming Console from the peripheral port during
actual system operation in a Parallel Processing Mode. If the Programming
Console is left attached, excess time will be allocated to increase key
response for the Programming Console, adversely affecting performance.

10-1-2 I/O Refreshing and Peripheral Servicing
I/O Refreshing
I/O refreshing involves cyclically transferring data with external devices using
preset words in memory. I/O refreshing includes the following:
• Refreshing between Basic I/O Units and I/O words in the CIO Area and
refreshing between SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Units and SYSMAC BUS and I/O Terminal words in the CIO Area
• Refreshing between Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, and Inner Boards,
and the words allocated to these in the CIO Area (and for CPU Bus Units,
words allocated in the DM Area)
• Refreshing Unit-specific data for Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, and
Inner Boards.

475

Section 10-1

CPU Unit Operation

All I/O refreshing is performed in the same cycle (i.e., time slicing is not used).
I/O refreshing is always performed after program execution (even in a Parallel
Processing Mode for CS1-H CPU Units).
Units

Max. data
exchange
Basic I/O Units (including C200H
Depends on the
Group-2 I/O Units)
Unit.
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Unit Depends on the
Unit.
Special I/O Words allocated in CIO
10 words/Unit
Area
(Depends on the
Units
(CS-series
Unit.)
and
UnitC200H
Depends on the
C200H)
specific DeviceNet Mas- Unit.
data
ter Unit

CS-series
CPU Bus
Units

CompoBus/S
Master Unit
Words allocated in CIO
Area
Words allocated in DM
Area
UnitController Link
specific Unit and SYSdata
MAC LINK Unit
CS-series
DeviceNet Unit

Depends on the
Unit.
25 words/Unit
100 words/Unit
Depends on the
Unit.
Depends on the
Unit.

Serial Communi- Depends on the
cations Unit
protocol macros.
Ethernet Unit
Depends on the
Unit.

Inner
Boards

476

Data exchange area
I/O Bit Area
SYSMAC BUS Area and
I/O Terminal Area
Special I/O Unit Area

Words set for remote I/O
communications (for
either fixed or user-set
allocations)
Special I/O Units Area
CS-series CPU Bus Unit
Area
CS-series CPU Bus Unit
Area
Words set for data links
(for either fixed or userset allocations)
Words set for remote I/O
communications (for
either fixed or user-set
allocations)
Communications data
set for protocol macros
Communications data for
socket services initiated
by specific control bit
operations.
Inner Board Area

Words allocated in CIO
100 words/Unit
Area
UnitSerial Communi- Depends on the Communications data
specific cations Board
protocol macros. set for protocol macros
data

Section 10-1

CPU Unit Operation
Peripheral Servicing

Peripheral servicing involves servicing non-scheduled events for external
devices. This includes both events from external devices and service requests
to external devices.
Most peripheral servicing for CS-series PLCs involved FINS commands. The
specific amount of time set in the system is allocated to each type of servicing
and executed every cycle. If all servicing cannot be completed within the allocated time, the remaining servicing is performed the next cycle.
Units
Event servicing for CSseries Special I/O Units
Event servicing for CSseries CPU Bus Units
Event servicing for
Inner Boards
Peripheral port servicing
RS-232C port servicing

Servicing
Non-scheduled servicing for FINS commands from CS-series Special I/O Units, CS-series CPU
Bus Units, and Inner Boards (e.g., requests to start external interrupt tasks)
Non-scheduled servicing for FINS commands from the CPU Unit to the above Units.

Communications port
servicing

Servicing to execute network communications, serial communications, or file memory access
for the SEND, RECV, CMND or PMCR instructions using communications ports 0 to 7 (internal
logical ports)
Servicing to execute background execution using communications ports 0 to 7 (internal logical
ports) (CS1-H CPU Unit only)
File read/write operations for Memory Cards or EM file memory.

File access servicing

Non-scheduled servicing for FINS or Host Link commands received via the peripheral or RS232C ports from Programming Devices, PTs, or host computers (e.g., requests to transfer programming, monitoring, forced-set/reset operations, or online editing
Non-scheduled servicing from the CPU Unit transmitted from the peripheral or RS-232C port
(non-solicited communications)

Note

1. CS-series Special I/O Units, CS-series CPU Bus Units, RS-232C communications ports, Inner Boards, and file servicing is allocated 4% of the cycle
time by default (the default can be changed). If servicing is separated over
many cycles, delaying completion of the servicing, set the same allocated
time (same time for all services) rather than a percentage under execute
time settings in the PLC Setup.
2. In either of the Parallel Processing Modes for the CS1-H CPU Unit, all peripheral servicing except for file access is performed in the peripheral servicing cycle.

10-1-3 Initialization at Startup
The following initializing processes will be performed once each time the
power is turned ON.
• Detect mounted Units.
• Compare the registered I/O tables and the actual Units.
• Clear the non-holding areas of I/O memory according to the status of the
IOM Hold Bit. (See note 1.)
• Clear forced status according to the status of the Forced Status Hold Bit.
(See note 2.)
• Autoboot using the autotransfer files in the Memory Card if one is
inserted.
• Perform self-diagnosis (user memory check).

477

Section 10-2

CPU Unit Operating Modes
Note

1. The I/O memory is held or cleared according to the status of the IOM Host
Bit and the setting for IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup in the PLC Setup
(read only when power is turned ON).
Auxiliary bit
PLC Setup setting
IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup
(Programming Console address:
Word 80, bit 15)

Clear
(OFF)
Hold
(ON)

IOM Hold Bit (A50012)
Clear (OFF)
Hold (ON)
At power ON: Clear
At power ON: Clear
At mode change: Clear At mode change: Hold
At power ON: Hold
At mode change: Hold

Mode Change: Between PROGRAMMING mode and RUN or MONITOR
mode
2. The forced status held or cleared according to the status of the Force Status Hold Bit and the setting for Forced Status Hold Bit Status at Startup in
the PLC Setup.
Auxiliary bit
PLC Setup setting
Forced Status Hold
Bit Status at Startup
(Programming Console address:
Word 80, bit 14)

Forced Status Hold Bit (A50013)
Clear (OFF)
Hold (ON)
Clear At power ON: Clear
At power ON: Clear
(OFF) At mode change: Clear At mode change: Hold
Hold
At power ON: Hold
(ON)
At mode change: Hold

Mode Change: Between PROGRAMMING mode and RUN or MONITOR
mode
3. If the CPU Unit is turned OFF after online editing before the backup process has been competed, an attempt will be made to recover the program
when power is turned ON again. The BKUP indicator will light during this
process. Refer to the CS/CJ Series Programming Manual (W394) for details.

10-2 CPU Unit Operating Modes
10-2-1 Operating Modes
The CPU Unit has three operating modes that control the entire user program
and are common to all tasks.

478

PROGRAM:

Programs are not executed and preparations, such as creating I/O tables, initializing the PLC Setup and other settings,
transferring programs, checking programs, force-setting and
force-resetting can be executed prior to program execution.

MONITOR:

Programs are executed, but some operations, such as online
editing, forced-set/reset, and changes to present values in I/O
memory, are enabled for trial operation and other adjustments.

RUN:

Programs are executed and some operations are disabled.

Section 10-2

CPU Unit Operating Modes

10-2-2 Status and Operations in Each Operating Mode
PROGRAM, RUN, and MONITOR are the three operating modes available in
the CPU Unit. The following lists status and operations for each mode.
Overall Operation
Mode

Program
(See note)

I/O refresh

PROGRAM
RUN

Stopped
Executed

Executed
Executed

MONITOR

Executed

External outputs

OFF
Controlled by program
Controlled by program

I/O Memory
Non-holding
Holding areas
areas
Clear
Hold
Controlled by program
Controlled by program

Programming Console Operations
Mode

PROGRAM
MONITOR
RUN

Monitor I/O
Memory

OK
OK
OK

Mode

Monitor
Program

OK
OK
OK

PLC Setup

Modify
Program

Transfer Program
Check
Program
Programming
PLC to
Programming Device to PLC
Device
OK
OK
OK
OK
X
X
OK
X
X
Forceset/reset

Create I/O
Table

OK
X
X

PROGRAM

Changing
Changing
Changing I/O
Timer/Counter Timer/Counter
Memory PV
SV
PV
OK
OK
OK

RUN
MONITOR

X
X

X
OK

Note The following table shows the relationship of operating modes to tasks.
Mode
PROGRAM
RUN

MONITOR

Cyclic task status

Interrupt task
status
Disabled status (INI)
Stopped
• Any task that has not yet been executed, will be in disabled status (INI).
Executed if inter• A task will go to READY status if the task is set to go to READY status at star- rupt condition is
met.
tup or the TASK ON (TKON) instruction has been executed for it.
• A task in READY status will be executed (RUN status) when it obtains the
right to execute.
• A status will go to Standby status if a READY task is put into Standby status
by a TASK OFF (TKOF) instruction.

479

Section 10-3

Power OFF Operation
Operating Mode Changes and I/O Memory
Mode Changes

Non-holding areas
I/O bits
Data Link bits
CPU Bus Unit bits
Special I/O Unit bits
Inner Board bits
SYSMAC BUS bits
I/O Terminal bits
C200H Special I/O Unit bits
DeviceNet bits
Work bits
Timer PV/Completion Flags
Index Registers
Data Registers
Task Flags
(Auxiliary Area bits/words are holding
or non-holding depending on the
address.)
RUN or MONITOR to PROGRAM Cleared (See note 1.)
PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR Cleared (See note 1.)
RUN to MONITOR or
Held (See note 2.)
MONITOR to RUN
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Note

Holding Areas
•
•
•
•

HR Area
DM Area
EM Area
Counter PV and Completion Flags
(Auxiliary Area bits/words are holding
or non-holding depending on the
address.)

Held
Held
Held

1. The following processing is performed depending on the status of the I/O
Memory Hold Bit. Output from Output Units will be turned OFF when operation stops even if I/O bit status is held in the CPU Unit.
2. The cycle time will increase by approximately 10 ms when the operating
mode is changed from MONITOR to RUN mode. This will not, however,
cause an error for exceeding the maximum cycle time limit.

I/O Memory
I/O Memory
Hold Bit status Mode changed
Operation stopped
(A50012)
between
FALS
Fatal error
PROGRAM
executed
other than
and RUN/
FALS
MONITOR
OFF
Cleared
Cleared
Held
ON
Held
Held
Held

Output bits allocated to Output Units
Operation stopped
Mode changed
between
FALS
Fatal error
PROGRAM
executed
other than
and RUN/
FALS
MONITOR
OFF
OFF
OFF
Held
OFF
OFF

Note Refer to 9-2 I/O Memory Areas for more details on I/O Memory.

10-3 Power OFF Operation
10-3-1 Overview
The following processing is performed if CPU Unit power is turned OFF.
Power OFF processing will be performed if the power supply falls below 85%
of the rated voltage while the CPU Unit is in RUN or MONITOR mode.
1,2,3...

1. The CPU Unit will stop.
2. Outputs from all Output Units will be turned OFF.

480

Section 10-3

Power OFF Operation

Note All output will turn OFF despite an I/O Memory Hold Bit or I/O Memory Hold
Bit at power ON settings in the PLC Setup.
85% of the rated voltage:
AC power: 85 V for a 100 V AC system and 170 V for a 200 V AC system
DC power: 19.2 V DC
The following processing will be performed if power drops only momentarily
(momentary power interruption).
1,2,3...

1. The system will continue to run unconditionally if the momentary power interruption lasts less than 10 ms, i.e., the time it takes the rated voltage at
85% or less to return to 85% or higher is less than 10 ms.
2. A momentary power interruption that lasts more than 10 ms but less than
25 ms is difficult to determine and a power interruption may or may not be
detected.
3. The system will stop unconditionally if the momentary power interruption
lasts more than 25 ms.
If operation stops under the conditions given in items 2 and 3 above, the timing used to stop operation (or the timing used to start execution of the Power
OFF Interrupt Task) can be delayed by setting the Power OFF Detection Delay
Time (0 to 10 ms) in the PLC Setup. Operation, however, will always be
stopped 10 ms after detecting a momentary power interruption regardless of
the setting in the PLC Setup.

85% of the rated voltage or less
10 ms

25 ms

Time

0 to 10 ms
Momentary power
interruption not
detected and operation continues.
Power supply
voltage

Power supply
voltage

10 to 15 ms

Operation will continue or
stop depending on whether
or not a momentary power
interruption is detected.

25 ms and longer

Power supply
voltage
Momentary power interruption detected
and operation stops.

Note The above timing chart shows an example when the power OFF detection
time is set to 0 ms (the default value).

481

Section 10-3

Power OFF Operation

The following timing chart shows the CPU Unit power OFF operation in more
detail.
Power OFF Timing Chart
Operation always stopped
at this point regardless.
85% of rated
voltage
Holding time for 5 V internal
power supply after power
OFF detection: 10 ms.

Power OFF detected Power OFF confirmed
Power OFF detection time: Default is
10 to 25 ms (Power OFF undetermined)

Power OFF
detected signal

Power OFF Detection
Delay Time: 0 to
10 ms (set in PLC Setup)

Cyclic tasks or interrupt tasks
not associated with power OFF

Program execution
status

Processing time after
power OFF is confirmed:
10 ms minus Power OFF
Detection Delay Time
Note:The interrupt task
execution time must be
less than or equal to processing time after power
OFF is confirmed.

Power OFF
interrupt task Stopped

CPU reset signal

Power OFF Detection Time
The time it takes to detect power OFF after the power supply falls below 85%
of the rated voltage.
Power OFF Detection Delay Time
The delay time after power OFF is detected until it is confirmed. This can be
set in the PLC Setup within a range from 0 to 10 ms. (The default is 0 ms.)
Power Holding Time
The amount of time (fixed at 10 ms) that 5 V will be held internally after power
shuts OFF. The time that it takes for the power OFF interrupt task to execute
must not exceed 10 ms minus the Power OFF Detection Delay Time (processing time after power OFF is confirmed). The power OFF interrupt task will be
ended even if it has not been completely executed the moment this time
expires.

Description of Operation
1,2,3...

1. Power OFF will be detected if the 100 to 120 V AC, 200 to 240 V AC or 24 V
DC power supply falls below 85% of the rated voltage for the power OFF
detection time (somewhere between 10 to 25 ms).
2. If the Power OFF Detection Delay Time is set (0 to 10 ms) in the PLC Setup, then the following operations will be performed when the set time expires.
a) If the power OFF interrupt task is disabled (default PLC Setup setting)
The CPU reset signal will turn ON and the CPU will be reset immediately.
b) If the power OFF interrupt task is enabled (in the PLC Setup), the CPU
reset signal will turn ON and the CPU will be reset after the power OFF
interrupt task has been executed. Make sure that the power OFF interrupt task will finish executing within 10 ms minus the Power OFF Detection Delay Time = processing time after power OFF. The 5-V
internal power supply will be maintained only for 10 ms after power
OFF is detected.

482

Section 10-3

Power OFF Operation

10-3-2 Instruction Execution for Power Interruptions
If power is interrupted and the interruption is confirmed when the CPU Unit is
operating in RUN or MONITOR mode, the instruction currently being executed
will be completed (see note) and the following power interruption processing
will be performed.
• If the power OFF interrupt task has not been enabled, the CPU Unit will
be reset immediately.
• If the power OFF interrupt task has been enabled, the task will be executed and then the CPU Unit will be reset immediately.
The power OFF interrupt task is enable and disabled in the PLC Setup.
Note The current instruction can be completed only when the time required to complete execution is less than or equal to the processing time after power interruption detection (10 ms − power interruption detection delay time). If the
instruction is not completed within this time, it will be interrupted and the
above processing will be performed.

Disabling Power Interruption Processing in the Program
With CS1-H CPU Units, if the power OFF interrupt task is disabled, areas of
the program can be protected from power interruptions so that the instructions
will be executed before the CPU Unit performs power OFF processing even if
the power supply is interrupted. This is achieved by using the DISABLE
INTERRUPTS (DI(693)) and ENABLE INTERRUPTS (EI(694)) instructions.
The following procedure is used.
1,2,3...

1. Insert DI(693) before the program section to be protected to disable interrupts and then place EI(694) after the section to enable interrupts.
W0.00
DI

Interrupt tasks disabled.

Power interruption
confirmed.
Instructions that cannot be
interrupted when a power
interruption occurs

Instructions executed here.

Interrupt tasks enabled.

2. Set the Disable Setting for Power OFF Interrupts in A530 to A5A5 hex to
enable disabling power interruption processing.
Note A530 is normally cleared when power is turned OFF. To prevent this,
the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) must be turned ON and the PLC Setup
must be set to maintain the setting of the IOM Hold Bit at Startup, or
the following type of instruction must be included at the beginning of
the program to set A530 to A5A5 hex.
A20011

First Cycle Flag

MOV
#A5A5
A530

Set A530 to A5A5 hex at the
beginning of the program to enable
disabling power interruption
processing.

3. Disable the Power OFF Interrupt Task in the PLC Setup.

483

Section 10-3

Power OFF Operation

With the above procedure, all instructions between DI(693) and EI(694) (or
END) will be completed (see note 1) before the Power OFF Interrupt is executed even if the power interruption occurs while executing the instructions
between DI(693) and EI(694).
Note

1. The protected instructions can be completed only when the time required
to complete execution is less than or equal to the processing time after
power interruption detection (10 ms − power interruption detection delay
time). If the instructions is not completed within this time, they will be interrupted and the above processing will be performed.
2. If the Power OFF Interrupt Task is not disabled in the PLC Setup, the Power
OFF Interrupt Task will be executed, and the CPU Unit will be reset without
executing the protected instructions as soon as the power interruption is
detected.
3. If a power interrupt is detected while DI(693) is being executed, the CPU
Unit will be reset without executing the protected instructions.
Operation always stopped
at this point regardless.

85% of rated
voltage
Holding time for 5 V internal
power supply after power
OFF detection: 10 ms.

Power OFF detected Power OFF confirmed
Power OFF
detected signal

Program execution
status

Power OFF
detection time:
Default is 10 to 25 ms
(Power OFF undetermined)

Power OFF Detection
Delay Time: 0 to
10 ms (set in PLC Setup)

Cyclic tasks or interrupt tasks
not associated with power OFF

DI(693)

EI(694)

Stopped

Instructions between
DI(693) and EI(694)
are executed.

CPU reset signal

Interrupt processing is performed according to the contents of A530 and the
PLC Setup as shown below.
A530

Power OFF
Disabled
Interrupt Task
(PLC Setup)
Enabled

484

Other
A5A5 hex (disabling
power interrupt
processing)
All instructions between
Execution of the current
DI(693) and EI(694) are
instruction is completed
executed and the CPU Unit and the CPU Unit is reset.
is reset.
Execution of the current instruction is completed, the
Power OFF Interrupt Task is executed, and the CPU Unit
is reset.

Section 10-4

Computing the Cycle Time

10-4 Computing the Cycle Time
10-4-1 CPU Unit Operation Flowchart
The CS-series CPU Units process data in repeating cycles from the overseeing processing up to peripheral servicing as shown in the following diagram.

Normal Processing Mode

Power ON
Startup initialization
Checks Unit
connection status.

Checks hardware
and user program
memory

Overseeing processing

Check OK?
YES

PLC cycle
time

Sets error flags

Flashing (nonfatal error)
ERR/ALM indicator
ON or Flashing?

Executes user program (i.e., executes
READY cyclic tasks).

ON (fatal error)
NO

Program execution

End of program?
YES
Resets watchdog
timer and waits until the set cycle
time has elapsed

Cycle time calculation

Calculates cycle
time

Performs I/O refreshing
I/O refreshing
Services Programming Devices
Peripheral servicing

485

Section 10-4

Computing the Cycle Time
Parallel Processing Mode

Startup
initialization

Power ON

Checks Unit
connection status
Program Execution
Cycle

Peripheral
Servicing Cycle

Check hardware,
etc.

Set error flags.
Flashing:
Non-fatal
error

Services
peripherals.

Execute user
program (i.e., READY
cyclic tasks).

Lit: Fatal error
Program
completed?

Program
execution

ERR/ALM
indicator lit or
flashing

Program execution
cycle time

Check OK?

Overseeing
processing

Check OK?

Peripheral
servicing

Overseeing
processing

Check user program
memory, etc.

Services peripherals.

I/O refreshing

Refreshes I/O.

Peripheral
servicing

Calculates cycle
time.

Cycle time
calculations

YES

Wait for specified
cycle time.

10-4-2 Cycle Time Overview
Normal Processing Mode
The cycle time depends on the following conditions.
• Type and number of instructions in the user program (in all cyclic tasks
that are executed during a cycle, and within interrupt tasks for which the
execution conditions have been satisfied).
• Type and number of Basic I/O Units
• Number of SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Units and number of I/O
points on the Slaves
• Type and number of Special I/O Units, CS-series CPU Bus Units, Inner
Boards, and type of services being executed.
• Specific servicing for the following Units/Boards
• Data link refreshing and the number of data link words for Controller
Link and SYSMAC LINK Units

486

Section 10-4

Computing the Cycle Time

• Remote I/O for DeviceNet (Master) Units and the number of remote I/O
words
• Use of protocol macros and the largest communications message
• Socket services for specific control bits for Ethernet Units and the number of send/receive words
• Fixed cycle time setting in the PLC Setup
• File access in file memory, and the amount of data transferred to/from file
memory
• Event servicing for Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, Inner Boards, and
communications ports
• Use of peripheral and RS-232C ports
• Fixed peripheral servicing time in the PLC Setup
Note

1. The cycle time is not affected by the number of tasks that are used in the
user program. The tasks that affect the cycle time are those cyclic tasks
that are READY in the cycle.
2. When the mode is switched from MONITOR mode to RUN mode, the cycle
time will be extended by 10 ms (this will not, however, take the cycle time
over its limit).
The cycle time is the total time required for the PLC to perform the 5 operations shown in the following tables.
Cycle time = (1) + (2) + (3) + (4) + (5)

1: Overseeing
Details
Checks the I/O bus and user program memory, checks for
battery errors and refreshes the clock.

Processing time and fluctuation cause
CS1-H CPU Unit: 0.3 ms

2: Program Execution
Details
Executes the user program, and calculates the total time
time taken for the instructions to execute the program.

Processing time and fluctuation cause
Total instruction execution time

3: Cycle Time Calculation
Details
Processing time and fluctuation cause
Waits for the specified cycle time to elapse when a minimum When the cycle time is not fixed, the time for step 3 is
(fixed) cycle time has been set in the PLC Setup.
approximately 0.
When the cycle time is fixed, the time for step 3 is the preset
Calculates the cycle time.
fixed cycle time minus the actual cycle time ((1) + (2) + (4) +
(5)).

487

Computing the Cycle Time

Section 10-4

4: I/O Refreshing
Basic I/O Units
(including
C200H Group2 I/O Units)
SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O
Master Unit

Details
Processing time and fluctuation cause
Basic I/O Units are refreshed. Outputs from I/O refresh time for each Unit multiplied by the number of
the CPU Unit to the I/O Unit are refreshed Units used.
first for each Unit, and then inputs.

SYSMAC BUS remote I/O is refreshed.
Outputs from the CPU Unit to remote I/O
are refreshed first for each Unit, and then
inputs.
Special I/O
Words allocated in CIO Area
Units
Unit- specific
DeviceNet remote I/O
data
for C200H DeviceNet
Master Units and CompoBus/S remote I/O
CPU Bus Units Words allocated in CIO and DM Areas
Unit- specific
data

Inner Boards

I/O refresh time for SYSMAC BUS remote I/O system.

I/O refresh time for each Unit multiplied by the number of
Units used.

I/O refresh time for each Unit multiplied by the number of
Units used.
I/O refresh time for each Unit multiplied by the number of
Units used.

Data links for Controller Link and SYSMAC
LINK Units, DeviceNet
remote I/O for CSseries DeviceNet Units,
send/receive data for
protocol macros, and
socket services for specific control bits for
Ethernet Units
Words allocated in Inner Board Area
I/O refresh time for each Unit multiplied by the number of
Unit- specific
Example: Send/receive Units used.
data
data for protocol macros,

5: Peripheral Servicing
Details
Services events for CS-series Special I/O
Units.

Processing time and fluctuation cause
If a uniform peripheral servicing time hasn’t been set in the PLC Setup for
this servicing, 4% of the previous cycle’s cycle time (calculated in step (3))
will be allowed for peripheral servicing.
Note Peripheral servicing does not include
If a uniform peripheral servicing time has been set in the PLC Setup, servicI/O refreshing,
ing will be performed for the set time. At least 0.1 ms, however, will be serviced whether the peripheral servicing time is set or not.
If no Units are mounted, the servicing time is 0 ms.
Services events for CS-series CPU Bus
Same as above.
Units.
Note Peripheral servicing does not include
I/O refreshing.
Services events for peripheral ports.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time hasn’t been set in the PLC Setup for
this servicing, 4% of the previous cycle’s cycle time (calculated in step (3))
will be allowed for peripheral servicing.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time has been set in the PLC Setup, servicing will be performed for the set time. At least 0.1 ms, however, will be serviced whether the peripheral servicing time is set or not.
If the ports are not connected, the servicing time is 0 ms.
Services RS-232C ports.
Same as above.

488

Section 10-4

Computing the Cycle Time
Details
Services Inner Board events.

Services file access (Memory Card or EM
file memory).

Services communications ports.

Processing time and fluctuation cause
If a uniform peripheral servicing time hasn’t been set in the PLC Setup for
this servicing, 4% of the previous cycle’s cycle time (calculated in step (3))
will be allowed for peripheral servicing.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time has been set in the PLC Setup, servicing will be performed for the set time. At least 0.1 ms, however, will be serviced whether the peripheral servicing time is set or not.
If no Inner Boards are mounted, the servicing time is 0 ms.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time hasn’t been set in the PLC Setup for
this servicing, 4% of the previous cycle’s cycle time (calculated in step (3))
will be allowed for peripheral servicing.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time has been set in the PLC Setup, servicing will be performed for the set time. At least 0.1 ms, however, will be serviced whether the peripheral servicing time is set or not.
If there is no file access, the servicing time is 0 ms.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time hasn’t been set in the PLC Setup for
this servicing, 4% of the previous cycle’s cycle time (calculated in step (3))
will be allowed for peripheral servicing.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time has been set in the PLC Setup, servicing will be performed for the set time. At least 0.1 ms, however, will be serviced whether the peripheral servicing time is set or not.
If no communications ports are used, the servicing time is 0 ms.

Parallel Processing with Asynchronous Memory Access
Program Execution Cycle

The program execution cycle time depends on the following conditions.
• Type and number of instructions in the user program (in all cyclic tasks
that are executed during a cycle, and within interrupt tasks for which the
execution conditions have been satisfied).
• Type and number of Basic I/O Units
• Number of SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Units and number of I/O
points on the Slaves
• Type and number of Special I/O Units, CS-series CPU Bus Units, Inner
Boards, and type of services being executed.
• Specific servicing for the following Units/Boards
• Data link refreshing and the number of data link words for Controller
Link and SYSMAC LINK Units
• Remote I/O for DeviceNet (Master) Units and the number of remote I/O
words
• Use of protocol macros and the largest communications message
• Socket services for specific control bits for Ethernet Units and the number of send/receive words
• Fixed cycle time setting in the PLC Setup
• File access in file memory, and the amount of data transferred to/from file
memory
• Fixed peripheral servicing time in the PLC Setup
The program execution cycle time is the total time required for the PLC to perform the 5 operations shown in the following tables.

489

Section 10-4

Computing the Cycle Time
Cycle time = (1) + (2) + (3) + (4) + (5)
Details
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Peripheral Servicing Cycle
Time

Overseeing
Program execution
Cycle time calculation
I/O refreshing
Partial peripheral
servicing

Processing time and
fluctuation cause
I/O bus check, etc.
0.3 ms
Same as for Normal Mode. Same as for Normal Mode.
Waits for the specified
Same as for Normal Mode.
cycle time.
Same as for Normal ProSame as for Normal Processing Mode.
cessing Mode.
Servicing file access
Same as for Normal Processing Mode.

The peripheral servicing execution cycle time depends on the following conditions.
• Type and number of Special I/O Units, CS-series CPU Bus Units, Inner
Boards, and type of services being executed.
• Type and frequency of event servicing requiring communications ports.
• Use of peripheral and RS-232C ports
The peripheral servicing cycle time is the total time required for the PLC to
perform the 5 operations shown in the following tables.
Cycle time = (1) + (2)
Name
(1)
(2)

Note

Overseeing
processing
Peripheral
servicing

Processing
Checks user program memory,
checks for battery errors, etc.
Events with CS-series
Performs
services for Special I/O Units (does
not include I/O refreshthe events
ing)
give at the
right, includ- Events with CS-series
ing I/O
CPU Bus Units (does
memory
not include I/O refreshaccess.
ing)
Peripheral port events
RS-232C port events
Events with Inner
Boards
Events using communications ports

Processing time and
fluctuation cause
0.2 ms
1.0 ms for each type of
service
If servicing ends before
1 ms has expired, the
next type of servicing
will be started immediately without waiting.

1. The cycle time display on a Programming Device is the Program Execution
Cycle Time.
2. The peripheral service cycle time varies with the event load and number of
Units that are mounted. In a Parallel Processing Mode, however, this variation will not affect the program execution cycle time.

Parallel Processing with Synchronous Memory Access
Program Execution Cycle

The program execution cycle time depends on the same conditions as the
Normal Mode. Partial peripheral servicing ((5) below), however, is restricted to
servicing for file and I/O memory access.
The program execution cycle time is the total time required for the PLC to perform the 5 operations shown in the following tables.

490

Section 10-4

Computing the Cycle Time
Cycle time = (1) + (2) + (3) + (4) + (5)
Details

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Peripheral Servicing Cycle
Time

Processing time and
fluctuation cause
Overseeing
I/O bus check, etc.
0.3 ms
Program exe- Same as for Normal Mode.
Same as for Normal
cution
Mode.
Cycle time
Waits for the specified cycle time.
Same as for Normal
calculation
Mode.
I/O refreshing Same as for Normal Processing Mode. Same as for Normal
Mode.
Servicing file access (Memory Card or Same as for Normal
Partial
EM file memory)
Mode.
peripheral
servicing
Events with CS-series
Performs
services for Special I/O Units (does
the events not include I/O refreshing)
give at the Events with CS-series
right that
CPU Bus Units (does not
requires
include I/O refreshing)
I/O memory access Peripheral port events
RS-232C port events
Events with Inner Boards
Events using communications ports

The peripheral servicing execution cycle time depends on the same conditions as the Parallel Processing with Asynchronous Memory Access. Peripheral servicing ((2) below), however, is restricted to servicing that does not
access I/O memory.
The peripheral servicing cycle time is the total time required for the PLC to
perform the 2 operations shown in the following tables.
Cycle time = (1) + (2)
Name
(1)
(2)

Note

Overseeing
processing
Peripheral
servicing

Processing
Checks user program memory,
checks for battery errors, etc.
Events with CS-series
Performs
services for Special I/O Units (does
not include I/O refreshthe events
ing)
give at the
right,
Events with CS-series
excluding
CPU Bus Units (does
those that
not include I/O refreshrequire I/O
ing)
memory
Peripheral port events
access.
RS-232C port events
Events with Inner
Boards
Events using communications ports

Processing time and
fluctuation cause
0.2 ms
1.0 ms for each type of
service
If servicing ends before
1 ms has expired, the
next type of servicing
will be started immediately without waiting.

491

Section 10-4

Computing the Cycle Time

10-4-3 I/O Unit Refresh Times for Individual Units and Boards
Basic I/O Unit Refresh
Unit
C200H
Basic I/O
Units

C200H
Group-2
High-density I/O Unit
(classified
as Basic I/O
Units)

492

Name

Model

I/O refresh
time per Unit

8-point Input Unit
8-point Output Unit
12-point Output Unit
16-point Input Unit
16-point Output Unit
Interrupt Input Unit
32-point Input Unit
32-point Output Unit
64-point Input Unit
64-point Output Unit
32-point B7A Input Units
32-point B7A Output Units
16/16-point B7A I/O Units

C200H-ID211
C200H-OC221
C200H-OA224
C200H-ID212
C200H-OD212
C200HS-INT01
C200H-ID216
C200H-OD218
C200H-ID217
C200H-OD219
C200H-B7A12
C200H-B7A02
C200H-B7A21

0.03 ms
0.03 ms
0.03 ms
0.02 ms
0.03 ms
0.10 ms
0.10 ms
0.10 ms
0.20 ms
0.13 ms
0.1 ms
0.1 ms
0.1 ms

32/32-point B7A I/O Units

C200H-B7A22

0.2 ms

Section 10-4

Computing the Cycle Time
Unit
CS-series
Basic I/O
Units

Name

Model

16-point DC Input Unit

CS1W-ID211

16-point AC Input Unit

CS1W-IA111/211

8/16-point Relay Output Unit

CS1W-OC201/211

8/16-point Triac Output Unit

CS1W-OA201/211

16-point Transistor Output Unit, CS1W-OD211
sinking outputs
16-point Transistor Output Unit, CS1W-OD212
sourcing outputs
16-point Interrupt Input Unit
CS1W-INT01
16-point High-speed Input Unit CS1W-IDP01
32-point DC Input Unit

CS1W-ID231

64-point DC Input Unit

CS1W-ID261

96-point DC Input Unit

CS1W-ID291

32-point Transistor Output Unit,
sinking outputs
32-point Transistor Output Unit,
sourcing outputs
64-point Transistor Output Unit,
sinking outputs
64-point Transistor Output Unit,
sourcing outputs
96-point Transistor Output Unit,
sinking outputs
96-point Transistor Output Unit,
sourcing outputs
32-point DC Input/32-point
Transistor Output Unit, sourcing outputs
32-point DC Input/32-point
Transistor Output Unit, sinking
outputs
48-point DC Input/48-point
Transistor Output Unit, sinking
outputs
48-point DC Input/48-point
Transistor Output Unit, sourcing outputs
32-point B7A Input Unit

CS1W-OD231

64-point B7A Output Unit

CS1W-B7A02

16-point Input/16-point Output
B7A I/O Unit
32-point Input/32-point Output
B7A I/O Unit

CS1W-B7A21

CS1W-OD232
CS1W-OD261
CS1W-OD262
CS1W-OD291
CS1W-OD292
CS1W-MD261

I/O refresh
time per Unit
0.004 ms
(See note.)
0.004 ms
(See note.)
0.004 ms
(See note.)
0.004 ms
(See note.)
0.004 ms
(See note.)
0.004 ms
(See note.)
0.004 ms
(See note.)
0.004 ms
(See note.)
0.007 ms
(See note.)
0.014 ms
(See note.)
0.02 ms
(See note.)
0.008 ms
(See note.)
0.008 ms
(See note.)
0.016 ms
(See note.)
0.016 ms
(See note.)
0.02 ms
(See note.)
0.02 ms
(See note.)
0.015 ms
(See note.)

CS1W-MD262

0.015 ms
(See note.)

CS1W-MD291

0.02 ms
(See note.)

CS1W-MD292

0.02 ms
(See note.)

CS1W-B7A12

0.1 ms
(See note.)
0.1 ms
(See note.)
0.1 ms
(See note.)
0.2 ms
(See note.)

CS1W-B7A22

493

Section 10-4

Computing the Cycle Time

Note Longer I/O refresh times will be required according to the distance from the
CPU Rack to the Unit when these Units are mounted to CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks. Multiply the values given in the table by the factors
on line *1 in the following graph.
I/O Unit Refresh Time Coefficients for Units on CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks
Factor
(*3)

(*1)
(*2)

Distance to Unit (m)

Special I/O Unit Refresh
Unit
C200H Special I/O
Units

Name
High-density I/O
Units
Temperature Control Unit
Heat/Cool Temperature Control Unit
Temperature Sensor Unit
PID Control Unit
ASCII Unit

Analog Input Unit

Analog Output Unit

494

Model
C200H-MD215
C200H-MD501
C200H-TC@@@

I/O refresh time
per Unit
0.5 ms
1.5 ms
2.6 ms

C200H-TV@@@

2.6 ms

C200H-TS@@@

1.0 ms

C200H-PID@@
C200H-ASC02
C200HASC11/21/31
C200H-AD001
C200H-AD002
C200H-AD003
C200H-DA001/002
C200H-DA003/004

2.6 ms
1.8 ms
0.4 ms
1.0 ms
1.4 ms
0.7 ms
0.9 ms
0.6 ms

Analog I/O Unit
High-speed
Counter Unit

C200H-MAD01
C200H-CT001V1/CT002
C200H-CT021

0.6 ms
2.4 ms

Position Control
Unit

C200H-NC111/112

2.2 ms
(4.0 ms for read)

0.5 ms

Section 10-4

Computing the Cycle Time
Unit
C200H Special I/O
Units, continued

Name
Position Control
Unit, continued

Model
C200H-NC211
C200HW-NC113

C200HW-NC213

C200HW-NC413

Motion Control Unit C200H-MC221
ID Sensor Unit

C200H-IDS01V1/21
Cam Positioner Unit C200H-CP114
Voice Unit
C200H-OV001
Fuzzy Logic Unit
C200H-FZ001
PC Link Unit
C200H-LK401

SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Master
Unit

C200H-RM201
C200H-RM001-V1

C200H DeviceNet
Master Unit

C200HW-DRM21V1

C200H DeviceNet
I/O Link Unit

C200HW-DRT21V1

CompoBus/S Master Unit

C200HW-SRM21V1

I/O refresh time
per Unit
5.1 ms
(6.7 ms for read)
2.0 ms
(2.9 ms for read or
write)
2.3 ms
(3.2 ms for read or
write)
4.3 ms
(5.5 ms for read or
write)
1.2 ms
(2.1 ms for read)
1.8 ms
2.0 ms
3.4 ms
1.8 ms
0.3 ms (connected
without data links
operating)
4.1 ms (for 256 data
link points)
7.4 ms (for 512 data
link points)
1.1 ms x No. of
Units + 0.17 x N,
where N is the No.
of words allocated
to slaves
1.72 ms + 0.0022 ×
number of allocated words
1.72 ms + 0.0022 ×
number of allocated words
0.4 ms (for the maximum of 16 slaves)
0.9 ms (for the maximum of 32 slaves)

495

Section 10-4

Computing the Cycle Time
Unit

CS-series
Special I/O
Units

Name

Analog I/O Unit
Analog Input Unit
Analog Output Unit
Isolated Thermocouple
Input Unit
Isolated Resistance Thermometer Input Unit
Isolated Ni508.4Ω Resistance Thermometer Input
Unit
Isolated 2-wire Transmission Device Input Unit
Isolated DC Input Unit
Isolated Control Output Unit
(Analog Output Unit)
Power Transducer Input
Unit
DC Input Unit (100 mA)
Isolated Pulse Input Unit
Position Control Unit

Model

CS1W-MAD44
CS1W-AD041/081-V1
CS1W-AD161
CS1W-DA041/08V/08C
CS1W-PTS01-V1

0.12 ms
0.12 ms
0.11 ms
0.12 ms
0.16 ms

When a Longdistance
Expansion Rack is
used (See note.)
0.2 ms × *2
0.2 ms × *2
0.3 ms × *2
0.2 ms × *2
0.3 ms × *2

CS1W-PTS02-V1

0.16 ms

0.3 ms × *2

CS1W-PTS03

0.16 ms

0.3 ms × *2

CS1W-PTW01

0.16 ms

0.3 ms × *2

CS1W-PDC01
CS1W-PMV01

0.16 ms
0.16 ms

0.3 ms × *2
0.3 ms × *2

CS1W-PTR01

0.16 ms

0.3 ms × *2

CS1W-PTR02
CS1W-PPS01
CS1W-NC113/133

0.16 ms
0.16 ms
0.29 ms (+ 0.7 ms for
each instruction (IOWR/
IORD) used to transfer
data)
0.32 ms (+ 0.7 ms for
each instruction (IOWR/
IORD) used to transfer
data)
0.41 ms (+ 0.6 ms for
each instruction (IOWR/
IORD) used to transfer
data)
0.14 ms
0.32 ms
0.42 ms
0.2 ms (+ 0.3 ms if DM
Area or LR Area is used
for data exchange with
CPU Unit)
0.189 ms

0.3 ms × *2
0.3 ms × *2
Multiply times at left
by factor *2 (See
note.)

CS1W-NC213/233

CS1W-NC413/433

High-speed Counter Unit
Motion Control Unit
Customizable Counter Unit

CompoNet Master Unit

CS1W-CT021/041
CS1W-MC221
CS1W-MC421
CS1W-HIO01
CS1W-HCP22
CS1W-HCA22
CS1WCRM21

Communications mode No. 0
Communications mode No. 1
Communications mode No. 2
Communications mode No. 3
Communications mode No. 8

I/O refresh time per Unit
CS1-H

0.211 ms

0.2 ms × *2
0.8 ms × *2
0.8 ms × *2
Multiply times at left
by factor *2 (See
note.)
Multiply times at left
by factor *2 (See
note.)

0.233 ms
0.289 ms
0.109 + (0.0014 × No. of
allocated words) ms

Note Longer increases in the cycle time will occur according to the distance from
the CPU Rack to the Unit when these Units are mounted to CS-series Longdistance Expansion Racks. Multiply the values given in the table by the factors
on line *2 in the graph on page 494 for the increases for data link words and
send/receive words.

496

Section 10-4

Computing the Cycle Time
Increase in Cycle Time Caused by CPU Bus Units
Name
Controller Link Unit

Model
CS1WCLK11/21
(-V1) or
CS1WCLK23

Increase
CS1-H: 0.1 ms
(See note 1.)
With Long-distance Expansion Rack:
0.2 ms × factor *2

CS1WCLK12/52
(-V1) or
CS1WCLK13/53

CS1-H: 0.1 ms
(See note 1.)
With Long-distance Expansion Rack:
0.2 ms × factor *2

SYSMAC LINK

CS1WSLK11/21

Serial Communications
Unit

CS1WSCU21V1

CS1-H: 0.1 ms
(See note 1.)
With Long-distance Expansion Rack:
0.2 ms × factor *2
CS1-H: 0.22 ms
(See note 1.)
With Long-distance Expansion Rack:
0.2 ms × factor *2

DeviceNet Unit

CS1WDRM21V1

Ethernet Unit

CS1-H: 0.4 ms + 0.7 µs for each allocated word
(See note 1.)
With Long-distance Expansion Rack:
(0.7 ms + (number of allocated words ×
1 µs)) × factor *3
CS1-H: 0.1 ms
CS1WETN01/11 (See note 1.)
/21
With Long-distance Expansion Rack:
0.2 ms × factor *2

PROFIBUS-DP Master
Unit

CS1WPRM21

CS1-H: 0.4 ms + 0.7 µs for each allocated word

Loop Control Unit

CS1WLC001

CS1-H: 0.1 ms
(See note 1.)
With Long-distance Expansion Rack:
0.2 × factor *2

Note

Remarks
There will be an increase of 0.1 ms +
0.7 µs x number of data link words for
CS1-H CPU Units. (See note 2.)
With Long-distance Expansion Rack:
(1.5 ms + (number of send words × 1 µs))
× factor *3
There will be an additional increase of the
event execution times when message
services are used.

There will be an increase of up to the following time when a protocol macro is
executed:
CS1-H CPU Units: 0.1 ms + 0.7 µs ×
maximum number of data words sent or
received (0 to 500 words)
With Long-distance Expansion Rack:
(1.3 ms + (max. number of send/receive
words × 1 µs)) × factor *3
Max. number of send/receive words = 0
to 500 words
There will be an increase of the event
execution times when Host Links or 1:N
NT Links are used.
---

If socket services are executed with software switches, there will be an increase
of 1.4 µs × the number of bytes
sent/received for CS1-H CPU Units. (See
note 2.)
With Long-distance Expansion Rack:
(number of send or receive bytes × 2 µs)
× factor *3
There will be an increase of the event
execution times when FINS communications services, socket services for CMND
instructions, or FTP services are performed.
Include all words allocated to the slaves,
including unused ones.
For FINS communications with the Unit,
add the number of communications
words to the calculations on the left.
---

1. The times given show the performance of the CPU6@H.

497

Section 10-4

Computing the Cycle Time

2. Longer increases in the cycle time will occur according to the distance from
the CPU Rack to the Unit when these Units are mounted to CS-series
Long-distance Expansion Racks. Multiply the values given in the table by
the factors on line *2 in the graph on page 494 for the increases and by the
factors on line *3 for the additional increases for data link words and
send/receive words
Increase in Cycle Time Caused by Inner Board
Name
Serial Communications
Board

Model
Increase
Remarks
CS1WCS1-H: 0.22 ms There will be an increase of up to the
SCB21/41
following time when a protocol macro is
-V1
executed:
CS1-H CPU Units: 0.7 µs × maximum
number of data words sent or received
(0 to 500 words) + 0.1 ms
There will be an increase of the event
execution times when Host Links or 1:N
NT Links are used.

10-4-4 Cycle Time Calculation Example
The following example shows the method used to calculate the cycle time
when Basic I/O Units only are mounted to the PLC with a CS1G-CPU4@H.
Conditions
Item
CPU Rack (8 slots)

CS-series Expansion Rack (8
slots) × 1 Unit
User program

Peripheral port connection
Fixed cycle time processing
RS-232C port connection
Peripheral servicing with other
devices (Special I/O Units, CSseries CPU Bus Units, Inner
Boards, and file access)

Details
CS1W-ID291 96-point Input Units
CS1W-OD291 96-point Output
Units
CS1W-ID291 96-point Input Units
CS1W-OD291 96-point Output
Units
5 K steps

4 Units
4 Units
4 Units
4 Units
LD instruction
2.5 K steps,
OUT instruction 2.5 K steps

Yes and no
No
No
No

Calculation Example
Process name

(1) Overseeing
(2) Program execution
(3) Cycle time calculation
(4) I/O refreshing
(5) Peripheral servicing

498

Calculation

--0.04 µs × 2,500 +
0.04 µs × 2,500
(Fixed cycle time
not set)
0.02 ms × 8 +
0.02 ms × 8
(Peripheral port
connected only)

Processing time
Without
With
Programming
Programming
Device
Device
0.3 ms
0.3 ms
0.2 ms
0.2 ms
0 ms

0 ms

0.32 ms

0.1 ms

0 ms

Section 10-4

Computing the Cycle Time
Process name

Cycle time

Calculation

(1) + (2) + (3) + (4)
+ (5)

Processing time
With
Without
Programming
Programming
Device
Device
0.92 ms

0.82 ms

10-4-5 Online Editing Cycle Time Extension
When online editing is executed from a Programming Device (such as Programming Console or CX-Programmer) while the CPU Unit is operating in
MONITOR mode to change the program, the CPU Unit will momentarily suspend operation while the program is being changed. The period of time that
the cycle time is extended is determined by the following conditions.
• Number of steps changed
• Editing operations (insert/delete/overwrite)
• Types of instructions used
If the maximum program size for each task is 64 Ksteps, the following table
provides guidelines for the maximum online editing cycle time extensions.
CPU Unit
CPU6@H CS1-H CPU Units
CPU4@H CS1-H CPU Units

Guidelines for increase in cycle time for
online editing
Approx. 8 ms
Approx. 11 ms

When editing online, the cycle time will be extended by the time that operation
is stopped.
Note When there is one task, online editing is processed all in the cycle time following the cycle in which online editing is executed (written). When there are multiple tasks (cyclic tasks and interrupt tasks), online editing is separated, so
that for n tasks, processing is executed over n to n ×2 cycles max.

10-4-6 I/O Response Time
The I/O response time is the time it takes from when an Input Unit’s input
turns ON, the data is recognized by the CS-series CPU Unit, and the user
program is executed, up to the time for the result to be output to an Output
Unit’s output terminals.
The length of the I/O response time depends on the following conditions.
• Timing of Input Bit turning ON.
• Cycle time.
• Type of Rack to which Input and Output Units are mounted (CPU Rack,
CPU Expansion Rack, Expansion Rack).

Basic I/O Units
Minimum I/O Response
Time

The I/O response time is shortest when data is retrieved immediately before
I/O refresh of the CPU Unit.
The minimum I/O response time is the total of the Input ON delay, the cycle
time, and the Output ON delay.
Note The Input and Output ON delay differs according to the Unit used.

499

Section 10-4

Computing the Cycle Time

I/O refresh
Input
Input ON delay
(Interrupt to CPU Unit)
Cycle time

Cycle time

Instruction
execution

Output ON delay
Output

Minimum I/O response time

Maximum I/O Response
Time

The I/O response time is longest when data is retrieved immediately after I/O
refresh of the Input Unit.
The maximum I/O response time is the total of the Input ON delay, (the cycle
time × 2), and the Output ON delay.
I/O refresh
Input
Input ON delay
(Interrupt to CPU Unit)
Cycle time
Instruction
execution

Cycle time
Instruction
execution

Instruction
execution

Output ON delay
Output
Maximum I/O response time

Calculation Example
Conditions:

Input ON delay
Output ON delay
Cycle time

1.5 ms
0.2 ms
20.0 ms

Minimum I/O response time = 1.5 ms + 20 ms + 0.2 ms = 21.7 ms
Maximum I/O response time = 1.5 ms + (20 ms ×2) + 0.2 ms = 41.7 ms

SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O
The response times for both inputs and outputs are shown here for when
Slave Racks are used.
Minimum Remote I/O
Response Time

The minimum I/O response time is the sum of the Input ON delay, (the cycle
time × 3), and the Output ON delay.
Note The cycle time is longer than the remote I/O transmission time.

500

Section 10-4

Computing the Cycle Time
Program
execution

CPU Unit
Master-to-CPU Unit transmission

Remote I/O Master Unit
Master-to-Slave communications

Remote I/O Slave Unit
Slave I/O refresh

Input

Output

Remote I/O transmission time = (Remote I/O Slave transmission time per
Slave + I/O Terminal transmission time) × 2
Remote I/O Slave transmission time per Slave = 1.4 ms + 0.2 ms × (total number of I/O words on Slave Rack)
I/O Terminal transmission time = 2.0 ms × (number of I/O Terminals)
Maximum Remote I/O
Response Time

The maximum I/O response time is the sum of the Input ON delay, (the cycle
time × 4), and the Output ON delay.
Note The cycle time is longer than the remote I/O transmission time.
Program
execution

CPU Unit
Master-to-CPU Unit transmission

Remote I/O Master Unit
Slave I/O refresh

Master-to-Slave communications

Remote I/O Slave Unit

Input

Output

Calculation Example
Conditions:

Input ON delay
Output ON delay
Cycle time

1.5 ms
0.2 ms
20.0 ms

Minimum I/O response time = 1.5 ms + (20 ms ×3) + 0.2 ms = 61.7 ms
Maximum I/O response time = 1.5 ms + (20 ms ×4) + 0.2 ms = 81.7 ms
• When Special I/O Units are mounted to Slave Racks, the cycle time may
be less than or equal to the remote I/O transmission time. In this case, I/O
refresh may not occur between the CPU Unit and the Remote I/O Master
Unit in some cycles.
• Refreshing will be performed for Remote I/O Masters only once in each
cycle, and then only after confirming completion of the remote cycle.
• The short duration of ON/OFF status produced by differentiated instructions can cause inaccurate signals.

501

Section 10-4

Computing the Cycle Time

10-4-7 Interrupt Response Times
I/O Interrupt Tasks

The interrupt response time for I/O interrupt tasks is the time taken from when
an input from a CS1W-INT01 or C200HS-INT01 Interrupt Input Unit has
turned ON (or OFF) until the I/O interrupt task has actually been executed.
The length of the interrupt response time for I/O interrupt tasks depends on
the following conditions.
Item
Hardware response
Software interrupt response

Note

Time
Upward differentiation: 0.1 ms, Downward differentiation: 0.5 ms
124 µs

1. The software interrupt response time will be 1 ms if there is a C200H Special I/O Unit in the PLC.
• The C200HS-INT01 Interrupt Input Unit’s input ON delay is 0.2 ms
maximum.
• The C200HS-INT01 Interrupt Input Unit’s software interrupt response
time is 1 ms maximum.
2. I/O interrupt tasks can be executed (while an instruction is being executed,
or by stopping the execution of an instruction) during execution of the user
program, I/O refresh, peripheral servicing, or overseeing. The interrupt response time is not affected by the Input of the Interrupt Input Unit turning
ON during any of the above processing operations.
Some I/O interrupts, however, are not executed during interrupt tasks even
if the I/O interrupt conditions are satisfied. Instead, the I/O interrupts are
executed in order of priority after the other interrupt task has completed execution and the software interrupt response time (1 ms max.) has elapsed.
The interrupt response time of I/O interrupt tasks is the sum of the Input ON
delay (0.2 ms max.) and the software interrupt response time (1 ms max.).
Input
Input ON delay
(Interrupt Input Unit retrieval)
Software interrupt response time
Interrupt task execution
I/O interrupt task interrupt response time

Scheduled Interrupt Tasks

The interrupt response time of scheduled interrupt tasks is the time taken
from after the scheduled time specified by the MSKS(690) instruction has
elapsed until the interrupt task has actually been executed.
The length of the interrupt response time for scheduled interrupt tasks is 1 ms
max.

Note Scheduled interrupt tasks can be executed (while an instruction is being executed, or by stopping the execution of an instruction) during execution of the
user program, I/O refresh, peripheral servicing, or overseeing. The interrupt
response time is not affected by the scheduled time elapsing during any of the
above processing operations.
Some scheduled interrupts, however, are not executed during other interrupt
tasks even if the scheduled interrupt conditions are satisfied. Instead, the
scheduled interrupts are executed in order of priority after the other interrupt

502

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps

task has completed execution and the software interrupt response time (1 ms
max.) has elapsed.
Scheduled interrupt time

Internal timer
Software interrupt response time
Scheduled interrupt task

External Interrupt Tasks

The interrupt response time for external interrupt tasks differs depending on
the Unit or Board (Special I/O Unit, CS-series CPU Bus Unit, or Inner Board)
that is requesting the external interrupt task of the CPU Unit and the type of
service requested by the interrupt. For details, refer to the appropriate operation manual for the Unit or Board being used.

Power OFF Interrupt Tasks

Power OFF interrupt tasks are executed within 0.1 ms of the power being confirmed as OFF.

10-5 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
The following table lists the execution times for all instructions that are available for CS-series PLCs.
The total execution time of instructions within one whole user program is the
process time for program execution when calculating the cycle time (See
note.).
Note User programs are allocated tasks that can be executed within cyclic tasks
and interrupt tasks that satisfy interrupt conditions.
Execution times for most instructions differ depending on the CPU Unit used
(CS1@-CPU6@H, CS1@-CPU4@H) and the conditions when the instruction is
executed. The top line for each instruction in the following table shows the
minimum time required to process the instruction and the necessary execution conditions, and the bottom line shows the maximum time and execution
conditions required to process the instruction.
The execution time can also vary when the execution condition is OFF.
The following table also lists the length of each instruction in the Length
(steps) column. The number of steps required in the user program area for
each of the CS-series instructions varies from 1 to 7 steps, depending upon
the instruction and the operands used with it. The number of steps in a program is not the same as the number of instructions.
Note

1. Program capacity for CS-series PLCs is measured in steps, whereas program capacity for previous OMRON PLCs, such as the C-series and CVseries PLCs, was measured in words. Basically speaking, 1 step is equivalent to 1 word. The amount of memory required for each instruction, however, is different for some of the CS-series instructions, and inaccuracies
will occur if the capacity of a user program for another PLC is converted for
a CS-series PLC based on the assumption that 1 word is 1 step. Refer to
the information at the end of 10-5 Instruction Execution Times and Number
of Steps for guidelines on converting program capacities from previous
OMRON PLCs.

503

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps

Most instructions are supported in differentiated form (indicated with ↑, ↓,
@, and %). Specifying differentiation will increase the execution times by
the following amounts.
Symbol
↑ or ↓
@ or %

CS1-H CPU Units
CPU6@H
CPU4@H
+0.24
+0.32
+0.24
+0.32

2. Use the following times as guidelines when instructions are not executed.
CS1-H CPU Units
CPU6@H
CPU4@H
Approx. 0.1
Approx. 0.2

10-5-1 Sequence Input Instructions
Instruction

Mnemonic

Code

Length
(steps)

LOAD

LD
!LD

-----

1
2

LOAD NOT

LD NOT
!LD NOT

-----

1
2

AND

AND
!AND

-----

1
2

AND NOT

AND NOT
!AND NOT

-----

1
2

OR
!OR

-----

1
2

OR NOT

OR NOT
!OR NOT

-----

1
2

AND LOAD
OR LOAD
NOT
CONDITION ON
CONDITION OFF
LOAD BIT TEST
LOAD BIT TEST NOT
AND BIT TEST NOT
OR BIT TEST
OR BIT TEST NOT

AND LD
OR LD
NOT
UP
DOWN
LD TST
LD TSTN
AND TSTN
OR TST
OR TSTN

----520
521
522
350
351
351
350
351

1
1
1
3
4
4
4
4
4
4

ON execution time (µs)
CPU6@H
CPU4@H
0.02
0.04
+21.14
+21.16
+45.1
+45.1
0.02
0.04
+21.14
+21.16
+45.1
+45.1
0.02
0.04
+21.14
+21.16
+45.1
+45.1
0.02
0.04
+21.14
+21.16
+45.1
+45.1
0.02
0.04
+21.14
+21.16
+45.1
+45.1
0.02
0.04
+21.14
+21.16
+45.1
+45.1
0.02
0.04
0.02
0.04
0.02
0.04
0.3
0.42
0.3
0.42
0.14
0.24
0.14
0.24
0.14
0.24
0.14
0.24
0.14
0.24

Conditions
--Increase for CS Series
Increase for C200H
--Increase for CS Series
Increase for C200H
--Increase for CS Series
Increase for C200H
--Increase for CS Series
Increase for C200H
--Increase for CS Series
Increase for C200H
--Increase for CS Series
Increase for C200H
---------------------

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

504

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps

10-5-2 Sequence Output Instructions
Instruction

Mnemonic

Code

OUTPUT

OUT
!OUT

-----

OUTPUT NOT

OUT NOT
!OUT NOT

-----

KEEP
DIFFERENTIATE UP
DIFFERENTIATE DOWN
SET

KEEP
DIFU
DIFD
SET
!SET

011
013
014
-----

RESET

RSET
!RSET

-----

MULTIPLE BIT SET

SETA

530

MULTIPLE BIT RESET

RSTA

531

SINGLE BIT SET

SETB
!SETB

532

SINGLE BIT RESET

RSTB
!RSTB
OUTB
!OUTB

534

SINGLE BIT OUTPUT

534

Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
1
0.02
0.04
2
+21.37
+21.37
+49.3
+49.3
1
0.02
0.04
2
+21.37
+21.37
+49.3
+49.3
1
0.06
0.08
2
0.24
0.40
2
0.24
0.40
1
0.02
0.06
2
+21.37
+21.37
+49.3
+49.3
1
0.02
0.06
2
+21.37
+21.37
+49.3
+49.3
4
5.8
6.1
25.7
27.2
4
5.7
6.1
25.8
27.1
2
0.24
0.34
3
+21.44
+21.54

--Increase for CS Series
Increase for C200H
--Increase for CS Series
Increase for C200H
--------Increase for CS Series
Increase for C200H
Word specified
Increase for CS Series
Increase for C200H
With 1-bit set
With 1,000-bit set
With 1-bit reset
With 1,000-bit reset
-----

2
3
2
3

---------

0.24
+21.44
0.22
+21.42

0.34
+21.54
0.32
+21.52

Conditions

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

10-5-3 Sequence Control Instructions
Instruction

END
NO OPERATION
INTERLOCK
INTERLOCK CLEAR
MULTI-INTERLOCK
DIFFERENTIATION HOLD
(See note 2.)

MULTI-INTERLOCK
DIFFERENTIATION
RELEASE (See note 2.)

Mnemonic

END
NOP
IL
ILC
MILH

MILR

Code

001
000
002
003
517

518

Length
(steps)
(See note.)
1
1
1
1
3

ON execution time (µs)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
5.5
0.02
0.06
0.06
6.1
7.5

6.0
0.04
0.06
0.06
6.5
7.9

8.9

9.7

6.1
7.5

6.5
7.9

8.9

9.7

Conditions

--------During interlock
Not during interlock and
interlock not set
Not during interlock and
interlock set
During interlock
Not during interlock and
interlock not set
Not during interlock and
interlock set

505

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction

Mnemonic

MULTI-INTERLOCK CLEAR
(See note 2.)

MILC

519

JUMP
JUMP END
CONDITIONAL JUMP

JMP
JME
CJP

004
005
510

Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
2
5.0
5.6
5.7
6.2
2
0.38
0.48
2
----2
0.38
0.48

CONDITIONAL JUMP NOT

CJPN

511

0.38

0.48

MULTIPLE JUMP
MULTIPLE JUMP END
FOR LOOP
BREAK LOOP
NEXT LOOP

JMP0
JME0
FOR
BREAK
NEXT

515
516
512
514
513

1
1
2
1
1

0.06
0.06
0.52
0.06
0.18
0.22

0.06
0.06
0.54
0.06
0.16
0.40

Note

Code

Conditions

Interlock not cleared
Interlock cleared
----When JMP condition is
satisfied
When JMP condition is
satisfied
----Designating a constant
--When loop is continued
When loop is ended

1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Supported only by CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later.

10-5-4 Timer and Counter Instructions
Instruction

TIMER
COUNTER
HIGH-SPEED TIMER
ONE-MS TIMER
ACCUMULATIVE TIMER

LONG TIMER

MULTI-OUTPUT TIMER

REVERSIBLE COUNTER

506

Mnemonic

Code

TIM
TIMX
CNT
CNTX
TIMH
TIMHX
TMHH
TMHHX
TTIM

--550
--546
015
551
540
552
087

Length
(steps)
(See note.)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

TTIMX

555

TIML

542

TIMLX

553

MTIM

543

MTIMX

554

CNTR
CNTRX

012
548

3
3

ON execution time (µs)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
0.56
0.56
0.56
0.56
0.88
0.88
0.86
0.86
16.1
10.9
8.5
16.1
10.9
8.5
7.6
6.2
7.6
6.2
20.9
5.6
20.9
5.6
16.9
16.9

0.88
0.88
0.88
0.88
1.14
1.14
1.12
1.12
17.0
11.4
8.7
17.0
11.4
8.7
10.0
6.5
10.0
6.5
23.3
5.8
23.3
5.8
19.0
19.0

Conditions

------------------When resetting
When interlocking
--When resetting
When interlocking
--When interlocking
--When interlocking
--When resetting
--When resetting
-----

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction

RESET TIMER/ COUNTER

Mnemonic

Code

Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)

CNR

545

9.9
4.16 ms

10.6
4.16 ms

CNRX

547

9.9
4.16 ms

10.6
4.16 ms

Conditions

When resetting 1 word
When resetting 1,000
words
When resetting 1 word
When resetting 1,000
words

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

10-5-5 Comparison Instructions
Instruction

Mnemonic

Code

Input Comparison Instructions LD, AND, OR
(unsigned)
+=
LD, AND, OR
+ <>
LD, AND, OR
+<
LD, AND, OR
+<=
LD, AND, OR
+>
LD, AND, OR
+>=
Input Comparison Instructions LD, AND, OR
(double, unsigned)
+=+L
LD, AND, OR
+<>+L
LD, AND, OR
+<+L
LD, AND, OR
+<=+L
LD, AND, OR
+>+L
LD, AND, OR
+>=+L
Input Comparison Instructions LD, AND, OR
(signed)
+=+S
LD, AND, OR
+<>+S
LD, AND, OR
+<+S

300

LD, AND, OR
+<=
LD, AND, OR
+>+S
LD, AND, OR
+>=+S

317

Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
4
0.10
0.16
---

Conditions

305
310
315
320
325
301

0.10

0.16

---

0.10

0.16

---

306
311
316
321
326
302
307
312

322
327

507

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction

Mnemonic

Code

Input Comparison Instructions LD, AND, OR
(double, signed)
+=+SL
LD, AND, OR
+<>+SL
LD, AND, OR
+<+SL
LD, AND, OR
+<=+SL
LD, AND, OR
+>+SL
LD, AND, OR
+>=+SL
Time Comparison Instructions LD, AND, OR
(See note 2.)
+DT
LD, AND, OR
+<>DT
LD, AND, OR
+DT
LD, AND, OR
+>=DT
COMPARE
CMP
!CMP

303

DOUBLE COMPARE
SIGNED BINARY COMPARE

DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
COMPARE
TABLE COMPARE
MULTIPLE COMPARE
UNSIGNED BLOCK
COMPARE
AREA RANGE COMPARE
DOUBLE AREA RANGE
COMPARE

Note

Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)

Conditions

0.10

0.16

---

341

25.1

36.4

342

25.2

36.4

ON and OFF execution
times are the same as
given at the left.

343

25.2

36.4

344

25.2

36.4

345

25.1

36.4

346

25.2

36.4

020
020

3
7

CMPL
CPS
!CPS

060
114
114

3
3
7

CPSL

115

0.04
+42.1
+90.4
0.08
0.08
+35.9
+84.1
0.08

--Increase for CS Series
Increase for C200H
----Increase for CS Series
Increase for C200H
---

TCMP
MCMP
BCMP

085
019
068

4
4
4

14.0
20.5
21.5

15.2
22.8
23.7

-------

ZCP
ZCPL

088
116

3
3

5.3
5.5

5.4
6.7

-----

308
313
318
323
328

1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Supported only by CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later.

10-5-6 Data Movement Instructions
Instruction

MOVE

508

Mnemonic

MOV
!MOV

Code

021
021

ON execution time (µs)
Conditions
Length
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
3
0.18
0.20
--7
+21.38
+21.40
Increase for CS Series
+90.52
+90.52
Increase for C200H

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction

Mnemonic

DOUBLE MOVE
MOVE NOT
DOUBLE MOVE NOT
MOVE BIT
MOVE DIGIT
MULTIPLE BIT TRANSFER

MOVL
MVN
MVNL
MOVB
MOVD
XFRB

498
022
499
082
083
062

Length
(steps)
(See note.)
3
3
3
4
4
4

BLOCK TRANSFER

XFER

070

BLOCK SET

BSET

071

DATA EXCHANGE
DOUBLE DATA EXCHANGE
SINGLE WORD DISTRIBUTE
DATA COLLECT

XCHG
XCGL
DIST
COLL

073
562
080
081
560
561

MOVE TO REGISTER
MOVR
MOVE TIMER/ COUNTER PV MOVRW
TO REGISTER

Code

ON execution time (µs)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H

Conditions

0.32
0.18
0.32
0.24
0.24
10.1
186.4
0.36
300.1

0.34
0.20
0.34
0.34
0.34
10.8
189.8
0.44
380.1

3
3
4
4

0.26
200.1
0.40
0.76
5.1
5.1

0.28
220.1
0.56
1.04
5.4
5.3

----------Transferring 1 bit
Transferring 255 bits
Transferring 1 word
Transferring 1,000
words
Setting 1 word
Setting 1,000 words
---------

3
3

0.08
0.42

0.08
0.50

-----

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

10-5-7 Data Shift Instructions
Instruction

Mnemonic

Code

Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
3
7.4
10.4
433.2
488.0
4
6.9
7.2
615.3
680.2

SHIFT REGISTER

SFT

010

REVERSIBLE SHIFT
REGISTER

SFTR

084

ASYNCHRONOUS SHIFT
REGISTER

ASFT

017

WORD SHIFT

WSFT

016

ARITHMETIC SHIFT LEFT
DOUBLE SHIFT LEFT
ARITHMETIC SHIFT RIGHT
DOUBLE SHIFT RIGHT
ROTATE LEFT
DOUBLE ROTATE LEFT
ROTATE LEFT WITHOUT
CARRY
DOUBLE ROTATE LEFT
WITHOUT CARRY
ROTATE RIGHT
DOUBLE ROTATE RIGHT
ROTATE RIGHT WITHOUT
CARRY

ASL
ASLL
ASR
ASRL
ROL
ROLL
RLNC

025
570
026
571
027
572
574

RLNL
ROR
RORL
RRNC

Conditions

Shifting 1 word
Shifting 1,000 words
Shifting 1 word
Shifting 1,000 words

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

6.2
1.22 ms
4.5
171.5
0.22
0.40
0.22
0.40
0.22
0.40
0.22

6.4
1.22 ms
4.7
171.7
0.32
0.56
0.32
0.56
0.32
0.56
0.32

Shifting 1 word
Shifting 1,000 words
Shifting 1 word
Shifting 1,000 words
---------------

576

0.40

0.56

---

028
573
575

2
2
2

0.22
0.40
0.22

0.32
0.56
0.32

-------

509

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction

Mnemonic

Code

Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)

Conditions

DOUBLE ROTATE RIGHT
WITHOUT CARRY
ONE DIGIT SHIFT LEFT

RRNL

577

0.40

0.56

---

SLD

074

ONE DIGIT SHIFT RIGHT

SRD

075

SHIFT N-BIT DATA LEFT

NSFL

578

SHIFT N-BIT DATA RIGHT

NSFR

579

SHIFT N-BITS LEFT
DOUBLE SHIFT N-BITS LEFT
SHIFT N-BITS RIGHT
DOUBLE SHIFT N-BITS
RIGHT

NASL
NSLL
NASR
NSRL

580
582
581
583

3
3
3
3

5.9
561.1
6.9
760.5
7.5
40.3
7.5
50.5
0.22
0.40
0.22
0.40

6.1
626.3
7.1
895.5
8.3
45.4
8.3
55.3
0.32
0.56
0.32
0.56

Shifting 1 word
Shifting 1,000 words
Shifting 1 word
Shifting 1,000 words
Shifting 1 bit
Shifting 1,000 bits
Shifting 1 bit
Shifting 1,000 bits
---------

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

10-5-8 Increment/Decrement Instructions
Instruction

Mnemonic

INCREMENT BINARY
DOUBLE INCREMENT
BINARY
DECREMENT BINARY
DOUBLE DECREMENT
BINARY
INCREMENT BCD
DOUBLE INCREMENT BCD
DECREMENT BCD
DOUBLE DECREMENT BCD

Code

++
++L

590
591

Length
ON execution time (µs)
Conditions
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
2
0.22
0.32
--2
0.40
0.56
---

––
– –L

592
593

2
2

0.22
0.40

0.32
0.56

-----

++B
++BL
– –B
– –BL

594
595
596
597

2
2
2
2

6.4
5.6
6.3
5.3

4.5
4.9
4.6
4.7

---------

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

10-5-9 Symbol Math Instructions

400

ON execution time (µs)
Length
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
4
0.18
0.20
---

401

0.32

0.34

---

402

0.18

0.20

---

+CL

403

0.32

0.34

---

+B
+BL

404
405

4
4

8.2
13.3

8.4
14.5

-----

Instruction

SIGNED BINARY ADD
WITHOUT CARRY
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
ADD WITHOUT CARRY
SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH
CARRY
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
ADD WITH CARRY
BCD ADD WITHOUT CARRY
DOUBLE BCD ADD
WITHOUT CARRY

510

Mnemonic

Code

Conditions

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction

Mnemonic

BCD ADD WITH CARRY
DOUBLE BCD ADD WITH
CARRY
SIGNED BINARY
SUBTRACT WITHOUT
CARRY
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
SUBTRACT WITHOUT
CARRY
SIGNED BINARY
SUBTRACT WITH CARRY
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
SUBTRACT WITH CARRY
BCD SUBTRACT WITHOUT
CARRY
DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT
WITHOUT CARRY
BCD SUBTRACT WITH
CARRY
DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT
WITH CARRY
SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
MULTIPLY
UNSIGNED BINARY
MULTIPLY
DOUBLE UNSIGNED
BINARY MULTIPLY
BCD MULTIPLY
DOUBLE BCD MULTIPLY
SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY
DIVIDE
UNSIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
DOUBLE UNSIGNED
BINARY DIVIDE
BCD DIVIDE
DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE

Code

Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)

Conditions

+BC
+BCL

406
407

4
4

8.9
13.8

9.1
15.0

-----

–

410

0.18

0.20

---

–L

411

0.32

0.34

---

–C

412

0.18

0.20

---

–CL

413

0.32

0.34

---

–B

414

8.0

8.2

---

–BL

415

12.8

14.0

---

–BC

416

8.5

8.6

---

–BCL

417

13.4

14.7

---

*
*L

420
421

4
4

0.38
7.23

0.40
8.45

-----

422

0.38

0.40

---

*UL

423

7.1

8.3

---

*B
*BL
/
/L

424
425
430
431

4
4
4
4

9.0
23.0
0.40
7.2

9.2
24.2
0.42
8.4

---------

/U
/UL

432
433

4
4

0.40
6.9

0.42
8.1

-----

/B
/BL

434
435

4
4

8.6
17.7

8.8
18.9

-----

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

10-5-10 Conversion Instructions
Instruction

BCD-TO-BINARY
DOUBLE BCD-TO-DOUBLE
BINARY
BINARY-TO-BCD
DOUBLE BINARY-TODOUBLE BCD

Mnemonic

Code

BIN
BINL

023
058

Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
3
0.22
0.24
--3
6.5
6.8
---

BCD
BCDL

024
059

3
3

0.24
6.7

0.26
7.0

Conditions

-----

511

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction

2’S COMPLEMENT
DOUBLE 2’S COMPLEMENT
16-BIT TO 32-BIT SIGNED
BINARY
DATA DECODER

DATA ENCODER

ASCII CONVERT

Mnemonic

Code

Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)

NEG
NEGL
SIGN

160
161
600

3
3
3

0.18
0.32
0.32

0.20
0.34
0.34

-------

MLPX

076

0.32

0.42

0.98

1.20

3.30

4.00

6.50

7.90

7.5

7.9

49.6

50.2

18.2

18.6

55.1

57.4

6.8

7.1

11.2

11.7

Decoding 1 digit (4 to
16)
Decoding 4 digits (4 to
16)
Decoding 1 digit 8 to
256
Decoding 2 digits (8 to
256)
Encoding 1 digit (16 to
4)
Encoding 4 digits (16 to
4)
Encoding 1 digit (256 to
8)
Encoding 2 digits (256
to 8)
Converting 1 digit into
ASCII
Converting 4 digits into
ASCII
Converting 1 digit

DMPX

ASC

077

086

ASCII TO HEX

HEX

162

7.1

7.4

COLUMN TO LINE
LINE TO COLUMN
SIGNED BCD-TO-BINARY

LINE
COLM
BINS

063
064
470

4
4
4

19.0
23.2
8.0

23.1
27.5
8.3

8.0

8.3

8.6

8.5

8.8

9.2

9.6

9.2

9.6

9.5

9.9

9.6

10.0

6.6

6.9

6.7

7.0

6.8

7.1

7.2

7.5

DOUBLE SIGNED BCD-TOBINARY

SIGNED BINARY-TO-BCD

512

Conditions

BISL

BCDS

472

471

----Data format setting No.
0
Data format setting No.
1
Data format setting No.
2
Data format setting No.
3
Data format setting No.
0
Data format setting No.
1
Data format setting No.
2
Data format setting No.
3
Data format setting No.
0
Data format setting No.
1
Data format setting No.
2
Data format setting No.
3

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction

Mnemonic

DOUBLE SIGNED BINARYTO-BCD

BDSL

Code

473

Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
4

Conditions

8.1

8.4

8.2

8.6

8.3

8.7

8.8

9.2
72.1
75.2
87.7
96.7
99.6
112.4
87.2
90.4
98.5
20.24

Data format setting No.
0
Data format setting No.
1
Data format setting No.
2
Data format setting No.
3
8-bit binary
8-bit BCD
8-bit angle
15-bit binary
15-bit BCD
15-bit angle
360° binary
360° BCD
360° angle
---

GRAY CODE CONVERSION
(See note 2.)

GRY

474

FOUR-DIGIT NUMBER TO
ASCII
(See note 3.)
EIGHT-DIGIT NUMBER TO
ASCII
(See note 3.)
SIXTEEN-DIGIT NUMBER TO
ASCII
(See note 3.)
ASCII TO FOUR-DIGIT
NUMBER
(See note 3.)
ASCII TO EIGHT-DIGIT
NUMBER
(See note 3.)
ASCII TO SIXTEEN-DIGIT
NUMBER
(See note 3.)

STR4

601

46.9
49.6
57.7
61.8
64.5
72.8
52.3
55.1
64.8
13.79

STR8

602

18.82

27.44

---

STR16

603

30.54

44.41

---

NUM4

604

18.46

27.27

---

NUM8

605

27.27

40.29

---

NUM16

606

52.31

78.25

---

Note

1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Supported only by CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later.
3. Supported only by CPU Units Ver. 4.0 or later.

10-5-11 Logic Instructions
Instruction

LOGICAL AND
DOUBLE LOGICAL AND
LOGICAL OR
DOUBLE LOGICAL OR
EXCLUSIVE OR
DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE OR
EXCLUSIVE NOR

Mnemonic

ANDW
ANDL
ORW
ORWL
XORW
XORL
XNRW

Code

034
610
035
611
036
612
037

Length
(steps)
(See note.)
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

ON execution time (µs)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
0.18
0.32
0.22
0.32
0.22
0.32
0.22

0.20
0.34
0.32
0.34
0.32
0.34
0.32

Conditions

---------------

513

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction

Mnemonic

DOUBLE EXCLUSIVE NOR
COMPLEMENT
DOUBLE COMPLEMENT

XNRL
COM
COML

Code

613
029
614

Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
4
2
2

0.32
0.22
0.40

0.34
0.32
0.56

Conditions

-------

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

10-5-12 Special Math Instructions
Instruction

Mnemonic

BINARY ROOT
BCD SQUARE ROOT
ARITHMETIC PROCESS

ROTB
ROOT
APR

FLOATING POINT DIVIDE
BIT COUNTER

FDIV
BCNT

Code

620
072
069

079
067

Length
(steps)
(See note.)
3
3
4

4
4

ON execution time (µs)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
49.6
13.7
6.7

50.0
13.9
6.9

17.2

18.4

116.6
0.3

176.6
0.38

Conditions

----Designating SIN and
COS
Designating line-segment approximation
--Counting 1 word

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

10-5-13 Floating-point Math Instructions
Instruction

FLOATING TO 16-BIT
FLOATING TO 32-BIT
16-BIT TO FLOATING
32-BIT TO FLOATING
FLOATING-POINT ADD
FLOATING-POINT
SUBTRACT
FLOATING-POINT DIVIDE
FLOATING-POINT MULTIPLY
DEGREES TO RADIANS
RADIANS TO DEGREES
SINE
COSINE
TANGENT
ARC SINE
ARC COSINE
ARC TANGENT
SQUARE ROOT
EXPONENT
LOGARITHM
EXPONENTIAL POWER

514

Mnemonic

Code

FIX
FIXL
FLT
FLTL
+F
–F

450
451
452
453
454
455

Length
(steps)
(See note.)
3
3
3
3
4
4

/F
*F
RAD
DEG
SIN
COS
TAN
ASIN
ACOS
ATAN
SQRT
EXP
LOG
PWR

457
456
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
840

4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4

ON execution time (µs)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H

Conditions

10.6
10.8
8.3
8.3
8.0
8.0

10.8
11.0
8.5
8.5
9.2
9.2

-------------

8.7
8.0
10.1
9.9
42.0
31.5
16.3
17.6
20.4
16.1
19.0
65.9
12.8
125.4

9.9
9.2
10.2
10.1
42.2
31.8
16.6
17.9
20.7
16.4
19.3
66.2
13.1
126.0

-----------------------------

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction

Mnemonic

Floating Symbol Comparison

FLOATING- POINT TO ASCII
ASCII TO FLOATING-POINT

LD, AND, OR
+=F
LD, AND, OR
+<>F
LD, AND, OR
+F
LD, AND, OR
+>=F
FSTR
FVAL

Code

329

Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)

Conditions

6.6

8.3

---

4
3

48.5
21.1

48.9
21.3

-----

330
331
332
333
334
448
449

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

10-5-14 Double-precision Floating-point Instructions
Instruction

DOUBLE SYMBOL
COMPARISON

DOUBLE FLOATING TO
16-BIT BINARY
DOUBLE FLOATING TO
32-BIT BINARY
16-BIT BINARY TO DOUBLE
FLOATING
32-BIT BINARY TO DOUBLE
FLOATING
DOUBLE FLOATING-POINT
ADD
DOUBLE FLOATING-POINT
SUBTRACT
DOUBLE FLOATING-POINT
MULTIPLY
DOUBLE FLOATING-POINT
DIVIDE
DOUBLE DEGREES TO
RADIANS

Mnemonic

Code

335

Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
3
8.5
10.3
---

LD, AND, OR
+=D
LD, AND, OR
+<>D
LD, AND, OR
+D
LD, AND, OR
+>=D
FIXD

841

11.7

12.1

---

FIXLD

842

11.6

12.1

---

DBL

843

9.9

10.0

---

DBLL

844

9.8

10.0

---

845

11.2

11.9

---

−D

846

11.2

11.9

---

847

12.0

12.7

---

848

23.5

24.2

---

RADD

849

27.4

27.8

---

Conditions

336
337
338
339
340

515

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction

Mnemonic

DOUBLE RADIANS TO
DEGREES
DOUBLE SINE
DOUBLE COSINE
DOUBLE TANGENT
DOUBLE ARC SINE
DOUBLE ARC COSINE
DOUBLE ARC TANGENT
DOUBLE SQUARE ROOT
DOUBLE EXPONENT
DOUBLE LOGARITHM
DOUBLE EXPONENTIAL
POWER

Code

Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)

Conditions

DEGD

850

11.2

11.9

---

SIND
COSD
TAND
ASIND
ACOSD
ATAND
SQRTD
EXPD
LOGD
PWRD

851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4

45.4
43.0
20.1
21.5
24.7
19.3
47.4
121.0
16.0
223.9

45.8
43.4
20.5
21.9
25.1
19.7
47.9
121.4
16.4
224.2

---------------------

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

10-5-15 Table Data Processing Instructions
Instruction

Mnemonic

Code

SET STACK

SSET

630

PUSH ONTO STACK
FIRST IN FIRST OUT

PUSH
FIFO

632
633

LAST IN FIRST OUT
DIMENSION RECORD TABLE
SET RECORD LOCATION
GET RECORD NUMBER
DATA SEARCH

LIFO
DIM
SETR
GETR
SRCH

634
631
635
636
181

SWAP BYTES

SWAP

637

FIND MAXIMUM

MAX

182

FIND MINIMUM

MIN

183

SUM

184

FRAME CHECKSUM

FCS

180

STACK SIZE READ

SNUM

638

516

Length
ON execution time (µs)
Conditions
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
3
8.0
8.3
Designating 5 words in
stack area
231.6
251.8
Designating 1,000
words in stack area
3
6.5
8.6
--3
6.9
8.9
Designating 5 words in
stack area
352.6
434.3
Designating 1,000
words in stack area
3
7.0
9.0
--5
15.2
21.6
--4
5.4
5.9
--4
7.8
8.4
--4
15.5
19.5
Searching for 1 word
2.42 ms
3.34 ms
Searching for 1,000
words
3
12.2
13.6
Swapping 1 word
1.94 ms
2.82 ms
Swapping 1,000 words
4
19.2
24.9
Searching for 1 word
2.39 ms
3.36 ms
Searching for 1,000
words
4
19.2
25.3
Searching for 1 word
2.39 ms
3.33 ms
Searching for 1,000
words
4
28.2
38.5
Adding 1 word
1.42 ms
1.95 ms
Adding 1,000 words
4
20.0
28.3
For 1-word table length
1.65 ms
2.48 ms
For 1,000-word table
length
3
6.0
6.3
---

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction

Mnemonic

Code

STACK DATA READ
STACK DATA OVERWRITE
STACK DATA INSERT

SREAD
SWRIT
SINS

639
640
641

Length
(steps)
(See note.)
4
4
4

STACK DATA DELETE

SDEL

642

ON execution time (µs)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
8.0
7.2
7.8
354.0
8.6
354.0

8.4
7.6
9.9
434.8
10.6
436.0

Conditions

------For 1,000-word table
--For 1,000-word table

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

10-5-16 Data Control Instructions
Instruction

Mnemonic

Code

PID CONTROL

PID

190

LIMIT CONTROL
DEAD BAND CONTROL
DEAD ZONE CONTROL
TIME-PROPORTIONAL
OUTPUT
(See note 2.)

LMT
BAND
ZONE
TPO

680
681
682
685

Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
4
436.2
678.2
332.3
474.9
97.3
141.3
4
16.1
22.1
4
17.0
22.5
4
15.4
20.5
4
10.4
14.8
54.5
82.0

61.0

91.9

SCALING
SCALING 2
SCALING 3
AVERAGE

SCL
SCL2
SCL3
AVG

194
486
487
195

4
4
4
4

37.1
28.5
33.4
36.3
291.0

53.0
40.2
47.0
52.6
419.9

PID CONTROL WITH
AUTOTUNING

PIDAT

191

446.3
339.4
100.7
189.2

712.5
533.9
147.1
281.6

535.2

709.8

Note

Conditions

Initial execution
Sampling
Not sampling
------OFF execution time
ON execution time with
duty designation or displayed output limit
ON execution time with
manipulated variable
designation and output
limit enabled
------Average of an operation
Average of 64 operations
Initial execution
Sampling
Not sampling
Initial execution of autotuning
Autotuning when sampling

1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Supported only by CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later.

517

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps

10-5-17 Subroutine Instructions
Instruction

Mnemonic

SUBROUTINE CALL
SUBROUTINE ENTRY
SUBROUTINE RETURN
MACRO
GLOBAL SUBROUTINE CALL
GLOBAL SUBROUTINE
ENTRY
GLOBAL SUBROUTINE
RETURN

Code

SBS
SBN
RET
MCRO
GSBN
GRET

091
092
093
099
751
752

Length
(steps)
(See note.)
2
2
1
4
2
1

GSBS

750

ON execution time (µs)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H

Conditions

1.26
--0.86
23.3
--1.26

1.96
--1.60
23.3
--1.96

-------------

0.86

1.60

---

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

10-5-18 Interrupt Control Instructions
Instruction

SET INTERRUPT MASK
READ INTERRUPT MASK
CLEAR INTERRUPT
DISABLE INTERRUPTS
ENABLE INTERRUPTS

Mnemonic

MSKS
MSKR
CLI
DI
EI

Code

690
692
691
693
694

Length
(steps)
(See note.)
3
3
3
1
1

ON execution time (µs)
CPU-6@H
25.6
11.9
27.4
15.0
19.5

Conditions

CPU-4@H
38.4
11.9
41.3
16.8
21.8

-----------

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

10-5-19 Step Instructions
Instruction

Mnemonic

Code

STEP DEFINE

STEP

008

STEP START

SNXT

009

Length
ON execution time (µs)
Conditions
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
2
17.4
20.7
Step control bit ON
11.8
13.7
Step control bit OFF
2
6.6
7.3
---

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

518

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps

10-5-20 Basic I/O Unit Instructions
Instruction

Mnemonic

Code

I/O REFRESH

IORF

097

7-SEGMENT DECODER
DIGITAL SWITCH INPUT
(See note 2.)

SDEC
DSW

078
210

Length
ON execution time (µs)
Conditions
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
3
58.5
63.2
1-word refresh (IN) for
C200H Basic I/O Units
62.6
67.0
1-word refresh (OUT)
for C200H Basic I/O
Units
15.5
16.4
1-word refresh (IN) for
CS-series Basic I/O
Units
17.20
18.40
1-word refresh (OUT)
for CS-series Basic I/O
Units
303.3
343.9
10-word refresh (IN) for
C200H Basic I/O Units
348.2
376.6
10-word refresh (OUT)
for C200H Basic I/O
Units
319.9
320.7
60-word refresh (IN) for
CS-series Basic I/O
Units
358.00
354.40
60-word refresh (OUT)
for CS-series Basic I/O
Units
4
6.5
6.9
--6
50.7
73.5
4 digits, data input
value: 0

TEN KEY INPUT
(See note 2.)

TKY

211

HEXADECIMAL KEY INPUT
(See note 2.)

HKY

212

MATRIX INPUT
(See note 2.)

MTR

213

7-SEGMENT DISPLAY
OUTPUT
(See note 2.)
INTELLIGENT I/O READ
INTELLIGENT I/O WRITE

7SEG

214

IORD
IOWR

222
223

4
4

CPU BUS I/O REFRESH

DLNK

226

Note

51.5

73.4

51.3

73.5

50.7

73.4

9.7
10.7
50.3
50.1
47.8
48.0
58.1
63.3

13.2
14.8
70.9
71.2
68.1
68.0
83.3
90.3

4 digits, data input
value: F
8 digits, data input
value: 0
8 digits, data input
value: F
Data input value: 0
Data input value: F
Data input value: 0
Data input value: F
Data input value: 0
Data input value: F
4 digits
8 digits

Read/write times depend --on the Special I/O Unit
--for which the instruction
is being executed.
287.8
315.5
Allocated 1 word

1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Supported only by CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later.

519

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps

10-5-21 Serial Communications Instructions
Instruction

Mnemonic

PROTOCOL MACRO

PMCR

260

TRANSMIT

TXD

236

RECEIVE

RXD

235

TRANSMIT VIA SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS UNIT
RECEIVE VIA SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS UNIT
CHANGE SERIAL PORT
SETUP

TXDU

256

Length
ON execution time (µs)
Conditions
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
5
100.1
142.1
Sending 0 words,
receiving 0 words
134.2
189.6
Sending 249 words,
receiving 249 words
4
68.5
98.8
Sending 1 byte
734.3
1.10 ms
Sending 256 bytes
4
89.6
131.1
Storing 1 byte
724.2
1.11 ms
Storing 256 bytes
4
131.5
202.4
Sending 1 byte

RXDU

255

131

200.8

Storing 1 byte

STUP

237

341.2

400.0

---

Note

Code

1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. TXDU(256) and RXDU(255) are supported for unit version 3.0 or later only.

10-5-22 Network Instructions
Instruction

Mnemonic

NETWORK SEND
NETWORK RECEIVE
DELIVER COMMAND
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND
(See note 2.)
EXPLICIT GET ATTRIBUTE
(See note 2.)
EXPLICIT SET ATTRIBUTE
(See note 2.)
EXPLICIT WORD READ
(See note 2.)
EXPLICIT WORD WRITE
(See note 2.)

Note

Code

SEND
RECV
CMND
EXPLT

090
098
490
720

Length
(steps)
(See note.)
4
4
4
4

ON execution time (µs)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H

Conditions

EGATR

721

123.9

185.0

---

ESATR

722

110.0

164.4

---

ECHRD

723

106.8

158.9

---

ECHWR

724

106.0

158.3

---

84.4
85.4
106.8
127.6

123.9
124.7
136.8
190.0

---------

1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Supported only by CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later.

10-5-23 File Memory Instructions
Instruction

READ DATA FILE

520

Mnemonic

FREAD

Code

700

Length
ON execution time (µs)
Conditions
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
5
391.4
632.4
2-character directory +
file name in binary
836.1
1.33 ms
73-character directory
+ file name in binary

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction

Mnemonic

Code

WRITE DATA FILE

FWRIT

701

WRITE TEXT FILE
(See note 2.)

TWRIT

704

Note

Length
ON execution time (µs)
Conditions
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
5
387.8
627.0
2-character directory +
file name in binary
833.3
1.32 ms
73-character directory
+ file name in binary
5
390.1
619.1
---

1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Supported only by CPU Units Ver. 4.0 or later.

10-5-24 Display Instructions
Instruction

DISPLAY MESSAGE

Mnemonic

MSG

Code

046

Length
ON execution time (µs)
Conditions
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
3
10.1
14.2
Displaying message
8.4
11.3
Deleting displayed
message

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

10-5-25 Clock Instructions
Instruction

CALENDAR ADD
CALENDAR SUBTRACT
HOURS TO SECONDS
SECONDS TO HOURS
CLOCK ADJUSTMENT

Mnemonic

CADD
CSUB
SEC
HMS
DATE

Code

730
731
065
066
735

Length
(steps)
(See note.)
4
4
3
3
2

ON execution time (µs)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
38.3
38.6
21.4
22.2
60.5

201.9
170.4
29.3
30.9
87.4

Conditions

-----------

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

10-5-26 Debugging Instructions
Instruction

Trace Memory Sampling

Mnemonic

TRSM

Code

045

ON execution time (µs)
Conditions
Length
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
1
80.4
120.0
Sampling 1 bit and 0
words
848.1
1.06 ms
Sampling 31 bits and 6
words

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

521

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps

10-5-27 Failure Diagnosis Instructions
Instruction

Mnemonic

FAILURE ALARM

FAL

SEVERE FAILURE ALARM
FALS
FAILURE POINT DETECTION FPD

Code

006

007
269

Length
ON execution time (µs)
Conditions
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
3
15.4
16.7
Recording errors
179.8
244.8
Deleting errors (in order
of priority)
432.4
657.1
Deleting errors (all
errors)
161.5
219.4
Deleting errors (individually)
3
------4
140.9
202.3
When executed
163.4
217.6
First time
185.2
268.9
When executed
207.5
283.6
First time

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

10-5-28 Other Instructions
Instruction

Mnemonic

SET CARRY
CLEAR CARRY
SELECT EM BANK
EXTEND MAXIMUM CYCLE
TIME
SAVE CONDITION FLAGS
LOAD CONDITION FLAGS
CONVERT ADDRESS FROM
CV
CONVERT ADDRESS TO CV
DISABLE PERIPHERAL
SERVICING
ENABLE PERIPHERAL
SERVICING

Code

STC
CLC
EMBC
WDT

040
041
281
094

Length
(steps)
(See note.)
1
1
2
2

ON execution time (µs)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H

Conditions

CCS
CCL
FRMCV

282
283
284

1
1
3

8.6
9.8
13.6

12.5
13.9
19.9

-------

TOCV
IOSP

285
287

3
---

11.9
13.9

17.2
19.8

-----

IORS

288

---

63.6

92.3

---

0.06
0.06
14.0
15.0

0.06
0.06
15.1
19.7

---------

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

10-5-29 Block Programming Instructions
Instruction

BLOCK PROGRAM BEGIN
BLOCK PROGRAM END
BLOCK PROGRAM PAUSE
BLOCK PROGRAM
RESTART
CONDITIONAL BLOCK EXIT

522

Mnemonic

Code

BPRG
BEND
BPPS
BPRS

096
801
811
812

Length
(steps)
(See note.)
2
1
2
2

(Execution
condition)
EXIT

806

ON execution time (µs)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H

Conditions

12.1
9.6
10.6
5.1

13.0
12.3
12.3
5.6

---------

10.0
4.0

11.3
4.9

EXIT condition satisfied
EXIT condition not satisfied

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction

Mnemonic

Code

Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)

CONDITIONAL BLOCK EXIT

EXIT (bit
address)

806

6.8
4.7

13.5
7.2

CONDITIONAL BLOCK EXIT
(NOT)

EXIT NOT (bit 806
address)

12.4
7.1

14.0
7.6

Branching

IF (execution
condition)

802

Branching

IF (relay number)

802

Branching (NOT)

IF NOT (relay
number)

802

Branching

ELSE

803

Branching

IEND

804

ONE CYCLE AND WAIT

WAIT (execu- 805
tion condition)

4.6
6.7
6.8
9.0
7.1
9.2
6.2
6.8
6.9
4.4
12.6

4.8
7.3
7.2
9.6
7.6
10.1
6.7
7.7
7.7
4.6
13.7

3.9

4.1

12.0

13.4

6.1

6.5

12.2

13.8

6.4

6.9

17.9
19.1
17.9
19.1
25.8
20.6
25.8
20.6
9.3

22.6
23.9
22.6
23.9
27.9
22.7
27.9
22.7
10.8

7.9
7.7

9.1
8.4

6.8

8.0

9.9

10.7

8.9

10.3

10.2

11.2

9.3

10.8

ONE CYCLE AND WAIT

ONE CYCLE AND WAIT
(NOT)

COUNTER WAIT

HIGH-SPEED TIMER WAIT

Loop Control
Loop Control

Loop Control

WAIT (relay
number)

805

WAIT NOT
805
(relay number)

CNTW

814

CNTWX

818

TMHW

815

TMHWX

817

LOOP
809
LEND (execu- 810
tion condition)

1
1

LEND (relay
number)

810

LEND NOT
810
(relay number)

Conditions

EXIT condition satisfied
EXIT condition not satisfied
EXIT condition satisfied
EXIT condition not satisfied
IF true
IF false
IF true
IF false
IF true
IF false
IF true
IF false
IF true
IF false
WAIT condition satisfied
WAIT condition not satisfied
WAIT condition satisfied
WAIT condition not satisfied
WAIT condition satisfied
WAIT condition not satisfied
Default setting
Normal execution
Default setting
Normal execution
Default setting
Normal execution
Default setting
Normal execution
LEND condition not satisfied
--LEND condition satisfied
LEND condition not satisfied
LEND condition satisfied
LEND condition not satisfied
LEND condition satisfied
LEND condition not satisfied

523

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction

TIMER WAIT

Mnemonic

Code

Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)

TIMW

813

TIMWX

816

22.3
24.9
22.3
24.9

25.2
27.8
25.2
27.8

Conditions

Default setting
Normal execution
Default setting
Normal execution

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

10-5-30 Text String Processing Instructions
Instruction

Mnemonic

Code

MOV STRING
CONCATENATE STRING

MOV$
+$

664
656

GET STRING LEFT

LEFT$

652

GET STRING RIGHT

RGHT$

653

GET STRING MIDDLE

MID$

654

FIND IN STRING

FIND$

660

STRING LENGTH
REPLACE IN STRING

LEN$
RPLC$

650
661

DELETE STRING

DEL$

658

EXCHANGE STRING

XCHG$

665

CLEAR STRING
INSERT INTO STRING

CLR$
INS$

666
657

String Comparison
Instructions

LD, AND, OR
+=$
LD, AND, OR
+<>$
LD, AND, OR
+<$
LD, AND, OR
+>$
LD, AND, OR
+>=$

670

Length
ON execution time (µs)
Conditions
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
3
45.6
66.0
Transferring 1 character
4
86.5
126.0
1 character + 1 character
4
53.0
77.4
Retrieving 1 character
from 2 characters
4
52.2
76.3
Retrieving 1 character
from 2 characters
5
56.5
84.6
Retrieving 1 character
from 3 characters
4
51.4
77.5
Searching for 1 character from 2 characters
3
19.8
28.9
Detecting 1 character
6
175.1
258.7
Replacing the first of 2
characters with 1 character
5
63.4
94.2
Deleting the leading
character of 2 characters
3
60.6
87.2
Exchanging 1 character
with 1 character
2
23.8
36.0
Clearing 1 character
5
136.5
200.6
Inserting 1 character
after the first of 2 characters
4
48.5
69.8
Comparing 1 character
with 1 character

671
672
674
675

Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.

524

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps

10-5-31 Task Control Instructions
Instruction

TASK ON
TASK OFF

Mnemonic

TKON
TKOF

Code

820
821

Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
(See note.)
2
19.5
26.3
--2
13.3
19.0
---

Conditions

10-5-32 Model Conversion Instructions (Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later Only)
Instruction
BLOCK TRANSFER

Mnemonic
XFERC

Code

Length
(steps)

565

SINGLE WORD DISTRIBUTE DISTC

566

DATA COLLECT

COLLC

567

MOVE BIT
BIT COUNTER

MOVBC
BCNTC

568
621

4
4

ON execution time (µs)
Conditions
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
6.4
6.5
Transferring 1 word
481.6
791.6
Transferring 1,000
words
3.4
3.5
Data distribute
5.9
7.3
Stack operation
3.5
3.85
Data collection
8
9.1
Stack operation
8.3
9.6
Stack operation
1 word FIFO Read
2052.3
2097.5
Stack operation
1,000 words FIFO
Read
4.5
4.88
--4.9
5
Counting 1 word
1252.4
1284.4
Counting 1,000 words

10-5-33 Special Function Block Instructions (Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later Only)
Instruction
GET VARIABLE ID

Guidelines on Converting
Program Capacities from
Previous OMRON PLCs

Mnemonic
GETID

Code
286

Length
(steps)
4

ON execution time (µs)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
14
22.2
---

Conditions

Guidelines are provided in the following table for converting the program
capacity (unit: words) of previous OMRON PLCs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE,
CVM1, or CV-series PLCs) to the program capacity (unit: steps) of the CSseries PLCs.
Add the following value (n) to the program capacity (unit: words) of the previous PLCs for each instruction to obtain the program capacity (unit: steps) of
the CS-series PLCs.
Instructions

Basic
instructions

CS-series steps = “a” (words) of previous PLC + n
Variations
Value of n when
Value of n when
converting from
converting from
C200HX/HG/HE to CV-series PLC or
CS Series
CVM1 to CS
Series
0
None
OUT, SET, RSET,
or KEEP(011): –1
Other instructions:
0
Upward Differentiation
None
+1
Immediate Refreshing
None
0
Upward Differentiation and None
+2
Immediate Refreshing

525

Section 10-5

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps

Instructions

Special
instructions

CS-series steps = “a” (words) of previous PLC + n
Variations
Value of n when
Value of n when
converting from
converting from
C200HX/HG/HE to CV-series PLC or
CS Series
CVM1 to CS
Series
None
0
–1
Upward Differentiation
+1
0
Immediate Refreshing
None
+3
Upward Differentiation and None
+4
Immediate Refreshing

For example, if OUT is used with an address of CIO 000000 to CIO 25515, the
program capacity of a C200HX/HG/HE PLC would be 2 words per instruction
and that of the CS-series PLC would be 1 (2 – 1) step per instruction.
For example, if !MOV is used (MOVE instruction with immediate refreshing),
the program capacity of a CV-series PLC would be 4 words per instruction
and that of the CS-series PLC would be 7 (4 + 3) steps.

10-5-34 Function Block Instance Execution Time (CPU Units with Unit
Version 3.0 or Later)
Use the following equation to calculate the effect of instance execution on the
cycle time when function block definitions have been created and the
instances copied into the user program using CS/CJ-series CPU Units with
unit version 3.0 or later.
Effect of Instance Execution on Cycle Time
= Startup time (A)
+ I/O parameter transfer processing time (B)
+ Execution time of instructions in function block definition (C)

The following table shows the length of time for A, B, and C.
Operation
CS1H-CPU6@H
CJ1H-CPU6@H
Startup time not including 6.8 µs
I/O parameter transfer

CPU Unit model
CS1G-CPU4@H
CJ1G-CPU4@H
8.8 µs

Startup time

1-bit I/O variable (BOOL) 0.4 µs
0.7 µs
1-word I/O variable (INT, 0.3 µs
0.6 µs
UINT, WORD)
0.5 µs
0.8 µs
2-word I/O variable
(DINT, UDINT, DWORD,
REAL)
4-word I/O variable (LINT, 1.0 µs
1.6 µs
ULINT, LWORD, LREAL)
Function block defi- Total instruction processing time (same as standard user program)
nition instruction
execution time

I/O parameter transfer processing time
The data type is
indicated in parentheses.

CJ1M-CPU@@
15.0 µs
1.0 µs
0.8 µs
1.1 µs
2.2 µs

Example: CS1H-CPU63H
Input variables with a 1-word data type (INT): 3
Output variables with a 1-word data type (INT): 2
Total instruction processing time in function block definition section: 10 µs
Execution time for 1 instance = 6.8 µs + (3 + 2) × 0.3 µs + 10 µs = 18.3 µs
Note The execution time is increased according to the number of multiple instances
when the same function block definition has been copied to multiple locations.

526

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps

Section 10-5

Number of Function Block
Program Steps (CPU Units
with Unit Version 3.0 or
Later)

Use the following equation to calculate the number of program steps when
function block definitions have been created and the instances copied into the
user program using CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later.

Note

The number of instruction steps in the function block definition (p) will not be
diminished in subsequence instances when the same function block definition
is copied to multiple locations (i.e., for multiple instances). Therefore, in the
above equation, the number of instances is not multiplied by the number of
instruction steps in the function block definition (p).

Number of steps
= Number of instances × (Call part size m + I/O parameter transfer part size n × Number of parameters) + Number of instruction steps in the function block definition p
(See note.)

Contents
m
n

Call part
I/O parameter
transfer part
The data type is
shown in parentheses.

CS/CJ-series CPU Units
with unit version 3.0 or later
57 steps

1-bit I/O variable (BOOL) 6 steps
1-word I/O variable (INT,
6 steps
UINT, WORD)
2-word I/O variable (DINT, 6 steps
UDINT, DWORD, REAL)
4-word I/O variable (LINT, 12 steps
ULINT, LWORD, LREAL)
Number of instruc- The total number of instruction steps (same as standard
tion steps in func- user program) + 27 steps.
tion block definition

Example:
Input variables with a 1-word data type (INT): 5
Output variables with a 1-word data type (INT): 5
Function block definition section: 100 steps
Number of steps for 1 instance = 57 + (5 + 5) × 6 steps + 100 steps + 27 steps
= 244 steps

527

Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps

528

Section 10-5

SECTION 11
Troubleshooting
This section provides information on hardware and software errors that occur during PLC operation.
11-1 Error Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

530

11-2 Error Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

531

11-2-1 Error Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

531

11-2-2 Error Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

531

11-2-3 Error Codes and Error Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

533

11-2-4 Error Processing Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

534

11-2-5 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

536

11-2-6 Power Supply Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

546

11-2-7 Memory Error Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

548

11-2-8 Program Error Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

549

11-2-9 Cycle Time Too Long Error Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

550

11-2-10 PLC Setup Setting Error Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

550

11-2-11 Battery Error Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

551

11-2-12 Environmental Conditions Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

551

11-2-13 I/O Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

552

11-3 Troubleshooting Racks and Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

553

529

Section 11-1

Error Log

11-1 Error Log
Each time that an error occurs, the CPU Unit stores error information in the
Error Log Area. The error information includes the error code (stored in
A400), error contents, and time that the error occurred. Up to 20 records can
be stored in the Error Log.
Errors Generated by
FAL(006)/FALS(007)

In addition to system-generated errors, the PLC records user-defined
FAL(006) and FALS(007) errors, making it easier to track the operating status
of the system.
A user-defined error is generated when FAL(006) or FALS(007) is executed in
the program. The execution conditions of these instructions constitute the
user-defined error conditions. FAL(006) generates a non-fatal error and
FALS(007) generates a fatal error that stops program execution.
The following table shows the error codes for FAL(006) and FALS(007).
Instruction
FAL(006)
FALS(007)

FAL numbers
#0001 to #01FF (1 to 511 decimal)
#0001 to #01FF (1 to 511 decimal)

Error codes
4101 to 42FF
C101 to C2FF

Check the error log by clicking the Error Log Tab in the PLC Errors Window of
the CX-Programmer.

The error information is displayed
here.
The error code is displayed here.

CS1G-H-CPU42

The above example shows that unit number 17 has been duplicated for Special I/O Units.
• Error code 80E9: Unit number duplication error
• Error information: 80 “11”: 11 hex = 17 decimal
For details on error codes and error information, refer to 11-2-5 Error Messages.
Error Log Structure

530

When more than 20 errors occur, the oldest error data (in A100 to A104) is
deleted, the newest record is stored in A195 to A199, and the other errors are
shifted by one.

Section 11-2

Error Processing
Error Log Area

Order of
Error code occurrence

Error code
Error contents
Minute, second
Day, hour

Time of
occurrence

Year, month
Error code
Error contents
Minute, second
Day, hour
Year, month

Time of
occurrence

Error code
Error contents
Minute, second
Day, hour

Time of
occurrence

Year, month

Error Log Pointer (error counter)

The number of records is stored in binary in the Error Log Pointer (A300). The
data in the Error Log can be cleared from a Programming Device.
Note The Error Log Pointer can be reset by turning ON the Error Log Pointer Reset
Bit (A50014), but this operation does not clear the data in the Error Log A100
to A199) itself.

11-2 Error Processing
11-2-1 Error Categories
Errors in CS-series PLCs can be broadly divided into the following three categories.
Category
CPU Standby

Result

Indicators
RUN
ERR/ALM
OFF
OFF

Non-fatal Errors
(including FAL(006))

The CPU Unit will not start operation in RUN or MONITOR mode.
The CPU Unit will continue operat- ON
ing in RUN or MONITOR mode.
(Green)

Flashing
(Red)

Fatal Errors
(including FALS(007))

The CPU Unit will stop operating in OFF
RUN or MONITOR mode.

ON
(Red)

Comments
--Other indicators will also operate
when a communications error has
occurred or the Output OFF Bit is
ON.
The indicators will all be OFF
when there is a power interruption.

11-2-2 Error Information
There are basically four sources of information on errors that have occurred:
1,2,3...

1. The CPU Unit’s indicators
2. The Auxiliary Area Error Flags
3. The Auxiliary Area Error Information Words

531

Section 11-2

Error Processing
4. The Auxiliary Area Error Code Word
CPU Unit Indicators

Auxiliary Area Flags and Words
RUN: Lit when the PLC is in
RUN or MONITOR mode.

RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMM

Error Flags

ERR/ALM: Flashing: Non-fatal error
Lit: Fatal error

Flags indicating
the type of error.

INH: Lit when Output OFF Bit
has been turned ON.
PRPHL: Lit when the CPU Unit is
communicating through
the peripheral port

Error Info.

Words providing error information.

Error Code
Word (A400)

A400 contains
the error code.
(See note.)

COMM: Lit when the CPU Unit is
communicating through
the RS-232C port

CS1-H CPU Unit Indicators
RUN: Lit when the PLC is in
RUN or MONITOR mode.

.BKUP: Lit when data is
being written to the flash
memory.

ERR/ALM:
Flashing: Non-fatal error
Lit: Fatal Error

RUN

ERR/ALM
INH
PRPH

.INH: Lit when Output OFF
Bit has been turned ON.

BKUP
COMM

.COMM: Lit when the
CPU Unit is
communicating through
the RS-232C port.

PRPHL: Lit when the CPU
Unit is communicating
through the peripheral port.

Note When two or more errors occur at the same time, the highest (most serious)
error code will be stored in A400.

Indicator Status and Error Conditions
The following table shows the status of the CPU Unit’s indicators for errors
that have occurred in RUN or MONITOR mode.
Indicator*
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL
COMM

532

CPU error

CPU reset

OFF
ON
OFF
-----

OFF
OFF
OFF
-----

CPU
standby
OFF
OFF
-------

Fatal error
OFF
ON
-------

Non-fatal
error
ON
Flashing
-------

Communications error
Peripheral RS-232C
ON
ON
--------OFF
----OFF

Output
OFF Bit ON
----ON
-----

Section 11-2

Error Processing

11-2-3 Error Codes and Error Flags
Classification
Error code
Fatal system
80F1
errors
80C0 to 80C7,
80CF
80CB
80E9
80E1
80E0
80F0
809F
80EA
82F0
Non-fatal sys- 008B
tem errors
009A
009B
00E7
02F0

User-defined
fatal errors

0200 to 020F
0300 to 035F
00A0 to 00A1
00F7
0400 to 040F
0500 to 055F
4101 to 42FF

User-defined
C101 to C2FF
non-fatal errors

Error name
Memory error
I/O bus error

Page
538
539

I/O bus error B
Duplicated number error
Too many I/O points
I/O setting error
Program error
Cycle time too long
Expansion Rack number duplicated
Fatal Inner Board error
Interrupt task error
Basic I/O error
PLC Setup setting error
I/O verification error
Inner Board error

539
539
540
540
541
542
539
539
543
543
544
544
544

CS1-series CPU Bus Unit error
Special I/O Unit error
SYSMAC BUS error
Battery error
CS1-series CPU Bus Unit setting error
Special I/O Unit setting error
FALS(007) error
(C101 to C2FF are stored for FALS
numbers 001 to 511)
FAL(006) error
(4101 to 42FF are stored for FAL numbers 001 to 511)

544
544
544
544
545
545
543

542

533

Section 11-2

Error Processing

11-2-4 Error Processing Flowchart
Use the following flowchart as a guide for error processing with a Programming Console.
Error occurred
during operation

Is the POWER
indicator lit?

OFF

Check
Power
Check
thethe
Power
Supply
(page
16).
Supply
(page
546)

Lit

Is the RUN indicator lit?

Lit

OFF
Is the ERR/ALM
indicator flashing?
ERR/ALM indicator lit.
Flashing
Connect the
Programming Console.

Connect the
Programming Console.

Non-fatal error
Is the Programming
Console's display
operating?

- - - - displayed.

Yes

Fatal error

534

CPU Error
(WDT error)

OFF

Check I/O and environmental
conditions (See note 1.)

Section 11-2

Error Processing
Non-fatal error

Fatal error

MEMORY ERR *

Memory error

SYS FAIL FAL ***

(See note 1.)

FAL error

(See note 2.)

I/O BUS ERR

I/O bus error

INTRPT ERR

Interrupt
Task error

UNIT NO. DPL ERR

Unit Number
Duplication
error

DENSITY I/O ERR

RACK NO. DPL ERR

Rack Number
Duplication
error

PC SETUP ERR

PLC Setup
error

I/O VRFY ERR

I/O Table
Verification
error

NO-FTL INNER ERR

Non-fatal
Inner Board
error

FATAL INNER ERR

TOO MANY I/O PNT

I/O SET ERR

Program error

CYCLE TIME ERR

(See note 2.)

Too Many I/O
Points error

I/O Table
Setting error

PROGRAM ERR

SYS FAIL FALS

Fatal Inner
Board error

Cycle Time
Overrun error

System FALS
error

CPU BU ERR **
(See note 3.)

SIOU ERR **
(See note 3.)

SYSBUS ERR **
(See note 4.)

BAT LOW

CPU BU STUP **
(See note 3.)

SIOU SETUP **
(See note 3.)

Note

Basic I/O
error

CS1 CPU
Bus Unit error

Special I/O
Unit error

SYSMAC
BUS error

Battery error

CPU
Bus Unit
Setup error
Special I/O
Unit Setup
error

1. The rack number will be given at *.
2. The FAL./FALS number will be given at ***.
3. The unit number will be given at **.
4. The master number will be given at *.

535

Section 11-2

Error Processing

11-2-5 Error Messages
The following tables show error messages for errors which can occur in CSseries PLCs and indicate the likely cause of the errors.
!Caution Always check the safety of the controlled system before turning the power
supply OFF or ON.

CPU Errors
A CPU error has occurred if the indicators have the following conditions in
RUN or MONITOR mode. A Programming Device, such as a Programming
Console, cannot be connected when the CPU Unit is in this state.
Power Supply
Unit Indicator
POWER
ON

Status

Error

Stopped

CPU error

CPU Unit Indicators
RUN
---

ProgramError
Error
Flags
ming
flags in
code (in
and
Console Auxiliary
A400)
word
display
Area
data
––––
None
None
None

ERR/ALM
ON

INH
---

Probable cause

PRPHL
---

COMM
---

Possible remedy

Watchdog timer has Turn the power OFF and
exceeded maxirestart. The Unit may be
mum setting.
faulty. Contact your OMRON
representative if the problem
persists.

CPU Reset
The following indicators status indicates an Expansion Rack power interruption, not a CPU error. A Programming Device, such as a Programming Console, cannot be connected when the CPU Unit is in this state.
Power Supply
Unit Indicator
POWER
ON
Status

Stopped

CPU Unit Indicators
RUN
OFF

Flags
ProgramError
Error
ming
flags in code (in
Console Auxiliary
A400)
display
Area
CPU reset – – – –
None
None
None
Error

ERR/ALM
OFF

INH
OFF

Probable cause

Power is not being
supplied to an
Expansion Rack.
An I/O Connecting
Cable is not connected properly.
For example, the IN
and OUT connections between the
CPU Rack and an
Expansion Rack are
reversed.

PRPHL
---

COMM
---

Possible remedy

Supply power to the Expansion Rack.
Turn OFF the power supply,
check the connections all I/O
Connecting Cables, and turn
the power supply back ON.

Note When power supply is interrupted to an Expansion Rack, the CPU Unit will
stop program execution and the same operations as are performed when the
power supply to the CPU Unit is interrupted will be performed. For example, if
the power OFF interrupt task is enabled, it will be executed. If power is then

536

Section 11-2

Error Processing

restored to the Expansion Rack, the CPU Unit will perform startup processing,
i.e., the same operational status as existed before the power interrupt will not
necessarily be continued.

CPU Standby Errors
A CPU standby error has occurred if the indicators have the following conditions in RUN or MONITOR mode.
Power Supply
Unit Indicator
POWER
ON
Status

Error

Stopped

CPU
standby
error

Startup Condition

CPU Unit Indicators
RUN
OFF

ProgramError
Error
Flags
ming
flags in code (in
Console Auxiliary
A400)
display
Area
CPU
None
None
None
WAIT’G

ERR/ALM
OFF

INH
---

PRPHL
---

Probable cause

Recognition of one
or more of the following Unit has not
been completed:
CPU Bus Units,
Special I/O Units,
High-density I/O
Units, Interrupt Input
Units, or an Inner
Board.
Power is not being
supplied to a Slave
Rack or the terminator is not recognized
in a Remote I/O System.

COMM
---

Possible remedy

Turn OFF the power supply,
check the mounting and settings of all the Unit and the
Inner Board, and turn the
power supply back ON.

Check the power supply to
the Slave Racks and terminating resistance settings for
Remote I/O Systems. Also
check cable connections in
the Remote I/O Systems.

The CS1-H CPU Units support a Startup Condition setting.
To start the CPU Unit in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode even if there is one
or more Boards or Units that has not completed startup processing, set the
Startup Condition to 1.
PLC Setup
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit
+83
15

Name

Settings

Startup Condition

Default

0: Wait for Units
and Boards.
1: Don’t wait.

0: Wait for Units
and Boards.

Note The operation for Inner Boards, however, also depends on the next setting of
the Inner Board Setting in word +84, but 15. This bit must also be turned ON
to not wait for Inner Boards.

Fatal Errors
A fatal error has occurred if the indicators have the following conditions in
RUN or MONITOR mode.
Power Supply
Unit Indicator
POWER
ON

CPU Unit Indicators
RUN
OFF

ERR/ALM
ON

INH
---

PRPHL
---

COMM
---

537

Section 11-2

Error Processing

Connect the CX-Programmer or a Programming Console to display the error
message (in the PLC Error Window on the CX-Programmer). The cause of
the error can be determined from the error message and related Auxiliary
Area flags and words.
Errors are listed in order of importance. When two or more errors occur at the
same time, the more serious error’s error code will be recorded in A400.
If the IOM Hold Bit hasn’t been turned ON to protect I/O memory, all nonretained areas of I/O memory will be cleared when a fatal error other than
FALS(007) occurs. If the IOM Hold Bit is ON, the contents of I/O memory will
be retained but all outputs will be turned OFF.
If the IOM Hold Bit hasn’t been turned ON to protect I/O memory, all nonretained areas of I/O memory will be cleared when a fatal error other than
FALS(007) occurs. When the IOM Hold Bit is ON, the contents of I/O memory
will be retained but all outputs will be turned OFF.
Error

Memory
error

ProgramError
Flag and
ming
code (in word data
Console
A400)
display
MEMORY 80F1
A40115:
ERR
Memory
Error Flag
A403:
Memory
Error Location

Probable cause

An error has occurred in
See below.
memory. A bit in A403 will
turn ON to show the location
of the error as listed below.
Check the program and correct the error.
A40300 ON:
A checksum error has
occurred in the user program
memory. The power was
turned OFF while storing
data to the flash memory
(backup memory).
A40304 ON:
A checksum error has
occurred in the PLC Setup.
A40305 ON:
A checksum error has
occurred in the registered
I/O table.
A40307 ON:
A checksum error has
occurred in the routing
tables.
A40308 ON:
A checksum error has
occurred in the CS-series
CPU Bus Unit setup.
A40309 ON:
An error occurred during
automatic transfer from the
Memory Card at startup.
A40310 ON:
Flash memory has failed.

538

Possible remedy

Clear the entire PLC Setup to 0000 and
reenter the settings.
Initialize the registered I/O table and generate a new I/O table.

Initialize the routing tables and reenter
the tables.

Initialize the CS-series CPU Bus Unit
setup and reenter the settings.

Make sure that the Memory Card is
installed properly and that the correct file
is on the Card.
Retransfer the user program and parameter data.

Section 11-2

Error Processing
Error

I/O Bus
error

Unit/Rack
Number
Duplication error

Programming
Console
display

Error
code (in
A400)

Flag and
word data

Probable cause

Possible remedy

I/O BUS
ERR

80C0 to
80C7 or
80CF

A40114: I/O
Bus Error
Flag
A404: I/O
Bus Error
Slot and
Rack Numbers

Error has occurred in the bus
line between the CPU and
I/O Units.
A40400 to A40407 contain
the error slot number (00 to
09) in binary. 0F indicates
that the slot cannot be determined.
A40408 to A40415 contain
the error rack number (00 to
07) in binary. 0F indicates
that the rack cannot be
determined.

Try turning the power OFF and ON
again.
If the error isn’t corrected, turn the power
OFF and check cable connections
between the I/O Units and Racks.
Check for damage to the cable or Units.
Correct the cause of the error and then
turn the Rack’s power supply OFF and
then ON again

I/O BUS
ERR B

80CB

A404: I/O
Bus Error
Slot and
Rack Numbers

Turn OFF the power, replace the Backplane with a CS1W-BC@@@ Backplane,
and turn the power back ON.

UNIT No.
DPL ERR

80E9

A40113:
Duplication
Error Flag
A410: CPU
Bus Unit
Duplicate
Number
Flags
A40113:
Duplication
Error Flag
A411 to
A416: Special I/O Unit
Duplicate
Number
Flags
A409:
Expansion
Rack Duplicate Rack
Number

I/O bus error B: CPU Unit is
mounted to a Duplex Backplane.
Note:
A40400 to A40407 = 0F hex
A40408 to A40415 = 0B hex
The same number has been
allocated to more than one
CS-series CPU Bus Unit.
Bits A41000 to A41015 correspond to unit numbers 0 to
F.

RACK No. 80EA
DPL ERR

Fatal Inner FATAL
Board
INNER
error
ERR

82F0

Check the unit numbers, eliminate the
duplications, and turn the Rack’s power
supply OFF and then ON again.

The same number has been Check the unit numbers, eliminate the
allocated to more than one
duplications, and turn the Rack’s power
Special I/O Unit.
supply OFF and then ON again.
Bits A41100 to A41615 correspond to unit numbers 0 to
95.

Check allocations to Units on the rack
number whose bit in ON in A40900 to
A40907. Correct the allocations so that
no words are allocated more than once,
including to Units on other Racks, and
turn the Rack’s power supply OFF and
then ON again.
Check the first word setting for the Rack
An Expansion I/O Rack’s
indicated in A40900 to A40907 and
starting word address
change the setting to a valid word
exceeds CIO 0901.
address below CIO 0901 with a ProThe corresponding bit in
A40900 to A40907 (Racks 0 gramming Device.
to 7) will be turned ON.
The Inner Board is faulty.
Check the indicators on the Inner Board
A40112:
and refer to the operation manual for the
Inner Board An error occurred on the
Inner bus.
Inner Board.
Stopped
Error Flag
A424: Inner
Board Error
Information
The same I/O word has
been allocated to more than
one Basic I/O Unit.

539

Section 11-2

Error Processing
Error

Programming
Console
display

Error
code (in
A400)

Too Many
I/O Points
error

TOO
MANY I/O
PNT

80E1

I/O Table
Setting
error

I/O SET
ERR

80E0

540

Flag and
word data

Probable cause

The probable causes are
listed below. The 3-digit
binary value (000 to 101) in
A40713 to A40715 indicates
the cause of the error. The
value of these 3 bits is also
output to A40700 to A40712.
1) The total number of I/O
points set in the I/O Table
(excluding Slave Racks)
exceeds the maximum
allowed for the CPU Unit
(bits: 000).
2) There are more than 32
interrupt inputs (bits: 001).
3) The unit number of a
Slave Unit is duplicated or
the number of I/O points on
a C500 Slave Unit exceeds
320 (bits: 010).
4) The unit number of an I/O
Interface (excluding Slave
Racks) is duplicated (bits:
011).
5) The unit number of a Master Unit is duplicated or the
unit number is outside of the
allowed setting range (bits:
100).
6) The number of Expansion Racks exceeds the
maximum (bits: 101).
7) C200H Special I/O Unit
not detected or Remote I/O
not detected (bits: 110)
A40110: I/O Input and output word alloSetting
cations do no agree with
Error Flag
input/output words required
by Units actually mounted.
A40111:
Too Many
I/O Points
Flag
A407: Too
Many I/O
Points,
Details

Possible remedy

Correct the problem indicated by the
content of A407 and turn the power OFF
and ON again.

Check the I/O table with I/O Table Verification operation. When the system has
been corrected, register the I/O table
again.

Section 11-2

Error Processing
Error

Program
error

Programming
Console
display

Error
code (in
A400)

PROGRAM
ERR

80F0

Flag and
word data

Probable cause

A40109:
Program
Error Flag
A294 to
A299: Program error
information

The program is incorrect.
See the following rows of
this table for details.
The address at which the
program stopped will be output to A298 and A299.
A29511: No END error

Possible remedy

Check A295 to determine the type of
error that occurred and check
A298/A299 to find the program address
where the error occurred.
Correct the program and then clear the
error.
Be sure that there is an END(001)
instruction at the end of the task specified in A294 (program stop task number).
• Check the startup cyclic task attributes.
A29512: Task error
A task error has occurred.
• Check the execution status of each
The following conditions will
task as controlled by TKON(820) and
generate a task error.
TKOF(821).
1) There isn’t an executable • Make sure that all of the task numbers
cyclic task.
specified in TKON(820), TKOF(821),
2) There isn’t a program allo- and MSKS(690) instructions have corresponding tasks. Use MSKS(690) to
cated to the task. Check
mask any I/O or scheduled interrupt
A294 for the number of the
tasks that are not being used and that
task missing a program.
do not have programs set for them.
3) The task specified in a
TKON(820), TKOF(821), or • If the power OFF interrupt task is
enables in the PLC Setup, make sure
MSKS(690) instruction
that the power OFF interrupt task has
doesn’t exist.
been created.
A29510: Illegal access error Find the program address where the
An illegal access error has
error occurred (A298/A299) and correct
occurred and the PLC Setup the instruction.
has been set to stop operation for an instruction error.
The following are illegal
access errors:
1. Reading/writing a parameter area.
2. Writing memory that is not
installed.
3. Writing an EM bank that is
EM file memory.
4. Writing to a read-only
area.
5. Indirect DM/EM address
that is not in BCD when BCD
mode is specified.
Find the program address where the
A29509: Indirect DM/EM
error occurred (A298/A299) and correct
BCD error
the indirect addressing or change to
An indirect DM/EM BCD
binary mode.
error has occurred and the
PLC Setup has been set to
stop operation for an instruction error.

541

Section 11-2

Error Processing
Error

Programming
Console
display

Error
code (in
A400)

Flag and
word data

Probable cause

Program
error
(contd.)

PROGRAM
ERR

80F0

A40109:
Program
Error Flag
A294 to
A299: Program error
information

A29508: Instruction error
An instruction processing
error has occurred and the
PLC Setup has been set to
stop operation for an instruction error.

Cycle
Time
Overrun
error

CYCLE
809F
TIME ERR

A40108:
Cycle Time
Too Long
Flag

A40515:
Peripheral
Servicing
Cycle Time
Too Long

System
SYS FAIL
FALS error FALS

542

C101 to
C2FF

A40106:
FALS Error
Flag

Possible remedy

Find the program address where the
error occurred (A298/A299) and correct
the instruction.
Alternatively, set the PLC Setup to
continue operation for an instruction
error.
A29513: Differentiation over- After writing any changes to the program,
flow error
switch to PROGRAM mode and then
Too many differentiated
return to MONITOR mode to continue
editing the program.
instructions have been
inserted or deleted during
online editing.
Retransfer the program to the CPU Unit.
A29514: Illegal instruction
error
The program contains an
instruction that cannot be
executed.
A29515: UM overflow error
Use a Programming Device to transfer
The last address in UM (user the program again.
program memory) has been
exceeded.
The cycle time has
Change the program to reduce the cycle
exceeded the maximum
time or change the maximum cycle time
cycle time (watch cycle time) setting.
set in the PLC Setup.
Check the Maximum Interrupt Task
Processing Time in A440 and see if the
Cycle Time Watch Time can be changed.
The cycle time can be reduced by dividing unused parts of the program into
tasks, jumping unused instructions in
tasks, and disabling cyclic refreshing of
Special I/O Units that don’t require
frequent refreshing.
Turns ON when the periph- Change the CPU Processing Mode in
eral servicing time in a Paral- the PLC Setup to Normal Mode or
lel Processing Mode
Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode, or
exceeds 2 s.
review the system to reduce the event
load.
Parallel processing may not be possible
if the program execution time (given in
A66) is too short (e.g., less than 0.2 ms).
FALS(007) has been exeCorrect according to cause indicated by
cuted in the program.
the FAL number (set by user).
The error code in A400 will
indicate the FAL number.
The leftmost digit of the code
will be C and the rightmost 3
digits of the code will be from
100 to 2FF hex and will correspond to FAL numbers
001 to 511.

Section 11-2

Error Processing
Non-fatal Errors

A non-fatal error has occurred if the indicators have the following conditions in
RUN or MONITOR mode.
Power Supply
Unit Indicator
POWER
ON

CPU Unit Indicators
RUN
ON

ERR/ALM
Flashing

INH
---

PRPHL
---

COMM
---

ProgramError
Flag and
ming
code (in word data
Console
A400)
display
System FAL SYS FAIL 4101 to A40215:
error
FAL
42FF
FAL Error
Flag
A360 to
A391: Executed FAL
Number
Flags

Interrupt
Task error

INTRPT
ERR

008B

Basic I/O
error

DENSITY
I/O ERR

009A

Probable cause

FAL(006) has been executed in program.
Executed FAL Number
Flags A36001 to A39115
correspond to FAL numbers
001 to 511.
The error code in A400 will
indicate the FAL number.
The leftmost digit of the
code will be 4 and the rightmost 3 digits of the code will
be from 100 to 2FF hex and
will correspond to FAL numbers 001 to 511.
PLC Setup Set to Detect
A40213:
Interrupt Task Errors:
Interrupt
Task Error An interrupt task was executed for more than 10 ms
Flag
A426: Inter- during I/O refreshing of a
C200H Special I/O Unit or a
rupt Task
Error, Task SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O
Unit.
Number
PLC Setup Set to Detect
Interrupt Task Errors:
Attempted to refresh a Special I/O Unit’s I/O from an
interrupt task with
IORF(097) while the Unit’s
I/O was being refreshed by
cyclic I/O refreshing (duplicate refreshing).
An error has occurred in a
A40212:
Basic I/O Unit (including
Basic I/O
C200H High-density I/O
Unit Error
Units and C200H Interrupt
Flag
A408: Basic Input Units).
I/O Unit
A408 contains the errant
Error, Slot
rack/slot number.
Number

Possible remedy

Correct according to cause indicated by
FAL number (set by user).

Check the program. Either disable
detection of interrupt task errors in the
PLC Setup (address 128, bit 14) or correct the problem in the program.

Check the errant Unit for blown fuse, etc.

543

Section 11-2

Error Processing
Error

Programming
Console
display

Error
code (in
A400)

PLC Setup
error

PLC Setup 009B
ERR

I/O Table
Verification
error

I/O VRFY
ERR

Non-fatal
NO-FTL
Inner Board INNER
error
ERR

00E7

02F0

CS-series
CPU Bus
Unit error

CPU BU
ERR

Special I/O
Unit error

SIOU ERR 0300 to
035F, or
03FF

SYSMAC
BUS error

SYSBUS
ERR

00A0 or
00A1

Battery
error

BATT
LOW

00F7

544

0200 to
020F

Flag and
word data

A40210:
PLC Setup
Error Flag
A406: PLC
Setup Error
Location
A40209: I/O
Verification
Error Flag

Probable cause

Possible remedy

There is a setting error in
Change the indicated setting to a valid
the PLC Setup. The location setting.
(binary offset) of the error is
written to A406.

A Unit has been added or
removed, so the registered
I/O tables don’t agree with
the actual Units in the PLC.
The I/O Verification Error
Flag goes OFF when the situation is corrected.
A40208:
An error occurred in the
Inner Board Inner Board
Error Flag
A424: Inner
Board Error
Information
An error occurred in a data
A40207:
exchange between the CPU
CS-series
Unit and a CS-series CPU
CPU Bus
Bus Unit.
Unit Error
Flag
The corresponding flag in
A417: CS- A417 is turned ON to indiseries CPU cate the problem Unit. Bits
A41700 to A41715 correBus Unit
Error, Unit spond to unit numbers 0 to
F.
Number
Flags
A40206:
An error occurred in a data
Special I/O exchange between the CPU
Unit Error
Unit and a Special I/O Unit.
Flag
The corresponding flag in
A418 to A423 is turned ON
A418 to
A423: Spe- to indicate the problem Unit.
cial I/O Unit Bits A41800 to A42315 corError, Unit respond to unit numbers 0
to 95.
Number
Flags
A40205:
An error has occurred
SYSMAC
between a Master and Slave
BUS Error Rack.
Flag
A Unit has been removed
A405: SYS- from or added to a Slave
MAC BUS Rack.
Master
The flag for the affected
Error Flags Master Unit will be turned
ON.
A40500: Flag for Master
Unit #0
A40501: Flag for Master
Unit #1
This error occurs when the
A40204:
PLC Setup has been set to
Battery
detect battery errors and the
Error Flag
CPU Unit’s backup battery
is missing or its voltage has
dropped.

Execute the I/O Table Verify operation to
find the problem location. Create new
I/O tables or replace the Unit to match
the registered I/O tables.

Check the Inner Board indicators. Refer
to the Inner Board’s operation manual
for details.

Check the Unit indicated in A417. Refer
to the Unit’s operation manual to find
and correct the cause of the error.
Restart the Unit by toggling its Restart
Bit or turn the power OFF and ON again.
Replace the Unit if it won’t restart.

Check the Unit indicated in A418 to
A423. Refer to the Unit’s operation manual to find and correct the cause of the
error. Restart the Unit by toggling its
Restart Bit or turn the power OFF and
ON again.
Replace the Unit if it won’t restart.

Check the condition of the Slave Unit
and the transmission line between the
Master Unit and Slave Unit.

Check battery and replace if necessary.
Change the PLC Setup setting if batteryfree operation is being used.

Section 11-2

Error Processing
Error

Programming
Console
display

Error
code (in
A400)

CS-series
CPU Bus
Unit Setup
error

CPU BU
ST ERR

0400 to
040F

Special I/O
Unit Setup
error

SIOU
SETUP
ERR

0500 to
055F

Flag and
word data

A40203:
CS-series
CPU Bus
Unit Setting Error
Flag
A427: CSseries CPU
Bus Unit
Setting
Error, Unit
Number
Flags
A40202:
Special I/O
Unit Setting Error
Flag
A428 to
A433: Special I/O Unit
Setting
Error, Unit
Number
Flags

Probable cause

Possible remedy

An installed CS-series CPU Change the registered I/O tables.
Bus Unit does not match the
CS-series CPU Bus Unit
registered in the I/O table.
The corresponding flag in
A427 will be ON. Bits 00 to
15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.

An installed Special I/O Unit
does not match the Special
I/O Unit registered in the I/O
table.
The corresponding flag in
A428 to A433 will be ON.
Bits A42800 to A43315 correspond to unit numbers 0
to 95.

Other Errors
Peripheral Port Communications Error
A communications error has occurred in communications with the device connected to the peripheral port if the indicators have the following conditions.
Power Supply
Unit Indicator
POWER
ON

CPU Unit Indicators
RUN
ON

ERR/ALM
---

INH
---

PRPHL
OFF

COMM
---

Check the setting of pin 4 on the DIP switch and the peripheral port settings in
the PLC Setup. Also check the cable connections.
RS-232C Port Communications Error
A communications error has occurred in communications with the device connected to the RS-232C port if the indicators have the following conditions.
Power Supply
Unit Indicator
POWER
ON

CPU Unit Indicators
RUN
ON

ERR/ALM
---

INH
---

PRPHL
---

COMM
OFF

Check the setting of pin 5 on the DIP switch and the RS-232C port settings in
the PLC Setup. Also check the cable connections. If a host computer is connected, check the communications settings of the serial port on the host computer and the communications program in the host computer.

545

Section 11-2

Error Processing

11-2-6 Power Supply Check
The allowable voltage ranges are shown in the following table.
Power Supply Unit
C200HW-PA204S or C200HW-P209R
C200HW-PA204, C200HW-PA204R, or
C200HW-PA204C
C200HW-PD024
C200HW-PD025

546

Power supply
voltage
100 to 120 V AC
200 to 240 V AC
100 to 240 V AC

Allowable voltage
range
85 to 132 V AC
170 to 264 V AC
85 to 264 V AC

24 V DC
24 V DC

20.4 to 28.8 V DC
19.2 to 28.8 V DC

Section 11-2

Error Processing
Power indicator not lit.

Is power being
supplied?

Connect power
supply.

Yes
Not lit

Is voltage selector
set correctly?

Is Power indicator lit?

100 to 120 V AC: Shorted
200 to 240 V AC: Open

Yes
C200HW-PA204S,
C200HW-PA209R only.
No
Is Power indicator lit?

Power supply
voltage in acceptable
range?

Yes

Lit

Yes

Note Always remove the short
jumper before supplying 200
to 240 V AC. The Power Supply Unit will be destroyed if
200 to 240 V AC is supply
with the jumper connected.

Set supply voltage with
in acceptable limits.

No
Not lit

Are there any loose
terminal screws or broken wires?

Yes

Is Power indicator lit?

Lit

Tighten screws or
replace wires.

Not lit

Are the 24-V DC
terminals shorted externally?

Yes

Is Power indicator lit?

Lit

Wire the 24-V DC
terminals correctly.

No
C200H-PA204S only.
Not lit

Replace the Power
Supply Unit.

Is Power indicator lit?

Lit
End

547

Section 11-2

Error Processing

11-2-7 Memory Error Check
Memory error occurred.

A40309
(autotransfer at
startup error)
ON?

Conditions have not been met for
automatic transfer at startup. Confirm
that the required files are on the
Memory Card and the pin 2 on the DIP
switch is OFF.

OFF

A40310 (flash
memory error)
ON?

The write life of the flash memory has
been exceeded. Replace the CPU Unit.

OFF

Battery connected?

Battery-free
operation
necessary?

Check to see if battery-free operation has
been set correctly. Retransfer the user
program and parameters and set the PLC
Setup so that battery errors are not detected.

Mount a Battery.

Power
turned OFF during
backup (with BKUP
lit)?

If power was turned OFF during the backup
operation, retransfer the user program and
parameters.

A hardware fault has occurred in
internal memory. Replace the CPU
Unit.

548

Section 11-2

Error Processing

11-2-8 Program Error Check
Program error occurred.

A29512 (Task
Error Flag) ON?

Power OFF
interrupt task enabled
in PLC setup?

YES

OFF

What is the
value of Task Number #FFFF
when Program Stopped
(A294)?
#8002, #8003,
#8064 to #8083

Make sure that a power OFF
interrupt task has been created.

Not applicable.

An active task does not exist. Check
the usage of TKON(820) and
TKOF(821).

An attempt was made to start a task that
doesn’t exist. Check the MSKS(690)
instruction used to enable the interrupt task
of the specified number.

Not related
to problem.
An attempt was made to start the task of the
specified number with an interrupt. Check
the Inner Board or CPU Bus Unit.

A29511 (No END
Flag) ON?

There is no END(001) in the task
that stopped the program (A294).
Add END(001).

OFF

A29508 to A29510
(instruction error
flags) ON?

The program was stopped for the PLC
Setup setting to stop the program for
instruction errors. Check the program
based on the task (A294) and address
(A298 and A299) that stopped the program.

OFF

Turn the power supply OFF and then back
ON again.

549

Section 11-2

Error Processing

11-2-9 Cycle Time Too Long Error Check
The cycle time was too long.

The peripheral servicing cycle time
exceeded 2 s. Reduce the event load
or set the CPU processing mode in
the PLC Setup to Normal Mode or
Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode.
The Parallel Processing Modes may
not function properly if the program
execution cycle time (A266) is too
short (less than 2 ms.)

A40515 (Peripheral
Servicing Cycle Too
Long) ON?

OFF

Anticipated cycle time
less than PLC Setup
monitor setting?

The monitoring time was execution
time was exceed for program
execution. Increase the monitoring
time set in the PLC Setup.

OFF

Yes
Interrupts being
used?

Yes

A440
(Maximum Interrupt
Processing Time) value
acceptable?

Yes

The problem may be caused by long
processing times for interrupt tasks. Check
the contents of the task specified in A441
(Task with Highest Processing Time).

There may be more than one interrupt
task occurring, causing the cycle time
to be increased. Reduce the
frequency of interrupts.

There may be a bug in the program. Check
all tasks for the following instructions.
FOR and LOOP
JMP, CJP, and CPN

11-2-10 PLC Setup Setting Error Check
PLC Setup setting error occurred.

Value of A406
(location of setting
error)?

The CPU processing mode is set to
Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode, but
the priorities have not been set
correctly.

#00DC(220)

Other

Yes

PLC Setup written
from Programming
Console?

550

The setting indicated by the contents
of A406 is illegal. Check the setting
from a Programming Console.

A communications error may have occurred
during data transfer from the CXProgrammer. Retransfer the PLC Setup.

Not related to
problem.

Section 11-2

Error Processing

11-2-11 Battery Error Check
Battery error occurred.

Set the PLC Setup so that battery
errors are not detected. (DM Area
contents may be unstable when this
setting is used.)
Refer to the CS/CJ Programming
Manual for details.

Yes

Battery-free operation
required?

The Battery is missing or the voltage
has dropped. Replace the Battery.

11-2-12 Environmental Conditions Check
Environmental conditions check

Is the ambient
temperature
below 55°C?

Consider using a
fan or cooler.

Consider using a
heater.

Consider using an
an air conditioner.

Yes
Is the ambient
temperature above
0°C?
Yes

Is the ambient humidity
between 10% and
90%?
Yes

Is noise being
controlled?
Yes

Is the installation
environment okay?
Yes

(See note.)

Install surge protectors or other
noise-reducing
equipment at
noise sources.

Check the structure of the panel
and the installation site.

End.

Note Check for corrosive gases, flammable gases, dust, dirt, salts, metal dust,
direct light, water, oils, and chemicals.

551

Section 11-2

Error Processing

11-2-13 I/O Check
The I/O check flowchart is based on the following ladder diagram section
assuming that SOL1 does not turn ON.
(LS2)
000003

(LS1)
000002

000500

SOL1

000500

START

Indicator of
000500 normal?

YES

Check terminal
voltage of 000500
with tester

Replace terminal
block connector

Correct wiring
NO

ABNORMAL

Voltage normal?

YES

Faulty
terminal block
connector contact?

Output
wiring correct?

Monitor ON/OFF
status of 000500
with Programming
Device

YES

Is the
blown fuse indicator lit?

Operation OK?
NORMAL

Disconnect external
wiring and check terminal voltage of
000500 with tester

NORMAL

Voltage normal?

ABNORMAL

YES

NORMAL

(Units with
internal
fuse)
ABNORMAL

(Unit with- Replace Output
out fuse) Unit

Check output device SOL1

Indicators of
inputs (000002,
000003) normal?

Replace fuse

Check terminal
voltages of 000002
and 000003 with
tester

YES

Check terminal
voltages of 000002
and 000003 with
tester

Voltage normal?

YES
NORMAL

Terminal
screws loose?

ABNORMAL

Voltage normal?
NORMAL

ABNORMAL

Remove external
wiring and mount
Dummy Input Unit
to check

YES

Faulty
terminal block
connector contact?

Input
wiring correct?
NO

Correctly wire

ABNORMAL

Operation OK?

YES

Tighten

Replace terminal
block connector

NORMAL

Replace Input Unit

552

Check LS1 and LS2

Return to START

Replace Input Unit

Section 11-3

Troubleshooting Racks and Units

11-3 Troubleshooting Racks and Units
CPU Racks and Standard Expansion Racks
Symptom
POWER indicator is not lit.

Cause
PCB short-circuited or damaged.
(1) Error in program.
(2) Power line is faulty.
Internal circuitry of Power Supply Unit
is faulty.

RUN output* does not turn ON.
RUN indicator lit.
(*C200HW-PS204R/209R)
(1) The I/O Connecting Cable is faulty.
Serial Communications Unit or CSseries CPU Bus Unit does not operate (2) The I/O bus is faulty.
or malfunctions.
Bits do not operate past a certain point.
Error occurs in units of 8 points.
I/O bit turns ON.
All bits in one Unit do not turn ON.

Remedy
Replace Power Supply Unit or Backplane.
Correct program.
Replace Power Supply Unit.
Replace Power Supply Unit.

Replace the I/O Connecting Cable
Replace the Backplane.

Special I/O Units
Refer to the Operation Manual for the Special I/O Unit to troubleshoot any
other errors.
Symptom
Cause
The ERH and RUN
I/O refreshing is not being performed for the
indicators on the Spe- Unit from the CPU Unit (CPU Unit monitoring
cial I/O Unit are lit.
error).
It’s possible that cyclic refreshing has been disabled for the Special I/O Unit in the Cyclic
Refresh Disable Setting in the PLC Setup (i.e.,
the bit corresponding to the unit number has
been set to 1).

Remedy
Change the bit corresponding to the unit number to 0 to enable cyclic refreshing, or make
sure that the Unit is refreshed from the program
using IORF at least once every 11 s.

CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks
Symptom
CPU Unit won’t operate. (No
response to Programming
Devices and no CPU Unit
indicators are lit.)

Cause

Remedy

(1) Power is not turned ON to an Expansion Turn ON power to all Expansion Racks.
Rack.
(2) An Expansion Rack is not connected
Recheck the connections and configuration
correctly.
using information in 2-3-3 Expansion Racks,
3-5-4 I/O Control Units, I/O Interface Units,
and Terminators, and 5-2-7 I/O Connecting
Cables.
(3) An I/O Connecting Cable is not wired
Reconnect the I/O Connecting Cables in the
correctly.
correct order for output and input connectors.
(4) A Unit is faulty.
Gradually remove/replace Units to determine the Unit that is faulty, including the
Backplane, Power Supply Unit, I/O Units,
I/O Control/Interface Unit, and I/O Connecting Cable.

553

Section 11-3

Troubleshooting Racks and Units
Symptom
Expansion Rack not
detected.

Cause
(1) A Terminator is not connected.
(2) An Expansion Rack is not connected
correctly.

(3) A Unit is faulty.

I/O bus error or I/O verification error occurs.

(1) An I/O Connecting Cable or Terminator
connection is faulty.
(2) Expansion cable is not wired correctly
(3) Noise or other external factor.
(4) A Unit is faulty.

Cycle time is too long.

(1) A CPU Bus Unit that is allocated many
words (e.g., Controller Link Unit) is
mounted to a CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Rack.

Remedy
If the TERM indicator is lit, connect a Terminator.
Recheck the connections and configuration
using information in 2-3-3 Expansion Racks,
3-5-4 I/O Control Units, I/O Interface Units,
and Terminators, and 5-2-7 I/O Connecting
Cables.
Gradually remove/replace Units to determine the Unit that is faulty, including the
Backplane, Power Supply Unit, I/O Units,
I/O Control/Interface Unit, and I/O Connecting Cable.
Check that I/O Connecting Cables and Terminators are connected correctly.
Rewire the terminals using the correct OUTIN sequence.
Separate all cables from possible sources of
noise or place them in metal ducts.
Gradually remove/replace Units to determine the Unit that is faulty, including the
Backplane, Power Supply Unit, I/O Units,
I/O Control/Interface Unit, and I/O Connecting Cable.
Move the CPU Bus Unit to the CPU Rack.

(2) A Unit is faulty.

Gradually remove/replace Units to determine the Unit that is faulty, including the
Backplane, Power Supply Unit, I/O Units,
I/O Control/Interface Unit, and I/O Connecting Cable.
I/O Control Unit and I/O Inter- This is not an error. These Units are not allo- --face Units do not appear on cated I/O words and thus are not registered
in the I/O tables.
CX-Programmer I/O table.

Input Units
Symptom
Cause
Not all inputs turn ON or indi- (1) Power is not supplied to Input Unit.
cators are not lit.
(2) Supply voltage is low.
(3) Terminal block mounting screws are
loose.
(4) Faulty contact of terminal block connector.
Not all inputs turn ON (indica- Input circuit is faulty. (There is a short at the
tor lit).
load or something else that caused an overcurrent to flow.)
Not all inputs turn OFF.
Input circuit is faulty.
Specific bit does not turn ON. (1) Input device is faulty.
(2) Input wiring disconnected.
(3) Terminal block screws are loose.
(4) Faulty terminal block connector contact.
(5) Too short ON time of external input.
(6) Faulty input circuit
(7) Input bit number is used for output
instruction.

554

Remedy
Supply power
Adjust supply voltage to within rated range.
Tighten screws.
Replace terminal block connector.
Replace Unit.

Replace Unit.
Replace input devices.
Check input wiring.
Tighten screws.
Replace terminal block connector.
Adjust input device.
Replace Unit.
Correct program.

Section 11-3

Troubleshooting Racks and Units
Symptom

Cause

Remedy

Specific bit does not turn
OFF.

(1) Input circuit is faulty.
Replace Unit.
(2) Input bit number is used for output
Correct program.
instruction.
Input irregularly turns
(1) External input voltage is low or unstable. Adjust external input voltage to within rated
ON/OFF.
range.
(2) Malfunction due to noise.
Take protective measures against noise,
such as:
(1) Increase input response time (PLC
Setup)
(2) Install surge suppressor.
(3) Install insulation transformer.
(4) Install shielded cables between the Input
Unit and the loads.
(3) Terminal block screws are loose.
Tighten screws.
(4) Faulty terminal block connector contact. Replace terminal block connector.
Error occurs in units of
(1) Common terminal screws are loose.
Tighten screws.
8 points or 16 points, i.e., for (2) Faulty terminal block connector contact. Replace terminal block connector.
the same common.
(3) Faulty data bus
Replace Unit.
(4) Faulty CPU
Replace CPU.
Input indicator is not lit in nor- Faulty indicator or indicator circuit.
Replace Unit.
mal operation.

Output Units
Symptom
Not all outputs turn ON

Cause
Load is not supplied with power.
Load voltage is low.
Terminal block screws are loose.
Faulty terminal block connector contact.
An overcurrent (possibly caused by a
short at the load) resulted in a blown
fuse in the Output Unit. (Some Output
Units provide an indicator for blown
fuses.)
(6) Faulty I/O bus connector contact.
(7) Output circuit is faulty.
(8) If the INH indicator is lit, the Output OFF
Bit (A50015) is ON.
Not all outputs turn OFF
Output circuit is faulty.
Output of a specific bit num- (1) Output ON time too short because of a
ber does not turn ON or indimistake in programming.
cator is not lit.
(2) Bit status controlled by multiple instructions.
(3) Faulty output circuit.
Output of a specific bit num- (1) Faulty output device.
ber does not turn ON (indica- (2) Break in output wiring.
tor lit).
(3) Loose terminal block screws.
(4) Faulty terminal block connector faulty.
(5) Faulty output bit.
(6) Faulty output circuit.
Output of a specific bit num- (1) Faulty output bit.
ber does not turn OFF (indi- (2) Bit does not turn OFF due to leakage
cator is not lit).
current or residual voltage.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Remedy
Supply power
Adjust voltage to within rated range.
Tighten screws.
Replace terminal block connector.
Replace fuse or Unit.

Replace Unit.
Replace Unit.
Turn A50015 OFF.
Replace Unit.
Correct program to increase the time that
the output is ON.
Correct program so that each output bit is
controlled by only one instruction.
Replace Unit.
Replace output device.
Check output wiring.
Tighten screws.
Replace terminal block connector.
Replace relay or Unit.
Replace Unit.
Replace relay or Unit.
Replace external load or add dummy resistor.

555

Section 11-3

Troubleshooting Racks and Units
Symptom
Output of a specific bit number does not turn OFF (indicator lit).
Output irregularly turns
ON/OFF.

Error occurs in units of
8 points or 16 points, i.e., for
the same common.

Output indicator is not lit
(operation is normal).

556

Cause
(1) Bit status controlled by multiple instructions.
(2) Faulty output circuit.
(1) Low or unstable load voltage.
(2) Bit status controlled by multiple instructions.
(3) Malfunction due to noise.

(4)
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)

Terminal block screws are loose.
Faulty terminal block connector contact.
Loose common terminal screw.
Faulty terminal block connector contact.
An overcurrent (possibly caused by a
short at the load) resulted in a blown
fuse in the Output Unit.
(4) Faulty data bus.
(5) Faulty CPU.
Faulty indicator.

Remedy
Correct program.
Replace Unit.
Adjust load voltage to within rated range
Correct program so that each output bit is
controlled by only one instruction.
Protective measures against noise:
(1) Install surge suppressor.
(2) Install insulation transformer.
(3) Use shielded cables between the Output
Unit and the loads.
Tighten screws.
Replace terminal block connector.
Tighten screws.
Replace terminal block connector.
Replace fuse or Unit.

Replace Unit.
Replace CPU.
Replace Unit.

SECTION 12
Inspection and Maintenance
This section provides inspection and maintenance information.
12-1 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

558

12-1-1 Inspection Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

558

12-1-2 Unit Replacement Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

559

12-2 Replacing User-serviceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

560

12-2-1 Battery Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

560

12-2-2 Output Unit Fuse Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

565

12-2-3 Relay Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

567

557

Section 12-1

Inspections

12-1 Inspections
Daily or periodic inspections are required in order to maintain the PLC’s functions in peak operating condition.

12-1-1 Inspection Points
Although the major electronic components in CS-series PLCs have an
extremely long life time, they can deteriorate under improper environmental
conditions. Periodic inspections are thus required to ensure that the required
conditions are being kept.
Inspection is recommended at least once every six months to a year, but more
frequent inspections will be necessary in adverse environments.
Take immediate steps to correct the situation if any of the conditions in the following table are not met.

Inspection Points
No.
Item
1
Source Power
Supply

Inspection
Criteria
Check for voltage fluctuations The voltage must be within
at the power supply terminals. the allowable voltage fluctuation range.
(See note.)
Check for voltage fluctuations Voltages must be within
at the I/O terminals.
specifications for each Unit.

I/O Power Supply

Ambient environ- Check the ambient temperament
ture. (Inside the control panel
if the PLC is in a control
panel.)

0 to 55°C

Check the ambient humidity.
Relative humidity must be
(Inside the control panel if the 10% to 90% with no conPLC is in a control panel.)
densation.

558

Installation and
wiring

Check that the PLC is not in
direct sunlight.
Check for accumulation of
dirt, dust, salt, metal filings,
etc.
Check for water, oil, or chemical sprays hitting the PLC.
Check for corrosive or flammable gases in the area of the
PLC.
Check the level of vibration or
shock.
Check for noise sources near
the PLC.
Check that each Unit is
installed securely.
Check that cable connectors
are fully inserted and locked.
Check for loose screws in
external wiring.
Check crimp connectors in
external wiring.
Check for damaged external
wiring cables.

Not in direct sunlight

Action
Use a voltage tester to check the
power supply at the terminals. Take
necessary steps to bring voltage
fluctuations within limits.
Use a voltage tester to check the
power supply at the terminals. Take
necessary steps to bring voltage
fluctuations within limits.
Use a thermometer to check the
temperature and ensure that the
ambient temperature remains
within the allowed range of 0 to
55°C.
Use a hygrometer to check the
humidity and ensure that the ambient humidity remains within the
allowed range.
Protect the PLC if necessary.

No accumulation

Clean and protect the PLC if necessary.

No spray on the PLC

Clean and protect the PLC if necessary.
Check by smell or use a sensor.

No corrosive or flammable
gases
Vibration and shock must
be within specifications.
No significant noise
sources
No looseness

Install cushioning or shock absorbing equipment if necessary.
Either separate the PLC and noise
source or protect the PLC.
Tighten loose screws with a Phillips-head screwdriver.
No looseness
Correct any improperly installed
connectors.
No looseness
Tighten loose screws with a Phillips-head screwdriver.
Adequate spacing between Check visually and adjust if necesconnectors
sary.
No damage
Check visually and replace cables if
necessary.

Section 12-1

Inspections
No.
5

Item
User-serviceable parts

Inspection

Criteria

Action

Check whether internal relays No open relay contacts,
in Relay Output Units have
improper operation, or
reached their service life.
faulty contacts
Refer to Appendix A Specifications of Basic I/O Units
and High-density I/O Units
for information on relay service life.
Life expectancy is 5 years
Check whether the CS1WBAT01 Battery has reached its at 25°C, less at higher temperatures.
service life.
(From 0.4 to 5 years
depending on model,
power supply rate, and
ambient temperature.)
Check for blown fuses.
Preventative maintenance

Replace the relay or Unit.

Replace the battery when its service life has passed even if a battery error has not occurred.
(Battery life depends upon the
model, the percentage of time in
service, and ambient conditions.)
Even if the fuses are not blown,
they should be replace periodically
because they are weakened by
inrush currents.

Note The following table shows the allowable voltage fluctuation ranges for source
power supplies.
Supply voltage
100 to 120 V AC
200 to 240 V AC
24 V DC

Allowable voltage range
85 to 132 V AC
170 to 264 V AC
19.2 to 28.8 V DC

Tools Required for Inspections
Required Tools
• Slotted and Phillips-head screwdrivers
• Voltage tester or digital voltmeter
• Industrial alcohol and clean cotton cloth
Tools Required Occasionally
• Synchroscope
• Oscilloscope with pen plotter
• Thermometer and hygrometer (humidity meter)

12-1-2 Unit Replacement Precautions
Check the following after replacing any faulty Unit.
• Do not replace a Unit until the power is turned OFF.
• Check the new Unit to make sure that there are no errors.
• If a faulty Unit is being returned for repair, describe the problem in as
much detail as possible, enclose this description with the Unit, and return
the Unit to your OMRON representative.
• For poor contact, take a clean cotton cloth, soak the cloth in industrial
alcohol, and carefully wipe the contacts clean. Be sure to remove any lint
prior to remounting the Unit.
Note

1. When replacing a CPU Unit, be sure that not only the user program but
also all other data required for operation is transferred to or set in the new
CPU Unit before starting operation, including DM Area and HR Area settings. If data area and other data are not correct for the user program, un-

559

Section 12-2

Replacing User-serviceable Parts

expected accidents may occur. Be sure to include the routing tables,
Controller Link Unit data link tables, network parameters, and other CPU
Bus Unit data, which are stored as parameters in the CPU Unit. Refer to
the CPU Bus Unit and Special I/O Unit operation manuals for details on the
data required by each Unit.
2. The simple backup operation can be used to store the user program and
all parameters for the CS1-H CPU Unit, DeviceNet Units, Serial Communications Units, and other specific Units in a Memory Card as backup files.
A Memory Card and the simple backup operation can be used to easily restore data after replacing any of these Units. Refer to the CS/CJ Series
Programming Manual (W394) for details.

12-2 Replacing User-serviceable Parts
The following parts should be replaced periodically as preventative maintenance. The procedures for replacing these parts are described later in this
section.
• Battery (the CPU Unit’s RAM-backup battery)
• Output Unit fuses (in Transistor Output and Triac Output Units)
• Output Unit relays (in Relay Output Units)

12-2-1 Battery Replacement
Battery Functions
The battery retains the following data of the CPU Unit’s RAM when the main
power supply is OFF.
• Retained regions of I/O memory (such as the Holding Area and DM Area)
If the battery is not installed or battery voltage drops too low, the clock will
stop and the data in RAM will not be stable when the main power supply turns
OFF.

Battery Service Life and Replacement Period
At 25°C, the maximum service life for batteries is 5 years whether or not
power is supplied to the CPU Unit while the battery is installed. The battery’s
lifetime will be shorter when it is used at higher temperatures and when power
is not supplied to the CPU Unit for long periods.
The following table shows minimum lifetimes and typical lifetimes for the
backup batterys.
Model
CS1H-CPU@@H
CS1G-CPU@@H

Approx.
Approx. minimum
maximum lifetime lifetime (See note.)
5 years
15,000 hours (1.7
years)
5 years
18,000 hours (2.1
years)

Typical lifetime
(See note.)
43,000 hours (5
years)
43,000 hours (5
years)

Note The minimum lifetime is the memory backup time at an ambient temperature
of 55°C. The typical lifetime is the memory backup time at an ambient temperature of 25°C.

560

Section 12-2

Replacing User-serviceable Parts
Memory Backup Time
5 yr
4 yr

CS1G-CPU@@H
3 yr
2 yr

CS1H-CPU@@H
1 yr

25°C

40°C

55°C

Ambient temperature

This graphic is for reference only

Low Battery Indicators
If the PLC Setup has been set to detect a low-battery error, the ERR/ALM
indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash when the CPU Unit detects that
the battery is nearly discharged.

When the ERR/ALM indicator flashes, connect the CX-Programmer to the
peripheral port and read the error message. If the message “BATT LOW”
appears on the Programming Console* and the Battery Error Flag (A40204) is
ON*, first check whether the battery is properly connected to the CPU Unit. If
the battery is properly connected, replace the battery as soon as possible.

BATT LOW
Once a low-battery error has been detected, the battery will fail in 5 days. Battery failure can be delayed by ensuring that the CPU Unit power is not turned
OFF until the battery has been replaced.
Note *The PLC Setup must be set to detect a low-battery error (Detect Low Battery). If this setting has not been made, the BATT LOW error message will not
appear on the Programming Console and the Battery Error Flag (A40204) will
not go ON when the battery fails.

Replacement Battery
The battery replacement method depends the CPU Unit’s unit version.
!Caution We recommend replacing the battery with the power OFF to prevent the CPU
Unit’s sensitive internal components from being damaged by static electricity.
The battery can be replaced with the power ON, but be sure to touch a
grounded metal object to discharge any static electricity before replacing the
battery. After replacing the battery, connect a Programming Device and clear
the battery error.

561

Section 12-2

Replacing User-serviceable Parts
Unit Versions and Corresponding Battery Replacement Methods
Type

CS1-H CPU Units

Unit version

Number of
battery
connectors

Replacement
time (see note)

Pre-Ver. 2.0
Unit Ver. 2.0

3 min.

Unit Ver. 3.0

3 min.

Replacement method

Refer to Replacement Procedure
for CS1-H CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0
and Ver. 2.0) with One Battery
Connector.
Refer to Replacement Procedure
for CS1-H (Ver. 3.0) CPU Units
with Two Battery Connectors.

Note The replacement time indicates the time required to install a new battery after
turning OFF the power (25°C). If the CPU Unit is without a battery for a longer
period of time, data will not be stable.
Replacement Procedure for CS1-H CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 and Ver. 2.0) with One Battery Connector
Use the following procedure to replace a battery that has been completely discharged.
1,2,3...

1. Turn OFF the power to the CPU Unit. (If the power was already OFF, turn
the power ON for at least one minute before turning the power OFF again.)

Note There is a capacitor in the CPU Unit that will back up memory while the battery is being replaced. If this capacitor is not completely charged by turning
ON the power supply for one minute, data will not be stable during battery
replacement.
2. Insert a small flat-blade screwdriver into the notch at the bottom of the battery compartment cover and lift open the cover.
3. Disconnect the connector under the cover of the CPU Unit, remove the old
battery from the compartment, and replace the battery with a new one.
Note Complete the battery replacement procedure (at an ambient temperature of
25°C) within three minutes of turning OFF the power supply. If more than
three minutes elapse without a battery installed in the CPU Unit, data will not
be stable during battery replacement.
Replacement Procedure for CS1-H (Ver. 3.0) CPU Units with Two Battery Connectors
Use the following procedure to replace a battery that has been completely discharged.
When replacing a battery with the power OFF, connect the new battery while
the old battery is in place. Remove the old battery after connecting the new
battery. (There are two pairs of identical connectors for the battery. The old
battery will not be charged even if the new battery is connected at the same
time.)
1,2,3...

1. Turn OFF the power to the CPU Unit. (If the power was already OFF, turn
the power ON for at least ten seconds before turning the power OFF
again.)
2. Insert a small flat-blade screwdriver into the notch at the bottom of the battery compartment cover and lift open the cover.

562

Section 12-2

Replacing User-serviceable Parts

3. Remove the old battery from the compartment, but leave its connector connected.
Old battery

Leave connected.

Old battery

4. Insert the new battery into the battery compartment with the cable and
connector facing outward.
Battery compartment

New battery
New battery

Old battery

5. With the old battery connected, insert the new battery’s connector in the
open connector in the CPU Unit. Be sure that the connector is inserted so
that its red wire is at the top and the white wire is at the bottom.

563

Section 12-2

Replacing User-serviceable Parts
New battery

Old battery
Old battery

6. Remove the old battery’s connector.

Old battery

7. Push the new battery’s wire into the battery compartment and close the
cover.

8. Connect a Programming Device and verify that the Battery Error has been
cleared.
Note

1. If the above procedure is not used and the old battery is disconnected with
the power ON (power ON and no battery connected), memory will still be
backed up. However, be sure to touch a grounded metal object to discharge any static electricity before replacing the battery.
2. With CPU Units that have two battery connectors, leave the old battery attached while connecting the new battery. This prevents a battery error occurring during battery replacement. Remove the old battery after the new
battery is connected.

!Caution With a CS1-H CPU Unit, do not short the battery terminals or charge, disassemble, heat, or incinerate the battery. Do not subject the battery to strong
shocks. Doing any of these may result in leakage, rupture, heat generation, or
ignition of the battery.

564

Section 12-2

Replacing User-serviceable Parts

!Caution Dispose of any battery that has been dropped on the floor or otherwise subjected to excessive shock. Batteries that have been subjected to shock may
leak if they are used.
!Caution Do not allow unqualified persons to replace batteries. UL standards required
that batteries be replaced only by experienced technicians.
!Caution Turn ON the power after replacing the battery for a CPU Unit that has been
unused for a long time. Leaving the CPU Unit unused again without turning
ON the power even once after the battery is replaced may result in a shorter
battery life.

12-2-2 Output Unit Fuse Replacement
The following Transistor and Triac Output Units contain one fuse for each
common. For the C200H-OD411/OD213/OD221/OA223 Units which have a
blown-fuse (F) indicator, replace the fuse if the fuse indicator lights. For the
C200H-OD211/OD212/OA222V/OA224 Units which do not have blown-fuse
indicators, check the fuses if outputs are not produced.

Replacement Fuses
The Output Units are supplied with one spare fuse in the back of each Unit; if
two or more fuses need to be replaced, use replacement fuses which meet
the specifications shown in the following table.
Unit type
Transistor
Output

Triac Output

Model

Unit specifications

C200H-OD411
C200H-OD211
C200H-OD212
C200H-OD213
C200H-OA221
C200H-OA222V
C200H-OA223
C200H-OA224

8 outputs, 1 A, 12 to 48 V DC
12 outputs, 0.3 A, 24 V DC
16 outputs, 0.3 A, 24 V DC
8 outputs, 2.1 A, 24 V DC
8 outputs, 1 A, 250 V AC max.
12 outputs, 0.3 A, 250 V AC max.
8 outputs, 1.2 A, 250 V AC max.
12 outputs, 0.5 A, 250 V AC max.

Blown-fuse
indicators*
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No

Fuse specifications
125 V, 5 A (5.2 mm × 20 mm)
125 V, 8 A (5.2 mm × 20 mm)
250 V, 5 A (5.2 mm × 20 mm)
250 V, 3 A (5.2 mm × 20 mm)
250 V, 5 A (5.2 mm × 20 mm)
250 V, 3.15 A (5.2 mm × 20 mm)

Note The C200H-OD411/OD213/OD221/OA223 Output Units have a blown-fuse
(F) indicator at the location shown in the following diagram. When a fuse
blows in one of these Units, the blown-fuse indicator will light and bit 8 of the
word allocated to the Unit will be turned ON.
The "F" indicator lights
when the fuse blows.

Replacement Procedure
1,2,3...

565

Section 12-2

Replacing User-serviceable Parts

3. Remove the Output Unit. Push down the lock lever on the Backplane with
a screwdriver and lift the Unit out as shown below.

Lock lever

4. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the screws from the top and
bottom of the Unit.
5. Use a slotted screwdriver to detach the case from the Unit.
(4)

(5)

6. Pull out the printed circuit board.
7. Insert a new fuse. A spare fuse is provided inside the rear of the case when
the Unit is delivered.
Rear of the case
Spare fuse

8. Reverse the steps above to reassemble the Unit.

566

Section 12-2

Replacing User-serviceable Parts

12-2-3 Relay Replacement
A Relay Output Unit’s relay is probably faulty if one of the Unit’s outputs
remains ON or OFF regardless of the execution of output instructions in the
program. Replace a relay if it remains ON or OFF or if the Unit’s contact is otherwise faulty.

Replacement Relays
The following Output Units are equipped with relay sockets that allow the
Relays to be replaced if they should go bad. Use the Relay listed in the following table.
Model
C200H-OC221
C200H-OC222
C200H-OC225
C200H-OC223
C200H-OC224
C200H-OC222V
C200H-OC226
C200H-OC224V

Unit specifications
8 outputs, 2 A, 250 V AC/24 V DC max.
12 outputs, 2 A, 250 V AC/24 V DC max.
16 outputs, 2 A, 250 V AC/24 V DC max.
5 outputs, 2 A, 250 V AC/24 V DC max.
(independent commons)
8 outputs, 2 A, 250 V AC/24 V DC max.
(independent commons)
12 outputs, 2 A, 250 V AC/24 V DC max.
16 outputs, 2 A, 250 V AC/24 V DC max.
8 outputs, 2 A, 250 V AC/24 V DC max.

Replacement Relay
G6B-1174P-FD-US-M
24 V DC

G6R-1, 24 V DC

Note Relays cannot be replaced for the C200H-OC222N/OC226N/OC224N or the
CS1W-OC201/OC211.
Replacement Procedure
1,2,3...

1. Turn OFF the power to the PLC.
2. Remove the terminal block by unlocking the lock levers at the top and bottom of the terminal block. The terminal block can be removed without disconnecting the wiring.
3. Remove the Output Unit. Push down the lock lever on the Backplane with
a screwdriver and lift the Unit out as shown below.

Lock lever

4. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the screws from the top and
bottom of the Unit.

567

Section 12-2

Replacing User-serviceable Parts

5. Use a slotted screwdriver to detach the case from the Unit.

6. Pull out the printed circuit board.
7. Replace the faulty Relay with a new one. Use the Relay puller provided inside the rear of the case when the Unit is delivered. Relays for the C200HOC222V/OC224V/OC226 can be replaced with the P6B-Y1 Relay Puller.
Rear of case
Relay Puller

Grasp the faulty Relay with the
Relay Puller and pull it out.

8. Reassemble the Unit by reversing the above procedure and mount it to the
Backplane.
Note

1. Use the P6B-Y1 Relay Puller (sold separately) to remove Relays.
2. Check the pin arrangement before inserting a new Relay into the socket.
Pins can only be inserted one way, so do not try to force them if they do not
go in easily. Applying too much force can bend the pins and render the Relay unusable.

OC221

OC222

OC225

OC223*

OC224*

OC222V

OC226

OC224V*

*The Relay Output Units marked with an asterisk have independent commons.

568

Appendix A
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and
High-density I/O Units
Input Units
Category
C200H/CS-series
Basic Input Units
with Terminal
Blocks

Name
AC Input Units

Specifications
100 to 120V AC/V DC, 16 inputs,
50/60 Hz
100 to 120V AC, 8 inputs, 50/60 Hz
100 to 120V AC, 16 inputs, 50/60 Hz
200 to 240V AC, 8 inputs
200 to 240V AC, 16 inputs

AC/DC Input Units

CS-series Basic
Input Units with
Connectors
C200H Group-2
High-density Input
Units

12 to 24 V AC/V DC, 8 inputs
24 V AC/V DC, 16 inputs
DC Input Units
12 to 24 V DC, 8 inputs
12 to 24 V DC, 16 inputs
24 V DC, 16 inputs
Interrupt Input Units 24 V DC, 16 inputs
12 to 24 V DC, 8 inputs
High-speed Input
24 V DC, 16 inputs
Unit
DC Input Units
24 V DC, 32 inputs

12 V DC, 64 inputs
24 V DC, 64 inputs

24 V DC, 96 inputs
Simultaneously ON 24-V DC inputs for
CS1W-ID291/MD291/MD292

Model
CS1W-IA111

Page
572

C200H-IA121
C200H-IA122
C200H-IA122V
C200H-IA221
C200H-IA222
C200H-IA222V

574
575

CS1W-IA211
C200H-IM211
C200H-IM212
C200H-ID211
C200H-ID212
CS1W-ID211
CS1W-INT01
C200HS-INT01
CS1W-IDP01

577
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586

CS1W-ID231
C200H-ID216
C200H-ID218
C200H-ID111
CS1W-ID261
C200H-ID217
C200H-ID219
CS1W-ID291

587
589
590
591
593
595
596
598
600

576
578

569

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Output Units
Category
C200H/CSseries Basic
Outputs Units
with Terminal
Blocks

Name
Relay Output
Units

Specifications
250V AC/24V DC, 2 A; 120 V DC, 0.1 A; independent contacts, 8 outputs
250V AC/24V DC, 2 A; 120 V DC, 0.1 A; 16 outputs
250V AC/24V DC, 2 A, independent contacts, 5 outputs
250 V AC/24 V DC, 2 A, independent contacts, 8 outputs
250V AC/24V DC, 2 A, 8 outputs
250V AC/24V DC, 2 A, 12 outputs
250V AC/24V DC, 2 A, 16 outputs

Model
CS1W-OC201 (See
note.)
CS1W-OC211
C200H-OC223
C200H-OC224
C200H-OC224V/224N
C200H-OC221
C200H-OC222
C200H-OC222V/222N
C200H-OC225
C200H-OC226/226N

Relay contact outputs
250 V AC, 1.2 A, with fuse burnout detection circuit, CS1W-OA201 (See
8 outputs
note.)
250 V AC, 1 A, with fuse burnout detection circuit,
C200H-OA221
8 outputs
250 V AC, 1.2 A, with fuse burnout detection circuit, C200H-OA223
8 outputs
250 V AC, 0.3 A, 12 outputs
C200H-OA222V
250 V AC, 0.5 A, 12 outputs
C200H-OA224
250 V AC, 0.5 A, 16 outputs
CS1W-OA211
C200H-OD213
Transistor Out- 24 V DC, 2.1 A, 8 outputs
put Units, sink- 12 to 48 V DC, 1A, 8 outputs
C200H-OD411
ing outputs
24 V DC, 0.3 A, 12 outputs
C200H-OD211
24 V DC, 0.3 A, 16 outputs
C200H-OD212
12 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A, 16 outputs
CS1W-OD211
Transistor Out- 12 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A, 32 outputs
CS1W-OD231
put Units, sink- 4.5 V DC/16 mA to 26.4 V/100mA, with fuse burnout C200H-OD218
ing
detection circuit, 32 outputs
12 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A, 64 outputs
CS1W-OD261
4.5 V DC/16 mA to 26.4 V/100mA, 64 outputs
C200H-OD219
12 to 24 V DC, 0.1 A, with fuse burnout detection cir- CS1W-OD291
cuit, 96 outputs
Transistor Out- 24 V DC, 0.8 A, load short-circuit protection,
C200H-OD214
put Units,
8 outputs.
sourcing out5 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A, 8 outputs
C200H-OD216
puts
5 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A, 12 outputs
C200H-OD217
24 V DC, 0.5 A, load short-circuit protection,
CS1W-OD212
16 outputs
Load short-circuit protection for
CS1W-OD212/OD232/OD262/MD262 and C200H-OD21B
24 V DC, 1 A, load short-circuit protection,
C200H-OD21A
16 outputs.
24 V DC, 0.5 A, load short-circuit protection,
CS1W-OD232
32 outputs

Triac Output
Units

24 V DC, 0.5 A, 32 outputs, sourcing outputs, load
short-circuit protection
24 V DC, 0.3 A, load short-circuit protection,
64 outputs
24 V DC, with fuse burnout detection circuit, 0.1 A,
96 outputs

570

Page
602
601
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
612
619
615
616
617
618
614
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
629
630
634
635
638
639
640
641
643
645

C200H-OD21B

646

CS1W-OD262

648

CS1W-OD292

649

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Note This Unit uses only 8 bits for external I/O even though 16 bits (1 word) are allocated. This Unit is also
treated as a 16-point Unit in the I/O tables.

Mixed I/O Units
Category
Name
CS-series Basic I/O DC Input/Transistor
Units with Connec- Output Units
tors

TTL I/O Unit

Specifications
24 V DC inputs;
12 to 24 V DC, 0.3-A, sinking outputs;
32 inputs, 32 outputs
24 V DC inputs;
12 to 24 V DC, 0.1A, sinking outputs
with fuse burnout detection circuit;
48 inputs, 48 outputs
24 V DC inputs
24 V DC, 0.3 A, sourcing outputs with
load short-circuit protection;
32 inputs, 32 outputs
24 V DC inputs
24 V DC, 0.1 A, sourcing outputs with
fuse burnout detection circuit;
48 inputs, 48 outputs
5 V DC, 3.5 mA inputs;
5 V DC, 35 mA, outputs;
32 inputs, 32 outputs

Model
CS1W-MD261

Page
652

CS1W-MD291

654

CS1W-MD262

657

CS1W-MD292

659

CS1W-MD561

662

Note For details on the connectors included with the Unit, refer to the information provided under Accessories
in the tables for Basic I/O Units in the following pages.

Special I/O Units
High-density Input Units
Category
TTL Input Units
DC Input Units

Name
TTL Input Unit
DC Input Unit

Specifications
5 V DC, static input mode, 32 inputs
24 V DC, static input mode, 32 inputs

Model
C200H-ID501
C200H-ID215

Page
664
665

High-density Output Units
Category
TTL Output
Units

Name
TTL Output
Units

Specifications
Static output mode, 32 outputs
Dynamic output mode, 128 outputs
Transistor Out- Transistor Out- 4.5 V DC, 16 mA Static output mode, 32 outputs
put Units
put Units
to 26.4 V, 100 mA Dynamic output mode, 128 outputs
5 V DC, 35 mA

Model
Page
C200H-OD501 666
668
C200H-OD215 670
672

Mixed I/O Units
Category
TTL I/O Units

Name
TTL I/O Units

Specifications
Static input mode: 5 V DC inputs; 5 V DC, 35 mA outputs; 16 inputs, 16 outputs
Dynamic output mode: 5 V DC, 35 mA outputs;
128 outputs

Model
Page
C200H-MD501 675
677

571

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Category

Name

Specifications

Model

Page

DC Input/Tran- DC Input/Tran- Static input mode: 12 V DC inputs; 4.5 V DC, 16 mA to C200H-MD115 679
sistor Output
sistor Output
26.4 V 100 mA outputs, 16 inputs, 16 outputs
Units
Units
Dynamic output mode: 12 V DC, 50 mA outputs;
682
128 outputs
Static input mode: 24 V DC inputs, 24 V DC 16 mA to C200H-MD215 684
26.4 V 100 mA outputs; 16 inputs, 16 outputs
Dynamic output mode: 24 V DC, 100 mA outputs;
686
128 outputs
Maximum switching capacity of C200H-MD115/MD215
688

Specifications Changes for Transistor Output Units
Some of the specifications of the following Units with transistor outputs have been improved.
Output elements have been changed from NPN to field-effect transistors (FET). Part of the circuit configuration
has been changed. There are no changes in performance characteristics as a result of these improvements,
but care is required in connecting the polarity of the load power supply. Outputs will not operate dependably if
the polarity is reversed. check the manufacturing number on your Unit before wiring.
Name

Model

Transistor Output Unit
DC Input/Transistor Output Unit
Transistor Output Units

C200H-OD215
C200H-MD215
C200H-OD218
C200H-OD219

Date of change
Manufactured on or after
November 30, 1999
Manufactured on or after
January 31, 2000

Manufacturing number
(See below.)
30Y9 or later
3110 or later

Manufacturing Numbers
@@Z9@
Factory code (A to Z or blank)
Year: Last digit of calendar year; e.g., 1999→9, 2000→0
Month: 1 to 9 (January to September), X (October), Y (November), Z (December)
Day: 01 to 31

The following figures and tables provide specifications for Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units. Refer to
Section SECTION 3 Nomenclature, Functions, and Dimensions for dimensions.
Reading Terminal Connection Diagrams
• I/O terminals in terminal connection diagrams are shown as viewed from the front panel of the Unit.
• Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on all Units.
• A0 to A20 and B0 to B20 are printed on the Units.

Basic I/O Units
CS1W-IA111 100-V AC Input Unit (16 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time

572

100 to 120 V AC (50/60 Hz), 100 to 120 V DC
85 to 132 V AC (50/60 Hz), 85 to 132 V DC
10 kΩ (50 Hz), 8 kΩ (60 Hz), 69 kΩ (DC)
10 mA typical (at 100 V AC), 1.5 mA typical
(at 100 V DC)
65 V AC min., 75 V DC min.
20 V AC max., 25 V DC max.
18 ms max. when PLC Setup on default setting
(8 ms) (See note.)

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
OFF Response Time

63 ms max. when PLC Setup on default setting
(8 ms) (See note.)
Insulation Resistance
20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR terminal (500 V DC)
Dielectric Strength
2,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
No. of Circuits
2 (each 8 points/common)
Number of Inputs ON Simulta- 100% simultaneously ON (for 110 V AC, 120 V DC)
neously
Refer to the diagram below.
Internal Current Consumption 110 mA 5 V DC max.
Weight
260 g max.

Note The Input ON and OFF response times for Basic I/O Units can be set to 0 ms, 0.5 ms, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms,
8 ms, 16 ms, or 32 ms in the PLC Setup. When the response times have been set to 0 ms, the ON
response time will be 10 ms maximum and the OFF response time will be 40 ms maximum due to internal element delays.
Number of Inputs ON Simultaneously
110 V AC, 120 V DC
120 V AC
132 V DC

No. of inputs
ON simultaneously

132 V AC

Ambient temperature

IN0
to
IN7

2.2 kΩ

COM0
Input indicator
IN8
to
IN15

Internal circuits

Circuit Layout

2.2 kΩ

COM1

Terminal Connections

100 to 120
V AC/V DC

573

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.

C200H-IA121 AC Input Unit (8 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

100 to 120 V AC (50/60 Hz)
85 to 132 V AC (50/60 Hz)
9.7 kΩ (50 Hz), 8 kΩ (60 Hz)
10 mA typical (at 100 V AC)
60 V AC min.
20 V AC max.
35 ms max. (at 100 V AC, 25°C)
55 ms max. (at 100 V AC, 25°C)
1 (8 points/common)
10 mA 5 V DC max.
250 g max.

Circuit Configuration
IN

100 to
120 V AC

0.33 µF 470 Ω

330 kΩ
COM

Internal
circuits

910 Ω

Input indicator

Terminal Connections
0
1
2
100 to
120 V AC

3
4
5
6
7
COM
NC

574

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

C200H-IA122/IA122V AC Input Unit (16 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

100 to 120 V AC (50/60 Hz)
85 to 132 V AC (50/60 Hz)
9.7 kΩ (50 Hz), 8 kΩ (60 Hz)
10 mA typical (at 100 V AC)
60 V AC min.
20 V AC max.
35 ms max. (at 100 V AC, 25°C)
55 ms max. (at 100 V AC, 25°C)
1 (16 points/common)
10 mA 5 V DC max.
300 g max./400 g max. (IA122V)

Circuit Configuration
IN

100 to
120 V AC

0.33 µF 470 Ω

330 kΩ
COM

Internal
circuits

910 Ω

Input indicator

Terminal Connections
1
3
5
7

100 to
120 V AC

9
11
13
15
COM

B0
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8

B1 2
B2 4
B3 6
B4 8
B5 10
B6 12
B7 14
B8

575

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

C200H-IA221 AC Input Unit (8 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

200 to 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
170 to 264 V AC (50/60 Hz)
21 kΩ (50 Hz), 18 kΩ (60 Hz)
10 mA typical (at 200 V AC)
120 V AC min.
40 V AC max.
35 ms max. (at 200 V AC, 25°C)
55 ms max. (at 200 V AC, 25°C)
1 (8 points/common)
10 mA 5 V DC max.
250 g max.

Circuit Configuration
IN

0.15 µF 820 Ω

200 to
240 V AC
680 kΩ
COM

Internal
circuits

910 Ω

Input indicator

Terminal Connections
0
1
2
200 to
240 V AC

3
4
5
6
7
COM
NC

576

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

CS1W-IA211 200-V AC Input Unit (16 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage/ON current
OFF Voltage/OFF current
ON Response Time

200 to 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
170 to 264 V AC (50/60 Hz)
21 kΩ (50 Hz), 18 kΩ (60 Hz)
10 mA typical (at 200 V AC)
120 V AC min.
40 V AC max.
18 ms max. when PLC Setup on default setting
(8 ms) (See note.)
OFF Response Time
48 ms max. when PLC Setup on default setting
(8 ms) (See note.)
No. of Circuits
2 (each 8 points/common)
Number of Inputs ON Simulta- 100% simultaneously ON (for 230 V AC). Refer to
neously
the diagram below.
Insulation Resistance
20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR terminal (500 V DC)
Dielectric Strength
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 110 mA 5 V DC max.
Weight
260 g max.

240 V AC

No. of inputs
ON simultaneously

264 V AC

Ambient temperature

IN0
to
IN7
COM0
Input indicator
IN8
to
IN15

Internal circuits

Circuit Configuration

COM1

577

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections

200 to 240 V AC

Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.

C200H-IA222/IA222V AC Input Unit (16 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Operating Input Voltage
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time

200 to 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
21 kΩ (50 Hz), 18 kΩ (60 Hz)
170 to 264 V DC (50/60 Hz)
10 mA typical (at 200 V AC)
120 V AC min.
40 V AC max.
35 ms max. (at 200 V AC, 25°C)

OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

55 ms max. (at 200 V AC, 25°C)
1 (16 points/common)
10 mA 5 V DC max.
300 g max./400 g max. (IA222V)

Circuit Configuration
IN

0.15 µF 680 Ω

200 to
240 V AC
680 kΩ
COM

910 Ω

Input indicator

578

Internal
circuits

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections
1
3
5
7

200 to
240 V AC

9
11
13
15
COM

B0
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8

B1 2
B2 4
B3 6
B4 8
B5 10
B6 12
B7 14
B8

C200H-IM211 AC/DC Input Unit (8 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

12 to 24 V DC/V AC (50/60 Hz)
10.2 to 26.4 V AC/V DC (50/60 Hz)
2 kΩ
10 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
10.2 V DC min.
3.0 V DC max.
15 ms max. (at 12 to 24 V DC, 25°C)
15 ms max. (at 12 to 24 V DC, 25°C)
1 (8 points/common)
10 mA 5 V DC max.
200 g max.

Circuit Configuration
IN

COM

2 kΩ
0.01
µF

1.8
kΩ

Internal
circuits

12 to
24 V AC/DC
Input indicator

579

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections
0
1
2
3
12 to
24 V AC/DC

4
5
6
7
COM
NC

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9

C200H-IM212 AC/DC Input Unit (16 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

24 V DC/V AC (50/60 Hz)
20.4 to 26.4 V AC/V DC (50/60 Hz)
3 kΩ
7 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
14.4 V DC min.
5.0 V DC max.
15 ms max. (at 24 V DC, 25°C)
15 ms max. (at 24 V DC, 25°C)
1 (16 points/common)
10 mA 5 V DC max.
250 g max.

Circuit Configuration
IN

COM

3 kΩ
0.01
µF

1.8
kΩ

Internal
circuits

24 V AC/DC
Input indicator

Terminal Connections

1
3
5
24 V AC/DC

7
9
11
13
15
COM

580

B0
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8

B1 2
B2 4
B3 6
B4 8
B5 10
B6 12
B7 14
B8

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

C200H-ID211 DC Input Unit (8 Points)
Rated Input Voltage

12 to 24 V DC

Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

10.2 to 26.4 V DC
2 kΩ
10 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
10.2 V DC min.
3.0 V DC max.
1.5 ms max. (at 12 to 24 V DC, 25°C)
1.5 ms max. (at 12 to 24 V DC, 25°C)
1 (8 point/common)
10 mA 5 V DC max.
200 g max.

Circuit Configuration
IN

COM

2 kΩ

0.01
µF

1.8
kΩ

Internal
circuits

12 to 24 V DC

Input indicator

Terminal Connections
0
1
2
3
12 to 24 V DC

4
5
6
7
COM
NC

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9

Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.

581

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

C200H-ID212 DC Input Unit (16 Points)
Rated Input Voltage

24 V DC

Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

20.4 to 26.4 V DC
3 kΩ
7 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
14.4 V DC min.
5.0 V DC max.
1.5 ms max. (at 24 V DC, 25°C)
1.5 ms max. (at 24 V DC, 25°C)
1 (16 points/common)
10 mA 5 V DC max.
300 g max.

Circuit Configuration
IN

COM

3 kΩ

0.01
µF

1.8
kΩ

Internal
circuits

24 V DC

Input indicator

Terminal Connections

1
3
5
7
24 V DC

9
11
13
15
COM

582

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8

B0 0
B1 2
B2 4
B3 6
B4 8
B5 10
B6 12
B7 14
B8

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

CS1W-ID211 DC Input Unit (16 Points)
Rated Input Voltage

24 V DC

Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage/ON Current
OFF Voltage/OFF Current
ON Response Time

20.4 to 26.4 V DC
3.3 kΩ
7 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
14.4 V DC min./3 mA min.
5 V DC max./1 mA max.
8.0 ms max. (Possible to set to between 0 and
32 ms in the PLC Setup.)
OFF Response Time
8.0 ms max. (Possible to set to between 0 and
32 ms using PLC)
No. of Circuits
16 (8 points/common, 2 circuits)
Number of Simultaneously ON 100% simultaneously ON
Points
Insulation Resistance
20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR terminal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

100 mA 5 V DC max.
270 g max.

Circuit Configuration

IN08
to
IN15

3.3 kΩ

470 Ω

Input indicator
470 Ω

Internal circuits

3.3 kΩ
IN00
to
IN07

Terminal Connections

24
V DC

Polarity of the input power supply can connected in either direction.

Note 1. The ON response time will be 20 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 300 µs maximum even
if the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.

583

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

2. Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.

CS1W-INT01 Interrupt Input Unit (16 Points)
Rated Input Voltage

24 V DC

Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current

20.4 to 26.4 V DC
3.3 kΩ
7 mA typical (at 24 V DC)

ON Voltage/ON Current
OFF Voltage/OFF Current
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Number of Simultaneously ON
Points
Insulation Resistance

14.4 V DC min./3 mA min.
5 V DC max./1 mA max.
0.1 ms max.
0.5 ms max.
16 (8 points/common, 2 circuits)
100% simultaneously ON

Dielectric Strength

Internal Current Consumption
Weight

20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
100 mA 5 V DC max.
270 g max.

3.3 kΩ

470 Ω

3.3 kΩ

Input indicator
470 Ω

IN00
to
IN07

IN08
to
IN15

Internal circuits

Circuit Configuration

0.5 ms min.
0.1 ms min.

• Up to two Interrupt Input Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack.
• Interrupts cannot be used when an Interrupt Input Unit is mounted to an Expansion I/O Rack, i.e., it will be
treated as a 16-point Input Unit.
• Set the pulse width of signals input to the Interrupt Input Unit so they satisfy the above conditions.

584

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections

24
V DC

Polarity of the input power supply can connected in either direction.

Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.

C200HS-INT01 Interrupt Input Unit (8 Points)
Rated Input Voltage

12 to 24 V DC

Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption

10.2 to 26.4 V DC
2 KΩ
10 mA typical (24 V DC)
10.2 V DC min.
3.0 V DC max.
0.2 ms max.
0.5 ms max.
1 (8 points/common)
20 mA 5 V DC max.

Weight

200 g max.

Circuit Configuration
IN

COM

2 kΩ

0.01
µF

1.8
kΩ

Internal
circuits

12 to 24 V DC

Input indicator

Either plus or minus can be used for the input power supply.

585

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections
0
1
2
3
12 to 24 V DC

4
5
6
7
COM
NC

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9

CS1W-IDP01 High-speed Input Unit (16 Points)
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage/ON Current
OFF Voltage/OFF Current
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Number of Simultaneously ON Points
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

24 V DC
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
3.3 kΩ
7 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
14.4 V DC min./3 mA min.
5 V DC max./1 mA max.
0.1 ms max.
0.5 ms max.
16 (8 points/common, 2 circuits)
100% simultaneously ON
20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR terminal
(100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR
terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA max.
100 mA 5 V DC max.
270 g max.

Circuit Configuration
470 Ω

1000 pF
3.3 kΩ
IN08
to
IN15
1000 pF

586

Input indicator
470 Ω

Internal circuits

3.3 kΩ
IN00
to
IN07

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Appendix A

Terminal Connections

24
V DC

*1 Polarity of the input power supply can be connected in either direction.
*2 Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but
they are not printed the Unit.

• With a High-speed Input Unit, pulse inputs shorter than the cycle time of the CPU Unit can be read.
• The minimum pulse width (ON time) that can be read by the High-speed Input Unit is 0.1 ms.
• Input data in the internal circuits is cleared during the input refresh period.

CS1W-ID231 DC Input Unit (32 Points)
Rated Input Voltage

24 V DC

Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage/ON Current
OFF Voltage/OFF Current
ON Response Time

20.4 to 26.4 V DC
3.9 kΩ
6 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
15.4 V DC min./3 mA min.
5 V DC max./1 mA max.
8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the
PLC Setup.)
OFF Response Time
8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the
PLC Setup)
No. of Circuits
32 (16 points/common, 2 circuits)
Number of Simultaneously ON 70% (11 points/common) (at 24 V DC) (Refer to the
Points
following illustrations.)
Insulation Resistance
20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR terminal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 150 mA 5 V DC max.
Weight
200 g max.
Accessories
One connector for external wiring (soldered)

587

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Circuit Configuration

Internal circuits

3.9 kΩ

1000 pF
560 Ω
Input indicator
3.9 kΩ

1000 pF
560 Ω

Number of simultaneously ON points

Number of Simultaneously ON Points vs.
Ambient Temperature Characteristic
32 points at 34°C 32 points at 40°C
Input voltage: 24 V DC
Input voltage: 26.4 V DC

22 points at 55°C
16 points at 55°C

Ambient Temperature

Terminal Connections
I/O word "m + 1"

24
V DC

I/O word "m"

24
V DC

• The input power polarity can be connected in either direction provided that the same polarity is set for rows
A and B.
• Both COM0 and COM1 have two pins each. Although they are internally connected, wire all points completely.
Note The ON response time will be 120 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 300 µs maximum even if
the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.

588

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

C200H-ID216 DC Input Unit (32 Points)
Rated Input Voltage

24 V DC

Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

20.4 to 26.4 V DC
5.6 kΩ
4.1 mA (at 24 V DC)
14.4 V DC min.
5.0 V DC max.
1.0 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
32 (32 points/common)
100 mA 5 V DC max.
180 g max.

Circuit Configuration and Simultaneously Usable Points

IN07
COM
IN08

680 Ω
5.6 kΩ
Input indicator

IN15

Internal
circuits
COM
1000 pF

IN00
B

IN07
COM
IN08
IN15

680 Ω

Simultaneously Usable Points

1000 pF

IN00
A

Input Voltage:
26.4 V DC

32
30

COM

25
20
15
10
5

5.6 kΩ
Input indicator

0
0

50 55 60

Ambient Temperature ( °C)

589

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections
I/O word "m"
0
1
2
3

24 V DC

5
6
7
COM

8
9
10
11

24 V DC

13
14
15
COM

I/O word "m+1"

10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18

0
1
2
3

24 V DC

4
5

6
7
COM

8
9
10
11

24 V DC

12
13

14
15
COM

19 19

20 20

Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting.
2. The power can be supplied in either polarity, but the same polarity must be used for all COM terminals. Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals are connected internally.

C200H-ID218 DC Input Unit (32 Points)

590

Rated Input Voltage

24 V DC

Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage/ON Current
OFF Voltage/OFF Current
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

20.4 to 26.4 V DC
3.9 kΩ
6 mA (at 24 V DC)
15.4 V DC min./3.5 mA min.
5.0 V DC max./1 mA max.
1.0 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
32 (32 points/common)
100 mA 5 V DC max.
180 g max.

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Circuit Configuration

Ambient Temperature for Simultaneously ON Points
0.01 µF

Internal circuits

470 Ω
3.9 kΩ

to
Input indicator
0.01 µF

to
470 Ω

Simultaneously ON points

Input voltage: 24.0 V DC

Input voltage: 26.4 V DC

3.9 kΩ

to
Input indicator
Ambient temperature

Terminal Connections
I/O word "m"

I/O word "m + 1"

24 V DC

Note 1. The polarity of the input power supply can be either positive or negative. The polarity of all commons,
however, must be the same.
2. COM terminals must all be wired even though they are connected internally.

C200H-ID111 DC Input Unit (64 Points)
Rated Input Voltage

12 V DC

Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time

10.2 to 13.2 V DC
2.7 kΩ
4.1 mA typical (at 12 V DC)
8.0 V DC min.
3.0 V DC max.
1.0 ms max.
1.0 ms max.

No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

2 (32 points/common)
120 mA 5 V DC max.
250 g max.

591

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Circuit Configuration
COM0
1000 pF

IN00
A

IN07
COM0
IN08

CN1

Internal
circuits

820
2.7 k
CN1

IN15
COM0
IN00

Input indicator

IN15
COM1
IN00

1000 pF

IN07
A
COM1
IN08
IN15
COM1
IN00

CN2

Indicator
switch
circuit

CN2

IN07
COM0
IN08

Internal
circuits

820
2.7 k

IN07
COM1
IN08

IN15

Terminal Connections

CN1
I/O word "m+1"
NC

592

I/O word "m+2"

13 15
12 14

15 13
14 12

11 13
10 12

13 11
12 10

9 11
8 10

11 9
10 8

12 V DC

3
4

12 V DC

5
6
7
COM1

8
9
10

COM0

17 15
16 14

NC
COM0

12 V DC

11
12

12 V DC

I/O word "m+3"

18
15 17
14 16

I/O word "m"

COM0

12 V DC

NC
COM0

12 V DC

CN2

13
14
15
COM1

0
1
2
3

12 V DC

5
6
7
COM1

8
9
10
11

12 V DC

12
13
14
15
COM1

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Note The power can be supplied in either polarity, but the same polarity must be used for all COM terminals in
each connector. Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals in
each connector are connected internally.

CS1W-ID261 DC Input Unit (64 Points)
Rated Input Voltage

24 V DC

Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage/ON Current
OFF Voltage/OFF Current
ON Response Time

20.4 to 26.4 V DC
3.9 kΩ
6 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
15.4 V DC min./3 mA min.
5 V DC max./1 mA max.
8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the
PLC Setup.)
OFF Response Time
8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the
PLC Setup.)
No. of Circuits
64 (16 points/common, 4 circuits)
Number of Simultaneously ON 50% (8 points/common) (at 24 V DC) (Refer to the
Points
following illustrations.)
Insulation Resistance
20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR terminal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 150 mA 5 V DC max.
Weight
260 g max.
Accessories
Two connectors for external wiring (soldered)

Circuit Configuration
Internal circuits

3.9 kΩ

1000 pF
560 Ω

Input indicator

Internal circuits

3.9 kΩ

Indicator
switching
circuit

1000 pF
560 Ω

593

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Number of simultaneously ON points

Number of Simultaneously ON Points vs.
Ambient Temperature Characteristic
64 points
at 25°C

64 points
at 36°C

64 points
at 52°C

Input voltage: 20.4 V DC

Input voltage: 24 V DC

48 points at 55°C

Input voltage: 26.4 V DC
32 points at 55°C
28 points at 55°C

Ambient Temperature

Terminal Connections
I/O word "m+1"

I/O word "m"

I/O word "m+2"

24
V DC

I/O word "m+3"

24
V DC

• The input power polarity can be connected in either direction provided that the same polarity be set for
rows A and B.
• COM0, COM1, COM2, and COM3 have two pins each. Although they are internally connected, wire all
points completely.
Note The ON response time will be 120 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 300 µs maximum even if
the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.

594

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

C200H-ID217 DC Input Unit (64 Points)
Rated Input Voltage

24 V DC

Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits

20.4 to 26.4 V DC
5.6 kΩ
4.1 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
14.4 V DC min.
5.0 V DC max.
1.0 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
2 (32 points/common)
All 64 points cannot be turned ON simultaneously at
high temperatures. Refer to the following graph.
120 mA 5 V DC max.
250 g max.

Internal Current Consumption
Weight

Circuit Configuration and Simultaneously Usable Points
COM0
1000 pF

IN00
IN07
COM0
IN08

680 Ω
CN1

IN07
COM0
IN08

CN2

IN15
COM1
IN00

Indicator
switch
circuit

Input indicator

1000 pF

IN07
COM1
IN08

680 Ω
5.6 kΩ

Internal
circuits

50
40
30
20
10
0
0

IN07
COM1
IN08

Input Voltage:
26.4 V DC

CN2

IN15
COM1
IN00
A

64
60

5.6 kΩ

IN15
COM0
IN00
B

Input Voltage:
24.0 V DC

Simultaneously Usable Points

CN1

Internal
circuits

50 55 60

Ambient Temperature (°C)

IN15

595

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections
CN1 I/O word "m"
I/O word "m+1"
B

COM0

24 V DC

17 15
16 14

13 15
12 14

15 13
14 12

11 13
10 12

13 11
12 10

9 11
8 10

11 9
10 8

9
8

1
2
24 V DC

3
4

24 V DC

5
6

0
1
2
3

24 V DC

5
6

10
11
12

24 V DC

I/O word "m+3"

COM1

24 V DC

CN2
A

COM0

15 17
14 16

COM0

24 V DC

I/O word "m+2"

13
14
15
COM1

7
COM1

8
9
10
11

24 V DC

12
13

14
15
COM1

Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting.
2. The power can be supplied in either polarity, but the same polarity must be used for all COM terminals
in each connector. Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals in each connector are connected internally.

C200H-ID219 DC Input Unit (64 Points)
Rated Input Voltage

24 V DC

Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage/ON Current
OFF Voltage/OFF Current
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits

20.4 to 26.4 V DC
3.9 kΩ
6 mA (at 24 V DC)
15.4 V DC min./3.5 mA min.
5.0 V DC max./1 mA max.
1.0 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
64 (32 points/common)
Note The number of points that can be ON simultaneously is limited according to the ambient
temperature. Refer to the following diagram
for details.
120 mA 5 V DC max.
250 g max.

Internal Current Consumption
Weight

596

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Circuit Configuration

Ambient Temperature for Simultaneously ON Points
64 points at 51°C
64 points 64 points
at
35°C
at 22°C

IN00
to
IN07
COM
IN08
to
IN15

48 points at 55°C

470 Ω

Input voltage: 24.0 V DC

3.9 kΩ

Input indicator
COM

Input voltage: 20 V DC

64
60

0.01 µF

0.01 µF
470 Ω
3.9 kΩ

Simultaneously ON points

IN00
to
IN07
COM
IN08
to
IN15

Internal circuits

COM

Input voltage: 26.4 V DC

32 points at 38°C

30
32 points at 48°C

24 points at 55°C

16 points at 55°C

0
0

Input indicator

50 55 60 (°C)

Ambient temperature

Terminal Connections
(m + 1) words
COM0

(m + 1) words

(m + 2) words

(m + 3) words

COM0

24 V DC

COM1

COM0

COM1

COM0

24 V DC

24 V DC
COM1

COM1

Note 1. The polarity of the input power supply can be either positive or negative. The polarity of all commons
for CN1 and CN2, however, must be the same.
2. COM terminals for CN1 and CN2 must all be wired even though they are connected internally.

597

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

CS-series High-density I/O Units
CS1W-ID291 DC Input Unit (96 Points)
Rated Input Voltage

24 V DC

Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage/ON Current
OFF Voltage/OFF Current
ON Response Time

20.4 to 26.4 V DC
4.7 kΩ
Approx. 5 mA (at 24 V DC)
17 V DC min./3 mA min.
5 V DC max./1 mA max.
8.0 ms max.(Possible to select one out of eight
times from 0 to 32 ms in the PLC Setup.) (See note.)
8.0 ms max. (Possible to select one out of eight
times from 0 to 32 ms in the PLC Setup.) (See note.)
6 (16 points/common)
50% (8 points/common) (at 24 V DC) (Depends on
ambient temperature)
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
200 mA 5 V DC max.
320 g max.
Two connectors for external wiring (soldered)

OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Number of Inputs ON Simultaneously
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength

Internal Current Consumption
Weight
Accessories

x 3 CN1 circuits
1000 pF
560 Ω

Input indicator
4.7 kΩ

x 3 CN2 circuits
1000 pF
560 Ω

Indicator
switch
circuit

Internal circuits

4.7 kΩ

Internal circuits

Circuit Configuration

Note 1. The Input ON and OFF response times for Basic I/O Units can be set to 0 ms, 0.5 ms, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4
ms, 8 ms, 16 ms, or 32 ms in the PLC Setup.
2. The ON response time will be 120 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 300 µs maximum even
if the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.

598

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections: CS1W-ID291 24-V DC 96-point Input Unit

24 V DC

Word (m+3)

Word (m+2)

COM2

COM3

Word (m+4)

24 V DC

Word (m+1)

24 V DC

COM1

COM4

24 V DC

Word m

Word (m+5)

COM0

COM5

24 V DC

• The polarity of the input power supply can be in either direction, as indicated by the dotted lines.

599

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Maximum Number of ON Inputs
The maximum number of 24-V DC inputs that can be ON simultaneously for the CS1W-ID291/MD291/MD292
depends on the ambient temperature, as shown in the following diagrams.
CS1W-MD291/MD292 Inputs

Temperature Characteristic for
Max. ON Inputs (20.4 V)

53°C: 48 pts
55°C: 30 pts

ON inputs

Temperature Characteristic for
Max. ON Inputs (20.4 V)

CS1W-ID291 Inputs

Ambient temperature (°C)

Temperature Characteristic for
Max. ON Inputs (24.0 V)
32°C: 96 pts

55°C: 30 pts

ON inputs

53°C: 48 pts

51°C: 62 pts
55°C: 48 pts

Ambient temperature (°C)

Temperature Characteristic for
Max. ON Inputs (26.4 V)
17°C: 96 pts
51°C: 30 pts
55°C: 18 pts

ON inputs

Temperature Characteristic for
Max. ON Inputs (26.4 V)
31°C: 48 pts
ON inputs

55°C: 48 pts

Ambient temperature (°C)

Temperature Characteristic for
Max. ON Inputs (24.0 V) 41°C: 48 pts

Ambient temperature (°C)

48°C: 96 pts

48°C: 58 pts
55°C: 32 pts

Ambient temperature (°C)

If the maximum number of ON points is exceeded for the CS1W-ID291/MD291/MD292, heat generated by
electronic elements will increase the temperature of the electronic elements and the interior of the Unit. This
will reduce the reliability and life of the electronic elements and cause Unit malfunctions. There will be a delay
in the temperature increase, however, and there will be no problems if all inputs are ON for 10 minutes or less
at the start of operations or any other time that all inputs have been off for at least 2 hours.

600

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

CS1W-OC211 Contact Output Unit (16 points)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Service Life of Relay

Relay replacement

ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Number of Inputs ON Simultaneously
Surge Protector
Fuses
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength

Internal Current Consumption
Weight

2 A 250 V AC (cosφ = 1), 2 A 24 V DC (8 A/common, 16 A/Unit), 0.1 A 120 V DC
1 mA 5 V DC
Electrical: 150,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 20,000,000 operations
Service life will vary depending on the connected
load. Refer to page 612 for information on service
life according to the load.
NY-24W-K-IE (Fujitsu Takamizawa Component
Ltd.)
Relays cannot be replaced by users.
15 ms max.
15 ms max.
2 (each 8 points/common)
16
None
None
20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR
terminal (500 V DC)
2,000 V AC between the external terminals and
the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current
of 10 mA max.
130 mA 5 V DC max. 96 mA 26 V DC (6 mA × No.
points ON)
290 g max.

Internal circuits

Circuit Configuration
IN0
to
IN7
Output indicator

COM0

IN8
to
IN15
COM1

601

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections

COM0

2 A 250 V AC,
2 A 24 V DC,
0.1 A 120 V DC max.

COM1

Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.

CS1W-OC201 Contact Output Unit (8 points) (See note 1.)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Service Life of Relay

Relay replacement

ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Number of Inputs ON Simultaneously
Surge Protector
Fuses
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength

Internal Current Consumption
Weight

2 A 250 V AC (cosφ = 1), 2 A 24 V DC (16 A/Unit),
0.1 A 120 V DC
1 mA 5 V DC
Electrical: 150,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 20,000,000 operations
Service life will vary depending on the connected
load. Refer to page 612 for information on service
life according to the load.
NY-24W-K-IE (Fujitsu Takamizawa Component
Ltd.)
Relays cannot be replaced by users.
15 ms max.
15 ms max.
8 independent contacts
8
None
None
20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR terminal (500 V DC)
2,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
100 mA 5 V DC max. 48 mA 26 V DC (6 mA × No.
points ON)
270 g max.

Internal circuits

Circuit Configuration

602

Output indicator
OUT

OUTC

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections

See note 2.

2 A 250 V AC,
2 A 24 V DC,
0.1 A 120 V DC max.

Note: There are no restrictions in the polarity
when connecting a DC power supply.

Note 1. This Unit uses only 8 bits for external I/O even though 16 bits (1 word) are allocated. This Unit is also
treated as a 16-point Unit in the I/O tables.
2. Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.

C200H-OC223 Contact Output Unit (5 Points)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Relay
Service Life of Relay

ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

2 A 250 V AC (cosφ = 1), 2 A 250 V AC (cosφ = 0.4),
2 A 24 V DC (10 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 V DC
G6B-1174-P-FD-US-M (24 V DC) with socket
Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
Service life will vary depending on the current and
ambient temperature.
10 ms max.
10 ms max.
5 independent contacts
10 mA 5 V DC max. 75 mA 26 V DC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
250 g max.

Circuit Configuration

Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
circuits

OUTc
250 V AC
24 V DC max.

603

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections
L

0
c0

1
c1

250 V AC 24 V DC max.
(inductive load: 2 A
resistive load: 2 A)
(10 A/Unit)

2
c2

3
c3

4
c4

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9

C200H-OC224 Contact Output Unit (8 Points)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Relay
Service Life of Relay

ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

2 A 250 V AC (cosφ = 1), 2 A 250 V AC (cosφ = 0.4),
2 A 24 V DC (16 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 V DC
G6B-1174-P-FD-US-M (24 V DC) with socket
Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
Service life will vary depending on the current and
ambient temperature.
10 ms max.
10 ms max.
8 independent contacts
10 mA 5 V DC max. 75 mA 26 V DC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
300 g max.

Circuit Configuration

Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
circuits
OUTc
250 V AC
24 V DC max.

604

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections

See note.

c0
c1

A0
A1

A2
c3

250 V AC 24 V DC max.
(inductive load: 2 A
resistive load: 2 A)

A4
c5

A5
c6

A7
NC

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L

B8 NC
B9 NC

Note: There are no restrictions in the polarity
when connecting a DC power supply.

C200H-OC224V/OC224N Contact Output Unit (8 Points)
Item
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Relay
Service Life of Relay

ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

OC224V
OC224N
2 A 250 V AC (cosφ = 1), 2 A 250 V AC (cosφ =
0.4), 2 A 24 V DC (16 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 V DC
G6R-1 (24 V DC) with
G6RN-1-ACD (24 V
socket
DC) PCB soldering
Electrical: 300,000 operations
Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations
Service life will vary depending on the current and
ambient temperature.
15 ms max.
15 ms max.
8 independent contacts
10 mA 5 V DC max. 90 mA 26 V DC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
350 g max.

Circuit Configuration

Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
circuits
OUTc
250 V AC
24 V DC max.

605

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections

See note.
c0

B0
A0
A1

A2
c3

250 V AC 24 V DC max.
(inductive load: 2 A
resistive load: 2 A)
(16 A/Unit)

A4
c5

A5
c6

A7
NC

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L

B8 NC
B9 NC

Note: There are no restrictions in the polarity
when connecting a DC power supply.

C200H-OC221 Contact Output Unit (8 Points)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Relay
Service Life of Relay

ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

2 A 250 V AC (cosφ = 1), 2 A 250 V AC (cosφ = 0.4),
2 A 24 V DC (8 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 V DC
G6B-1174P-FD-US-M (24 V DC) with socket
Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
Service life will vary depending on the current and
ambient temperature.
10 ms max.
10 ms max.
1 (8 points/common)
10 mA 5 V DC max. 75 mA 26 V DC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
250 g max.

Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
circuits
COM
250 V AC 24 V DC max.

606

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections
0
L

1
L

2
L

3
L

4
L

5
L

6
L

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

L
COM

A8
NC

250 V AC 24 V DC max.
(inductive load: 2 A, resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)

C200H-OC222 Contact Output Unit (12 Points)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Relay
Service Life of Relay

ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

2 A 250 V AC (cosφ = 1), 2 A 250 V AC (cosφ = 0.4),
2 A 24 V DC (8 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 V DC
G6B-1174P-FD-US-M (24 V DC) with socket
Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
Service life will vary depending on the current and
ambient temperature.
10 ms max.
10 ms max.
1 (12 points/common) 8 points max. can be ON
simultaneously.
10 mA 5 V DC max. 75 mA 26 V DC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
300 g max.

Circuit Configuration

Output indicator

OUT
L
OUT
L

Internal
circuits
COM
250 V AC 24 V DC max.

607

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections

1
L

L
L

11
NC
NC
COM

B1 2
A1
B2 4
A2
B3 6
A3
B4 8
A4
B5 10
A5
B6 NC
A6
B7 NC
A7
B8 NC
A8
B9 NC

L
L
L
L
L
L

250 V AC 24 V DC max.
(inductive load: 2 A, resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)

C200H-OC222V/OC222N Contact Output Unit (12 Points)
Item
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Relay
Service Life of Relay

ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

OC222V
OC222N
2 A 250 V AC (cosφ = 1), 2 A 250 V AC (cosφ =
0.4), 2 A 24 V DC (8 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 V DC
G6R-1 (24 V DC) with
G6RN-1-ACD (24 V DC)
socket
PCB soldering
Electrical: 300,000 operations
Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations
Service life will vary depending on the current and
ambient temperature.
15 ms max.
15 ms max.
1 (12 points/common) 8 points max. can be ON
simultaneously.
8 mA 5 V DC max. 90 mA 26 V DC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
400 g max.

Circuit Configuration

Output indicator

OUT
L
OUT
L

Internal
circuits
COM
250 V AC
24 V DC max.

608

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections

1
L

L
L

11
NC
NC
COM

B1 2
A1
B2 4
A2
B3 6
A3
B4 8
A4
B5 10
A5
B6 NC
A6
B7 NC
A7
B8 NC
A8
B9 NC

L
L
L
L
L
L

250 V AC 24 V DC max.
(inductive load: 2 A, resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)

C200H-OC225 Contact Output Unit (16 Points)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Relay
Service Life of Relay

ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

2 A 250 V AC (cosφ = 1), 2 A 250 V AC (cosφ = 0.4),
2 A 24 V DC (8 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 V DC
G6B-1174P-FD-US-M (24 V DC) with socket
Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
Service life will vary depending on the current and
ambient temperature.
10 ms max.
10 ms max.
1 (16 points/common) 8 points max. can be ON
simultaneously.
50 mA 5 V DC max. 75 mA 26 V DC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
400 g max.

Circuit Configuration

Output indicator
Internal
circuits

OUT
L
OUT
L
COM
250 V AC
24 V DC max.

609

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Appendix A

Terminal Connections
1

3
5
7
9
11
13
15

L
L
L
L
L
L
L

COM

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9

0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L

NC
NC

250 V AC 24 V DC max.
(inductive load: 2 A, resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)

Note This Unit can overheat if more than 8 output points are turned ON simultaneously.

C200H-OC226/OC226N Contact Output Unit (16 Points)
Item
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Relay
Service Life of Relay

ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

OC226
OC226N
2 A 250 V AC (cosφ = 1), 2 A 250 V AC (cosφ =
0.4), 2 A 24 V DC (8 A/Unit)
10 mA 5 V DC
G6R-1 (24 V DC) with
G6RN-1-ACD (24 V DC)
socket
PCB soldering
Electrical: 300,000 operations
Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations
Service life will vary depending on the current and
ambient temperature.
15 ms max.
15 ms max.
1 (16 points/common) 8 points max. can be ON
simultaneously.
30 mA 5 V DC max. 90 mA 26 V DC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
500 g max.

Circuit Configuration

Output indicator
Internal
circuits

OUT
L
OUT
L
COM
250 V AC
24 V DC max.

610

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Appendix A

Terminal Connections

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L

1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
COM

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9

0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14

L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L

NC
NC

250 V AC 24 V DC max.
(inductive load: 2 A, resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)

Note 1. Mount to the C200H-BC@@1-V1/V2 Backplane.
2. The number of simultaneously ON contact points must be eight or less to ensure proper heat resistance.

About Contact Output Units
There are some differences in the relays used by the C200H and CS-series Contact Output Units. For this reason, when used in the ways shown below, there may be differences in the respective life expectancies of the
relays.
• When using in excess of rated values
• When appropriate surge countermeasures are not taken
• When connected to a load (e.g., relay, solenoid, or motor) that generates a high counterelectromotive force
when power is interrupted
• When connected to a load (e.g., capacitor or lamp) that generates a high inrush current when power is
turned ON
In the above cases, ensure the rated life expectancies of the relays by, for example, taking the appropriate
surge countermeasures as explained in the manual, or using a switching device (as a relay) with ratings appropriate for the load.

Life Expectancy of CS1W-OC201/211 Relays
The life expectancy of the CS1W-OC201/211 Contact Output Unit is shown in the following diagrams. Use the
diagrams to calculate the relay service life based on the operating conditions, and replace the relay before the
end of its service life.
Note The diagrams show the life expectancy of the relay itself. Do not use a contact current, therefore, that
exceeds the maximum switching capacity specified in the specifications for each Contact Output Unit. If
a switching capacity exceeding the specifications is used, the reliability and life expectancy of other
parts will be reduced and the Unit may malfunction.

611

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Service Life with AC Load

Service Life with DC Load
24 V DC τ = 7 ms

120 V AC, resistive load

240 V AC, resistive load
Service life
(×104)

24 V AC, resistive load

Service life
(×104)

240 V AC
(cosφ = 0.4)
120 V AC
(cosφ = 0.4)

100 to 120 V DC,
τ = 7 to 40 ms

Contact current (A)

Max. switching frequency: 1,800 times/h

Life Expectancy of C200H-OC221/222/223/224/225 Contact Output Unit
The C200H-OC221/222/223/224/225 Contact Output Unit uses OMRON’s G6B-1174P-FD-US-M Relay. The
life of the G6B-1174P-FD-US-M Relay varies with the contact current and ambient temperature. Refer to the
following graphs to calculate this value, and be sure to replace the Relays before their service life expires.

OMRON's H3BA 30 V DC, L/R = 40 ms
Timer (200 V AC) (electromagnetic valve) 250 V AC, cosφ = 0.4
OMRON's MA415A
30 V DC, L/R = 7 ms
Contactor (200 V AC)
(HK, MM, and MY
Hinge-type Relay)
250 V AC, cosφ =
130 V DC, L/R = 0

OMRON's
MY4 Relay
(200 V AC)
Electromagnetic
valve (250 V AC),
cosφ = 0.08 to
0.1)

Contact current (normal current) (A)

Ambient Temperature vs. Life
Expectancy
Conditions
Switching frequency: 1,800 times/hour max.

Life expectancy (x 104 operations)

Contact Current vs. Life Expectancy
Conditions
Switching frequency: 1,800 times/hour max.
Ambient temperature: 23°C

2 A at 250 V AC, resistive load
2 A at 30 V DC, resistive load

1 A at 250 V AC,
resistive load
1 A at 30 V DC,
resistive load

1 A at 250 V AC, inductive load
(cosφ = 0.4)
1 A at 30 V DC, inductive load
(L/R = 7 ms)

2 A at 250 V AC, inductive
load (cosφ = 0.4)
2 A at 30 V DC, inductive
load (L/R = 7 ms)

Ambient temperature (˚C)

Note 1. If the Contact Output Unit is panel-mounted, the temperature inside the panel represents the ambient
temperature.
2. The life of the Relay at an ambient temperature of 55°C is one-fifth the life of the Relay at room temperature (0° to 40°C).
Inductive Load
The life of the Relay varies with the load inductance. If any inductive load is connected to the Contact Output
Unit, use an arc killer with the Contact Output Unit using an inductive load.
Be sure to connect a diode in parallel with every DC inductive load that is connected to the Contact Output
Unit.

612

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Appendix A

Contact Protection Circuit
Arc killers are used with the Contact Output Unit in order to prolong the life of each Relay mounted to the Contact Output Unit, prevent noise, and reduce the generation of carbide and nitrate deposits. Arc killers can, however, reduce relay life if not use correctly.
Note Arc killers used with the Contact Output Unit can delay the resetting time required by each Relay
mounted to the Contact Output Unit.
Arc killer circuit examples are listed in the following table.
Circuit

Current
AC
DC
Yes
Yes

Power
supply

Inductive
load

CR method

Power
supply

Inductive
load

Varistor method

Power
supply

Yes

Inductive
load

Diode method

Characteristic

Required element

The capacitance of the capacitor must
be 1 to 0.5 µF per contact current of
1 A and resistance of the resistor must
be 0.5 to 1 Ω per contact voltage of 1 V.
These values, however, vary with the
load and the characteristics of the
relay. Decide these values from experiments, and take into consideration that
the capacitance suppresses spark discharge when the contacts are separated and the resistance limits the
current that flows into the load when
the circuit is closed again.
The dielectric strength of the capacitor
must be 200 to 300 V. If the circuit is an
AC circuit, use a capacitor with no
polarity.
The reversed dielectric strength value
The diode connected in parallel with
the load changes energy accumulated of the diode must be at least 10 times
as large as the circuit voltage value.
by the coil into a current, which then
The forward current of the diode must
flows into the coil so that the current
will be converted into Joule heat by the be the same as or larger than the load
current.
resistance of the inductive load. This
time lag, between the moment the cir- The reversed dielectric strength value
cuit is opened and the moment the load of the diode may be two to three times
larger than the supply voltage if the arc
is reset, caused by this method is
killer is applied to electronic circuits
longer than that caused by the CR
with low circuit voltages.
method.
The varistor method prevents the impo- --sition of high voltage between the contacts by using the constant voltage
characteristic of the varistor. There is
time lag between the moment the circuit is opened and the moment the load
is reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V,
insert the varistor in parallel with the
load. If the supply voltage is 100 to
200 V, insert the varistor between the
contacts.
If the load is a relay or solenoid, there
is a time lag between the moment the
circuit is opened and the moment the
load is reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V,
insert the arc killer in parallel with the
load. If the supply voltage is 100 to
200 V, insert the arc killer between the
contacts.

Note Do not connect a capacitor as an arc killer in parallel with an inductive load as shown in the following diagram. This arc killer is very effective for preventing spark discharge at the moment when the circuit is
opened. However when the contacts are closed, the contacts may be welded due to the current charged
in the capacitor.
DC inductive loads can be more difficult to switch than resistive loads. If appropriate arc killers are used,
however, DC inductive loads will be as easy to switch as resistive loads.

613

Appendix A

Power
supply

Inductive
load

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

CS1W-OA211 Triac Output Unit (16 Points)
Max. Switching Capacity
Max. Inrush Current
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Surge Protector
Fuses
Blown Fuse Detection Circuit
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength

Internal Current Consumption
Weight

0.5 A 250 V AC, 50/60 Hz (2 A/common, 4 A/Unit)
15 A (pulse width: 10 ms)
50 mA 75 V AC
1.5 mA (200 V AC) max.
1.6 V AC max.
1 ms max.
1/2 of load frequency+1 ms or less.
2 (8 points/common)
C.R Absorber + Surge Absorber
2 × 4 A (1 per common)
The fuse cannot be replaced by the user.
None
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (500 V DC)
2,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
406 mA 5 V DC max. (70 mA + 21 mA × No. of ON
points)
300 g max.

Circuit Configuration

Internal circuits

IN0
to
IN7
COM0
Output indicator

Fuse
IN8
to
IN15
Fuse

Terminal Connections

COM0

0.5 A
250 V AC
max.

614

COM1

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.

C200H-OA221 Triac Output Unit (8 Points)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits

1 A 250 V AC, 50/60 Hz (4 A/Unit)
10 mA (resistive load)/40 mA (inductive load) 10 V
AC
3 mA (100 V AC) max./6 mA (200 V AC) max.
1.2 V max.
1 ms max.
1/2 of load frequency or less.
1 (8 points/common)

Internal Current Consumption
Fuse Rating
Weight

140 mA 5 V DC max.
5 A 250 V (5.2-dia. × 20)
250 g max.

Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
Output indicator

OUT
L

Internal
circuits

Fuse

COM
250 V AC max.

Fuse blowout
detection circuit

F indicator
Fuse: 5 A 250 V (5.2-dia. x 20) MF51SH (JIS)

Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as
work bits.
Terminal Connections
L
L
L
L

250 V AC max.
(1 A max. 4 A/Unit)

L
L
L
L

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8

COM
NC

615

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

C200H-OA223 Triac Output Unit (8 Points)
Max. Switching Capacity
Max. Inrush Current
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuse Rating
Power for External Supply
Weight

1.2 A 250 V AC, 50/60 Hz (4 A/Unit)
15 A (pulse width: 100 ms)
30 A (pulse width: 10 ms)
100 mA 10 V AC/50 mA 24 V AC/10 mA 100 V AC
min.
1.5 mA (120 V AC) max./3 mA (240 V AC) max.
1.5 V AC max. (50 to 1,200 mA)/ 5 V AC max. (10 to
50 mA)
1 ms max.
1/2 of load frequency+1 ms or less.
1 (8 points/common)
180 mA 5 V DC max.
5 A 250 V (5.2-dia. × 20)
N/A
300 g max.

Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
OUT

Output indicator

Internal
circuits

Fuse

COM
250 V AC max.

Fuse blowout
detection circuit

F indicator
Fuse: 5 A 250 V (5.2-dia. x 20) HT (SOC)

Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as
work bits.
Terminal Connections
L
L
L
L

250 V AC max.
(1.2 A max. 4 A/Unit)

L
L
L
L

616

0 A0
1 A1
2 A2
3 A3
4 A4
5 A5
6 A6
7 A7
COM

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

C200H-OA222V Triac Output Unit (12 Points)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity

0.3 A 250 V AC, 50/60 Hz (2 A/Unit)
10 mA (resistive load)/40 mA (inductive load) 10 V
AC
3 mA (100 V AC) max./6 mA (200 V AC) max.
1.2 V max.
1/2 of load frequency or less
1/2 of load frequency or less.
1 (12 points/common)
200 mA 5 V DC max.
3 A 250 V (5.2-dia. × 20)
400 g max.

Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuse Rating
Weight

Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
Output indicator

OUT
L

Internal
circuits

Fuse

COM
250 V AC max.

Fuse: 3 A 250 V (5.2-dia. x 20) MQ4 (SOC)

Note 1. No blown fuse detector circuit is provided.
2. Check the fuse when there is no output.
Terminal Connections

1
3

5
L

7
L

L
L

250 V AC max.
(0.3 A max., 2 A/Unit)

11
NC
NC
COM

B0
A0

B1 2
A1
B2 4
A2
B3 6
A3
B4 8
A4
B5 10
A5
B6 NC
A6
B7 NC
A7
B8 NC
A8
B9 NC

L
L
L
L
L
L

617

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

C200H-OA224 Triac Output Unit (12 Points)
Max. Switching Capacity
Max. inrush current

0.5 A 250 V AC, 50/60 Hz (2 A/Unit)
10 A (pulse width: 100 ms)
20 A (pulse width: 10 ms)
100 mA 10 V AC/50 mA 24 V AC/10 mA 100 V AC
min.
1.5 mA (120 V AC) max./3 mA (240 V AC) max.
1.5 V AC max. (50 to 500 mA)/5 V AC max. (10 to
50 mA)
1 ms max.
1/2 of load frequency + 1 ms or less.
1 (12 points/common)
270 mA 5 V DC max.
3.15 A 250 V (5.2-dia. × 20)
300 g max.

Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuse Rating
Weight

Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
OUT

Output indicator

Internal
circuits

Fuse

COM
250 V AC max.

Fuse: 3.15 A 250 V (5.2-dia. x 20) MT4 (SOC)

Note 1. No blown fuse detector circuit is provided.
2. Check the fuse when there is no output.
Terminal Connections

1
3

5
L

7
L

L
L

250 V AC max.
(0.5 A max., 2 A/Unit)

11
NC
NC
COM

618

B0
A0

B1 2
A1
B2 4
A2
B3 6
A3
B4 8
A4
B5 10
A5
B6 NC
A6
B7 NC
A7
B8 NC
A8
B9 NC

L
L
L
L
L
L

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

CS1W-OA201 Triac Output Unit (8 Points) (See note 1.)
Max. Switching Capacity
Max. Inrush Current
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Surge Protector
Fuses
Blown Fuse Detection Circuit

Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength

Internal Current Consumption
Weight

1.2 A 250 V AC, 50/60 Hz (4.8 A/Unit)
10 A (pulse width: 100 ms), 20 A (pulse width:
10 ms)
100 mA 10 V AC, 50 mA 24 V AC, 10 mA 100 V
AC min.
1.5 mA (120 V AC) max., 3.0 mA (240 V AC) max.
1.5 V AC max. (50 to 500 mA), 5.0 V AC max. (10
to 50 mA)
1 ms max.
1/2 of load frequency+1 ms or less.
1 (8 points/common)
C.R Absorber + Surge Absorber
8A
The fuse cannot be replaced by the user.
ERR indicator lit when fuse blown. Also, the corresponding Flag in the Basic I/O Unit Information
Area (A050 to A089) will turn ON.
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (500 V DC)
2,000 V AC between the external terminals and
the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current
of 10 mA max.
230 mA 5 V DC max. (70 mA + 20 mA × No. of ON
points)
300 g max.

Circuit Configuration
Output indicator
Internal circuits

ERR indicator
IN0
to
IN7
Fuse
COM
Blown fuse
detection
circuit

Terminal Connections

1.2 A 250 V AC max.

619

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

C200H-OD213 Transistor Output Unit (8 Points)
Max. Switching Capacity

2.1 A 24 V DC (20.4 to 26.4 V DC) (5.2 A/Unit) NPN
output
0.1 mA max.
1.4 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
1 (8 points/common)
140 mA 5 V DC max.
8 A 125 V (5.2-dia. × 20)
30 mA 20.4 to 26.4 V DC min.
250 g max.

Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuse Rating
Power for External Supply
Weight

Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
+V
Output indicator

Internal
circuits

OUT
L
24 V DC
Fuse

Fuse blowout
detection circuit

COM

Fuse: UL-TSC-8A-N1 (SOC)
8 A 125 V 5.2-dia. × 20

F indicator

Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as
work bits.
Terminal Connections
L
L
L

24 V DC
(2.1 A max., 5.2 A/Unit)

L
L
L
L
L

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

COM (0 V)

24 V DC

Note 1. Be sure to supply power to A9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.
2. Incorrect load operation may result if polarity is not connected correctly.

620

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

C200H-OD411 Transistor Output Unit (8 Points)
Max. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuse Rating
Power for External Supply
Weight

10.2 to 52.8 V DC 1 A (3 A/Unit)
0.1 mA max.
1.4 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
1 (8 points/common)
140 mA 5 V DC max.
5 A 125 V (5.2-dia. × 20)
30 mA 10.2 to 52.8 V DC min.
250 g max.

Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
V
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
circuits

Fuse

COM
12 to
48 V DC

Fuse blowout
detection circuit

Fuse: FGMT (Fuji Terminal Industry Co. Ltd.)
5 A 125 V 5.2-dia. x 20

F indicator

Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as
work bits.
Terminal Connections
L

12 to 48 V DC
(1 A max., 3 A/Unit)

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

COM (0 V)

12 to 48 V DC

Note Be sure to supply power to A9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.

621

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

C200H-OD211 Transistor Output Unit (12 Points)
Max. Switching Capacity

0.3 A 24 V DC (20.4 to 26.4 V DC) (2 A/Unit)

Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuse Rating
Power for External Supply
Weight

0.1 mA max.
1.4 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
1 (12 points/common)
160 mA 5 V DC max.
5 A 125 V (5.2-dia. × 20)
25 mA 20.4 to 26.4 V DC min.
300 g max.

Circuit Configuration
OUT
L
+V
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
circuits

24 V DC
Fuse

COM

Fuse: FGMT (Fuji Terminal Industry Co. Ltd.)

5 A 125 V 5.2-dia. × 20

Note 1. No blown fuse detector circuit is provided.
2. Check the fuse when there is no output.
Terminal Connections

L
L
L

24 V DC
(0.3 A max., 2 A/Unit)

L
L
L

1
3
5
7
9
11
NC
NC

COM (0 V)

B0 0
B1 2

L
L

B2 4 L
A2
B3 6 L
A3
B4 8 L
A4
B5 10 L
A5
B6 NC
A6
B7 NC
A7
B8 NC
A8
+ 24 V DC
B9

Note 1. Be sure to supply power to B9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.
2. Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.

622

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

C200H-OD212 Transistor Output Unit (16 Points)
Max. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuse Rating
Power for External Supply
Weight

0.3 A 24 V DC (20.4 to 26.4 V DC) (4.8 A/Unit)
0.1 mA max.
1.4 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
1 (16 points/common)
180 mA 5 V DC max.
8 A 125 V (5.2-dia. × 20)
35 mA 24 V DC (20.4 to 26.4 V DC) min.
350 g max.

Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before October 9, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 09X2 or earlier)
OUT
L
+V
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
circuits

24 V DC
Fuse

COM

Fuse: UL-TSC-8A-N1 (SOC)
8 A 125 V 5.2-dia. × 20

Units manufactured on or after October 10, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 10X2H or later)
OUT
L
to
+V

Internal circuits

Output indicator

OUT
L
24 V DC

Fuse

COM

Built-in FET

Note 1. No blown fuse detector circuit is provided.
2. Check the fuse when there is no output.

623

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections

24 V DC
(0.3 A max.)

L
L
L
L

11
13
15

COM (0 V)

B0 0
B1 2

L
L

B2 4 L
A2
B3 6 L
A3
B4 8 L
A4
B5 10 L
A5
B6 12 L
A6
B7 14 L
A7
B8 NC
A8
+ 24 V DC
B9

CS1W-OD211 Transistor Output Unit (16 Points, Sinking)
Rated Voltage
Operating Load Voltage Range
Maximum Load Current
Maximum Inrush Current
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength

No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuse
External Power Supply
Weight

Internal circuits

Circuit Configuration

624

Output indicator

12 to 24 V DC
10.2 to 26.4 V DC
0.5 A/point, 4.0 A/common, 8.0 A/Unit
4.0 A/point, 10 ms max.
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
0.5 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
16 (8 points/common, 2 circuits)
5 V DC 170 mA max.
None
10.2 to 26.4 V DC, 20 mA min.
270 g max.

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Appendix A

Terminal Connections

12 to 24 V DC

Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity. The load may operate incorrectly if the polarity is reversed.

CS1W-OD231 Transistor Output Unit (32 Points, Sinking)
Rated Voltage
Operating Load Voltage Range
Maximum Load Current
Maximum Inrush Current
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength

No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuse
External Power Supply
Weight
Accessories

12 to 24 V DC
10.2 to 26.4 V DC
0.5 A/point, 2.5 A/common, 5.0 A/Unit (See note.)
4.0 A/point, 10 ms max.
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
0.5 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
32 (16 points/common, 2 circuits)
5 V DC 270 mA max.
None
10.2 to 26.4 V DC, 30 mA min.
200 g max.
One connector for external wiring (soldered)

Note The maximum load currents will be 2.0 A/common and 4.0 A/Unit if a pressure-welded connector is
used.

625

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Internal circuits

Circuit Configuration

Output indicator

Terminal Connections
I/O word "m + 1"

I/O word "m"

12 to 24 V DC

• When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity. The load may operate if the polarity is reversed.
• Although the +V and COM terminals of rows A and B are internally connected, wire all points completely.

C200H-OD218 Transistor Output Unit (32 Points)
Max. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuse Rating
Power for External Supply
Weight

626

16 mA 4.5 V DC to 100 mA 26.4 V DC (see below)
0.1 mA max.
0.8 V max.
0.1 ms max.
0.4 ms max.
1 (32 points/common)
180 mA 5 V DC max.
3.5 A (The fuse is not user-replaceable.)
110 mA 5 to 24 V DC±10% min.
(3.4 mA × number of ON pts)
180 g max.

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Circuit Configuration and Maximum Switching Capacity
Units manufactured on or before January 28, 2000
(manufacturing numbers 2810 or earlier)
4.5 to
26.4 V DC
OUT00
OUT07
Internal
circuits

Output
indicator

COM
4.5 to
26.4 V DC

OUT08
OUT15

Fuse
(3.5 A)
Fuse
blowout
detection
circuit

COM
4.5 to
26.4 V DC
OUT00
OUT07
COM
4.5 to
26.4 V DC
OUT08

F indicator

100
B

OUT15
COM

Units manufactured between January 31, 2000 and
October 9, 2002 (manufacturing numbers 3110 to 09X2)
4.5 to
26.4 V DC

COM
4.5 to
26.4 V DC

OUT07
Output
indicator

OUT00

Internal
circuits

Max. Switching Capacity (mA/pt)

Output
indicator

4.5

20.4

26.4

Power Supply Voltage (V)
A

OUT08
OUT15
Output
indicator
Fuse
(3.5 A)
Fuse
blowout
detection
circuit

F indicator

COM
4.5 to 26.4
V DC
OUT00
OUT07
COM
4.5 to
26.4 V DC
OUT08

OUT15
COM

627

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Units manufactured on or after October 10, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 10X2H or later)
4.5 to
26.4 V DC

Internal circuits

OUT00
to
OUT07

4.5 to
26.4 V DC
OUT08
to
OUT15
COM
4.5 to
26.4 V DC
OUT00
to
OUT07
COM
B

Output
indicator

Fuse
blowout
detection circuit

F indicator

COM

Output
indicator

Fuse

4.5 to
26.4 V DC
OUT08
to
OUT15
COM

Terminal Connections
I/O word "m"
L
L
L
L

L
L
L
L

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

COM

L
L
L
L

L
L
L
L
COM

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

I/O word "m+1"
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

L
L
L
L
L

4.5 to
26.4 V DC

L
L
L
COM

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

L
L
L
L
L

L
L
L
COM

Note 1. When the fuse blows, the F indicator will light and the corresponding flag in the Basic I/O Unit Information Area (A050 to A089) will turn ON.
2. The interruption of power from the external power supply is treated the same as a fuse blowout.

628

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Appendix A

3. Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals are connected
internally.

CS1W-OD261 Transistor Output Unit (64 Points, Sinking)
Rated Voltage
Operating Load Voltage Range
Maximum Load Current
Maximum Inrush Current
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength

No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuse
External Power Supply
Weight
Accessories

12 to 24 V DC
10.2 to 26.4 V DC
0.3 A/point, 1.6 A/common, 6.4 A/Unit
3.0 A/point, 10 ms max.
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
0.5 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
64 (16 points/common, 4 circuits)
5 V DC 390 mA max.
None
10.2 to 26.4 V DC, 50 mA min.
260 g max.
Two connectors for external wiring (soldered)

Internal circuits

Circuit Configuration

Output indicator

629

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections
I/O word "m+1"

I/O word "m"

I/O word "m+2"

12 to
24 V DC
12 to
24 V DC

I/O word "m+3"

12 to
24 V DC

12 to 24 V DC

12 to
24 V DC

12 to 24 V DC

C200H-OD219 Transistor Output Unit (64 Points)
Max. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuses
Power for External Supply
Weight

630

16 mA 4.5 V DC to 100 mA 26.4 V DC (see below)
0.1 mA max.
0.8 V max.
0.1 ms max.
0.4 ms max.
2 (32 points/common)
270 mA 5 V DC max.
Two 3.5 A fuses (1 fuse/common)
The fuses are not user-replaceable.
220 mA 5 to 24 V DC±10% min.
(3.4 mA × number of ON pts)
250 g max.

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before January 28, 2000
(manufacturing numbers 2810 or earlier)
4.5 to
26.4 V DC
OUT00
Internal
circuits

OUT07
COM0
Fuse

Indicator
switch/
fuse
blowout
detection
circuit

OUT15
COM0

SW CN1
CN2

Output indicator

CN1

4.5 to
26.4 V DC
OUT08

F indicator
4.5 to
26.4 V DC
OUT00

Internal
circuits

OUT07
COM1
Fuse

CN2

4.5 to
26.4 V DC
OUT08
OUT15
COM1

Units manufactured between January 29, 2000 and
October 10, 2002 (manufacturing numbers 3110 to 10X2)
4.5 to
26.4 V DC
OUT00
Internal
circuits

OUT07
COM0
Fuse

Indicator
switch/
fuse
blowout
detection
circuit

SW
Output indicator

CN1

4.5 to
26.4 V DC
OUT08
OUT15
COM0

CN1
CN2

F indicator
4.5 to
26.4 V DC
OUT00

Internal
circuits

OUT07
COM1
Fuse

CN2

4.5 to
26.4 V DC
OUT08
OUT15
COM1

631

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Internal circuits

Units manufactured on or after October 11, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 11X2H or later)

Fuse
SW

Internal circuits

Indicator
switch/
fuse
blowout
detection
circuit

4.5 to
26.4 V DC
OUT00
to
OUT07
CN1
COM0
4.5 to
26.4 V DC
OUT08
to
OUT15
COM0

CN1
CN2

Output indicator
F indicator

Fuse

4.5 to
26.4 V DC
OUT00
to
CN2
OUT07
COM1
4.5 to
26.4 V DC
OUT08
to
OUT15
COM1

100

16
0
0

4.5

20.4 26.4

Power Supply Voltage (V)

632

Max. Switching Capacity (A/unit)

Max. Switching Capacity (mA/pt)

Maximum Switching Capacity
6.4
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
0
0

505560

Ambient Temperature (°C)

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections

CN1
I/O word "m+1"
B

CN2
I/O word "m"

I/O word "m+2"

20 20
COM0
L
L
L

L
L
L
L
L

COM0

19 19
15 18 18 15
14 17 17 14
13 16 16 13
12 15 15 12
11 14 14 11
10 13 13 10
9 12 12 9
8 11 11 8

L
L

L
L
L

L
L
L
L
L

9
7
6

5
4
3
2
1
0

6
5

2
3
4

6
7

COM1

6
5
4
3
2
1
0

L
L

9
8

I/O word "m+3"
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

L
L
L
L
L

4.5 to
26.4 V DC

L
L
L
COM1

10 10

COM0

10 10
COM0

10
11
12
13
14
15

COM1

11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

L
L
L
L
L

L
L
L
COM1

20 20

Note 1. When either fuse blows, the F indicator will light and the corresponding Flag in the Basic I/O Unit Information Area (A050 to A089) will turn ON.
2. The interruption of power from the external power supply is treated the same as a fuse blowout.
3. Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals in each connector are connected internally.

633

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

CS1W-OD291 Transistor Output Unit (96 Points, Sinking)
Rated Voltage
Operating Load Voltage
Maximum Load Current
Maximum Inrush Current
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength

No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuse
External Power Supply
Weight
Accessories

12 to 24 V DC
10.2 to 26.4 V DC
0.1 A/point, 1.2 A/common, 7.2 A/Unit (See note 2.)
1.0 A/point, 10 ms max.
8.0 A/common, 10 ms max.
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
0.5 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
6 (16 points/common)
480 mA max. at 5 V DC
3 A (1 per common)
The fuse cannot be replaced by the user.
10.2 to 26.4 V DC, 100 mA min.
320 g max.
Two connectors for external wiring (soldered)

Circuit Configuration

Internal circuits

10.2 to
26.4 V DC

Indicator
switch circuit
Blown fuse
detection
circuit

x 3 CN1 circuits

Fuse

Output indicator
ERR indicator

Internal circuits

10.2 to
26.4 V DC

x 3 CN2 circuits

Fuse

Note 1. The ERR indicator will light if a fuse blows or if the external power supply is turned OFF, and the corresponding Flag in the Basic I/O Unit Information Area (A050 to A089) will turn ON.
2. The maximum load currents will be 1.0 A/common and 6.0 A/Unit if a pressure-welded connector is
used.

634

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Terminal Connections: CS1W-OD291 24-V DC 96-point Transistor Output Unit (Sinking Outputs)

12 to
24 V DC

Word (m+3)

Word (m+2)

COM2

12 to
24 V DC

COM3
COM1

Word (m+4)

Word (m+1)

12 to
24 V DC

COM4

12 to
24 V DC

Word (m+5)

Word m

COM0

COM5

12 to
24 V DC

C200H-OD214 Transistor Output Unit (8 Points, Sourcing)
Max. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Short-circuit protection
Power for External Supply
Weight

24 V DC (20.4 to 26.4 V DC) 0.8 A (2.4 A/Unit)
1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
1 ms max.
1 ms max.
1 (8 points/common)
140 mA 5 V DC max.
Overcurrent protection
Thermal protection
150 mA 20.4 to 26.4 V DC min.
250 g max.

635

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Circuit Configuration
OUT
L

Output indicator

Source
Driver

OUT

Internal
circuits Reset
button

24 V DC
COM

Alarm Output
indicator

Terminal Connections
L
L
L
L

24 V DC

L
L
L
L

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

COM (0 V)

24 V DC

Note Be sure to supply power to A9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.

C200H-OD214 Short-circuit Protection
The C200H-OD214 Output Unit is equipped with two types of short-circuit protection: overcurrent protection
and thermal protection. Any short-circuit must be eliminated immediately to protect the Unit.
Overcurrent Protection
When the output current reaches 2 A, the alarm output turns ON, and the alarm indicator lights. Make sure the
surge current of the load does not exceed 2 A, or the alarm may be activated.
Thermal Protection
When the junction temperature of the output transistor reaches its upper limit, the output will turn OFF, the
alarm output will turn ON, and the alarm indicator will flash protect to the transistor.
As shown in the alarm output table given below, there is one alarm indicator and alarm output bit for every two
outputs. The alarm indicator and alarm output bit will function the same regardless of which output an alarm is
detected for.
Thermal protection also works for two outputs at a time. If the thermal protection level is detected for one of the
outputs, the other output will be turned OFF as well.
The output transistor is provided with a cooling plate. If only one of the outputs is short-circuited, heat generation will be balanced with heat radiation, and the transistor junction temperature may increase high enough to
activate thermal protection. The alarm indicator and alarm output bit, however, will operate so that the alarm
can be detected.

636

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
How It Works
When the short-circuit protection activates, the output displays the characteristic shown below.
Output
Voltage

Overcurrent
limit alarm
output point

Output current:
2 A (minimum value)

Clearing the Alarm
When the short-circuit has been eliminated, reset the Unit by pressing the reset button. The alarm indicator will
go out, the alarm output bit will turn OFF, and the output will be reset.
Operating Restrictions
Although the C200H-OD214 is provided with short-circuit protection, these are for protecting internal circuits
against momentary short-circuiting in the load. Leaving short-circuits for any length of time will cause internal
temperature rise, deterioration of elements, discoloration of the case or PCBs, etc. Therefore, observe the following restrictions.
If a short-circuit occurs in an external load, immediately turn OFF the corresponding output. The C200HOD214 turns ON an alarm output bit that corresponds with the external load output number. Each pair of outputs share one alarm indicator and one alarm output bit as shown below (bits 12 through 15 are not used and
cannot be used as work bits)
Output No.
Alarm indicator No.
Alarm Output Point No.

0
0
08

2
09

4
10

6
11

Both the alarm indicator and alarm output bit for the short-circuited output turn ON even if only one of the outputs is short-circuited. Both outputs should be disconnected until the short-circuit can be traced.
Programming Example
If there is a short-circuit in an output, we want the program to turn that output OFF. Assume that the Unit is
mounted at CIO 000. A program to turn OFF output bits 00 and 01 is shown below.
A

00008
00000

00008
00001

Since alarm output bit 08 covers both output bits 00 and 01, both these outputs are forced OFF as soon as output bit 08 turns ON (bits A and B can be any other bits required in the program).

637

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

C200H-OD216 Transistor Output Unit (8 Points, Sourcing)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuse Rating
Weight

0.3 A 5 to 24 V DC
10 mA 5 V DC
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
1.5 ms max.
2 ms max.
1 (8 points/common) positive common (source type)
10 mA 5 V DC max. 75 mA 26 V DC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
None
250 g max.

Circuit Configuration

OUT

Output indicator
OUT

Internal
circuits

5 to 24 V DC
COM

Terminal Connections
L
L
L
L

5 to 24 V DC

L
L
L
L

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

COM A8
NC A9

638

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

C200H-OD217 Transistor Output Unit (12 Points, Sourcing)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits

0.3 A 5 to 24 V DC
10 mA 5 V DC
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
1.5 ms max.
2 ms max.
1 (12 points/common) positive common (source
type)
10 mA 5 V DC max. 75 mA 26 V DC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
None
300 g max.

Internal Current Consumption
Fuse Rating
Weight

Circuit Configuration

OUT

Output indicator
OUT
Internal
circuits

5 to
24 V DC
COM

Terminal Connections

L
L

5 to 24 V DC

L
L
L
L

1
3
5
7
9
11
NC
NC
COM

A0
A1

B0 0
B1 2

L
L

B2 4 L
A2
B3 6 L
A3
B4 8 L
A4
B5 10 L
A5
B6 NC
A6
B7 NC
A7
B8 NC
A8
B9 NC

639

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Appendix A

CS1W-OD212 Transistor Output Unit (16 Points, Sourcing)
Rated Voltage
Operating Load Voltage Range
Maximum Load Current
Maximum Inrush Current
Leakage Current
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Load Short-circuit Prevention

Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength

No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
External Power Supply
Weight

24 V DC
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
0.5 A/point, 2.5 A/common, 5.0 A/Unit
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
0.5 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
Detection current: 0.7 to 2.5 A
Automatic restart after error clearance. (Refer to the
following pages.)
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
16 (8 points/common, 2 circuits)
5 V DC 170 mA max.
20.4 to 26.4 V DC, 40 mA min.
270 g max.

Output indicator

Short-circuit
protection

Internal circuits

Short-circuit
protection

Circuit Configuration

ERR indicator

When overcurrent is detected, the ERR indicator will light, and the corresponding flag in the Basic I/O Unit
Information Area (A050 to A089) will turn ON.

640

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections

24 V DC

Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate if the
polarity is reversed.

Load Short-circuit Protection
This section describes the load short-circuit protection of the CS1W-OD212/OD232/OD262/MD262, C200HOD21B Output Units.
As shown below, normally when the output bit turns ON (OUT), the transistor will turn ON and then output current (Iout) will flow. If the output (Iout) is overloaded or short-circuited exceeding the detection current (Ilim), the
output current (Iout) will be limited as shown in Figure 2 below. When the junction temperature (Tj) of the output
transistor reaches the thermal shutdown temperature (Tstd), the output will turn OFF to protect the transistor
from being damaged, and the alarm output bit will turn ON to light the ERR indicator. When the junction temperature (Tj) of the transistor drops down to the reset temperature (Tr), the ERR indicator will be automatically
reset and the output current will start flowing.
Figure 1: Normal Condition

OUT:
IOUT:
ERR:
Ilim:
Tj:
Tstd:
Tr:

OUTPUT instruction
Output current
Alarm output, ERR indicator
Detection current
Junction temperature of transistor
Thermal shutdown temperature
Reset temperature

641

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Figure 2: Overload or Short-circuit

Operating Restrictions
Although the CS1W-OD212/OD232/OD262/MD262 and C200H-OD21B are provided with short-circuit protection, these are for protecting internal circuits against momentary short-circuiting in the load. As shown in Figure
2 below, the short-circuit protection is automatically released when the Tj equals to Tr. Therefore, unless the
cause of short-circuit is removed, ON/OFF operations will be repeated in the output. Leaving short-circuits for
any length of time will cause internal temperature rise, deterioration of elements, discoloration of the case or
PCBs, etc. Therefore, observe the following restrictions.
Restrictions
If a short-circuit occurs in an external load, immediately turn OFF the corresponding output and remove the
cause. The CS1W-OD212/OD232/OD262/MD262 and C200H-OD21B turn ON an alarm output bit that corresponds to the external load output number. There is an alarm output bit for every common.
When an alarm output bit turns ON, use a self-holding bit for the alarm in the user program and turn OFF the
corresponding output.
The alarm output bit is allocated in the Basic I/O Unit Information Area (A050 to A089) for every Unit mounting
slot.
The following table shows the correspondence between output bits and bits in the Basic I/O Unit Information
Area.
Output bit

m
0 to 7

CS1W-OD212
CS1W-OD232
CS1W-OD262
CS1W-MD262
C200H-OD21B

Mounted in even slot
Mounted in odd slot
Mounted in even slot
Mounted in odd slot
Mounted in even slot
Mounted in odd slot
Mounted in even slot
Mounted in odd slot

0
8
0
8
0
8
0
8

Mounted in even slot
Mounted in odd slot

0
8

m+1
0 to 15

8 to 15
1
9

m+2
0 to 15

m+3
0 to 15

----1
9
1
9
1
9

--------2
10
-----

--------3
11
-----

-----

For example, when the CS1W-OD212 is mounted in slot 0 on Rack 0, A05001 will turn ON if the output 8 is
short-circuited. When the CS1W-OD262 is mounted in slot 1 of Rack 0, A05011 will turn ON if the output m+3
is short-circuited.
Programming Example
In this example, CS1W-OD212 is mounted in slot 0 of the Rack 0.
This example shows how to turn OFF output bits CIO 000000 to CIO 000007 immediately if the alarm output bit
A05000 turns ON and how to keep the output bits OFF until the cause is removed and the bit is reset using
work bit W000001.

642

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
A05000

W00001
W0000

W00000

W00000
000000

W00000
000001

W00000
000007

C200H-OD21A Transistor Output Unit (16 Points, Sourcing)
(Load Circuit Protection Provided)
Max. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Load Short-circuit Protection
Power for External Supply
Weight
Alarm Output (See note 1.)

Reset Input
Load Short-circuit Protection
Dimensions

24 V DC (20.4 to 26.4 V DC), 1.0 A (4 A/Unit)
0.1 mA max.
0.8 V max.
0.1 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
1 (16 points/common)
160 mA 5 V DC max.
Detection current: 1.2 A min (1.6 A typical)
35 mA 20.4 to 26.4 V DC min.
400 g max.
No. of outputs: 1 (2 kΩ internal resistor), Output current: 10 mA max.,
Connectable Units: Only the following DC Input
Units can be connected:
C200H-ID001, ID211, ID212, IM211 (DC), IM212
(DC), ID215, ID501, MD115, MD215, MD501
Used when alarm output turns ON. Value will
depend on the external power supply. (See note 2.)
Detection current: 1.2 A min.
(1.6 A typical)
B-shape

643

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Internal circuits

Output
indicator

Short-circuit
protection
circuit

Circuit Configuration

to
0V
2 kΩ

Note When short-circuit/overload protection is activated, all 16 outputs will be switched OFF and the ALARM
output becomes active (low level). The problem can be detected externally by connecting a DC Input
Unit to the ALARM output or by connecting an alarm output indicator. It’s not possible to connect both
the Input Unit and the indicator at the same time.
Terminal Connections
+24 V DC

24 V DC

Note When the ALARM output turns ON, remove the cause of the high current and then shut off the external
power supply for approx. 1 second. After confirming that the cause has been removed, turn ON the
power supply again to reset the output. As shown in the diagram, it is recommended that a relay or
switch that turns ON or OFF only the external power supply be connected right before the B9 (+V).
Check that this relay or switch has a contact capacity higher than the external power supply current consumption (35 mA + load current minimum).

644

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Appendix A

CS1W-OD232 (32 Points, Sourcing)
Rated Voltage
Operating Load Voltage Range
Maximum Load Current
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Load Short-circuit Prevention

No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
External Power Supply

24 V DC
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
0.5 A/point, 2.5 A/common, 5.0 A/Unit (See note.)
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
0.5 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
Detection current: 0.7 to 2.5 A
Automatic restart after error clearance. (Refer to the above Load
Short-circuit Protection.)
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR terminal
(100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1
minute at a leakage current of 10 mA max.
32 (16 points/common, 2 circuits)
5 V DC 270 mA max.
20.4 to 26.4 V DC, 70 mA min.

Weight
Accessories

210 g max.
One connector for external wiring (soldered)

Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength

Note The maximum load currents will be 2.0 A/common and 4.0 A/Unit if a
pressure-welded connector is used.

Output Indicator
Short-circuit
protection

Internal circuits

Short-circuit
protection

Circuit Configuration

ERR indicator

When the output current of any output exceeds the detection current, the output for that point will turn OFF. At
the same time, the ERR indicator will light and the corresponding flag (one for each common) in the Basic I/O
Unit Information Area (A050 to A089) will turn ON.

645

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections
I/O word "m+1"

I/O word "m"

24 V DC

• When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate if the
polarity is reversed.
• Although the COM(+V) and 0V of rows A and B are internally connected, wire all points completely.

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD21B (32 Points)
(Load Short-circuit Protection Provided)
Max. Switching Current
Min. Switching Current
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuses
Power for External Supply
Weight
Alarm Indicator
Load Short-circuit Prevention
(See note 1.)
Dimensions

0.5 A 24 V DC (20.4 to 26.4 V DC) (5 A/Unit) (See
note.)
None
0.1 mA max.
0.8 V max.
0.1 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
32 (32 points/common)
180 mA 5 V DC max.
One 7 A fuse (1 fuse/common)
The fuses are not user-replaceable.
160 mA 20.4 to 26.4 V DC min.
(5 mA × number of ON pts)
180 g max.
Lamp F lights (unless fuse is broken).
Detection current: 0.7 to 2.5 A
Automatic restart after error clearance.
C-shape

Note The maximum load currents will be 4.0 A/Unit if a pressure-welded connector is used.

646

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

to
0V

Output
indicator

to
Alarm
indicator

Short-circuit
protection
circuit

Internal circuits

Short-circuit
protection
circuit

Circuit Configuration

to
0V

Output
indicator

to
0V

Note When the short-circuit/overload protection is activated for a contact point, the output for that point is
turned OFF. At the same time, lamp “F” lights, and the corresponding Flag in the Basic I/O Unit Information Area (A050 to A089) will turn ON. After the cause of the error has been removed, the alarm will be
cleared automatically when the internal temperature of the element drops.
Terminal Connections
I/O word "m"

I/O word "m+1"

24 V DC

647

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Appendix A

CS1W-OD262 (64 Points, Sourcing)
Rated Voltage
Operating Load Voltage Range
Maximum Load Current
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Load Short-circuit Prevention

Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength

No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
External Power Supply
Weight
Accessories

24 V DC
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
0.3 A/point, 1.6 A/common, 6.4 A/Unit
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
0.5 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
Detection current: 0.7 to 2.5 A
Automatic restart after error clearance. (Refer to the
above Load Short-circuit Protection.)
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
64 (16 points/common, 4 circuits)
5 V DC 390 mA max.
20.4 to 26.4 V DC, 130 mA min.
270 g max.
Two connectors for external wiring (soldered)

Output indicator
Short-circuit
protection

Internal circuits

Short-circuit
protection

Circuit Configuration

ERR indicator

When overcurrent is detected, the ERR indicator will light. At the same time, the corresponding flag (one for
each common) in the Basic I/O Unit Information Area (A050 to A089) will turn ON.

648

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections
CN1

I/O word "m+1"

I/O word "m+2"

I/O word "m"

CN2

I/O word "m+3"

24 V DC

COM2(+V)

24 V DC

COM3(+V)

24 V DC

COM2(+V)

COM3(+V)

• When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate if the
polarity is reversed.
• Although the COM(+V) and 0V of rows A and B of CN1 and CN2 are internally connected, wire all points
completely.

CS1W-OD292 Transistor Output Unit (96 Points, Sourcing)
Rated Voltage
Operating Load Voltage Range
Maximum Load Current
Maximum Inrush Current
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuse
External Power Supply
Weight
Accessories

12 to 24 V DC
10.2 to 26.4 V DC
0.1 A/point, 1.2 A/common, 7.2 A/Unit (See note.)
1.0 A/point, 10 ms max.
8.0 A/common, 10 ms max.
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
0.5 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR
terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA max.
6 (16 points/common)
480 mA max. at 5 V DC
3 A (1 per common)
The fuse cannot be replaced by the user.
10.2 to 26.4 V DC, 100 mA min.
320 g max.
Two connectors for external wiring (soldered)

Note The maximum load currents will be 1.0 A/command and 6.0 A/Unit if a
pressure-welded connector is used.

649

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Circuit Configuration

Fuse

Internal circuits

x 3 CN1 circuits

Indicator
switch circuit
Blown fuse
detection
circuit

Output indicator
ERR indicator

Internal circuits

Fuse

x 3 CN2 circuits

Note The ERR indicator will light if a fuse blows or if the external power supply is turned OFF, and the corresponding Flag in the Basic I/O Unit Information Area (A050 to A089) will turn ON.

650

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Terminal Connections: CS1W-OD292 24-V DC 96-point Transistor Output Unit (Sourcing Outputs)

12 to
24 V DC

Word (m+3)

Word (m+2)

COM2

12 to
24 V DC

COM3
COM1

Word (m+4)

Word (m+1)

12 to
24 V DC

COM4

Word (m+5)

Word m

COM0

12 to
24 V DC

COM5

12 to
24 V DC

651

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

CS1W-MD261 DC Input/Transistor Output Unit (32/32 Points, Sinking)
Rated Voltage

Output section (CN1)
12 to 24 V DC

Operating Load Voltage Range
Maximum Load Current

Input section (CN2)
Rated Input Voltage 24 V DC

10.2 to 26.4 V DC
0.3 A/point, 1.6 A/common, 3.2 A/
Unit

Maximum Inrush Cur- 3.0/point, 10 ms max.
rent
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time

1.5 V max.
0.5 ms max.

Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance

20.4 to 26.4 V DC
3.9 kΩ

Input Current

6 mA typical (at 24 V DC)

ON Voltage/ON Current
OFF Voltage/OFF
Current
ON Response Time

15.4 V DC min./3 mA min.
5 V DC min./1 mA min.

8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between
0 and 32 in the PLC Setup.) (See
notes 1 and 2.)
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
OFF Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between
0 and 32 in the PLC Setup.) (See
No. of Circuits
32 (16 points/common, 2 circuits)
notes 1 and 2.)
Fuse
None
No. of Circuits
32 (16 points/common, 2 circuits)
External Power Sup- 10.2 to 26.4 V DC, 30 mA min.
Number of Simulta70% (11 points/common)
ply
neously ON Points
(at 24 V DC)
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR terminal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current
of 10 mA max.
Internal Current Con- 5 V DC 270 mA max.
sumption
Weight
260 g max.
Accessories
Two connectors for external wiring (soldered)

Internal circuits

Circuit Configuration

(Outputs)

I/O indicator

3.9 kΩ

1000 pF
560 Ω

652

(Inputs)

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Number of simultaneously ON points

Number of Simultaneously ON Points vs.
Ambient Temperature Characteristic
16 points at 33°C

16 points at 45°C
Input voltage: 24 V DC
Input voltage: 26.4 V DC

12 points at 55°C
9 points at 55°C

Ambient Temperature

Terminal Connections
Inputs

I/O word "m"

I/O word "m+1"

24
V DC

12 to 24 V DC

Outputs

24
V DC

12 to
24 V DC

• When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity. The load may operate is polarity is reversed.
• Although the +V and COM terminals of rows A and B of CN1 and CN2 are internally connected, wire all
points completely.
Note 1. The ON response time will be 120 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 300 µs maximum even
if the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.
2. The input ON and OFF response times for Basic I/O Units can be set to 0, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 ms
in the PLC Setup.

653

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Appendix A

CS1W-MD291 DC Input/Transistor Output Unit (48/48 Points, Sinking)
Outputs (CN1)
Rated Voltage
Operating Load Voltage Range
Maximum Load Current
Maximum Inrush Current
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Fuse
External Power Supply
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength

Internal Current Consumption
Weight
Accessories

12 to 24 V DC
10.2 to 26.4 V DC
0.1 A/point, 1.2 A/common, 3.6 A/Unit (See note.)
1.0 A/point, 10 ms max.
8.0 A/common, 10 ms max.
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
0.5 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
48 points (16 points/common, 3 commons)
3-A fuses (1 per common). Three fuses are used.
The fuse cannot be replaced by the user.
10.2 to 26.4 V DC, 50 mA min.
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
350 mA max. at 5 V DC
320 g max.
Two connectors for external wiring (soldered)

Note The maximum load currents will be 1.0 A/common and 3.0 A/Unit if a
pressure-welded connector is used.
Inputs (CN2)
Rated Input Voltage

24 V DC

Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage/ON Current
OFF Voltage/OFF Current
ON Response Time

20.4 to 26.4 V DC
4.7 kΩ
Approx. 5 mA (at 24 V DC)
17 V DC min./3 mA min.
5.0 V DC max./1 mA max.
8.0 ms max.(Possible to select one out of eight
times from 0 to 32 ms in the PLC Setup.) (See note
below.)
8.0 ms max. (Possible to select one out of eight
times from 0 to 32 ms in the PLC Setup.) (See note
below.)
48 points (16 points/common, 3 commons)
50% (8 points/common) (at 24 V DC) (Depends on
ambient temperature.)
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
350 mA max. at 5 V DC
320 g max.
Two connectors for external wiring (soldered)

OFF Response Time

No. of Circuits
Number of Inputs Simultaneous ON
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength

Internal Current Consumption
Weight
Accessories

Note The input ON and OFF response times for Basic I/O Units can be set to 0 ms, 0.5 ms, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms,
8 ms, 16 ms, or 32 ms in the PLC Setup.

654

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Circuit Configuration

Internal circuits

10.2 to
26.4 V DC

Internal circuits

Indicator
switch circuit
Blown fuse
detection
circuit

× 3 CN1 (Output)

Fuse

Output indicator
ERR indicator
4.7 kΩ

× 3 CN2 (Input)
1000 pF
560 Ω

Note 1. The ERR indicator will light if a fuse blows or if the external power supply is turned OFF, and the corresponding Flag in the Basic I/O Unit Information Area (A050 to A089) will turn ON.
2. The ON response time will be 120 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 300 µs maximum even
if the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.

655

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Terminal Connections: CS1W-MD291 24-V DC 48-point Input/48-point Output Unit (Sinking Outputs)

12 to
24 V DC

Word (m+3)

Word (m+2)

24 V DC

COM2

COM3

Word (m+4)

Word (m+1)

12 to
24 V DC

24 V DC

COM1

COM4

Word (m+5)

Word m

COM0

12 to
24 V DC

COM5

24 V DC

656

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

CS1W-MD262 DC Input/Transistor Output Unit (32/32 Points, Sourcing)
Rated Voltage

Output section (CN1)
24 V DC

Input section (CN2)
Rated Input Voltage 24 V DC
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance

20.4 to 26.4 V DC
3.9 kΩ

Operating Load Voltage Range
Maximum Load Current

20.4 to 26.4 V DC
0.3 A/point, 1.6 A/common, 3.2 A/
Unit

Input Current

6 mA typical (at 24 V DC)

Leakage Current

0.1 mA max.

15.4 V DC min./3 mA min.

Residual Voltage

1.5 V max.

ON Voltage/ON Current
OFF Voltage/OFF
Current
ON Response Time

ON Response Time 0.5 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
Load Short-circuit
Prevention

Detection current: 0.7 to 2.5 A
Automatic restart after error clearance. (Refer to the above Load
Short-circuit Protection.)
32 (16 points/common, 2 circuits)
20.4 to 26.4 V DC, 70 mA min.

5 V DC min./1 mA min.

8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between
0 and 32 in the PLC Setup.) (Refer
to the above Load Short-circuit Protection.)
OFF Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between
0 and 32 in the PLC Setup.) (Refer
to the above Load Short-circuit Protection.)

No. of Circuits
External Power SupNumber of Simulta70% (11 points/common)
ply
neously ON Points
(at 24 V DC)
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR terminal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current
of 10 mA max.
Internal Current Con- 5 V DC 270 mA max.
sumption
Weight
270 g max.
Accessories
Two connectors for external wiring (soldered)

Short-circuit
protection

Circuit Configuration

Internal circuits

(Outputs)

I/O indicator

3.9 kΩ

1000 pF

560 Ω

(Inputs)

ERR indicator

657

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Number of simultaneously ON points

Number of Simultaneously ON Points vs.
Ambient Temperature Characteristic
32 points at 40°C

32 points at 34°C

Input voltage: 24 V DC
Input voltage: 26.4 V DC

22 points at 55°C
16 points at 55°C

Ambient Temperature

Terminal Connections
I/O word "m+1"

I/O word "m"

I/O word "m+2"

24
V DC

24 V DC

I/O word "m+3"

24
V DC

24 V DC

• When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity. The load may operate if the polarity is reversed.
• Although the +V and COM terminals of rows A and B of CN1 and CN2 are internally connected, wire all
points completely.
Note The ON response time will be 120 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 300 µs maximum even if
the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.

658

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Appendix A

CS1W-MD292 DC Input/Transistor Output Unit (48/48 Points, Sourcing)
Outputs (CN1)
Rated Voltage
Operating Load Voltage Range
Maximum Load Current
Maximum Inrush Current
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Fuse
External Power Supply
Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength

Internal Current Consumption
Weight
Accessories

12 to 24 V DC
10.2 to 26.4 V DC
0.1 A/point, 1.2 A/common, 3.6 A/Unit (See note.)
1.0 A/point, 10 ms max.
8.0 A/common, 10 ms max.
0.1 mA max.
1.5 V max.
0.5 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
48 points (16 points/common, 3 commons)
3 A (1 per common)
The fuse cannot be replaced by the user.
10.2 to 26.4 V DC, 50 mA min.
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
350 mA max. at 5 V DC
320 g max.
Two connectors for external wiring (soldered)

Note The maximum load currents will be 1.0 A/common and 3.0 A/Unit if a
pressure-welded connector is used.
Inputs (CN2)
Rated Input Voltage

24 V DC

Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage/ON Current
OFF Voltage/OFF Current
ON Response Time

20.4 to 26.4 V DC
4.7 kΩ
Approx. 5 mA (at 24 V DC)
17 V DC min./3 mA min.
5.0 V DC max./1 mA max.
8.0 ms max. (Possible to select one out of eight
times from 0 to 32 ms in the PLC Setup.) (See note
below.)
OFF Response Time
8.0 ms max. (Possible to select one out of eight
times from 0 to 32 ms in the PLC Setup.) (See note
below.)
No. of Circuits
48 points (16 points/common, 3 commons)
Number of Simultaneously ON 50% (8 points/common) (at 24 V DC) (Depends on
Points
ambient temperature.)
Insulation Resistance
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 350 mA max. at 5 V DC
Weight
320 g max.
Accessories
Two connectors for external wiring (soldered)

659

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Note The input ON and OFF response times for Basic I/O Units can be set to
0 ms, 0.5 ms, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms, 8 ms, 16 ms, or 32 ms in the PLC
Setup.
Circuit Configuration
Fuse

Internal circuits

x 3 CN1 (Output)

Internal circuits

Indicator
switch circuit
Blown fuse
detection
circuit

Output indicator
ERR indicator
4.7 kΩ

x 3 CN2 (Input)
1000 pF
560 Ω

Note 1. The ERR indicator will light if a fuse blows or if the external power supply is turned OFF, and the corresponding Flag in the Basic I/O Unit Information Area (A050 to A089) will turn ON.
2. The ON response time will be 120 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 300 µs maximum even
if the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.

660

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Terminal Connections: CS1W-MD292 24-V DC 48-point Input/48-point Transistor Output Unit (Sourcing
Outputs)

12 to
24 V DC

Word (m+3)

Word (m+2)

24 V DC

COM2

COM3

Word (m+4)

Word (m+1)

12 to
24 V DC

24 V DC

COM1

COM4

Word (m+5)

Word m

COM0

12 to
24 V DC

COM5

24 V DC

661

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Appendix A

CS1W-MD561 TTL I/O Unit (32/32 Points)
Outputs (CN1)
Rated Voltage
Operating Load Voltage Range
Maximum Load Current
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Fuse
External Power Supply

Internal Current Consumption
Weight
Accessories

5 V DC±10%
4.5 to 5.5 V DC
35 mA/point, 560 mA/common, 1.12 A/Unit
0.1 mA max.
0.4 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
32 points (16 points/common, 2 commons)
None
5 V DC±10%, 40 mA min. (1.2 mA × No. of ON
points)
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (100 V DC)
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
270 mA max. at 5 V DC
260 g max.
Two connectors for external wiring (soldered)

Rated Input Voltage
Input Impedance

5 V DC±10%
1.1 kΩ

Insulation Resistance
Dielectric Strength

Inputs (CN2)

Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time

Approx. 3.5 mA (at 5 V DC)
3.0 V DC min.
1.0 V DC max.
8.0 ms max. (Possible to select one out of eight
times from 0 to 32 ms in the PLC Setup.) (See notes
1 and 2.)
OFF Response Time
8.0 ms max. (Possible to select one out of eight
times from 0 to 32 ms in the PLC Setup.) (See notes
1 and 2.)
No. of Circuits
32 points (16 points/common, 2 commons)
Number of Simultaneously ON No restrictions
Points
Insulation Resistance
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength
1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 270 mA max. at 5 V DC
Weight
260 g max.
Accessories
Two connectors for external wiring (soldered)

Note 1. The ON response time will be 120 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 300 µs maximum even
if the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.
2. The input ON and OFF response times for Basic I/O Units can be set to 0 ms, 0.5 ms, 1 ms, 2 ms,
4 ms, 8 ms, 16 ms, or 32 ms in the PLC Setup.

662

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Circuit Configuration
+V

Internal circuits

4.7 kΩ

OUT0
0
to
100 Ω

× 2 CN1
(Output)

OUT15
5

4.7 kΩ

COM

Internal circuits

1.1 kΩ

IN00
to

2.4 kΩ

1000 pF

IN15

× 2 CN2
(Input)

COM

Terminal Connections: CS1W-MD561 TTL 32-point Input/32-point Output Unit
CN1
I/O word "m+1"

I/O word "m"

B
+V
COM1

20 20
19 19

+V
COM0

18 18

17 17

L
L
5 V DC

16 16

15 15

14 14

13 13

12 12

11 11

10 10

COM1

5 V DC

9
8

L
L

1
0

3
2
1

2
1
0

10 10

12 12

13 13

14 14

15 15

16 16

17 17

COM2

18 18

COM3

19 19

20 20

L
L
L

11 11

5 V DC

COM3

COM2

COM0

I/O word "m+3"

CN2

I/O word "m+2"

663

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)
C200H-ID501 TTL Input Unit Used for 32 Static Inputs
Rated Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
High-speed Inputs
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

5 V DC ±10%
1.1 kΩ
3.5 mA typical (at 5 V DC)
3.0 V DC min.
1.0 V DC max.
2.5 ms/15 ms max.
2.5 ms/15 ms max.
4 (8 points/common)
8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)
130 mA 5 V DC max.
300 g max.

Circuit Configuration
COM0
IN00
CN1

The power supply polarity
does not matter.

2.4 k

IN07
COM1
IN08

1.1 k

IN15

Internal
circuits

COM2
IN00
CN2

2.4 k

IN07
COM3
IN08

1.1 k

IN15

Terminal Connections

CN1

CN2

I/O word "n"
NC

B A
12 12

11 11

NC
COM1

10 10
9

5 V DC

I/O word "n+1"

8
7

COM0

9
8

5 V DC

+
5 V DC

5
6

8
9
10
11
13

COM2

5 V DC

15
COM3

Note When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.

664

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

C200H-ID215 DC Input Unit Used for 32 Static Inputs
Rated Input Voltage

24 V DC

Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
High-speed Inputs

20.4 to 26.4 V DC
5.6 kΩ
4.1 mA (at 24 V DC)
14.4 V DC min.
5.0 V DC max.
2.5 ms/15 ms max.
2.5 ms/15 ms max.
4 (8 points/common) (See note 2.)
8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)
130 mA 5 V DC max.
300 g max.

Internal Current Consumption
Weight

Circuit Configuration
COM0
1000 pF

IN00
CN1

The power supply polarity does not matter.

620 Ω

IN07
COM1
IN08

5.6 kΩ

IN15
Internal
circuits

COM2
1000 pF

IN00
CN2

620 Ω

IN07
COM3
IN08

5.6 kΩ

IN15

Terminal Connections

CN1

CN2

I/O word "n"
NC

B
12

A
12

COM1

9
15 8
14 7

24 V DC

I/O word "n+1"

COM0

9
8

11 4
10 3

9 2
8 1

13 6
12 5

24 V DC

4
5

24 V DC

8
9
10
11
13

COM2

24 V DC

15
COM3

Note 1. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.
2. At high temperatures, the number of inputs that can be turned ON simultaneously is limited. Refer to
the graphs on the following page for details.

665

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Appendix A

Number of Simultaneous Inputs
The number C200H-ID215 24-V DC inputs that can be ON simultaneously will vary with ambient temperature
as shown in the figure below.
Input Voltage: 26.4 V DC

Simultaneously Usable Inputs

32
30

Input Voltage: 24.0 V DC
Input Voltage:
24.0 V DC; 55°C,
22 points ON

22
20
16
Input Voltage:
24.0 V DC; 55°C,
16 points ON

Input Voltage:
24.0 V DC; 34°C,
32 points ON

Input Voltage:
24.0 V DC; 43°C,
32 points ON

0
0

20 30 34 40 43 50

55 60

Ambient Temperature (°C)

If the number of inputs that are ON exceeds the number that can be ON at the same time, then heat generated
by electronic components will increase the temperature of the components and the case. Higher temperatures
will lower the reliability and service life of the elements and will damage the Unit. Higher temperatures in electronic components and the case will also cause time delays. There is no particular problem if all input points
are turned ON for less than 10 minutes (if all input points have been OFF for at least 2 hours) under special
conditions, such as during startup work inspections.

C200H-OD501 TTL Output Unit Used for 32 Static Outputs
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuses
Power for External Supply
Weight

666

5 V DC±10% 35 mA (280 mA/common, 1.12 A/Unit;
output resistance 4.7 kΩ)
None
0.1 mA max.
0.4 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
4 (8 points/common)
220 mA 5 V DC max.
4 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replaceable.)
39 mA 5 V DC±10% min. (1.2 mA × no. of outputs
ON)
300 g max.

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 13, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 13Y2 or earlier)
5 V DC
4.7 kΩ
OUT00
OUT07
CN1
COM0
Fuse
5 V DC
OUT08
OUT15
COM1
5 V DC

Internal
circuits
4.7 kΩ

OUT00
OUT07
CN2
COM2
Fuse
5 V DC
OUT08
OUT15
COM3

Units manufactured on or after November 14, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 14Y2H or later)
5 V DC
4.7 kΩ
OUT00
to

Internal circuits

OUT07
to
COM0
Fuse
5 V DC
4.7 kΩ
OUT00
to
OUT07
to
COM1
Fuse

667

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections

CN1

CN2

I/O word "n"

NC
NC
+5 V DC

B
12

A
12

9
15 8
14 7

COM1
L
L

5 V DC

L
L
L
L
L

13 6
12 5

I/O word "n+1"

5 V DC

11 4
10 3

9 2
8 1

5 V DC

L
L

+
L

COM0

NC
+5 V DC

B
1

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

L
COM2

+5 V DC

L
L

A
1

L
L
L
L
L

5 V DC

L
L
L
COM3

+5 V DC

Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = CIO 2000 + 10 × unit number).
2. The Unit will have 32 static output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
3. The outputs are negative logic outputs; when there is an output, the terminal has an “L” voltage level.
Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 kΩ.

C200H-OD501 TTL Output Unit Used for 128 Dynamic Inputs
Max. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuses
Power for External Supply
Weight

668

5 V DC±10% 35 mA (280 mA/common, 1.12 A/Unit;
output resistance 4.7 kΩ)
0.1 mA max.
0.4 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)
220 mA 5 V DC max.
4 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replaceable.)
39 mA 5 V DC min. (1.2 mA × no. of outputs ON)
300 g max.

Appendix A

Fuse
5 V DC
4.7 kΩ
Internal
circuits

STB00
STB07
Fuse

COM1
5 V DC
DATA08
DATA15
COM2
CN2
5 V DC
STB08
STB15
COM3

Units manufactured on or after November 14, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 14Y2H or later)
5 V DC
4.7 kΩ

Internal circuits

DAT00
to
DAT07

Fuse

CN1

COM0
5 V DC
STB00
to
STB07
COM1
5 V DC

4.7 kΩ
DAT08
to
DAT15

Fuse

CN2

COM2
5 V DC
STB08
to
STB15
COM3

669

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections

CN1
NC

B
12

A
12

+V1

+V0

COM1

CN2

5 V DC

COM0

STB7

DATA7

STB6

DATA6

STB5

DATA5

STB4

DATA4

STB3

DATA3

STB2

DATA2

STB1

DATA1

STB0

DATA0

Strobe
input

Output device
(such as a numeric display)

DATA8
DATA9
DATA10

Data
input

DATA11
DATA12
DATA13

Strobe
input

Output device
(such as a numeric display)

DATA14
DATA15
COM2

+
5 V DC

+V2

STB8
STB9
STB10
STB11
STB12
STB13
STB14
STB15
COM3
+V3

Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s operation manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.
3. Set pin 5 of the Unit’s DIP switch ON for positive logic outputs, or OFF for negative logic outputs.
When set for negative logic outputs, the terminal has an “L” voltage level when there is an output.
When set for positive logic outputs, the terminal has an “H” voltage level when there is an output.
4. The strobe signal has negative logic regardless of the setting of pin 5.
5.

Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 kΩ.

C200H-OD215 Transistor Output Unit Used for 32 Static Outputs
Max. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuses
Power for External Supply
Weight

670

16 mA, 4.5 V DC to 100 mA, 26.4 V DC
800 mA/common, 3.2 A/Unit
0.1 mA max.
0.7 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.6 ms max.
4 (8 points/common)
220 mA 5 V DC max.
4 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replaceable.)
90 mA 5 to 24 V DC±10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)
300 g max.

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 29, 1999
(manufacturing numbers 29Y9 or earlier)

Units manufactured between November 30, 1999 and
October 9, 2002 (manufacturing numbers 30Y9 to 09X2)

5 to
24 V DC

OUT00

OUT07
10 kΩ
8.2 kΩ

Fuse

Internal
circuits

COM0
5 to
24 V DC
OUT08

OUT07
CN1

6.8 kΩ
15 kΩ

Fuse

Internal
circuits

OUT15
COM1
5 to
24 V DC

OUT00

OUT07
8.2 kΩ

Fuse

COM2
5 to
24 V DC
OUT08

CN1

OUT15
COM1
5 to
24 V DC

OUT00
10 kΩ

COM0
5 to
24 V DC
OUT08

OUT07
CN2

6.8 kΩ
15 kΩ

OUT15
COM3

Fuse

COM2
5 to
24 V DC
OUT08

CN2

OUT15
COM3

Units manufactured on or after October 10, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 10X2H or later)
5 to 24 V DC
8.2 kΩ
OUT00
to
OUT07
CN1

100 Ω
Internal
circuits

12 kΩ

Fuse

COM0
5 to 24 V DC
OUT07
to
OUT15
COM1
5 to 24 V DC

8.2 kΩ
OUT00
to
OUT07
CN2

100 Ω
12 kΩ

Fuse

COM2
5 to 24 V DC
OUT08
to
OUT15
COM3

671

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections

CN1

CN2

I/O word "n"

NC
NC
+5 to 24 V DC
COM1
L
L

5 to 24
V DC

L
L
L
L
L

15
14
13
12
11

B
12

A
12

9
7

5 to 24
V DC

L
L

5 to 24
V DC

L
L

COM0

NC
+5 to 24 V DC

I/O word "n+1"

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

L
COM2

+5 to 24 V DC

L
L

L
L
L

5 to 24

L
L

+ V DC

L
L
L
COM3

+5 to 24 V DC

Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = CIO 2000 + 10 × unit number).
2. The Unit will have 32 static output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.

C200H-OD215 Transistor Output Unit Used for 128 Dynamic Outputs
Max. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Fuses
Power for External Supply
Weight

672

16 mA, 4.5 V DC to 100 mA, 26.4 V DC
800 mA/common, 3.2 A/Unit
0.1 mA max.
0.7 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.6 ms max.
2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)
220 mA 5 V DC max.
4 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replaceable.)
90 mA 5 to 24 V DC±10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)
300 g max.

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 29, 1999
(manufacturing numbers 29Y9 or earlier)

Units manufactured between November 30, 1999 and
October 9, 2002 (manufacturing numbers 30Y9 to 09X2)

5 to
24 V DC

DATA00

DATA07
10 kΩ

DATA07
6.8 kΩ

COM0
8.2 kΩ

CN1

Fuse

Internal
circuits

STB07
COM1
5 to
24 V DC
DATA08

8.2 kΩ

Fuse

DATA15
COM2
5 to
24 V DC
STB08

CN1

Fuse
5 to
24 V DC

Internal
circuits

STB00
10 kW

COM0
15 kΩ

5 to
24 V DC

STB00
6.8 kΩ
15 kΩ

Fuse

STB07
COM1
5 to
24 V DC
DATA08
DATA15
COM2
5 to
24 V DC
STB08

CN2

STB15
COM3

CN2

STB15
COM3

Units manufactured on or after October 10, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 10X2H or later)
8.2 kΩ
5 V DC

DAT00
to
DAT07

100 Ω

CN1

12 kΩ
Internal
circuits

Fuse

8.2 kΩ

COM0
5 V DC
STB00
to
STB07
COM1
5 V DC

DAT08
to

100 Ω

DAT15

CN2

12 kΩ
Fuse

COM2
5 V DC
STB08
to
STB15
COM3

673

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections

CN1
NC

B A
12 12

+V1
COM1

STB7
STB6
STB5
STB4
STB3
STB2
STB1
STB0

+V0

5 to 24 V DC

CN2

COM0

DATA7
DATA6

DATA8
Output device
(such as a numeric display)

Strobe
input

DATA10

DATA5

DATA11

DATA4
DATA3

Data
input

DATA0

Strobe
input

DATA12
DATA13

DATA2
DATA1

DATA9

Output device
(such as a numeric display)

DATA14
DATA15
COM2

+
5 to 24 V DC

+V2

STB8
STB9
STB10
STB11
STB12
STB13
STB14
STB15
COM3
+V3

674

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

High-density I/O Unit Limitations
Limitations on the switching capacity of C200H-OD215/MD115/MD215 Transistor Output Units and the usable
number of I/O points in the C200H-ID215 and C200H-MD215 are shown below.

Switching Capacity
The switching capacity of C200H-OD215/MD115/MD215 Transistor Output Units depends on the power supply
voltage, as shown below.

Max. Switching Capacity (mA/pt)

100

16
0
0

4.5

20.4

26.4

Power Supply Voltage (V)

C200H-MD501 TTL I/O Unit
Used for 16 Static Inputs and 16 Static Outputs
Output Specifications (Connector 1)
Max. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Fuses
Power for External Supply

5 V DC±10% 35 mA (280 mA/common, 560 mA/
Unit; output resistance 4.7 kΩ)
0.1 mA max.
0.4 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
2 (8 points/common)
2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replaceable.)
20 mA 5 V DC±10% min. (1.2 mA × no. of outputs
ON)

Input Specifications (Connector 2)
Rated Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
High-speed Inputs

5 V DC±10%
1.1 kΩ
3.5 mA typical (at 5 V DC)
3.0 V DC min.
1.0 V DC max.
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
2 (8 points/common)
8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)

675

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
General Specifications
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

180 mA 5 V DC max.
300 g max.

Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 21, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 21Y2 or earlier)
5 V DC
4.7 kΩ
OUT00
OUT07
COM0

CN1 (Output)

Fuse
5 V DC
OUT08

Internal
circuits
1.1 kΩ

OUT15
COM1
IN00
IN07

2.4 kΩ
COM2
IN08

CN2 (Input)

IN15
COM3

Units manufactured on or after November 22, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 22Y2H or later)
5 V DC
4.7 kΩ
OUT00
to
OUT07

Internal circuits

COM0
Fuse

CN1 (Output)

5 V DC
OUT08
to
OUT15
COM1

1.1 kΩ
IN0 0
to
IN0 7
2.4 kΩ

COM2
IN08
to
IN15
COM3

676

CN2 (Input)

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections

CN1

CN2

I/O word "n"
NC
NC
+5 V DC
COM1
L
L

5 V DC

L
L
L
L
L

15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8

B A
12 12
11 11
10 10
9

NC
NC
+5 V DC
COM0

2
1

5 V DC
5 V DC

+
+

I/O word "n+1"
A B
0
8
1
1
1
9
2
2
2
10
3
3
3
11
4
4
4
12
5
5
5
13
6
6
6
14
7
7
7
15
8
8
COM2

5 V DC

COM3

Note 1. The Unit will have 16 static output and16 static input points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
2. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.
3. The outputs are negative logic outputs; when there is an output, the terminal has an “L” voltage level.
Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 kΩ.
4. The user is not authorized to change the fuse.

C200H-MD501 TTL I/O Unit Used for 128 Dynamic Inputs
Output Specifications (Connector 1)
Max. Switching Capacity
Min. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Fuses
Power for External Supply

5 V DC±10% 35 mA (280 mA/common, 560 mA/
Unit; output resistance 4.7 kΩ)
None
0.1 mA max.
0.4 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replaceable.)
20 mA 5 V DC±10% min. (1.2 mA × no. of outputs
ON)

Input Specifications (Connector 2)
Rated Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage

5 V DC ±10%
1.1 kΩ
3.5 mA (at 5 V DC)
3.0 V DC min.
1.0 V DC max.

No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)
180 mA 5 V DC max.
300 g max.

General Specifications

677

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 21, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 21Y2 or earlier)
5 V DC
4.7 kΩ
STB00
STB07
CN1
COM0
Fuse
5 V DC
STB08

Internal
circuits
1.1 kΩ

STB15
COM1
DATA00
DATA07

2.4 kΩ
COM2
DATA08

CN2

DATA15
COM3

Units manufactured on or after November 22, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 22Y2H or later)
5 V DC
4.7 kΩ
STB00
to
STB07

Internal circuits

COM0
Fuse

CN1 (Output)

5 V DC
STB08
to
STB15
COM1

1.1 kΩ
DAT00
to
DAT07
2.4 kΩ

COM2
DAT08
to
DAT15
COM3

678

CN2 (Input)

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections

CN1
NC
NC

5 V DC

+V1
COM1

STB15
STB14
STB13
STB12

B
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5

A
12
11
10
9

CN2
DATA0

DATA1

NC
+V0

5 V DC

DATA2

DATA3

COM0

Keyboard, thumbwheel switch, etc.

DATA4

STB7

STB6

STB5

DATA6

STB4

DATA7
COM2

DATA5

DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15

STB11

STB3

STB10

STB2

10 10

STB9

STB1

11 11

STB0

12 12

STB8

COM3

Keyboard, thumbwheel switch, etc.

C200H-MD115 12-V DC Input/Transistor Output Unit
Used for 16 Static Inputs and 16 Static Outputs
Output Specifications (Connector 1)
Max. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Fuses
Power for External Supply

16 mA, 4.5 V DC to 100 mA, 26.4 V DC
800 mA/common, 1.6 A/Unit
0.1 mA max.
0.7 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.6 ms max.
2 (8 points/common)
2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replaceable.)
45 mA 5 to 24 V DC±10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)

679

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Appendix A

Input Specifications (Connector 2)
Rated Input Voltage

12 V DC

Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
High-speed Inputs

10.2 to 13.2 V DC
2.7 kΩ
4.1 mA typical (at 12 V DC)
8.0 V DC min.
3.0 V DC max.
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
2 (8 points/common)
8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)

Internal Current Consumption
Weight

180 mA 5 V DC max.
300 g max.

General Specifications

680

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 17, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 17Y2 or earlier)
5 to 24
V DC
4.7 kΩ
OUT00
OUT07
CN1
Fuse

COM0
5 to 24
V DC
OUT08

2.7 kΩ

OUT15
COM1
IN00

Internal
circuits

620 Ω

IN07
1000 pF
COM2
IN08

CN2

IN15
COM3

Units manufactured on or after November 18, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 18Y2H or later)

5 V DC

OUT00
Internal circuits

to
OUT07

COM0
Fuse

2.7 kΩ
1000 pF

IN00
to
IN07

620 Ω
COM2

681

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections

CN1

CN2

I/O word "n"
NC
NC
+5 to 24 V DC
COM1

5 to 24
V DC

B
12

A
12

NC
NC
+5 to 24 V DC
COM0

2
1

12 V DC

5 to 24
V DC

I/O word "n+1"
A B
0
8
1
1
1
9
2
2
2
10
3
3
3
11
4
4
4
12
5
5
5
13
6
6
6
14
7
7
7
15
8
8
COM2

12 V DC

COM3

Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = CIO 2000 + 10 × unit number).
2. The Unit will have 16 static output and16 static input points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
3. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.
4. The user is not authorized to change the fuse.

C200H-MD115 12-V DC Input/Transistor Output Unit
Used for 128 Dynamic Inputs
Output Specifications (Connector 1)
Max. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Fuses
Power for External Supply

50 mA, 12 V DC (10.2 to 13.2 V DC), 400 mA/common, 0.8 A/Unit
0.1 mA max.
0.7 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.6 ms max.
2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replaceable.)
45 mA 5 to 24 V DC±10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)

Input Specifications (Connector 2)
Rated Input Voltage

12 V DC

Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current

10.2 to 13.2 V DC
2.7 kΩ
4.1 mA typical (at 12 V DC)

ON Voltage
OFF Voltage

8.0 V DC min.
3.0 V DC max.

No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)
180 mA 5 V DC max.
300 g max.

General Specifications

682

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before November 17, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 17Y2 or earlier)
12 V DC

STB00
STB07
CN1
COM0
Fuse
12 V DC
STB08

Internal
circuits
2.7 kΩ

620 Ω

STB15
COM1
DATA00
DATA07

1000 pF
COM2
DATA08

CN2

DATA15
COM3

Units manufactured on or after November 18, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 18Y2H or later)

5 V DC

OUT00
to

Internal circuits

OUT07
COM0

Fuse

2.7 kΩ

IN00
to
IN07

1000 pF
620 Ω
COM2

683

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections

CN1
NC
NC

12 V DC

+V1

COM1

STB15
STB14
STB13
STB12
STB11
STB10
STB9
STB8

B
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5

A
12

+V0

9
8
7
6
5
4

2
1

DATA0

CN2

DATA1
12 V DC

DATA2

DATA3

COM0

STB7
STB6

Keyboard, thumbwheel switch, etc.

DATA4
DATA5

STB5

DATA6

STB4

DATA7

STB3

COM2

STB2
STB1
STB0

DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
COM3

10 10

11 11

12 12

Keyboard, thumbwheel switch, etc.

Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s operation manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.
3. The user is not authorized to change the fuse.

C200H-MD215 24-V DC Input/Transistor Output Unit
Used for 16 Static Inputs and 16 Static Outputs
Output Specifications (Connector 1)
Max. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
Fuses
Power for External Supply

Input Specifications (Connector 2)

684

Rated Input Voltage

24 V DC

Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
No. of Circuits
High-speed Inputs

20.4 to 26.4 V DC
5.6 kΩ
4.1 mA (at 24 V DC)
14.4 V DC min.
5.0 V DC max.
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
2 (8 points/common)
8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
General Specifications
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

180 mA 5 V DC max.
300 g max.

Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured between November 30, 1999 and
October 9, 2002 (manufacturing numbers 30Y9 to 09X2)

Units manufactured on or before November 29, 1999
(manufacturing numbers 29Y9 or earlier)
5 to
24 V DC

5 to
24 V DC

OUT00

OUT07

OUT07
CN1

10 kΩ
k
Fuse

8.2 kΩ
k
Internal
circuits

15 kΩ

5.6 kΩ

IN07

620 Ω

1,000 pF
COM2
IN08

Fuse

Internal
circuits

OUT15
COM1
IN00

5.6 kΩ

620 Ω

CN1

6.8 kΩ

COM0
5 to
24 V DC
OUT08

CN2

COM0
5 to
24 V DC
OUT08
OUT15
COM1
IN00
IN07

1,000 pF
COM2
IN08

IN15
COM3

CN2

IN15
COM3

Units manufactured on or after October 10, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 10X2H or later)
5 to 24 VDC
8.2 kΩ

OUT00
to
OUT07

Internal circuits

100 Ω

CN1
COM0

12 kΩ

620 Ω

Fuse

5 to 24 VDC
OUT08
to
OUT15
COM1

5.6 kΩ

IN00
to

1000 pF

IN07
COM2
IN08
to
IN15
COM3

CN2

685

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections

CN1

CN2

I/O word "n"
NC
NC
+5 to 24 V DC
COM1

5 to 24
V DC

B
12

A
12

I/O word "n+1"
A B
0
8
1 1
1
9
2 2
2
10
3 3
3
11
4 4
4
12
5 5
5
13
6 6
6
14
7 7
7
15
8 8

NC
NC
+5 to 24 V DC
COM0

24 V DC

10 10

11 11

12 12

2
1

5 to 24
V DC

COM2

24 V DC

COM3

Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = CIO 2000 + 10 × unit number).
2. The Unit will have 16 static output and16 static input points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
3. At high temperatures, the number of inputs that can be turned ON simultaneously is limited. Refer to
the graph page 688 for details.
4. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.
5. The user is not authorized to change the fuse.

C200H-MD215 24-V DC Input/Transistor Output Unit
Used for 128 Dynamic Inputs/Dynamic Outputs
Output Specifications (Connector 1)
Max. Switching Capacity
Leakage Current
Residual Voltage
ON Response Time
OFF Response Time
Fuses
Power for External Supply

100 mA, 24 V DC (20.4 to 26.4 V DC), 800 mA/common, 1.6 A/Unit
0.1 mA max.
0.7 V max.
0.2 ms max.
0.6 ms max.
2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replaceable.)
45 mA 5 to 24 V DC±10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)

Input Specifications (Connector 2)
Rated Input Voltage
Operating Input Voltage
Input Impedance
Input Current
ON Voltage
OFF Voltage

24 V DC
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
5.6 kΩ
4.1 mA (at 24 V DC)
14.4 V DC min.
5.0 V DC max.

No. of Circuits
Internal Current Consumption
Weight

2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)
180 mA 5 V DC max.
300 g max.

General Specifications

686

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Circuit Configuration

Units manufactured between November 30, 1999 and
October 9, 2002 (manufacturing numbers 30Y9 to 09X2)

Units manufactured on or before November 29, 1999
(manufacturing numbers 29Y9 or earlier)
24 V DC

24 V DC

STB00

STB07

STB07
CN1

10 kΩ

CN1

6.8 kΩ
COM0

COM0
8.2 kΩ

Fuse

15 kΩ
24 V DC
STB08

Internal
circuits

620 Ω

24 V DC
STB08

Internal
circuits

STB15
COM1
DATA00

5.6 kΩ

DATA07

620 Ω

1,000 pF
COM2
DATA08

Fuse

CN2

STB15
COM1
DATA00
DATA07

1,000 pF
COM2
DATA08

DATA15
COM3

CN2

DATA15
COM3

Units manufactured on or after October 10, 2002
(manufacturing numbers 10X2H or later)
5 to 24 V DC
8.2 kΩ

STB00
to
STB07

100 Ω

CN1

Internal circuits

COM0
12 kΩ

Fuse

5 to 24 V DC
STB08
to
STB15
COM1

5.6 kΩ
1000 pF
620 Ω

DAT00
to
DAT07
COM2
DAT08
to
DAT15

CN2

COM3

687

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units
Terminal Connections

CN1
NC
NC

12 V DC

+V1
COM1

STB15
STB14
STB13
STB12

B
12

A
12

CN2
DATA0

DATA1

10 +V0 12 V DC

DATA2

DATA3

9
8
7
6
5

COM0

STB6

STB5

DATA6

STB4

DATA7
COM2

STB11

STB3

STB10

STB2

STB9

STB1

STB0

STB8

Keyboard,
thumbwheel
switch, etc.

STB7

DATA4
DATA5

DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
COM3

10 10

11 11

12 12

Keyboard,
thumbwheel
switch, etc.

Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s operation manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.
3. Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 kΩ.
4. At high temperatures, the number of inputs that can be turned ON simultaneously is limited. Refer to
the graph on the next page for details.
5. The user is not authorized to change the fuse.

Switching Capacity
The switching capacity of C200H-OD215/MD115/MD215 Transistor Output Units depends on the power supply
voltage, as shown below.

Max. Switching Capacity (mA/pt)

100

16
0
0

4.5

20.4

Power Supply Voltage (V)

688

26.4

Appendix A

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

Simultaneous Input and Outputs for the C200H-MD215
The number C200H-MD215 24-V DC inputs that can be ON simultaneously will depend on ambient temperature as shown in the figure below. There is no limit to the number of outputs that can be ON simultaneously.
Input Voltage: 26.4 V DC

16
15

Simultaneously Usable Inputs

Input Voltage:
26.4 VDC; 55°,
11 points ON

Input Voltage: 24.0 V DC

11
10

Input Voltage:
26.4 VDC; 43°,
16 points ON
0
0

20
30 34 40 43 50 55 60
Ambient Temperature (°C)

Note If the number of C200H-MD215 inputs that are ON exceeds the number that can be ON at the same
time, then heat generated by electronic components will raise the temperature of the components and
the case. This will lower the reliability and service life of the components and will damage the Unit.
Higher temperatures in electronic components and the case will also cause time delays. There is no
problem if all input points are turned ON for less than 10 minutes (if all input points have been OFF for at
least 2 hours) under special conditions, such as during startup work inspections.

689

Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units

690

Appendix A

Appendix B
Auxiliary Area
Note The undefined addresses of the Auxiliary Area may be allocated to functions in future version upgrades
of the CPU Unit. Do not use these words as CIO Area words in the user program.
A000 to A447: Read-only Area, A448 to A959: Read/Write Area

Read-only Area (Set by System)
Address
Words

Name

Bits

Function

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related flags,
settings

A000

---

10-ms
Incrementing Free
Running
Timer

This word contains the system timer used after the
Retained Cleared
power is turned ON.
0000 hex is set when the power is turned ON and this
value is automatically incremented by 1 every 10 ms.
The value returns to 0000 hex after reaching FFFF hex
(655,350 ms), and then continues to be automatically
incremented by 1 every 10 ms.
Note: The timer will continue to be incremented when
the operating mode is switched to RUN mode.
Example: The interval can be counted between processing A and processing B without requiring timer instructions. This is achieved by
calculating the difference between the value
in A000 for processing A and the value in
A000 for processing B. The interval is
counted in 10 ms units.

Every 10 ms after
power is turned ON
CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 or later

A001

---

100-ms
Incrementing Free
Running
Timer

Every 100 ms after
power is turned ON
CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 or later

A002

---

1-s Incrementing
Free Running Timer

This word contains a system timer used after the
Retained Cleared
power is turned ON
0000 hex is set when the power is turned ON and this
value is automatically incremented by 1 every 1 s. The
value returns to 0000 hex after reaching FFFF hex
(65,535 s), and then continues to be automatically
incremented by 1 every 1 s.
Note: The timer will continue to be incremented when
the operating mode is switched to RUN mode.

Every 1 s after power
is turned ON
CPU Unit with unit version. 4.0 or later

A050

A05000
to
A05007

Basic I/O
Unit Information,
Rack 0 Slot
0

Every cycle

A05008
to
A05015

Basic I/O
Unit Information,
Rack 0 Slot
1

A bit will turn ON to indicate when a fuse has blows.
--The bit numbers correspond to the fuse number on the
Unit.
Only the right-most bit is used for C200H Basic I/O
Units.
--1: Fuse blown
0: Normal

A05100
to
A06915

Basic I/O
Unit Information,
Racks 2 to 9

A051 to
A069

---

691

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Address
Words

Name

Function

Bits

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related flags,
settings

A090 to
A093

---

User
Program
Date

These words contain in BCD the date and time that the Retained Retained --user program was last overwritten.
A09000 to A09007:
Seconds (00 to 59)
A09008 to A09015:
Minutes (00 to 59)
A09100 to A09107: Hour (00 to 23)
A09108 to A09115:
Day of month (01 to 31)
A09200 to A09207: Month (01 to 12)
A09208 to A09215: Year (00 to 99)
A09308 to A09307: Day of the week
(00: Sunday, 01: Monday, 02: Tuesday, 03: Wednesday, 04: Thursday, 05: Friday, 06: Saturday)

A094 to
A097

---

Parameter
Date

These words contain in BCD the date and time that the Retained Retained --parameters were last overwritten.
The format is the same as above

A099

A09900

UM Read
Protection
Status

Indicates whether the entire user program in the PLC
is read-protected.
0: UM not read-protected.
1: UM read-protected.

Retained Retained When protection is set
or cleared
CPU Unit with unit version 2.0 or later

A09901

Task Read
Protection
Status

Indicates whether read protection is set for individual
tasks.
0: Tasks not read-protected.
1: Tasks read-protected.

Retained Retained When protection is set
or cleared
CPU Unit with unit version 2.0 or later

A09902

Program
Write Protection Status when
Read Protection Is
Set

Indicates whether the program is write-protected.
0: Write-enabled.
1: Write-protected.

Retained Retained When protection is set
or cleared
CPU Unit with unit version 2.0 or later

A09903

Enable/Disable Status
for Backing
Up the Program to a
Memory
Card

Indicates whether creating a backup program file
(.OBJ) is enabled or disabled.
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.

Retained Retained When protection is set
or cleared
CPU Unit with unit version 2.0 or later

A09914

IR/DR Operation
between
Tasks

Turn ON this bit to share index and data registers
between all tasks. Turn OFF this bit to use separate
index and data registers between in each task.
0: Independent
1: Shared (default)

Retained Retained ---

A09915

Timer/
Counter PV
Refresh
Mode Flag

Indicates whether the CPU Unit is storing
timer/counter PV in BCD or binary.
0: BCD mode
1: Binary mode

Retained Retained ---

692

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Address
Words

Name

Function

Bits

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related flags,
settings

A100 to
A199

All

Error Log
Area

When an error has occurred, the error code, error con- Retained Retained Written when error
tents, and error’s time and date are stored in the Error
occurs
Log Area. Information on the 20 most recent errors
A50014
can be stored.
A300
Each error record uses 5 words; the function of these
A400
5 words is as follows:
1) Error code (bits 0 to 15)
2) Error contents (bits 0 to 15)
Error code
Error contents:
Address of Aux. Area word with details or 0000
3) Minutes (bits 8 to 15),
Seconds (bits 0 to 7)
Seconds: 00 to 59, BCD
Minutes: 00 to 59, BCD
4) Day of month (bits 8 to 15),
Hours (bits 0 to 7)
Hours: 00 to 23, BCD
Day of month: 01 to 31, BCD
5) Year (bits 8 to 15),
Month (bits 0 to 7)
Year: 00 to 99, BDC
Month: 00 to 12, BCD
Errors generated by FAL(006) and FALS(007) will also
be stored in this Error Log.
The Error Log Area can be reset from a Programming
Device.
If the Error Log Area is full (20 records) and another
error occurs, the oldest record in A100 to A104 will be
cleared, the other 19 records are shifted down, and
the new record is stored in A195 to A199.

A200

A20011

First Cycle
Flag

ON for one cycle after PLC operation begins (after the
mode is switched from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR, for example).
ON for the first cycle

A20012

Step Flag

Cleared
ON for one cycle when step execution is started with
STEP(008). This flag can be used for initialization processing at the beginning of a step.
ON for the first cycle after execution of STEP(008).

A20014

Task
When a task switches from WAIT or INI to RUN status,
Started Flag this flag will be turned ON within the task for one cycle
only.
ON for first cycle (including transitions from WAIT and
IN)
The only difference between this flag and A20015 is
that this flag also turns ON when the task switches
from WAIT to RUN status.

A20015

First Task
ON when a task is executed for the first time. This flag Cleared
Startup Flag can be used to check whether the current task is being
executed for the first time so that initialization processing can be performed if necessary.
1: First execution
0: Not executable for the first time or not being
executed.

A20110

Online
Editing Wait
Flag

ON when an online editing process is waiting.
(If another online editing command is received while
waiting, the other command won’t be recorded and an
error will occur.)
1: Waiting for online editing
0: Not waiting for online editing

A20111

Online
Editing Flag

ON when an online editing process is being executed
1: Online editing in progress
0: Online editing not in progress

A201

---

Cleared

---

Cleared

A527

Cleared

A527

Cleared

693

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Address
Words
A202

A203 to
A210

694

Name

Bits

Function

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related flags,
settings

A20200
to
A20207

Communications Port
Enabled
Flags

ON when a network instruction (SEND, RECV, CMND, Cleared
PMCR, TXDU or RXDU) or background execution can
be executed with the corresponding port number. Bits
00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
1: Network instruction is not being executed
0: Network instruction is being executed (port busy)
When two or more network instructions are programmed with the same port number, use the corresponding flag as an execution condition to prevent the
instructions from being executed simultaneously.
(The flag for a given port is turned OFF while a network instruction with that port number is being executed.)
(When the simple backup operation is used to performed a write or compare operation for a Memory
Card, a communications port will be automatically allocated, and the corresponding Flag will be turned OFF.)

---

A20215

Network
Communications
Automatic
Allocation
Flag

This flag turns ON when a Network Communications
Cleared
Instruction (SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490),
PMCR(260), TXDU(256), or RXDU(255)) can be executed using the automatic communications port allocation function.
1: Communications port available
0: Communications port not available
Note: When using the automatic communications port
allocation function to execute nine or more network communications instructions simultaneously, use this flag to perform exclusive
control.

---

All

Communications Port
Completion
Codes

These words contain the completion codes for the cor- Cleared
responding port numbers when network instructions
(SEND, RECV, CMND, or PMCR) or background execution has been executed.
Words A203 to A210 correspond to communications
ports 0 to 7.
Non-zero: Error code
0000: Normal condition
The following codes will be stored when an Explicit
Message Instruction (EXPLT, EGATR, ESATR,
ECHRD, or ECHWR) has been executed.
If the Explicit Communications Error Flag turns OFF,
0000 hex is stored.
If the Explicit Communications Error Flag is ON and
the Network Communications Error Flag is ON, the
FINS end code is stored.
If the Explicit Communications Error Flag is ON and
the Network Communications Error Flag is OFF, the
explicit message end code is stored.
During communications, 0000 hex will be stored and
the suitable code will be stored when execution has
been completed. The code will be cleared when operation is started.
(The completion code for a given port is cleared to
0000 when a network instruction with that port number
is executed.)
(When the simple backup operation is used to performed a write or compare operation for a Memory
Card, a communications port will be automatically allocated, and a completion code will be stored in the corresponding word.)

---

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Address
Words

Name

Function

Bits

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related flags,
settings

A213

A21300
to
A21307

Explicit
Communications
Error Flag

Turn ON when an error occurs in executing an Explicit
Message Instruction (EXPLT, EGATR, ESATR,
ECHRD, or ECHWR).
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to
7.
1: Error end
0: Normal end
The corresponding bit will turn ON both when the
explicit message cannot be sent and when an error
response is returned for the explicit message.
The status will be maintained until the next explicit
message communication is executed. The bit will
always turn OFF when the next Explicit Message
Instruction is executed.

Cleared

A214

A21400
to
A21407

First Cycle
Flags after
Network
Communications Finished

Each flag will turn ON for just one cycle after communications have been completed. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to ports 0 to 7. Use the Used Communications
Port Number stored in A218 to determine which flag to
access.
1: First cycle after communications finish only
2: Other status
Note: These flags are not effective until the next cycle
after the communications instruction is executed. Delay accessing them for at least one
cycle.

Retained Cleared

---

A215

A21500
to
A21507

First Cycle
Flags after
Network
Communications
Error

Each flag will turn ON for just one cycle after a comRetained Cleared
munications error occurs. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to
ports 0 to 7. Use the Used Communications Port Number stored in A218 to determine which flag to access.
Determine the cause of the error according to the
Communications Port Completion Codes stored in
A203 to A210.
1: First cycle after communications error only
0: Other status
Note: These flags are not effective until the next cycle
after the communications instruction is executed. Delay accessing them for at least one
cycle.

---

A216 to
A217

All

Network
Communications
Completion
Code Storage
Address

The completion code for a communications instruction Retained Cleared
is automatically stored at the address with the I/O
memory address given in these words. Place this
address into an index register and use indirect
addressing through the index register to read the communications completion code.

---

A218

All

Used Communications Port
Numbers

Stores the communications port numbers used when a Retained Cleared
communications instruction is executed using automatic communication port allocations.
0000 to 0007 hex: Communications port 0 to 7

---

A219

A21900
to
A21907

Communications Port
Error Flags

ON when an error occurred during execution of a net- Retained --work instruction (SEND, RECV, CMND, or PMCR).
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to
7.
1: Error occurred
0: Normal condition
(When the simple backup operation is used to performed a write or compare operation for a Memory
Card, a communications port will be automatically allocated, and the corresponding Flag will be turned OF if
an error occurs.)

---

A220 to
A259

A22000
to
A25915

Basic I/O
Unit Input
Response
Times

These words contain the actual input response times.
0 to 17 hexadecimal
When the Basic I/O Unit input response time setting is
changed in the PLC Setup while the PLC is in PROGRAM mode, the setting in the PLC Setup will not
match the actual value in the Basic I/O Unit unless the
power is turned OFF and then ON again. In that case,
the actual value can be monitored in these words.

PLC Setup (Basic I/O
Unit Input response
time settings)

---

Retained See
function
column.

A21900 to A21907
A203 to A210

695

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Address
Words
A261

Name

Function

Bits

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

A26100

CPU Bus
Unit Setup
Area Initialization Error
Flag

ON: Error in CPU Bus Unit Setup
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: Error in CPU Bus Unit Setup
OFF: I/O tables generated normally

A26102

I/O Overflow Flag

ON: Overflow in maximum number of I/O points
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: Overflow in maximum number of I/O points
OFF: I/O tables generated normally

A40111 (Too many I/O
points)

A26103

Duplication
Error Flag

ON: The same unit number was used more than once.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: The same unit number was used more than once.
OFF: I/O tables generated normally

A40113 (duplicated
number)

A26104

I/O Bus
Error Flag

ON: I/O bus error
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: I/O bus error
OFF: I/O tables generated normally

A40114 (I/O but error)

A26106

SYSMAC
ON: SYSMAC BUS detection ended in an error.
BUS Recog- Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
nition Error
ON: SYSMAC BUS detection ended in an error.
Flag
OFF: I/O tables generated normally

A26107

Special I/O
Unit Error
Flag

ON: Error in a Special I/O Unit
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: Error in a Special I/O Unit
OFF: I/O tables generated normally

A26109

I/O Unconfirmed Error
Flag

ON: I/O detection has not been completed.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: I/O detection has not been completed.
OFF: I/O tables generated normally

A262
and
A263

All

Maximum
Cycle Time

These words contain the maximum cycle time since
the start of PLC operation (the program execution
cycle time for a Parallel Processing Mode). The cycle
time is recorded in 8-digit hexadecimal with the leftmost 4 digits in A263 and the rightmost 4 digits in
A262.
0 to FFFFFFFF:
0 to 429,496,729.5 ms (0.1ms units)

Cleared

Cleared-

---

A264
and
A265

All

Present
Cycle Time

These words contain the present cycle time in 8-digit
hexadecimal with the leftmost 4 digits in A265 and the
rightmost 4 digits in A264 (the program execution
cycle time for a Parallel Processing Mode).
0 to FFFFFFFF:
0 to 429,496,729.5 ms

Cleared

---

A266
and
A267

All

Program
Execution
Time + Priority Peripheral
Servicing
Time

Total of all slice times for program execution and all
slice times for peripheral servicing.
00000000 to FFFFFFFF hex
0.0 to 429,496,729.5 ms (0.1-ms increments)

Cleared

---

A268

All

Peripheral
Servicing
Cycle Time

In Parallel Processing with Synchronous or Asynchronous Memory Access, this word contains the peripheral servicing cycle time. The time is updated every
cycle and is recorded in 16-bit binary.
0 to 4E20 hex, (0.0 to 2,000.0 ms in units of 0.1 ms)

Cleared

Each cycle
A40515

A294

All

Task Number when
Program
Stopped

This word contains the task number of the task that
was being executed when program execution was
stopped because of a program error.
Normal tasks: 0000 to 001F (task 0 to 31)
Interrupt tasks: 8000 to 80FF (task 0 to 255)
(A298 and A299 contain the program address where
program execution was stopped.)

Cleared

A298/A299

696

Retained Cleared

Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
When I/O tables are
generated

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Address
Words
A295

A295

Name

Function

Bits

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related flags,
settings

A29508

Instruction
Processing
Error Flag

This flag and the Error Flag (ER) will be turned ON
Cleared
when an instruction processing error has occurred and
the PLC Setup has been set to stop operation for an
instruction error. CPU Unit operation will stop and the
ERR/ALM indicator will light when this flag goes ON.
1: Error Flag ON
0: Error Flag OFF

Cleared

PLC Setup (Operation
when instruction error
has occurred)
The task number
where the error
occurred will be stored
in A294 and the program address will be
stored in A298 and
A299.

A29509

Indirect
DM/EM
BCD Error
Flag

This flag and the Access Error Flag (AER) will be
turned ON when an indirect DM/EM BCD error has
occurred and the PLC Setup has been set to stop
operation an indirect DM/EM BCD error. (This error
occurs when the content of an indirectly addressed
DM or EM word is not BCD although BCD mode has
been selected.) CPU Unit operation will stop and the
ERR/ALM indicator will light when this flag goes ON.
1: Not BCD
0: Normal

Cleared

PLC Setup (Operation
when instruction error
has occurred)
The task number
where the error
occurred will be stored
in A294 and the program address will be
stored in A298 and
A299.

A29510

Illegal
Access
Error Flag

This flag and the Access Error Flag (AER) will be
Cleared
turned ON when an illegal access error has occurred
and the PLC Setup has been set to stop operation an
illegal access error. (This error occurs when a region
of memory is access illegally.) CPU Unit operation will
stop and the ERR/ALM indicator will light when this
flag goes ON.
The following operations are considered illegal access:
1) Reading/writing the system area
2) Reading/writing EM File Memory
3) Writing to a write-protected area
4) Indirect DM/EM BCD error (in BCD mode)
1: Illegal access occurred
0: Normal condition

Cleared

PLC Setup (Operation
when instruction error
has occurred)
The task number
where the error
occurred will be stored
in A294 and the program address will be
stored in A298 and
A299.

A29511

No END
Error Flag

ON when there isn’t an END(001) instruction in each
Cleared
program within a task.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indicator will light when this flag goes ON.
1: No END
0: Normal condition

Cleared

The task number
where the error
occurred will be stored
in A294 and the program address will be
stored in A298 and
A299.

A29512

Task Error
Flag

ON when a task error has occurred. The following
conditions generate a task error.
There isn’t even one regular task that is executable
(started).
There isn’t a program allocated to the task.
1: Error
0: Normal

Cleared

The task number
where the error
occurred will be stored
in A294 and the program address will be
stored in A298 and
A299.

A29513

Differentiation Overflow Error
Flag

The allowed value for Differentiation Flags which correspond to differentiation instructions has been
exceeded. CPU Unit operation will stop and the
ERR/ALM indicator will light when this flag goes ON.
1: Error
0: Normal

Cleared

The task number
where the error
occurred will be stored
in A294 and the program address will be
stored in A298 and
A299.

A29514

Illegal
Instruction
Error Flag

ON when a program that cannot be executed has
been stored. CPU Unit operation will stop and the
ERR/ALM indicator will light when this flag goes ON.
1: Error
0: Normal

Cleared

The task number
where the error
occurred will be stored
in A294 and the program address will be
stored in A298 and
A299.

A29515

UM Overflow Error
Flag

ON when the last address in UM (User Memory) has
been exceeded. CPU Unit operation will stop and the
ERR/ALM indicator will light when this flag goes ON.
1: Error
0: Normal

Cleared

---

697

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Address
Words

Name

Function

Bits

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related flags,
settings

Cleared

A294 contains the task
number of the task
where program execution was stopped.

A298 to
A299

All

Program
Address
Where Program
Stopped

These words contain the 8-digit binary program
address of the instruction where program execution
was stopped due to a program error.

Cleared

A300

All

Error Log
Pointer

When an error occurs, the Error Log Pointer is incremented by 1 to indicate the location where the next
error record will be recorded as an offset from the
beginning of the Error Log
Area (A100 to A199).
00 to 14 hexadecimal
The Error Log Pointer can be cleared to 00 by turning
A50014 (the Error Log Reset Bit) from OFF to ON.
When the Error Log Pointer has reached 14 (20 decimal), the next record is stored in A195 to A199 when
the next error occurs.

Retained Retained Written when error
occurs
A50014

A301

All

Current EM
Bank

This word contains the current EM bank number in 4digit hexadecimal. The current bank number can be
changed with the EMBC(281) instruction.
0000 to 000C hexadecimal

Cleared

A302

A30200
to
A30215

CPU Bus
These flags are ON while the corresponding CPU Bus
Unit Initializ- Unit is initializing after its CPU Bus Unit Restart Bit
ing Flags
(A50100 to A50115) is turned from OFF to ON or the
power is turned ON.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to 15.
Use these flags in the program to prevent the CPU
Bus Unit’s refresh data from being used while the Unit
is initializing. IORF(097) cannot be executed while an
CPU Bus Unit is initializing.
0: Not initializing
1: Initializing
(Reset to 0 automatically after initialization.)
These bits are turned OFF automatically when initialization is completed.

Retained Cleared

Written during initialization
A50100

A330 to
A335

A33000
to
A33515

Special I/O These flags are ON while the corresponding Special
Unit Initializ- I/O Unit is initializing after its Special I/O Unit Restart
ing Flags
Bit (A50200 to A50715) is turned from OFF to ON or
the power is turned ON.
The bits in these words correspond to unit numbers 0
to 95 as follows:
A33000 to A33015: Units 0 to 15
A33100 to A33115: Units 16 to 31
---A33500 to A33515: Units 80 to 95
Use these flags in the program to prevent the Special
I/O Unit’s refresh data from being used while the Unit
is initializing. Also, IORF(097) cannot be executed
while a Special I/O Unit is initializing.
0: Not initializing
1: Initializing
(Reset to 0 automatically after initialization.)
These bits are turned OFF automatically when initialization is completed.

Retained Cleared

A50200 to A50715

A339
and
A340

All

Maximum
Differentiation Flag
Number

See
Function
column.

Written at the start of
operation
A29513

698

These words contain the maximum value of the differentiation flag numbers being used by differentiation
instructions.

Cleared

---

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Address
Words
A343

Name

Function

Bits

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related flags,
settings

A34300
to
A34302

Memory
Card Type

Indicates the type of Memory Card, if any, installed.
This information is recorded when the PLC power is
turned ON or the Memory Card power switch is turned
ON.
0: None
4: Flash ROM

Retained See
Function
column.

See Function column.
---

A34306

EM File
Memory
Format
Error Flag

ON when a format error occurs in the first EM bank
allocated for file memory.
1: Format error
0: No format error
(The flag is turned OFF when formatting is completed
normally.)

Retained Cleared

---

A34307

Memory
Card Format Error
Flag

ON when the Memory Card is not formatted or a formatting error has occurred. (The flag is turned OFF
when formatting is completed normally.)
1: Format error
0: No format error
This flag is written when the PLC power is turned ON
or the Memory Card power switch is turned ON.

Retained See
Function
column.

See Function column.

A34308

File Transfer Error
Flag

ON when an error occurred while writing data to file
memory.
1: Error
0: No error

Retained Cleared

Written when file data
is written

A34309

File Write
Error Flag

ON when data cannot be written to file memory
because it is write-protected or the data exceeds the
capacity of the file memory.
1: Write not possible
0: Normal condition

Retained Cleared

Written when file data
is written

A34310

File Read
Error

ON when a file could not be read because of a malfunction (file is damaged or data is corrupted).
1: Read not possible
0: Normal condition

Retained Cleared

Written when file data
is read

A34311

File Missing
Flag

ON when an attempt is made to read a file that doesn’t Retained Cleared
exist, or an attempt is made to write to a file in a directory that doesn’t exist.
1: Specified file or directory is missing
0: Normal condition

Written when file data
is read

A34313

File Memory ON while any of the following operations is being exe- Retained Cleared
Operation
cuted. OFF when none of them are being executed.
Flag
CMND instruction sending a FINS command to the
local CPU Unit.
Execution of a File Memory instructions.
Program replacement using the control bit in the Auxiliary Area.
Easy backup operation.
1: Instruction being executed.
0: Instruction not being executed.

Written when file
memory instruction is
executed

A34314

Accessing
File Data
Flag

ON while file data is being accessed. Use this flag to
prevent two file memory instructions from being executed at the same time.
1: File being accessed
0: File not being accessed

Retained Cleared

---

A34315

Memory
Card
Detected
Flag

ON when a Memory Card has been detected.
OFF when a Memory Card has not been detected.
1: Memory Card detected
0: Memory Card not detected

Retained Cleared

Written when Memory
Card is inserted, or the
power is turned ON.

699

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Address
Words

Name

Function

Bits

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related flags,
settings

A344

All

EM File
Memory
Starting
Bank

Contains the starting bank number of EM file memory Retained Retained Written when EM file
(bank number of the first formatted bank). All EM
formatting is perbanks from this starting bank to the last bank in EM
formed
are formatted for use as file memory.
PLC Setup (EM File
To convert the EM Area for use as file memory, first set
Memory Function setthe PLC Setup’s EM File Memory Function setting to
ting and EM File Mem1, set the PLC Setup’s EM File Memory Starting Bank
ory Starting Bank
setting, and then format the EM Area from a Programsetting)
ming Device
The PLC Setup’s EM file memory settings won’t agree
with the actual settings unless the EM Area is formatted after the PLC Setup’s EM file memory settings
have been changed. In that case, the actual settings
can be determined with this word.

A345

A34500

FB Program Data
Flag

Turns ON if the FB program memory contains FB
program data.

A34501

Program
Index File
Flag

Turns ON when the comment memory contains a
program index file.

A34502

Comment
File Flag

Turns ON when the comment memory contains a
comment file.

A34503

Symbol
Table File
Flag

Turns ON when the comment memory contains a
symbol table file.

A346
and
A347

All

Number of
Remaining
Words to
Transfer

These words contain the 8-digit hexadecimal number Retained Cleared
of words remaining to be transferred by FREAD(700)
or FWRIT(701). When one of these instructions is executed, the number of words to be transferred is written
to A346 and A347.
While the data is being transferred, the value in these
words is decremented.
A326 contains the rightmost 4-digits and A347 contains the leftmost 4-digits.
Check the content of these words to determine
whether or not the planned number of words have
been transferred successfully.

A351 to
A354

All

Calendar/Clock
Area

These words contain the CPU Unit’s internal clock
Retained Retained Written every cycle
data in BCD. The clock can be set from a Programming Device such as a Programming Console, with the
DATE(735) instruction, or with a FINS command
(CLOCK WRITE, 0702).

A355

700

A35100
to
A35107

Seconds (00 to 59) (BCD)

A35108
to
A35115

Minutes (00 to 59) (BCD)

A35200
to
A35207

Hours (00 to 23) (BCD)

A35208
to
A35215

Day of the month (01 to 31) (BCD)

A35300
to
A35307

Month (01 to 12) (BCD)

A35308
to
A35315

Year (00 to 99) (BCD)

A35400
to
A35407

Day of the week (00 to 06) (BCD)
00: Sunday, 01: Monday, 02: Tuesday,
03: Wednesday, 04: Thursday,
05: Friday, 06: Saturday

A35500
to
A35915

Inner Board
Monitoring
Area

The function of these words is defined by the Inner
Board.

Retained Retained When program is
downloaded

Determined by
Inner
Board

Written as FREAD or
FWRIT is being executed.
Decremented as data
is actually transferred.

Deter--mined by
Inner
Board

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Address

Name

Function

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related flags,
settings

Words

Bits

A360 to
A391

A36001
to
A39115

Executed
FAL Number Flags

The flag corresponding to the specified FAL number
will be turned ON when FAL(006) is executed. Bits
A36001 to A39115 correspond to FAL numbers 001 to
511.
The flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared.
1: That FAL was executed
0: That FAL wasn’t executed

Retained Cleared

Written when error
occurs
A40215

A392

A39204

RS-232C
Port Error
Flag

ON when an error has occurred at the RS-232C port.
(Not valid in peripheral bus mode or NT Link mode.)
1: Error
0: No error

Retained Cleared

Written when error
occurs

A39205

RS-232C
Port Send
Ready Flag
(No-protocol mode)

ON when the RS-232C port is able to send data in no- Retained Cleared
protocol mode.
1: Able-to-send
0: Unable-to-send

Written after transmission

A39206

RS-232C
Port Reception Completed Flag
(No-protocol mode)

ON when the RS-232C port has completed the recep- Retained Cleared
tion in no-protocol mode.
• When the number of bytes was specified: ON when
the specified number of bytes is received.
• When the end code was specified:
ON when the end code is received or 256 bytes are
received.

Written after reception

A39207

RS-232C
Port Reception Overflow Flag
(No-protocol mode)

ON when a data overflow occurred during reception
through the RS-232C port in no-protocol mode.
• When the number of bytes was specified: ON when
more data is received after the reception was completed but before RXD(235) was executed.
• When the end code was specified:
ON when more data is received after the end code
was received but before RXD(235) was executed.
ON when 257 bytes are received before the end
code.
1: Overflow
0: No overflow

Retained Cleared

---

A39212

Peripheral
Port Communications Error
Flag

ON when a communications error has occurred at the
peripheral port. (Not valid in peripheral bus mode or
NT Link mode.)
1: Error
0: No error

Retained Cleared

---

A39300
to
A39307

RS-232C
The corresponding bit will be ON when the RS-232C
Port PT
port is communicating with a PT in NT link mode.
CommuniBits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
cations Flag
1: Communicating
0: Not communicating

Retained Cleared

Written when there is
a normal response to
the token

A39308
to
A39315

RS-232C
Port PT Priority Registered Flags

Retained Cleared

See Function column.

A39300
to
A39315

RS-232C
Indicates (in binary) the number of bytes of data
Port Recep- received when the RS-232C port is in no-protocol
tion Counter mode.
(No-protocol mode)

Retained Cleared

Written when data is
received

A393

The corresponding bit will be ON for the PT that has
priority when the RS-232C port is communicating in
NT link mode.
Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
These flags are written when the priority registration
command is received.
1: Priority registered
0: Priority not registered

701

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Address
Words
A394

A395

Name

Function

Bits

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related flags,
settings

A39400
to
A39407

Peripheral
The corresponding bit will be ON when the peripheral
Port PT
port is communicating with a PT in NT link mode.
CommuniBits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
cations Flag
1: Communicating
0: Not communication

Retained Cleared

Written when there is
a normal response to
the token

A39408
to
A39415

Peripheral
Port PT Priority Registered Flags

The corresponding bit will be ON for the PT that has
priority when the peripheral port is communicating in
NT link mode.
Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
These flags are written when the priority registration
command is received.
1: Priority registered
0: Priority not registered

Retained Cleared

See Function column.

A39506

File Deleted
Flags

The system deleted the remainder of a Memory Card
file that was being updated when a power interruption
occurred.
1: File deleted
0: No files deleted

Cleared

Written when the system deletes the file.

The system deleted the remainder of an EM file mem- Cleared
ory file that was being updated when a power interruption occurred.
1: File deleted
0: No files deleted

Cleared

Written when the system deletes the file.

Cleared

---

A39507

A39510

ER/AER
Flag for
Background Execution

Turns ON if an error or illegal access occurs during
background execution. Turns OFF when power is
turned ON or operation is started.
1: Error
0: No error
(Cleared when background execution is started.)

Cleared

A39511

Memory
Corruption
Detected
Flag

ON when memory corruption is detected when the
power supply is turned ON.
1: Memory corruption
0: Normal operation

Retained See
Function
column.

A39512

DIP Switch
Pin 6 Status Flag

The status of pin 6 on the DIP switch on the front of the Retained See
Function
CPU Unit is written to this flag every cycle.
column.
1: Pin 6 ON
0: Pin 6 OFF

A397

---

Simple
Backup
Write
Capacity

If a write for a simple backup operation fails, A397 will Retained Retained When write is execontain the Memory Card capacity that would have
cuted
been required to complete the write operation. The
value is in Kbytes. (This indicates that the Memory
Card did not have the specified capacity when the
write operation was started.)
A397 will be cleared to 0000 hex when the write is
completed successfully for a simple backup operation.

A400

All

Error code

When a non-fatal error (user-defined FALS(006) or
system error) or a fatal error (user-defined FALS(007)
or system error) occurs, the 4-digit hexadecimal error
code is written to this word. (Refer to Details on Auxiliary Area Operation on page 722.) When two or more
errors occur simultaneously, the highest error code will
be recorded.
Refer to page 722 for details on error codes.

Cleared

Written when error
occurs

A401

A40106

FALS Error
Flag
(Fatal error)

ON when a non-fatal error is generated by the
FALS(006) instruction. The CPU Unit will continue
operating and the ERR/ALM indicator will flash.
The corresponding error code will be written to A400.
Error codes C101 to C2FF correspond to FALS numbers 001 to 511.
1: FALS(006) executed
0: FALS(006) not executed
This flag will be turned OFF when the FALS errors are
cleared.

Cleared

Written when error
occurs
A400

702

Written when power is
turned ON.

Written every cycle

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Address
Words
A401

Name

Bits

Function

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related flags,
settings

A40108

Cycle Time
Too Long
Flag
(Fatal error)

ON if the cycle time exceeds the maximum cycle time Cleared
set in the PLC Setup (the cycle time monitoring time).
The program execution cycle time is used in a Parallel
Processing Mode.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
0: Cycle time under max.
1: Cycle time over max.
This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared.

Cleared

Written when the cycle
time exceeds max.
PLC Setup (Cycle time
monitoring time)

A40109

Program
Error Flag
(Fatal error)

ON when program contents are incorrect.
Cleared
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light. The task
number where the error occurred will be stored in
A294 and the program address will be stored in A298
and A299.
The type of program error that occurred will be stored
in bits 8 to 15 of A295. Refer to the description of A295
or to 2-3 Checking Programs of CS/CJ Series Programmable Controllers (W394) for more details on
program errors.
1: Error
0: No error
This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared.

Cleared

A294,A295, A298 and
A299

A40110

I/O Setting
Error Flag
(Fatal error)

ON when a Unit in the registered I/O tables does not
Cleared
agree with the Unit in the real I/O tables (i.e., the Unit
actually connected).
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
1: Error
0: No error
This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared.

Cleared

A40508

A40111

Too Many
I/O Points
Flag
(Fatal error)

ON when the number of I/O points being used in Basic Cleared
I/O Units exceeds the maximum allowed for the PLC.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
1: Error
0: No error
This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared.

Cleared

A407

A40112

Inner Board
Stopped
Error Flag
(Fatal error)

ON when there is an Inner Board Error (Watchdog
Cleared
timer error).
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
1: Error
0: No error
This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared,
but will be turned ON again unless the cause of the
error is eliminated.

Cleared

---

A40113

Duplication
Error Flag
(Fatal error)

ON in the following cases:
Cleared
• Two CPU Bus Units have been assigned the same
unit number.
• Two Special I/O Units have been assigned the same
unit number.
• Two Basic I/O Units have been allocated the same
data area words.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
The duplicated unit number is indicated in A409 to
A416.
1: Duplication error
0: No duplication
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)

Cleared

A410 to A416

703

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Address
Words
A401

A402

704

Name

Function

Bits

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related flags,
settings

A40114

I/O Bus
Error Flag
(Fatal error)

ON when an error occurs in a data transfer between
Cleared
the CPU Unit and a Unit mounted to a slot.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
1: Error
0: No error
The slot number (00 to 09) where the I/O Bus Error
occurred is written to A40400 to A40407 in binary and
the rack number (00 to 07) is written to A40408 to
A40415 in binary
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)

Cleared

A404

A40115

Memory
Error Flag
(Fatal error)

ON when an error occurred in memory or there was an Cleared
error in automatic transfer from the Memory Card
when the power was turned ON.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
1: Error
0: No error
The location where the error occurred is indicated in
A40300 to A40308, and A40309 will be turned ON if
there was an error during automatic transfer at startup.
This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared.
(The automatic transfer at start-up error cannot be
cleared without turning off the PLC.)

Cleared

A403

A40202

Special I/O
Unit Setting
Error Flag
(Non-fatal
error)

ON when an installed Special I/O Unit does not match
the Special I/O Unit registered in the I/O table. The
CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR/ALM
indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash.
1: Error
0: No error
The unit number of the Unit where the setting error
occurred is indicated in A428 to A433.
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)

Cleared

A428 to A433

A40203

CPU Bus
Unit Setting
Error Flag
(Non-fatal
error)

ON when an installed CPU Bus Unit does not match
the CPU Bus Unit registered in the I/O table. The CPU
Unit will continue operating and the ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash.
1: Error
0: No error
The unit number of the Unit where the setting error
occurred is written to A427.
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)

Cleared

A427

A40204

Battery
Error Flag
(Non-fatal
error)

ON if the CPU Unit’s battery is disconnected or its volt- Cleared
age is low and the Detect Battery Error setting has
been set in the PLC Setup.
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the
ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will
flash.
1: Error
0: No error
This flag can be used to control an external warning
light or other indicator to indicate that the battery
needs to be replaced.
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)

Cleared

PLC Setup (Detect
Battery Error)

A40205

SYSMAC
BUS Error
Flag
(Non-fatal
error)

ON when an error occurs in a data transfer in the SYS- Cleared
MAC BUS system. The number of the Master involved
is indicated with bits A40500 and A40501.
1: Error
0: No error
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the
ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will
flash. (This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)

Cleared

A40500, A40501

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Address
Words
A402

Name

Function

Bits

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related flags,
settings

A40206

Special I/O
Unit Error
Flag
(Non-fatal
error)

ON when an error occurs in a data exchange between
the CPU Unit and a Special I/O Unit (including an error
in the Special I/O Unit itself).
1: Error
0: No error
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the
ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will
flash. The Special I/O Unit where the error occurred
will stop operating and the unit number of the Unit
where the data exchange error occurred is indicated in
A418 through A423.
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)

Cleared

A418 to A423

A40207

CPU Bus
Unit Error
Flag
(Non-fatal
error)

ON when an error occurs in a data exchange between
the CPU Unit and an CPU Bus Unit (including an error
in the CPU Bus Unit itself).
1: Error
0: No error
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the
ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will
flash. The CPU Bus Unit where the error occurred will
stop operating and the unit number of the Unit where
the data exchange error occurred is indicated in A417.
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)

Cleared

A417

A40208

Inner Board
Error Flag
(Non-fatal
error)

ON when an error occurs in a data exchange between
the CPU Unit and the Inner Board (including an error
in the Inner Board itself).
1: Error
0: No error
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the
ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will
flash. The Inner Board will stop operating and details
on the error will be written to A424.
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)

Cleared

A424

A40209

I/O Verification Error
Flag
(Non-fatal
error)

ON when a Basic I/O Unit registered in the I/O Table
does not match the Basic I/O Unit actually installed in
the PLC because a Unit was added or removed.
1: Mismatch
0: No mismatch
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the
ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will
flash.
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)

Cleared

---

A40210

PLC Setup
Error Flag
(Non-fatal
error)

ON when there is a setting error in the PLC Setup. The Cleared
CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR/ALM
indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash. The
location of the error will be written to A406.
1: Error
0: No error
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)

Cleared

A406

A40212

Basic I/O
Unit Error
Flag
(Non-fatal
error)

ON when an error has occurred in a Basic I/O Unit
(including C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units and
C200H Interrupt Input Units).
1: Error
0: No error
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the
ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will
flash. The location of the error will be written to A408.
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)

Cleared

A408

Cleared

705

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Address
Words
A402

A403

706

Name

Function

Bits

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related flags,
settings

A40213

Interrupt
Task Error
Flag
(Non-fatal
error)

ON when the Detect Interrupt Task Errors setting in
the PLC Setup is set to “Detect” and an interrupt task
is executed for more than 10 ms during I/O refreshing
of a C200H Special I/O Unit or a SYSMAC BUS I/O
Unit.
This flag will also be turned ON if an attempt is made
to refresh a Special I/O Unit’s I/O from an interrupt
task with IORF(097) while the Unit’s I/O is being
refreshed by cyclic I/O refreshing (duplicate refreshing).
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the
ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will
flash.
1: Error
0: No error
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)

Cleared

A426, PLC Setup
(Detect Interrupt Task
Errors setting)

A40215

FAL Error
Flag
(Non-fatal
error)

ON when a non-fatal error is generated by executing
FAL(006). The CPU Unit will continue operating and
the ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit
will flash.
The bit in A360 to A391 that corresponds to the FAL
number specified in FALS(006) will be turned ON and
the corresponding error code will be written to A400.
Error codes 4101 to 42FF correspond to FAL numbers
001 to 2FF (0 to 511).
1: FALS(006) error occurred
0: FALS(006) not executed
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)

Cleared

A360 to A391, A400

A40300
to
A40308

Memory
Error
Location

When a memory error occurs, the Memory Error Flag Cleared
(A40115) is turned ON and one of the following flags is
turned ON to indicate the memory area where the
error occurred.
1: Error
0: No error
A40300: User program
A40304: PLC Setup
A40305: Registered I/O Table
A40307: Routing Table
A40308: CPU Bus Unit Settings
When a memory error occurs, the CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR/ALM indicator on the
front of the CPU Unit will flash.
(The corresponding flag will be turned OFF when the
error is cleared.)

Cleared

A40115

A40309

Memory
Card Startup Transfer
Error Flag

ON when automatic transfer at start-up has been
selected and an error occurs during automatic transfer. An error will occur if there is a transfer error, the
specified file does not exist, or the Memory Card is not
installed.
1: Error
0: No error
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared
by turning the power off. The error cannot be cleared
without turning the power off.)

Cleared

Written when power is
turned ON

A40310

Flash Memory Error
Flag

ON when the flash memory is physically destroyed.
1: Error
0: No error

Cleared

Refreshed when error
is detected.

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Address
Words
A404

A405

A406

Name

Function

Bits

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related flags,
settings

A40400
to
A40407

I/O Bus
Error Slot
Number

Contains the 8-bit binary slot number (00 to 09) where Cleared
an I/O Bus Error occurred.
00 to 09 hex (slot No. 0 to 9)
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light. The I/O Bus
Error Flag (A40114) will be ON.
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)

Cleared

A40114

A40408
to
A40415

I/O Bus
Error Rack
Number

Contains the 8-bit binary rack number (00 to 07) where Cleared
an I/O Bus Error occurred.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light. The I/O Bus
Error Flag (A40114) will be ON.
00 to 07 hex (Rack No. 0 to 7)
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)

Cleared

A40114

A40500
and
A40501

SYSMAC
BUS Master Flags

When a transmission error occurs in the SYSMAC
BUS system, the flag for the affected Master Unit will
be turned ON.
A40500: Flag for Master Unit #0
A40501: Flag for Master Unit #1
1: Error
0: No error
(The flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)

Cleared

---

A40515

Peripheral
Servicing
Too Long
Flag

Turns ON when the peripheral servicing time in a Parallel Processing Mode exceeds 2 s. This will also
cause a cycle time error and operation will stop.
1: Too long (Parallel processing cannot be used.)
0: Not too long (Parallel processing can be used.)

Cleared

A268

All

PLC Setup
Error Location

When there is a setting error in the PLC Setup, the
location of that error is written to A406 in 4-digit hexadecimal. The location is given as the address displayed on a Programming Console.
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the
ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will
flash.
0000 to 01FF hexadecimal
(A406 will be cleared when the cause of the error is
eliminated.)

Cleared

A40210

707

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Address
Words
A407

A408

708

Name

Bits

Function

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related flags,
settings

A40700
to
A40712

Too Many
I/O Points,
Details

The 6 possible causes of the Too Many I/O Points
Cleared
Error are listed below. The 3-digit binary value in
A40713 to A40715 indicates the cause of the error
(values 0 to 5 correspond to causes 1 to 6, below).
The 13-bit binary value in A40700 to A40712 indicates
the details: the excessive value or the duplicated unit
number.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
1) The number of I/O points will be written here when
the total number of I/O points set in the I/O Table
(excluding Slave Racks) exceed the maximum
allowed for the CPU Unit.
2) The number of interrupt inputs will be written here
when there are more than 32 interrupt inputs.
3) The unit number of the Slave Unit will be written
here when a unit number is duplicated or the number of I/O points on a C500 Slave Unit exceeds 320.
4) The unit number of the I/O Terminal (excluding
Slave Racks) will be written here when a unit number is duplicated.
5) The unit number of the Master Unit will be written
here when a unit number is duplicated or the unit
number is outside of the allowed setting range.
6) The number of Racks will be written here when the
number of Expansion I/O Racks exceeds the maximum.
(The relevant value will be written here (A40700 to
A40712) when the error occurs. These bits will be
cleared when the error is cleared.)

Cleared

A40111, A40713 to
A40715

A40713
to
A40715

Too Many
I/O Points,
Cause

The 3-digit binary value of these bits indicates the
Cleared
cause of the Too Many I/O Points Error and shows the
meaning of the value written to bits A40700 to
A40712.
Values of 000 to 101 (0 to 5) correspond to causes 1
through 6 described in “Too Many I/O Points, Cause 1,”
above.
000: Too many I/O total
001: Too many interrupt I/O
010: Duplicate Remote I/O Slave Unit unit numbers or
too many I/O on C500 Remote I/O Slave Units
(more than 320)
011: Duplicate I/O Terminal unit numbers
100: Duplicate Remote I/O Master Unit unit numbers
or undefined unit numbers (not 0 or 1)
101: Too many Racks
(These bits will be cleared when the error is cleared.)

Cleared

---

A40800
to
A40807

Basic I/O
When an error has occurred in a Basic I/O Unit (includ- Cleared
Unit Error,
ing C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units and C200H
Slot Number Interrupt Input Units), A40212 will be turned ON and
the slot number where the error occurred will be written here in binary.
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the
ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will
flash.
00 to 09 hexadecimal (Slots 0 to 9)
(These bits will be cleared when the error is cleared.)

Cleared

A40212

A40808
to
A40815

Basic I/O
Unit Error,
Rack Number

Cleared

A40212

When an error has occurred in a Basic I/O Unit (includ- Cleared
ing C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units and C200H
Interrupt Input Units), A40212 will be turned ON and
the Rack number where the error occurred will be written here in binary.
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the
ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will
flash.
00 to 07 hexadecimal (Racks 0 to 7)
(These bits will be cleared when the error is cleared.)

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Address
Words

Name

Function

Bits

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related flags,
settings

A409

A40900
to
A40907

Expansion
I/O Rack
Number
Duplication
Flags

The corresponding flag will be turned ON when an
Cleared
Expansion I/O Rack’s starting word address was set
from a Programming Device and two Racks have overlapping word allocations or a Rack’s starting address
exceeds CIO 0901. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to Racks
0 to 7.
1: The same word is allocated on more than one Rack
or the starting word address on the Rack is too high
(i.e., causes the area to be exceeded).
0: No error
(The corresponding flag will be cleared when the error
is cleared.)

Cleared

---

A410

A41000
to
A41015

CPU Bus
Unit Number Duplication Flags

The Duplication Error Flag (A40113) and the correCleared
sponding flag in A410 will be turned ON when an CPU
Bus Unit’s unit number has been duplicated. Bits 00 to
15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
1: Duplication detected
0: No duplication

Cleared

A40113

A411 to
A416

A41100
to
A41615

Special I/O
Unit Number Duplication Flags

The Duplication Error Flag (A40113) and the correCleared
sponding flag in A411 through A416 will be turned ON
when a Special I/O Unit’s unit number has been duplicated.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
(Bits A41100 to A41615 correspond to unit numbers
000 to 05F (0 to 95).)
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
The corresponding bit will also be turned ON when the
Special I/O Unit’s words are also allocated to a Basic
I/O Unit on an Expansion I/O Rack because of the
Expansion I/O Rack’s starting word setting.
1: Duplication detected
0: No duplication

Cleared

A40113

A417

A41700
to
A41715

CPU Bus
Unit Error,
Unit Number Flags

When an error occurs in a data exchange between the Cleared
CPU Unit and an CPU Bus Unit, the CPU Bus Unit
Error Flag (A40207) is turned ON and the bit in A417
corresponding to the unit number of the Unit where the
error occurred is turned ON. Bits 00 to 15 correspond
to unit numbers 0 to F.
1: Error
0: No error
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the
ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will
flash.

Cleared

A40207

A418 to
A423

A41800
to
A42315

Special I/O
Unit Error,
Unit Number Flags

When an error occurs in a data exchange between the
CPU Unit and a Special I/O Unit, the Special I/O Unit
Error Flag (A40206) will be turned ON.
Each bit corresponds to a unit number. Bit 00 in A418
to bit 15 in A423 correspond to unit numbers 0 to 95.
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the
ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will
flash.
1: Error
0: No error
(Bits A41800 to A42315 correspond to unit numbers
000 to 05F (0 to 95).)
The unit number of the Unit where the error occurred
is indicated in A417.
If the unit number of the Unit is uncertain, none of the
flags will be turned ON.
(The flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)

Cleared

A40206

Cleared

709

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Address
Words

Name

Function

Bits

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related flags,
settings

A424

A42400
to
A42415

Inner Board
Error Information

When an error occurs in a data exchange between the
CPU Unit and the Inner Board, the Inner Board Error
Flag (A40208) and the appropriate bits in A424 will be
turned ON.
•The meaning of the bits in A424 depends upon the
model of Inner Board that is being used. Refer to the
Board’s operation manual for details.
A424 will be cleared when the error is cleared.

Cleared

---

A425

A42504
to
A42506

Slave Number of SYSMAC BUS
Error After
Start-up

When there is an error in a Slave Rack, these bits con- Cleared
tain the Slave’s unit number.
0 to 4 hex (Unit No. 0 to 4)
These bits are reset when the system is restarted.

Cleared

Written every cycle

Cleared

Written every cycle

A42504

When there is an error in an Optical I/O Unit (excluding
Slave Racks), the status of A42504 (ON or OFF) indicates whether the Unit is allocated high or low bytes.
This flag is turned OFF when the system is restarted.
1: High
0: Low

A42508
to
A42515

When there is an error in a Slave Rack, this byte contains the 2-digit hexadecimal unit number of the Master to which the Slave is connected.
B0: Unit 0
B1: Unit 1
When there is an error in an Optical I/O Unit, this byte
contains its 2-digit hexadecimal unit number (00 to 1F,
or 0 to 31 decimal).
00 to 1F hex (0 to 31)

A426

A427

710

A42600
to
A42611

Interrupt
Task Error,
Task Number

When A40213 is ON, the content of these bits
Cleared
depends upon the status of A42615 (the Interrupt Task
Error Cause Flag).
1) A42615 OFF:
An interrupt task was executed for more than 10 ms
during I/O refreshing of a C200H Special I/O Unit or
a SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Unit. A42600 to
A42611: contain the interrupt task number.
2) A42615 ON:
An attempt was made to refresh a Special I/O Unit’s
I/O from an interrupt task with IORF(097) while the
Unit’s I/O is being refreshed by cyclic I/O refreshing
(duplicate refreshing). A42600 to A42611: contain
the Special I/O Unit’s unit number.
Task number: 000 to 0FF (0 to 255)
Unit number: 000 to 05F (0 to 95)
These bits will be cleared when the error is cleared.

Cleared

A40213, A42615

A42615

Interrupt
Task Error
Cause Flag

When A40213 (the Interrupt Task Error Flag) is ON,
this flag indicates the cause of the error. The CPU Unit
will continue operating and the ERR/ALM indicator on
the front of the CPU Unit will flash.
A42615 will be ON if a Special I/O Unit was refreshed
from the interrupt task while it was already being
refreshed.
A42615 will be OFF if the interrupt task was executed
for more than 10 ms during I/O refreshing of a C200H
Special I/O Unit or a SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Unit.
1: Duplicated refreshing
0: Interrupt task executed over 10 ms

Cleared

A40213, A42600 to
A42611

A42700
to
A42715

CPU Bus
Unit Setting
Error, Unit
Number
Flags

When an CPU Bus Unit Setting Error occurs, A40203
and the bit in this word corresponding to the Unit’s unit
number are turned ON. Bits 00 to 15 correspond to
unit numbers 0 to F.
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the
ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will
flash.
1: Setting error
0: No setting error

Cleared

Written when power is
turned ON or I/O is
recognized
A40203

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Address

Name

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related flags,
settings

If a Special I/O Unit Setting Error occurs (i.e., when
Cleared
A40202 turns ON), the bit corresponding to the unit
number will turn ON. The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the
CPU Unit will flash.
Bits A42800 to A43315 correspond to 00 to 5F (unit
numbers 0 to 95).

Cleared

Written when power is
turned ON or I/O is
recognized
A40202

Max. Interrupt Task
Processing
Time

Contains the Maximum Interrupt Task Processing
Time in units of 0.1 ms.
(This value is written after the interrupt task with the
max. processing time is executed and cleared when
PLC operation begins.)

Cleared

See Function column.

All

Interrupt
Task With
Max. Processing
Time

Contains the task number of the interrupt task with the
maximum processing time. Hexadecimal values 8000
to 80FF correspond to task numbers 00 to FF. Bit 15 is
turned ON when an interrupt has occurred.
(This value is written after the interrupt task with the
max. processing time is executed and cleared when
PLC operation begins.)

Cleared

See Function column.

A44211
to
A44212

PLC Link
Operating
Level Detection Flags

Indicate whether PLC Link Units are mounted to the
PLC as follows:
A44211: PLC Link operating level 1
A44212: PLC Link operating level 0
1: Unit mounted
0: Unit not mounted

Retained Cleared

Written when power is
turned ON or when
Unit is restarted.
A247 to A250

Words

Bits

A428 to
A433

A42800
to
A43315

Special I/O
Unit Setting
Error, Unit
Number
Flags

A440

All

A441

A442

Function

Status
after
mode
change

711

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area

Read/Write Area (Set by User)
Addresses
Word
A500

Name

Function

Settings

Bit

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related Flags,
Settings

A50012 IOM Hold Bit

Turn this bit ON to preserve the status 1: Retained
of the I/O Memory when shifting from
0: Not retained
PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR mode
or vice versa. The I/O Memory includes
the CIO Area, Transition Flags, Timer
Flags and PVs, Index Registers, Data
Registers, and the Current EM Bank
Number.
(If the status of the IOM Hold Bit itself is
preserved in the PLC Setup (IOM Hold
Bit Status), the status of the I/O Memory Area will be retained when the PLC
is turned ON or power is interrupted.)

Retained See
Function
column.

See Function column.
PLC Setup
(IOM Hold Bit Status setting)

A50013 Forced Status Hold Bit

Turn this bit ON to preserve the status 1: Retained
of bits that have been force-set or force- 0: Not retained
reset when shifting from PROGRAM to
MONITOR mode or vice versa. Bits that
have been force-set or force-reset will
always return to their default status
when shifting to RUN mode.
(If the status of the Forced Status Hold
Bit itself is preserved in the PLC Setup
(Forced Status Hold Bit Status), the status of force-set and force-reset bits will
be retained when the PLC is turned ON
or power is interrupted.)

Retained See
Function
column.

See Function column.
PLC Setup
(Forced Status
Hold Bit Status
setting)

A50014 Error Log
Reset Bit

Turn this bit ON to reset the Error Log
Pointer (A300) to 00.
The contents of the Error Log Area
itself (A100 to A199) are not cleared.
(This bit is automatically reset to 0 after
the Error Log Pointer is reset.)

Retained Cleared

A100 to A199,
A300

A50015 Output OFF
Bit

Turn this bit ON to turn OFF all outputs
from Basic I/O Units and Special I/O
Units. The INH indicator on the front of
the CPU Unit will light while this bit is
ON.
(The status of the Output OFF Bit is
retained through power interruptions.)

A501

A50100 CPU Bus Unit
to
Restart Bits
A50115

Turn these bits ON to restart (initialize)
the CPU Bus Unit with the corresponding unit number. Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
When a restart bit is turned ON, the
corresponding CPU Bus Unit Initializing
Flag (A30200 to A30215) will be turned
ON. Both the restart bit and initializing
flag will be turned OFF automatically
when initialization is completed.

0 to 1: Restart
1 to 0: Restart
completed
Turned OFF by
the system
when the Unit
has been
restarted.

Retained Cleared

A30200 to A30215

A502 to
A507

A50200 Special I/O
to
Unit Restart
A50715 Bits

Turn these bits ON to restart (initialize)
the Special I/O Unit with the corresponding unit number. Bits A50200 to
A50715 correspond to unit numbers 0
to 95.
When a restart bit is turned ON, the
corresponding Special I/O Unit Initializing Flag (A33000 to A33515) will be
turned ON. Both the restart bit and initializing flag will be turned OFF automatically when initialization is
completed.

0 to 1: Restart
1 to 0: Restart
completed
Turned OFF by
the system
when the Unit
has been
restarted.

Retained Cleared

A33000 to A33515

712

0→1: Clear

Retained Retained ---

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Addresses
Word
A508

A509

Name

Function

Settings

Bit

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related Flags,
Settings

A50809 Differentiate
Monitor Completed Flag

ON when the differentiate monitor condition has been established during execution of differentiation monitoring.
(This flag will be cleared to 0 when differentiation monitoring starts.)

1: Monitor con- Retained Cleared
dition established
0: Not yet
established

---

A50811 Trace Trigger
Monitor Flag

ON when a trigger condition is established by the Trace Start Bit (A50814).
OFF when the next Data Trace is
started by the Sampling Start bit
(A50815).

1: Trigger condition established
0: Not yet
established or
not tracing

Retained Cleared

---

A50812 Trace Completed Flag

ON when sampling of a region of trace
memory has been completed during
execution of a Trace.
OFF when the next time the Sampling
Start Bit (A50815) is turned from OFF
to ON.

1: Trace completed
0: Not tracing
or trace in
progress

Retained Cleared

---

A50813 Trace Busy
Flag

ON when the Sampling Start Bit
(A50815) is turned from OFF to ON.
OFF when the trace is completed.

1: Trace in
progress
0: Not tracing
(not sampling)

Retained Cleared

---

A50814 Trace Start Bit Turn this bit from OFF to ON to establish the trigger condition. The offset
indicated by the delay value (positive or
negative) determines which data samples are valid.

1: Trace trigger
condition
established
0: Not established

Retained Cleared

---

A50815 Sampling
Start Bit

When a data trace is started by turning
this bit from OFF to ON from a Programming Device, the PLC will begin
storing data in Trace Memory by one of
the three following methods:
1) Data is sampled at regular intervals
(10 to 2,550 ms).
2) Data is sampled when TRSM(045) is
executed in the program.
3) Data is sampled at the end of every
cycle.
The operation of A50815 can be controlled only from a Programming
Device.

0 to 1: Starts
data trace
(sampling)
Turned ON
from Programming Device.

Retained Cleared

---

A50900 SYSMAC
BUS Slave
Number
Refresh Bit

Turn this bit ON to refresh the error
information in A425 (unit number of
Slave where error occurred after startup).

Retained Cleared

A425

Written when
power is turned
ON

A510 to
A511

Start-up Time

These words contain the time at which See Function
the power was turned ON. The concolumn.
tents are updated every time that the
power is turned ON. The data is stored
in BCD.
A51000 to A51007: Second (00 to 59)
A51008 to A51015: Minute (00 to 59)
A51100 to A51107: Hour (00 to 23)
A51108 to A51115: Day of month (01 to
31)

Retained See
Function
column.

A512 to
A513

Power Interruption Time

These words contain the time at which See Function
the power was interrupted. The concolumn.
tents are updated every time that the
power is interrupted. The data is stored
in BCD.
A51200 to A51207: Second (00 to 59)
A51208 to A51215: Minute (00 to 59)
A51300 to A51307: Hour (00 to 23)
A51308 to A51315: Day of month (01 to
31)
(These words are not cleared at startup.)

Retained Retained Written at power
interruption

713

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Addresses
Word

Name

Function

Settings

Bit

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related Flags,
Settings

A514

Number of
Power Interruptions

Contains the number of times that
0000 to FFFF
power has been interrupted since the
hexadecimal
power was first turned ON. The data is
stored in binary. To reset this value,
overwrite the current value with 0000.
(This word is not cleared at start-up, but
it is cleared when the Memory Corruption Detected Flag (A39511) goes ON.)

Retained Retained Written when
power is turned
ON
A39511

A515 to
A517

Operation
Start Time

The time that operation started as a
See at left.
result of changing the operating mode
to RUN or MONITOR mode is stored
here in BCD.
A51500 to A51507: Seconds (00 to 59)
A51508 to A51515: Minutes (00 to 59)
A51600 to A51607: Hour (00 to 23)
A51608 to A51615: Day of month (00 to
31)
A51700 to A51707: Month (01 to 12)
A51708 to A51715: Year (00 to 99)
Note: The previous start time is stored
after turning ON the power supply until
operation is started.

Retained Retained See at left.

A518 to
A520

Operation End The time that operation stopped as a
See at left.
Time
result of changing the operating mode
to PROGRAM mode is stored here in
BCD.
A51800 to A51807: Seconds (00 to 59)
A51808 to A51815: Minutes (00 to 59)
A51900 to A51907: Hour (00 to 23)
A51908 to A51915: Day of month (00 to
31)
A52000 to A52007: Month (01 to 12)
A52008 to A52015: Year (00 to 99)
Note: If an error occurs in operation, the
time of the error will be stored. If the
operating mode is then changed to
PROGRAM mode, the time that PROGRAM mode was entered will be
stored.

Retained Retained See at left.

A523

Total Power
ON Time

Contains the total time that the PLC has 0000 to FFFF
been on in 10-hour units. The data is
hexadecimal
stored in binary and it is updated every
10 hours. To reset this value, overwrite
the current value with 0000.
(This word is not cleared at start-up, but
it is cleared to 0000 when the Memory
Corruption Detected Flag (A39511)
goes ON.)

Retained Retained ---

A52600 RS-232C Port
Restart Bit

Turn this bit ON to restart the RS-232C
port. (Do not use this bit when the port
is operating in peripheral bus mode.)
This bit is turned OFF automatically
when the restart processing is completed.

0 to 1: Restart

Retained Cleared

---

A52601 Peripheral
Port Restart
Bit

Turn this bit ON to restart the peripheral 0 to1: Restart
port.
This bit is turned OFF automatically
when the restart processing is completed.

Retained Cleared

---

A52614 SYSMAC
BUS Master 1
Restart Bit

Turn this bit ON to restart SYSMAC
BUS Remote I/O Master Unit 1.
This bit is turned OFF automatically
when the restart processing is completed.

0 to 1: Restart

Retained Cleared

---

A52615 SYSMAC
BUS Master 0
Restart Bit

Turn this bit ON to restart SYSMAC
BUS Remote I/O Master Unit 0.
This bit is turned OFF automatically
when the restart processing is completed.

0 to 1: Restart

Retained Cleared

---

A526

714

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Addresses
Word
A527

A528

A529

Name

Function

Settings

Bit
A52700 Online EditThe Online Editing Disable Bit
to
ing Disable Bit (A52709) is valid only when this byte
A52707 Validator
contains 5A.
To disable online editing from a Programming Device, set this byte to 5A
and turn ON A52709.
(Online editing refers to changing or
adding to the program while the PLC is
operating in MONITOR mode.)

5A:
A52709
enabled
Other value:
A52709 disabled

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related Flags,
Settings

Retained Cleared

A52709

A52709 Online EditTurn this bit ON to disable online edit1: Disabled
ing Disable Bit ing. The setting of this bit is valid only
0: Not disabled
when A52700 to A52707 have been set
to 5A.

Retained Cleared

A52700 to A52707

A52800 RS-232C Port
to
Error Flags
A52807

These flags indicate what kind of error See Function
has occurred at the RS-232C port; they column.
are automatically turned OFF when the
RS-232C port is restarted.
(These flags are valid in Serial Gateway
mode. They are not valid in peripheral
bus mode and only bit 5 is valid in NT
Link mode.)
Bits 0 and 1: Not used.
Bit 2: ON when there was a parity error.
Bit 3: ON when there was a framing
error.
Bit 4: ON when there was an overrun
error.
Bit 5: ON when there was a timeout
error.
Bits 6 and 7: Not used.

Retained Cleared

---

A52808 Peripheral
to
Port Error
A52815 Code

These flags indicate what kind of error See Function
has occurred at the peripheral port;
column.
they are automatically turned OFF
when the peripheral port is restarted.
(These flags are valid in Serial Gateway
mode. They are not valid in peripheral
bus mode and only bit 13 (timeout
error) is valid in NT Link mode.)
Bits 8 and 9: Not used.
Bit 10: ON when there was a parity
error.
Bit 11: ON when there was a framing
error.
Bit 12: ON when there was an overrun
error.
Bit 13: ON when there was a timeout
error.
Bits 14 and 15: Not used.

Retained Cleared

---

Set a dummy FAL/FALS number to use
to simulate the system error using
FAL(006) or FALS(007).
When FAL(006) or FALS(007) is executed and the number in A529 is the
same as the one specified in the operand of the instruction, the system error
given in the operand of the instruction
will be generated instead of a userdefined error.

0001 to 01FF
Retained Cleared
hex: FAL/FALS
numbers 1 to
511
0000 or 0200
to FFFF hex:
No FAL/FALS
number for system error simulation. (No error
will be generated.)

---

FAL/FALS
Number for
System Error
Simulation

715

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Addresses
Word

Name

Function

Settings

Bit

A530

---

Power Interruption Disable Setting

A580
(See
note.)

A58000 FB Communito
cations
A58003 Instruction
Retries

A581
(See
note.)

FB Communications
Instruction
Response
Monitoring
Time

A582
(See
note.)

Set to A5A5 hex to disable power interrupts (except the Power OFF Interrupt
task) between DI(693) and EI(694)
instructions.

Status
after
mode
change

A5A5 hex:
Cleared
Masking power
interruption
processing
enabled
Other: Masking power interruption
processing not
enabled.

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related Flags,
Settings

Cleared

---

As set in
PLC
Setup

Cleared

Written at start of
operation

Automatically stores the FB communications instruction response monitoring time set in the PLC Setup.

0001 to FFFF
As set in
hex (Unit: 0.1 s; PLC
Range: 0.1 to
Setup
6553.5)
0000 hex: 2 s

Cleared

Written at start of
operation

FB DeviceNet Automatically stores the FB DeviceNet
Communicacommunications instruction response
tions Instruc- monitoring time set in the PLC Setup.
tion Response
Monitoring
Time

0001 to FFFF
As set in
hex (Unit: 0.1 s; PLC
Range: 0.1 to
Setup
6553.5)
0000 hex: 2 s

Cleared

Written at start of
operation

0000 0000 to
FFFF FFFF
hex
(A596 contains
the leftmost
digits.)

Cleared

---

Automatically stores the number of
0 to F hex
retries in the FB communications
instruction settings specified in the PLC
Setup.

A595
and
A596

---

IR00 Output
for Background Execution

When an index register is specified as
the output for an instruction processed
in the background, A595 and A596
receive the output instead of IR00.

A597

---

DR00 Output
for Background Execution

When a data register is specified as the 0000 to FFFF
output for an instruction processed in
hex
the background, A597 receives the output instead of DR00.

Cleared

---

A598

A59800 FPD Teaching Bit

Turn this bit ON to set the monitoring
1: Teach monitime automatically with the teaching
toring time
function.
0: Teaching
While A59800 is ON, FPD(269) meafunction off
sures how long it takes for the diagnostic output to go ON after the execution
condition goes ON. If the measured
time exceeds the monitoring time, the
measured time is multiplied by 1.5 and
that value is stored as the new monitoring time.
(The teaching function can be used
only when a word address has been
specified for the monitoring time operand.)

Cleared

---

A59801 Equals Flag
for Background Execution

Turns ON if matching data is found for
an SRCH(181) instruction executed in
the background.

Cleared

---

1: Search data
found in
table
0: Search data
not found

Note These Auxiliary Area bits/words are not to be written by the user. The number of resends and response
monitoring time must be set by the user in the FB communications instructions settings in the PLC
Setup, particularly when using function blocks from the OMRON FB Library to execute FINS messages
or DeviceNet explicit messages communications. The values set in the Settings for OMRON FB Library
in the PLC Setup will be automatically stored in the related Auxiliary Area words A580 to A582 and used
by the function blocks from the OMRON FB Library.

716

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Addresses
Word

Name

Function

Settings

Bit

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related Flags,
Settings

A600 to
A603

Macro
When MCRO(099) is executed, it cop- Input data:
Area Input ies the input data from the specified
4 words
Words
source words (input parameter words)
to A600 through A603 and executes the
specified subroutine with that input
data.

Cleared

---

A604 to
A607

Macro
After the subroutine specified in
Output data:
Area Out- MCRO(099) has been executed, the
4 words
put Words results of the subroutine are transferred
from A604 through A607 to the specified destination words. (output parameter words).

Cleared

---

A608

A60800

Inner
Board
Restart
Bit

Turn the corresponding bit ON to restart --(initialize) Inner Board 0 or 1.
The bit is turned OFF automatically
when the restart processing is completed.

Retained Cleared

---

A619

A61901

Peripheral Port
Settings
Changing
Flag

ON while the peripheral port’s communications settings are being changed.
This flag will be turned ON when
STUP(237) is executed and it will be
turned OFF after the settings have
been changed.

1: Changing
0: Not changing

Retained Cleared

---

A61902

RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag

ON while the RS-232C port’s communi- 1: Changing
cations settings are being changed.
0: Not changThis flag will be turned ON when
ing
STUP(237) is executed and it will be
turned OFF after the settings have
been changed.

Retained Cleared

---

A62001

Communications
Unit 0,
Port 1
Settings
Changing
Flag

1: Changing
0: Not changing

Retained Cleared

---

1: Changing
0: Not changing

Retained Cleared

---

A620

A62002

A621 to
A635

The corresponding flag will be ON
when the settings for that port are being
changed.
The flag will be turned ON when
STUP(237) is executed and it will be
turned OFF by an event issued from the
Serial Communications Unit after the
Communi- settings have been changed.
cations
It is also possible for the user to indiUnit 0,
cate a change in serial port settings by
Port 2
turning these flags ON.
Settings
Changing
Flag

A62003

Communications
Unit 0,
Port 3
Settings
Changing
Flag

1: Changing
0: Not changing

Retained Cleared

---

A62004

Communications
Unit 0,
Port 4
Settings
Changing
Flag

1: Changing
0: Not changing

Retained Cleared

---

A62100
to
A63504

Communi- Same as above.
cations
Units 0 to
15, Ports
1 to 4 Settings
Changing
Flag

1: Changing
0: Not changing

Retained Cleared

---

717

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Addresses
Word
A636

A63601

718

Function

Settings

Communications
Board
Port 1
Settings
Changing
Flag

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related Flags,
Settings

The corresponding flag will be ON
when the settings for that port are being
changed.
The flag will be turned ON when
STUP(237) is executed and it will be
turned OFF by an event issued from the
Serial Communications Board after the
Communi- settings have been changed.
cations
It is also possible for the user to indiBoard
cate a change in serial port settings by
Port 2
turning these flags ON.
Settings
Changing
Flag

1: Changing
0: Not changing

Retained Cleared

---

1: Changing
0: Not changing

Retained Cleared

---

A63603

Communications
Board
Port 3
Settings
Changing
Flag

1: Changing
0: Not changing

Retained Cleared

---

A63604

Communications
Board
Port 4
Settings
Changing
Flag

1: Changing
0: Not changing

Retained Cleared

---

A65000
to
A65007

Program
Replacement End
Code

Retained Cleared

---

A65014

Replace- ON when the Replacement Start Bit
ment
(A65015) is turned ON to replace the
Error Flag program, but there is an error. If the
Replacement Start Bit is turned ON
again, the Replacement Error Flag will
be turned OFF.

Retained Cleared

---

A65015

Replace- Program replacement starts when the
1: Program
Retained Cleared
ment Start Replacement Start Bit is turned ON if
replaced
Bit
the Program Password (A651) is valid
0: Replace(A5A5 hex). Do not turn OFF the
ment comReplacement Start Bit during program
pleted, or
replacement.
after power
When the power is turned ON or prois turned ON
gram replacement is completed, the
Replacement Start Bit will be turned
OFF, regardless of whether replacement was completed normally or in
error.
It is possible to confirm if program
replacement is being executed by reading the Replacement Start Bit using a
Programming Device, PT, or host computer.

---

A63602

A650

Name

Bit

• Normal End (i.e., when A65014 is
--OFF)
01 hex: Program file (.OBJ) replaced.
• Error End (i.e., when A65014 is ON)
00 hex: Fatal error
01 hex: Memory error
11 hex: Write-protected
12 hex: Program replacement password error
21 hex: No Memory Card
22 hex: No such file
23 hex: Specified file exceeds capacity (memory error).
31 hex: One of the following in
progress:
• File memory operation
• User program write
• Operating mode change
1: Replacement error
0: No replacement error,
or the
Replacement Start
Bit (A65015)
is ON.

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Addresses
Word

Name

Function

Type in the password to replace a program.
A5A5 hex: Replacement Start Bit
(A65015) is enabled.
Any other value: Replacement Start Bit
(A65015) is disabled.
When the power is turned ON or program replacement is completed, the
Replacement Start Bit will be turned
OFF, regardless of whether replacement was completed normally or in
error.

Settings

Bit

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related Flags,
Settings

A651

---

Program
Password

---

Retained Cleared

---

A654 to
A657

---

Program
When program replacement starts, the --File Name program file name will be stored in
ASCII. File names can be specified up
to eight characters in length excluding
the extension.
File names are stored in the following
order: A654 to A657 (i.e., from the lowest word to the highest), and from the
highest byte to the lowest. If a file name
is less than eight characters, the lowest
remaining bytes and the highest
remaining word will be filled with
spaces (20 hex). Null characters and
space characters cannot be used within
file names.
Example: File name is ABC.OBJ

Retained Cleared

---

A720 to
A722

Power ON
Clock
Data 1
(See
note.)

These words contain the same time
See at left.
data as the startup time stored in words
A510 to A511, as well as the month and
year information.
A72000 to A72007: Seconds (00 to 59)
A72008 to A72015: Minutes (00 to 59)
A72100 to A72107: Hour (00 to 23)
A72108 to A72115: Day of month (00 to
31)
A72200 to A72207: Month (01 to 12)
A72208 to A72215: Year (00 to 99)

Retained Retained Written when power is
turned ON.

A723 to
A725

Power ON
Clock
Data 2
(See
note.)

These words contain the time at which See at left.
the power was turned ON one time
before the startup time stored in words
A510 to A511.
A72300 to A72307: Seconds (00 to 59)
A72308 to A72315: Minutes (00 to 59)
A72400 to A72407: Hour (00 to 23)
A72408 to A72415: Day of month (00 to
31)
A72500 to A72507: Month (01 to 12)
A72508 to A72515: Year (00 to 99)

Retained Retained Written when power is
turned ON.

A726 to
A728

Power ON
Clock
Data 3
(See
note.)

These words contain the time at which See at left.
the power was turned ON two times
before the startup time stored in words
A510 to A511.
A72600 to A72607: Seconds (00 to 59)
A72608 to A72615: Minutes (00 to 59)
A72700 to A72707: Hour (00 to 23)
A72708 to A72715: Day of month (00 to
31)
A72800 to A72807: Month (01 to 12)
A72808 to A72815: Year (00 to 99)

Retained Retained Written when power is
turned ON.

719

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Addresses
Word
A729 to
A731

Name

Function

Settings

Bit
Power ON
Clock
Data 4
(See
note.)

These words contain the time at which See at left.
the power was turned ON three times
before the startup time stored in words
A510 to A511.
A72900 to A72907: Seconds (00 to 59)
A72908 to A72915: Minutes (00 to 59)
A73000 to A73007: Hour (00 to 23)
A73008 to A73015: Day of month (00 to
31)
A73100 to A73107: Month (01 to 12)
A73108 to A73115: Year (00 to 99)

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related Flags,
Settings

Retained Retained Written when power is
turned ON.

Note Supported by unit version 3.0 or later.
A732 to
A734

Power ON
Clock
Data 5
(See
note.)

These words contain the time at which See at left.
the power was turned ON four times
before the startup time stored in words
A510 to A511.
A73200 to A73207: Seconds (00 to 59)
A73208 to A73215: Minutes (00 to 59)
A73300 to A73307: Hour (00 to 23)
A73308 to A73315: Day of month (00 to
31)
A73400 to A73407: Month (01 to 12)
A73408 to A73415: Year (00 to 99)

Retained Retained Written when power is
turned ON.

A735 to
A737

Power ON
Clock
Data 6
(See
note.)

These words contain the time at which See at left.
the power was turned ON five times
before the startup time stored in words
A510 to A511.
A73500 to A73507: Seconds (00 to 59)
A73508 to A73515: Minutes (00 to 59)
A73600 to A73607: Hour (00 to 23)
A73608 to A73615: Day of month (00 to
31)
A73700 to A73707: Month (01 to 12)
A73708 to A73715: Year (00 to 99)

Retained Retained Written when power is
turned ON.

A738 to
A740

Power ON
Clock
Data 7
(See
note.)

These words contain the time at which See at left.
the power was turned ON six times
before the startup time stored in words
A510 to A511.
A73800 to A73807: Seconds (00 to 59)
A73808 to A73815: Minutes (00 to 59)
A73900 to A73907: Hour (00 to 23)
A73908 to A73915: Day of month (00 to
31)
A74000 to A74007: Month (01 to 12)
A74008 to A74015: Year (00 to 99)

Retained Retained Written when power is
turned ON.

A741 to
A743

Power ON
Clock
Data 8
(See
note.)

These words contain the time at which See at left.
the power was turned ON seven times
before the startup time stored in words
A510 to A511.
A74100 to A74107: Seconds (00 to 59)
A74108 to A74115: Minutes (00 to 59)
A74200 to A74207: Hour (00 to 23)
A74208 to A74215: Day of month (00 to
31)
A74300 to A74307: Month (01 to 12)
A74308 to A74315: Year (00 to 99)

Retained Retained Written when power is
turned ON.

A744 to
A746

Power ON
Clock
Data 9
(See
note.)

These words contain the time at which See at left.
the power was turned ON eight times
before the startup time stored in words
A510 to A511.
A74400 to A74407: Seconds (00 to 59)
A74408 to A74415: Minutes (00 to 59)
A74500 to A74507: Hour (00 to 23)
A74508 to A74515: Day of month (00 to
31)
A74600 to A74607: Month (01 to 12)
A74608 to A74615: Year (00 to 99)

Retained Retained Written when power is
turned ON.

720

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Addresses
Word

Name

Function

Settings

Bit

A747 to
A749

Power ON
Clock
Data 10
(See
note.)

These words contain the time at which See at left.
the power was turned ON nine times
before the startup time stored in words
A510 to A511.
A74700 to A74707: Seconds (00 to 59)
A74708 to A74715: Minutes (00 to 59)
A74800 to A74807: Hour (00 to 23)
A74808 to A74815: Day of month (00 to
31)
A74900 to A74907: Month (01 to 12)
A74908 to A74915: Year (00 to 99)

Status
after
mode
change

Status at
startup

Write timing/
Related Flags,
Settings

Retained Retained Written when power is
turned ON.

Note Supported by unit version 3.0 or later.
Note In CS-series PLCs, the following flags are provided in a special read-only area and can be specified with
the labels given in the table. These flags are not contained in the Auxiliary Area. Always use the labels to
specify these flags. Refer to 9-25 Condition Flags and 9-26 Clock Pulses for details.
Flag area
Condition Code
Area

Clock Pulse
Area

Name
Error Flag

Label
ER

Access Error Flag

AER

Carry Flag

Greater Than Flag

Equals Flag

Less Than Flag

Negative Flag
Overflow Flag
Underflow Flag
Greater Than or Equals
Flag
Not Equal Flag
Less than or Equals Flag

N
OF
UF
>=
<>
<=

Always ON Flag
Always OFF Flag
0.02-s clock pulse
0.1-s clock pulse
0.2-s clock pulse
1-s clock pulse
1-min clock pulse

A1
A0
0.02s
0.1s
0.2s
1s
1min

Meaning
Turns ON when an error occurs in processing an instructions, indicating an error end to the instruction.
Turns ON when an attempt is made to access an illegal area. The
status of this flag is maintain only during the current cycle and only
in the task in which it occurred.
Turns ON when there is a carry or borrow in a math operation,
when a bit is shifted into the Carry Flag, etc.
Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is “greater
than,” when a value exceeds a specified range, etc.
Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is “equals,”
when the result of a math operation is 0, etc.
Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is “less than,”
when a value is below a specified range, etc.
Turns ON when the MSB in the result of a math operation is 1.
Turns ON when the result of a math operation overflows.
Turns ON when the result of a math operation underflows.
Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is “greater than
or equals.”
Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is “not equal.”
Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is “less than or
equals.”
This flag is always ON.
This flag is always OFF.
Repeatedly turns ON for 0.02 s and OFF for 0.02 s.
Repeatedly turns ON for 0.1 s and OFF for 0.1 s.
Repeatedly turns ON for 0.2 s and OFF for 0.2 s.
Repeatedly turns ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s.
Repeatedly turns ON for 1 min and OFF for 1 min.

721

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area

Details on Auxiliary Area Operation
A100 to A199: Error Log Area
Error code
Error flag contents
min
day
yr

s
hr

Error
record

Error code
Error flag contents
min
day
yr

s
hr
mo

Error
record

The following data would be generated in an error record if a memory error (error code 80F1) occurred on 1
April 1998 at 17:10:30 with the error located in the PLC Setup (04 hex).

The following data would be generated in an error record if an FALS error with FALS number 001 occurred on
2 May 1997 at 8:30:15.

722

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area

Error Codes and Error Flags
Classification
System-defined
fatal errors

User-defined
fatal errors
User-defined
non-fatal errors
System-defined
non-fatal errors

Error code
80F1
80C0 to 80C7,
80CF
80E9
80E1
80E0
80F0
809F
80EA
C101 to C2FF

Memory error
I/O bus error

Meaning
A403
A404

Error flags

Duplicate number error
Too many I/O error
I/O setting error
Program error
Cycle time too long error
Duplicate Expansion Rack number error
FALS instruction executed (See note 1.)

A410, A411 to 416 (See note 3.)
A407
--A295 to 299 (See note 4.)
--A40900 to 40907
---

4101 to 42FF

FAL instruction executed (See note 2.)

---

008B
009A
009B
0200 to 020F
0300 to 035F
00A0 to 00A1
0400 to 040F
0500 to 055F

Interrupt task error
Basic I/O error
PLC Setup setting error
CS-series CPU Bus Unit error
Special I/O Unit error
SYSMAC BUS error
CS-series CPU Bus Unit setup error
Special I/O Unit setup error

A426
A408
A406
A417
A418 to 423 (See note 5.)
A405
A427
A428 to 433 (See note 5.)

Note 1. C101 to C2FF will be stored for FALS numbers 001 to 511.
2. 4101 to 42FF will be stored for FAL numbers 001 to 511.
3. The contents of the error flags for a duplicate number error are as follows:
Bits 0 to 7: Unit number (binary), 00 to 5F hex for Special I/O Units, 00 to 0F hex for CS-series CPU
Bus Units
Bits 8 to 14: All zeros.
Bit 15: Unit type, 0 for CS-series CPU Bus Units and 1 for Special I/O Units.
4. Only the contents of A295 is stored as the error flag contents for program errors.
5. 0000 hex will be stored as the error flag contents.

A20011: First Cycle Flag
Execution
started.

Time
1 cycle

A20015: Initial Task Flag
A20015 will turn ON during the first time a task is executed after it has reached executable status. It will be ON
only while the task is being executed and will not turn ON if following cycles.

723

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area
Executable status

Executed
1 cycle

A20015

A20200 to A20207: Communications Port Enabled Flags

Port 0
Port 1

Port 7

Network communications instruction executed for port 0.

Instruction
execution

The program is designed so that CMND(490)
will be executed only when A20200 is ON.

A300: Error Record Pointer

Error record 1

Points to the next record to be used.
Example
Stored
Stored

Error record 20

724

Stored
next

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area

A20110: Online Editing Wait Flag
Wait
Online edit processing

A20110

A50100 to A50115: CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits and
A30200 to A30215: CPU Bus Unit Initialization Flags
Automatically turned OFF by system.
Example: Unit No. 1
A50101 (or at startup)

A30201
Unit initialized.

A301: Current EM Bank
EM Area
Bank 0
Bank 1
Bank 2

Current Bank
If bank 2 is the current bank, the
E2_00100 can also be address
simply as E00100

Bank C

725

Appendix B

Auxiliary Area

A40109: Program Error
Error
UM Overflow Error Flag
Illegal Instruction Flag
Distribution Overflow Error Flag
Task Error Flag
No END(001) Error Flag
Illegal Area Access Error Flag
Indirect DM/EM Addressing Error Flag

Address
A29515
A29514
A29513
A25912
A29511
A29510
A29509

A42615: Interrupt Task Error Cause Flag
Special I/O Unit

Interrupt
task

10 ms
or more

IORF(097)
instruction

I/O refresh

726

Refreshed twice.

Interrupt task

Appendix C
Memory Map of PLC Memory Addresses
PLC Memory Addresses
PLC memory addresses are set in Index Registers (IR00 to IR15) to indirectly address I/O memory. Normally,
use the MOVE TO REGISTER (MOVR(560)) and MOVE TIMER/COUNTER PV TO REGISTER
(MOVRW(561)) instructions to set PLC memory addresses into the Index Registers.
Some instructions, such as DATA SEARCH (SRCH(181)), FIND MAXIMUM (MAX(182)), and FIND MINIMUM
(MIN(183)), output the results of processing to an Index Register to indicate an PLC memory address.
There are also instructions for which Index Registers can be directly designated to use the PLC memory
addresses stored in them by other instructions. These instructions include DOUBLE MOVE (MOVL(498)),
some symbol comparison instructions (=L, <>L, L, <=L, and >=L), DOUBLE COMPARE (CMPL(060)),
DOUBLE DATA EXCHANGE (XCGL(562)), DOUBLE INCREMENT BINARY (++L(591)), DOUBLE DECREMENT BINARY (––L(593)), DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOUT CARRY (+L(401)), DOUBLE SIGNED
BINARY SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY (–L(411)), SET RECORD LOCATION (SETR(635)), and GET
RECORD LOCATION (GETR(636)).
The PLC memory addresses all are continuous and the user must be aware of the order and boundaries of the
memory areas. As reference, the PLC memory addresses are provided in a table at the end of this appendix.
Note Directly setting PLC memory addresses in the program should be avoided whenever possible. If PLC
memory addresses are set in the program, the program will be less compatible with new CPU Unit models or CPU Units for which changed have been made to the layout of the memory.

Memory Configuration
There are two classifications of the RAM memory (with battery backup) in a CS-series CPU Unit.
Parameter Areas: These areas contain CPU Unit system setting data, such as the PLC Setup, CS-series CPU
Bus Unit Setups, etc. An illegal access error will occur if an attempt is made to access any of the parameter
areas from an instruction in the user program.
I/O Memory Areas: These are the areas that can be specified as operands in the instructions in user programs.

727

Appendix C

Memory Map of PLC Memory Addresses

Memory Map
Do not access addresses reserved by the system.
Classification
I/O memory
areas

PLC memory
addresses (hex)
00000 to 0B1FF
0B200 to 0B7FF
0B800 to 0B801
0B802 to 0B83F
0B840 to 0B9FF
0BA00 to 0BBFF
0BC00 to 0BDFF
0BE00 to 0BEFF
0BF00 to 0BFFF
0C000 to 0D7FF
0D800 to 0D9FF
0DA00 to 0DDFF

User addresses
----TK00 to TK31
--A000 to A447
A448 to A959
--T0000 to T4095
C0000 to C4095
CIO 0000 to CIO 6143
H000 to H511
H512 to H1535

0DE00 to 0DFFF
0E000 to 0EFFF
0F000 to 0FFFF
10000 to 17FFF
18000 to 1FFFF
20000 to 27FFF
78000 to 7FFFF
F8000 to FFFFF

W000 to W511
T0000 to T4095
C0000 to C4095
D00000 to D32767
E0_00000 to E0_32767
E1_00000 to E1_32767
EC_00000 to EC_32767
E_0000 to E_32767

Area
Reserved for system.
Reserved for system.
Task Flag Area
Reserved for system.
Read-only Auxiliary Area
Read/Write Auxiliary Area
Reserved for system.
Timer Completion Flags
Counter Completion Flags
CIO Area
Holding Area
Holding Area
These words are used for function blocks only.
Work Area
Timer PVs
Counter PVs
DM Area
EM Area bank 0
EM Area bank 1
EM Area bank C
EM Area, current bank (See note.)

Note The data from the current EM Area bank specified in the program is stored in this area. For example, if
the current bank is bank 1 (20000 to 27FFF), then the data in F8000 to FFFFF will be the same as the
data in 20000 to 27FFF.

728

Appendix D
PLC Setup Coding Sheets for
Programming Console
Use the following coding sheets when setting the PLC Setup from a Programming Console.

Address
10@@@@
A
B
Value (hex)
A

00
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
00
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Rack 0, Slot 0 I/O Response Time
8 ms
No filter
0.5 ms
1 ms
2 ms
4 ms
8 ms
16 ms
32 ms
8 ms
No filter
0.5 ms
1 ms
2 ms
4 ms
8 ms
16 ms
32 ms

729

Appendix D

PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console
Address
11@@@@
A
B
Value (hex)
A

00
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Value (hex)

Rack 0, Slot 2 I/O Response Time
8 ms
No filter
0.5 ms
1 ms
2 ms
4 ms
8 ms
16 ms
32 ms
Rack 0, Slot 3 I/O Response Time
8 ms
No filter
0.5 ms
1 ms
2 ms
4 ms
8 ms
16 ms
32 ms

Address
49@@@@
A
B
A

00
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Value (hex)

00
10

Rack 7, Slot 8 I/O Response Time
8 ms
No filter
0.5 ms
1 ms
2 ms
4 ms
8 ms
16 ms
32 ms
Rack 7, Slot 9 I/O Response Time
8 ms
No filter

11
12
13
14
15
16
17

0.5 ms
1 ms
2 ms
4 ms
8 ms
16 ms
32 ms

Value (hex)

730

Appendix D

PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console
Address
80@@@@
A
Value (hex)
A

C000
8000
4000
0000

IOM Hold Bit Status at
Startup
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Cleared

Forced Status Hold Bit
Status at Startup
Retained
Cleared
Retained
Cleared

Address
81@@@@
A
A

Value (hex)
PRCN
PRG
MON
RUN

Startup Mode
Mode on Programming Console’s mode switch
PROGRAM mode
MONITOR mode
RUN mode

Address
83@@@@
A
A

Value (hex)
8000
0000

Startup Condition (CS1-H CPU Units only)
Don’t wait.
Wait for all Units and Boards.

Address
84@@@@
A
A

Value (hex)
8000
0000

Inner Board Setting (CS1-H CPU Units only)
Don’t wait.
Wait for all Boards.

Address
128@@@@
A
Value (hex)
A

C000
8000
4000
0000

Low Battery Voltage
Detection
Do not detect
Do not detect
Detect
Detect

Interrupt Task Error
Detection
Do not detect
Detect
Do not detect
Detect

731

Appendix D

PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console
Address
129@@@@
A
A

Value (hex)
8000
0000

FAL Error Log Registration (CS1-H CPU Units only)
Don’t store user-defined FAL error in error log.
Store user-defined FAL error in error log.

Address
136@@@@
A
Value (hex)
A

EM File Memory Conversion

0000
0080
0081
to
008C

None
EM File Memory Enabled: Bank No. 0
EM File Memory Enabled: Bank No. 1
to
EM File Memory Enabled: Bank No. C

Address
144@@@@
A
B
Peripheral Port
Value (hex)
A

00
01
02
04
05
06
08
09
0A
0C
0D
0E
Value (hex)

732

00
80
82
84
85

Data bits
7 bits
7 bits
7 bits
7 bits
7 bits
7 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits

Stop bits
2 bits
2 bits
2 bits
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
2 bits
2 bits
2 bits
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit

Parity
Even
Odd
None
Even
Odd
None
Even
Odd
None
Even
Odd
None

Communications mode
Default (Rightmost 2 digits ignored.)
Host link
NT link
Peripheral bus
Host link

Appendix D

PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console
Address
145@@@@
A
Peripheral Port
Value (hex)
A

0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
000A

Baud rate
9,600 bps
300 bps
600 bps
1,200 bps
2,400 bps
4,800 bps
9,600 bps
19,200 bps
38,400 bps
57,600 bps
115,200 bps

Note Set 0000 to 0009 hex for standard NT Links and 000A hex for highspeed NT Links.

Address
147@@@@
A
Peripheral Port
Value (hex)
A

0000
0001
0002
to
001F

Host link Unit No.
No. 0
No. 1
No. 2
to
No. 31

Address
150@@@@
A
Peripheral Port
Value (hex)
A

0000
0001
to
0007

NT Link Mode Maximum Unit No.
No. 0
No. 1
to
No. 7

733

Appendix D

PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console
Address
160@@@@
A
B
RS-232C Port
Value (hex)
A

00
01
02
04
05
06
08
09
0A
0C
0D
0E

Data bits
7 bits
7 bits
7 bits
7 bits
7 bits
7 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits

Value (hex)
B

00
80
82
83
84
85

Stop bits
2 bits
2 bits
2 bits
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
2 bits
2 bits
2 bits
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit

Parity
Even
Odd
None
Even
Odd
None
Even
Odd
None
Even
Odd
None

Communications mode
Default (Rightmost 2 digits ignored.)
Host link
NT link
No-protocol
Peripheral bus
Host link

Address
161@@@@
A
RS-232C Port
Value (hex)
A

0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
000A

Baud rate
9,600 bps
300 bps
600 bps
1,200 bps
2,400 bps
4,800 bps
9,600 bps
19,200 bps
38,400 bps
57,600 bps
115,200 bps

Note Set 0000 to 0009 hex for standard NT Links and 000A hex for highspeed NT Links.

734

Appendix D

PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console
Address
162@@@@
A
RS-232C Port
Value (hex)
A

0000
0001
to
270F

No-protocol mode delay
0 ms
10 ms
to
99,990 ms

Address
163@@@@
A
RS-232C Port
Value (hex)
A

Host link Unit No.

0000
0001
0002
to
001F

No. 0
No. 1
No. 2
to
No. 31

Address
164@@@@
A
B
Value (hex)
A

00
to
FF

No-protocol Mode End Code
00
to
FF

Value (hex)

No-protocol Mode Start Code
00
to
FF

735

Appendix D

PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console
Address
165@@@@
A
B
C
RS-232C Port
Value (hex)
A

00
01
to
FF

0
1
2

0
1

No-protocol Mode reception data volume
256
1
to
256

Value (hex)

No-protocol Mode end code setting
None (Specify the amount of data being received)
Yes (Specify the end code)
End code is set to CF+LF
No-protocol Mode start code setting
None
Yes

Address
166@@@@
A
RS-232C Port
Value (hex)
A

0000
0001
to
0007

Maximum Unit No. in NT Link Mode
No. 0
No. 1
to
No. 7

Address
195@@@@
A
A

Value (hex)

Scheduled interrupt time unit
10 ms
1.0 ms

Value (hex)

Instruction Error Operation
Continue operation
Stop operation

0000
0001

Address
197@@@@
A
A

736

0000
8000

Appendix D

PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console
Address
198@@@@
A
Value (hex)
A

0 to 7
Value (hex)

Background Communications Port Number
(CS1-H CPU Units only)
Communications port number 0 to 7 (logical port number)

E00
C00
A00
800

Background Processes (CS1-H CPU Units only)
Table data
Text string
Data shifting
instructions
instructions
instructions
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No

600
400
100
000

No
No
No
No

Yes
Yes
No
No

Yes
No
Yes
No

Address
208@@@@
A
Value (hex)
A

0000
0001
to
7D00

Minimum Cycle Time
Cycle time not fixed
Cycle time fixed: 1 ms
to
Cycle time fixed: 32,000 ms

Address
209@@@@
A
A

Value (hex)

Watch Cycle Time
Default: 1,000 ms (1 s)
10 ms
to
40,000 ms

Value (hex)

Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time
Default (4% of the cycle time)
00 ms
0.1 ms
to
25.5 ms

0000
8001
to
8FA0

Address
218@@@@
A
A

0000
8000
8001
to
80FF

737

Appendix D

PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console
Address
219@@@@
A
B[
Value (hex)
A

00
01 to FF
Value (hex)

00
05 to FF
Value (hex)

00
01
02

Slice Time for Peripheral Servicing in Peripheral
Servicing Priority Mode
Disable Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode.
0.1 to 25.5 ms (in 0.1-ms increments)
Slice Time for Program Execution in Peripheral
Servicing Priority Mode
Disable Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode.
5 to 255 (in 1-ms increments)
Slice Time for Program Execution in Parallel
Processing Mode (CS1-H CPU Units only)
Don’t use Parallel Processing Mode
Parallel Processing with Synchronous Memory
Access
Parallel Processing with Asynchronous Memory
Access

Address
220@@@@
A
B
Value
(hex)
A

738

00
10 to 1F
20 to 7F
FC
FD
Value
(hex)
00
10 to 1F
20 to 7F
FC
FD

Unit/Port for Priority Servicing
Disable Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode.
CPU Bus Unit unit number (0 to 15) + 10 hex
CPU Special I/O Unit unit number (0 to 96) + 20 hex
RS-232C port
Peripheral port
Unit/Port for Priority Servicing
Disable Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode.
CPU Bus Unit unit number (0 to 15) + 10 hex
CPU Special I/O Unit unit number (0 to 96) + 20 hex
RS-232C port
Peripheral port

Appendix D

PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console
Address
221@@@@
A
B
Value
(hex)
A

00
10 to 1F
20 to 7F
FC
FD
Value
(hex)
00
10 to 1F
20 to 7F
FC
FD

Address
222@@@@
Not used.
A
Value
(hex)
A

Unit/Port for Priority Servicing

00
10 to 1F

Disable Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode.
CPU Bus Unit unit number (0 to 15) + 10 hex

20 to 7F
FC
FD

CPU Special I/O Unit unit number (0 to 96) + 20 hex
RS-232C port
Peripheral port

Address
225@@@@
A
Value (hex)
A

0000
0001
to
000A
8000
8001
to
800A

Power OFF Interrupt
Task
Disabled

Enabled

Power OFF Detection
Delay Time
0 ms
1 ms
to
10 ms
0 ms
1 ms
to
10 ms

739

Appendix D

PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console
Address
226@@@@
A
Value
(hex)
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing 0: Yes 1: No
Unit number
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

15
A

0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
to
FFFF

0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
1
1

0
0
1
1
0
0

0
1
0
1
0
1

Addresses 227 through 231 are the same as 226.

Address
448@@@@
A
B
Use FINS Write Protection and Number of Node Excluded from Write
Protection
A

Value (hex)

Number of Nodes Excluded from Write Protection
Set the number of nodes excluded from write protection in Programming Console addresses 448 to 480.
00 to 20 hex (0 to 32 nodes)

Value (hex)
80

Use FINS Write Protection
Write protection enabled

Write protection disabled

00
to
20

Address
449@@@@
to
448@@@@
A
B
Nodes Excluded from Write Protection (Protection Releasing
Addresses, 32 Nodes Maximum)
Value (hex)
A

01
to
FE
FF
Value (hex)

740

00
to
7F

FINS Source Node Address
Node address of a node to be excluded from write
protection.
All nodes in specified network.
FINS Source Network Address
Network address of the node to be excluded from
write protection.

Appendix E
Connecting to the RS-232C Port
on the CPU Unit
Connection Examples
The wiring diagrams for connecting to the RS-232C port are provided in this appendix. In actual wiring, we recommend the use of shielded twisted-pair cables and other methods to improve noise resistance. Refer to Recommended Wiring Methods later in this appendix for recommended wiring methods.

Connections to Host Computers
Note Connections to a computer running the CX-Programmer are the same as those shown here.

1:1 Connections via RS-232C Port

RS-232C

RS-232C
port

Note The maximum cable length for an RS-232C connection is 15 m. RS-232C communications specifications, however, do not cover transmissions at 19.2 Kbps. Refer to documentation of the device being
connected when using this baud rate.

IBM PC/AT or Compatible Computer
CPU Unit
Signal Pin
name No.

RS-232C
interface

D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)

Computer
Pin Signal
No. name
RS-232C
interface

D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)

741

Appendix E

Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit
1:N Connections via RS-232C Port
RS-232C

NT-AL001 Link Adapters

NT-AL001
terminating
resistance ON, 5-V
power required

Terminating resistance ON
RS-232C

RS-232C

RS-232C ports

NT-AL001 Link Adapter
Personal Computer

Pin Signal
Signal RS-232C No. name
name
Shell FG

RS-232C
Interface

FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
DR
ER
SG

Shield

NC
1
SD
2
RD
3
RS
4
CS
5
5V
6
DR
7
ER
8
SG
9
RS-232

RS-422A
GRD
SG
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA
CSB
CSA

D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

RS-422
Terminal
block

5-V (+)
power (–)
(See note 2.)

NT-AL001 Link Adapter
Pin Signal Signal Pin
No. name
name No.

Signal Pin
name No.

DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
(terminating resistance)
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: OFF

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

GRD
SG
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA
CSB
CSA

RS-422

CPU Unit

RS-232C
(See
note 1.)

FG Shell
NC 1
SD
2
RD 3
RS
4
CS
5
5V
6
DR 7
ER
8
SG 9
RS-232

(See
note
2.)

Pin
No.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Signal
name

FG
SD
RD RS-232C
RS Interface
CS
5V
DR
ER
SG

D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)

DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: OFF
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: ON

NT-AL001 Link Adapter
Pin Signal Signal Pin RS-232C Communications Board/Unit
(See
No. name
name No.
Pin Signal
note 1.)
No. name
FG Shell

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

GRD
SG
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA
CSB
CSA

RS-422

NC 1
SD
2
RD 3
RS
4
CS
5
5V
6
DR 7
ER
8
SG 9
RS-232

DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON (terminating resistance)
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: ON

(See
note
2.)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

FG
SD
RD
RS RS-232C
CS Interface
5V
DR
ER
SG

D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)

Note 1. We recommend using the following NT-AL001 Link Adapter Connecting Cables to connect to NTAL001 Link Adapters.
XW2Z-070T-1: 0.7 m
XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m
The recommended cables should be wired as shown below. Each signal wire should be twisted with
the SG (signal ground) wire and placed in a shielded cable to prevent the effects of noise in noiseprone environments. The 5-V wires can also be twisted with the SG wire to increase noise immunity.

742

Appendix E

Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit

Although this wiring is different from that shown in the example above, it can be used to increase
noise immunity if required.
Wiring with XW2Z-@@0T-1 (10 Conductors)
NT-AL001 (interior)

PLC
Pin Signal
No. name

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Shell

Signal Pin
name No.

The arrow indicates
the signal direction.

Not used

FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
5V
DR
ER
SG
FG

1
3
RD
2
SD
4
RS
5
CS
6
5V
7
DR
8
ER
9
SG
FG Shell

Loopback

Shield

2. When the NT-AL001 Link Adapter is connected to the RS-232C port on the CPU Unit, 5 V is supplied
from pin 6, eliminating the need for a 5-V power supply.
3. Do not use the 5-V power from pin 6 of the RS-232C port for anything other than an NT-AL001, CJ1WCIF11 Link Adapter, or NV3W-M@20L Programmable Terminal. Using this power supply for any other
external device may damage the CPU Unit or the external device.
4. The XW1Z-@@0T-1 Cable is designed to connect the NT-AL001 and contains special wiring for the
CS and RS signals. Do not use this cable for any other application. Connecting this cable to other
devices can damage them.

DIP Switch Settings on the NT-AL001 Link Adapter
There is a DIP switch on the NT-AL001 Link Adapter that is used to set RS-422A/485 communications parameters. Set the DIP switch as required for the serial communications mode according to the following table.
Pin
1
2

3
4
5
6

Function
Not used. (Leave set to ON.)
Internal terminating resistance setting.
ON:
Terminating resistance connected.
OFF:
Terminating resistance not connected.
2-wire/4-wire setting
Both pins ON:
2-wire communications
Both pins OFF: 4-wire communications
Communications mode (See note.)
Both pins OFF: Always send.
5 OFF/6 ON:
Send when RS-232C’s CS is high.
5 ON/6 OFF:
Send when RS-232C’s CS is low.

Default setting
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
ON
OFF

Note Turn OFF pin 5 and turn ON pin 6 when connected to a CS-series CPU Unit.

743

Appendix E

Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit

Connection Example to Programmable Terminal (PT)
Direct Connection from RS-232C to RS-232C
PT

RS-232C port

RS-232C
Host Link or NT Link (1:N)
CPU Unit
Signal Pin
name No.
FG Shell

FG
SD
RS-232C RD
interface RS
CS
5V
DR
ER
SG

Pin
No.
Shell

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

D-Sub, 9-pin (male
connector on cable)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

PT
Signal
name

FG
–
SD
RD RS-232C
interface
RS
CS
5V
–
–
SG

D-Sub, 9-pin (male
connector on cable)

• Communications Mode: Host Link (unit number 0 only for Host Link)
NT Link (1:N, N = 1 Unit only)
• OMRON Cables with Connectors:
XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m
XW2Z-500T-1: 5 m

Recommended Wiring Methods
We recommend the following wiring methods for RS-232C, especially in environment prone to noise.
1.

Use shielded twisted-pair cable for communications cables. The following RS-232C cables are
recommended.

Model
UL2464 AWG28×5P IFS-RVV-SB (UL approved)
AWG28×5P IFVV-SB (not UL approved)
UL2464-SB (MA) 5P×28AWG (7/0.127) (UL approved)
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P×28AWG (7/0.127) (not UL approved)

Manufacturer
Fujikura Ltd.
Hitachi Cable, Ltd.

Use a twisted-pair cable for each signal line and SG (signal ground) to connect the CPU Unit to a
communications partner. Also, bundle all the SG lines at the Board/Unit and at the other device and
connect them together.

Connect the shield line of the communications cable to the hood (FG) of the RS-232C connector at the
Board/Unit. Also, ground the protective earth (GR) terminal of the Power Supply Units on the CPU Rack
and the CS-series Expansion Racks to a resistance of 100 Ω or less. The following example shows
connecting SD-SG, RD-SG, RS-SG, and CS-SG for Serial Communications Mode using a twisted-pair
cable using the peripheral bus.

744

Appendix E

Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit
Arrows indicate signal directions.
CPU Unit
Pin
No.

2
3
4
5
9
Shell

Communications partner

Signal
name

SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
FG
FG

RD
SD
CS
RS
SG
FG

SG signal line

SG signal lines
bundled together
Aluminum foil

Shield

XM2S-0911-E

Note The hood (FG) is internally connected to the protective earth (GR) terminal on the Power Supply Unit
through the CPU Rack or CS-series Expansion Rack. FG can thus be connected by connecting the protective earth (GR) terminal on the Power Supply Unit. The hood (FG) is also electrically connected to pin
1 (FG), but the connection resistance between the shield and the FG is smaller for the hood. To reduce
contact resistance between the hood (FG) and the FG, connect the shield both to the hood (FG) and to
pin 1 (FG).
CPU Unit
Power Supply Unit

Shield and GR connected
Ground to 100 Ω
internally.
or less

The hood will be
grounded if the GR
terminal is grounded.

745

Appendix E

Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit

Wiring Connectors
Use the following procedures to wire connectors.

1. Preparing the Cable
Lengths for steps in the procedure are provided in the diagrams.
Connecting the Shield Line to the Hood (FG)
1.

Cut the cable to the required length, leaving leeway for wiring and laying the cables.

Use a razor blade to cut away the sheath, being careful not to damage the braiding.

40 mm (RS-232C)
3.

Use scissors to cut away all but 10 mm of the exposed braiding.

10 mm
4.

Use wire strippers to remove the insulation from the end of each wire.

5 mm
5.

Fold the braiding back over the end of the sheath.

Wrap aluminum foil tape over the top of the braiding for one and a half turns.

Aluminum foil tape

746

Appendix E

Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit
Not Connecting the Shield to the Hood (FG)
1.

Cut the cable to the required length, leaving leeway for wiring and laying the cables.

Use a razor blade to cut away the sheath, being careful not to damage the braiding.

40 mm (RS-232C)
3.

Use scissors to cut away the exposed braiding.

Use wire strippers to remove the insulation from the end of each wire.

5 mm
5.

Wrap electrician's tape over the top and end of the cut sheath.

Electrician's tape

2. Soldering
1.

Place heat-shrinking tubes over all wires.

Pre-solder all wires and connector terminals.
Solder the wires.

1 mm

Soldering iron

Heat-shrinking tube
(inner dia. 1.5, l = 10)
4.

Move the heat-shrinking tubes onto the soldered area and shrink them into place.

Heat-shrinking tube

747

Appendix E

Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit
3. Assembling the Hood
Assemble the connector hood as shown.

FG Connection

No FG Connection
Aluminum foil tape

Ground plate

4. Connection to the CPU Unit

Tighten the screws firmly.

• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting communications cables.
• Tighten the communications connector attachment screws to 0.4 N·m.

748

Appendix F
Restrictions in Using C200H Special
I/O Units
Restrictions in Areas and Addresses
There are restrictions in transferring I/O memory data between C200H Special I/O Units and the CPU Unit. The
restrictions on the Unit depend on the group in which the Unit belongs. The five groups are shown in the following tables.
Units that Transfer data
for Programming Inside
the Unit Itself

Units that Transfer data
for Allocated Words

Group
Group I
Group II

Models
C200H-ASC02 ASCII Unit
C200H-ASC11/21/31 ASCII Units

Group
Group III

Models
C200H-CT001-V1/CT002 High-speed Counter Units, C200H-IDS01V1/ IDS21 ID Sensor Units, C200H-NC111/NC112/NC211 Position
Control Units, C200H-FZ001 Fuzzy Logic Unit
C200H-CT021 High-speed Counter Unit, C200H-MC221 Motion Control Unit, C200H-DRT21 C200H I/O LInk Unit, C200HW-NC113/NC213/
NC413 Position Control Units

Group IV

Units that Do Not Transfer
data for Programming or
Allocated Words

Group
Group V

Models
C200H-TS001/TS002/TS101/TS102 Temperature Sensor Units,
C200H-TC001/TC002/TC003/TC101/TC102/TC103 Temperature Controller Units, C200H-PID01/PID02/PID03 PID Control Units, C200HTV001/TV002/TV003/TV101/TV102/TV103 Heating/Cooling Units,
C200H-OV001 Voice Unit, C200H-ID501/ID215 High-density Input
Units, C200H-OD501/OD215 High-density Output Units, C200HMD501/MD215/MD115 High-density I/O Units, C200HW-SRM21 CompoBus/S Master Unit, C200H-AD001/AD002/AD003 Analog Input
Units, C200H-DA001/DA002/DA003/DA004 Analog Output Units,
C200H-MAD01 Analog I/O Unit, C200HW-DRM21-V1 DeviceNet Master Unit, C200H-CP114 Cam Positioner Unit, T200H-MIF01 M-Net
Interface Unit

If any of the above Units in groups I to IV are used in combination with the following functionality, the restrictions described in the rest of this section apply for area and address specifications.
• Data transfers with the CPU Unit from instructions (PLC READ, PLC WRITE, etc.) in the program executed
by the C200H Special I/O Unit. This applies to the ASCII Units only.
• Data transfers with the CPU Unit for allocated words or DM area specifications (i.e., source/destination
areas and addresses).
Note There are no restriction in using the IORD(222) and IOWR(223) instruction in the CPU Unit to transfer
data. These instruction can thus be used in the CPU Unit to transfer data for Units that support data
transfer for IORD(222) and IOWR(223), i.e., C200H-CT021, C200H-MC221, and C200H-ASC11/
ASC21/ASC31.

749

Appendix F

Restrictions in Using C200H Special I/O Units
Restrictions in Using Existing ASCII Unit Programs

The following replacements in areas and addresses will be made if existing
ASCII Unit programs are used.
For most addresses, a zero (0) will simply be added as the most significant
digit. The following four exceptions exist.
1,2,3...

1. AR 00, AR02 to AR 27 (C200H AR Area words) will specify H100, H102 to
H127 in the CS-series CPU Unit.
2. TIM 000 to TIM 511 and CNT 000 to CNT 511 (C200H Timer/Counter Area
words) will specify T0000 to T0511 in the CS-series CPU Unit.
3. LR 00 to LR 63 (C200H LR Area words) will specify CIO 1000 to CIO 1063
in the CS-series CPU Unit.
4. AR 01 and CIO 281 cannot be specified. Use other addresses.

Corresponding Addresses for C200H-ASC02 (Group I)

@R
@L
@H
@A

@G
@D

Area/Address specifications in a C200H CPU Unit
Code
Area
Addresses
IR
000 to 255
LR
LR 00 to LR 63
HR
HR 00 to HR 99
AR
AR 00
AR01
AR02 to AR27
Timer/Counter
TIM/CNT 000 to TIM/CNT 511
DM
DM 0000 to DM 0999
DM 0000 to DM 1999

Areas/Addresses in a CS-series CPU Unit
Area
Address
CIO
000 to 0255
CIO
1000 to 1063
Holding
H000 to H099
Holding
H100
Cannot be accessed. Use another address.
Holding
H102 to H127
Timer/Counter
T0000 to T0511
DM
D00000 to D00999
D20000 to D20999

Corresponding Addresses for C200H-ASC11/ASC21/ASC31 (Group II)

@L
@H
@A

@G
@D
@E

750

Area/Address specifications in a C200H CPU Unit
Code
Area
Addresses
IR
000 to 280
281
282 to 511
LR
LR 00 to LR 63
HR
HR 00 to HR 99
AR
AR 00
AR 01
AR 02 to AR 27
Timer/Counter
TIM/CNT 000 to TIM/CNT 511
DM
DM 0000 to DM 6655
EM
EM 0000 to EM 6143

Areas/Addresses in a CS-series CPU Unit
Area
Address
CIO
0000 to 0280
Cannot be accessed. Use another address.
CIO
0282 to 0511
CIO
1000 to 1063
Holding
H000 to H099
Holding
H100
Cannot be accessed. Use another address.
Holding
H102 to H127
Timer
T0000 to T0511
DM
D00000 to D6655
EM
E0_00000 to E0_06143

Appendix F

Restrictions in Using C200H Special I/O Units

Restrictions in Programming C200H Special I/O Units for the CS Series
(Groups I to IV)
There following restrictions in area and address specifications exist in programming inside C200H Special I/O Units (i.e., ASCII Unit) or in specifying
C200H Special I/O Unit allocations for the CS-series CPU Unit.
1,2,3...

1. CIO 0256 to CIO 0999 cannot be specified for Units in Group I or III, CIO
0281, 0512 to CIO 0999 cannot be specified for Units in Group II or IV, and
CIO 1064 to CIO 6143 cannot be specified.
2. Addresses in the Work Area (W000 to W511) cannot be specified.
3. H101 and H128 to H511 cannot be specified, and H100, H102 to H127
must be specified using AR 00, AR02 to AR 27.
4. Timers T0512 to T4095 cannot be specified.
5. Counters (C0000 to C4095) cannot be specified.
6. D01000 to D19999 and D21000 to D32767 in Group I or III D06656 to
D32767 in Group II or IV cannot be specified.
Note If D1000 to D1999 are specified in a C200H Special I/O Unit for data
transfer, the CS Series will interpret them as D20000 to D20999. Do
not use D1000 to D1999.
7. E0_06144 to E0_32767 (bank 0) and E@_00000 to E@_32767 in all banks
except bank 0 cannot be specified.

Special I/O Units in Groups I and III
Area/Address specifications in CS-series CPU Unit
Area
Addresses
CIO
0000 to 0255
0256 to 0999
CIO
1000 to 1063
CIO
1064 to 6143
Work
W000 to W511
Auxiliary
A000 to A959
Holding
H000 to H099
H100
H101
H102 to H127
H128 to H511
Timer
T0000 to T0511
T0512 to Y4095
Counter
C0000 to C4095
DM
D00000 to D00999
D06656 to D19999
D20000 to D20999
D21000 to D32767
EM
E0_00000 to E0_32767
E1_00000 to EC_32767

Areas/Addresses to use in C200H Special I/O Unit
Area
Address
IR
000 to 255
Not addressable.
LR
LR 00 to LR 63
IR
Not addressable.
None
--None
--HR
HR 00 to HR 99
AR
AR 00
AR
Not addressable.
AR
AR 02 to AR 27
None
--Timer/Counter
TIM/CNT 000 to TIM/CNT 511
Not addressable.
Not addressable.
DM
DM0000 to DM 0999
Not addressable.
DM1000 to DM1999
Not addressable.
None
-----

751

Appendix F

Restrictions in Using C200H Special I/O Units

Special I/O Units in Groups II and IV
Area/Address specifications in CS-series CPU Unit
Area
Addresses
CIO
0000 to 0280
0281
0282 to 0511
0512to 0999
CIO
1000 to 1063
CIO
1064 to 6143
Work
W000 to W511
Auxiliary
A000 to A959
Holding
H000 to H099
H100
H101
H102 to H127
H128 to H511
Timer
T0000 to Y0511
T0512 to Y4095
Counter
C0000 to C4095
DM
D00000 to D06655
D06656 to D32767
EM
E0_00000 to E0_06143
E0_06144 to E0_32767
E1_00000 to EC_32767

Areas/Addresses to use in C200H Special I/O Unit
Area
Address
IR
000 to 280
Not addressable.
282 to 511
Not addressable.
LR
LR 00 to LR 63
IR
Not addressable.
None
--None
--HR
HR 00 to HR 99
AR
AR 00
Not addressable.
AR 02 to AR 27
None
--Timer/Counter
TIM/CNT 000 to TIM/CNT 511
Not addressable.
Not addressable.
DM
DM0000 to DM 6655
Not addressable.
EM
EM0000 to EM6143
Not addressable.
Not addressable.

Functions with Addressing Restrictions
Restrictions apply to the following functions.

ASCII Units
Group
Unit
I
ASCII
Units

Model
C200H-ASC02

C200H-ASC11/
ASC21/ASC31

752

Function with restricted addressing
Areas and addresses in read/write
operands for PLC READ, PLC WRITE,
PLC READ@ and PLC WRITE@.
Areas and addresses in read/write
operands for PLC READ, PLC WRITE,
PLC READ@, PLC WRITE@

Alternative
Write to available addresses and then
transfer to the desired locations. (See
the note following the next table.)
Use IORD(222) and IOWR(223)
(#00@@).

Appendix F

Restrictions in Using C200H Special I/O Units

Other C200H Special I/O Units
Group
Unit
III
High-speed
Counter Units

Model
C200H-CT001-V1/
CT002

ID Sensor
Units

C200H-IDS01-V1/
IDS21

Position Control Units
Fuzzy Logic
Unit

C200H-NC111/
NC112/NC211
C200H-FZ001

High-speed
Counter Unit

C200H-CT021

Motion Control Unit
C200H I/O
Link Unit

C200H-MC221
C200HW-DRT21

Function with restricted addressing
Setting the source areas and addresses in allocated words n+2 and n+3 for transferring words
m to m+99 (high-speed counter system data).
Setting the source areas and addresses in allocated word n+2 for command data.
Setting the destination areas and addresses in
allocated word n+3 for storing data read from
Data Carriers.
Setting the source areas and addresses in allocated word n+4 for position data and speeds.
Setting the source areas and addresses in allocated word n+1 for fuzzy input write data to be
transferred to the Fuzzy Logic Unit.
Setting the destination areas and addresses in
allocated word n+3 for fuzzy logic results data
to be read from the Fuzzy Logic Unit.
Setting the source areas and addresses in allocated word m+4 for upper/lower limits, present
values, and other data to be transferred to the
High-speed Counter Unit.
Setting the source/destination areas and
addresses for expansion information.
Setting the areas and addresses in allocated
words n+1 to n+4 in the CPU Unit for automatic
transfer of I/O memory of the CPU Unit to which
the C200H I/O Link Unit is mounted to the
DeviceNet Master Unit.

Alternative
Write to available
addresses and then
transfer to the desired
locations. (See note.)

Use IORD(222) and
IOWR(223).

Write to available
addresses and then
transfer to the desired
locations. (See note.)

Note Examples of the alternative method are shown below.
Reading CPU Unit Data
from a Special I/O Unit

Write the data from the unsupported address to a supported address and
then read the data from the supported address to the Special I/O Unit.

• Bit Data
Example
Unsupported
Address

Supported
Address

• Word Data
Example:
Always ON
Unsupported
Address
Supported
Address

753

Appendix F

Restrictions in Using C200H Special I/O Units
Reading Special I/O Unit
Data form the CPU Unit

Read the data from the Special I/O Unit and then write the data from the supported address to an unsupported address.

• Bit Data
Supported
Address

Unsupported
Address

Example

• Word Data
Example:
Always ON
Supported
Address
Unsupported
Address

Precautions When Using C200HW-DRM21-V1 DeviceNet Master Unit
When using a DeviceNet Master Unit, limitations apply when using the following functions (except for data
transfer).
Allocation Limitations

Only the following areas can be allocated when allocating remote I/O using a
Configurator.
Area
CIO
HR
LR
DM

Note

Allocation words
0000 to 0235
0300 to 0511
H000 to H099
1000 to 1063
D00000 to D05999

1. When creating master parameters using a configurator, set the PLC model to C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)
(except for the C200HE-CPU11).
2. When reading master parameters from a master using a configurator, set the PLC model to the
C200HX-CPU85.

Limitations when using
DM as the Status Area

When using the DeviceNet Master Unit, the following words will be allocated
in addition to the DM Area words allocated to the Unit as a Special I/O Unit.
Master Status Area: D06032 + (2 × unit number)
Communications cycle time present value: D06033 + (2 × unit number)
Do not use these words for other applications, because data is updated when
the DeviceNet Master Unit is being used.

754

Appendix G
CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter

The CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter converts RS-232C to RS-422A/485.

Specifications
General Specifications
Item

Specification

Dimensions
Weight
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient storage temperature
Ambient operating humidity
Rated power supply voltage
Current consumption
Operating atmosphere
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Isolation method
Maximum communications distance

18.2 × 34.0 × 38.8 (W × H × D)
20 g max.
0 to 55°C
–20 to 75°C
10% to 90% (with no condensation)
5V
(Supplied from pin 6 of the RS-232C connector.)
40 mA max.
No corrosive gases
Same as SYSMAC CS/CJ Series.
Same as SYSMAC CS/CJ Series.
Not isolated
50 m

Electrical Specifications
RS-232C Connector
Connector Pin Arrangement for
RS-232C Port
FG

SG (0 V)

Pin number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7, 8
9
Hood

Signal
FG
RD
SD
CS
RS
+5V
NC
SG (0 V)
FG

Note The hood will have the same electrical potential as the connector on the other end of the cable.

755

Appendix G

CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter
RS-422A/485 Terminal Block
Signal
RDA–
RDB+
SDA–
SDB+
FG

DIP Switch Settings
Pin
number

Function

Terminating resistance

Two-wire/four-wire method selection (See note 1.)
Two-wire/four-wire method selection (See note 1.)
Not used.
Selection of RS control for RD
(See note 2.)
Selection of RS control for SD
(See note 3.)

3
4
5
6

OFF

With (at both ends of the communications path)
Two-wire method

Four-wire method

Two-wire method

Four-wire method

--With RS control

--Without RS control (always ready
to receive)
Without RS control (always ready
to send)

With RS control

Without

Note 1. Set pins 2 and 3 to the same setting. (ON for the two-wire method or OFF for the four-wire method.)
2. To prohibit echoback, set pin 5 to ON (with RS control).
3. When connecting to several devices using the four-wire method in a 1:N connection, set pin 6 to ON
(with RS control). When connecting using the two-wire method, set pin 6 to ON (with RS control).

Dimensions

34.0

5.8

756

38.8

18.2

Appendix G

CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter

DIP Switch Settings, Wiring, and Installation
Setting the DIP Switch
The DIP switch settings must be changed to perform communications according to settings other than the
default settings.
1. Remove the DIP switch cover using a flat-bladed screwdriver in the way shown below.

Note Press the cover gently while removing it to prevent it from popping out suddenly.
2. Using a fine pair of tweezers or other tool with a fine point, change the settings of the DIP switch pins to
match the desired communications conditions.
3. Be sure to remount the cover after finishing the DIP switch settings.

1
2

O
N

3
4
5
6

O
N

All the pins are factory-set to OFF.

Wiring the RS-422A/485 Terminal Block
• Use either two-wire or four-wire shielded cable.
Recommended cable: CO-HC-ESV-3P×7/0.2 (Hirakawa Hewtech)
• Connect the shield wire at both ends of the cable carrying RS-422A/485 signals to ground, and ground the
ground terminal on the Power Supply Unit of the CPU or Expansion Rack to 100 Ω max.
1. Taking care not to damage the shield, strip between 30 and 80 mm of sheath off the end of the cable.

30 to 80 mm

2. Carefully twist the shield mesh together to form a single wire, and carefully cut off the material surrounding
the signal wires and any unnecessary signal wires.

757

CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter

Appendix G

3. Strip the sheath off the signal wires to a length sufficient to attach crimp terminals. Apply vinyl tape or heatshrinking tube to the sheathes and stripped parts of communications lines.

4. Attach sticktype crimp terminals to ends of the signal lines and crimp them using a crimp tool.
• Recommend crimp terminals:
Phoenix Contact
AI Series
AI-0.5-8WH-B (serial number: 3201369)
• Recommended crimp tool:
Phoenix Contact ZA3

With four-wire cables, insert two signal lines into each crimp terminal together before crimping.

• Recommend crimp terminals:
Phoenix Contact
AI Series
AI-TWIN2×0.5-8WH (serial number: 3200933)
• Recommended crimp tool:
Phoenix Contact
UD6 (serial number: 1204436)
5. Connect the signal lines and the shield line to the RS-422A/485 terminal block.

758

Appendix G

CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter

Mounting to the Unit
Mount the Converter to the RS-232C port (D-Sub, 9-pin) of the Unit to be connected in the following way.
1. Align the Converter’s connector with that of the Unit and push it into the Unit’s connector as far as possible.
2. Tighten the mounting screws on either side of the Converter. (Tightening torque: 0.3 N⋅m.)
As an example, connection to a CS1-H CPU Unit is shown below.

OPEN

MCP

BUS

PER

IPHE

RAL

POR

759

Appendix G

CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter

Wiring Examples
Wiring for Four-wire Cable
CS1-H CPU
Unit (master)

CS1-H CPU
Unit (slave 0)

CS1-H CPU
Unit (slave 1)

ON (with)
OFF (four-wire)
OFF (four-wire)
OFF
OFF (without)
OFF (without)

OFF (without)
OFF (four-wire)
OFF (four-wire)
OFF
OFF (without)
ON (with)

ON (with)
OFF (four-wire)
OFF (four-wire)
OFF
OFF (without)
ON (with)

DIP Switch Settings
Terminating resistance

Two-wire/four-wire
Two-wire/four-wire

Not used.
RD control
SD control

Wiring for Two-wire Cable
CS1-H CPU
Unit (master)

CS1-H CPU
Unit (slave 0)

CS1-H CPU
Unit (slave 1)

ON (with)
ON (two-wire)
ON (two-wire)
OFF
OFF (without)
ON (with)

OFF (without)
ON (two-wire)
ON (two-wire)
OFF
OFF (without)
ON (with)

ON (with)
ON (two-wire)
ON (two-wire)
OFF
OFF (without)
ON (with)

DIP Switch Settings
Terminating resistance

Two-wire/four-wire
Two-wire/four-wire

Not used.
RD control
SD control

760

Index
Numerics
24-V DC output power, 302
26-V power supply, 146

A
Access Error Flag, 464
addresses
memory map, 727
allocations
See also I/O allocations
Always OFF Flag, 464
Always ON Flag, 464
Analog Timer Units, 256
dimensions, 259
specifications, 111, 258
applications
precautions, xxxi
arc killers, 612
Auxiliary Area, 425, 691
read/write section, 712–721
read-only section, 691–711

B
B7A Link Terminals, 248
background execution
special flags, 447
background execution settings, 336
Backplane Insulation Plates, 286
Backplanes, 197
Basic I/O Units, 84
available models, 207
basic I/O errors, 543
components, 209
dimensions, 211
error information, 435
fuse status flags, 426, 691
I/O allocations, 375
I/O response time, 357, 426, 499, 695
mounting, 286
specifications, 105, 572–597
wiring, 310
battery
Battery Set, 91
compartment, 161
error, 544
error flag, 439, 704
low battery error detection, 334, 360
replacement, 560, 562
service life, 560
Battery Error Flag, 704
battery-free operation, 16
block programs

instruction execution times, 522
BUSY indicator, 82

C
C200H Expansion I/O Backplanes, 99
C200H High-density I/O Units, 225
C200H Special I/O Units
restrictions on data transfers, 749
C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console, 175
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
comparison, 62
cables, 91–93, 96, 98–100, 102–103, 290, 316
connections, 294
See also I/O Connecting Cables
Carry Flag, 464
CIO Area, 398
description, 405
circuit configurations
See also specifications
CJ Series
definition, xix
clock
clock data, 439, 700
clock instructions
execution times, 521
clock pulses
flags, 466
communications, 58
baud rate, 350
Communications Port Enabled Flags, 724
data, 85
distances, 136
errors, 545
flags, 443
instruction execution times, 520
network instruction execution times, 520
networks, 132
overview, 135
protocol support, 120
serial communications, 5
specifications, 136
system expansion, 119
Communications Port Enabled Flags, 724
comparison instructions
execution times, 508
compatibility with previous PLCs, 16
CompoBus/S, 134
components
Analog Timer Unit, 257
Basic I/O Units, 209
C200H Expansion I/O Backplanes, 202
C200H High-density Units, 225
CPU Backplane, 197
CPU Unit, 81, 156

761

Index
CS-series Expansion Backplane, 200
Group-2 High-density I/O Units, 223
Power Supply Units, 184
Condition Flags, 463
saving and loading status, 465
connectors, 313
connector pin arrangement, 180
RS-232C connectors, 746
contact protection circuit, 613
control panels
installation, 282
Controller Link, 133
conversion instructions
execution times, 513
cooling
fan, 280
Counter Area, 450
counters
execution times, 506
CPU Backplanes, 197
dimensions, 198
CPU Bus Unit Area
capacity, 148
CPU Bus Units, 84
data exchange, 391
error information, 437
errors, 544
I/O allocations, 381, 417, 452
Initialization Flags, 427, 698
memory area, 417
mounting, 286
refreshing, 14, 391
related flags/bits, 725
Restart Bits, 427, 712
setting area capacity, 148
settings, 468
setup errors, 545
specifications, 118
CPU Racks
description, 89
maximum current consumption, 137
troubleshooting, 553
CPU Unit, 156
capabilities, 84
components, 81, 156
connections, 85
CPU errors, 536
dimensions, 163
DIP switch, 82, 158, 326
indicators, 82
initialization, 477
operation, 473
RS-232C port connections, 741
CPU Units
models, 156

762

CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console, 174
CS Series
definition, xix
CS1 CPU Units, 70
CS1-H CPU Unit
features, 13
CS1-H CPU Units, 70, 156
functions, 60
new instructions, 15
CS-series Basic I/O Units
wiring, 312
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Area, 417
CS-series CPU Bus Units
See also CPU Bus Units
CS-series Expansion Backplanes
See also Expansion Backplanes
CS-series High-density I/O Units, 220
current consumption, 137
tables, 140
CX-Programmer, 175, 267
peripheral servicing, 475
cycle time
computing, 485–503
effects of online editing, 499
errors, 542
example calculations, 498
flags, 427
maximum cycle time, 428, 696
present cycle time, 428, 696
setting, 338, 364
Cycle Time Too Long Flag, 439, 703

D
data areas
forcing bit status, 403
overview, 398
status after fatal errors, 403
status after mode changes, 404
status after power interruptions, 404
data control instructions
execution times, 517
Data Link Area, 416
data links, 416
data movement instructions
execution times, 509
Data Registers, 461
data registers
sharing, 14, 403, 428, 462
data shift instructions
execution times, 509
data tracing
related flags/bits, 429
debugging, 274

Index
flags, 429
debugging instructions
execution times, 521
decrement instructions
execution times, 510
DeviceNet, 133
See also DeviceNet
DeviceNet Area, 411–412
dimensions, 255
Analog Timer Unit, 259
B7A Interface Unit, 244
Backplane Insulation Plates, 286
Backplanes, 198
Basic I/O Units, 211
C200H Expansion I/O Backplanes, 202
C200H High-density I/O Units, 230
CPU Racks, 80
CPU Unit, 163
CS-series High-density I/O Units, 222
Group-2 High-density I/O Units, 224
installation, 285
Memory Cards, 170
Power Supply Units, 186
DIN track
mounting, 288
DIP switch, 158, 326
display instructions
execution times, 521
DM Area, 451
changing settings, 271
settings, 262
DR00 Output for Background Execution, 447
ducts
wiring, 283
Dynamic Input Mode, 228
Dynamic Output Mode, 227

E
EC Directives, xxxvi
electrical noise, 323
EM Area, 453
current EM bank, 725
EM bank
current EM bank, 725
EM file memory, 163, 454
initializing, 166
PC Setup settings, 335, 360
starting bank, 700
emergency stop circuit, 278
environmental conditions
checking, 551
Equals Flag, 464
Equals Flag for Background Execution, 447

ER/AER Flag for Background Execution, 447
error codes, 702, 723
Error Flag, 464
error log, 530–531, 722
Error Log Area, 433, 530, 693, 722
error messages, 536
errors
basic I/O errors, 447
communications error flags, 443
CPU Bus Units, 437
CPU Rack, 553
CPU standby errors, 537
error codes, 702, 723
error log, 10, 433, 530–531, 722
error messages, 536
Programming Consoles, 535
Expansion I/O Rack, 553
FAL/FALS flags, 434
fatal errors, 537
flags, 464
flash memory, 434
Inner Boards, 447
Input Units, 554
memory error flags, 434
non-fatal, 543
Output Units, 555
PC Setup errors, 447
peripheral service time too long, 439
programming error flags, 447
settings, 335
Special I/O Units, 447
status after fatal errors, 403
SYSMAC Bus, 438
troubleshooting, 529, 531–551
user-programmed errors, 530
Ethernet, 133
execution settings, 333
execution times, 503–526
Expansion Backplanes, 99, 199
Expansion I/O Backplanes, 99, 201
Expansion I/O Racks
troubleshooting, 553
Expansion Racks
description, 94
maximum current consumption, 137
maximum number allowed, 98
external interrupts
response time, 503

F
fail-safe circuits, 278
failure diagnosis instructions
execution times, 522
FAL Error Flag, 434

763

Index
FAL errors, 543
flag, 706
FAL/FALS Number for System Error Simulation, 434
FALS Error Flag, 434
FALS errors, 542
flag, 702
fatal errors, 537
fatal operating errors, 537
features, 3
overview, 2
file management
overview, 8
file memory, 163
converting EM Area to file memory, 454
file names, 165
initializing, 166
instruction execution times, 520
related flags/bits, 429
file memory instructions
execution times, 520
file names, 165
FINS commands, 128, 130, 390, 392
FINS messages, 130
First Cycle Flag, 427, 483, 693, 723
first Rack word
Programming Console display, 384, 386
flags
table, 691
flash memory, 159
data dates, 442
Flash Memory Error, 434
floating-point math instructions
execution times, 514
flowchart
environmental conditions check, 551
error processing flowchart, 534
I/O check, 552
overall CPU operation, 473
PLC cycle, 485
power supply check, 546
Forced Status Hold Bit, 426, 712
functionality, 52
fuses
fuse status flags, 426, 691
replacing, 565

G
general specifications, 78
Greater Than Flag, 464
Greater Than or Equals Flag, 464
grounding, 307
Group-2 High-density I/O Units, 223
components, 223

764

dimensions, 224
wiring, 312

H
hardware
specifications, 78
High-density I/O Units
dimensions, 222, 230
limitations, 675, 688
See also C200H High-density I/O Units
See also CS-series High-density I/O Units
specifications, 598–611, 664–674
high-speed inputs, 229
Holding Area, 424
Host Link System, 121, 128

I
I/O
checking, 552
I/O allocations, 369
reserving words, 379
I/O Area, 405
initializing, 405
I/O Bus error, 539
I/O Connecting Cables, 290
I/O Control Units, 203
I/O Interface Units, 203
I/O interrupts
response time, 502
setting, 216
I/O memory, 159, 394
addresses, 727
areas, 728
effects of operating mode changes, 480
structure, 395
I/O refreshing, 475
I/O response time, 499–501
Basic I/O Units, 426
calculating, 499
I/O table
errors, 544
registering, 262, 267
I/O Table Setting error, 540
I/O Table Verification error, 544
I/O tables
error information, 388
I/O Terminal Area, 422
I/O Unit Cover, 312
immediate refreshing
input bits and words, 406
output bits and words, 409
increment instructions
execution times, 510

Index
index registers, 9, 455
sharing, 14, 403, 428, 461
indicators, 82, 157
CPU Unit, 82, 157
error indications, 531
indirect addressing
DM Area, 452
EM Area, 454
index registers, 455
inductive load surge suppressor, 323
Initial Task Execution Flag, 427
Initial Task Flag, 723
Initial Task Startup Flag, 693
initialization
CPU Bus Units, 698
CPU Unit, 477
file memory, 166
I/O Area, 405
Inner Board Area, 418
Inner Board setting, 333
Inner Boards
error information, 438
fatal Inner Board error, 539
installing, 162, 298
monitoring, 700
non-fatal Inner Board error, 544
related flags/bits, 427
words allocated to Inner Boards, 418, 453
input bits, 406
input devices
wiring, 319
input instructions
execution times, 504
Input Units
specifications, 106
troubleshooting, 554
inputs
high-speed, 229
inspection
procedures, 558–568
installation, 262, 264, 277
control panels, 282
DIN track, 288
environment, 280
ambient conditions, 280
cooling, 280
fail-safe circuits, 278
Inner Boards, 298
mounting height, 284
mounting Units, 286
package contents, 68
precautions, xxxi, 280
instruction execution times, 503–526
instructions

DI(693), 483
EI(694), 483
execution times, 503
failure diagnosis, 10
index registers, 9
loops, 9
ranges, 9
records and tables, 9
stacks, 9
steps per instruction, 503
table data processing instructions, 515
text strings, 9
interrupt control instructions
execution times, 518
Interrupt Input Units, 213
response time, 502
specifications, 585–597
Interrupt Task error, 543
Interrupt Task Error Cause Flag, 726
interrupt tasks
error flag, 726
error information, 435
errors, 543
interrupts, 213
Power OFF Interrupt Task, 339, 366
response time, 502–503
See also I/O interrupts
See also scheduled interrupts
IOM Hold Bit, 426, 712
IORF(097) refreshing
input bits and words, 407
output bits and words, 410
IR/DR Operation between Tasks, 428
IR00 Output for Background Execution, 447

J-L
leakage current
output, 322
Less Than Flag, 464
Less Than or Equals Flag, 464
Link Adapters
current consumption, 146
Link Area, 416
Local Network Table, 468
logic instructions
execution times, 513
loops
instructions, 9

M
maintenance
procedures, 560
Master Units

765

Index
See also Remote I/O Master Units
MCPWR indicator, 82
memory
capacities, 84
memory areas, 72
memory block map, 159
memory map, 728
See also data areas
memory areas, 393
See also memory
Memory Cards, 82–83, 90, 163
dimensions, 170
indicators, 82
initializing, 166
installing, 170
installing in a personal computer, 172
overview, 8
removing, 171
memory error, 538
Memory Error Flag, 434, 704
momentary power interruption, 481
MONITOR mode, 478
monitoring, 274
remote monitoring, 7
mounting
DIN track, 288–289
DIN Track Mounting Bracket, 288

N
Negative Flag, 464
network instructions
execution times, 520
networks, 132
Controller Link, 133
DeviceNet, 133
Ethernet, 133
multilevel networks, 6
overview, 135
related flags/bits, 443–445
new instructions, 15
noise
reducing electrical noise, 323
non-fatal operating errors, 543
no-protocol communications
settings, 345
Not Equal Flag, 464
NT Link
settings, 344, 351
NT Links, 123
maximum unit number, 344

O
online editing

766

effect on cycle time, 499
Online Editing Flags, 693
Online Editing Wait Flag, 725
related flags/bits, 429
operating environment
precautions, xxx
operating modes
description, 478
effects of mode changes on counters, 451
effects of mode changes on data areas, 404
effects of mode changes on timers, 450
operations allowed in each mode, 479
operation
checking, 265
checking operation, 262
CPU Unit, 473
preparations, 262
testing, 263, 272
trial operation, 273
output bits, 408
output instructions
execution times, 505
Output OFF Bit, 429, 712
Output Units
replacing fuses, 565
replacing relays, 567
specifications, 108
troubleshooting, 555
Overflow Flag, 464

P
parallel processing, 13
parallel processing modes, 354, 474
Parameter Area, 394, 467
Parameter Date, 442
parts
replacing parts, 560
PC Setup, 11, 262, 467
coding sheets, 729
error information, 434
errors, 544
overview, 330
performance, 3
peripheral bus
settings, 344
peripheral devices
See also Programming Devices
peripheral port
communications error, 545
connecting a personal computer, 92
related flags/bits, 446, 702
removing cover, 161
settings, 326, 349, 361
specifications, 179

Index
peripheral servicing, 475
priority servicing, 696, 738–739
setting, 355–356, 364
Peripheral Servicing Cycle Time, 428
Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode, 3, 696, 738–739
Peripheral Servicing Too Long Flag, 439
personal computer
connecting, 92
installing a Memory Card, 172
PLC Link
flags, 415
Operating Level Flags, 438, 711
PLC Link Area, 414
PLC Memory Address, 455, 727
PLCs
cooling, 280
power consumption, 137
Power Holding Time, 482
power interruptions
CPU operation for power interruptions, 480–485
disabling, 426, 483
effects on data areas, 404
information, 440, 713
momentary interruptions, 481
Power OFF Detection Delay Time, 339, 366
power OFF interrupt task, 339, 366
power interrupts
holding time, 482
power OFF detection delay, 482
Power OFF Detection Time, 482
power OFF interrupts
response time, 503
power OFF processing, 480–482
power supply
24 V, 302
checking, 546
CPU processing for power interruptions, 480
specifications, 78
Power Supply Units, 183
dimensions, 186
emergency stop, 278
grounding, 307
wiring AC Units, 299
wiring DC Units, 306
precautions, xxvii
applications, xxxi
data transfers for C200H Special I/O Units, 749
general, xxviii
handling precautions, 559
interlock circuits, 279
operating environment, xxx
output surge current, 322
output wiring, 322
periodic inspections, 558

safety, xxviii
safety circuits, 278
printing, 275
Program Error Flag, 703
program errors, 541, 726
PROGRAM mode, 478
Programmable Terminals
RS-232C connection example, 744
programming, 262, 271
capacity, 84
converting programs, 525
error flag, 703
errors, 541
examples, 637
instruction execution times, 503
program capacity, 84
program error information, 433
program errors, 726
remote programming, 7
saving the program, 275
See also tasks
symbols, 4
transferring the program, 262, 272
Programming Consoles, 90, 174
connecting, 91
error messages, 535
PC Setup coding sheets, 729
peripheral servicing, 475
See also Programming Devices
Programming Devices, 172
connecting, 91
connections, 55
peripheral servicing, 475
Windows, 12
protocol macros, 5, 125
system configuration, 124

R
range instructions, 9
record-table instructions, 9
refreshing
I/O refreshing, 406, 408, 475
immediate refreshing, 406, 409
IORF(097), 407, 410
Registered I/O Table, 467
Relay Network Table, 468
Relay Output Units
specifications, 108, 570
relays
Output Unit
replacement, 567
remote I/O communications
CompoBus/S, 134
SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks, 102

767

Index
Remote I/O Master Units
SYSMAC BUS, 103
Remote I/O System, 103
replacement parts, 565, 567
reserving I/O words, 379
response time
settings, 341
Restart Bits
CPU Bus Units, 427
Inner Board, 427
M-Net Interface, 400
peripheral port, 446
RS-232C port, 446
Special I/O Units, 427
SYSMAC BUS, 445
Routing Tables, 468
RS-232C port
communications error, 545
connecting a personal computer, 93
connection examples, 741–744
pin arrangement, 180
precautions, xxxiv
recommended wiring methods, 744
related flags/bits, 446, 701
settings, 326, 342, 362
specifications, 180
RS-422A Converter, 755
RUN mode, 478
RUN output, 305
specifications, 78

S
safety circuits, 278
safety precautions, xxviii
scheduled interrupts
response time, 502
setting, 216
time units, 363
self-maintaining bits, 424
sequence control instructions
execution times, 505
serial communications
communications information, 446
protocols, 120
See also communications
system configuration, 119
serial communications instructions
execution times, 520
setup
initial setup, 262
preparations for operation, 262
short-circuit protection, 322, 636–637, 642–643
simulating system errors, 434
Slave Racks

768

I/O allocations to SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks, 381, 421
I/O response time, 500
maximum current consumption, 138
SYSMAC BUS, 103
Special I/O Unit Area, 419
Special I/O Units, 84
data exchange, 388
disabling cyclic refreshing, 367
error information, 447
errors, 544
I/O allocations, 380
Initialization Flags, 427, 698
mounting, 286
Restart Bits, 427, 712
restrictions on C200H Units, 749
setup errors, 545
specifications, 111, 664
words allocated to Special I/O Units, 419, 452
special math instructions
execution times, 514
specifications, 69–70
B7A Interface Unit, 233–234
Analog Timer Unit, 258
Analog Timer Units, 111
Basic I/O Units, 572–597
C200H High-density I/O Units, 114, 664–674
C200H Special I/O Units, 114
C200H-IA121, 574
C200H-IA122, 575
C200H-IA122V, 575
C200H-IA221, 576
C200H-IA222, 578
C200H-IA222V, 578
C200H-ID211, 581, 591
C200H-ID212, 582
C200H-ID215, 665
C200H-ID216, 589
C200H-ID217, 595, 598, 634, 649, 654, 659, 662
C200H-ID218, 590
C200H-ID219, 596
C200H-ID501, 664
C200H-IM211, 579
C200H-IM212, 580
C200H-MD115 (dynamic), 682
C200H-MD115 (static), 679
C200H-MD215 (dynamic), 686
C200H-MD215 (static), 684
C200H-MD501 (dynamic), 677
C200H-MD501 (static), 675
C200H-OA221, 614–615
C200H-OA222V, 617
C200H-OA223, 616
C200H-OA224, 618
C200H-OC221, 606
C200H-OC222, 607

Index
C200H-OC222V, 608
C200H-OC223, 603
C200H-OC224, 604
C200H-OC224V, 605
C200H-OC225, 609
C200H-OC226, 610
C200H-OD211, 622
C200H-OD212, 623
C200H-OD213, 620
C200H-OD214, 635
C200H-OD215 (dynamic), 672
C200H-OD215 (static), 670
C200H-OD217, 639
C200H-OD218, 626
C200H-OD219, 630
C200H-OD21A, 643
C200H-OD21B, 646
C200H-OD411, 621
C200H-OD501 (dynamic), 668
C200H-OD501 (static), 666
C200HS-INT01, 585
communications, 136
CPU Units, 70
CS-series CPU Bus Units, 118
CS-series High-density I/O Units, 598
CS-series Special I/O Units, 111
functions, 75
general, 78
Input Units, 105
Output Units, 109
peripheral port, 179
RS-232C port, 180
Special I/O Units, 111
specificationsCJ1W-CIF11, 755
stack instructions, 9
execution times, 516
stack processing
execution times, 516
standby errors, 537
standby operating errors, 537
Startup Condition, 537
startup condition, 333
startup mode
setting, 333, 359
Step Flag, 693
step instructions
execution times, 518
subroutine instructions
execution times, 518
subroutines
execution times, 518
Support Software
See also personal computer
switch settings, 264
Analog Timer Unit, 257

Basic I/O Units, 209
C200H Expansion I/O Backplanes, 202
C200H Group-2 High-density Units, 223
C200H High-density I/O Units, 225
C200H High-density Units, 225
CPU Backplane, 197
CPU Unit, 158
CS-series Expansion Backplanes, 200
Power Supply Units, 184
See also DIP switch
symbol math instructions
execution times, 510
SYSMAC BUS
communications information, 445
error information, 438
errors, 544
I/O allocations to other Slaves, 422
I/O allocations to Slave Racks, 381, 421
I/O response time, 500
SYSMAC BUS Area, 421
SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks
description, 102
I/O allocations, 381
maximum current consumption, 138
system configuration, 69
basic, 87
Host Link, 121
NT Link, 123
serial communications, 119
SYSMAC BUS remote I/O, 102

T
task control instructions
execution times, 525
Task Error Flag, 697
Task Flags, 463
Task Started Flag, 427
tasks
description, 3
instruction execution times, 525
related flags/bits, 428
See also interrupt tasks
Task Flags, 463
terminal blocks, 311
Basic I/O Units, 209
terminal connections
See also specifications
Terminators, 203
text strings
instruction execution times, 524
instructions, 9
Timer Area, 449
timers
execution times, 506

769

Index
Too Many I/O Points error, 540
TR Area, 448
tracing
data tracing, 10
See also data tracing
Triac Output Units
specifications, 108, 570
troubleshooting, 529
overview, 10

U
Underflow Flag, 464
Units
available models, 207
classifications, 84
limitations, 103
lists, 91
user program
automatically transferring, 326
disabling, 326
User Program Date, 442

V–W
voltage
setting, 302
wiring, 262, 264, 277, 299
AC Input Units, 320
Basic I/O Units, 310
DC Input Units, 319
I/O devices, 319
I/O Units with Connectors, 312
installing wiring ducts, 283
power supply, 299
precautions, 280
interlock circuits, 279
output surge current, 322
procedure, 313
recommended RS-232C wiring methods, 744
wire size, 313
Work Area, 423
work bits, 423
work words, 423

770

Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.

Cat. No. W339-E1-17

Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code

Date

February 1999

Original production

Revised content

October 1999

Revisions and additions for version-1 CPU Units. See page 118 of the CS-series Programming Manual for a list.

May 2000

Revisions and additions as follows:
All: “CS1 High-density I/O Unit” changed to “CS1 Basic I/O Units with connectors.”
Page xi: Information on CX-Programmer and CX-Server manuals added.
Page 38: Noise immunity specification changed.
Pages 54 to 57, 84, 85, 120, and 542: Tables reworked and expanded.
Page 63: Note added on Voice Unit.
Page 67: Note added.
Page 87: Voice Unit added to top table. Model numbers added to bottom table.
Pages 122, 124, 181, and 493: CS1 Unit information added.
Pages 124 and 125: Interrupt Input Unit section reworked and section added on Highspeed Input Unit.
Page 127: Subsection moved to end of section.
Pages 132: Section reworked and moved before previous section.
Page 134: Section reworked and renamed.
Page 144: Two sections added.
Page 180: Information added for 20-terminal Units
Pages 182 and 183: Section headings changed and information added.
Page 186 to 188: Models added to diagrams and diagrams added.
Pages 188: Last line of page changed.
Page 191: Information on residual voltages added.
Page 192: Information on sensor surge current and fuse capacity added.
Page 217: Information for task flags changed.
Page 224: Information on DM area allocations for DeviceNet added.
Page 225: Note added.
Pages 292 and 293: “Host link mode” removed from default settings.
Page 459: Less than sign changed to equals sign.
Page 470: Reference to other manual added.
Page 493: Information added.
Page 545: Section starting at bottom of page redone.
Page 548: Information added to I/O interrupt task description.
Page 549: Information added.
Page 551 to 574: “Top: Min. Bottom: Max.” removed from table column heading.
Pages 550 to 554: Small table added on differentiation; ! execution times added.
Page 583: Fatal Inner Board error description rewritten.
Page 588 and 589: Part of Cause removed from non-fatal Inner Board error and low battery error.
Page 609: Tables added.
Page 611 to end of appendix: CS1 Units added.
Page 620, 621, and 622: OC222N, OC226N, and OC224N added.
Page 627 to 630: Circuit configuration diagrams corrected.
Page 630, 651, 658, and 659: Note added.
Pages 648, 651, 654 to 657, 671, 673, 680, and 682: Diagrams revised.
Page 649: Note changed.
Page 659: Last two sentences removed.
Page 754: Information added to notes.
Page 762: Information added to restrictions at bottom of page.

771

Revision History
Revision code

Date

Revised content

August 2000

Revisions and additions to add CS1 Long-distance Expansion Racks and Peripheral Servicing Mode. Specific changes are as follows:
Page xvii: “Power Supply Unit” added to mounting/dismounting warning.
Pages 4,16, 41, 48 to 51, 84, 118 to 121, 187 to 190, 292, and 613: Changes and additions for CS1 Long-distance Expansion Racks.
Pages 4, 16, 307, 313, 322, 539, 729, and 792: Changes and additions for Peripheral
Servicing Priority Mode.
Pages 45, 46, 106, and 108: Programming Console model added.
Page 51: CS1W-INT01 added (two locations).
Page 52: Headings corrected in middle of page.
Page 89: Section added on CPU Unit Setting Area capacity.
Page 100: “Etc.” replaced with “SYSMAC LINK link tables and Controller Link link tables.”
Pages 118 to 121: Weights added.
Pages 147 to 151: Information on I/O number switch removed/replaced (not used for
CS1).
Section 7: “CompoBus/D” changed to “DeviceNet” (with references left to CompoBus/D).
Page 234: Status area added to top graphic.
Page 243: Information added to note.
Page 323: Information added to top graphic.
Page 532: Table added to bottom of page.
Pages 560, 562, and 563: Note added after table.

January 2001

New products added and other changes made as follows:
Pages 59, 62, 89, 90, 94, 129, 130, 133, 135, 574, 645, 646, 648, 650, 672, 680, 682, and
686: Information added on new products.
Page 325: Paragraph below diagram changed.
Page 631: Remedy added for “Input irregularly turns ON/OFF.”
Pages 631 and 632: Replacing Unit added for 4 remedies.
Page 635: First row for “User-serviceable parts” changed.
Page 642: Model added to note following table.
Page 648: Precautions added before Basic I/O Units.

October 2001

New products added to the manual, including the new High-speed CPU Units (CS1-H
CPU Units). (Extensive changes too numerous to list.)

772

Revision History
Revision code

Date

Revised content

September 2002

“PC” was changed to “PLC” throughout the manual. “CS1” was changed to “CS Series”
where appropriate (i.e., when not referring directly to a CPU Unit). In addition, the following changes were made:
Page v: Change made to information on OMRON product references.
Page xi: Model numbers changed or added in several places.
Page xv: Precautionary information added.
Page 2: Minor change made to callouts.
Page 5: Line added before graphic.
Page 6: “CompoBus/D” added in one place.
Page 12: Wording changed in second heading.
Pages 14, 17, 348, 349, 349, 350, 402, 422: Information related to new timer/counter
instructions added.
Pages 57, 62, 64, 65, 66, 69, 72, 74, 75, 76, 77, 132: Notes added.
Pages 57, 129, 184: New section headings added.
Page 60: 32 corrected to 64 in two places.
Page 61: Information on new CPU Backplanes added.
Page 64: Information added to middle section.
Pages 67, 69, 76, 102, 143, 145, 163, 211, 262, 391, 469, 573: Information added to
tables.
Page 132: Minor changes made to information in table.
Pages 141, 144: Tables added.
Page 143: Numerical corrections made in two places.
Page 150, 162, 163, 166, 168: Page references removed.
Pages 198, 200, 201: Information reordered.
Page 233, 558, 626, 627, 628: Minor changes made to headings.
Page 256: Third table removed.
Pages 270, 277: Changes made to graphic callouts.
Pages 280, 281: Callout moved.
Page 300: Second graphic replaced.
Pages 356, 360: Changes made to explanation of I/O Hold Bit operation.
Page 377: 25 changed to 15 in bottom graphic.
Page 378: Minor change in wording.
Page 386: Information added before bottom table.
Page 387: Information added before second table.
Page 393: Numerical changes made in two places in table.
Page 395: First note removed.
Pages 400 to 425: Zeroes added before instruction codes where appropriate (i.e., to
make them three digits long.)
Page 406: Numerical corrections made in six places.
Page 454: Minor change made to wording of text before table.
Page 457: Changes made to bottom table in several places.
Page 459: Last heading removed.
Appendix A: Minor changes made to graphics and notation used for input voltage, maximum switching capacity, and external power supply throughout the Appendix.
Page 553: Information on TTL I/O Unit added.
Page 589: Change made to setting range for A406.
Page 623: Graphic replaced.

773

Revision History
Revision code

Date

Revised content

December 2003

Revisions and additions as follows:
Pages xv to xxv: PLP information updated
Page 18: Rows beginning “Operation after” corrected.
Page 34: “Peripheral bus” removed from second cell in CS-series PLCs column.
Pages 63, 242, 535, and 561: Graphic corrected.
Pages 64, 119, 126, 304, 463, 506, 551, 560, and 616: Note added.
Pages 65, 119, 250, 251, 432, and 631: Note changed.
Page 70: Section on cable restrictions added.
Page 79: “No” in SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks column corrected.
Page 124: Memory Card models corrected.
Page 125: “General-purpose” removed from bottom table.
Pages 133 and 34: Keyboard corrected.
Page 142: Information added to RUN Output section.
Pages 145, 147, 503, and 505: Sentence added to graphic.
Page 165: Model number corrected in bottom table.
Page 226: Paragraph added at top of page.
Page 234: Information added on grounding.
Page 256: Dates changed.
Pages 291 and 294: Paragraph added to bottom of page.
Page 307: Sentence added to SYSMAC BUS Area and I/O Terminal Area descriptions.
Page 322: Address corrected in note.
Page 357: Information added before note.
Page 432: Address corrected under table.
Page 434: Column added to top table.
Page 437: Multiple additions and changes made.
Page 438: “Stopped” status information changed.
Page 473: TTL I/O Unit model number corrected.
Page 474: Manufacturing number description changed.
Pages 478, 501, 502, 515, and 520: Insulation resistance test voltage changed to 500 V
DC.
Pages 524, 528, 531, 565, 566, 568, 569, 571, 572, 574, 575, 577, and 578: Alternate circuit configuration added.
Page 584: Description of A266 and A267 changed.
Page 590: “A528” added to top right of table.
Page 591: Description of A39506 and A39507 reversed.
Page 602: Description of A50014 changed.
Page 616: Sentence added at top of page.
Page 643: Appendix added.

774

Revision History
Revision code

Date

Revised content

July 2004

Revisions and additions were made throughout the manual for the functionality supported
by the version upgrade to CPU Units with unit version 3.0, including the following changes.
Pages vi to xiv: Reorganized, changed, and added information on unit versions.
Page xix: Added manuals to table.
Page 15: Added new sections 1-3-7 and 1-3-8 with information on new functionality.
Page 18: Added version upgrade information to new section 1-4.
Pages 19 and 21: Added information on function blocks.
Pages 32 and 33: Added notes.
Page 54: Changed 3049 to 3079 for SYSMAC BUS Area.
Page 66: Replaced table for CS1-H and expanded table for CS1.
Page 67: Expanded specifications table.
Page 68: Changed values for SYSMAC Bus Area.
Page 69: Added note to Holding Area.
Page 71: Added information to flash memory
Page 73: Changed information on storing comment data.
Page 85: Changed Memory Card models.
Page 88: Added information on USB connections.
Page 93: Removed note reference for CS-series Expansion Backplanes.
Page 96: Changed 5 Racks to 8 Racks in table.
Page 100: Removed note reference for CS1W-IDP01.
Page 108: Added V1 suffix to Analog Input Units.
Page 109: Added CS1W-PMV02.
Page 111: Added information.
Page 112: Updated diagram and added new information to table.
Page 113: Added new information and diagram.
Page 116: Added new information and diagrams for Serial Gateway.
Page 117: Added note.
Page 119: Added information on Host Link Master.
Page 120: Added information on protocol conversion.
Page 130: Changed current consumption from 0l11 to 0.01 for DC Input Unit.
Page 135: Added V1 suffix to Analog Input Units.
Pages 148 and 149: Changed information on memory block maps.
Pages 152, 154, 156, and 157: Added information to tables and also added information
on comment memory to 157.
Page 225: Added reference information.
Page 259: Changed diagram and added precaution.
Page 291: Added information for function blocks.
Pages 297 and 298: Added information for Serial Gateway.
Pages 327 and 328: Changed 4 to 7 in unit number range, and 3049 to 3079 in SYSMAC
BUS Area range.
Page 341: Changed 800 to 1,280 and 3049 to 3079 in SYSMAC BUS Area. Also added
note for Holding Area.
Pages 344, 345, and 367: Changed information for SYSMAC BUS Area.
Pages 346 and 370: Added note to Holding Area.
Pages 376 and 387: Added information on new words and bits to table.
Page 389: Added note for A39212 and A39204.
Page 390: Added information on new words and bits for function blocks.
Pages 467 and 474: Added information on new instructions.
Page 498: Added error information to table.
Pages 507, 508, and 510: Changes made to precautions and new precautions added.
Page 517: Added note to table.
Pages 525 and 527: Changed voltage for ON/OFF response time.
Page 534: Changed “m” to “m+1” and vice versa in terminal connections diagram.
Page 640: Added TXDU/RXDU instructions in information on A203 to A210. Also added
information for A214 to A218 to table.
Page 646: Added information on A345.
Pages 647 and 648: Added note on Serial Gateway to A39204 and A39212.
Page 650: Changed reference for A40109.
Page 663: Added information to A528
Page 664: Added information for new words A580 to A582.
Page 667: Added information for new words A720 to A749.

January 2005

Revisions and additions were made throughout the manual for functionality supported by
the C200HW-PA204C Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification, including the
following changes.
Page xx: Changed table of reference manuals.
Pages xxix, xxx, and xxxi: Added precautionary information.
Pages 11 and 18: Added information on battery replacement notification.
Pages 83, 94, 10, 140, 185, and 515: Added information to table.
Pages 84, 256: Added notes.
Pages 185 and 186: Added information on components and switch settings.
Page 187: Added dimensions diagram and information on selecting Power Supply Units.
Pages 187 and 188: Added models to tables.
Page 188: Added new sub section on battery replacement notification.
Page 273: Added wiring diagram.
Page 274: Added information on AC power source and changed table.
Page 275: Added information on alarm output.
Page 278: Added note and moved diagram to following page.
Pages 590, 591, 592, and 593: Changed fuse information in diagrams.
Pages 531 to 534: Revised information on battery replacement.

775

Revision History
Revision code

Date

November 2005

Revisions and additions were made throughout the manual to include information on the
C200HW-PD025, including the following changes.
Page 83: Column added to table and reference to note 7 added for output capacity.
Page 84: Column added to table.
Page 85: Notes 6 and 7 added, column added to table, reference to note 6 added for
safety measures, and reference to the C200HW-PD025 added to note 3.
Pages 95, 107, 142, 187, 190, 191, 287, and 527: Information on C200HW-PD025
added.
Pages 195, 377, 401, and 675: Note added.
Page 685: “VM” changed to “UM” in table.

October 2006

Revisions and additions were made throughout the manual to include information on unit
version 4.0 of the CPU Units.
Descriptions and contents were improved.
The 15-Mbyte flash memory was deleted.
Many other changes were made throughout the manual.

September 2007

Pages x and xiii: Added upgraded features for release of CX-Programmer 7.2.
Pages xix and xx: Added the CJ1H-CPU@@H-R CPU Units.
Pages 52 to 55: Added the CS1G-CPU4@H and CS1G-CPU4@-E CPU Units.
Pages 78 and 79: Corrected “E2_” to “E0” in “Extended data memory” for CPU Units supporting only one bank.
Page 86: Rewrote row for three-level communications.
Page 93: Corrected data memory capacity for the CS1G-CPU43H, CS1G-CPU42H, and
GS1H-CPU63-EV1.
Pages 99 and 172: Added Memory Card model.
Page 114: Corrected “DC” to “AC” for AC Input Unit.
Page 120 and 159: Corrected model numbers of B7A Interface Units.
Pages 121, 154, 156, 160, and 502: Added the CS1W-AD161.
Page 122: Upgraded versions of Motion Control Units and changed notes.
Page 127: Removed “High-resolution Isolated DC Input Unit” from left column and corrected model number of the High-resolution Motion Control Unit.
Page 151: Corrected model number of B7A Output Unit.
Pages 157 and 162: Removed line for CompoNet Unit in table.
Page 160: Added CompoNet Master Unit.
Page 173: Added section on Memory Card specifications.
Page 206: Added “-V1” to two Backplane model numbers.
Pages 212, 583, 619, 620, 622, 623, 625, and 628: Added “-M” to Relay model number.
Page 252: Corrected model number of C200H Basic Output Unit.
Page 301: Corrected beginning of first paragraph.
Page 302: Added information on connector brackets.
Page 445: Added paragraph at bottom of page and split table.
Page 452: Changed note for A39204.
Page 472: Added column to table, added sentence after table, changed “1 s” in diagram
and accompanying table, and added information at bottom of page.
Page 503: Added Ethernet Unit model number.
Page 574: Removed first two bulleted items and changed the next paragraph.
Page 710: Added TXDU and RXDU to function description in first row and added A21215.
Page 773: Added “(0 V).”

776

Revised content

Revision History
Revision code

Date

Revised content

December 2008

Page xix: Changed top figure.
Page xx: Updated manual names and versions.
Page xxx: Updated CLK model numbers.
Pages xxxv, 672, and 673: Removed “-E” from “NT-AL001-E.”
Page 55: Changed instruction names in last row of table.
Pages 78 and 79: Changed final Extended Data Memory address for CS1W-CPU67-EV1.
Page 79: Changed programming specification.
Page 100: Moved note.
Page 105: Changed notes.
Page 111: Corrected model numbers for C200H I/O Connecting Cables.
Page 117: Removed note.
Pages 129, 157, and 159: Removed Optical Controller Link Unit (CS1W-CLK11) and
10Base-T Ethernet Unit (CS1W-ETN11).
Page 129: Changed first note and added new note 2.
Page 152: Added Triac Output Unit.
Page 158: Changed current consumption for first row for Analog Input Units.
Page : Removed most of FL-net Unit models.
Pages 228, 229, and 231: Added model numbers and names.
Page 287: Added note.
Pages 313, 314, and 318: Redid Crimp Terminals section.
Page 321: Changed wire sizes in Wire section.
Page 326: Added “#3” to right side of top figure.
Pages 601, 602, 604, 605, 611, and 616: Added voltage to specification for internal current consumption.
Page 607: Changed specification for number of circuits.
Page 608: Removed note from table.
Page 616: Moved paragraph to note.
Page 664: Moved note to next page.
Page 672: Changed specification for fuse.
Page 683: Added reference in table to note 2.
Page 731: Changed description of A428 to A433.
Page 739: Added information above A650.
Page 787: Added “PLC memory address” to index.

September 2009

Pages xxxv, 192, and 763: Added Programmable Terminal.
Pages 100, 110, 175, 449, 450, 673, 678, 740, and 471: Added note.
Pages 110 and 293: Updated model numbers.
Pages 124 and 156: Added High-speed Counter Units and CompoNet Master Units.
Pages 127 and 148: Corrected model numbers from “C200” to “C200HW.”
Pages 150 and 157: Added information to note.
Page 195: Corrected Output column.
Pages 246 to 248: Corrected terminal numbers and corrected “output” to “input.”
Page 321: Added “/F” in top two tables.
Page 340: Added paragraph at top of page.
Pages 403 and 404: Added and reorganized notes.
Page 504: Added CompoNet Master Units.
Pages 612, 616, 671, 676, and 680: Changed note.
Page 739: Added information to top cell in Name column.

15A

December 2009

March 2010

Page xxix: Changed precaution on safety measures in external circuits.
Page xx: Versions updated in manual names.
Pages 87 to 89: Columns reorganized.
Page 87: First two rows of specifications changed.
Page 89: Last row of table changed.
Page 90: Note 6 removed and note added.
Pages 100 and 111: Rows for Power Supply Units changed.
Page 195: Table changed.
Page 199: New section added before 3-4-5 Replacement Notification.
Page 204: Information added to sections on startup time and power failure detection voltage. Note changed.
Page 205: Top table changed.
Page 308: Model restrictions added to labels in figures.
Page 309: Models added in last paragraph.l
Page 310: Models added in top table.
Page 326: Models corrected at bottom left of top figure.
Page 411: "Cleared" corrected to "Retained" in row for Task Flags.
Page 412: "Retained" corrected to "Cleared" two times in bottom right corner of top table.
Page 430: Note added.
Page 564: Models added in table.
Page 565: Model restrictions added and removed in flowchart.

777

Revision History
Revision code

Date

Revised content

March 2012

Revised entire manual to cover only CS1-H CPU Units (i.e., removed information on CS1
CPU Units.
Made the following changes.
Pages xix and xx: Updated table of related manuals.
Pages 28, 57, 59, and 60: Changed catalog number from W340 to W474 for CS/CJ
Series Instructions Reference Manual.
Page 51: Changed manual reference from W340 to W474.
Page 87: Changed specifications for inrush current.
Pages 127 and 154: Added EtherNet/IP Unit.
Pages 146 and 147: Changed values for CPU Unit in the example calculations (part of
the changes to remove the CS1 CPU Units).
Page 155: Corrected model number of the Customizable Counter Unit.
Page 187: Corrected model number of cable in middle row of second table.
Page 195: Added model numbers at top of page.
Pages 208 and 210: Added information on using CV500-COV01.
Page 309: Changed first sentence in AC Power Supply Units.
Page 326: Added information in parentheses to the bottom part of figure.
Pages 328 and 329: Added “2 required.”
Page 550: Removed screen capture and added a different screen capture and descriptions.
Page 561: Added item to right column of third row of table.
Page 569: Changed upper-middle portion of flowchart.

778

OMRON Corporation

Industrial Automation Company

Authorized Distributor:

Tokyo, JAPAN

Contact: www.ia.omron.com
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388

OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
One Commerce Drive Schaumburg,
IL 60173-5302 U.S.A.
Tel: (1) 847-843-7900/Fax: (1) 847-843-7787

OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
No. 438A Alexandra Road # 05-05/08 (Lobby 2),
Alexandra Technopark,
Singapore 119967
Tel: (65) 6835-3011/Fax: (65) 6835-2711

OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD.
Room 2211, Bank of China Tower,
200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road,
PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China
Tel: (86) 21-5037-2222/Fax: (86) 21-5037-2200

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Copy, Extract, Print high-res
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0 (Windows)
Keywords                        : W339-E1-17 0312
Create Date                     : 2012:03:06 09:17:30Z
Modify Date                     : 2012:03:14 13:46:05+09:00
Metadata Date                   : 2012:03:14 13:46:05+09:00
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 6.0
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : OMRON
Title                           : CS1G/H-CPU__H Programmable Controllers Operation Manual
Subject                         : W339-E1-17 0312
Document ID                     : uuid:acee8e82-cf4b-4b59-8f6a-2c6cd958c56b
Instance ID                     : uuid:b12c0c2c-d034-4942-aae8-ce12e7818742
Page Count                      : 818
Author                          : OMRON

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

CS1G/H CPU__H Programmable Controllers Operation Manual CS1GHMnaul

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation